operation, maintenance and monitoring plan ... - Ithaca-SHIP.org!

OPERATION, MAINTENANCE AND MONITORING PLAN 

INTERIM REMEDIAL MEASURE 

EMERSON POWER TRANSMISSION 

ITHACA, NEW YORK 

SITE NO. 7-55-010 

MARCH 31, 2009 

WSP Engineering of New York, P.C. 

11190 Sunrise Valley Drive 

Suite 300 

Reston, VA 20191 

Tel: +1 703 709 6500 

Fax: +1 703 709 8505

Contents 

1 Introduction..........................................................................................................................................1 

1.1 Facility description and history .....................................................................................................1 

1.2 Site Geology and Hydrogeology...................................................................................................2 

1.3 Fire Water Reservoir Area - Conceptual Site Model.....................................................................2 

1.4 Previous Groundwater Extraction System....................................................................................3 

2 IRM Description ...................................................................................................................................5 

2.1 Dual Phase Extraction System .....................................................................................................5 

2.1.1 Extraction Wells and Vaults ......................................................................................................6 

2.1.2 Aqueous Stream Treatment Equipment ...................................................................................6 

2.1.3 Vapor Stream Treatment Equipment ........................................................................................7 

2.1.4 Process Logic Control, Automated Equipment Actuations and Alarms ....................................7 

2.2 Operation and Maintenance Activities ..........................................................................................8 

2.2.1 Bi-Weekly Operation and Maintenance ....................................................................................8 

2.2.1.1 Extraction Well Vaults.......................................................................................................9 

2.2.1.2 Treatment Building............................................................................................................9 

2.2.2 Monthly Operation and Maintenance......................................................................................10 

2.2.2.1 General System Maintenance.........................................................................................10 

2.2.2.2 Aqueous Phase Carbon Vessels ....................................................................................10 

2.2.2.3 Air Stripper......................................................................................................................10 

2.2.2.4 Pumps.............................................................................................................................10 

2.2.2.5 Vacuum Blower...............................................................................................................11 

2.2.3 Periodic Operation and Maintenance .....................................................................................11 

2.2.3.1 General System Maintenance.........................................................................................11 

2.2.3.2 Periodic Carbon Maintenance.........................................................................................11 

3 Groundwater Monitoring Plan ..........................................................................................................12 

3.1 Purpose and Objectives .............................................................................................................12 

3.2 Monitoring Program Rationale and Well Selection .....................................................................12 

3.2.1 Affected Groundwater Distribution..........................................................................................12 

3.2.2 Aquifer Testing in B-Zone .......................................................................................................12 

3.2.3 Aquifer Testing in C-Zone.......................................................................................................13 

3.2.4 B-Zone Well Selection ............................................................................................................13 

3.2.5 C-Zone Well Selection............................................................................................................14 

3.3 Field Sampling Protocols............................................................................................................14 

i

Contents 

3.3.1 Groundwater Sampling Protocols ...........................................................................................14 

3.3.2 Quality Assurance/Quality Control Procedures and Analytical Results ..................................15 

3.4 Reporting ....................................................................................................................................15 

4 Project Contact List...........................................................................................................................17 

5 References .........................................................................................................................................18 

6 Acronyms ...........................................................................................................................................19 

Figures 

Figure 1 - Site Location 

Figure 2 - Site Layout 

Figure 3 - B-zone Quarterly Groundwater Monitoring Wells 

Figure 4 - C-zone Quarterly Groundwater Monitoring Wells 

Figure 5 - B-zone Distribution of Affected Groundwater 

Figure 6 - C-zone Distribution of Affected Groundwater 

Figure 7 - B-zone Maximum Drawdown Map (Zone of Influence) - 2006 Pump Tests 

Figure 8 - C-zone Maximum Drawdown Map (Zone of Influence) - 2008 Pump Tests 

Appendices 

Appendix A - As-Built Drawings 

Appendix B - Treatment Equipment Specifications (on CD) 

Appendix C - WSP Engineering SOPs 

ii

1 Introduction 

This document presents an Operation, Maintenance and Monitoring (OM&M) Plan for the Interim 

Remedial Measure (IRM) recently constructed to address groundwater in the area of the fire water 

reservoir at the Emerson Power Transmission Corp. (EPT) site in Ithaca, New York (the site). This 

OM&M Plan has been prepared in accordance with the Administrative Order on Consent (Index #A7- 

0125-87-09) entered into by the New York State Department of Environmental Conservation (NYSDEC) 

and EPT on July 13, 1987, and the NYSDEC approved 80% Interim Remedial Measure Design Report 

dated July 17, 2008. The IRM implemented at the site is an enhancement to the previous groundwater 

extraction and treatment system and is designed to intercept affected groundwater in the highly fractured 

bedrock (B-zone) and the horizontal bedding plane within the C-zone between 515 and 518 feet above 

mean sea level (AMSL) as well as extract groundwater from the C-zone immediately below the fire water 

reservoir. A detailed description of the IRM construction activities completed at the site is presented in 

the IRM Construction Completion Report dated March 31, 2009. The first section includes a description 

and history of the EPT facility, followed by site geology and hydrogeology, and site background 

information on remedial activities conducted for the groundwater in the fire water reservoir area. The IRM 

is described in Section 2. The groundwater monitoring plan is presented in Section 3, project contact list 

in Section 4, and references are presented in Section 5. 

1.1 FACILITY DESCRIPTION AND HISTORY 

The EPT facility is located at 620 South Aurora Street in Ithaca, New York (Figure 1). The facility 

consists of three main buildings along the northeast and southwest portions of South Hill (Figure 1). The 

buildings are located at an elevation of approximately 600 feet AMSL. The majority of the floor space is 

in the main plant building, which extends approximately 1,600 feet along the northeastern portion of the 

110-acre site. The main building is flanked by a number of smaller buildings to the southwest and access 

roads and parking lots that terrace the hillside above the plant to the east (Figure 2). Further uphill and to 

the east are South Aurora Street and the campus of Ithaca College. Undeveloped woodland borders the 

site to the southwest along the steep embankments of the hill. West Spencer Street, which runs parallel 

to the EPT property, marks the western edge of the wooded area and the base of South Hill. Beyond 

Spencer Street to the west and in areas along the steep northern approach to South Hill and the EPT 

property are residential areas. Those neighborhoods are bordered by Six Mile Creek, which flows north 

along the base of South Hill and eventually empties into Cayuga Lake approximately 2 miles northwest of 

the site. Figure 2 shows the facility layout and the surrounding areas. 

The original building at the EPT site was built in 1906 by Morse Industrial Corporation, which 

manufactured steel roller chain for the automobile industry. From approximately 1928 to 1983, Borg- 

Warner Corporation owned the property and manufactured automotive components and power 

transmission equipment using similar processes, but not necessarily the same materials, as those 

currently conducted by EPT. A more detailed description of the site history and construction dates of the 

various buildings at the site is detailed in the report entitled Onsite Assessment of the Former Borg 

Warner – Morse Chain Facility (ESC 2005). Up until the late 1970s, Borg-Warner Corporation used 

trichloroethene (TCE), a widely-used solvent at the time for cleaning and degreasing metal parts. In 

1983, Morse Industrial Corporation was purchased from Borg-Warner Corporation by Emerson and, in 

the late 1980’s, became known as Emerson Power Transmission. EPT manufactures industrial roller 

chain, bearings, and clutching for the power transmission industry. Under Emerson’s ownership, TCE 

has not been used at the Ithaca facility. Investigations conducted by Emerson in 1987 revealed onsite 

groundwater contamination, originating from a fire-water reservoir located on the western portion of the 

property. Emerson promptly reported these findings to the NYSDEC. The remediation of this 

1

contamination was the subject of the July 1987 Consent Order (Index # A7-0125-87-09) referenced 

above. 

1.2 SITE GEOLOGY AND HYDROGEOLOGY 

The EPT site is located on the northern edge of the Appalachian Plateau Physiographic Province, which 

is characterized in central New York by deeply dissected hilly uplands and glacially gouged stream 

valleys. The site lies on the limits of one of the dissected hills and overlooks the Cayuga Lake basin, 

which is formed in a former stream valley eroded and enlarged by the advance of glaciers. Underlying 

the site is a thin, discontinuous veneer of glacial till and man-made fill. The soil is classified as the “Azone” 

in the site conceptual model and hydrogeologic framework presented in the Revised Supplemental 

Remedial Program/Alternatives Analysis (SRP/AA) Report dated September 23, 2008. It is typically a 

silty or clayey gravel and ranges in depth from 2.5 to 33 feet thick, though most of the EPT site and the 

western slope of South Hill is covered by less than 15 feet of soil. Soil depths generally increase with 

decreasing elevation and eventually merge with glacio-lacustrine silt and clay that lines the bottom of the 

valley floor below South Hill. 

Beneath the overburden lies bedrock of the Ithaca Siltstone, a member of the Genesee Formation. The 

bedrock is typically well-cemented with generally non-fossiliferous beds ranging in thickness from 0.1 

inch to 2.5 feet in thickness. Previous interpretations of the site bedrock, based on core logs recovered 

from boreholes drilling during investigation activities, differentiated the rock into three zones based on the 

frequency of bedding plane fractures and joints: an upper “stress relief zone” (B-zone), a middle 

“transitional zone” (C-zone), and a lower “lithologically controlled zone” (D-zone). The uppermost B-zone 

is characterized as very highly to highly fractured weathered bedrock. Onsite the B-zone extends to a 

maximum depth of approximately 22 feet below ground surface (bgs) and has an average thickness of 

approximately 8 to 10 feet on the western portion of the site where the current remediation system is 

located. 

The transitional zone (C-zone) extends from the base of the B-zone to a maximum depth of 

approximately 55 feet bgs at the EPT site. The lower lithologically controlled zone (D-zone) extends from 

the bottom of the C-zone to a minimum depth of 145 feet bgs. According to geologic logs, bedding plane 

fractures are reportedly confined to intervals that are widely spaced, and their occurrence is controlled by 

lithology. A discussion of joint measurements and structural framework is provided in the Revised 

SRP/AA Report. 

Groundwater flow within the overburden and underlying B-zone generally mimic surface topography, 

which slopes to the northwest. Groundwater flow within the siltstone bedrock (C and D zones) is 

significantly affected by vertical and horizontal distribution of vertical joint sets and horizontal bedding 

plane fractures within the upper sections of bedrock. 

Groundwater near the fire water reservoir area is present within the overburden and bedrock. 

Overburden groundwater appears to be perched and is restricted to limited areas of the site where the 

discontinuous cover of soil is thickest. In areas where the soil cover is thin (i.e., steep slopes along 

Turner Place), the overburden or upper portion of fractured bedrock is not saturated. 

A conceptual site model for volatile organic compound (VOC)-containing groundwater associated with 

releases from the fire water reservoir and the associated transport pathways is presented in the 80% 

Interim Remedial Measure Design Report. 

1.3 FIRE WATER RESERVOIR AREA - CONCEPTUAL SITE MODEL 

The conceptual site model (CSM) developed for the EPT Ithaca site is based on available data and 

illustrates the relationship between the constituents of concern, transport pathways, potential exposure 

2

pathways including point routes, and receptors. The CSM is for VOC-containing groundwater associated 

with releases from the fire water reservoir and the associated transport pathways. 

The fire water reservoir has a capacity of 200,000 gallons and was constructed in 1906. The reservoir is 

constructed of concrete and extends approximately 19 feet bgs. Unsaturated soil is present at the fire 

water reservoir area to a depth of approximately 12 feet and is underlain by highly fractured bedrock to a 

depth of approximately 22 feet bgs. Groundwater is encountered at the soil bedrock contact at 

approximately 12 feet below bgs, which is approximately 7 feet above the base of the reservoir. The 

results of previous investigations show that the fire water reservoir is the source of solvent releases to the 

subsurface. Specifically, solvents, which were discharged to the reservoir, migrated through cold joint 

cracks in the sidewalls and possibly the base of the reservoir into the surrounding fractured bedrock (Bzone). 

The bedrock surrounding the reservoir consists of a highly jointed and fractured siltstone. 

Releases from the reservoir discharged directly into surrounding groundwater present within the fractured 

bedrock (B-zone). 

Once in the bedrock, dissolved constituents migrated horizontally with groundwater downgradient within 

the highly fractured material as well as vertically downward via open joints sets (vertical fractures) that 

intersect a prominent bedding plane fracture at the base of the C-zone. The main transport mechanisms 

for releases from the reservoir are through the vertical joint (fracture) sets and horizontal bedding planes 

in the bedrock. These migration pathways form an interconnected network for groundwater transport. 

The horizontal bedding planes (fractures) significantly decrease in frequency with depth. The vertical 

joint sets remain open and do not change with depth, but appear to terminate at lithologic contacts 

(Engelder and Geisler 1980). 

A prominent horizontal bedding plane was identified at an elevation between 515 to 518 feet AMSL (base 

of C-zone) beneath the fire water reservoir area. This nearly horizontal feature extends, at a minimum, 

laterally to the west and potentially discharges into the B-zone identified near EXB-07 located on South 

Cayuga Street. 

In the fire water reservoir area, groundwater generally occurs within the upper portion of fractured 

bedrock (B-zone) and within a bedding plane fracture encountered at 515 feet AMSL (C-zone). 

1.4 PREVIOUS GROUNDWATER EXTRACTION SYSTEM 

As detailed in the Record of Decision (December 1994), the remedy selected for the fire water reservoir 

area was 2-PHASE Extraction, which removes both groundwater and vapors from wells. This system 

consisted of five extraction wells (previously identified as EW-1, EW-3, EW-4, MW-2, and MW-31) 

installed downgradient of the fire water reservoir. The extraction wells were completed at depths of 

approximately 50 to 65 feet bgs within the C-zone. Groundwater was removed by the extraction wells 

using a high efficiency vacuum blower. Extracted groundwater and vapors were piped to an air/water 

separator to separate the air and water streams. Groundwater was subsequently treated using activated 

carbon to remove the VOCs. The air stream was vented to the atmosphere and the treated water was 

discharged to a permitted Outfall #001 located on the western portion of the facility. The system has 

been in operation since July 1996 in accordance with the Operation, Maintenance, and Monitoring 

Manual dated April 1997, and addendum pages dated July 11, 1997. 

This groundwater recovery system was evaluated based on the results of quarterly and semi-annual 

sampling events. The sampling events were conducted according to WSP Engineering’s standard 

operating procedures (SOPs), with all appropriate quality assurance/quality control measures taken 

during the events. The most recent quarterly sampling event occurred on September 4, 2008, and the 

results will be presented in the August through December 2008 Semi-Annual 2-PHASE TM Extraction 

System Progress Report #25. 

3

This system was shut down on August 27, 2008, to facilitate installation of the enhanced groundwater 

extraction and treatment system. 

4

2 IRM Description 

This section presents a description of the IRM, monitoring, and the O&M activities for the IRM dual phase 

extraction (DPE) system. 

2.1 DUAL PHASE EXTRACTION SYSTEM 

The IRM consists of a DPE system comprised of 10 extraction wells and upgraded equipment for treating 

aqueous and vapor phase streams. The groundwater extraction system consists of 10 extraction wells, 

including four new B-zone wells (EW-4-25B, EW-5-25B, EW-7-25B, and EW-10-25B), modifications of 

three existing extraction wells (EW-2-62C, EW-3-60C, and EW-6-60C), and converting three existing 

borings (EW-1-62C, EW-8-62C, EW-9-86C) to extraction wells. New treatment equipment was installed 

for treating aqueous and vapor phase streams extracted from the wells. The equipment is housed in a 

new treatment building. 

This section describes the process and mechanical components of the DPE. The basis for the design, 

calculations and assumptions are provided in the 80% Interim Remedial Measure Design Report. Further 

description of the design and as-built configuration is provided in the Construction Complete Report. The 

as-built drawings for the IRM system are provided in Appendix A. 

The major components of the system are as follows: 

• Ten extraction wells with bottom-inlet, controllerless, pneumatic pumps manufactured by QED 

Environmental Systems (Short AP2B) were installed in each extraction well to recover groundwater, 

with the exception of EW-9-86C. At EW-9-86C, which is an angled boring, an angle-independent 

3-inch diameter electric submersible pump manufactured by Grundfos ® (10SQE05100) was installed 

to pump groundwater from beneath the fire water reservoir. 

• 1-inch inner-diameter Duratec TM aluminum composite piping to convey compressed air to the wells 

and the treatment building 

• 1-1/4-inch outer-diameter (OD) Nylon 12 tubing to convey extracted groundwater to the treatment 

system 

• 2-inch and 4-inch OD high density polyethylene (HDPE) vapor conveyance piping 

• Pre-fabricated well vaults constructed of steel for each extraction well 

• One 1,000-gallon equalization tank manufactured of aluminum with inlet/outlet ports, vent, drain with 

ball valve, 4-position float switch assembly, and exterior Gould’s NPE 1 st 1ST1F5D4 1-1/2 

horsepower (hp) effluent transfer pump and appurtenances 

• Bag filtration unit consisting of six aluminum construction high-pressure bag filter vessels 

• Four tray low-profile air stripper model QED 4.4 SS capable of up to 25 gallons per minute (gpm), air 

flow of 210 standard cubic feet per minute (scfm) at 40.7 inches of water column, 4.24 hp blower fan, 

and Gould’s NPE 1 st 1ST1F5D4 1-1/2 hp effluent transfer pump and appurtenances 

• Two 250-pound liquid phase carbon vessels 

• Two 1,000-pound vapor phase carbon vessels 

• One 7.5 hp Ingersoll-Rand ® reciprocating air compressor with air dryer, particulate filter, 3-way 

solenoid valve, and pressure and temperature indicators 

• One 120-gallon air/water separator and Sutorbilt Legend ® blower (model 5LP-DSL) positive 

displacement rotary lobe blower with 20 HP Emerson motor with associated appurtenances 

5

• Allen-Bradley MicroLogix programmable logic control (PLC) based system control panel including 

web-based telemetry controller 

The locations of system components and instrumentation (e.g., flow meters, valves, gauges) are shown 

on the process and instrumentation diagram and building layout plan provided as Sheets 5 and 6. A 

description of the main system components and operation, including the extraction wells, water and 

vapor treatment processes, and PLC is presented below. Technical specifications for each major system 

component are provided in Appendix B. 

2.1.1 Extraction Wells and Vaults 

The groundwater extraction network with vapor recovery, or DPE system consists of nine extraction 

wells, designated EW-1-62C, EW-2-62C, EW-3-60C, EW-6-60C, EW-8-62C, EW-4-25B, EW-5-25B, EW- 

7-25B, and EW-10-25B containing pneumatic pumps to recover groundwater. An air compressor located 

in the treatment building supplies pressurized air to the pneumatic pumps that facilitates removal of 

groundwater from the extraction well. The down well tubing at each extraction well is of Nylon 12 

material. Each set consists of 5/8-inch OD discharge, 3/8-inch OD air supply, and 1/2-inch OD air 

exhaust. The air exhaust tube is vented to the vapor recovery system within the extraction well. 

Groundwater from extraction well EW-9-86C is recovered by an electrical submersible pump. Each 

extraction wellhead is housed in a pre-fabricated well vault constructed of steel and is sealed watertight. 

The pipe headers enter and exit the wellhead vault through a 6-inch-diameter poly carrier pipe. The 

headers connect to each wellhead via a lateral pipe connection. Different sized vaults were installed 

depending on the number of entrance and exit points required and also depending on whether the vault 

contains two wellheads. 

The water line tubing in each well vault is connected to a header within each vault. A valve is located on 

the water line tubing for flow control and isolation. A pressure indicator was installed on the water 

conveyance laterals to monitor for pressure buildup indicative of line obstruction. Down well air supply 

tubes are connected to the header in the same manner with a ball valve on the tubing. Extracted vapors 

are conveyed from the well to the vapor header line by a steel lateral pipe teed off the extraction 

wellhead. Flow from the lateral is regulated with a ball valve and vacuum relief valve. A vacuum gauge 

is also located at each extraction wellhead. 

2.1.2 Aqueous Stream Treatment Equipment 

Groundwater pumped from the wells is conveyed to a 1,000-gallon equalization aluminum holding tank 

located inside the treatment building. The tank is outfitted with a discharge port and cleanout port on the 

bottom of the tank. The bottom port allows for periodic cleanout of suspended solids that accumulate in 

the tank. A Gould’s NPE 1 st 1ST1F5D4 1-1/2 hp effluent transfer pump is located adjacent to the tank to 

convey water through the bag filter units. The pump is controlled by a set of water level sensors/switches 

that are supported in the sight glass of the tank to facilitate automatic pump “on” and “off” control of the 

water accumulated in the tank. The tank will equalize the influent flow and minimize downstream cycling 

of system components by providing a reservoir of water to be treated. If the water level within the 

equalization tank reaches the “high” level alarm condition, the system will shut-down. O&M personnel will 

respond to this alarm by interfacing with the web-based PLC. Additionally, the tank is outfitted with a port 

and piping that connects to the influent piping of the vacuum blower to evacuate accumulated vapors in 

the tank. Another port with a valve was installed to allow ambient makeup air to enter the tank to avoid 

damaging the tank through the application of a vacuum. 

Once the equalization tank fills to approximately 850-gallons, the water is pumped through a series of six 

bag filters (two sets of three in series) to eliminate suspended solids. The water influent line to the bag 

filtration units is outfitted with a water pressure indicator and sample ports before and after the units. The 

PLC display allows for the pressure level to be monitored via the internet to anticipate system bag filter 

change outs to alleviate high pressure buildup. Following the bag filtration units, the water is conveyed to 

6

a low profile tray air stripper equipped with a sump, discharge pump, and blower. The air stripper sump 

is outfitted with a series of high and low level switches that will actuate the Gould’s NPE 1 st 1ST1F5D4 1- 

1/2 hp effluent transfer pump, the American Fan Company cast aluminum pressure blower, and provide 

shutdown capability in case of malfunction. In addition, if the blower shuts down or malfunctions, the 

system will discontinue operation. 

After treatment by the low profile tray air stripper, the water is pumped through two 250-pound liquid 

phase granular activated carbon (GAC) units. The carbon units are outfitted with pressure indicators 

before and after each unit to monitor pressure buildup. In addition, sample ports are located before and 

after each unit. 

The treated effluent is then discharged via a 4-inch OD pipe to the existing State Pollution Discharge 

Elimination System (SPDES) discharge Outfall #001 located along the footpath in accordance with the 

SPDES permit. 

2.1.3 Vapor Stream Treatment Equipment 

Vapor is removed from each extraction well by the application of a vacuum to the wellhead. Extracted 

vapor is conveyed via HDPE pipe into the treatment building. The vapor stream enters a 120-gallon 

air/water separator to facilitate separation of moisture from the vapor stream. Liquids removed from the 

vapor stream are conveyed by a Moyno 35601 progressive cavity transfer pump to the equalization tank 

for aqueous treatment. The air/water separator is outfitted with a series of high and low level switches 

and alarms wired to the PLC that actuate the transfer pump or shutdown the system in case of 

malfunction. 

Vapors are conveyed by a Sutorbilt Legend ® (model 5LP-DSL) positive displacement rotary lobe blower 

with 20 HP Emerson motor. The blower is capable of producing 300 scfm at 10 inches of mercury (Hg) at 

the blower inlet. Air flow and vacuum transmitters, sample ports, and pressure and vacuum gauges are 

installed on the separator and blower unit piping to allow for proper operation of the system. The blower 

is wired to shut off in case of high pressure or vacuum in the air line. Vacuum relief valves are located at 

the inlet of the vacuum blower and at each wellhead to set the design system vacuum and to prevent 

excessive vacuum if air flow is not present at a specific wellhead. The flow and vacuum at each wellhead 

will be determined in the field during operation of the system. 

The recovered vapor stream is treated by two 1,000-pound vessels of vapor phase GAC in series before 

entering a Universal Silencer (model RD-8) exhaust silencer and exiting the building via a discharge 

stack to the atmosphere. In addition to the recovered vapor stream, the air stripper effluent vapor stream 

tees into the recovered vapor stream prior to the GAC vessels. 

2.1.4 Process Logic Control, Automated Equipment Actuations and Alarms 

Automatic actuation of the remedial system equipment is achieved using a PLC-based system control 

panel with a web-based telemetry controller. The PLC will automatically turn off the entire system in the 

event of certain predefined alarm conditions and notify WSP Engineering personnel immediately by email 

via a mobile device. The PLC also features remote interface and emergency stop capabilities from 

designated stations controlled by WSP Engineering personnel. 

Two sets of water level sensors are used to actuate the equipment during normal operation of the 

treatment system. As discussed above, a level switch high (LSH) is activated within the equalization tank 

once the water level within the tank rises to a predefined level. The activation signal causes the PLC to 

power the first water transfer pump and convey water to the filtration bag units, air stripper, and GAC 

units for treatment. Once the water level has been lowered, triggering the second switch, level switch low 

(LSL), the PLC is signaled to turn the transfer pump off. Once the LSL is reached the PLC sets the air 

stripper blower on a 15-minute cycle to allow adequate treatment time of water already past the first 

water transfer pump. A similar set of water level switches are also installed on the low profile air stripper 

7

sump and SVE air/water separator. The air stripper sump level switches actuate the second water 

transfer pump. A similar level switch is installed on the air/water separator to convey water in the 

separator to the equalization tank. 

Numerous alarm conditions are built into the treatment system and controlled by the PLC. The alarms 

include the equalization tank, the air stripper sump, air/water separator tank, blower vapor line, the 

interior leak detection sump, and the aqueous phase GAC units. Triggering any one of the alarms in the 

aqueous stream (i.e. the equalization tank, bag filter skid, and air stripper) will immediately shutdown the 

entire system and then notify WSP Engineering personnel as discussed above. To minimize system 

downtime, alarms associated with the air/water separator and vacuum blower will only shut down the 

vapor stream and not shut down the aqueous stream. The aqueous stream will continue to operate and 

WSP Engineering will be notified of the malfunctioning equipment on the vapor recovery skid. 

In addition to the equalization tank LSH described above, an additional water level switch, level switch 

high high (LSHH), is located above the LSH. In the event of a failure of the LSH, the LSHH will signal the 

PLC and the entire treatment system will shut down to avoid a tank overflow that might have otherwise 

occurred. The level switch low low (LSLL), when tripped by a failure of the LSL and continued water level 

decline, sends an alarm condition to the PLC that also shuts down the system to prevent the effluent 

pump from losing prime, drawing air, and possibly over heating. The air stripper and air/water separator 

sumps are similarly equipped with LSLL and LSHH sensors and alarms. 

A high vacuum switch is located on the inlet vapor recovery line to indicate if there is a blockage in the 

line causing high vacuum. If this switch is activated, the vacuum blower will shut off by a signal from the 

PLC. 

To safeguard against equipment leaks, a sump located at the center of the treatment building’s concrete 

slab and is equipped with a LSHH. When activated by water accumulation in the sump, the LSHH sends 

an alarm condition to the PLC and the entire treatment system will be shut down. 

Additionally, if an alarm is triggered from the aqueous stream process, the PLC actuates the normally 

closed solenoid valve on the air supply line to halt airflow between the air compressor and the pneumatic 

pumps. 

A high pressure switch is located between the inlet to the aqueous phase GAC units and the second 

water transfer pump. If the switch is activated, the solenoid valve on the air supply line will close and the 

aqueous and vapor stream will be shut down via a signal from the PLC. The pressure at which the switch 

is triggered will be set by WSP Engineering after initial pressure drops are seen through newly installed 

GAC units. 

2.2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE ACTIVITIES 

In order to verify that the system is operating satisfactorily, O&M personnel will conduct bi-weekly site 

visits (weekly during the first month of operation). WSP Engineering may elect to reduce the frequency of 

site O&M visits based on system performance. The following activities are conducted as part of the 

system monitoring. Some of these activities will be performed during each site visit while others will be 

performed periodically. 

2.2.1 Bi-Weekly Operation and Maintenance 

The following treatment system components must be checked during every site visit. While maintenance 

may not be required during every site visit, continued monitoring is necessary to ensure proper system 

performance. 

8

2.2.1.1 Extraction Well Vaults 

• Open each well vault and visually observe the vault interior. 

• Check all instrumentation and exercise valves by opening and closing them. 

• Check that adequate pressure is being provided to the pneumatic pumps by recording the air 

pressure gauge reading. 

• Record the vacuum reading from the vacuum line header. 

• Record the water pressure reading from the water pipe lateral to ensure there is no blockage in the 

water pipe. 

• Adjust the air relief valve, if necessary, to maintain the design vacuum at the wellhead. 

• Record the pump stroke displacement data and air line cycle flow counter associated with the 

pneumatic pump. 

• Verify the heat tape is functioning and pipe insulation is intact. 

• Remove any accumulated water from the vault and clear the weep drain if obstructed. 

2.2.1.2 Treatment Building 

• Inspect each equipment skid and associated piping for leaks and disconnections. 

• Manually turn the system on to observe the transfer pumps and listen for unusual sounds. 

• Observe the flow meters for proper operation by checking the instantaneous flow measurement. If 

the flow meters appear to be inoperable, clean the flow meter in accordance with the manufacturer’s 

recommendations. 

• Check the stainless steel mounted 4-position float switch assembly in the equalization tank to 

observe it is hanging properly and free from obstruction. Also observe the groundwater contained in 

the equalization tank. Make notes of any unusual odors, floating debris, water clarity, the amount of 

solids on the bottom of the tank, etc. 

• Visually observe and clean, as necessary, the inlet wye strainer to the transfer pump for the 

equalization tank and air stripper sump. 

• Record the pressure readings associated with the bag filter units. Clean and/or replace bag filters as 

necessary. 

• Observe the operation of the air stripper including the blower, transfer pump, and associated 

appurtenances. Inspect the trays of the air stripper for accumulated sludge. Clean trays as 

necessary to maintain design performance of the air stripper. 

• Record the pressure readings before and after each liquid and vapor phase activated carbon unit. 

• Visually inspect the PLC to ensure it is functioning properly; check for any alarm conditions and 

address as necessary. 

• Inspect sump in treatment building to ensure it is free of liquid and debris; clean, if necessary. If liquid 

is present, determine source. 

• Ensure exhaust fan, heaters, or louvers are operational, depending on season. 

• Check piping entrance into building for damage or leaks. 

• Inspect outside of treatment building for damage to vapor exhaust stack, gutters, doors, 

infrastructure, fencing, electric panel, etc. 

9

• Check the satellite drum (personal protection equipment and bag filters) for leaks and fastened the 

drum lid tightly. 

2.2.2 Monthly Operation and Maintenance 

Manufacturer requirements for monthly operation and maintenance of specific system components are 

described below. 

2.2.2.1 General System Maintenance 

• Check air compressor oil level in the sight glass. 

• Inspect compressor inlet filter. 

• Inspect compressor moisture separator. 

• Inspect flow sensors. 

• Inspect magnahelic differential pressure gauges; disconnect the magnahelic pressure gauge to 

atmosphere and re-zero, if necessary. 

2.2.2.2 Aqueous Phase Carbon Vessels 

• Collect before, between, and after water samples on a monthly basis to monitor carbon vessel 

performance. 

• Monitor backpressure to determine if blockage is occurring in each vessel. 

2.2.2.3 Air Stripper 

• Check operating amps of blower motor. 

• Inspect air inlet screen and clean if required. 

• Record magnahelic gauge reading for reference. 

• Collect influent and effluent samples (effluent air stripper sample is the same as influent aqueous 

phase carbon sample); WSP Engineering may elect to change the frequency, the sample locations, 

and/or the total samples collected based on system operation. Any modifications to the sampling 

program will be transmitted to the NYSDEC for approval before implementation. 

• If the magnahelic gauge on the stripper sump becomes high or effluent samples are below efficiency 

criteria for the air stripper, disassemble and clean trays; also check mist eliminator for fouling. 

2.2.2.4 Pumps 

Electric Submersible 

• Check operating amps of pump motor. 

• Inspect probe; clean if required. 

Pneumatic Submersible 

• Check effluent from pump for excessive air discharge. 

• Inspect tubing. 

• Check particulate filter. 

• Check membrane dryer for debris. 

10

Transfer Pumps 

• Check motor coupling; tighten if necessary. 

• Check operating amps of transfer pump motor. 

• Inspect shaft seal for leakage. 

2.2.2.5 Vacuum Blower 

• Inspect and clean the vacuum blower inline particle filter; replace when pressure drop reaches 10 to 

15 inches water column above the initial pressure drop. 

• Inspect and clean the vacuum blower dilution air filter; replace when pressure drop reaches 10 to 15 

inches of water column above the initial pressure drop. 

• Determine if the vacuum blower needs an oil change or lubrication based on the run time of the 

motor. 

2.2.3 Periodic Operation and Maintenance 

Periodic operation and maintenance that will be put forth by WSP Engineering to correspond with 

manufacturer requirements are described below. 

2.2.3.1 General System Maintenance 

• Remove dirt and grease from air compressor exterior. 

• Remove dirt and grease from vacuum blower exterior. 

• Inspect and clean compressor motor TEFC air ventilation slots to prevent clogging and starving the 

motor of cooling air. 

• Inspect the vacuum blower and clean the compartment vent guards, dampers, motors, and propellers 

as necessary to prevent decreased airflow and overheating motor. 

• Inspect fan blades and bolts for tightness (including exhaust silencer). 

2.2.3.2 Periodic Carbon Maintenance 

Aqueous carbon vessels are monitored for breakthrough by a combination of water samples collected 

before, between, and after the vessels, and by monitoring water pressure on the vessels. When carbon 

change-out is necessary, the spent GAC in the vessels will be removed by a vacuum truck or similar 

means and containerized in 55-gallon United States Department of Transportation-approved drums for 

proper disposal. It is anticipated that each carbon vessel will require two drums to handle the spent 

carbon, and it is anticipated that if both vessels are changed simultaneously, four drums of material will 

be generated. The carbon vessels will be refilled with a suitable reactivated GAC fill material. The 

specifications of the fill material will be reactivated GAC material, but may change if sampling results 

indicate a different material is necessary. 

Vapor carbon vessels will be changed in a similar manner when it is necessary. The vapor carbon 

vessels will be refilled with virgin carbon material to match original fill material, unless system 

performance indicates that reactivated GAC is sufficient. It is anticipated that each vapor carbon vessel 

will require five drums to accommodate the waste material. 

All waste generated from carbon change-out activities will be disposed of according to local, state, and 

federal hazardous waste disposal requirements through the EPT facility. 

11

3 Groundwater Monitoring Plan 

3.1 PURPOSE AND OBJECTIVES 

The purpose of this groundwater monitoring plan is to present the strategy for evaluating and monitoring 

the effectiveness of the IRM system. As detailed in the 80% Interim Remedial Measure Design Report, 

the IRM objectives are to (1) intercept contaminated groundwater flow from the highly fractured and 

interconnected bedrock (B-zone) and from the horizontal bedding plane fractures at the base of the C- 

zone between 515 and 518 feet AMSL; and (2) reduce the concentrations of VOCs in the subsurface by 

extracting both aqueous and vapor phases for treatment. This groundwater monitoring plan includes 

sampling and water level gauging of seven groundwater monitoring wells completed in the B-zone 

(Figure 3; MW-1B, MW-4B, MW-5B, MW-7B, MW-8B, MW-23B, and MW-32B) and five open borehole 

wells completed in the C-zone (Figure 4; EXB-1, EXB-2, EXB-7, EXB-9, and EXB-10). Only groundwater 

elevation gauging will be conducted in wells MW-20B, MW-30B and MW-44T (Figures 3 and 4) to provide 

additional controls on hydraulic capture. In addition, to monitor VOC concentrations in groundwater 

within the center of the affected area, groundwater samples will be collected from extraction wells EW-5- 

25B and EW-6-60C for analysis annually. 

3.2 MONITORING PROGRAM RATIONALE AND WELL SELECTION 

The monitoring program consists of quarterly sampling and water level gauging of select groundwater 

monitoring wells completed within the B-zone and C-zone near and downgradient of the fire water 

reservoir. The wells were selected based on the hydraulic responses noted during the aquifer pumping 

tests conducted in 2006 and 2008 as well as analytical data collected over time from each well within 

affected area. The following is a brief summary of the affected groundwater distribution near the fire 

water reservoir and the pumping tests conducted in the B- and C-zones. 

3.2.1 Affected Groundwater Distribution 

The distribution of groundwater containing site-related VOCs (total VOCs) is shown in Figures 5 and 6. 

Figure 5 shows the extent of affected groundwater in the B-zone which extends from the fire water 

reservoir source area to a distance of approximately 300 feet to the north; affected groundwater extends 

to a maximum downgradient width of 120 feet. Figure 6 shows the extent of affected groundwater in the 

C-zone, which extends from the fire water reservoir source area to a distance of approximately 270 feet 

to the north; affected groundwater extends to a maximum downgradient width of 360 feet. 

3.2.2 Aquifer Testing in B-Zone 

The constant-rate pumping and recovery tests conducted in 2006 in well MW-3B determined that the 

water levels stabilized within the pumping well within 40 to 60 minutes into the test. Drawdown fluctuated 

around 3.5 feet below the starting level. Response in the B-zone wells was observed during pumping in 

the B-zone (Figure 7); however, little to no hydraulic response was observed in the C-zone wells. A 

summary of the key results from the constant rate test are presented below: 

• Approximately 1.4 feet of drawdown was measured in monitoring well MW-5B, which is located 22 

feet to the southwest of the pumping well. 

• Approximately 0.6 foot of drawdown was measured in MW-1B, which is located 93 feet to the 

northeast of the pumping well. 

• Approximately 0.2 foot of drawdown was measured in MW-2B, which is located 16 feet north of the 

pumping well. 

12

• A drawdown of 1.9 feet was measured in observation well MW-3-13 (A-zone well), suggesting a 

hydraulic connection between the A- and B-zones. 

• Little to no response was observed in the C-zone wells, indicating no direct hydraulic connection. 

• Calculated radius of cross-gradient capture for each B-zone well is listed below: 

- MW-3B = 40 feet 

- MW-5B = 15 feet 

- MW-1B = 5 feet 

The test data demonstrated that an elliptical drawdown area reflects the horizontally anisotropic nature of 

the B-zone water-bearing zone. The B-zone is equivalent to a porous media where the upper portion of 

bedrock is highly fractured and jointed. In areas where it is less jointed, the aquifer responds as a 

fracture flow system with both primary and secondary porosity. 

The results of the pumping test conducted in the B-zone were used in selecting appropriate wells to 

monitor the effectiveness of the IRM system. 

3.2.3 Aquifer Testing in C-Zone 

During the constant rate pumping testing conducted in the C-zone in 2008, hydraulic responses were 

observed in the majority of the C-zone wells monitored (Figure 8). This included well EXB-07, which is 

located over 130 feet downgradient of the pumping well (EXB-06/EW-8-62). No measurable drawdown 

was detected in the upgradient observation well EXB-02. A summary of the key results from the constant 

rate test are presented below: 

• The extraction rate in the pumping well EXB-06 ranged from 0.30 to 0.40 gpm throughout the 

pumping phase of the test, with an average rate of 0.35 gpm. 

• Approximately 4.3 feet of drawdown was measured in cross-gradient exploratory boring EXB-05, 

which is located 135 feet to the northeast of the pumping well. 

• Approximately 4.2 feet of drawdown was measured in cross-gradient exploratory boring EXB-10, 

which is located approximately 80 feet to southwest of the pumping well. 

• Approximately 1.5 feet of drawdown was measured in downgradient exploratory boring EXB-07, 

which is located approximately 140 feet to the north. 

• Approximately 0.85 foot of drawdown was measured in D-zone well EXB-11, which is located north of 

EXB-06. 

The test data demonstrated that an elliptical drawdown area primarily reflects the horizontally anisotropic 

nature of the C-zone. Over 370 feet of cross-gradient influence was observed and over 130 feet of 

downgradient influence was observed with respect to the pumping well. The data indicated that the 

predominant source of flow within the C-zone is from the open bedding plane fractures, which respond 

significantly under pumping conditions. 

The results of the pumping test conducted in the C-zone were used in selecting appropriate wells to 

monitor the effectiveness of the IRM system. 

3.2.4 B-Zone Well Selection 

The wells selected to monitor the groundwater within the B-zone are shown in Figure 3 and include MW- 

1B, MW-4B, MW-5B, MW-7B, MW-8B, MW-23B, and MW-32B. The selected wells are screened in the 

intensely fractured B-zone bedrock (typically between 10 and 20 feet bgs) and correlate with the B-zone 

extraction wells (EW-4-25B, EW-5-25B, EW-7-25B, and EW-10-25B). These selected wells will be used 

to demonstrate hydraulic capture and long-term reduction of VOC mass in the groundwater within the B- 

13

zone. Additionally, groundwater elevation data will be collected from two monitoring wells (MW-20B and 

MW-30B) located downgradient of the remediation area to provide additional data related to hydraulic 

capture. 

To evaluate the effectiveness of the IRM on groundwater near the center of the affected area (where 

VOC concentrations are highest), a groundwater sample will be collected from one extraction well on an 

annual basis. The following activities will be conducted during one quarterly event to collect a 

representative groundwater sample from extraction well EW-5-25B which is located near the center of the 

affected area (Figure 5). 

• Shut off the vacuum blower on the IRM system. 

• Under pumping conditions, gauge the water levels in all monitoring and extraction wells included in 

the monitoring program. 

• Shut off the pumps within the extraction wells. 

• Allow extraction wells to recharge (approximately 24 hours) to collect a groundwater sample from 

extraction well EW-5-25B and all other wells in the quarterly monitoring program. 

• At the completion of sampling, restart IRM system. 

3.2.5 C-Zone Well Selection 

The wells selected to monitor the groundwater within the C-zone are shown in Figure 4 and include EXB- 

01, EXB-02, EXB-07, EXB-09, EXB-10. Each of these wells are completed as open borehole wells within 

the open interval intersecting the C-zone, and each well is open across the target bedding plane fracture 

located at approximately 515 feet AMSL. A water sample will be collected from each well and analyzed 

for VOCs to evaluate the reduction in VOC-concentrations in groundwater within and downgradient of, 

the remediation area. In addition, water levels will be measured in each well to monitor the hydraulic 

response of the C-zone created by operating the IRM system. Monitoring well MW-44T, also completed 

in the C-zone, will only be used to collect water level data to provide additional control on hydraulic 

capture outside the main remediation area. 

To evaluate the effectiveness of the IRM on groundwater near the center of the affected area (where 

VOC concentrations are highest), a groundwater sample will be collected from one C-zone extraction well 

on an annual basis. The following activities will be conducted during one quarterly event to collect a 

representative groundwater sample from extraction well EW-6-60C which is located near the center of the 

affected area (Figure 6). 

• Shut off the vacuum blower on the IRM system. 

• Under pumping conditions, gauge all monitoring and extraction wells included in the monitoring 

program. 

• Shut off the pumps within the extraction wells. 

• Allow extraction wells to recharge (approximately 24 hours) to collect a groundwater sample from 

extraction well EW-6-60C and all other wells in the quarterly monitoring program. 

• At the completion of sampling, turn the IRM system and pumps back on. 

3.3 FIELD SAMPLING PROTOCOLS 

3.3.1 Groundwater Sampling Protocols 

Before initiating any sampling activities, depth-to-groundwater measurements will be taken at each 

location. All B-zone monitoring wells will be purged of a minimum of three well volumes before sampling. 

14

Measurement of pH, conductivity, dissolved oxygen (DO), turbidity, temperature, and oxidation-reduction 

potential (ORP) will be obtained at least three times (beginning, middle, and end) during the well purging 

process. These parameters will be allowed to stabilize before sample collection begins. If the well is 

purged dry, samples will be collected upon sufficient recharge. Groundwater samples will be collected 

from each monitoring well using dedicated disposable polyethylene bailers. Bailers will be lowered slowly 

into the wells to avoid agitating the water. 

Following water level gauging of the C-zone monitoring wells, each well will be sampled following lowflow 

sampling procedures as described in SOP 3b (Appendix C). During sampling, the low-flow sampling 

pump intake will be lowered to the corresponding depth measured in each well in order to collect the 

sample directly from the bedding plane fracture (515 feet AMSL). Measurements of pH, conductivity, DO, 

turbidity, temperature, and ORP will be recorded every 3 to 5 minutes, or until parameters stabilize, 

during purging activities to ensure that representative groundwater quality samples are collected. 

Groundwater samples collected from each monitoring well will be submitted to a New York State certified 

laboratory for analysis of VOCs using U.S. Environmental Protection Agency Test Method 8260B. Quality 

assurance/quality control (QA/QC) samples, including equipment blanks, trip blanks, and duplicates, will 

be collected in accordance with SOPs (Appendix C). All samples will be sealed, labeled, and placed in a 

cooler with ice for shipment to an offsite analytical laboratory. Appropriate chain-of-custody procedures 

will be followed. 

3.3.2 Quality Assurance/Quality Control Procedures and Analytical Results 

QA/QC samples collected during each quarterly sampling event, including trip blanks, equipment blanks, 

and field duplicates in accordance with SOPs. Trip blanks are samples used to identify possible sample 

contamination originating from sample transport, shipping, or site conditions. Trip blanks will be labeled, 

documented, and handled in the same manner as other field samples. Equipment blanks will be 

collected and used as a QC check of the decontamination procedures for the low flow pump. The 

equipment blanks will be collected by rinsing the cleaned equipment with analyte-free water, collecting 

the rinsate in the appropriate sample containers, and submitting to the laboratory for analysis of the same 

parameters as the groundwater samples. The equipment blanks will be labeled, documented, and 

handled in the same manner as the other field samples. Field duplicate samples will be collected to 

evaluate sample variability. One duplicate sample per 20 field samples will be collected per quarter. 

All samples will be sealed, labeled, and placed in a cooler with ice for shipment to the laboratory. 

Appropriate chain-of-custody procedures will be followed, and the laboratory data sheets with signed 

chains-of-custody will be completed following each sampling event. 

Before initiating field activities, field personnel will perform a reconnaissance of the work areas. A PID 

will be used during the site walkover to assess hazards and determine background concentration of 

organic vapors within the breathing zone. 

3.4 REPORTING 

The results of the quarterly monitoring program will be detailed in a semiannual progress summary report 

and submitted to the NYSDEC. Each report will describe the quarterly groundwater sampling procedures 

and sampling results from the previous 6 months. They will also detail the hydraulic response of the B- 

and C-zones, and the distribution of affected groundwater. . 

In addition to summarizing system related O&M items, the progress reports will include: 

• sampling methods 

• tables and graphs showing groundwater analytical results 

• groundwater monitoring data log sheets 

15

• water level data and drawdown information 

• figures showing well locations and drawdown data from the B-zone and C-zone 

• figures showing distribution of affected groundwater in the B-zone and C-zone 

• laboratory analyses from each quarterly sampling event 

• a QA/QC validation report 

16

4 Project Contact List 

The operation and maintenance of the IRM system include the following key project personnel identified 

below: 

WSP Engineering of New York Site Chief Engineer: Todd Musterait, P.E. 716-675-6067 

WSP Engineering of New York Task Managers: Karen Beljan/Scott Petersen 315-655-3900 

WSP Environment & Energy Project Manager: Jim Bulman 703-709-6500 

Emerson Contact: Derek Chase 866-265-0634 

17

5 References 

Environmental Strategies Consulting LLC. 2005. Onsite Assessment Former Borg Warner – Morse Chain 

Facility, 620 South Aurora Street, Ithaca, New York 

New York State Department of Environmental Conservation. 1994. Record of Decision for the Morse 

Industrial Site Inactive Hazardous Waste Site, Ithaca, Tompkins County, New York. December. 

Radian Corporation. 1990. Final Report; Remedial Investigation Stages 1 and 2; Emerson Power 

Transmission (EPT), Ithaca, New York. February. 

WSP Engineering of New York, P.C. Construction Completion Report. Emerson Power Transmission, 

Ithaca, New York. March 31, 2009. 

WSP Environment & Energy. 2008. 80% Interim Remedial Measure Design Report. Emerson Power 

Transmission, Ithaca, New York. July 17, 2008. 

WSP Environmental Strategies. 2007. Supplemental Remedial Investigation Report, Emerson Power 

Transmission, Ithaca, New York. December. 

18

6 Acronyms 

AMSL 

bgs 

CSM 

DO 

DPE 

EPT 

GAC 

gpm 

HDPE 

Hg 

hp 

IRM 

LAH 

LSH 

LSHH 

LSL 

LSLL 

NYSDEC 

OD 

O&M 

OM&M 

ORP 

PLC 

QA/QC 

scfm 

SOP 

SPDES 

SRP/AA 

SVE 

TCE 

VOC 

above mean sea level 

below ground surface 

conceptual site model 

dissolved oxygen 

dual-phase extraction 

Emerson Power Transmission 

granular activated carbon 

gallons per minute 

high density poly ethylene 

mercury 

horsepower 

Interim Remedial Measure 

level alarm high 

level switch high 

level switch high high 

level switch low 

level switch low low 

New York State Department of Environmental Conservation 

outer-diameter 

operation and maintenance 

Operation, Maintenance and Monitoring 

oxidation-reduction potential 

process logic control 

quality assurance/quality control 

standard cubic feet per minute 

standard operating procedure 

State Pollution Discharge Elimination System 

Supplemental Remedial Program/Alternatives Analysis 

soil vapor extraction 

trichloroethene 

volatile organic compounds 

19

Figures

k:\client\emerson\ithaca\phase i\ figure 1.doc 

Site Location 

Reference 

7.5 Minute Series Topographic Quadrangle 

Ithaca East, New York 

Photorevised 1976 Scale 1:25,000 Metric 

N 

Quadrangle Location 

Scale in Meters 

Scale in Feet 

11190 SUNRISE VALLEY 

DRIVE, SUITE 300 

RESTON, VA 20191 

(703) 709-6500 

Figure 1 

Site Location 


Ithaca, New York

Appendix A - As-Built Drawings

DESIGNATION DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATIONS MANUFACTURER 

T-211 EQUALIZATION TANK 1,000 GALLON ALUMINUM, FLAT-TOP, ROUND STORAGE TANK ESD 

P-211 EQUALIZATION TANK TRANSFER PUMP 1.5 HP MODEL:1ST1F5D4 GOULDS 

PF-221 TO PF-226 BAG FILTERS SIX - ALUMINUM WATER FILTER HOUSINGS, MAX 200 GPM/100 PSI, MODEL: 156112-75 PENTEK 

AS-601 AIR STRIPPER 4-TRAY, LOW PROFILE, MODEL: 4.4SS QED 

B-601 AIR STRIPPER BLOWER 210 CFM, STATIC FAN PRESSURE: 40.7 " WC, MODEL: 2408 THE NEW YORK BLOWER COMPANY 

P-601 AIR STRIPPER TRANSFER PUMP 1.5 HP MODEL:1ST1F5D4 GOULDS 

T-611, T-612 GRANULAR ACTIVATED CARBON 250 LB-EACH, AQUEOUS PHASE GRANULAR ACTIVATED CARBON, MODEL:RLHP-250 ESD 

AW-201 AIR/WATER SEPARATOR 120 GALLON MOISTURE SEPARATOR TANK, RATED FOR 29 INHG ESD 

P-201 AIR/WATER SEPARATOR TRANSFER PUMP 1.5 HP, PROGRESSIVE CAVITY PUMP, MODEL: 5VD28 MOYNO 

B-201 VAPOR EXTRACTION BLOWER 

20 HP, SUTORBILT ROTARY POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT LOBE BLOWER, MODEL: 5LP-DSL 

BLOWER MODEL: 5LP-DSL, MOTOR MODEL:BJ09 

GARDNER DENVER/EMERSON 

T-201, T-202 GRANULAR ACTIVATED CARBON 1000 LB - EACH, VAPOR PHASE GRANULAR ACTIVATED CARBON UNITS ESD 

ES-201 EXHAUST SILENCER MODEL: RD-8 UNIVERSAL SILENCER 

AC-101 AIR COMPRESSOR 7.5 HP, BLOWER MODEL: 2475N7.5, MOTOR MODEL: ELT7E1D INGERSOLL-RAND/EMERSON 

AD-101 REFRIGERATED AIR DRYER 24.7 CFM, MODEL: D42IN INGERSOLL-RAND 

EW-9-86C EXTRACTION WELL 9-86C 0.5 HP, MODEL: 10SQE05100-NE GRUNDFOS 

(A): ABBREVIATIONS: HP = HORSEPOWER; GPM = GALLONS PER MINUTE; PSI = POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH 

" W.C. = INCHES OF WATER COLUMN; LB = POUND; " HG = INCHES OF MERCURY; CFM = CUBIC FEET PER MINUTE

Well ID (a) 

Top of Casing 

Elevation 

(feet amsl) 

State Plane 

Coordinates (NAD-83) 

Northing 

Easting 

Total Depth 

(feet amsl) 

(b) 

Bentonite Plug Interval 

(feet bgs) (b) 

Grout Interval 


Filter Pack Interval 


Screen Interval 


Location of Pump 

Intake 

(feet amsl) (c) 

Location of Pump 

Actuation Level 

(feet amsl) (e) 

Static 

Groundwater Level 

(feet amsl) (f) 

EW-1-62C (EXB-05) 565.26 886285.60 843159.95 504.59 Open Borehole: 4" Diameter 

506 507.7 531.64 

EW-2-62C (EW-1) 564.73 886255.15 843119.30 502.68 Open Borehole: 6" Diameter 

504 505.7 532.23 

EW-3-60C (EW-2) 563.39 886223.35 843108.21 504.24 40.00 - 43.00 0.00 - 40.00 43.00 - 60.00 45.00 - 60.00 506 507.7 524.52 

EW-4-25B 562.75 886221.29 843107.29 539.04 10.00 - 13.00 0.00 - 10.00 13.00 - 25.00 15.00 - 25.00 541 542.7 552.78 

EW-5-25B 563.30 886196.14 843100.60 539.49 10.00 - 13.00 0.00 - 10.00 13.00 - 25.00 15.00 - 25.00 541 542.7 555.04 

EW-6-60C (EW-3) 562.63 886194.81 843099.51 503.99 Open Borehole: 6" Diameter 

505 506.7 531.64 

EW-7-25B 561.68 886176.33 843084.17 538.28 10.00 - 13.00 0.00 - 10.00 13.00 - 25.00 15.00 - 25.00 540 541.7 551.36 


503 504.7 533.12 


508.6 (d) NA 535.07 

EW-10-25B 561.75 886158.34 843068.65 538.04 10.00 - 13.00 0.00 - 10.00 13.00 - 25.00 15.00 - 25.00 540 541.7 549.50 

(a) Well ID's in parenthesis are former well ID's. 

(b) Total depth and all well interval measurements are approximate. 

(c) The location of the pump inlets are approximately 1-foot off the bottom of the well (applies to all wells except EW-9-86C). Intake value is a rounded elevation. 

(d) The top loading electric pump at EW-9-86C (angled well) was placed with the inlet at approximately 90-feet 6-inches btoc. 

(e) QED Environmental Systems Inc. AP-2 Bottom Inlet, Short (AP2B) AutoPump minimum actuation level = 20-inches (applies to all wells except EW-9-86C). 

The actuation level is based off of the approximate location of the pump intake. 

(f) Static groundwater levels were taken on February 9, 2009, with the exception of EW-9-86C. A static groundwater level was taken in September 2007 for EW-9-86C. 

(g) Abbreviations: amsl = above mean sea level; btoc = below top of casing; bgs = below ground surface; NAD = North American Datum of 1983; NA = Not Applicable.

Appendix B - Treatment Equipment Specifications (on 

CD)

MID-ATLANTIC 

ENVIRONMENTAL 

EQUIPMENT 

GROUNDWATER 

REMEDIATION 

SYSTEM 

JOB# 12869

WARNING 

Insure Coupling / Pipe 

Does Not Turn 

While Installing Fittings 

To Systems 

Severe Damage May Occur 

Internally

Start-up Procedures 1 

Engineering Drawings 

Control Logic 

Load Summary 

Components List 

SVE 2 

Air Compressor 3 

Air Stripper 

Control 4 

Misc. System Comp. 5 

Safety 6 

Warranty 7 

Maintenance 8

Section 1 

START UP 

PROCEDURES 

ENGINEERING 

DRAWINGS 

CONTROL LOGIC 

LOAD SUMMARY 

COMPONENT LIST

INSTALLATION & START UP PROCEDURES 

ESD # 12869 

1) Read the entire manual before operating this system. The manual contains specific 

information about the equipment on this system. 

2) Place the building/skid on a solid, level surface. Level and anchor the 

building/skid in accordance with all applicable codes. 

3) Connect the field piping to system piping and ensure all valves are open/closed 

per process and instrumentation diagrams numbered. 12869-2-01-12869-2-03 

Close all petcocks and sample ports. 

4) A qualified electrician in accordance with the National Electric Code, local codes 

and regulations should perform electrical work. Short circuit protection should be 

provided according to the total “Load Summary” of the system. This system 

requires 480 VAC 3 -phase power with neutral and ground. 

NOTE: Connect AC power with the high voltage leg on phase B in 

accordance with NEC Article 384-3(f). Refer to the electrical wiring 

diagrams in this manual for electrical integration. If required, connect the 

site telephone line to the system controller. 

5) Turn all control panel switches to the “OFF” position and ensure that the main 

power disconnect and the system safety switch, if equipped, are in the “OFF” 

position. 

6) Place the circuit breakers in the “ON” position and depress the “START” button 

on each motor protector. 

7) Turn on power at the main power disconnect then apply power to the system by 

placing the system safety switch in the “ON” position. Momentarily turn on each 

component to ensure proper rotation. If required, have a qualified electrician 

correct rotations. 

Fill the main sump and pump out chamber of the air stripper to the mid 

point on the sight glass with potable and prime the transfer pumps before 

bringing the system on line. 

8) Turn the switch labeled “A/S BLOWER B-601” to the “AUTO” position. Adjust 

the blower intake damper so that the pressure at PDI-601 is approximately 6” 

H 2 O. Refer to section labeled “Air Stripper” to determine maximum hydraulic 

rates for the air stripper. Air strippers are normally designed based on 

concentration levels and not water flow rates. Prior to introducing process water 

determine the maximum flow based on your specific site concentrations. 

Turn the switch labeled “PUMP P-601” to the “AUTO” position. When water 

reaches the high level sensor in the air stripper pump out chamber, P-601 will 

automatically pump the water to the discharge point. Adjust valve labeled to 

achieve optimum flow to discharge. Refer to section labeled “Pump” to determine 

recommended maximum flow and pressures. (Continued on next page)

8) Continued 

After “PUMP P-201” has cycled and filled the air stripper, adjust the blower 

intake damper so that the pressure at PDI-601 is approximately 15” H 2 O. 

Fill the air/water separator to the mid point on the sight glass with potable 

water and prime the transfer pump before bringing the system on line. 

9) Ensure valves labeled are open. Turn switch labeled “SVE Blower B-201” to 

the “AUTO” position. After the blower has reached operating speed, adjust well 

valves as required to achieve the desired vacuum at the wells and adjust GV201 

as required to achieve optimum blower performance. Check section labeled 

“SVE” to identify maximum vacuum prior to adjusting valves. Operating blower 

at higher than recommended vacuum can cause higher than desirable amperages 

on drive motor. 

10) Refer to the Control Logic Description in this section for detailed information 

about the control and fault/alarm sensors and their operational sequence. Utilizing 

the P&ID, Electrical drawings, and Control Logic Description check each alarm 

condition to ensure each condition responds as designed. 

11) Monitor the system and check operating parameters for satisfactory performance. 

Refer to the equipment performance curves in the system manual. 

12) Routine maintenance is essential for proper system operation and should be 

performed on a regular basis. Sample maintenance forms are included in section 8 

of the system manual. These forms represent an absolutely minimal maintenance 

routine. Component specific maintenance requirements are located throughout 

the manual. 

13) The system manual includes individual equipment and component specifications 

and adjustment procedures necessary for initial start up and regular maintenance. 

14) If there are any problems with or questions about your system, we will be glad to 

help you resolve them. Please call our toll free number 1-800-277-3279. 

1-800-277-EASY

SHIP LOOSE FOR INSTALLATION ON 

SITE 

FERNCO 

8" X 3' PVC 

FERNCO 

FERNCO 

4" PVC 

PROVIDED BY CUSTOMER (NOT EXACTLY SURE OF DETAILS, DWG 

FOR EXAMPLE ONLY), TO BE INSTALLED ON SKID, ON SITE. 

INSTALL ON SKID AND SHIP 

?" PVC 

**BUILDING EQUIPMENT AND CONTROL PANEL** 

0-60PSI 

PI 

6402 

P 

6401 

NOTES FOR OUTPUT: 

FLOWRATE & PRESSURE = 10GPM @ ?' 

HORSEPOWER = ? 

VOLTAGE & PHASE = 460V, 3ph, TEFC 

FULL-LOAD AMPS = ? 

?" PVC 

2" ELBOW 

W/ KC 

NIPPLE - 

SHIPPED 

LOOSE, 

TO BE 

GLUED 

OR 

MODIFIED 

ON SITE 

DRAIN PIPED TO 

OUTSIDE W/ 1" FNPT 

FITTING 

0-50"WC 

PDI H 

6401 L 

1" PVC 

2" PVC 

1"WC 

PSL 

6401 

LG 

6401 

TO 4" FERNCO 

AIR 

STRIPPER 

AS-6401 

2" FNPT 

2" PVC 

FERNCO 

NOTES FOR AIR STRIPPER: 

MATERIAL OF CONSTRUCTION = 

NUMBER OF TRAYS = 

IMMERSION HEATER = 

**USE PVC STRAIN-RELIEFS WHERE 

BALL FLOATS ENTER STRIPPER** 

INLET TRAP TO BE AT 

LEAST 2' ABOVE LSHH 

4" PVC 

level switch assy supplied 

by customer 

STAINLESS STEEL 

4 

NO 

NOTES FOR OUTPUT: 

FLOWRATE & PRESSURE = 210SCFM @ 35"WC 

HORSEPOWER = 5 

VOLTAGE & PHASE = 460V, 3ph, TEFC 

FULL-LOAD AMPS = 6.25 

0-60"WC 

PI 

6401 

B 

6401 

INLET SCREEN 

NOTES FOR AIR STRIPPER BLOWER: 

- COVER INLET W/ WIRE MESH AND SHOULD 

HAVE ELBOW DOWN. IF SPACE IS LIMITED, 

AIM AT 45DEG. 

- DRILL AND TAP A 1/4" HOLE IN BOTTOM OF 

NYB AND PLUG W/ 1/4" PLUG 

- PIPE INLET TO OUTSIDE IN COLD-WEATHER 

CLIMATES 

JUNCTION BOX 

TO BE LOCATED ON 

EQUIPMENT SKID. 

**WIRING AND SPECIAL PROJECT NOTES** 

WIRING TO BE GENERAL PURPOSE, ACCORDING 

TO NEC FOR INDOORS. 

PIPING DETAILS: 

- WATER FLOW METERS: PROVIDE 10 DIA. OF STRAIGHT PIPE BEFORE AND 5 DIA. OF STRAIGHT PIPE AFTER METERS. ENSURE THAT THROTTLING VALVES ARE NOT DIRECTLY IN LINE WITH 

METERS. 

- AIR FLOW METERS: PROVIDE 8 DIA. OF STRAIGHT PIPE BEFORE AND 3 DIA. OF STRAIGHT PIPE AFTER METERS, IF POSSIBLE. AVOID TEES AND ELBOWS BEFORE AND AFTER METERS. 

- MATERIALS OF VALVES AND FITTINGS TO BE THE SAME AS THE DESCRIPTION AT THE LINE. IF THERE IS A TRANSITION FROM PVC TO STEEL, THE VALVE SHOULD BE BRASS. 

- THERE ARE NO SPECIAL PIPING REQUIREMENTS OTHER THAN WHAT IS EXPLAINED ON THE DIAGRAM. 

- WHEN PVC HOSE IS SPECIFIED, ALWAYS USE VACUUM HOSE; USE GREEN HOSE FOR PRESSURES LESS THAN 60PSI; USE TANK TRUCK HOSE FOR PRESSURES BETWEEN 60PSI AND 150PSI. 

- PVC PIPE MAY BE SUBSTITUTED WITH EQUAL-SIZED PVC HOSE WHERE A FLEXIBLE CONNECTION IS PREFERRED. 

THIS INFORMATION IS THE PROPERTY OF 

MAEE INC. AND CANNOT BE REUSED OR 

REPRODUCED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN 

CONSENT OF MID-ATLANTIC 

ENVIRONMENTAL EQUIPMENT INC. 

C 

B 

A 

MAR 4,09 

FEB 12, 09 

FEB 06,09 

WJD 

WJD 

WJD 

AS BUILT MODIFICATION 

FOR PRODUCTION 

FOR APPROVAL 

DWG. NO: 

TITLE: 

CUSTOMER: 

50561 -01 (PAGE 1 OF 2) 

PROCESS & INSTRUMENTATION DRAWING 

ITHACA, NY. 

WSP ENVIRONMENTAL STRATEGIES LLC

VALVES AND PIPING 

EQUIPMENT 

EQUIPMENT 

INSTRUMENT DESIGNATION 

SYSTEM POSITION DESIGNATION 

NO 

BALL VALVE - 

GATE VALVE - 

GLOBE VALVE - 

NEEDLE VALVE - 

SLIDE VALVE - 

SOLENOID VALVE - 

BUTTERFLY VALVE - 

SWING CHECK VALVE - 

WAFER CHECK VALVE - 

SPRING CHECK VALVE - 

WYE STRAINER - 

SAMPLE PORT - 

PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE - 

VACUUM RELIEF VALVE - 

CAMLOCK CONNECTION - 

FERNCO 

FERNCO CONNECTION - 

FLEXIBLE CONNECTION - 

FLANGED CONNECTION - 

REDUCER - 

UNION - 

ADSORBENT FILTER - A 

drain 

NC 

AIR STRIPPER 

OIL/WATER SEPARATOR 

VAPOR/LIQUID, SEAL FLUID SEPARATOR 

BAG FILTER 

CARBON VESSEL 

PRODUCT STORAGE DRUM, TANK 

CENTRIFUGAL PUMP - 

PROGRESSIVE-CAVITY PUMP - 

CHEMICAL-INJECTION PUMP - 

CENTRIFUGAL, REGENERATIVE BLOWER - 

POSITIVE-DISPLACEMENT BLOWER - 

ROTARY-CLAW BLOWER - 

LIQUID-RING PUMP - 

ROTARY-VANE COMPRESSOR - 

RECIPROCATING COMPRESSOR - 

HEAT EXCHANGER - 

PASSIVE COOLING FINS - 

EQUIPMENT 

AS - AIR STRIPPER 

BLD - BUILDING, TRAILER OR SKID 

FLT - FILTER VESSEL 

LPC - LIQUID-PHASE CARBON VESSEL 

MFD - MANIFOLD 

OWS - OIL/WATER SEPARATOR 

OX - OXIDIZER 

PST - PRODUCT STORAGE TANK 

SOS - SEAL OIL SEPARATOR 

SWS - SEAL WATER SEPARATOR 

TNK - TANK 

VLS - VAPOR/LIQUID SEPARATOR 

VPC - VAPOR-PHASE CARBON VESSEL 

A 

B 

C 

D 

E 

F 

G 

H 

I 

J 

K 

L 

M 

N 

O 

P 

Q 

R 

S 

T 

U 

V 

W 

X 

Y 

Z 

CYCLE 

INPUT 

FLOW 

GAS (LEL) 

CURRENT 

LEVEL 

PRESSURE 

SPEED 

TEMPERATURE 

POSITION 

1st MODIFIER 2nd MODIFIER 3rd MODIFIER OUTPUT 1st MODIFIER 

ALARM 

BLOWER 

COMPRESSOR 

DIFFERENTIAL 

AIR DRYER 

QUANTITY 

INSTRUMENT IDENTIFICATION 

- INDICATING INSTRUMENT 

- DIGITAL INPUT TO CONTROL PANEL 

- DIGITAL INPUT CAUSING ALARM 

GAUGE 

** 

- DIGITAL INPUT CAUSING SYSTEM SHUTDOWN ALARM 

- ANALOG INPUT TO CONTROL PANEL 

INDICATOR 

SWITCH 

TRANSMITTER 

- ANALOG OUTPUT FROM CONTROL PANEL 

HIGH 

LOW 

HAND 

MOTORIZED 

PNEUMATIC 

SOLENOID 

FAN 

HEATER 

PUMP 

VALVE 

A 

B 

C 

D 

E 

F 

G 

H 

I 

J 

K 

L 

M 

N 

O 

P 

Q 

R 

S 

T 

U 

V 

W 

X 

Y 

Z 

100 - VACUUM INLET MANIFOLD 

300 - INLET HEAT EXCHANGER 

400 - VAPOR/LIQUID SEPARATOR 

500 - VAPOR/LIQUID SEPARATOR - 2 

700 - SOIL-VAPOR EXTRACTION 

1000 - LIQUID-RING PUMP 

1300 - SVE HEAT EXCHANGER 

1600 - VAPOR-PHASE CARBON 

1900 - OXIDIZER 

2200 - AIR SPARGE 

2500 - SPARGE HEAT EXCHANGER 

2800 - SPARGE OUTLET MANIFOLD 

3100 - AIR COMPRESSOR 

3400 - COMPRESSED-AIR OUTLET MANIFOLD 

3700 - PNEUMATIC WELL PUMPS 

4000 - SUBMERSIBLE WELL PUMPS 

4300 - SURFACE-MOUNT WELL PUMPS 

4600 - GROUNDWATER INLET MANIFOLD 

4900 - OIL/WATER SEPARATOR 

5200 - PRODUCT STORAGE TANK 

5500 - INLET TANK 

5800 - UPSTREAM BAG FILTER 

6100 - CHEMICAL INJECTION 

6400 - AIR STRIPPER 

6700 - PRE-CARBON BAG FILTER 

7000 - LIQUID-PHASE CARBON 

7100 - PRE-MEDIA BAG FILTER 

7200 - ACTIVATED ALUMINA 

7300 - DISCHARGE TANK 

7400 - POST-TREATMENT BAG FILTER 

7600 - REINJECTION 

7900 - BUILDING,TRAILER OR SKID 

8200 - CONTROL PANEL 

8500 - ELECTRICAL PARTS 

9900 - EXTRAS 

COALESCING FILTER - 

drain 

EXAMPLE 

SETPOINT OF INSTRUMENT 

PARTICULATE FILTER - 

FILTER, SILENCER - 

PRESSURE REGULATOR - 

drain 

OXIDIZER 

CHEMICAL DRUM 

FLOW MEASUREMENT 

RANGE 

H 

PDI 

101 L 

INSTRUMENT TYPE 

30"WC 

PSH 

701 

INSTRUMENT DESIGNATION (PRESSURE SWITCH HIGH; 

SEE TABLE ABOVE) 

SYSTEM POSITION NUMBER (SOIL-VAPOR EXTRACTION; 

SEE DESCRIPTION ABOVE) 

REGULATOR W/ FILTER - 

AVERAGING PITOT TUBE - 

H RANGE 

PDI 

L 101 

VENTURI - 

STANDARD, CONICAL-BOTTOM TANK 

ROTOMETER - 

RANGE 

FI 

101 

WATER FLOW METER - 

FQI 

101 

THIS INFORMATION IS THE PROPERTY OF 

MAEE INC. AND CANNOT BE REUSED OR 

REPRODUCED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN 

CONSENT OF MID-ATLANTIC 

ENVIRONMENTAL EQUIPMENT INC. 

C MAR 4,09 WJD AS BUILT MODIFICATION 

B FEB 12,09 WJD FOR PRODUCTION 

A FEB 06,09 WJD FOR APPROVAL 

DWG. NO: 

TITLE: 

CUSTOMER: 

50561 -01 (PAGE 2 OF 2) 

P&ID LEGEND 

ITHACA, NY 

ENVIRONMENTAL STRATEGIES, LLC

scale bar, each block is 12" long 

** civil construction notes ** 

**mech./elect. ass'y notes ** 

- Refurbish stripper prior to assembly of 

system. 

- Provide new sight glass tube on stripper to 

suit customers level switch - See engineer 

for description of customers level switch 

-Locate equipment exactly as shown by 

dimensions on drawing 

pump and pump piping 

supplied by customer, 

already assembled on site. 

for this reason, it is even 

more important than usual 

that the rest of the 

system on this skid must 

be built identical to this 

layout. 

2 pieces of 1- 5 8" x 5' 

uni-strut c/w 4 bolt 

assy's and 6 squirrel nuts 

to ship Loose to assist w/ 

pump installation on site: 

jnctn box - supplied by customer 

effluent air 

influent water 

Water outlet 

Drain / Level 

Gauge 

- vibration isolators under equipment. 

- maximum width for shipping is 102". this 

includes all connections that protrude 

through the sides of the enclosure. 

effluent water 

*** commissioning notes *** 

- inlet and outlet piping connections will 

need to be fitted to existing lines on site. 

- total height of system from grade to top 

of check valve on stripper is 100". height of 

air discharge, from ss flange on top of 

stripper to top of check valve is 22" 

*** dimension information *** 

description dim (l x w x h) weight 

skid 

6'x5'x8.5' 2750 

flow direction 

electrical connection 

flow into the page 

flow out of the page 

this area represents 

service space required 

this information is the property 

of mlee inc. and cannot be reused 

or reproduced without the written 

consent of mle equipment inc. 

C mar-4-09 wd 

as built modification 

B1 feb-18-09 wd for production - revised 

B feb-12-09 wd for production 

A feb-6-09 wd 

for approval 

50561- 02 

system layout 

ithaca, ny. 

WSP Environmental Strategies

Electrical Load Summary 

Project Name: Mid-Atlantic Equipment / Emerson Power Transmission Facility Created By: DSH 

Project Number: 12869 

Engineering: 

System Voltage/Phase: 480/3 

Manufacturing: 

Drawing Number: 12869-7-01 

Quality Control: 

Date: 09/18/08 

NAME OF MOTOR LOAD 

H/P 

VOLT/ 

PHASE 

LINE-1 

AMPS 

LINE-2 

AMPS 

LINE-3 

AMPS 

NEUT. 

AMPS 

PER 

NEC 

TABLE 

AIR COMPRESSOR AC-101 7 1/2 480/3 11.0 11.0 11.0 - 430-250 

S.V.E. BLOWER B-201 20 480/3 27.0 27.0 27.0 - 430-250 

TRANSFER PUMP P-201 1 1/2 480/3 3.0 3.0 3.0 - 430-250 


AIR STRIPPER BLOWER B-601 5 480/3 7.6 7.6 7.6 - 430-250 


ADDER PER NEC ARTICLE 430-24. 6.8 6.8 6.8 

LIGHTING AND POWER LOADS 

TRANSFORMER 3KVA 480/1 6.3 6.3 

ADDER PER NEC ARTICLE 220-3. 1.6 1.6 

TOTAL LOAD 69.2 61.4 69.2 

NOTE: This document is to be used only for calculating feeder short circuit protection and sizing motor feeder circuit conductors as needed. 

Individual motor overload protection must be sized according to motor nameplate only. 

Filename: 12869-7-01 LOAD SUMMARY

Page 1 of 3 

COMPONENT LIST 

PROJECT #: 12869 R1 (10-1-2008) 

CLIENT NAME: MID ATLANTIC ENVIRONMENTAL 

PROJECT NAME: EMERSON POWER TRANSMISSION FACILITY 

LINE NO. P&ID ESD / MFR. SERIAL 

NO. REQ. LABEL DESCRIPTION AND SPECIFICATIONS PART NUMBER NUMBER 

- WELL PUMPS 

1 1 P701 

GRUNDFOS 10SQE05100-NE PUMP & 1/2 HP MOTOR, 230 V, 1 

PHASE 

10SQE05100-NE 

2 100 P701 SANTOPRENE JACKETED 3 WIRE MOTOR LEAD (PER FOOT) 

3 100 P701 3/16" STAINLESS STEEL SUPPORT CABLE (PER FOOT) 

4 100 P701 1" TANK TRUCK HOSE, CHEMICAL RESISTANT (PER FOOT) HCXL 

- SENSORS 

5 2 PT101, 

601 

PRESSURE TRANSMITTER 626-12-GP-P1-E3-S1 

6 1 VT201 VACUUM TRANSMITTER 616-10 

7 1 PSLL601 

DIFFERENTIAL AIR PRESSURE SWITCH (OR VACUUM SWITCH), 

XP, 4 TO 20 " WATER 

1910-20 

- PROBES 

LSHH, 

8 1 LSH, LSL, 4 FLOAT MULTI-LEVEL PROBE, CUSTOM FOR AW201 (AWS 120) DWG. #MLP-04 

LSLL201 

9 1 

LSHH, 

LSH, LSL, 4 FLOAT MULTI-LEVEL PROBE, CUSTOM FOR T211 (EQ 1000) DWG. #MLP-04 

LSLL211 

10 1 

LSHH, 

LSH, LSL, 4 FLOAT MULTI-LEVEL PROBE, CUSTOM FOR AS601 (AS 3-2-1) DWG. #MLP-04 

LSLL601 

- SKIDS 

4' X 6' X 4" SKID, ALUMINUM CONSTRUCTION, TREADBRITE 

11 1 SK211 DECKING, FORKLIFT SLOTS AND 4 EACH TABS FOR ANCHORS 

NONE 

AS SHOWN ON DRAWING #12869-X-XX 

12 1 SK601 


DECKING, FORKLIFT SLOTS AND 4 EACH TABS FOR ANCHORS 

NONE 

AS SHOWN ON DRAWING #12869-X-XX 

13 1 SK101 



NONE 

AS SHOWN ON DRAWING # 12869-X-XX 

14 1 SK201 



NONE 

AS SHOWN ON DRAWING # 12869-X-XX 

- FLOWMETERS AND TOTALIZERS 

15 3 FT202, 

221, 601 

SIGNET TRANSMITTER WITH 4-20 MA OUTPUT, FIELD MOUNTED 3-8550-1 

16 3 FT201, 

211, 601 

INTEGRAL ADAPTER KIT 3-8051 

17 3 FT202, 

221, 601 

SIGNET INTEGRAL FLOW SENSOR FOR 1/2" TO 4" PIPE 

3-8510-P0 

18 3 FT202, 

221, 601 

SIGNET T-ASSEMBLY, 2" PVC 

PV8T020 

ERDCO 4" ALUMINUM SEE-FLO FLOWMETER*CONNECTIONS: 

19 1 FI/FT201 

150# FLANGED, CARBON STEEL SHUNT*GLASS WINDOW*BUNA- 

N O- RING*LEFT TO RIGHT FLOW DIRECTION, 50 TO 500 CFM, 4- 

3611-16F5 

20 MA OUTPUT 

- VALVES 

20 1 BFV601 BUTTERFLY VALVE, 6", SCH80 PVC, EPDM SEAL 5456-060 

21 1 BV206 HALF UNION BALL VALVE, 1", SCH80 PVC, GEORGE FISHER 18-003 161.354.344 

22 10 

BV205, 

211, 212, 

221, 222, 

223, 224, 

HALF UNION BALL VALVE, 2", SCH80 PVC, GEORGE FISHER 18-005 161.354.347 

601,611, 

612 

23 1 BV101 BALL VALVE, 1", BRASS 18-002 NTFP600NG 

24 1 CV602 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVE, 1" 18-009 6NN91 

25 2 CV202, 

211 

BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVE, 2" 18-011 6NN93 

26 1 CV201 CHECK VALVE, 4" 19-0-0 

27 2 GV203, 

601 

GATE VALVE, 1", BRASS 18-006 6NN97 

28 3 GV201, 

211, 202 

GATE VALVE, 2", BRASS 18-008 6NP01 

29 3 WS201, 

211, 601 

WYE-STRAINER, 2", BRONZE, THREADED ENDS 

1RNB9

30 1 PSV201 

ADJUSTABLE VACUUM RELIEF VALVE 2" SPRING TYPE, SET AT 

11" HG, WITH HIGH-VACUUM SPRING (ROTRON 523230 WITH 

SPRING) 

3-WAY SOLENOID VALVE, NORMALLY CLOSED, 120 V, CLASS F, 

31 1 SV101 155 DEGREES COIL, 120 VAC, BUNA SEAL, BRASS HOUSING, 1" 

FPT, 1" ORIFICE, 0 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE 

- CAMLOCKS 

32 6 T611, 612 

KAM LOCK, 1", TYPE C, HOSE BARB x FEMALE CAMLOCK, 

POLYPROPYLENE 

33 5 T611, 612 

KAM LOCK, 1", TYPE F, MPT x MALE CAMLOCK, 

POLYPROPYLENE 

34 30 T601, 602 

1" GOODYEAR HORIZON AIR AND WATER HOSE-40-190 

DEGREES F (PER FOOT) 

VRV-H 

J/CGC-100-PP 

J/CGF-100-PP 

HABG1200 

35 4 4" ID RUBBER HIGH TEMP HOT AIR BLOWER HOSE, PRICE/ FT. J/4425-0400-100 

36 4 B201 4" HOSE BARB X MPT PLAIN STEEL 

- GAUGES 

37 3 VI201, VACUUM INDICATOR, 0-30" Hg VACUUM, BACKMOUNT, LIQUID 

202, 203 FILLED 

14-007 900 

38 2 PI203, 204 PRESSURE INDICATOR, 0-55" H2O, BACKMOUNT P342 

39 11 

PI202, 

211, 221, 

222, 223, 

224, 225, 

226,603, 

611, 612 

PRESSURE INDICATOR, 0-100 PSI, BACKMOUNT, LIQUID FILLED 14-004 904 

40 1 PI101 PRESSURE INDICATOR, 0-200 PSI, BACKMOUNT, LIQUID FILLED 906 

41 1 TI201 TEMPERATURE INDICATOR, 50-500 °F, 2-1/2" STEM, 1/2" NPT 14-010 T30025-B11 

42 1 TI101 TEMPERATURE INDICATOR, 50-300 °F, 2-1/2" STEM, 1/2" NPT T30025-B9 

43 3 PI201, 

601, 602 

2050 MAGNEHELIC 0-50" H2O 2050 

- FILTRATION, ETC. 

44 6 

PF221, 

222, 223, 

224, 225, 

226 

45 2 (25 

LOOSE) 

PENTEK ALUMINUM WATER FILTER HOUSING MODEL 2" 

INLET/OUTLET 

PENTEK BAG FILTERS, #2 20/PK 25 MICRON 

4BB26 

4BE14 

Page 2 of 3 

- AIR STRIPPER 

46 1 AS601 

AIR STRIPPER 2-3-4 WITH 3 EACH 2" COUPLINGS FOR WATER 

INLET, WATER OUTLET, MANUAL DRAIN. COUPLINGS FOR 

STANDARD SIGHT GLASS, 6" AIR INLET /OUTLET AS PER 

DRAWING 12869-X-XX 

47 1 AS601 CLEAR WELL ASSEMBLY NONE 

48 1 AS601 

EMERSON MOTOR, 5 HP, 460 VAC, 3 PH, TEFC, 184T FRAME, 

CATALOG # S5E1D 

3450 RPM 

MODEL # S936 

49 1 B601 

AF-15 BLOWER HOUSING, MOTOR SIDE & 8" INLET SIDE 

HOUSING. 

30-002 24023 & 24019 

50 1 B601 AF-15 DAMPER, 8", FULL CUT-OFF ASSEMBLY 30-007 63654 

51 1 B601 AF-15 BLOWER BASE 30-011 

52 1 B601 AF-15 BASE PLATE 30-013 

53 4 B601 BLOWER BOLTS 

54 1 B601 1105, AF-15 FAN BLADE WHEEL, CAST ALUMINUM, BORE 1-1/8" 30-005 R15550 

- TANKS 30-005 

55 1 T211 CLEAR WELL ASSEMBLY NONE NONE 

56 1 T211 

EQUALIZATION TANK (ROUND, FLAT TOP), 1,000 GALLON, 3/16" 

ALUMINUM CONSTRUCTION WITH 3" FPT INLET, 2" FPT PUMP 

OUT OUTLET, 2" MANUAL DRAIN, 1" VENT, 18" MANWAY ON SIDE 

AND CONNECTIONS FOR CUSTOM MULTILEVEL PROBE, 

FITTINGS AND ORIENTATION PER DRAWING 12869-X-XX (5.5' 

DIAMETER X 6' HEIGHT) 

- AIR COMPRESSORS 

57 1 AC101 

IR COMPRESSOR PACKAGE, MODEL 2475N7.5 WITH, ACAC, 

LOW LEVEL SWITCH, 115 V AUTO DRAIN, 80 GALLON VERTICAL 

TANK, 25 CFM @ 175 PSI, LESS DRIVE MOTOR, LESS MOTOR 

STARTER 

58 1 AD101 REFRIGERATED AIR DRIER D42IN 

59 1 PF101 PRE-FILTER F25121-400 

60 1 CF101 COALESCING AFTER FILTER F25121-300 

61 1 PCV101 PRESSURE REGULATOR 00165035 

62 1 AC101 

EMERSON MOTOR, 7. 5 HP, 460 VAC, 3 PH, TEFC, 184T FRAME, 

CATALOG # ELT7E1D 

3450 RPM 

MODEL 

- TRANSFER PUMPS

Page 3 of 3 

63 2 

GOULDS NPE, 1ST1F5D4, SIZE 1" X 1.25"-6, 4.750 IMPELLAR, 1.5 

P211, 601 

HP, 230/460/3/60, TEFC MOTOR 

1ST1F5D4 

64 1 P201 LOVEJOY COUPLING, PUMP PIECE 4X182 

65 1 P201 LOVEJOY COUPLING, MOTOR PIECE 4X182 

66 1 P201 LOVEJOY COUPLING, RUBBER INSERT 2X814 

67 1 P201 

MOYNO PROGRESSIVE CAVITY PUMP, MODEL 35601, BUNA-N 

STATOR & SEAL, 1.5 HP, 460V, 3 PH, TEFC MOTOR 

5VD28 

- CARBON AND ACCESSORIES 

68 2 T611, 612 

LIQUID PHASE REACT CARBON, HIGH PRESSURE POLY, 250 

POUNDS 

RLHP-250 

69 2 1 Vessel 21" X 62" Natural Poly Tank C2028 

70 2 1 4" Tank Head w/ 1" Fill Hole Q8048-1.0 

71 2 1 K4 Distributor w/ 65" Riser D5045 

72 2 200 Pounds of React Liquid Carbon / Lb. 45-002 Stock 

73 2 T201, 202 

VAPOR PHASE CARBON, VESSEL, 1000 POUNDS, VIRGIN 

CARBON 

VVHV-1000 

74 2 1 Aluminum Cylinder 36" Dia. X 72" Long X 1/8" Thick 

75 2 1 Aluminum Cylinder 16" Dia. X 5" Long X 3/16" Thick 

76 2 2 36" Dia. X 1/4" Aluminum Plate 

77 2 2 3" X 6" X 40" Rectangular Aluminum Tubing 

78 2 2 16" Dia. Flange, 1/2" Plate, 16 ea. 5/8" Holes. 

79 2 2 16" Dia. Blind Flange, 1/2" Plate, 16 ea. 5/8" Holes. 

80 2 1 35-3/4" Dia. X 1/4" Ring, 2" Wide, Aluminum 

81 2 2 4" Alum Coupling 

82 2 2 4" Alum Coupling 

83 2 2 16" Flange Gaskets 

84 2 1 35" Dia. Alum Grate Stock 

85 2 1000 Pounds of Virgin Vapor Carbon / Lb. 45-004 Stock 

- NONSTANDARD ITEMS 45-004 

86 1 LSHH701 FLOAT SWITCH PILOT DUTY 3BY79 

- SVE's 

87 1 B201 SUTORBILT BLOWER, MODEL 5LP-DSL 5LP-DSL 

88 1 B201 

EMERSON MOTOR, 20 HP, 460 VAC, 3 PH, TEFC, 256T FRAME, 

CATALOG # 8P20P2C 

1800 RPM 

MODEL # BJ09 

89 1 B201 

WELDED STEEL BASE FOR BLOWER, MOTOR, DISCHARGE 

SILENCER 

90 1 B201 COUPLING GUARD 

91 1 S211 

DISCHARGE SILENCER STODDARD MODEL D-13H4 FLANGED 

WITH STOCK "H" DIMENSION OF 7" 

92 1 B201 FLEX SHAFT COUPLING 1L827 

93 1 B201 FLEX SHAFT COUPLING 1L831 

94 1 B201 FLEX SHAFT INSERT 1L824 

95 1 B201 ADAPTOR PLATE, ALUMINUM CONSTRUCTION, .750 HEIGHT 

- AIR WATER SEPARATORS 

96 1 AW201 

120 GALLON MOISTURE SEPARATOR TANK, VACUUM RATED 29" 

HG, , 4" FLANGED INLET & 4" FLANGED OUTLET, 2" MANUAL 

DRAIN, 2" PUMPOUT, 6" CLEANOUT, STANDARD SIGHTGLASS 

AWS 120 4-4F 

AND INTEGRAL DEMISTER 

97 1 AW201 CLEAR WELL ASSEMBLY NONE 

- AIR FILTERS 

98 1 FS201 INLET PARTICLE FILTER/SILENCER, 2" 16-005 FS-31P-200 

99 1 PF201 

IN-LINE AIR PARTICLE FILTER, 4" FLANGED INLET & 4" FLANGED 

OUTLET FOR 235P 

LL 

IPF400F

Page 1 of 3 

COMPONENT LIST 

PROJECT #: 12869 

CLIENT NAME: MID-ATLANTIC ENVIRONMENTAL EQUIPMENT, INC. 

PROJECT NAME: EMERSON POWER TRANSMISSION FACILITY 

LINE NO. P&ID ESD / MFR. SERIAL 

NO. REQ. LABEL DESCRIPTION AND SPECIFICATIONS PART NUMBER NUMBER 

- CONTROLS 

1 1 DSC1 SAFETY SWITCH, 100 AMP, 600 VAC, 3Ø, NEMA 3R, H363NRB W/ 1H360 

2 3 FU1A,B,C 100 AMP TIME DELAY FUSE, FRS-R-100 2A163 

3 1 CP-1 ENVIROLINE ENCLOSURE, 48" X 36" X 12" SCE-48EL3612LP 

4 2 CP-1 NEMA PANEL FOR 48" X 36" ENCLOSURE SCE-48P36 

5 1 CP-1 SWING-OUT PANEL KIT FOR 48" X 36" ENCLOSURE SCE-ELSP48 

6 1 CP-1 PADLOCKING HOUSING LATCH SCE-PLHG 

7 1 TB1 

CLASS 9080 POWER DISTRIBUTION BLOCK, 3 POLE, (1) #4-500, 

(12) #14-2, LBA365112 

2DD75 

8 1 CB95 FEED THROUGH CIRCUIT BREAKER, 1 POLE 10 AMP, QOU110 5B966 

9 1 CB84 FEED THROUGH CIRCUIT BREAKER, 1 POLE 15 AMP, QOU115 5B968 

10 1 XFMR77 

TRANSFORMER, 240/480 x 120/240 VAC, 3 KVA, 

INDOOR/OUTDOOR, 7400-3S1F 

1H724 

11 3 

FU75,77,8 

0,82,150,1 FUSEHOLDER, 2 POLE, BUSSMAN, 30 AMP 

52 

12 1 FU69,71,7 

3 

FUSEHOLDER, 3 POLE, BUSSMAN, 30 AMP 

LPSC003ID 

13 3 FU69,71,7 

3 

CLASS CC FUSE, 2 AMP, FAST ACTING, BUSSMAN KTKR 2 

14 2 FU150,152 CLASS CC FUSE, 5 AMP, TIME DELAY, BUSSMAN FNQ-R-5 

15 4 FU75,77,8 

0,82 

CLASS CC FUSE, 15 AMP, TIME DELAY, BUSSMAN 

FNQ-R-15 

16 1 SURGE SUPPRESSOR, 480VAC, 3Ø, 3 WIRE, 80KA/PHASE SSM83N4 

17 3 CR143,14 

7,411 

GENERAL PURPOSE RELAY, 2 POLE (120 VAC) 

GPRM-B2C10D 

18 3 CR143,14 

7,411 

GENERAL PURPOSE RELAY BASE, 2 POLE 

GPRA-SB08U1 

19 1 PM69 SYMCOM MOTOR SAVER MODEL 460, 480VAC, 3 PHASE 460 

20 1 TR127 OMRON REPEAT CYCLE TIMER, 120VAC, 0-30 HOUR, 8 PIN H3CR-F8N 

21 1 TR127 OMRON 8 PIN BASE, FINGERSAFE P2CF-08-E 

22 1 AM13 

AMMETER, 2 1/2", TYPE 250(BIG LOOK), 0-5 AMP INPUT, 0-30 

AMP SCALE 

250-240-LSNL 

23 1 AM13 CURRENT TRANSFORMER, 60:5 AMP CURRENT RATIO 2SFT-600 

HM102,10 

24 7 

4,106,108, HOURMETER, PANEL MOUNT, 3 HOLE ROUND, 120 VAC, NEMA 

110,112,1 4X 

36-005 T50B212 

14 

25 1 PB147A PUSHBUTTON, PUSH-PULL, MUSHROOM CAP, RED, 1 NC PBO-PPMCRD-NC 

26 1 PB227 

PUSHBUTTON, MOMENTARY, FLUSH CAP, RED, W/N.O. 

CONTACT 

PBO-FC-RD-NO 

27 2 HS407,50 

3 

SELECTOR SWITCH, 3 POSITION, MAINTAINED, 30mm 

SSO3-SHWE-NO/NO 

28 5 

HS403,41 

SELECTOR SWITCH, 3 POSITION, SPRING RET. LEFT TO 

1,415,419, 

CENTER 

423,507 

SROLC-SHWE-NO/NO 

PL101,103 

29 8 

,105,107,1 

09,111,11 

PILOT LIGHT, 30mm, 120 VAC, GREEN 

FVLU120-PLLGN 

3,123 

30 14 

PL145,515 

,519,523,5 

27,531,53 

9,543,547, PILOT LIGHT, 30mm, 120 VAC, RED 

FVLU120-PLLRD 

551,555,5 

59,563,56 

7 

31 1 LEGEND PLATE, ROUND YELLOW EMERGENCY STOP LPRYW-04 

32 1 LEGEND PLATE TALL, 30 MM, RED/WHITE, "RESET" LPTRD 

33 1 LEGEND PLATE TALL, 30 MM, RED/WHITE, "POWER FAULT" LPTRD 

34 7 LEGEND PLATE TALL, 30 MM, BLACK/WHITE, "ON" LPT 

35 1 LEGEND PLATE TALL, 30 MM, BLACK/WHITE, "OPEN" LPT 

36 1 

LEGEND PLATE TALL, 30 MM, RED/WHITE, SPECIAL 

LINE 1 "AWS LEVEL HI" , LINE 2 "LSHH-201" 

LPTRD 

37 1 


LINE 1 "AWS LEVEL LO" , LINE 2 "LSLL-201" 

LPTRD

38 1 


LINE 1 "EQ TANK LEVEL HI" , LINE 2 "LSHH-211" 

LPTRD 

39 1 


LINE 1 "EQ TANK LEVEL LO" , LINE 2 "LSLL-211" 

LPTRD 

40 1 


LINE 1 "SVE VACUUM LO", LINE 2 "VSLL-201" 

LPTRD 

41 1 


LINE 1 "LGAC PRES HI", LINE 2 "PSHH-601" 

LPTRD 

42 1 


LINE 1 "AIR COMP PRES LO", LINE 2 "PSLL-101" 

LPTRD 

43 1 


LINE 1 "AIR COMP OIL LO", LINE 2 "LSLL-101" 

LPTRD 

44 1 


LINE 1 "A/S SUMP LEVEL HI" , LINE 2 "LSHH-601" 

LPTRD 

45 1 


LINE 1 "A/S SUMP LEVEL LO" , LINE 2 "LSLL-601" 

LPTRD 

46 1 


LINE 1 "A/S PRES LO" , LINE 2 "PSLL-601" 

LPTRD 

47 1 


LINE 1 "SUMP LEVEL HI" , LINE 2 "LSHH-701" 

LPTRD 

48 1 


LINE 1 "EMERGENCY" , LINE 2 "STOP" 

LPTRD 

49 1 

LEGEND PLATE TALL, 30 MM, BLACK/WHITE, SPECIAL 

LINE 1 "SVE BLOWER B-201", LINE 2 "HAND OFF AUTO" 

LPT 

50 1 


LINE 1 "AWS PUMP P-201", LINE 2 "HAND OFF AUTO" 

LPT 

51 1 


LINE 1 "AIR COMP AC-101" , LINE 2 "HAND OFF AUTO" 

LPT 

52 1 


LINE 1 "RW VALVE SV-101", LINE 2 "HAND OFF AUTO" 

LPT 

53 1 


LINE 1 "RW PUMP P-701", LINE 2 "HAND OFF AUTO" 

LPT 

54 1 


LINE 1 "EQ PUMP P-211", LINE 2 "HAND OFF AUTO" 

LPT 

55 1 


LINE 1 "A/S BLOWER B-601", LINE 2 "HAND OFF AUTO" 

LPT 

56 1 


LINE 1 "A/S PUMP P-601", LINE 2 "HAND OFF AUTO" 

LPT 

- PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS 

57 1 PROGRAMMING CABLE 1761-CBL-PM02 

58 1 

MICROLOGIX 1400 PLC, 120VAC, 20 DC INPUTS, 12 RELAY 

OUPUTS 

1766-L32BWA 

59 1 

MICROLOGIX 1100 16 POINT SINK/SOURCE 24VDC INPUT 

MODULE 

1762-IQ16 

60 1 MICROLOGIX 1100 16 POINT AC/DC RELAY OUTPUT MODULE 1762-OW16 

61 2 MICROLOGIX 1100 4 POINT ANALOG INPUT MODULE 1762-IF4 

62 1 APC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY, 350VA ES350 

- MOTOR STARTERS 

63 1 MC403 

IEC CONTACTOR, 1 HP, 240 VAC, 1Ø, 120 VAC COIL, (MAX AMPS 

9), LC1D09G7 

3DY20 

64 3 MC419,42 IEC CONTACTOR, 5 HP, 480 VAC, 3Ø, 120 VAC COIL, (MAX AMPS 

3,507 9), LC1D09G7 

3DY20 

65 1 MC503 

IEC CONTACTOR, 7.5 HP, 480 VAC, 3Ø, 120 VAC COIL, (MAX 

AMPS 12), LC1D12G7 

3DY28 

66 1 MC407 

IEC CONTACTOR, 10 HP, 480 VAC, 3Ø, 120 VAC COIL, (MAX 


3DY36 

67 1 MC415 

IEC CONTACTOR, 20 HP, 480 VAC, 3Ø, 120 VAC COIL, (MAX 


3DY52 

68 1 MP87 

MOTOR PROTECTOR, 1/2 HP, 240 VAC, 1Ø, 4.0-6.3 AMP, 

GV2P10H7 

GV2P10H7 

69 2 MP25,39 MOTOR PROTECTOR, 1 HP, 480 VAC, 3Ø, 1.6-2.5 AMP, GV2P07H7 2MNJ5 

70 1 MP19 MOTOR PROTECTOR, 2 HP, 480 VAC, 3Ø, 2.5-4.0 AMP, GV2P08H7 2MNJ6 

71 1 MP33 MOTOR PROTECTOR, 3 HP, 480 VAC, 3Ø, 4.0-6.3 AMP, GV2P10H7 GV2P10H7 

72 1 MP7 MOTOR PROTECTOR, 5 HP, 480 VAC, 3Ø, 6-10 AMP, GV2P14H7 GV2P14H7 

73 1 MP13 MOTOR PROTECTOR, 15 HP, 480 VAC, 3Ø, 20-25 AMP, GV2P22H7 GV2P22H7 

74 7 

75 7 

MC403,40 

7,415,419, CONTACTOR SIDE MOUNT AUX. CONTACT BLOCK, 2 N.O. 

423,503,5 CONTACTS, LAD8N20 

07 

MP7,13,19 

,25,33,39, 

87 

MOTOR PROT. SIDE MOUNT AUX. CONTACT BLOCK, 1 N.O./1 

N.C. CONTACTS (GV2 & GV3), GVAN11 

3DB69 

3DA35 

Page 2 of 3

Page 3 of 3 

76 7 

MP7,13,19 

,25,33,39, 

87 

LINE SIDE INSULATING BARRIER FOR GV2 MOTOR PROTECTOR 

- BUILDINGS 

77 2 WEATHERPROOF OUTLET BOX, 1 GANG 28-002 

78 2 GFCI RECEPTACLE 28-001 

79 1 

DIE CAST WEATHERPROOF RECEPTACLE COVER, LOCKABLE, 1 

GANG, EXTENDED COVER 

80 1 DECORA STYLE RJ11 PHONE JACK 

GV2GH7 

WP1010MC

Section 2 

SVE

Section: 

MOYNO ® 500 PUMPS 

Page: 1 of 8 

Date: March 1, 1998 

SERVICE MANUAL 

MOYNO ® 500 PUMPS 

300 SERIES 

331, 332, 333, 344, 356 AND 367 MODELS 

Mechanical Seal Models 

Packing Gland Models 

MODELS 

DESIGN 

FEATURES 

33101 34401 

33201 35601 

33301 36701 

33104 34404 

33204 35604 

33304 36704 

33108 33308 

33208 34408 

34411 

35611 35613 

Housing: Cast Iron AISI 316 SS Nylon Cast Iron AISI 316 SS 

Pump Rotor: 

Chrome plated Chrome plated Chrome plated Chrome plated Chrome plated 

416 SS 

316 SS 

416 SS 

416 SS 

316 SS 

Pump Stator: NBR (Nitrile) NBR (Nitrile) NBR (Nitrile) NBR (Nitrile) NBR (Nitrile) 

Shaft: 416 SS 316 SS 416 SS 416 SS 316 SS 

Flexible Joint: Carbon steel/ 

NBR 

316 SS/ 

NBR 

Carbon steel/ 

NBR 

Carbon steel/ 

NBR 

316 SS/ 

NBR 

Bearings: Ball (sealed) Ball (sealed) Ball (sealed) Ball (sealed) Ball (sealed) 

Mechanical Seal: Carbon-ceramic Carbon-ceramic Carbon-ceramic --- --- 

Packing: --- --- --- Braided PTFE Braided PTFE 

Note: Alternate elastomers available. Refer to Repair/Conversion kit numbers, page 8. 

INSTALLATION 

Mounting Position. Pump may be mounted in any 

position. When mounting vertically, it is necessary to keep 

bearings above seals to prevent possible seal leakage into 

bearings. 

Pre-Wetting. Prior to connecting pump, wet pump 

elements and mechanical seal or packing by adding fluid to 

be pumped into suction and discharge ports. Turn shaft 

over several times in a clockwise direction to work fluid into 

elements. 

Piping. Piping to pump should be self-supporting to avoid 

excessive strain on pump housings. See Table 1 for suction 

and discharge port sizes of each pump model. Use pipe 

“dope” or tape to facilitate disassembly and to provide seal. 

Drive. On belt driven units, adjust belt tension to point of 

non-slip. Do not overtighten. 

On direct drive units, coupling components should be 

aligned and spaced at least 1/16” apart. 

Pump rotation must be clockwise when facing shaft to 

prevent damage to pump. Check direction of rotation before 

startup. 

Water Flush of Packing (356 Models Only). The packing 

may be either grease lubricated through a grease fitting in 

the stuffing box or have plumbing connected to the housing 

to allow a water flush. 

Maximum speed is 1750 rpm. 

When the material being pumped is abrasive in nature, it 

may be advantageous to flush the packing to prevent 

leakage under packing and excessive shaft wear.

Page 2 

Clean water can be injected through a 1/8” NPT tapped 

hole that normally houses the grease fitting for lubricating the 

packing. The water can be permitted to leak axially along the 

shaft in either direction or can be removed from the second 

tapped hole in the stuffing box. In both cases, the discharge 

from the stuffing box should be throttled slightly to maintain 

10-15 PSI higher pressure in the stuffing box than is present 

in the discharge housing. 

Table 1. Pump Data 

Pump Models 331 332 333 344 356 367 

Suction Port 

(NPT) 

3/4* 3/4* 3/4* 3/4* 1-1/2 2 

Discharge 

Port (NPT) 

3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 1-1/4 2 

Discharge 

Pressure 150 100 50 40 50 50 

(psig) 

*08 versions = 1” NPT 

Table 2. Temperature Limits 

Elastomer Temperature Limits 

*NBR 

10°-160°F 

*EPDM 

10°-210°F 

*FPM 

10°-240°F 

*NBR = Nitrile 

*EPDM = Ethylene-Propylene-Diene Terpolymer 

*FPM = Fluoroelastomer 

OPERATION 

Self-Priming. With wetted pumping elements, the pump is 

capable of 25 feet of suction lift when operating at 1750 rpm 

with pipe size equal to port size. 

DO NOT RUN DRY. Unit depends on liquid pumped for 

lubrication. For proper lubrication, flow rate should be at least 

10% of rated capacity. 

Pressure and Temperature Limits. See Table 1 for 

maximum discharge pressure of each model. Unit is suitable 

for service at temperatures shown in Table 2. 

Storage. Always drain pump for extended storage periods 

by removing suction housing bolts and loosening suction 

housing. 

TROUBLE SHOOTING 

WARNING: Before making adjustments, disconnect 

power source and thoroughly bleed 

pressure from system. Failure to do so 

could result in electric shock or serious 

bodily harm. 

Failure To Pump. 

1. Belt or coupling slip: Adjust belt tension or tighten set 

screw on coupling. 

2. Stator torn; possibly excessive pressure: Replace stator, 

check pressure at discharge port. 

3. Wrong rotation: Rotation must be clockwise when facing 

shaft. 

4. Threads in rotor or on shaft stripped: Replace part. Check 

for proper rotation. 

5. Excessive suction lift or vacuum. 

Pump Overloads. 

1. Excessive discharge pressure: Check discharge pressure 

for maximum rating given in Table 1. Check for 

obstruction in discharge pipe. 

2. Fluid viscosity too high: Limit fluid viscosity to 20,000 CP 

or 100,000 SSU. 

Viscosity CP 

Limit RPM 

1-300 1750 

300-1,000 1200 

1,000-2,000 700 

2,000-5,000 350 

5,000-10,000 180 

10,000-20,000 100 

3. Insufficient motor HP: Check HP requirement. 

Noisy Operation. 

1. Starved suction: Check fluid supply, length of suction line, 

and obstructions in pipe. 

2. Bearings worn: Replace parts; check alignment, belt 

tension, pressure at discharge port. 

3. Broken flexible joint: Replace part, check pressure at 

discharge port. 

4. Insufficient mounting: Mount to be secure to firm base. 

Vibration induced noise can be reduced by using mount 

pads and short sections of hose on suction and discharge 

ports. 

Mechanical Seal Leakage (Mechanical Seal Models 

Only). 

1. Leakage at startup: If leakage is slight, allow pump to run 

several hours to let faces run in. 

2. Persistent seal leakage: Faces may be cracked from 

freezing or thermal shock. Replace seal. 

Packing Leakage (Packing Models Only). 

1. Leakage at startup: Adjust packing as outlined in 

maintenance instructions. 

Note: Slight leakage is necessary for lubrication of packing. 

2. Persistent leakage: Packing rings and/or shaft may be 

worn. Replace parts as required. 

Pump Will Not Prime. 

1. Air leak on suction side: Check pipe connections. 

MAINTENANCE 

General. These pumps have been designed for a minimum 

of maintenance, the extent of which is routine lubrication and 

adjustment of packing. The pump is one of the easiest to 

work on in that the main elements are very accessible and 

require few tools to disassemble. 

Packing Lubrication (356 Models Only). The zerk 

fitting on the side of the suction housing leads to the lantern 

ring halves in the mid-section of the packings. At least once a 

week, inject a small quantity of good quality grease, such as 

MPG-2 Multi Purpose Grease (Du Bois Chemical), or 

equivalent, into the zerk fitting to lubricate the packings. 

Note: For Model 34411, lubricate packing by applying a 

liberal amount of grease during assembly.

Page 3 

Packing Adjustment (Packing Models Only). 

Packing gland attaching nuts should be evenly adjusted so 

they are little more than finger tight. Over-tightening of the 

packing gland may result in premature packing failure and 

possible damage to the shaft and gland. 

When the packing is new, frequent minor adjustments 

are recommended for the first few hours of operation in 

order to compress and seat the packing. Be sure to allow 

slight leakage for lubrication of packing. 

When excessive leakage can no longer be regulated by 

tightening the gland nuts, remove and replace the packings 

in accordance with the DISASSEMBLY and REASSEMBLY 

instructions. The entire pump need not be disassembled to 

replace the packings. 

Bearing Lubrication. The prelubricated, fully sealed 

bearings do not require additional lubrication. 

PUMP DISASSEMBLY 

WARNING: Before disassembling pump, disconnect 

power source and thoroughly bleed 

pressure from system. Failure to do so 

could result in electric shock or serious 

bodily harm. 

To Disassemble Mechanical Seal Models: 

1. Disconnect suction and discharge piping. 

2. Remove screws (112) holding suction housing (2) to 

pump body (1). Remove suction housing and stator (21). 

3. Remove rotor (22) from flexible joint (24) by turning 

counter-clockwise (RH thread). Use 3/16 inch diameter 

punch to remove rotor pin (45) on Model 36701. 

4. Flexible joint (24) can be removed from shaft (26) by 

using a 3/16 inch allen wrench in end of joint (1/4 inch 

wrench on 356 Models) and turn counter-clockwise. Use 

3/16 inch diameter punch to remove shaft pin (46) on 

Model 36701. 

5. Carefully slide mechanical seal (69) off shaft (26). 

Carefully pry seal seat out of pump body (1). If any parts 

of mechanical seal are worn or broken, the complete 

seal assembly should be replaced. Seal components are 

matched parts and are not interchangeable. 

6. The bearings (29) and shaft (26) assembly can be 

removed from pump body (1) after snap ring (66) has 

been removed. To remove the assembly, lightly tap the 

shaft at threaded end using a block of wood to protect 

the threads. The bearings may be pressed off the shaft. 

To Disassemble Packing Models: 

1. Disconnect suction and discharge piping. 

2. Remove screws (112) which hold suction housing (2) to 

pump body (1). Remove suction housing and stator (21). 

3. Remove rotor (22) from flexible joint (24) by turning in a 

counter-clockwise direction (RH thread). 

4. Flexible joint (24) can be removed by using a 3/16 inch 

allen wrench in end of joint (1/4 inch wrench on 356 

Models) and turn in a counter-clockwise direction. 

5. The packing (42) can be removed without removing the 

shaft (26) using the following procedure: 

a. Remove gland bolts (47). 

b. Slide gland (41) away from packing (42). 

c. Pull out packing (42) (and lantern ring halves (57) on 

356 Models) using a packing removing tool. 

Note: Packing can be removed after shaft has been removed 

by pushing out from pump side of pump body 

after gland (41) has been detached. 

6. The bearings (29) and shaft (26) assembly can be 

removed from pump body (1) after snap ring (66) has 

been removed. To remove the assembly, lightly tap the 

shaft at threaded end using a block of wood to protect the 

threads. 

7. To disassemble shaft assembly, remove snap ring (66A) 

from shaft (26) and press bearings (29) and bearing 

spacer (33) off the shaft. 

PUMP ASSEMBLY 

To Assemble Mechanical Seal Models: 

1. Press bearings (29) on shaft (26), and locate slinger ring 

(77) near bearing on threaded end of shaft. 

Note: When replacing bearings, always press on the inner 

race when assembling to shaft, and on the outer race 

when pressing bearings into the housings. 

2. Press shaft assembly into pump body (1) securing with 

snap ring (66). 

3. Install mechanical seal (69) using the following 

procedure: 

a. Clean and oil sealing faces using a clean light oil (not 

grease). 

Caution: Do not use oil on EPDM parts. Substitute 

glycerin or soap and water. 

b. Oil the outer surface of the seal seat, and push the 

assembly into the bore in the pump body (1), seating 

it firmly and squarely. 

c. After cleaning and oiling the shaft, slide the seal body 

along the shaft until it meets the seal seat. 

d. Install seal spring and spring retainer on shaft. 

4. Thread flexible joint (24) into shaft (26) in a clockwise 

direction (RH thread). On 356 Models, install seal spacer 

(69A) and washer (116) before threading flexible joint 

onto shaft in a clockwise direction. On Model 36701, use 

shaft pin (46) to pin flexible joint (24) to shaft. 

5. Thread rotor (22) onto flexible joint (24) in a clockwise 

direction (RH thread). On Model 36701, pin rotor (22) to 

joint using rotor pin (45). 

6. Slide stator (21) on rotor (22). On 331 and 332 Models, 

insert rounded end of stator ring (135) into end of stator 

prior to installing stator on rotor. 

7. Secure stator (21) and suction housing (2), with suction 

port vertically up, to pump body (1) using screws (112). 

8. Proceed as in installation instructions. 

To Assemble Packing Models: 

1. Press bearings (29), with bearing spacer (33) in between, 

on shaft (26) and secure in place using snap ring (66A). 

Note: When replacing bearings, always press on the inner 

race when assembling to shaft, and on the outer race 

when pressing bearings into the housings.

Page 4 

2. Install packing (42) before installing shaft assembly 

using the following procedure: 

a. Lubricate each individual ring of packing with a 

grease that is insoluble in the fluid being pumped. 

b. Individually assemble each ring of packing loosely 

in the packing chamber of the pump body (1). 

Stagger splits on rings. (Four rings, 3/16 inch 

square required on Model 34411; four rings, 1/4 

inch square and two lantern ring halves (57) 

assembled between two rings on 356 Models). 

c. Loosely install packing gland (41) on pump body (1) 

using gland bolts (47). 

3. Press shaft assembly into pump body (1) positioning 

slinger ring (77) between packing gland (41) and bearing 

end of pump body. Secure the shaft assembly with 

snap ring (66). 

4. Thread flexible joint (24) into shaft (26) in a clockwise 

direction (RH thread). 

5. Thread rotor (22) onto flexible joint (24) in a clockwise 

direction (RH thread). 

6. Slide stator (21) on rotor (22). On 331 and 332 Models, 

insert rounded end of stator ring (135) into end of stator 

prior to installing stator on rotor. 

7. Secure stator (21) and suction housing (2), with suction 

port vertically up, to pump body (1) using screws 

(112). 

8. Proceed as in installation instructions. 

Note: Adjust newly installed packing as described in 

maintenance procedure. 

WARNING:Replace belt or coupling guards 

before reconnecting power.

Page 5

Page 6 

PARTS LIST — 331, 332, 333, AND 344 MODELS 

Item 

Description Mechanical Seal Models Packing Gland 

No. 

Models 

33101 

33201 

33301 

34401 

33104 

33204 

33304 

34404 

33108 

33208 

33308 

34408 34411 

1 Pump Body 330-1065-002 330-1910-002 340-1000-001 

1A Discharge Housing 340-2362-000 

1B Bearing Housing 330-4587-000 

1C Pump Base 340-2369-000 

2 Suction Housing 330-1064-002 330-1911-002 330-4536-000 330-1064-002 

*21 Stator See Stator section 

below. 

*22 Rotor See Rotor section below with circled 

numbers for each series. 

1 2 1 1 

24 Joint Carbon SteeI/NBR 

320-1511-000 

316 SS/NBR 

320-3759-000 

Carbon SteeI/NBR 

320-1511-000 

26 Drive Shaft 320-1499-000 320-2938-000 320-1499-000 320-2448-000 

29 Bearing (2 req.) 630-0502-031 

33 Bearing Spacer 320-1900-000 

41 Packing Gland 320-0101-004 

42 Packing 340-3396-005 

47 Gland Bolt 619-1520-161 

66 Snap Ring 320-1506-000 

66A Snap Ring 320-4182000 

69 Mechanical Seal 320-2424-000 

77 Slinger Ring 320-6382-000 320-6384-000 

100 Pipe Plug (3 req.) 610-0120-021 

112 Screws (8 req.) 619-1430-103 320-5968-000 619-0860-081 619-1430-103 

112C Screws (4 req.) 61 9-0890-281 

135 Stator Ring (331 -332 only) 320-7812-000 

215 Lock Washer (8 req.) 320-6464-000 

*Recommended spare parts. 

STATORS 

Models 

331 332 333 344 

21 Standard Stator, NBR All Models 340-3501-120 340-3502-120 340-3503-120 340-3504-120 

21 EPDM Stator 340-3501-320 340-3502-320 340-3503-320 340-3504-320 

21 FPM Stator 340-3501-520 340-3502-520 340-3503-520 340-3504-520 

ROTORS 

22 1 416SS - All Models 320-2729-000 330-0906-000 320-1394-000 320-1841-000 

22 2 316SS — All Models 320-2933-000 320-2942-000 320-2936-000 320-2934-000 

See page 8 for Repair/Conversion Kits

PARTS LIST — 356 AND 367 MODELS 

Page 7 

Item 

Mechanical SeaI Models Packing Gland Models Mechanical Seal Model 

Description 

No. 

35601 35604 35611 35613 36701 36704 

1 Pump Body 

Cast Iron 

316SS 

Cast Iron 316SS Cast Iron 316SS 

340-0636-000 340-1550-000 350-0420-000 350-0491-000 350-0423-000 350-0423-007 

2 Suction Housing 350-0280-000 350-0489-000 350-0280-000 350-0489-000 350-0302-000 350-0302-007 

*21 Stator 

NBR 

NBR 

NBR 

340-3505-120 

340-3505-120 

340-3506-120 

22 Rotor 

416SS 

316SS 

416SS 

316SS 

416SS 

316SS 

320-2304-000 320-4431-000 320-2304-000 320-4431-000 330-2042-000 330-3077-000 

24 Flex Joint 

Carbon Steel 316SS Carbon Steel 316SS Carbon Steel 316SS 

320-1583-000 320-4427-000 320-1583-000 320-4427-000 320-1749-000 320-4436-000 

26 Drive Shaft 320-1759-000 320-4430-000 320-2765-000 320-4435-000 330-1805-000 330-1805-015 

29 Bearing (2 req.) 630-0552-051 630-0552-061 

33 Bearing Spacer 320-2764-000 

41 Packing Gland 320-0003-004 320-0003-007 

*42 Packing 340-3396-008 

45 Rotor Pin 320-4439-002 

46 Shaft Pin 320-4439-001 

47 Gland Bolt 619-1530-241 

57 Lantern Ring Half** 320-6585-000 

66 Snap Ring 320-1758-000 320-2794-000 

66A Snap Ring 320-3533-000 

*69 Mechanical Seal 320-3945-000 320-1750-000 

69A Seal Spacer 320-4434-000 

77 Slinger Ring 320-6383-000 320-6385-000 320-6385-000 

112 Screws (6 req.) 619-1530-161 619-1530-161 

115 Zerk Fitting 320-2503-001 

135 Stator Spacer 330-7594-000 

202 Shaft Key 611-0040-240 

215 Lock Washer (6 req.) 623-0010-411 

261 Pipe Plug 610-0120-011 610-0420-010 610-0120-011 610-0420-010 610-0120-011 610-0420-010 

*Recommended spare parts. 

**2 Required 

See page 8 for Repair/Conversion Kits

Page 8 

REPAIR/CONVERSION KIT NUMBERS 

ELASTOMER REPAIR/CONVERSION KITS 

Item Description 

No. 

331 Models 332 Models 

NBR EPDM FPM NBR EPDM FPM 

— Kit No. 311-9026-000 311-9025-000 311-9054-000 311-9027-000 311-9038-000 311-9055-000 

21 • Stator 340-3501-120 340-3501-320 340-3501-520 340-3502-120 340-3502-320 340-3502-520 

24 • Joint 320-1511-000‡ 320-6367-000† 320-4670-000† 320-1511-000‡ 320-6367-000† 320-4670-000† 

Item 

No. 

69 • Seal 320-2424-000 320-6379-000 320-6501-000 320-2424-000 320-6379-000 320-6501-000 

Description 



— Kit No. 311-9029-000 311-9028-000 311-9056-000 311-9031-000 311-9030-000 311-9057-000 

21 • Stator 340-3503-120 340-3503-320 340-3503-520 340-3504-120 340-3504320 340-3504520 

24 • Joint 320-1511-000‡ 320-6367-000† 320-4670-000† 320-1511-000‡ 320-6367-000† 320-4670-000† 

69 • Seal 320-2424-000 320-6379-000 320-6501-000 320-2424-000 320-6379-000 320-6501-000 

t316SS/with appropriate elastomer. 

‡Carbon steel. NBR kits are available only with carbon steel joints; a 316SS/NBR joint for 331-344 Models is 

available as 320-3759-000. 

Item 


Description 

No. 


Kit No. (Mech. Seal 

– 

Models) 

311-9033-000 311-9032-000 311-9058-000 311-9060-000 311-9036-000 311-9124-000 

21 • Stator 340-3505-120 340-3505-320 340-3505-520 340-3506-120 340-3506-320 340-3506-520 

24 • Flex Joint 320-1583-000‡ 320-6369-000† 320-4671-000† 320-1749-000‡ 320-6378-000‡ 3206515-000‡ 

69 • Seal 320-3945-000 320-6380-000 320-6510-000 320-1750-000 320-6390-000 320-6517-000 

45 • Rotor Pins 320-4439-002 320-4439-002 320-4439-002 

46 • Shaft Pin 320-4439-001 320-4439-001 320-4439-001 

Kit No 

– (Packing Gland Models) 

311-9035-000 311-9034-000 311-9059-000 

21 • Stator 340-3505-120 340-3505-320 340-3505-520 

24 • Joint 320-1583-000‡ 320-6369-000† 320-4671-000† 

†316SS/with appropriate elastomer. 

‡Carbon steel. NBR kits are available only with carbon steel joints; a 316SS/NBR joint for Model 35604 and 

35613 pumps is available as 320-4427-000; a 316SS/NBR joint for model 36704 is available as 320-4436-000. 

ABRASION RESISTANT SEALS 

Models 

Elastomer 331-344 356 36701 

NBR 3206460000 3206505000 3206511000 

EPDM 3206502000 3206506000 3206512000 

FPM 3206503000 3206507000 3206513000 

NBR = Nitrile 

EPDM = Ethylene-Propylene-Diene Terpolymer 

FPM = Fluoroelastomer 

© 1999 by Moyno, Inc. Printed in U.S.A. 

® Moyno is a registered trademark of Moyno, Inc.

Legend ® Series 

Positive Displacement Blowers 

& Vacuum Pumps

2 

Sutorbilt Legend Series 

Setting the Industry 

Standard for Over 70 Years 

Gardner Denver’s Sutorbilt ® Legend ® line of 

rotary positive displacement lobe blowers 

and vacuum pumps are the result of more 

than seventy years experience in the design, 

manufacture and support of superior 

industrial equipment. 

Why the Sutorbilt line of blowers and 

vacuum pumps earned the name “Legend.” 

• Backed by one of the largest distributor networks in the industry 

• Every Sutorbilt Legend blower/vacuum pump is built under rigid 

ISO 9001:2000 quality standards 

• Each Legend is individually tested to meet rigorous performance 

specifications 

• Requested by leading Original Equipment Manufacturers (OEMs) 

worldwide for a wide range of applications, due to the ability to 

customize the Legend to their specifications while meeting strict 

performance requirements 

• A Legend is at the heart of an ever-expanding variety of air 

solutions working every minute of every day around the globe 

• Available in 20 sizes with 4 different configurations 

• The Legend Series delivers 

– Pressure to 15 psig 

– Vacuum to 16" Hg 

– Flows to 3,015 scfm

3 

Proven Performance. Global Applications. Local Support. 

Quiet Operation 

The sound data shown below compares the Legend (red) 

and a comparably sized blower (green) operating at 

3,275 rpm and 12 psig. 

• Improved blower design reduces the sound pressure 

output of the Legend blower 

• Typical reduction is 3 dBA which represents 50% less 

noise than the competition 

NOISE LEVEL (dBa) 

100 

90 

80 

70 

60 

50 

SUTORBILT LEGEND 

Superior Local Sales and Service 

COMPARABLE UNIT 

63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 

FREQUENCY (Hz) 

• Extensive network of authorized Gardner Denver/ 

Sutorbilt distributors 

• Offers the most convenient local sales and service 

support in the industry 

• Factory trained professionals are experts in blower/ 

vacuum pump technology 

• Providing system installation guidance, 

troubleshooting and optimization recommendations 

for new or existing applications 

Even a “Legendary” Warranty 

Every Sutorbilt Legend Series blower/vacuum pump is 

covered by a “Legendary” warranty: 24 months from 

the date of shipment or 18 months from the date of 

installation. 

Industry 

Aquaculture 

Cement & Lime 

Chemical 

Coal Bed/Landfill 

Dairy 

Dry Bulk Hauling 

Environmental 

Services 

Industrial 

Milling & Baking 

Oil & Gas 

Power Generation 

Process Gas 

Pulp & Paper 

Resin & Plastic 

Soil Remediation 

Vacuum Excavation 

Wastewater 

Application 

Aeration 

Fluidization & Conveying 

Vacuum Processing & Conveying 

Methane Gas Recovery 

Automated Milking 

Trailer Unloading & Aeration 

Sewer Cleaning & Portable 

Restroom Services 

Material Vacuuming 

Blending & Conveying 

Gas Collection & Sparging 

Fly Ash Conveying & Aeration 

Gas Boosting 

Chip Conveying & Process Vacuum 

Processing & Conveying 

Vacuum Extraction & Sparging 

Potholing & Slurry Recovery 

Aeration & Backwashing 

The above table illustrates industries which depend 

upon the Sutorbilt ® Legend ® to deliver clean, oil-free air 

to a wide range of global applications.

4 

Legendary Design Features 

1 High-strength impeller case is 

heavily ribbed and machined from a 

single piece of cast iron and features 

oversized dowel pins for precise 

mounting and alignment of head plates. 

1 

These features result in reduced 

noise and more stable, vibration-free 

operation. 

2 Head plates, machined from cast 

iron, are ground on the interior surface 

to precise operating tolerances. Bearing 

fits are machined into head plates to 

assure exact bearing positioning. 

This ensures accurate, fixed-dimension 

clearances through all blower operating 

conditions and temperature ranges. 

8 

5 

2 

6 

3 

2 

4 

9 

3 Impellers are machined from 

cast iron to an exact profile and are 

permanently fastened to steel shafts. 

They are dynamically balanced for 

smooth operation in any assembled 

position. 

This provides extra strength and rigidity 

to handle continuous maximum loads 

without fatigue or deflection. 

7 7 

2MP LHC 3MP RHC 4LVP BHC 5MP RHC

5 

4 Anti-friction bearings are used 

exclusively. Smaller models are fitted 

with single-row ball bearings and 

cylindrical roller bearings; large models 

have double-row ball bearings and 

spherical roller bearings. 

Optimum bearing selection provides 

longer blower life and added overhung 

shaft load capacity. 

5 Timing gears, precision machined 

from alloy steel forgings, are 

permanently pinned to the shafts. 

This assures non-slip timing even under 

the most strenuous loading conditions. 

6 High temperature Viton® oil seals. 

These maximize the seal life in 

continuous, severe-duty applications to 

provide leak-free operation. 

7Flex-Mount design is adaptable to 

either vertical or horizontal installation. 

The feet are precisely machined and 

match the footprints of many competitive 

units. 

8 Timing gears and gear end bearings 

are splash lubricated utilizing an 

abundant oil reservoir. A graphite 

gasketed, oil-tight housing encloses the 

timing gears. Drive end bearings are 

grease lubricated through fittings. Liptype 

seals prevent oil and grease from 

entering the impeller chamber. 

Superior gear and bearing lubrication is 

assured at all operating conditions with 

minimal maintenance. 

9 High strength steel drive shaft 

is extended for V-belt drive or direct 

connection. 

This feature provides greater blower 

durability and installation flexibility. 

Available with 

Mechanical Gas Seals 

The Legend design accommodates 

mechanical gas seals for critical gas 

applications with proven results based 

on a large installed base. 

This field proven seal design allows 

trouble-free operation in critical gas 

applications. 

6HVP BHC 7MVP BHC 8HVP BHC

6 

The Sutorbilt Legend Design 

Flex-Mount Design Provides 

Maximum Installation Versatility 

• Flex-MountTM design 

allows the Legend 

application flexibility 

inTake 

A constant volume of air 

or gas is drawn into the 

cylinder by the action of 

the turning impellers. 

Discharge 

A constant volume 

of air or gas is 

forced out through 

the discharge port. 

Transfer 

A constant volume of trapped air 

or gas is transferred around the 

cylinder to the discharge port. 

• Creating interchangeability 

on existing and 

new applications 

• Compatible as 

replacements for most 

competitive installations 

Vertical Configuration, 

Bottom Hand Drive 

The Sutorbilt PD Cycle 

• Two figure-eight impellers turn in opposite directions 

within a machined housing 

• Transferring a constant volume of air or gas from 

inlet to discharge with every rotation of the blower 

drive shaft 

• No lubrication within the cylinder is required 

• Rotating components are held in close tolerance do not 

contact each other 

• Impeller positioning is maintained by precision timing 

gears affixed to each impeller shaft 

• Gear and bearing lubrication occurs externally to the 

cylinder assuring clean, oil-free gas delivery under all 

operating conditions 

Horizontal Configuration, 

Right Hand Drive 

Horizontal Configuration, 

Left Hand Drive 

Vertical Configuration, 

Top Hand Drive

7 

State-of-the-Art Quality 

Gardner Denver’s Sutorbilt Legend blowers and vacuum 

pumps are engineered and manufactured under strict ISO 

9001:2000 quality standards in our 330,000 square feet 

state-of-the-art facility in Sedalia, MO (photo below) 

• Gardner Denver makes it a priority to invest in highly 

skilled people who take pride in producing quality products 

• Our Flexible Machining System (FMS) assures consistent 

production of the highest quality Legend components 

• Attention to detail is found throughout the manufacturing 

process such as utilizing advanced coordinate measuring 

equipment (photo A) 

• Legend components are subjected to quality inspections 

before assembly 

• Prior to shipment, every Legend is tested against rigid 

standards using our computer automated testing stations 

(photo B) 

Photo A 

Photo B

8 Sutorbilt Legend Pressure Performance Data 

Low Pressure Units 

SI ZE 

2LP 

2LVP 

3LP 

3LVP 

4LP 

4LVP 

5LP 

5LVP 

6LP 

6LVP 

7LP 

7LVP 

8LP 

8LVP 

DIA. INLET 

& OUTLET 

DISPL. CU. 

FT./REV. 

2"-S 0.035 

2½"-S 0.104 

3"-S 0.170 

4"-S 0.350 

6"-F 0.718 

8"-F 1.200 

10"-F 1.740 

RPM 

2,800 

3,250 

3,560 

5,275 

1,760 

2,265 

2,770 

3,600 

1,760 

2,190 

2,620 

3,600 

1,500 

1,760 

2,100 

2,850 

1,170 

1,760 

1,930 

2,350 

1,170 

1,465 

1,760 

2,050 

880 

1,170 

1,375 

1,800 

2 PSIG 3 PSIG 4 PSIG 5 PSIG 6 PSIG 7 PSIG 

CFM BHP CFM BHP CFM BHP CFM BHP CFM BHP CFM BHP 

76 1.1 71 1.6 67 2.1 63 2.5 59 3.0 56 3.5 

91 1.3 86 1.8 82 2.4 79 2.9 75 3.4 72 4.0 

102 1.4 97 2.0 93 2.6 89 3.2 86 3.7 83 4.3 

162 2.0 157 2.8 153 3.7 149 4.6 146 5.3 143 6.1 

149 

202 

254 

341 

253 

326 

400 

566 

463 

554 

673 

936 

739 

1,162 

1,284 

1,586 

1,277 

1,631 

1,985 

2,333 

1,366 

1,871 

2,228 

2,967 

1.9 

2.4 

2.9 

3.7 

3.0 

3.7 

4.4 

5.8 

5.2 

5.8 

7.0 

9.5 

8.0 

12.0 

13.1 

16.0 

13.3 

16.7 

20.0 

23.3 

14.5 

19.3 

22.7 

29.7 

142 

194 

247 

333 

243 

316 

389 

556 

449 

540 

659 

922 

716 

1,139 

1,261 

1,563 

1,248 

1,602 

1,956 

2,304 

1,329 

1,834 

2,191 

2,930 

2.8 

3.5 

4.3 

5.3 

4.5 

5.3 

6.3 

8.7 

7.5 

8.8 

10.5 

14.2 

11.9 

18.0 

19.7 

24.0 

20.0 

25.0 

30.0 

35.0 

21.8 

28.9 

34.0 

44.5 

135 

188 

240 

327 

234 

307 

381 

547 

438 

529 

648 

910 

697 

1,120 

1,242 

1,544 

1,224 

1,578 

1,932 

2,280 

1,298 

1,803 

2,159 

2,899 

3.7 

4.7 

5.5 

7.1 

5.7 

7.1 

8.4 

11.6 

10.0 

11.7 

13.9 

18.9 

15.9 

24.0 

26.3 

32.0 

16.6 

33.3 

40.0 

46.6 

29.0 

38.6 

45.4 

59.4 

130 

182 

235 

321 

227 

300 

373 

539 

427 

518 

637 

900 

680 

1,103 

1,225 

1,527 

1,203 

1,557 

1,911 

2,259 

1,271 

1,775 

2,132 

2,871 

4.5 

5.6 

6.8 

8.9 

7.1 

8.8 

10.6 

14.5 

12.4 

14.6 

17.4 

23.6 

19.9 

29.9 

32.8 

40.0 

33.3 

41.7 

50.1 

58.3 

36.3 

48.2 

56.7 

74.2 

124 

177 

230 

316 

220 

293 

366 

533 

418 

509 

628 

890 

664 

1,088 

1,210 

1,512 

1,184 

1,538 

1,892 

2,240 

1,246 

1,750 

2,107 

2,847 

5.2 

6.7 

8.2 

10.6 

8.5 

10.6 

12.7 

17.4 

14.9 

17.5 

20.9 

28.4 

23.9 

35.9 

39.4 

48.0 

39.9 

50.0 

60.1 

70.0 

43.5 

57.9 

68.0 

89.1 

120 

172 

225 

311 

213 

286 

360 

526 

409 

500 

619 

882 

650 

1,074 

1,196 

1,497 

6.1 

7.8 

9.6 

12.4 

9.9 

12.4 

14.8 

20.3 

17.4 

20.4 

24.4 

33.1 

27.9 

41.9 

46.0 

56.0 

Medium Pressure Units 

SIZE 

2MP 

2MVP 

3MP 

3MVP 

4MP 

4MVP 

5MP 

5MVP 

6MP 

6MVP 

7MP 

7MVP 

8MP 

8MVP 

DIA.INLET 

& OUTLET 

DISPL.CU. 

FT./REV. 

1"-S 0.017 

2"-S 0.060 

2½"-S 0.117 

4"-S 0.210 

5"-S 0.383 

6"-F 0.733 

8"-F 1.040 

RPM 

2,800 

3,250 

3,560 

5,275 

1,760 

2,265 

2,770 

3,600 

1,760 

2,190 

2,620 

3,600 

1,500 

1,760 

2,100 

2,850 

1,170 

1,760 

1,930 

2,350 

1,170 

1,465 

1,760 

2,050 

880 

1,170 

1,375 

1,800 



25 1.7 22 2.1 

33 1.9 30 2.5 28 2.7 

38 2.1 35 2.7 34 3.0 

67 3.1 64 3.9 63 4.4 60 5.1 

64 

95 

125 

175 

144 

194 

245 

359 

237 

292 

363 

521 

332 

558 

622 

784 

693 

909 

1,125 

1,338 

709 

1,011 

1,224 

1,666 

3.6 

4.6 

5.5 

7.2 

6.8 

8.5 

10.2 

14.0 

10.5 

12.3 

14.6 

19.9 

14.9 

22.4 

24.5 

29.9 

28.5 

35.6 

42.8 

49.9 

30.4 

40.4 

47.4 

62.1 

59 

89 

119 

169 

136 

186 

236 

351 

227 

281 

353 

510 

316 

542 

607 

768 

671 

887 

1,103 

1,316 

681 

983 

1,196 

1,638 

4.6 

5.8 

7.1 

9.2 

8.8 

10.9 

13.1 

18.0 

13.4 

15.8 

18.8 

25.5 

19.1 

28.8 

31.5 

38.4 

36.6 

45.8 

55.0 

64.1 

39.0 

51.9 

61.0 

79.9 

87 

117 

167 

132 

182 

233 

347 

222 

277 

348 

506 

309 

535 

600 

761 

661 

877 

1,093 

1,306 

669 

970 

1,183 

1,625 

6.4 

7.9 

10.2 

9.8 

12.1 

14.5 

20.0 

14.9 

17.5 

20.9 

28.4 

21.2 

32.0 

35.0 

42.7 

40.7 

50.9 

61.1 

71.2 

43.4 

57.7 

67.8 

88.7 

112 

162 

213 

268 

339 

497 

296 

522 

587 

748 

9.5 

12.3 

17.9 

21.0 

25.1 

34.0 

25.5 

38.3 

42.0 

51.2 

209 

263 

335 

493 

289 

515 

580 

741 

19.4 

22.8 

27.2 

36.9 

27.6 

41.5 

45.5 

55.5 

283 

509 

574 

735 

29.7 

44.7 

49.1 

59.7 

High Pressure Units 

SIZE 

3HP 

3HVP 

4HP 

4HVP 

5HP 

5HVP 

6HP 

6HVP 

7HP 

7HVP 

8HP 

8HVP 

DIA. INLET 

& OUTLET 

DISPL. CU. 

FT./REV. 

1¼"-S 0.045 

1½"-S 0.069 

2½"-S 0.140 

3"-S 0.227 

4"-S 0.367 

4"-S 0.566 

RPM 

1,760 

2,265 

2,770 

3,600 

1,760 

2,190 

2,620 

3,600 

1,500 

1,760 

2,100 

2,850 

1,170 

1,760 

1,930 

2,350 

1,170 

1,465 

1,760 

2,050 

880 

1,170 

1,375 

1,800 



46 2.6 44 3.0 41 3.4 

69 3.4 66 3.9 64 4.3 60 5.3 

91 4.1 89 4.7 87 5.3 83 6.5 

129 5.4 126 6.1 124 6.9 120 8.4 117 10.0 113 11.5 

80 

110 

139 

207 

154 

191 

238 

343 

188 

321 

360 

455 

332 

441 

549 

655 

363 

528 

644 

884 

4.0 

5.0 

6.0 

8.2 

7.0 

8.2 

9.8 

13.2 

8.8 

13.3 

14.5 

17.7 

14.2 

17.8 

21.4 

25.0 

16.5 

22.0 

25.8 

33.8 

77 

107 

137 

204 

151 

187 

235 

340 

182 

316 

355 

450 

326 

434 

542 

649 

354 

518 

634 

875 

4.6 

5.7 

6.9 

9.4 

8.0 

9.3 

11.1 

15.1 

10.1 

15.1 

16.6 

20.2 

16.3 

20.4 

24.5 

28.5 

18.9 

25.1 

29.5 

38.6 

74 

104 

134 

201 

147 

183 

231 

336 

177 

311 

350 

445 

319 

428 

536 

642 

345 

509 

626 

866 

5.2 

6.4 

7.7 

10.6 

9.0 

10.5 

12.5 

17.0 

11.3 

17.0 

18.7 

22.8 

18.3 

22.9 

27.6 

32.1 

21.2 

28.3 

33.2 

43.5 

99 

129 

196 

140 

177 

224 

329 

168 

302 

340 

436 

308 

416 

524 

631 

329 

493 

609 

850 

7.9 

9.4 

13.0 

10.9 

12.8 

15.3 

20.8 

13.8 

20.8 

22.8 

27.8 

22.4 

28.0 

33.7 

39.2 

26.0 

34.5 

40.6 

53.1 

124 

192 

171 

218 

323 

159 

293 

332 

427 

297 

405 

514 

620 

315 

479 

595 

835 

11.1 

15.3 188 17.7 

15.2 

18.1 

24.6 

16.4 

24.6 

27.0 

32.9 

26.5 

33.1 

39.8 

46.4 

30.7 

40.8 

48.0 

62.8 

165 

213 

318 

285 

324 

419 

287 

396 

504 

610 

301 

465 

581 

822 

17.5 

20.9 

28.4 

28.4 

31.1 

37.9 

30.5 

38.2 

45.9 

53.5 

35.4 

47.1 

55.3 

72.4 

Performance based on standard conditions: Sea Level,14.7 PSIA, 68˚F Inlet Temperature, 36% Relative Humidity. For performance with gases other than air or at non-standard 

conditions, contact your Authorized Sutorbilt representative. S=Screwed connections std. NPT. F=flange connections. Intake and outlet pipe connections are same type and size.

Sutorbilt Legend Vacuum Performance Data 

9 

Low Vacuum Units 

SIZE 

2LP 

2LVP 

3LP 

3LVP 

4LP 

4LVP 

5LP 

5LVP 

6LP 

6LVP 

7LP 

7LVP 

8LP 

8LVP 

DIA. INLET 

& OUTLET 

DISPL. CU. 

FT./REV. 

2"-S 0.035 

2½"-S 0.104 

3"-S 0.170 

4"-S 0.350 

6"-F 0.718 

8"-F 1.200 

10"-F 1.740 

RPM 

2,800 

3,250 

3,560 

4,165 

5,275 

1,760 

2,265 

2,770 

3,600 

1,760 

2,190 

2,620 

3,600 

1,500 

1,760 

2,100 

2,850 

1,170 

1,760 

1,930 

2,350 

1,170 

1,465 

1,760 

2,050 

880 

1,170 

1,375 

1,800 

2 "Hg 4 "Hg 8 "Hg 10 "Hg 12 "Hg 14 "Hg 


82 0.7 74 1.1 61 2.0 55 2.5 

98 0.7 90 1.3 77 2.3 71 2.8 64 3.4 

108 0.8 101 1.4 88 2.5 82 3.1 75 3.7 

130 0.9 122 1.6 109 2.9 103 3.6 96 4.3 

168 1.1 161 1.9 148 3.6 142 4.5 135 5.2 128 6.0 

158 

211 

264 

350 

266 

339 

412 

579 

480 

571 

690 

953 

766 

1,190 

1,312 

1,614 

1,312 

1,666 

2,020 

2,368 

1,411 

1,916 

2,273 

3,012 

1.1 

1.3 

1.5 

1.9 

1.6 

1.9 

2.3 

3.1 

2.6 

3.1 

3.6 

4.8 

4.1 

5.9 

6.5 

7.9 

6.5 

8.2 

9.8 

11.5 

7.1 

9.5 

11.1 

14.6 

147 

200 

252 

338 

250 

323 

396 

563 

459 

550 

669 

932 

732 

1,115 

1,278 

1,579 

1,268 

1,622 

1,976 

2,324 

1,355 

1,860 

2,217 

2,953 

1.9 

2.4 

2.9 

3.7 

3.0 

3.7 

4.3 

5.7 

5.1 

5.7 

6.8 

9.3 

7.8 

11.8 

12.9 

15.7 

13.1 

16.4 

19.7 

22.9 

14.3 

19.0 

22.3 

29.2 

128 

180 

233 

319 

224 

297 

370 

537 

424 

515 

634 

896 

674 

1,097 

1,219 

1,521 

1,195 

1,549 

1,903 

2,251 

1,261 

1,766 

2,122 

2,862 

3.6 

4.6 

5.4 

7.0 

5.6 

6.9 

8.3 

11.4 

9.8 

11.5 

13.7 

18.6 

15.7 

23.5 

25.8 

31.4 

26.2 

32.8 

39.3 

45.8 

28.5 

37.9 

44.6 

58.4 

118 

171 

223 

309 

211 

284 

357 

524 

406 

497 

616 

879 

645 

1,068 

1,191 

1,492 

1,159 

1,513 

1,867 

2,215 

1,214 

1,719 

2,076 

2,815 

4.5 

5.5 

6.7 

8.7 

7.0 

8.7 

10.4 

14.3 

12.2 

14.3 

17.1 

23.2 

19.6 

29.4 

32.3 

39.3 

32.7 

40.9 

49.2 

57.3 

35.7 

47.4 

55.7 

72.9 

108 

160 

213 

299 

197 

270 

343 

510 

388 

479 

598 

860 

615 

1,038 

1,160 

1,462 

1,121 

1,475 

1,829 

2,177 

1,165 

1,670 

2,026 

2,765 

5.1 

6.6 

8.1 

10.5 288 12.2 

8.4 

10.4 

12.4 

17.1 

14.7 

17.2 

20.5 

27.9 

23.5 

35.3 

38.7 

47.2 

39.2 

49.1 

59.0 

68.7 

42.8 

56.9 

66.9 

87.6 

329 

495 

459 

578 

840 

1,005 

1,127 

1,429 

14.5 

20.0 

20.1 

24.0 

32.5 

41.2 

45.2 

55.0 

Medium Vacuum Units 

SIZE 

2MP 

2MVP 

3MP 

3MVP 

4MP 

4MVP 

5MP 

5MVP 

6MP 

6MVP 

7MP 

7MVP 

8MP 

8MVP 

DIA. INLET 

&OUTLET 

DISPL. CU. 

FT./REV. 

1"-S 0.017 

2"-S 0.060 

2½"-S 0.117 

4"-S 0.210 

5"-S 0.383 

6"-F 0.733 

8"-F 1.040 

RPM 

2,800 

3,250 

3,560 

4,165 

5,275 

1,760 

2,265 

2,770 

3,600 

1,760 

2,190 

2,620 

3,600 

1,500 

1,760 

2,100 

2,850 

1,170 

1,760 

1,930 

2,350 

1,170 

1,465 

1,760 

2,050 

880 

1,170 

1,375 

1,800 

6 "Hg 10 "Hg 12 "Hg 14 "Hg 15 "Hg 16 "Hg 


31 0.8 24 1.2 

39 0.9 32 1.4 

44 0.9 37 1.5 34 1.8 

54 1.1 48 1.7 44 2.1 40 2.4 

73 1.4 67 2.2 63 2.6 59 3.0 57 3.2 

76 

106 

136 

186 

161 

211 

262 

376 

258 

313 

384 

542 

363 

589 

655 

815 

738 

954 

1,170 

1,383 

765 

1,067 

1,280 

1,722 

1.6 

2.0 

2.4 

3.1 

3.0 

3.7 

4.4 

5.9 

4.5 

5.2 

6.2 

8.4 

6.3 

9.4 

10.3 

12.6 

12.0 

15.0 

18.0 

21.0 

12.8 

17.0 

20.0 

26.2 

63 

93 

124 

174 

142 

193 

243 

358 

235 

290 

361 

519 

328 

554 

619 

780 

688 

904 

1,121 

1,333 

703 

1,005 

1,218 

1,660 

2.6 

3.3 

4.0 

5.0 

4.9 

6.0 

7.1 

9.8 

7.3 

8.6 

10.3 

13.9 

10.4 

15.7 

17.2 

21.0 

20.0 

25.0 

30.0 

35.0 

21.3 

28.3 

33.3 

43.6 

57 

87 

117 

167 

132 

183 

233 

348 

223 

277 

349 

506 

310 

536 

601 

762 

662 

878 

1,094 

1,307 

670 

972 

1,185 

1,627 

3.1 

3.9 

4.7 

6.0 

5.8 

7.2 

8.6 

11.8 

8.8 

10.3 

12.3 

16.7 

12.5 

18.8 

20.7 

25.2 

24.0 

30.0 

36.1 

42.0 

25.6 

34.0 

40.0 

52.3 

110 

160 

222 

337 

209 

264 

335 

493 

290 

516 

581 

741 

633 

850 

1,065 

1,278 

634 

936 

1,149 

1,591 

5.4 

7.0 156 7.5 

10.0 

13.7 331 14.7 325 15.7 

10.3 

12.1 

14.4 328 15.4 

19.5 485 20.9 477 22.3 

14.6 279 15.7 267 16.7 

22.0 505 23.5 493 25.1 

24.1 570 25.8 558 27.5 

29.3 731 31.4 719 33.5 

28.0 

35.0 

42.1 

49.0 

29.8 

39.7 

46.6 

61.0 

618 

834 

1,050 

1,263 

615 

917 

1,130 

1,572 

30.0 

37.5 

45.1 

52.5 

32.0 

42.5 

50.0 

65.4 

601 

817 

1,034 

1,246 

594 

896 

1,109 

1,551 

32.0 

40.0 

48.1 

56.0 

34.1 

45.3 

53.3 

69.7 

High Vacuum Units 

SIZE 

3HP 

3HVP 

4HP 

4HVP 

5HP 

5HVP 

6HP 

6HVP 

7HP 

7HVP 

DIA. INLET 

& OUTLET 

DISPL. CU. 

FT./REV. 

1¼"-S 0.045 

1½"-S 0.069 

2½"-S 0.140 

3"-S 0.227 

4"-S 0.367 

RPM 

1,760 

2,265 

2,770 

3,600 

1,760 

2,190 

2,620 

3,600 

1,500 

1,760 

2,100 

2,850 

1,170 

1,760 

1,930 

2,350 

1,170 

1,465 

1,760 

2,050 

6 "Hg 8 "Hg 12 "Hg 14 "Hg 15 "Hg 16 "Hg 


55 1.1 50 1.5 40 2.2 

78 1.4 73 1.9 62 2.8 

100 1.7 95 2.3 85 3.5 79 4.1 76 4.4 

138 2.3 133 3.0 122 4.5 117 5.3 113 5.7 110 6.0 

91 

121 

151 

218 

170 

206 

254 

359 

209 

343 

381 

477 

359 

467 

575 

682 

1.7 

2.1 

2.5 

3.5 

2.9 

3.4 

4.1 

5.6 

3.7 

5.6 

6.1 

7.5 

6.0 

7.5 

9.0 

10.5 

85 

115 

144 

212 

161 

198 

245 

350 

197 

331 

370 

165 

344 

453 

561 

667 

2.3 

2.8 

3.4 

4.6 

3.9 

4.6 

5.5 

7.4 

4.8 

7.4 

8.2 

9.9 

8.0 

10.0 

12.0 

14.0 

72 

102 

132 

199 

144 

180 

228 

333 

173 

307 

345 

441 

314 

422 

531 

637 

3.4 

4.2 

5.1 

6.9 

5.9 

6.9 

8.2 

11.2 

7.4 

11.2 

12.2 

14.9 

12.0 

15.0 

18.1 

21.0 

95 

124 

192 

134 

171 

218 

323 

159 

293 

332 

427 

297 

406 

514 

620 

4.9 

5.9 

8.1 

6.8 

8.0 

9.6 

13.0 

8.7 

13.0 

14.3 

17.4 

14.0 

17.5 

21.1 

24.5 

91 

120 

188 

165 

213 

318 

152 

286 

325 

420 

288 

396 

505 

611 

5.3 

6.3 

8.7 184 9.3 

8.6 

10.3 

14.0 312 14.9 

9.3 

14.0 

15.3 

18.6 

15.0 

18.8 

22.6 

26.3 

278 

317 

412 

278 

387 

495 

601 

14.9 

16.3 

19.9 

16.0 

20.0 

24.1 

28.0 

8HP 

8HVP 

4"-S 0.566 

880 

1,170 

1,375 

1,800 

400 

564 

680 

921 

7.0 

9.3 

10.9 

14.2 

380 

544 

660 

901 

9.3 

12.3 

14.5 

19.0 

338 

502 

618 

859 

13.9 

18.5 

21.7 

28.5 

315 

479 

595 

835 

16.2 

21.6 

25.4 

33.2 

302 

466 

582 

823 

17.4 

23.1 

27.2 

35.6 

453 

569 

809 

24.7 

29.0 

38.0

10 

Sutorbilt Legend Dimensional Data 

Horizontal Configurations 

SIZE WT. CONN. A B C D E F G H J K L M N O P R S T U 

2M 72 S 5 2 2 6 3 ⁄8⁄ 3¼ 3¾ 2¾ 7 9¼ 1 5 5 ⁄32⁄ 10 2¾ 1 15 ⁄16⁄ 1 11 ⁄16⁄ 3 ⁄16⁄ .625 1 ⁄8⁄ 7 ⁄ 

2L 86 S 7 3 2 6 3 ⁄8⁄ 3¼ 3¾ 2¾ 7 9¼ 2 6 5 ⁄32⁄ 12 4¾ 1 15 ⁄16⁄ 1 11 ⁄16⁄ 3 ⁄16⁄ .625 1 ⁄8⁄ 7 ⁄ 

3H 88 S 6¾ 2 11 ⁄16⁄ 2 7 ⁄8⁄ 7¾ 3 7 ⁄8⁄ 5 3½ 8 7 ⁄8⁄ 11¼ 1¼ 5 13 ⁄16⁄ 11 7 ⁄8⁄ 3½ 2 1 11 ⁄16⁄ 3 ⁄16⁄ .750 ¼ ½ x ¾ 

3M 110 S 7 5 ⁄8⁄ 3 1 ⁄8⁄ 2 7 ⁄8⁄ 7¾ 3 7 ⁄8⁄ 5 3½ 8 7 ⁄8⁄ 11¼ 2 6¼ 12¾ 4 3 ⁄8⁄ 2 1 11 ⁄16⁄ 3 ⁄16⁄ .750 ¼ ½ x ¾ 

3L 132 S 10¼ 4 7 ⁄16⁄ 2 7 ⁄8⁄ 7¾ 3 7 ⁄8⁄ 5 3½ 8 7 ⁄8⁄ 11¼ 2½ 7 9 ⁄16⁄ 15 3 ⁄8⁄ 7 2 1 11 ⁄16⁄ 3 ⁄16⁄ .750 ¼ ½ x ¾ 

4H 138 S 7¼ 3 3 8 4 3 ⁄16⁄ 6¼ 4 10 7 ⁄16⁄ 12 3 ⁄8⁄ 1½ 6 7 ⁄8⁄ 13¾ 4 2 3 ⁄8⁄ 2 1 ⁄8⁄ 3 ⁄16⁄ .875 3 ⁄8⁄ ½ x ¾ 

4M 160 S 9½ 4 1 ⁄8⁄ 3 8 4 3 ⁄16⁄ 6¼ 4 10 7 ⁄16⁄ 12 3 ⁄8⁄ 2½ 8 16 6¼ 2 3 ⁄8⁄ 2 1 ⁄8⁄ 3 ⁄16⁄ .875 3 ⁄8⁄ ½ x ¾ 

4L 182 S 12 5 3 ⁄8⁄ 3 8 4 3 ⁄16⁄ 6¼ 4 10 7 ⁄16⁄ 12 3 ⁄8⁄ 3 9¼ 18½ 8¾ 2 3 ⁄8⁄ 2 1 ⁄8⁄ 3 ⁄16⁄ .875 3 ⁄8⁄ ½ x ¾ 

5H 210 S 8½ 3½ 3½ 9 5 3 ⁄16⁄ 7 5 12 3 ⁄16⁄ 15 3 ⁄8⁄ 2½ 8 3 ⁄16⁄ 17 3 ⁄16⁄ 4 7 ⁄8⁄ 2½ 2¼ ¼ 1.125 3 ⁄8⁄ 9 ⁄16⁄ x ¾ 

5M 232 S 10½ 4½ 3½ 9 5 3 ⁄16⁄ 7 5 12 3 ⁄16⁄ 15 3 ⁄8⁄ 4 9 3 ⁄16⁄ 19 3 ⁄16⁄ 6 7 ⁄8⁄ 2½ 2¼ ¼ 1.125 3 ⁄8⁄ 9 ⁄16⁄ x ¾ 

5L 306 S 14½ 6½ 3½ 9 5 3 ⁄16⁄ 7 5 12 3 ⁄16⁄ 15 3 ⁄8⁄ 4 11 3 ⁄16⁄ 23 3 ⁄16⁄ 10 7 ⁄8⁄ 2½ 2¼ ¼ 1.125 3 ⁄8⁄ 9 ⁄16⁄ x ¾ 

6H 318 S 9¾ 3 15 ⁄16⁄ 4 11 6 8¾ 6 14¾ 18 3 9 3 ⁄16⁄ 19 1 ⁄8⁄ 5¾ 2 15 ⁄16⁄ 1 21 ⁄32⁄ 5 ⁄16⁄ 1.375 5 ⁄8⁄ ¾ x 1 

6M 366 S 13 5 9 ⁄16⁄ 4 11 6 3 ⁄16⁄ 8¾ 6 15 15 ⁄16⁄ 18 5 10 13 ⁄16⁄ 22 3 ⁄8⁄ 9 2 15 ⁄16⁄ 1 21 ⁄32⁄ 5 ⁄16⁄ 1.375 5 ⁄8⁄ ¾ x 1 

6L 538 F 20 9 1 ⁄16⁄ 4 11 7½ 8¾ 6 16¼ 18 6 14 5 ⁄16⁄ 29 3 ⁄8⁄ 16 2 15 ⁄16⁄ 1 21 ⁄32⁄ 5 ⁄16⁄ 1.375 5 ⁄8⁄ ¾ x 1 

7H 482 S 12 4 5 ⁄8⁄ 5½ 15 9 11 ⁄16⁄ 11 7 20 11 ⁄16⁄ 22 4 10 21 1 ⁄8⁄ 5¾ 3 3 ⁄16⁄ 2 7 ⁄8⁄ 3 ⁄8⁄ 1.562 ½ ¾ x 1 

7M 638 F 17½ 7 3 ⁄8⁄ 5½ 15 8½ 11 7 19½ 22 6 12¾ 26 5 ⁄8⁄ 11¼ 3 3 ⁄16⁄ 2 7 ⁄8⁄ 3 ⁄8⁄ 1.562 ½ ¾ x 1 

7L 770 F 24½ 10 7 ⁄8⁄ 5½ 15 8½ 11 7 19½ 22 8 16¼ 33 5 ⁄8⁄ 18¼ 3 3 ⁄16⁄ 2 7 ⁄8⁄ 3 ⁄8⁄ 1.562 ½ ¾ x 1 

8H 736 S 13½ 5¾ 6 16 10 12½ 8 22½ 25¼ 4 11 11 ⁄16⁄ 24 7¾ 3 7 ⁄8⁄ 3 3 ⁄8⁄ 3 ⁄8⁄ 1.750 ½ ¾ x 1 

8M 938 F 19 8½ 6 16 10 12½ 8 22½ 25¼ 8 14 7 ⁄16⁄ 29½ 13¼ 3 7 ⁄8⁄ 3 3 ⁄8⁄ 3 ⁄8⁄ 1.750 ½ ¾ x 1 

8L 1,170 F 27 12½ 6 16 10 12½ 8 22½ 25¼ 10 18 7 ⁄16⁄ 37½ 21¾ 3 7 ⁄8⁄ 3 3 ⁄8⁄ 3 ⁄8⁄ 1.750 ½ ¾ x 1 

7 ⁄16 

7 ⁄16 

S=Threaded connections standard NPT. F=flange connections. Inlet and outlet connections are the same type and size. 


Dimensions are in inches. Weights are in pounds and include shipping cartons or pallets.

11 

Vertical Configurations 

SIZE WT. CONN. A B C D E F G H J K L M N O P R S T U 

2MV 72 S 5 2 1½ 5 5 ⁄8 3 ½ 4 7 ⁄8 6 ¼ 9 ½ 6 ½ 1 5 5 ⁄32 10 2 ¾ 1 15 ⁄16 1 11 ⁄16 

2LV 86 S 7 3 1½ 5 5 ⁄8 3 ½ 4 7 ⁄8 6 ¼ 9 ½ 6 ½ 2 6 5 ⁄32 12 4¾ 1 15 ⁄16 1 11 ⁄16 

3 

⁄16 .625 1 

⁄8 

3 

⁄16 .625 1 

⁄8 

7 

⁄16 

7 

⁄16 

3HV 88 S 6 ¾ 2 11 ⁄16 2 ½ 6 ¾ 4 ½ 6 ¼ 8 11 7 ⁄8 7 ¾ 1¼ 5 13 ⁄16 11 7 ⁄8 3 ½ 2 1 11 ⁄16 

3MV 110 S 7 5 ⁄8 3 1 ⁄16 2 ½ 6 ¾ 4 ½ 6 ¼ 8 11 7 ⁄8 7 ¾ 2 6 ¼ 12 ¾ 4 3 ⁄8 2 1 11 ⁄16 

3LV 132 S 10 ¼ 4 3 ⁄8 2 ½ 6 ¾ 4 ½ 6 ¼ 8 11 7 ⁄8 7 ¾ 2 ½ 7 9 ⁄16 15 3 ⁄8 7 2 1 11 ⁄16 

4HV 138 S 7 ¼ 3 3 8 4 ½ 6 ½ 8 ½ 12 11 ⁄16 8 3 ⁄8 1 ½ 6 7 ⁄8 13 ¾ 4 2 3 ⁄8 2 1 ⁄8 

4MV 160 S 9 ½ 4 1 ⁄8 3 8 4 ½ 6 ½ 8 ½ 12 11 ⁄16 8 3 ⁄8 2 ½ 8 16 6 ¼ 2 3 ⁄8 2 1 ⁄8 

4LV 182 S 12 5 3 ⁄8 3 8 4 ½ 6 ½ 8 ½ 12 11 ⁄16 8 3 ⁄8 3 9 ¼ 18 ½ 8 ¾ 2 3 ⁄8 2 1 ⁄8 

3 

⁄16 .750 ¼ ½ x ¾ 

3 

⁄16 .750 ¼ ½ x ¾ 

3 

⁄16 .750 ¼ ½ x ¾ 

3 

⁄16 .875 3 

⁄8 ½ x ¾ 

3 

⁄16 .875 3 

⁄8 ½ x ¾ 

3 

⁄16 .875 3 

⁄8 ½ x ¾ 

5HV 210 S 8 ½ 3 ½ 3 ½ 9 5 ½ 8 10 ½ 15 11 ⁄16 10 3 ⁄8 2 ½ 8 3 ⁄16 17 3 ⁄16 4 7 ⁄8 2 ½ 2 ¼ ¼ 1.125 3 

⁄8 

5MV 232 S 10 ½ 4 ½ 3 ½ 9 5 ½ 8 10 ½ 15 11 ⁄16 10 3 ⁄8 4 9 3 ⁄16 19 3 ⁄16 6 7 ⁄8 2 ½ 2 ¼ ¼ 1.125 3 

⁄8 

5LV 306 S 14 ½ 6 ½ 3 ½ 9 5 ½ 8 10 ½ 15 11 ⁄16 10 3 ⁄8 4 11 3 ⁄16 23 3 ⁄16 10 7 ⁄8 2 ½ 2 ¼ ¼ 1.125 3 

⁄8 

9 

⁄16 x ¾ 

9 

⁄16 x ¾ 

9 

⁄16 x ¾ 

6HV 318 S 9 ¾ 3 15 ⁄16 4 11 8 ¾ 11¾ 14¾ 20 ¾ 12 3 9 3 ⁄16 19 1 ⁄8 5 ¾ 2 15 ⁄16 1 21 ⁄32 

6MV 366 S 13 5 9 ⁄16 4 11 8 ¾ 11¾ 14¾ 20 ¾ 12 3 ⁄8 5 10 13 ⁄16 22 3 ⁄8 9 2 15 ⁄16 1 21 ⁄32 

6LV 538 F 20 9 1 ⁄16 4 11 8 ¾ 11¾ 14¾ 20 ¾ 15 6 14 5 ⁄16 29 3 ⁄8 16 2 15 ⁄16 1 21 ⁄32 

7HV 482 S 12 4 5 ⁄8 5 ½ 14 11 14 ½ 18 25 ½ 19 3 ⁄8 4 10 21 1 ⁄8 5 ¾ 3 3 ⁄16 2 7 ⁄8 

7MV 638 F 17½ 7 3 ⁄8 5 ½ 14 11 14 ½ 18 25 ½ 17 6 12 ¾ 26 5 ⁄8 11¼ 3 3 ⁄16 2 7 ⁄8 

7LV 770 F 24 ½ 10 7 ⁄8 5 ½ 14 11 14 ½ 18 25 ½ 17 8 16 ¼ 33 5 ⁄8 18 ¼ 3 3 ⁄16 2 7 ⁄8 

8HV 736 S 13 ½ 5 ¾ 6 16 12 ½ 16 ½ 20 ½ 29 1 ⁄8 20 4 11 11 ⁄16 24 7 ¾ 3 7 ⁄8 3 3 ⁄8 

8MV 938 F 19 8 ½ 6 16 12 ½ 16 ½ 20 ½ 29 1 ⁄8 20 8 14 7 ⁄16 29 ½ 13 ¼ 3 7 ⁄8 3 3 ⁄8 

8LV 1,170 F 27 12 ½ 6 16 12 ½ 16 ½ 20 ½ 29 1 ⁄8 20 10 18 7 ⁄16 37 ½ 21¼ 3 7 ⁄8 3 3 ⁄8 

5 

⁄16 1.375 5 

⁄8 ¾ x 1 

5 

⁄16 1.375 5 

⁄8 ¾ x 1 

5 

⁄16 1.375 5 

⁄8 ¾ x 1 

3 

⁄8 1.562 ½ ¾ x 1 

3 

⁄8 1.562 ½ ¾ x 1 

3 

⁄8 1.562 ½ ¾ x 1 

3 

⁄8 1.750 ½ ¾ x 1 

3 

⁄8 1.750 ½ ¾ x 1 

3 

⁄8 1.750 ½ ¾ x 1 


Dimensions are in inches. Weights are in pounds and include shipping cartons or pallets.

Protect your Sutorbilt investment with AEON 

PD, the only lubricant specially formulated for 

all blowers in any environment 

• 100% synthetic for matchless service life 

• Retains its superior lubricating properties a minimum 

of four times longer than a premium grade mineral oil 

at most operating conditions 

• Eliminates seasonal oil viscosity grade changes 

• Superior lubrication in severe, high temperature 

applications 

• Available from your local authorized Sutorbilt 

distributor in convenient sizes to meet your needs 

• Food grade lubricant available 

Retain your Sutorbilt advantage with 

Genuine Gardner Denver Replacement Parts 

• Gardner Denver guarantees to supply the 

proper parts for your specific blower every time. 

Replacement parts incorporate the most recent 

design upgrades. 

• All parts meet Gardner Denver original manufacturing 

specifications and tolerances for guaranteed fit and 

function. 

• Pre-packaged overhaul kits with detailed service 

manuals are available from your local authorized 

Sutorbilt distributor. 

For additional information contact your local representative or 

Gardner Denver, 1800 Gardner Expressway, Quincy, IL 62305 

Customer Service Department 

Telephone: (800) 682-9868 FAX: (217) 221-8780 

Sales and Service in all major cities. 

www.GardnerDenver.com pd.blowers@gardnerdenver.com 

Member ©2007 Gardner Denver, Inc. Litho in U.S.A. PD-SB-L 1st Ed. 4/07

Product Data Sheet 

Horizontal A.C. Motors 

Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled 

841 PLUS® 

• Designed to Exceed IEEE 841 Standard - 2000 

• Premium Efficient Design with Patented "Inverter Grade ® " Insulation System 

• Inverter Duty - 10:1 variable, 5:1 constant torque 

• New Oversized Bearings - Exceeds 50,000 hours belted and 130,000 hours direct 

drive bearing life 

• Oversized Conduit Boxes - Twice NEMA Volume 

• 1 - 500 HP; 3600 through 900 rpm; custom or stock product 

• ALLGUARD ® Motor Quality System 

• 0.05 IPS peak vibration 

©Emerson Motor Company, 2002; All Rights Reserved

Product Overview 

The new 841 PLUS ® motor is designed for 

constant speed as well as inverter duty 

applications typically found in Petro/Chemical, 

Pulp & Paper, Automotive, Mining and 

Wastewater treatment industries. The best 

performing motor in the industry for severe 

environments, the 841 PLUS ® motor consists 

of an all cast iron construction along 

with a NEMA premium efficient electrical 

package designed to lower your overall 

operating costs. Combine these features 

with a 5 year warranty and you have the 

most versatile motor in the industry today. 

Now, the 841 PLUS ® comes standard with 

our patented "Inverter Grade" insulation 

system which includes the "Pulse 

Resistant" magnet wire. The enhanced 

841 PLUS motor fully complies with the 

NEMA MG-1, Part 31 specification for 

inverter duty applications. The end result 

is a motor capable of withstanding spike 

and transient voltages induced by IBGT 

drives. Over and above the standard insulation 

package, our "Inverter Grade" insulation 

system includes: additional lacing 

on the end turns for coil rigidity, multiple 

dips and bake for added protection of a 

coil-to-coil short, additional phase paper to 

protect from a phase-to-phase arc, and 

pulse resistant magnet wire to protect 

against high voltage spikes. The net result 

is an off-the-shelf motor that meets the 

end user's sine wave power needs as well 

as any adjustable frequency 5:1 constant 

torque or 10:1 variable torque needs. 

In addition to the motor’s ability to meet 

multiple power requirements, additional 

enhancements have been added to make 

the 841 PLUS ® the most versatile machine 

in the industry. These enhanced product 

features include: 

◆ A rugged bearing system that accommodates 

one bearing size on both ends of 

the motor; 

◆ A motor bearing life of 50,000 hrs belted 

or more than 130,000 hours of directcoupled; 

◆ VBXX Inpro/Seals on both ends of the 

motor. The first motor manufacturer to 

standardize on the new VBXX Seal. VBXX 

can protect the bearing in even harsher 

and higher volume liquid enviroments and 

in either a vertical or horizontal position. 

◆ 0.05 inches per second (IPS) peak 

vibration overall, with banded test 

limits/results included. 

The end user's benefits to purchasing the 

841 PLUS motor are reduced inventory to 

meet a wide variety of motor requirements 

and peace of mind knowing that if the line 

shuts down at 3:00 a.m. the correct motor 

will be in stock and installed on demand. 

The 841 PLUS exceeds NEMA MG-1, 

Part 31

Product Features 

Precision Balanced 

Rotors 

VBXX Inpro/Seal 

Premium 

Effeciency Design 

Insulation System 

Foot Flatness 

Oversized Conduit 

Box 

Oversized Bearings 

Warranty 

0.05 in/sec vibration (1/3 NEMA standard). Currently 

available from 140 through 440 T frame. Reduces overall 

system vibrations - extending equipment life. 

The first motor manufactured to standardize on VBXX seals 

on both ends of the motor to inhibit the passage of contaminants 

into the bearing system, prolong bearing life, and 

reduce system downtime. 

Meets "NEMA Premium" and CEE efficiency levels. With 

the use of low loss silicon steel, premium efficient designs 

lower energy costs and operating temperatures. 

Class F insulation materials with less than 80˚ C temperature 

rise at rated load provides longer motor life. 

Precision machined foot flatness ensures proper equipment 

alignment (less than 0.005" tolerance) 

Dual gasketed, rotatable conduit box protects against contaminants 

and positions non-braided, non-wicking motor 

leads. 

Oversized bearings provide 130,000 hour direct connected 

(50,000 hour minimum belted) bearing life improving motor 

reliability and reducing system downtime. 

5 year warranty for sine wave power and 3 year warranty 

for inverter duty applications.

Summary 

841 PLUS ® Motor 

Stock Motors 

Custom & Conversion Motors: 

• 1 through 200 Horsepower 

• 2, 4, or 6 pole designs 

• 460 and 575 volt 

• Constant or variable torque 

• 1-10 hp C-Face Footless 

• 1 through 500 Horsepower 

• 2, 4, 6, or 8 pole designs 

• 200, 230, 460, 575, 2300 & 4000 volts 

• Constant or variable torque 

• C & D flange kits available 140-440 

frame 

841 PLUS® features same size bearings and “Inverter Grade” 

insulation for constant and variable speed inverter duty applications. 

Emerson Motor Technologies, a global leader in the 

design and manufacture of electrical motors, provides a 

complete line of general and special purpose electric 

motors from 1/200 through 4,000 horsepower. Brands 

such Emerson, Doerr, U.S. Electrical Motors, Hurst, and 

Switch Reluctance Drives, allow Emerson Motor 

Technologies to support a wide variety of applications 

including commercial and industrial, appliance, hermetic, 

automotive, and HVAC. For more information about 

Emerson Motor Technologies visit www.emersonmotors.com. 

St. Louis-based Emerson (www.gotoemerson.com) 

is a global leader in bringing technology and 

engineering together to provide innovative solutions to 

customers in industrial automation; process control; heating, 

ventilating and air conditioning; electronics and 

telecommunications; and appliance and tools. Sales in 

fiscal 2001 were $15.5 billion. 

Emerson Motor Co. 

8100 West Florissant Ave. 

St. Louis, MO 63136 

Phone: 888 637 7333 

Fax: 314 553 2087 

www.usmotors.com 

www.emersonmotors.com 

PDS 841 Rev. 02/04 


U.S. ELECTRICAL MOTORS 

1800 

S 

P 

E 

E 

D 

1790 

25 

K 

. 

W 

. 

20 

50 

C 

U 

R 

R 

E 

N 

T 

40 

P 

C 

T 

. 

100 

EFFICIENCY 

POWER FACTOR 

AMPS 

I 

N 

I 

N 

P 

U 

T 

I 

N 

E 

F 

F 

. 

INPUT POWER 

RPM 

1780 

15 

30 

75 

R 

P 

M 

A 

M 

P 

S 

A 

N 

D 

1770 

10 

20 

50 

DISCLAIMER 

P 

. 

F 

. 

THE GRAPH DATA IS 

TYPICAL UNLESS 

NOTED OTHERWISE. 

1760 

5 

10 

25 

BJ09 

20.00 Hp SF 1.15 

460 Volts 60 Hz 

40º C 

1750 

0 

0 

0 

MPI = 28684 

5.00 10.00 15.00 20.00 25.00 

HORSEPOWER 

11-04-2008


1800 

S 

P 

E 

E 

D 

1790 

25 

K 

. 

W 

. 

20 

50 

C 

U 

R 

R 

E 

N 

T 

40 

P 

C 

T 

. 

100 

EFFICIENCY 

POWER FACTOR 

AMPS 

I 

N 

I 

N 

P 

U 

T 

I 

N 

E 

F 

F 

. 

INPUT POWER 

RPM 

1780 

15 

30 

75 

R 

P 

M 

A 

M 

P 

S 

A 

N 

D 

1770 

10 

20 

50 

DISCLAIMER 

P 

. 

F 

. 




1760 

5 

10 

25 

BJ09 

20.00 Hp SF 1.15 


40º C 

1750 

0 

0 

0 

MPI = 28684 

14.00 28.00 42.00 56.00 70.00 

TORQUE IN LB-FT 

11-04-2008


1 

P 

O 

W 

E 

R 

175 

C 

U 

R 

R 

E 

N 

T 

140 

175 

140 

T 

O 

R 

Q 

U 

E 

TORQUE 

CURRENT 

POWER FACTOR 

F 

A 

C 

T 

O 

R 

I 

N 

I 

N 

0.75 

105 

105 

A 

M 

P 

S 

F 

T 

/ 

L 

B 

0.5 

70 

70 

DISCLAIMER 




0.25 

35 

35 

BJ09 

20.00 Hp SF 1.15 


40º C 

0 

0 

0 

MPI = 28684 

300 600 900 1200 1500 1800 

RPM 

11-04-2008

Installation, Operation & 

Maintenance Instructions 

For your safety, read and retain this manual 

E 

N 

G 

L 

I 

S 

H 

GEARMOTORS 

HORIZONTAL 

MOTORS 

TITAN MOTORS 

VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES 

VERTICAL MOTORS 

Emerson Motor Company 


PO Box 36912 


Send for free brochure by product name 448888 Rev. 01/04

E 

N 

G 

L 

I 

S 

H 

SAFETY FIRST 

High voltage and rotating parts can cause serious or fatal injury. 

Safe installation, operation and maintenance must be performed by 

qualified personnel. Familiarization with, and adherence to, NEMA MG2, the National 

Electrical Code (NEC), and local codes is required. It is important to observe safety 

precautions to protect personnel from possible injury. 

PERSONNEL SHOULD BE INSTRUCTED TO: 

1. Be familiar with the equipment and read all instructions thoroughly before installing or working 

on equipment. 

2. Avoid contact with energized circuits or rotating parts. 

3. Disconnect all power sources before initiating any maintenance or repair. 

4. Act with care in accordance with prescribed procedures in handling and lifting this equipment. 

5. Be sure unit is electrically grounded in accordance with code requirements. 

6. Be sure equipment is properly enclosed or protected to prevent access by children or other 

unauthorized personnel to prevent possible accidents. 

7. Be sure shaft key is fully captive before unit is energized. 

8. Avoid contact with capacitors until safe discharge procedures have been completed. 

9. Provide proper guarding for personnel against rotating parts and applications involving high 

inertia loads which can cause overspeed. 

10. Avoid extended exposure to equipment with high noise levels. 

INSPECTION AND HANDLING 

Inspect unit to make sure no damage has occurred during shipment. Check nameplate for correct 

speed, horsepower, voltage, hertz and phase for conformance with power supply and equipment. 

Units should be lifted using all eyebolts or lugs if provided. These 

eyebolts or lugs are provided for lifting this unit only and must not 

be used to lift any additional weight. Lifting angle, from shank of eyebolt, must not exceed 

30 degrees for machines with single and 45 degrees for machines with multiple lifting means. 

Replacement eyebolts must be per ASTM A489 or equivalent. All eyebolts must be securely 

tightened. Be careful not to touch overhead power lines with lifting equipment. Failure to 

observe this warning may result in serious personal injury. 

STORAGE 

Units should be stored indoors, in a clean, dry location & winding should be protected from excessive 

moisture absorption. NOTE: If motors are to be stored for over one year, refer to Emerson Motor 

Company. If motors are to be stored for over one year and if gear and belt transmission units are to 

be stored for over six months, refer to Emerson Motor Company. 

LOCATION 

Use only UL Listed Hazardous Location Motors for service in 

Hazardous Locations as defined in Article 500 of the NEC. Units 

should be located in a clean, well-ventilated area. Units should be located in a suitable 

enclosure or protected to prevent access by children or other unauthorized personnel to 

prevent possible accidents. 

2-En

INSTALLATION / MOUNTING 

Mount unit on a firm, flat surface sufficiently rigid to prevent vibration. Drive belts and chains should 

be tensioned in accordance with supplier recommendations. Couplings should be properly aligned 

and balanced. For belt, chain and gear drive selection refer to the drive or equipment manufacturer. 

For application of drive equipment refer to applicable information in NEMA MG1. 

Motors have been dynamically balanced using a half key the same length as the full key shipped 

with the motor. If pulley length keyway is less than this length, rework long key by removing one-half 

of excess length between pulley and end of key to maintain balance. 

Do not restrict motor ventilation. Unless otherwise specified on nameplate, motor is designed for 

operation in accordance with NEMA MG1 “Usual Service Conditions” which states an ambient temperature 

range of -15º C to 40º C (5º F to 104º F). Standard grease lubricated units are suitable for 

operation within this temperature range. Special lubricants may be required for ambient temperatures 

outside of this range. Note: Motors operating under rated load and allowable ambient conditions may 

feel hot when touched; this is normal and should not be cause for concern. When in doubt, measure 

frame surface temperature and confer with nearest office. Enclosed motors normally have condensation 

drain openings. Insure that drain openings are properly located and open (plugs removed) for 

the motor mounting position. Drain openings should be at lowest point of end brackets, frame housing 

and terminal housing when the motor is installed. This may require modification of motor to 

accomplish. If unit appears wet, and/or has been stored in a damp location, dry out thoroughly and 

check for adequate insulation resistance to ground before operating. 

Guards should be provided for all exposed rotating parts to 

prevent possible personal injury. Keep fingers and foreign objects 

away from ventilation and other openings. Applications involving high inertia loads may 

damage this equipment due to motor overspeed during coast shutdown. Such applications 

should be referred to Emerson Motor Company. 

Do not force drive coupling or other equipment onto shaft, as 

bearing damage may result. 

E 

N 

G 

L 

I 

S 

H 

POWER SUPPLY AND CONNECTIONS 

The power supply must agree with values on nameplate. Terminal voltage should not vary more 

than ±10% of nameplate voltage at rated frequency. Unbalanced line voltage, greater than one percent, 

can cause overheating. Do not exceed the rated load amperes on the nameplate. Starting controls 

and overload protection should be properly sized in accordance with the NEC and the control 

manufacturer's recommendations. 

Motor connections should be made by following instructions on connection diagram. Determine direction 

of rotation before connecting driven equipment. If direction of rotation label is supplied, operate only 

in specified direction. Rotation may be reversed on three phase motors by interchanging any two line 

connections. On single phase motors interchange leads per connection diagram on motor. Wiring of 

units, controls and grounding shall be in accordance with local and NEC requirements. 

Failure to properly ground unit may cause serious injury to 

personnel. Where unexpected starting could be hazardous to 

personnel, do not use automatic reset starting devices. 

USE OF VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 

Electric motors can be detrimentally affected when applied with variable frequency drives (VFD's). 

The non-sinusoidal waveforms of VFD's have harmonic content which causes additional motor 

heating; and high voltage peaks. 

3-En

E 

N 

G 

L 

I 

S 

H 

Other effects of VFD's on motor performance include reduced efficiency, increased load current, 

vibration and noise. Standard motors utilized with VFD's must be limited to those application considerations 

defined in NEMA MG-1 Part 30. Refer to PDS #811-215 available at www.usmotors.com. 

NEMA MG-1 Part 31 defines performance and application considerations for Definite-Purpose 

Inverter Fed Motors. To insure satisfactory performance and reliability, U.S. Electrical Motors offers 

and recommends nameplated inverter duty motor products which meet the requirements of NEMA 

MG-1 Part 31. The use of non-inverter duty motors may result in unsatisfactory performance or premature 

failure, which may not be warrantable under the Terms and Conditions of Sale. Contact your 

Emerson Motor Company Field Sales Engineer for technical assistance for motor selection, application 

and warranty details. 

OIL LUBRICATION 

Most oil lubricated units are shipped without oil. Refer to Instruction Manual with unit for specific type 

and grade of oil to be used, change interval and level. If lubrication instructions specify synthetic oil, 

do not substitute. 

For applications in the food and drug industry (including animal 

food), consult the petroleum supplier for lubricants that are 

acceptable to the Food and Drug Administration and other governing bodies. 

MAINTENANCE 

Inspect units at regular intervals. Keep units clean and ventilation openings clear of dust, dirt or other 

debris. Lubricate units per this operating instruction folder and instruction plate on unit. Excessive 

lubrication may damage the unit. Do not over grease. 

Disconnect all power sources to the unit and discharge all parts 

which may retain an electrical charge before attempting any 

maintenance or repair. Screen and covers must be maintained in place when unit is in 

operation. Failure to observe this warning may result in personal injury. 

U.L. Listed Motors for use in Hazardous Locations: Repair of these motors must be made by 

the manufacturer or manufacturer's authorized service station approved to repair U.L. Listed 

Motors. The U.L. listing applies to the electric motor only and not the belt or gear 

transmissions or other devices that may be connected to the motor. 

COOLING TOWER DUTY MOTORS 

During installation, insure drain plugs are removed from lower drain holes in bracket and outlet box. 

All upper drain holes must be plugged at all times. External umbrella seal must be in place for shaft 

up applications. Motors with Bearing numbers “XXXX-2RS” are double sealed and not to be relubricated. 

VARIDRIVE UNITS 

Do not turn speed control hand wheel while unit is not operating; this may cause damage to the unit. 

Hand wheel position is a relative speed indication only. Use direct speed sensing accessory for precise 

speed indication. Units equipped with electric remote speed indicator accessory are not calibrated 

at the factory and must be calibrated at site. Refer to calibration instructions with the unit. 

VARIDRIVES equipped with ENDOLUBE construction do not require lubrication of the sliding 

Varidisc. Operate VARIDRIVE through its entire speed range weekly. 

4-En

Do not force control wheel beyond speed limits shown on the 

nameplate. The mechanism and belt are designed for the rated 

speed and horsepower shown on the nameplate. Operation beyond these limits may result in 

damage to the belt and mechanism and possible injury to personnel. The covers on the frame 

case must not be removed or left off while unit is in operation. Do not attempt to disassemble 

or repair the driven pulley discs because high spring tension may be released causing injury 

to personnel. Refer to authorized Service Center. Refer to VARIDRIVE Installation and 

Maintenance Manual for complete belt changing instructions. For additional detailed 

information, request specific product installation and maintenance manual. 

GREASE LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS 

Units are prelubricated at the factory and do not require initial lubrication. Relubricating interval 

depends upon speed, type of bearing and service. Refer to Table 1 for suggested regreasing intervals. 

Operating conditions may dictate more frequent lubrication. Motor must be at rest and electrical 

controls should be locked open to prevent energizing while motor is being serviced (refer to section 

on Safety). If motor is being taken out of storage, refer to storage procedures. 

To relubricate bearings, remove the drain plug. Inspect grease drain and remove any blockage with 

a mechanical probe taking care not to damage bearing. 

Under no circumstances should a mechanical probe be used while 

the motor is in operation. Add new grease at the grease inlet, refer 

to Table 1 for replenishment quantities. New grease must be compatible with grease in the 

motor (See Caution Note). Run the motor for 15 to 30 minutes with the drain plug removed 

to allow purging of any excess grease. Shut off unit and replace the drain plug. Return motor 

to service. Some motors have sealed bearings and are not regreasable. 

E 

N 

G 

L 

I 

S 

H 

Over greasing can cause excessive bearing temperatures, premature lubricant breakdown 

and bearing failure. Care should be exercised against over greasing. 

Table 1 

Recommended Grease Replenishment Quantities & Intervals 

(For lubrication of units in service) 

Bearing Bearing Grease 

Number-Common Number-AFBMA FL Oz. Lubrication Interval 

62XX 

6203-6207 

6208-6212 

6213-6215 

6218-6220 

6221-6228 

63XX 

6303-6306 

6307-6309 

6310-6311 

6312-6315 

6316-6320 

XXBC02 

17-35 

40-60 

65-75 

80-100 

105-140 

XXBC03 

17-30 

35-45 

50-55 

60-75 

80-100 

For motors mounted vertically or in hostile environments, reduce intervals shown by 50 percent. 

Refer to motor nameplate for bearings provided on a specific motor. 

For bearings not listed in table above, the amount of grease required may be calculated by the 

formula: 

G=0.11 x D x B 

Where; 

G = Quantity of grease in fluid ounces. 

D = Outside diameter of bearing in inches. 

B = Width of bearing in inches. 

5-En 

0.2 

0.4 

0.6 

1.0 

1.8 

3600 RPM 

2 Years 

1 Year 

1 Year 

6 Mos. 

6 Mos. 

1800 RPM 

3 Years 

2 Years 

2 Years 

1 Year 

1 Year 

1200 RPM 

3 Years 

2 Years 

2 Years 

2 Years 

1 Year

E 

N 

G 

L 

I 

S 

H 

Table 2 

RECOMMENDED GREASES 

THE FOLLOWING GREASES ARE INTERCHANGEABLE WITH THE GREASE AS PROVIDED IN 

UNITS SUPPLIED FROM FACTORY (UNLESS STATED OTHERWISE ON A LUBRICATION 

NAMEPLATE PROVIDED ON MOTOR). 

MANUFACTURER GREASE (NLGI No. 2) 

EXXON CORP. 

POLYREX - EM 

CHEVRON U.S.A. INC. SRI NO. 2 

Greases of different bases (lithium, polyurea, clay, etc.) may not be 

compatible when mixed. Mixing such greases can result in reduced 

lubricant life and premature bearing failure. When necessary, prevent such intermixing by 

disassembling the motor, removing all old grease from bearings and housings (including all 

grease fill and drain holes). Inspect and replace damaged bearings. Fill bearing housings and 

bearing approximately 30% full of new grease. Remove any excess grease extending beyond 

the edges of the bearing races and retainers. Refer to Table 2 for recommended greases. 

WARRANTY 

LIMITED WARRANTY 

All U.S.E.M. products are warranted against defects in workmanship and materials for 12 months 

from date of installation, not to exceed 18 months from date of shipment from EMC. Some of 

U.S.E.M's products carry a warranty period longer than 12 months. Please refer to the current price 

catalog or to EMC for details on specific products. This limited warranty does not apply to any product 

which has been subject to misuse, misapplication, neglect (including without limitation, inadequate 

maintenance), accident, improper installation, modification, adjustment, or repair. This constitutes 

EMC's only warranty in connection with this sale and is in lieu of all other warranties, expressed 

or implied, written or oral. THERE ARE NO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR 

FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THAT APPLY TO THIS SALE. No employee, agent, 

dealer or other person is authorized to give any warranties on behalf of EMC nor to assume for EMC 

any other liability in connection with any of its products. 

EXCLUSIVE REMEDY 

EMC's liability shall be limited exclusively to repairing or replacing any product found by EMC to be 

defective, or at EMC's option, to refund the purchase price of its product. Such product shall be 

returned, freight prepaid, to the nearest U.S.E.M. authorized service station or EMC factory. It is 

agreed that such replacement, repair, or refund be the sole and exclusive remedies available from 

EMC. EMC shall not be liable for damages of any sort whatsoever beyond these exclusive remedies 

including incidental and consequential damages regardless of whether any claim is based upon 

contract, negligence, strict liability, tort, warranty, or other basis. The repair or replacement of the 

product, or the refund of the purchase price, at EMC's option, constitutes fulfillment of all liabilities 

of EMC to the buyer for defective products. 

RENEWAL PARTS AND WARRANTY SERVICE 

When inquiring for renewal parts, call the nearest U.S. Electrical Motors Parts Stocking Distributor. 

For warranty service, call the nearest U.S. Electrical Motors Authorized Service Station. Give them 

complete Nameplate data, including identification number, etc. 

Request installation and maintenance manuals by product name. 

6-En

FOR SERVICE CALL: 

NEAREST U.S.E.M. AUTHORIZED SERVICE STATION OR U.S.E.M. PRODUCT 

SERVICE ST. LOUIS, MO 1-800-566-1418 

VISIT OUR WEB SITE 

www.usmotors.com 

SALES REGION PHONE TOLL-FREE FAX 

EMERSON MOTOR COMPANY 

ST. LOUIS, MO 888 - 637 - 7333 314 - 553 - 2087 

INTERNATIONAL SALES 314 - 553 - 4157 N/A 314 - 553 - 2135 

MONTREAL, QUEBEC/CAN. 514 - 332 - 1880 800 - 361 - 5509 514 - 332 - 5912 

MARKHAM, ONTARIO/CAN. 905 - 475 - 4670 N/A 905 - 475 - 4672 

MONTERREY, MEXICO 011 - 52818 - 389 - 1300 N/A 011 - 52818 - 389 - 1310 

CARACAS, VENEZUELA 582 - 237 - 7522 N/A 582 - 232 - 9727 

BOGOTÁ, COLOMBIA 571 - 439 - 5420 N/A 571 - 439 - 5417 

E 

N 

G 

L 

I 

S 

H 

Notes 

______________________________________________________ 

______________________________________________________ 

______________________________________________________ 

______________________________________________________ 

______________________________________________________ 

______________________________________________________ 

______________________________________________________ 

______________________________________________________ 

______________________________________________________ 

______________________________________________________ 

______________________________________________________ 

______________________________________________________ 

______________________________________________________ 

______________________________________________________ 

______________________________________________________ 

______________________________________________________ 

______________________________________________________ 

______________________________________________________ 

______________________________________________________ 

______________________________________________________ 

7-En

E 

N 

G 

L 

I 

S 

H 

Notes 

_____________________________________________________ 

_____________________________________________________ 

_____________________________________________________ 

_____________________________________________________ 

_____________________________________________________ 

_____________________________________________________ 

_____________________________________________________ 

_____________________________________________________ 

_____________________________________________________ 

_____________________________________________________ 

_____________________________________________________ 

_____________________________________________________ 

_____________________________________________________ 

_____________________________________________________ 

_____________________________________________________ 

_____________________________________________________ 

_____________________________________________________ 

_____________________________________________________ 

_____________________________________________________ 

_____________________________________________________ 

_____________________________________________________ 

_____________________________________________________ 

_____________________________________________________ 

_____________________________________________________ 

_____________________________________________________ 

_____________________________________________________ 

_____________________________________________________ 

_____________________________________________________ 

_____________________________________________________ 

_____________________________________________________ 

_____________________________________________________ 

_____________________________________________________ 

_____________________________________________________ 

_____________________________________________________ 

_____________________________________________________ 

_____________________________________________________ 

_____________________________________________________ 

_____________________________________________________ 

8-En

Shaft Coupler Body 

S-Flex Shaft Coupling, Body Style 8S, Bore Dia 1 1/8 In, Rated Torque 1135 In-Lb, Max RPM 

4500, Keyway Length 1/4 In, Keyway Width 1/8 In 

Additional Info 

S-Flex Shaft Couplings 

Help to protect equipment from misalignment, vibration, and shock loads. 

Rubber-in-shear design utilizes a simple, industry-wide accepted design. 

Assembly and maintenance are easy and no lubrication is required. Angular misalignment 

capability is 1 Degree with EPDM rubber inserts and 1/4 Degree with H inserts. A complete 

coupling consists of two flanges and one insert (see photo). The 4J body is made of die-cast 

zinc alloy; the 5J and above flanges are constructed of cast iron. Each flange has a keyway and 

two set screws (one over the key and one at 90 Degree). 

Tech Specs 

• Item: S-Flex Shaft Coupling 

• Body Style: 8S 

• Bore Dia. (In.): 1 1/8 

• Length through Bore (In.): 2.100 

• Rated Torque (In.-Lb.): 1135 

• Max. RPM: 4500 

• Keyway Length (In.): 1/4 

• Keyway Width (In.): 1/8 

• Outside Dia. (In.): 5 7/16 

• Length (In.): 4 7/16 

• Width (In.): 2.100 

• Height (In.): 5.450 

• Hub Dia. (In.): 3.250 

• Material of Construction: Cast-iron 

• Setscrew Location: One over the Key and One at 90 Degrees 

• Max. Angular Misalignment: 1 Degree with EPDM Rubber Inserts and 1/4 Degree with H 

Inserts 

• Ideal For: Applications In Motors, Pumps, Compressors, Blowers, Mixers and Conveyors

Shaft Coupler Body 

S-Flex Shaft Coupling, Body Style 8S, Bore Dia 1 5/8 In, Rated Torque 1135 In-Lb, Max RPM 

4500, Keyway Length 3/8 In, Keyway Width 3/16 In 










Tech Specs 

• Item: S-Flex Shaft Coupling 


• Bore Dia. (In.): 1 5/8 

• Length through Bore (In.): 2.100 


• Max. RPM: 4500 

• Keyway Length (In.): 3/8 

• Keyway Width (In.): 3/16 

• Outside Dia. (In.): 5 7/16 

• Length (In.): 4 7/16 

• Width (In.): 2.100 

• Height (In.): 5.450 

• Hub Dia. (In.): 3.250 

• Material of Construction: Cast-iron 

• Setscrew Location: One over the Key and One at 90 Degrees 

• Max. Angular Misalignment: 1 Degree with EPDM Rubber Inserts and 1/4 Degree with H 

Inserts 

• Ideal For: Applications In Motors, Pumps, Compressors, Blowers, Mixers and Conveyors

Shaft Coupler Insert 

Shaft Coupling Insert, JE Insert Type, 8S Body Style, Rated Torque 1135 In-Lb, Max RPM 

4500, One-piece Solid EPDM Rubber Insert Material 










COUPLING INSERTS 

Inserts are intended for general industrial use and operate within the temperature range of -65 

Degree to 275 DegreeF. 

JE Inserts 

One-piece solid EPDM rubber inserts. 

Tech Specs 

• Item: Shaft Coupling Insert 

• Insert Type: JE 



• Max. RPM: 4500 

• HP Rating @ 50 RPM: 0.90 

• HP Rating @ 100 RPM: 1.80 

• HP Rating @ 300 RPM: 5.40 

• HP Rating @ 690 RPM: 12.43 

• HP Rating @ 870 RPM: 15.67 

• HP Rating @ 1150 RPM: 20.71 

• HP Rating @ 1200 RPM: 21.61

• HP Rating @ 1750 RPM: 31.52 

• HP Rating @ 1800 RPM: 32.42 

• HP Rating @ 3450 RPM: 63.03 

• HP Rating @ 3600 RPM: 64.83 

• Operating Temp.: -30 - 275 

• Outside Dia. (In.): 5.06 

• Length (In.): 2.50 

• Width (In.): 5.06 

• Height (In.): 5.06 

• Insert Material: One-piece Solid EPDM Rubber 

• Application: General Industrial Purposes

REMEDIATION 

DRAIN OUT 

2" ALUM. FNPT FITTING 

R 11 9/16" 

A 

A 

BLEED IN 


OUTLET TO PUMP 


24" 

4" FLANGED INLET 

24" 

6" CLEAN-OUT 

(02) SIGHT GLASS 


4" FLANGED OUTLET 

6 1/4" 

51 1/16" 60 1/2" 

49 1/16" 

66 3/4" 

SECTION A-A 

2 1/16" 

12 1/4" 

4 1/4"

View Datasheet 

http://www.solbergmfg.com/View_Datasheet.asp?part_number=SFS_2-2 

Page 1 of 2 

12/21/2006 

APPLICATIONS 

® 

SMALL COMPACT FILTER SILENCERS 

WITH STANDARD FILTER DESIGN 

"FS" Series 1/2" - 3" MPT 

Blowers-PD Type Blowers-Side Channel Compressor-Piston 

Compressor-Screw Construction\Contractor Industry Dental 

Engines Hydraulic Breathers - fine filtration Industrial & Severe Duty 

Medical Pneumatic Conveying Systems Sparging 

Waste Water Aeration Workshop 

FEATURES & SPECIFICATIONS 

;99%+ removal efficiency std: Paper=2 micron, Polyester=5 micron Durable carbon steel construction with powder coated finish or galvanized steel 

Filter change out differential: 10"-15" in. H 2 O above initial Delta P Fully drawn weatherhood - no welds to rust or vibrate apart 

Interchangeable elements: Polyester, Paper, HEPA Low pressure drop center bracket and outlet pipe design 

Pressure drop graphs available upon request Temp (continuous): min -15° F ( -26° C) max 220° F (104° C) 

Tubular silencing design - tube is positioned to maximize attenuation and air flow 

while minimizing pressure drop 

OPTIONS 

Typical noise attenuation up to 15 dB's (due to the wide range of applications and 

machines these units are used on, a single graph is insufficient. Please inquire for 

your specific requirement) 

1/8" tap holes for differential pressure gauges Available in Stainless Steel Epoxy coated housings 

Hot dipped galvanized housings Special connections, BSPT/Metric Various elements available 

Line Drawing 

*All measurements are shown in standards. 

Add To Order Model Number Element Type 

Outlet in. 

NPT 

or FLG 

Connection 

Style 

Dim A 

in. 

Dim B 

in. 

Dim C 

in. 

Rated 

Flow 

Piston 

SCFM 

Rated Flow 

Screw 

Blower Fan 

SCFM 

Element 

Parent 

Flow 

SCFM 

Tube Count 

FS-15-050 Polyester 0.5 MPT 4 1.5 6 10 10 35 1 1.8 

Approx. 

Weight 

lbs. 

CAD 

FS-15-075 Polyester 0.75 MPT 4 1.5 6 20 25 35 2 2 

FS-15-100 Polyester 1 MPT 4 1.5 6 25 35 35 3 2.1 

FS-19P-100 Polyester 1 MPT 6.63 1.5 6 35 55 100 3 3 

FS-19P-125 Polyester 1.25 MPT 6.63 1.63 6.1 55 70 100 5 3.3 

FS-19P-150 Polyester 1.5 MPT 6.63 1.5 6 70 85 100 5 3.5 

FS-231P-200 Polyester 2 MPT 12.25 2.25 10 135 135 300 5 14 

FS-31P-200 Polyester 2 MPT 7.25 2.25 10 85 135 195 5 7.8 



FS-231P-300 Polyester 3 MPT 13 3 10 200 300 300 9 15

View Datasheet 

http://www.solbergmfg.com/View_Datasheet.asp?part_number=SFS_2-2 

Page 2 of 2 

12/21/2006 

FS-14-050 Paper 0.5 MPT 4 1.5 6 10 10 35 1 1.8 

FS-14-075 Paper 0.75 MPT 4 1.5 6 20 25 35 2 2 

FS-14-100 Paper 1 MPT 4 1.5 6 25 35 35 3 2.1 

FS-18P-100 Paper 1 MPT 6.63 1.5 6 35 55 100 3 3 

FS-18P-125 Paper 1.25 MPT 6.63 1.63 6.1 55 70 100 5 3.3 

FS-18P-150 Paper 1.5 MPT 6.63 1.5 6 70 85 100 5 3.5 

FS-230P-200 Paper 2 MPT 12.25 2.25 10 135 135 300 5 14 

FS-30P-200 Paper 2 MPT 7.25 2.25 10 85 135 195 5 8.2 

FS-230P-250 Paper 2.5 MPT 12.5 2.5 10 195 195 300 9 14.5 

FS-30P-250 Paper 2.5 MPT 7.5 2.5 10 100 195 195 5 8.2 

FS-230P-300 Paper 3 MPT 13 3 10 200 300 300 9 15 

Solberg Mfg. 

1151 W. Ardmore Ave.·Itasca, IL 60143·(630)773-1363· Fax: (630)773-0727 

SFS_2-2

16 15/16" 

A 

A 

FILTER ELEMENT 

R 7 3/4" 

SECTION A-A 

REMOVABLE LID 

23 3/4" 

20 5/8" 

4" FLANGED INLET 

4" FLANGED OUTLET 

12 1/4"

Section 3 

Air Compressor 

Air Stripper

K13 Series 

- 3/4" NPT 

- Brass Body 

- 3-Way Lever-Acting 

- Universal 

Materials Seals: Stainless Steel 

Orifices: 

Stainless Steel 

Electrical Standard Housing: Junction Box 

Optional Housings: Conduit (NEMA)1, Watertight (NEMA 4) 

Standard Voltages: 

24, 120, 240 AC 60 Hz; 50 Hz available. 

Contact GC Valves Customer Service 

for additional voltages. 

Voltage Tolerance: 

±10% of applicable voltage 

Coil Classes: 

F, H 

Standard Lead Length: 6 inch 

Operating Temperature Ambient (Nominal): 32° to 125°F 

Mounting Position: Vertical Only 

Approvals* Agency: UL Listed 

* Not available for all variations 

Dimensions/Weight 

325 

Weight (lbs.) 

8.8 

GC Valves Customer Service: 800-828-0484 (7:30am to 4pm ET) or 800-582-4232 (7:30am to 4pm PT) 

3/4-K13-U-1

K13 – 3/4" NPT, Brass Body, Universal 

Valve Selection List 

Universal 

Normally Closed 

Normally Open 

Diverting 

PORT 1 

PORT 1 

PORT 1 

PORT 1 

PORT 1 

PORT 1 

COM. 

COM. 

COM. 

COM. 

COM. 

COM. 

PORT 2 

PORT 2 

PORT 2 

PORT 2 

PORT 2 

PORT 2 

DE-ENERGIZED (Pressure at No. ENERGIZED 1 Port) DE-ENERGIZED (Pressure at No. ENERGIZED 2 Port) DE-ENERGIZED (Pressure at Com. 

ENERGIZED 

Port) 

De-Energized Energized De-Energized Energized De-Energized Energized 

Pipe Size 

3/4 

Orifice Size 

1/8 .25 0 275 — 275 — 275 — 250 28 — F* K13DF1252 

3/16 .58 0 125 — 125 — 125 — 250 28 — F* K13DF1352 

1/4 .85 0 100 — 100 — 100 — 250 28 — F* K13DF1452 

13/32 1.27 0 25 — 25 — 25 — 250 28 — F* K13DF1552 

Part Numbering 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 

K 1 3 D F 1 2 5 2 

Series Body Size Housing* Seal Orifice Size 

K13 

Minimum 

Operating Pressure Differential (psi) 

Maximum 

D: Standard 

F: Class F 

H: Class H 

#5 and #6 

Max 

Fluid Temp. 

Water Light Oil Heated Fuel 

Oil 

AC DC AC DC AC DC AC DC 

NPT IN C v 

°F 

1: Stainless 

Steel 

Power 

Consumption 

(Watts) 

* Class H Coil Recommended for High Temperature Applications 

Coil Class 

2: 1/8” 

3: 3/16” 

4: 1/4” 

5: 13/32” 

Model Code 

( ) 

120V/60HZ — 110V/50HZ 

Shown 

Brass Body 

Pipe 

Voltage* 

Connection 

5: 3/4” 2: 120/60 

110/50 

4: 240/60 

220/50 

* See the “Engineering Guide” for additional voltages, variations and options. 

Coil Data 

Coil Family 

Type Size 

D 

C300 

Frequency (Hz) 60 50 

Nominal Power (VA) Inrush 278 278 

Holding 67 72 

3/4-K13-U-2 

GC Valves Customer Service: 800-828-0484 (7:30am to 4pm ET) or 800-582-4232 (7:30am to 4pm PT)

Project As-Built Document 

06-Mar-09 

Customer: 

50561 Ithaca, NY Air Stripper 

WSP Environmental Strategies LLC 

System SIte Specifications 

System Electrical Specifications 

Elevation: 1400 

ft 

Voltage: 

460V-3ph 

Max Temp: 100 

deg F 

Main Disconnect 

Min Temp: 0 

deg F 

Panel Approval: 

Class: 

Noise Target: 

No 

System Approval: 

Class: GP 

Gas Required: 

Panel Type: 

Water Required: 

Telemetry: 

Telephone Reqd: 

Autodialer: 

Building: Skids 

EMonitor: 

Server: 

System SVE (First Blower) 

System SVE (Second Blower) 

0 

@ 0 

0 

@ 0 

Blower Disch Temp: 0 deg F Blower Disch Temp: 0 deg F 

Inlet Legs: 0 Inlet Legs: 0 

Disch Press: 0 in wc 

Disch Press: 0 in wc 

Water Flowrate: 0 gpm 

Water Flowrate: 0 gpm 

Heat xchg Disch: 0 deg F Heat xchg Disch: 0 deg F 

Air Sparge 

Other Specifications 

0 

@ 0 psi 

Other Inlet Liquid Flow: 0 gpm 

Sparge Disch Temp: 0 deg F Disch Flow: 10 gpm @ 0 psi 

Disch Legs: 0 AirTreatment: 

Heat xchg Disch: 0 deg F Water_Treatment: 

Stripper Airflow: 210 cfm 

Stripper Dsn Flow: 10 gpm 

Contaminants 

OWS_Dsn_Flow: 0 gpm 

Other Information May be Presented Below 

Stripper being supplied by Shawn. It will be refurbished and 

installed on new skid. Layout to be exactly the same as 

original stripper skid. 

Additional 11"WC back pressure from Carbon, accounted for 

in selection of Stripper blower. 

Shipping Information 


620 S. Aurora Street 

Connection Info: 

No Control panel. All electrical equipment to be wired to a 

junction box located on the air stripper skid. 

Ithaca 

New York 

USA 14850 

AS BUILT: 50561 Page 1 of 8 06-Mar-09

Parts 

Module Code: 0 

Switch,Level,Mech Float,Wide Angle,N.O.,Red 

Tilt Float Level Switch 90deg (min. order 20) 

13A, SPST, N/O 

Switch,Level,Mech Float,Narrow Angle,N.O.,Blue 

Tilt Float Level Switch 

25deg 13 amp NO 

Part: 

Qty: 

Mfg: 

Mfg Part: 

Part: 

Qty: 

Mfg: 

Mfg Part: 

M1108 

1 

Warrick Controls 

M1343 

1 



Job Extras 


B-6401 

Motor, 5hp, 3600rpm, 184T 

208-230/460V, 3ph, CSA/UR 

TEFC 

LSH-6401 

Switch,Level,Mech Float,Wide Angle,N.O.,Red 

Tilt Float Level Switch 90deg (min. order 20) 

13A, SPST, N/O 

LSH - CHANGE TAG 

LSHH-6401 

Switch,Level,Mech Float,Narrow Angle,N.O.,Blue 

Tilt Float Level Switch 

25deg 13 amp NO 

LSHH - CHANGE TAG 

Part: 

Qty: 

Mfg: 

Mfg Part: 

Part: 

Qty: 

Mfg: 

Mfg Part: 

Part: 

Qty: 

Mfg: 

Mfg Part: 

12102 

1 

TECO Westinghouse 

EP00502TEx-HPE 

M1108 

1 


GR20W4000 

M1343 

1 


PB20W4000 


Air Stripper 


6400 

Pipe, PVC 80, 80-080, 8" 

--- 

Part: 

Qty: 

Mfg: 

Mfg Part: 

10387 

1 

80-080 

Miscellaneous Part 

Part: 9999 

As per detailed specification below Qty: 1 

-Fernco, Expansion 4"-8" 

Mfg: 

Mfg Part: Fernco, Expansion 

AS-6401 

Valve,Brass,Ball,1/4",150# 

Part: 10047 

NPT, Teflon seats, 600 PSI WOG Qty: 1 

- 

Mfg: 

Mfg Part: 

Kitz 

601-1/4 

Nipple, Galv, 1/4xclose 

None 

Valve,PVC,Check,Swing, 4", clear,1520-40C 

--- 

Fernco, 8"x 8" 

--- 

Part: 

Qty: 

Mfg: 

Mfg Part: 

Part: 

Qty: 

Mfg: 

Mfg Part: 

Part: 

Qty: 

Mfg: 

Mfg Part: 

10048 

1 

14CLGZN 

10188 

1 

S1520-C40 

10213 

1 

5688 

Valve,Butterfly,Ductile Iron,4",Elite 8400,wafer 

Part: 15016 

316SS disc & stern,BUNA,10 position lever Qty: 1 

None 

Mfg: 

Mfg Part: CIWB-SBL 4" Colt 

Flange, PVC 80, 854-040 4", Soc 

Part: 15633 

van stone Qty: 1 

None 

Mfg: 

Mfg Part: 854-040 

Air Stripper, QED 4.4SS, Assembly 

- 

Part: 

Qty: 

Mfg: 

Mfg Part: 

17665 

1 

Maple Leaf Environmental Equipment 

- 

Brass, connector, 1/4"pipex1/4"hose barb, 125-4B 

Part: 18070 

1 Qty: 1 

None 

Mfg: 

Mfg Part: 125-4B 

Sample Port Assembly, 1/4" 

- 

Part: 

Qty: 

Mfg: 

Mfg Part: 

18682 

1 


- 




-Ref: Q0209-31787. Items 1-3 

1. RT-Custom 

Remediation/Treatment Custom Product 

Custom EZ-Tray Parts 

High Stainless Steel Door, and Gasket. 

2. FELTKIT50 

… 

3. 804053 

Demister Element,, … 

Valve,Brass,Ball,2",150# 

Part: 

Mfg: 

Mfg Part: 


--- 

Valve,Brass,Ball,1", 150# 

Part: 

Mfg: 

Mfg Part: 


--- 

Part: 

Mfg: 

Mfg Part: 

9999 

Ref: Q0209-31787. 

P1065 

Kitz 

601-2 

P1067 

Kitz 

601-1 

Elbow, PVC 80, 806-040, 90deg, SxS, 4" 

AIR ON INLET OF STRIPPER 

Elbow, PVC 80, 806-060, 90deg, SxS, 6" 

FOR INLET OF BLOWER 

Pipe, PVC 80, 80-040, 4" 

--- 

Part: 

Qty: 

Mfg: 

Mfg Part: 

Part: 

Qty: 

Mfg: 

Mfg Part: 

Part: 

Qty: 

Mfg: 

Mfg Part: 

P1125 

3 

806-040 

P1126 

1 

806-060 

P1191 

1 

80-040 

Flange, PVC 80, 851-060, 6" 

Part: P1199 

Soc One-Piece Qty: 1 

FOR INLET OF BLOWER 

Mfg: 

Mfg Part: 851-060 


FOR AIR DISCHARGE FROM STRIPPER 


AIR ON INLET OF STRIPPER 

B-6401 

Part: 

Qty: 

Mfg: 

Mfg Part: 

Part: 

Qty: 

Mfg: 

Mfg Part: 

P1202 

1 

5644 

P1202 

1 

5644 



Part: 


Mfg: 

Blower, pressure / mfg. New York Blower. Motor: 5.0 hp, 230/460 volt, 3- Mfg Part: 

phase, TEFC. Inlet: 6.625" OD - discharge: 4" flange 150 lb. class. 

Standard on a 4.6 stainless steel, 6.6 stainless steel and 8.6 stainless 

steel 

LSH/LSHH-6401 

Strain Relief Connector, PVC, 1/2" 

TSRC10 Qty: 2 

For LSHH, LSH 

LSLL/L/H/HH-640 

Nipple, Galv, 1x close 

Part: 

Mfg: 

Mfg Part: 

3 Qty: 2 

- 

Part: 

Mfg: 

Mfg Part: 

9999 

0 

16884 

TSRC10 

10216 

1CGZN 

Pipe, PVC 40 (Clear), 40-020CL, 2" (10ft L) 

- 

Reducer Bushing, PVC 80, 837-249, 2" x 1", SxS 

- 

Reducer Bushing, PVC 80, 838-249, 2"x1"SxF 

- 

Plug, PVC 80, 850-010, 1" 

- 

Part: 

Qty: 

Mfg: 

Mfg Part: 

Part: 

Qty: 

Mfg: 

Mfg Part: 

Part: 

Qty: 

Mfg: 

Mfg Part: 

Part: 

Qty: 

Mfg: 

Mfg Part: 

10697 

3 

40-020CL 

10899 

2 

837-249 

11080 

1 

838-249 

12388 

1 

850-010 

Elbow, Galv, 90deg, 1", M&F threads 

Part: 17518 

Street Elbow Qty: 2 

- 

Mfg: 

Mfg Part: 12.0950060 

Vapor Liquid Separator, Assembly, VLW-90 

- 

Union, PVC 80, 857-020, 2"soc 

- 

Tee, PVC 80, 801-020, 2", SxSxS 

- 

Part: 

Qty: 

Mfg: 

Mfg Part: 

Part: 

Qty: 

Mfg: 

Mfg Part: 

Part: 

Qty: 

Mfg: 

Mfg Part: 

17521 

1 


- 

P1080 

1 

857-020 

P1156 

2 

801-020 


Reducer Bushing, PVC 80, 838-251, 2"x1-1/2",SxF 

- 

PDI-6401 

Part: 

Qty: 

Mfg: 

Mfg Part: 

P1204 

1 

838-251 

Gauge,Magnehelic,2050,0-50"wc 

Part: 10667 

z Qty: 1 

Mfg: Dwyer 

--- 

Mfg Part: 2050D 

PI-6401 

Gauge,Pressure,0-60" wc ,Dry,J60"-WC,SS 

Part: M1293 

2-1/2" Dial, 1/4" MNPT Connection Qty: 1 

Mfg: McDaniel Controls, Inc. 

For discharge of blower. Change tag - PI-6401 

Mfg Part: J60"WC 

PSL-6401 

Switch,Pressure, 1823-2 

Part: 10218 

0.5-2"wc, Dwyer, Nema 1 Qty: 

Mfg: 

Mfg Part: 

1 

Dwyer 

1823-2 


Building, Trailer or Skid 


7900 


Part: 9999 


Mfg: 

(2) pieces of 1-5/8 uni-strut w/ 4 bolt assy's and 6 squirrel nuts. Mfg Part: --- 

BLD-7901 

Skid, Custom Size 

Model: Skid 5' x 6' 

Working Length: 6' 

Working Width: 5' 

Bolt Down Tabs: Y 

Stud Sockets: Y 

Lifting Lugs: Y 

Fork Holes on the Width: Y 

Fork Holes on the Length: Y 

Man Hole: Y/N 

Deck: None 

Containment Lip: N 

Angle Box: N 

Part: 

Qty: 

Mfg: 

Mfg Part: 

M1484 

1 



Project Maintenance Document 

06-Mar-09 

Customer: 


WSP Environmental Strategies LLC 

Warning: This document does not replace the manufacturer's recommended maintenance 

schedules as referenced in the OM manual provided by the equipment manufacturer. It is 

provided as a quick guide to required OM activities for this project. 

Section1: General Maintenance Activities 

Section2: Cross Reference Maintenance Code to Parts 

Section3: Maintenance Schedule by Hours 

General Maintenance Activities 

Daily 

Check the control panel for running status. 

Contact the system remotely to check system operation for: 

Alarms 

Operating Conditions 

Weekly 

Check for Leaks. 

Check the volume of consumables. i.e. Chemicals, oil etc 

Check for excessive noise of various components. 

Check for Alarms. 

Check and record Flow Rates, Vacuums, Pressures, Temperatures, pH. 

Check for excessive moisture inside the control panels and transducer wiring boxes 

Check for corrosion and grease the moving parts if required to reduce corrosion. 

Monthly 

Test critical inputs for proper shutdown capacity. 

Test the operation of the overloads. 

Test building sump switch if it is present. 

Yearly 

Test each input. 

Test alarm conditions. 

Test the operation of each output device. 

Maintenance: 50561 Page 1 of 5 06-Mar-09

Parts Listing per Maintenance Code 

Gauge, Magnehelic 

Part 

Qty 

Module 

PDI-6401 10667 Gauge,Magnehelic,2050,0-50"wc 1 Air Stripper 

Gauge, Pressure 

Part 

Qty Module 

PI-6401 M1293 Gauge,Pressure,0-60" wc ,Dry,J60"-WC,SS 1 Air Stripper 

Motor,Electric 

Part 

Qty Module 

B-6401 12102 Motor, 5hp, 3600rpm, 184T 1 Job Extras 

Switch, Level 

Part 

Qty Module 

M1108 Switch,Level,Mech Float,Wide Angle,N.O.,Red 1 Parts 

LSH-6401 M1108 Switch,Level,Mech Float,Wide Angle,N.O.,Red 1 Job Extras 

M1343 Switch,Level,Mech Float,Narrow Angle,N.O.,Blue 1 Parts 

LSHH-6401 M1343 Switch,Level,Mech Float,Narrow Angle,N.O.,Blue 1 Job Extras 

Switch, Pressure 

Part 

Qty 

Module 

PSL-6401 10218 Switch,Pressure, 1823-2 1 Air Stripper 


Maintenance Schedule 


EVERY 

800 OPERATING HOURS 


1) Inspect motor for excessive heat, vibration, or noise. 

2) Keep motor clean and ventilation openings clear. 

Switch, Level 

1) Test the operation of the switch. 

2) Remove the switch and check for debris buildup that can potentially cause a failure of 

normal operation. 




EVERY 



Lubrication requirements differ depending on the size and type of service. Consult the 

O&M for a frequency for your specific model and conditions. 

Gauge, Pressure 

1) Check accuracy of gauges. 

2) Zero gauge if required. 

Gauge, Magnehelic 

Verify the gauge's calibration with a sounder or other measuring device. 




EVERY 


Switch, Pressure 

Test the input to make sure it is functioning properly. 


Troubleshooting Chart 

Symptom Potential Cause Possible Solution 

Electrical Motor 

Motor will not start and there is no 

noise. 

Motor does not start but makes a 

humming noise. 

Overloads Trip immediately after 

startup. 

Motors amps are above the allowable 

value on the nameplate. 

Centrifugal Pumps 

Pump does not produce sufficient 

Pressure/Vacuum. 

Motor may not be receiving the proper 

power. 

Overload is tripped. 

Main power may be off. 

Contactor may not be closing because 

motor is in manual position. 

Contactor may not be closing because 

PLC is not telling output to be on. 

One of the phases of power is not 

getting to the Motor as a result of a 

blown fuse. 



poor wire connection 

The driven component, i.e. pump, will 

not spin and could be seized up. 

Bearing on drive shaft of motor or 

driven component may be seized up. 

Check for Short Circuit in motor 

windings. 



blown fuse. 

Motor power wires may be shorting 

out to ground. 

Motor may have too much load or 

backpressure as a result of operating 

the driven component outside of its 

operating capabilities. 

Motor may be designed to operate on 

the upper limit. 

Driven component may have scale 

built up inside. 

Driven component may be rotating in 

the wrong direction. 

Check voltage of power. Low voltage 

results in high amps. 

Pump is not primed. 

Wrong Direction of rotation. 

Vacuum or Pressure gauge is faulty 

Pump is not operating at required 

RPM 

Pump has wrong sized impeller. 

Pump pressure or vacuum is lost do to 

obstruction located between pump 

and gauge 

Pump is not turned on. 

Coupling between pump and motor is 

no longer connected preventing the 

pump from rotating with the motor. 

Check fuses and power distribution 

between power lines to motor. 

Reset Overload. 

Check main power. 

Switch motor to back to Auto position. 

Check PLC operating sequence to 

determine if a start requirement is not 

met. 

Change Fuse. 

Check wiring for a loose wire or a poor 

connection. 

Disassemble driven component, 

check clearances and clean internal 

components and replace any 

damaged components. 

Replace bearings. 

Re-wind motor. 

Change Fuse. 

Search for wiring short and replace 

wiring if required. 

Check operating capabilities of driven 

component. I.e. Ensure positive 

displacement pump is not over 

pressured or that centrifugal pump is 

not operating at to high a flow rate. 

Calculate maximum allowable amps. 

Name plate amps x safety factor. 

Clean internal components of driven 

component. 

Check direction of rotation and switch 

rotation of motor if it is incorrect. 

Adjust overloads for higher amps if the 

difference is only slight. Other wise 

change power or motor. 

Prime pump. 

Check and change rotation if required. 

Replace gauge. 

Check and replace motor if required. 

Check impeller and replace if 

required. 

Check for flow restrictions and clean 

strainers or piping if required. 

Rub pump gently until turned on 

Reconnect and realign motor and 

pump.

Pump is leaking. Gaskets are worn or faulty. Replace gaskets. 

Mechanical seal has been 

overheated. Often a result of 

operating the pump without any water. 

Fittings are leaking on or around 

pump. 

Water may be coming from another 

location. 

Stop rubbing the pump gently. 

Replace mechanical seal. 

Tighten fittings. 

Check for leaks around pump. 

Pumps flow rate is too low. Backpressure is too high for pump. Reduce backpressure. 

Pump may not be sized correctly for 

Replace pump. 

process. 

Pump impeller is too small. 

Change pump impeller but watch 

power consumption on motor. 

Flow control valve is closed. 

Open flow control valve. 

May have blocked line or filter 

Replace filter and clean line. 

Pump is making excessive noise 

during operation. 

Manually rotate pump impeller and 

listen for clearance problems. 

Alignment of pump may be off causing 

the flexible coupling to degrade. 

Disassemble pump and fix clearance 

problems. 

Check alignment and reset alignment 

if it is a problem. Replace flexible 

coupling if it is degraded. 

Liquid Ring Pump 

Pump does not produce enough 

Vacuum 

Pump is making a strange growling 

noise. 


Service fluid is to low in seal oil tank. 

No restriction on inlet of pump 

Dilution valve is open 

Service fluid is not flowing into the 

pump. 

Pump is rotating in the wrong 

direction. 

Vacuum gauge is not working 

correctly. 

Pump seals may be allowing air into 

the pump. 

Pump is too small for application. 

Vacuum relief valve is set too low. 

Air may be leaking into vapor lines. 

Pump internal components are 

damaged. 

Cavitation is occurring 

Insufficient seal fluid flow or excessive 

seal fluid flow. 

Prime pump and start under vacuum. 

Add seal oil. 

Close valves to create suction. 

Close dilution valve. 

Check for flow restrictions in service 

fluid lines. Check Strainer. 

Check and change direction if 

required. 

Replace vacuum gauge. 

Check for leaking and replace seals if 

required. 

Replace pump. 

Replace or reset vacuum relief valve. 

Check for air leaks in vapor lines. 

Disassemble pump and replace 

components if required. 

Decrease the vacuum. 

Increase/decrease seal fluid flow rate. 

Pump is leaking. Gaskets are faulty Replace gaskets. 

Mechanical seal has been overheated 

Replace mechanical. 

or is faulty. 

Oil may be leaking from 1/8” vacuum 

relief valves in pump housing 

Remove valves and install plugs. 

Pump is running too hot. 

Seal fluid strainer is plugged 

restricting seal fluid. 

LRP is not providing enough suction 

to drawn sufficient seal fluid. 

Seal fluid flow rate is too low. 

Seal fluid heat exchanger is not 

working properly. 

Clean out strainer. 

Increase seal oil suction. Pipe seal 

fluid into a higher vacuum port of 

pump. 

Open seal fluid control valve to allow 

more seal fluid to enter the pump. 

Check heat exchanger.

Excessive Discharge pressure built up 

in seal oil tank. 

Seal Oil Low Level Alarm 

Demister filter is plugged and requires 

replacement. 

Seal oil is not being drawn out of 

demister filter through scavenger line. 

Seal oil temperature may be operating 

to high causing the oil to evaporate. 

Seal oil suction line may be plugged 

causing seal oil to collect in bottom of 

demister filter. 

Replace demister. 

Increase vacuum of LRP to allow oil to 

be sucked through the scavenger line. 

Ensure that scavenger line has 

sufficient vacuum to draw oil out of the 

demister filter. 

Check Seal oil operating temperature 

and increase seal oil flow. 

Check for plugging of seal oil return 

line and clean or replace if required. 

Oil Water Separators 

Water is in the oil outlet 

Skimmer opening is below the 

oil/water interface. 

Adjust skimmer alignment to allow 

more oil to collect before skimming. 

Oil is making its way to the outlet. Water flow rate is too high. Reduce flow rate through system. 

Filter media is plugged 

Replace or clean media. 

Oil discharge is plugged backing up 

OWS. 

Drain oil down stream of skimmer. 

Air to Air and Air to Fluid Heat 

Exchangers 

Heat exchanger fan is drawing too 

many amps. 

Phase Separator 

Water will not pump out of phase 

separator. 

Look into the trouble shooting for 

motors. 

Fan blade pitch and diameter may be 

wrong. 

Motor may be operating at wrong 

RPM for fan blade. 

Check clearance of fan blade. 

Base of separator may be plugged 

with sand. 

Change fan blade. 

Replace motor or fan blade. 

Make adjustments if blade is hitting 

things. 

Flush sand and debris out of 

separator. 

Electric Solenoid Valve 

Valve will not completely shut. May have dirt or rocks preventing it 

from shutting properly. 

Disassemble and clean out internal 

components. 

Valve will not open Check for power to solenoid. Trace power lines and determine why 

power is not going to valve. 

PLC may not be telling it to open. Check Start requirements in manual. 

Coil may be damaged or faulty. 

Replace coil. 

Level Switches 

Level switch is staying closed when 

water in tank drops below switch. 

Level switch is upside down or on its 

side. 

Sight Glass is plugged giving a false 

level in the tank. 

Level switch has dirt or film causing it 

to stick up. 

Level switch may be damaged or 

faulty and failed closed regardless of 

the switch position. 

Wiring to level switch may be shorting 

out to ground causing the switch to 

appear closed at all times. 

Check orientation of level switch. 

Level switch may be designed as 

normally closed and therefore will be 

upside down. 

Clean sight glass. 

Remove level switch, clean and test 

for normal operation using a 

millimeter. 

Replace switch. 

Disconnect switch from system wiring 

and separate system wires so they 

are not in contact with each other or 

any metal. If the input is still on then 

the input wiring is being grounded 

somewhere. Find short and replace 

or fix wiring.

Level switch stays open when water in 

tank is above the switch. 

Regenerative Blowers 

Blower does not produce sufficient 


Blower is leaking. 

IS barrier is shorted out internally. 

Input wiring is loose in terminal strip. 

Level switch is wired incorrectly 

Level switch is upside down or on its 

side. 

Sight Glass is plugged giving a false 

level in the tank. 

Level switch has dirt or film causing it 

to stick down. 

Level switch may be damaged or 

faulty and failed open regardless of 

the switch position. 

IS barrier is blown preventing the level 

switch signal from crossing the barrier. 

Level switch is wired incorrectly 

Commonly used on strippers or for 

SVE systems. 

Blower is not turned on. 



Blower is not operating at required 

RPM 

Blower has wrong sized impeller. 

Pressure or vacuum is lost do to 

obstruction located between blower 



Blower. 

Switch IS barrier with working barrier 

and if problem goes away then the 

barrier may be faulty and should be 

changed. 

Tighten terminal strip where field 

wiring is brought into panel. 

Consult input wiring diagram and 

inspect wiring of level switch. Change 

if required. 

Check orientation of level switch. 

Level switch may be designed as 

normally closed and therefore will be 

upside down. 

Clean sight glass. 

Remove level switch, clean and test 

for normal operation using a 

millimeter. 

Replace switch. 

Switch IS barrier with working barrier 

and if problem goes away then the 

barrier may be blown. If barrier is 

blown then the input wire on the right 

side of the barrier will have 24 V DC 

and the wire on the opposite side will 

have 0V DC. 

Consult input wiring diagram and 

inspect wiring of level switch. Change 

if required. 

Turn on blower 





required. 




Blower flow rate is too low. Backpressure is too high for Blower. Reduce backpressure. 

Blower may not be sized correctly for 

Replace blower. 

process. 

Blower impeller is too small. Change blower impeller but watch 






Air Stripper 

Stripper Leaks Gaskets are leaking Apply silicon grease to gaskets and 

close up stripper. If they cannot be 

fixed the gaskets may need to be 

replaced. 

Pressure or Vacuum is building up in 

stripper 

Stripper is being fouled by mineral 

precipitates. 

Airflow rate through stripper has risen 

or is above the design value. 

Clean stripper with acid to dissolve 

precipitates. 

Decrease airflow rate.

Stripper is not cleaning contaminants 

sufficiently 

Water is collecting in discharge piping 

of stripper 

Stripper often shuts down on a high 

stripper sump alarm. 

Inlet concentrations are higher than 

the design values. 

Flow rate of water through stripper is 

too high. 

Water temperature is lower than the 

design. (below 60 deg F) 

Airflow rate is not high enough. 

Some products that are not easily 

strippable may be in higher 

concentrations than originally planned. 

Stripper may have been shut down 

manually causing the contaminated 

water in the trays to fall into the sump 

without being cleaned. 

Stripper may be setup wrong allowing 

the water to bypass trays. 

Some contaminants may be present 

that are affecting the ability to strip 

other contaminants. 

Increase in pressure causes a 

decrease in airflow that will result in a 

decrease of contaminant 

concentrations. 

Air leaving the stripper is very humid 

and will condense some water in the 

pipelines. 

The stripper can cause foaming of the 

water that will result in water collecting 

in the discharge lines. 

Airflow rate is higher than the design 

value causing water to be carried over 

into the discharge lines. 

Transfer pump is flowing faster than 

the discharge pump. 

Discharge Pump is not working 

properly. 

Decrease water flow rate to obtain 

required stripping capacity. 

Decrease flow rate allowing longer 

resonance time in stripper. 

Increase water temperature or slow 

down water flow rate or increase 

airflow rate. 

Increase airflow rate or decrease 

water flow rate. 

Consult manufacturer with test results 

of discharge contaminants. 

Allow stripper to go through proper 

shutdown cycle when stopping the 

unit. 

Check orientation of trays to ensure 

water will flow through each tray 

properly. 

Consult manufacturer with test results 

of intake and discharge contaminants. 

See pressure rise in stripper 

troubleshooting above. 

Install a knockout drum in discharge 

line before air is piped to another 

section of the process. 

Test for foaming contaminants such 

as soaps and install antifoaming 

dosing system to prevent foaming. 

Decrease flow rate to within design 

range. 

Slow transfer pump or speed up 

discharge pump. 

Trouble shoot discharge pump. 

Moyno Pumps 

Pump does not produce sufficient 





Pump is not operating at required 

RPM 

Pump has wrong sized impeller. 

Pump pressure or vacuum is lost do to 

obstruction located between pump 


Pump is not turned on. 

Coupling between pump and motor is 

no longer connected preventing the 

pump from rotating with the motor. 

Prime pump. 





required. 



Rub pump gently until turned on 

Reconnect and realign motor and 

pump. 

Pump is leaking. Gaskets are worn or faulty. Replace gaskets. 

Mechanical seal has been 

Replace mechanical seal. 

overheated. Often a result of 

operating the pump without any water. 



pump. 

Water may be coming from another Check for leaks around pump. 

location. 

Pump was run in reverse allowing the 

rotor to spin off of the pump shaft. 

Disassemble pump and screw rotor 

back onto shaft. (see manufacturers 

manual)

Pumps flow rate is too low. Backpressure is too high for pump. Reduce backpressure. 

Pump is making excessive noise 

during operation. 

Pump may not be sized correctly for 

process. 

Pump impeller is too small. 



Manually rotate pump impeller and 

listen for clearance problems. 

Alignment of pump may be off causing 

the flexible coupling to degrade. 

Replace pump. 

Change pump impeller but watch 




Disassemble pump and fix clearance 

problems. 

Check alignment and reset alignment 

if it is a problem. Replace flexible 

coupling if it is degraded. 

Pressure Switch/Vacuum Switch 

Switch is not reacting at desired set 

point. 

Switch is out of adjustment. 

Change set point to desired value. 

Switch is not working. Switch may be faulty. Remove input wires and test switch at 

desired pressure. If it does not trigger 

then it should be replaced. 

Flow meter 

Flow meter is not rotating. 

Flow meter is rotating but Pulse input 

is not working. 

Dirt could have caused meter internals 

to jam up. 

Switch on meter may be faulty. 

Input wiring may be grounding out 

preventing the signal from opening 

and closing. 

Input to PLC is not working. 

Disassemble flow meter and clean 

internal components. 

Remove wiring and test contacts on 

meter to ensure that they are opening 

and closing. If not then meter head 

needs to be replaced. 

Test input wiring by isolating input 

wires and checking if input is on. If so 

then you have a grounded input wire. 

Simulate rotating meter by contacting 

input wires together and check for a 

detected flow rate and change in 

totalized flow. 

Belt Driven Assemblies 

Squealing noise occurs on startup. Belt is too loose. Check tension of belt and tighten if 

required. 

Excessive wear on bearings. Belt is too tight. Loosen belt tension. 

Belt is wearing excessively. 

Check orientation of blower and 

motor. 

Adjust orientation if required. 

Carbon Vessel 

Vessel is operating over pressure. 

Vessel is breaking through earlier than 

expected. 

Silt may have collected in water phase 

vessel. 

Flow rate through vessel may be too 

high. Check design specifications. 

Air contaminant concentrations are 

higher than expected. 

Check piping orientation to ensure 

that water is going in the top of water 

phase vessels and air is going in the 

bottom of air phase vessels. 

Ensure that there is not a large 

trapped air gap in the top of the water 

phase carbon vessel allowing the 

water to bypass a portion of the 

carbon. 

Remove lid and check for silt. 

Remove top layer of silt or replace 

vessel. 

Decrease flow rate. 

Test inlet concentrations. 

Repipe vessel if piping is wrong. 

Release air gap if present.

Bag Filter 

Vessel is operating over pressure. Bag filter may be full of dirt and silt. Remove cover and check for dirt 

buildup in the bag. Replace filter 

element if required. 

Equipment down stream of bag filter 

may be plugging 

Check for pressure buildup down 

stream of filter and fix pressure 

buildup downstream if found. 

Water will not flow through filter fast 

enough. 

Filters are plugging too fast 

Pump may not be able to supply 

enough pressure 

Filter element micron size may be too 

low. 

Filter pressure switch setpoint may be 

too low. 

Check pressure output of pump with 

pump curve. Replace pump if 

required. 

Install larger micron filter element 

Increase high pressure shutdown 

setpoint. 

Sand Filter 

Vessel is operating over pressure. Sand filter may be full of dirt and silt. Remove cover and check for dirt 

buildup on top of filter. Backwash 

filter. 

Equipment down stream of bag filter 

may be plugging 

Check for pressure buildup down 

stream of filter and fix pressure 

buildup downstream if found. 

Water will not flow through filter fast 

enough. 

Pump may not be able to supply 

enough pressure 

Check pressure output of pump with 

pump curve. Replace pump if 

required. 

Filters are plugging too fast Filter was not backwashed properly. Backwash filter vessel as per 

manufacturers instructions. 

Filter pressure switch setpoint may be 

too low. 

Filter sand has solidified with 

Calcification. 

Process Water Flow Rate is operating 

above the deign Flow rate for the sand 

filter. 

Increase high-pressure shutdown 

setpoint. 

Replace Sand in Filter. 

Check process flow rate and compare 

with design flow rate listed on 

manufacturers literature or on the 

component sheet of the sand filter 

section of your Maple Leaf System 

Manual. 

Rotary Screw Compressor Package 

Compressor Not Starting Motor Overload Reset Overload 

Stopped by compressed air 

temperature relay 

Check compressor Output Pressure 

Oil Separator is dirty, replace 

Check supply voltage 

Oil level is too low 

Not enough cooling air flow 

Wrong compressor oil 

Ambient temperature too high 

Cooler dirty 

Insufficient Air Output Clogged intake filter Replace 

Clogged oil separator element 

Replace 

Pressure switch not working Check pressure switch adjustment 

Repair or replace 

Receiver blow down valve open 

Clean valve 

Too high air consumption 

Check network for leaks and air 

powered devices 

Drive belt slipping 

Tighten or replace 

Compressor Overheating Insufficient amount of oil Add oil 

Clogged oil filter 

Replace 

Cooler dirty 

Clean 

Ambient temperature too high 

Check 

High Oil Consumption Oil return tube or its orifice is blocked Open and clean

Network Pressure Rises Over Set 

Valve 

Compressor Doesn’t restart 

Automatically 

Compressor Doesn’t Restart 

Automatically 

Compressor Doesn’t Stop 

Automatically 

Oil separator or sealing damaged or 

loosened 

Oil separator dirty 

Wrong Compressor Oil 

Output air temperature too high 

Faulty non-return valve of oil return 

pipe 

Too much oil 

Pressure switch not working 

Pressure switch damaged 

Output valve leaking 

Loose wire connections 


Output valve leaks 

Loose wire connections 



Loose wires 


Pressure Switch Damaged 

Check and repair 

Replace 

Change Oil 

Check and repair 

Replace 

Drain extra oil out 

Check 

Check 

Replace seal 

Check 

Replace 

Replace seals 

Check 

Replace 

Replace 

Check wires 

Replace seals of output valve 

Replace 

Refrigerated Dryer 

Water down stream of dryer Residual air in piping Blow out system with dry air 

Air bypass system is open 

Check valve position 

Inlet and Outlet conditions are 

Check for correct connection 

reversed 

Air temperature on outlet of dryer may 

Heat trace piping 

be too low 

Automatic drain mechanism is not 

Replace 

working 

Dryer overloaded 

Check flow rate and inlet temperature 

High pressure drop across dryer Inlet air strainer clogged Clean inlet air strainer 

Excessive air flow 

Check flow rate 

Separator filter clogged 

Replace filter sleeve 

Freezing of moisture in evaporator 

Fault Alarm 

Dryer overloaded resulting in high air Check operating conditions 

outlet temperature 

High outlet air temperature 

Thermostat switch is malfunctioning or Replace thermostat switch 

not securely mounted 

Refrigeration system not functioning 

Power failure 

Check power 

properly in on position 

Line disconnect switch open 

Check disconnect 

Fuses blown, breaker blown 

Check fuses or breaker 

Loose or faulty wiring 

Check wiring 

Refrigeration system cycles on and off High or Low Ambient conditions Check min/max temperature ranges 

Air filter clogged 

Clean filter 

Condenser fins clogged 

Clean fins 

Fan motor or control switch not 

working 

Replace fan motor or switch 

Analogue 4-20ma Transmitters 

Transmitter is sending a signal that is 

not accurate. 

Transmitter is sending 0-2 milliamps 

to the PLC input. 

There may be water in the air 

sampling lines that are throwing off 

the readings. 

Transmitter may be out of calibration 

Transmitter may not be wired properly 

or one or more wire connections may 

be loose. 

Transmitter may be damaged or not 

working properly. 

Drain any moisture out of the air 

sampling lines. 

Refer to transmitter specification 

sheets on how to calibrate the 

transmitter. Note if transmitter is more 

than 10-25% out of calibration then it 

will likely require factory recalibration. 

Check wiring with device specification 

sheet and MLEE drawing. Check 

wiring for loose connections. 

If you have another similar transmitter 

installed in another location on the 

system then switch them around to 

determine if the faulty transmitter

Transmitter is sending over 20 

milliamps to the PLC. 

PLC’s 

Power is on, Lights are on but PLC is 

not running the logic. Run light is not 

on. 

Power is on to panel but PLC lights 

are not on. 

Transmitter is likely damaged. 

PLC may not be in run mode. If the 

power has been of to the panel for an 

extended period of time, then the PLC 

will switch out of run mode and stop 

running the logic. 

Fuse for PLC is pulled out or blown. 

works in another location. If the 

transmitter works then you know the 

transmitter is not the problem. If the 

transmitter does not work in the other 

location then it is likely the transmitter. 

If the good transmitter does not work 

in the faulty location then the problem 

is likely the wiring at that location or 

the input into the PLC. 

Send back to manufacturer for recalibration. 

Use external switch on PLC to switch 

from “term” to “run” then back to 

“term”. This will force the plc back into 

run mode. The run light should now 

indicate that the PLC is in run mode. 

Test PLC fuse and replace if 

necessary. This is in the “PLC” fuse 

holder.

Ref: 9820.00 

2475 

Sheet: 105 

Industrial Systems-Light Date: 23 Aug 2004 

Davidson, NC 28036 Cancels: 7 May 2004 

Engineering Data 

Bore: 4"& 2.5" Min RPM: 575 Aircooled Aftercooler CTD: 25° F 

Stroke: 2.75" Max RPM: 1600 (Package performance) 

Inlet Size: 1" NPT Sheave OD: 13.75" Number of Belts: 1 

Discharge Size: 0.75" NPT Sheave PD: 13.5" Belt Section: A 

Performance 

Nameplate Amp Ratings 

Bare 

Motor 

HP PSI RPM ACFM BHP 

2475 5 75 1040 17.3 4.5 5HP 17.5 26.2 22.8 15.2 7.6 6.1 

2475 5 125 1040 17.1 4.8 7.5HP 25.3 40 22.0 11 9.0 

2475 5 175 1040 16.8 5.5 

H2475 5 250 910 14.1 5.2 

2475 7.5 75 1500 24.3 7.3 

2475 7.5 125 1500 24.2 7.8 

2475 7.5 175 1500 24.0 8.2 

2475 (Gas)** 11.5 175 1600 25.0 8.2 

2475 (Gas)*** 12.5 175 1500 24.0 8.1 

2475 (Gas)* 13 175 1600 25.0 8.2 

200-3-60 

200-1-60 

230-1-60 

230-3-60 

460-3-60 

575-3-60 

*Honda **Kaw asaki ***Kohler H-250 PSIG operating pressure 

Duplex units multiply capacity by tw o. 

Bare Pump Detailed Specifications 

FRAME—The 100% cast iron frame is designed to support the overhung crankshaft. Cylinders bolt directly to the cast iron 

frame. Frame is completely sealed yet allows for maximum accessibility. 

CRANKSHAFT—A unique overhung design supported by two heavy duty ball bearings with replaceable crankpin 

bushing. Entire shaft is balanced with an integral counterweight to insure smooth operation. 

CONNECTING RODS—Solid one-piece design. These simple, easy to maintain rods can be used only with an overhung 

crankshaft. Crankpin bushing inside the rod is precision ground requiring no alignment. 

CYLINDERS—These are 100% cast iron, separately cast and individually bolted to the frame in a V-type configuration. 

The cylinders are precision honed for low oil carryover. Radial fins on the cylinders help remove heat and ensure 360 

degree cooling of the cylinders. 

PISTONS—Precision balanced low pressure aluminum and high pressure cast iron pistons provide smooth operation. 

RINGS—There are three piston rings for sealing compression and oil control. The taper faced compression ring and 

beveled oil scraper ring provide quick seating. One, three-piece oil control ring maintains proper lubrication on cylinder 

wall. Precision honing used in conjunction with the ring stack up means low oil carryover. 

FLYWHEEL—The cast iron fan type flywheel forces a “cyclone” air blast to provide cooling for the deep finned cylinders 

and finned copper tube intercooler. The flywheel is balanced to keep vibration to a minimum. 

INTERCOOLER—Two stage compressors use an intercooler. The intercooler between stages is of finned copper tube 

construction to provide maximum cooling area. It is located directly in the flywheel air blast to remove the heat of 

compression between stages keeping running temperatures and power needs to a minimum, ensuring high air delivery for 

horsepower expended. The intercooler is provided with a relief valve to prevent over-pressurization. 

LUBRICATION—Splash lubrication of running parts is simple and reliable. Lubrication dippers are integral with 

connecting rods and cannot come loose. 

INLET FILTER—The filter has a durable canister with a dry type 10 micron inlet filter/silencer as standard. 

VALVES—Reliable, time proven finger valves are quick acting and made from premium grade stainless steel. Valve 

components are easily removable for maintenance.

Ref: 9820.00 

Sheet: 106 


Davidson, NC 28036 

2475 

Cancels: 7 May 2004 

Simplex Detailed Specifications 

BASE—The compressor and motor are aligned on a heavy steel base. 

RECEIVER—Receiver mounted units are ASME, National Board coded, and include discharge mounted check valve, 

pressure gauge, drain valve, service valve, and relief valve. 

DRIVE—The drive is V-belt type with an easily removed, totally enclosed wire beltguard. 

MOTOR—Standard AC motors are NEMA T frame with drip-proof enclosure, Class B insulation, 1.15 Service Factor, and 

grease lubricated ball bearings. Standard single phase motor voltage is 230. Standard three phase motor voltages are 

200, 230/460 and 575. 

CONTROLS—Units are equipped for automatic start and stop operation with NEMA 1 unloading pressure switch and 

on/off lever. 

“E”-SERIES STARTER (MTD. & WIRED STANDARD ON 7.5HP UNITS)—“E”-Series starters provide full voltage control 

of electric motors. They include thermal relays which protect the motor windings from harmful currents and resultant 

temperature rise caused by overloaded motor, low line voltage or stalled rotor. Reset button and NEMA 1 enclosure (UL & 

CSA approved) included. 

Gasoline Simplex Detailed Specifications 

BASE—The compressor and engine are aligned on a heavy steel base. 

Receiver—Receiver mounted units are ASME, National Board coded, and include discharge mounted check valve, 

pressure gauge, drain valve, service valve, and relief valve. 

DRIVE—The drive is V-belt type with an easily removed, totally enclosed beltguard. Engine- Kohler package -12.5 HP 

aircooled Command engine with 12 volt electric starter and gas tank. Honda package -13hp aircooled engine with 12 volt 

electric starter, pull start, 1.7 gallon fuel tank, low oil level shutdown, and 3 amp recharging system. Kawasaki - 11.5HP 

aircooled engine with 12 volt electric starter, gas tank, and low oil pressure shutdown. IR - 15HP aircooled, 12 volt 

electric start and gas tank, pressure lube, low oil pressure shutdown, 12 amp charging system. 

CONTROL—Control is constant speed control with engine slowdown. 

BASEPLATE PACKAGE—Base mounted units are supplied with a 4 gallon A.S.M.E. 200 psi receiver with pressure 

gauge, relief, service and drain valve. 

5HP & 7.5HP Duplex Detailed Specifications 

RECEIVER MOUNTED—All duplex units include two bare compressors with two motors mounted on a single-receiver. 

Each compressor/motor configuration is designed to run as an independent compression unit. However, both units can 

be run simultaneously should system demand require. 

5HP & 7.5HP Duplex “Value” Package Detailed Specifications 

RECEIVER MOUNTED— Duplex value packages include two (2) bare compressors with two (2) ODP motors mounted on 

a single horizontal A.S.M.E. coded receiver tank. Standard controls are automatic start/stop with unloading pressure 

switch. These packages include an E-Series alternator, mounted and wired, in a NEMA-1 enclosure. Panel is both U.L. 

and CSA approved. The alternator panel allows both compressor units to operate in response to system air pressure 

demand. For example, if system pressure dips below the preset lower pressure limit, compressor “A” will automatically 

start. If pressure rises to the upper set point limit, compressor “A” will shut down. Next time system pressure drops below 

the preset lower pressure limit, compressor “B” will automatically start. Should system demand require, both compressor 

units will start automatically to meet and maintain system air pressure demand. Alternator includes (2) duty rated starters 

with overload protection, (1) control relay for alternation, (1) on/off switch, fused control circuit, (2) reset buttons through 

the cover. Package features a totally enclosed belt guard, no aftercooler, with manual tank drain. Standard voltage is

Ref: 9820.00 

Sheet: 107 



2475 


230-3-60 with optional voltages available to meet specific site needs. Duplex value package options include install kit, 

start-up kit, and electric automatic tank drain with power cord. No other options are available with these packages. 

Fully Packaged 5HP & 7.5HP Duplex “Value” Compressor 

Detailed Specifications 

RECEIVER MOUNTED—“Fully Packaged” duplex value packages include two (2) bare compressors with two (2) ODP 

motors mounted on a single horizontal A.S.M.E. coded receiver tank. Standard controls are automatic start/stop with 

unloading pressure switch. These packages include an E-Series alternator, mounted and wired, in a NEMA-1 enclosure. 

Panel is both U.L. and CSA approved. The alternator panel allows both compressor units to operate in response to 

system air pressure demand. For example, if system pressure dips below the preset lower pressure limit, compressor “A” 

will automatically start. If pressure rises to the upper set point limit, compressor “A” will shut down. Next time system 

pressure drops below the preset lower pressure limit, compressor “B” will automatically start. Should system demand 

require, both compressor units will start automatically to meet and maintain system air pressure demand. Alternator 

includes (2) duty rated starters with overload protection, (1) control relay for alternation, (1) on/off switch, fused control 

circuit, (2) reset buttons through the cover. Package features a totally enclosed belt guard with air-cooled aftercooler, 

mounted and piped, and electric automatic tank drain with power cord (115-volt). Standard voltage is 230-3-60 with 

optional voltages available to meet specific site needs. “Fully Packaged” duplex value package install kit and start-up kit 

only. No other options are available with these packages. 

Totally Packaged Detailed Specifications 

TOTALLY PACKAGED RECEIVER MOUNTED MODELS (5HP AND 7.5HP)—The totally packaged model is a simplex 

compressor configuration which comes standard with an 80-gallon, ASME coded vertical receiver tank (includes pressure 

gauge, service valve, and relief valve), an "E"-Series starter (mounted and wired), aircooled aftercooler, and electric (115- 

volt) automatic drain valve. No modifications or options are available with this package. Prewired NEMA-1 electrics will 

be for 230/3/60 voltage; however the compressor starter is equipped with a dual-voltage coil which is capable of operating 

with 230/3/60 voltage or 460/3/60 voltage with minor field-wiring modifications. An additional set of heaters, decal, and 

instructions to convert the unit from 230 volts to 460 volts are supplied with each unit. The totally packaged 5 & 7.5HP 

models are also available in 200/3/60 or 230/1/60 electrics. 

Options 5HP Only Detailed Specifications 

OUTDOOR MODIFICATION—Compressor package is furnished with TEFC (1.15 SF) motor, NEMA 4 pressure switch. 

Does not includen the low oil level switch. This configuration can be used for outdoor installation. 

LOW OIL LEVEL SWITCH—Low oil level switch prevents the unit from operating when oil level is low. 

AIRCOOLED AFTERCOOLER—An optional air cooled aftercooler lowers package discharge air to within 25°F of 

ambient temperature. A relief valve is provided to protect against over-pressurization. 

AUTOMATIC DRAIN VALVE—As air cools in the receiver, moisture drops out and accumulates in the tank. An automatic 

drain valve provides unattended, automatic draining of the moisture from the receiver tank. Either electric or pneumatic 

drain valves are available. Fully packaged models are standard with electric drain valve. Electric drain valve is prewired 

on units with deluxe starters and is supplied with a six foot heavy duty power cord with AC adapter with “E” Series 

starters. 

“E”-SERIES STARTER (MTD. & WIRED)—SIMPLEX UNITS—“E”-Series starters provide full voltage control of electric 

motors. They include thermal relays which protect the motor windings from harmful currents and resultant temperature 

rise caused by overloaded motor, low line voltage or stalled rotor. Reset button and NEMA 1 enclosure (UL & CSA 

approved) included. 

NEMA 4 DELUXE STARTER (MTD. & WIRED)—SIMPLEX UNITS—NEMA 4 Deluxe starters provide full voltage control 

of electric motors. They include NEMA 4 enclosure, manual reset button, on/off switch, 120 volt control transformer, and 

thermal relays which provide overload protection. Fused control circuit complies with National Electric Code (UL & CSA 

approved).

Ref: 9820.00 

Sheet: 108 



2475 


“E”-SERIES NON-COMBINATION ALTERNATOR (MTD. & WIRED)—DUPLEX UNITS—This optional panel enables 

both compression units to operate in response to system demand. For example, if system pressure dips below preset 

lower limit, compressor A will start. If pressure rises to upper limit set point, compressor A will shut down. Next time 

system pressure falls below lower limit, compressor B will start. Should system air demand require, both compression 

units will run simultaneously. Alternator panel includes (2) Definite Purpose (DP) starters with overloads, (1) control relay 

for alternation, (1) on/off switch, fused control circuit, (2) reset buttons through cover, and NEMA 1 enclosure (UL & CSA 

approved). 

COMBINATION DELUXE ALTERNATOR (MTD. & WIRED)—DUPLEX UNITS—This optional panel enables both 

compression units to operate in response to system demand. For example, if system pressure dips below preset lower 

limit, compressor A will start. If pressure rises to upper limit set point, compressor A will shut down. Next time system 

pressure falls below lower limit, compressor B will start. Should system air demand require, both compression units will 

run simultaneously. Alternator panel includes (2) Definite Purpose (DP) starters with overloads, (1) control relay for 

alternation, (2) on/off switches, fused control circuit, (2) fused disconnect switches with door interlock, (2) 120 volt control 

transformers, (2) reset buttons, and NEMA 1 or NEMA 4 enclosure (UL & CSA approved). 

START-UP KIT—Each start-up kits contains all the parts needed to correctly start up and maintain the compressor for the 

first year of operation. Kits include All Season Select lubricant (quantity dependent upon sump capacity), replacement 

filter element(s), MSDS sheet for lubricant, and (1) proof of warranty decal. The All Season lubricant is specifically 

formulated to protect and preserve the air compressor pump. All Season Select Lubricant can operate up to 2000 hours 

(under normal operating conditions) between oil changes. Use of All Season Select lubricant from start-up throughout the 

first 2-years of operation provides for a full 2-YEAR PUMP WARRANTY, less consumables. 

INSTALL KIT—Each install kit contains all the parts needed to correctly mount and install the compressor. Kits include a 

three (3) foot braided hose with NPT swivel connectors (size matches connection on compressor), vibration pads and 

foundation anchor bolts. The Install kit is specifically designed to ease installation of the air compressor and to protect 

and preserve the receiver tank. Use of the Install kit at initial start-up warrants the receiver tank for five (5) years, less 

package related components. 

5-YEAR EXTENDED PUMP WARRANTY—An extended warranty warrants the bare compressor pump to be free from 

defects in material and workmanship for years three (3) through five (5). The bare compressor pump will be warranted for 

an additional thirty-six (36) months from the date the factory 2-year extended pump warranty expires. To extend the 

pump warranty for the additional thirty-six (36) months, the purchaser must at the time of purchase of the compressor 

package, purchase an extended pump warranty, register the unit with Ingersoll-Rand, continually use genuine Ingersoll- 

Rand parts and All Season Select lubricant, and demonstrate that the product was maintained basis the recommended 

maintenance procedures found in the equipment operator’s manual. The extended pump warranty comes with a PacE 

controller (downstream regulator)---the PacE controller must be installed and used in conjunction with the compressor 

covered under the extended pump warranty. This extended pump warranty, provided aforementioned items are adhered 

to, covers parts only (100%) on the bare compressor pump for the entire 5-Year period. Labor or freight is not included in 

this extended pump warranty. 

Revisions-Five-Year Extended Pump Warranty

Ingersoll Rand 

Refrigerated Dryers 

(12 to 480 m 3 /hr)

Reliable, Clean, Dry Air. 

Ingersoll Rand 

Minimise problems and expenses with an efficient, 

reliable and environmentally friendly solution for 

cleaner, drier air. 

Designed for Stress-free Air Quality 

Ingersoll Rand Refrigerated Dryers make 

providing continuous dry air, as easy as piping 

a self-contained unit into your compressed air 

supply line. 

Corrosion-resistant heat exchangers, an 

enhanced control system and high-efficiency 

moisture separation, ensure a steady long-term 

supply of dry air. This reduces additional cost 

associated with ruined product finishes, 

scrapped materials or replacement of pneumatic 

tools and manufacturing equipment destroyed 

by wet air. 

D25IN 

D300IN 

This small footprint unit, provides complete, 

affordable solutions for applications ranging from 

dry cleaning to automotive body shops, to light 

processing and manufacturing applications. 

Easy access simplifies routine maintenance. 

Designed for Optimum Efficiency 

Our dryers offer multiple design features to 

ensure a constant dew point at all load levels and 

will deliver a continuous dry air performance that 

satisfies ISO 7183 industry standards. The dryers 

full function control with enhanced control 

parameters, diagnostics and alarms is more 

sophisticated and powerful than similarly sized 

competitive products. We test every unit to 

ensure leak-free operation and compliance with 

all operating specifications. The units are rated 

for 46°C (115°F) ambient air conditions – suitable 

for most applications. 

Ingersoll Rand offers industry-leading products 

and solutions that enable businesses around the 

world to reduce energy consumption and costs 

and decrease harmful environmental emissions. 

From air compressors that reduce energy 

consumption to electric-powered golf cars with 

near-zero emissions, Ingersoll Rand provides the 

knowledge, experience and solutions to help our 

clients achieve their sustainability goals. 

2 Refrigerated Dryers

Low Cost of Ownership 

Ingersoll Rand’s refrigerated dryers offer design 

2 

features that reduce energy consumption and 

improve reliability: 

1 

1 

Corrosion resistant heat exchangers reduce airflow 

restrictions, providing more efficient throughput with 

less wasted energy. A built-in stainless steel de-mister, 

efficiently removes all moisture. 

2 

Microprocessor control with an easy-to-use graphic 

interface, lets the operator adjust and manage system 

parameters easily and efficiently. 

3 

3 

Variable speed fans reduce power consumption 

when units operate at less than maximum 

cooling capacity, while ensuring a consistent 

dew point. 

5 

4 

4 

Reliable, totally hermetic compressors use 

environmentally friendly R134A refrigerant. 

5 

The programmable electronic drain valve is 

fully adjustable to help minimise air loss. 

Technical Specifications (Standard Electrics - 230V / 1Ph / 50 Hz) 

Air Nominal Air Dimensions 

Model Flow Rate Power Connections Width Length Height Weight 

m 3 /hr m 3 /min kW BSP mm mm mm kg 

D12IN 12 0.2 0.12 

D25IN 25 0.4 0.12 

D42IN 42 0.7 0.18 

D54IN 54 0.9 0.18 

D72IN 72 1.2 0.20 

D108IN 108 1.8 0.41 

D144IN 144 2.4 0.47 

D180IN 180 3.0 0.61 

1 / 2" 305 360 402 17 

1 / 2" 305 360 402 23 

1 / 2" 389 431 452 25 

1 / 2" 389 431 452 26 

1 / 2" 389 431 452 26 

3 / 4" 420 515 562 33 

3 / 4" 420 515 562 38 

3 / 4" 420 515 562 43 

D240IN 240 4.0 0.68 1- 1 / 2" 500 679 978 76 

D300IN 300 5.0 1.04 1- 1 / 2" 500 679 978 87 

D360IN 360 6.0 1.04 1- 1 / 2" 500 679 978 87 

D480IN 480 8.0 1.40 1- 1 / 2" 500 679 978 110 

Dryer is rated for a ISO Class 5 Dew Point in accordance with ISO 8573-1. 

Performance data is basis 25°C cooling air temperature, 35°C inlet air temperature, and 7 bar g inlet pressure. 

UltraCare..........helping you to maintain a healthy business 

A lot can (and will) happen in the life of a compressed air system. With ever increasing demands for machine 

availability in today's industries, reducing production losses due to unplanned maintenance and downtime 

is essential. 

That is why we offer UltraCare. A responsive, flexible, preventative maintenance program, designed to provide 

Ingersoll Rand authorised maintenance to ensure increased system reliability. UltraCare helps to eliminate 

unexpected downtime and costly repairs. 

Refrigerated Dryers 

3

Ingersoll Rand Industrial Technologies provides products, services and solutions that enhance our customers' 

energy efficiency, productivity and operations. Our diverse and innovative products range from complete 

compressed air systems, tools and pumps to material and fluid handling systems and environmentally friendly 

microturbines. We also enhance productivity through solutions created by Club Car®, the global leader in golf 

and utility vehicles for businesses and individuals. 

Ingersoll Rand Industrial Technologies 

Swan Lane, Hindley Green 

Wigan WN2 4EZ, UK 

Tel: +44 (0) 1942 257171 

Fax: +44 (0) 1942 254162 

Email: asgesawebleads@irco.com 

Member of Pneurop 

air.ingersollrand.com 

Ingersoll Rand compressors are not designed, intended or approved for breathing air applications. Ingersoll Rand does not approve specialised equipment for 

breathing air applications and assumes no responsibility or liability for compressors used for breathing air service. 

Nothing contained on these pages is intended to extend any warranty or representation, expressed or implied, regarding the product described herein. Any such 

warranties or other terms and conditions of sale of product shall be in accordance with Ingersoll Rand's standard terms and conditions of sale for such products, 

which are available upon request. 

Product improvement is a continuing goal at Ingersoll Rand. Designs and specifications are subject to change without notice or obligation. 

Printed in the UK. May 08 © 2008 Ingersoll-Rand Company Limited CPN 23296072

FILTER MODULE 

F251X1-XXX 

RELEASED: 1-21-00 

REVISED: 

(REV. ) 

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 

MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION 

Body: Glass reinforced nylon. 

Bowls: Polycarbonate or glass reinforced nylon. 

Bowl Guard: Glass reinforced nylon. 

Seals: Nitrile. 

Drain: Tire valve type. 

Filter Element: Porous polypropylene. 

F1 

OPERATION CONDITIONS 

Temperature Range: 0 to 125 F (-18 to 52C). 

Max. Inlet Air Pressure: Poly bowl - 200 p.s.i.g. (13.8 bar) 

Nylon bowl - 150 p.s.i.g. (10.3 bar) 

Application: Industrial compressed air systems. 

Sump Capacity (Filters): 0.60 oz. (17.7 ml). 

Filter Area (Filters): 3.02 in. 2 (1949 mm 2 ). 

Flow: Air flow is at 90 p.s.i.g. (6.2 bar) inlet and 5 p.s.i.g. (0.3 

bar) pressure drop. 

F4 

F6 

1/8” - 28 scfm (13 dm 3 /s) 

1/4” - 38 scfm (18 dm 3 /s) 

F5 

F7 

 

 

F8 

F9 

F12 

F11 

F2 

F3 

F12 

F11 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

F10 

Torque to 5 - 9 in. lbs (.56 - 1.02 Nm.) 

Lubricate with Key-Lube upon assembly. 

Used on models F251X1-2XX and F251X1-4XX. 

Used on models F251X1-3XX. 

 

INGERSOLL-RAND COMPANY 

 

(419) 636-4242 FAX (419) 633-1674 2000 PRINTED IN U.S.A.

OPERATING AND SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 

• Use only genuine ARO replacement parts to assure compatible 

pressure rating and performance. 

• Read carefully all warnings and safety precautions and 

heed the following before operating, to avoid personal injury 

and / or property damage. 

• Be certain anyone operating this equipment has been 

trained to use it safely. 

WARNING COMPONENT RUPTURE. DO NOT EXCEED 

MAXIMUM RATED OPERATING PRESSURE OF: Polyarbonate 

Bowl - 200 p.s.i. (13.8 bar), Glass filled Nylon Bowl - 150 

p.s.i. (10.3 bar). To avoid possible damage or personal injury, 

DO NOT expose the unit to excessive pressure beyond the intended 

working range. 

WARNING TEMPERATURE LIMITS. DO NOT EXCEED 

MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE LIMITS OF 125 F (52 C). Excessive 

temperature can affect non-metallic parts which may 

weaken them and cause failure. 

WARNING USE WITH INDUSTRIAL COMPRESSED AIR 

SYSTEMS ONLY. DO NOT USE WITH BOTTLED GAS 

PRODUCTS OR FLUIDS. MISAPPLICATIONS CAN RE- 

SULT IN COMPONENT FAILURE. 

WARNING DISASSEMBLY HAZARD. DO NOT DISAS- 

SEMBLE THIS UNIT WHEN IT IS UNDER PRESSURE. 

SHUT OFF AND RELIEVE AIR SUPPLY BEFORE AT- 

TEMPTING SERVICE OR DISASSEMBLY PROCEDURES. 

Isolate the unit by closing the line valve or disconnect the supply 

line or hose. 

WARNING BOWL REMOVAL HAZARD. THE BOWL 

MUST BE SECURELY LOCKED INTO POSITION BEFORE 

EXPOSING THE UNIT TO LINE PRESSURE. The bowls are 

designed with a feature which inhibits removal while under 

pressure. When reinstalling, push the bowl up into the body 

and rotate to the right 1/8 turn. Failure to lock the bowl could 

cause it to blow off, which could result in personal injury or 

property damage. 

WARNING DO NOT USE DEGREASERS OR SOLVENTS 

TO CLEAN POLYCARBONATE BOWLS. Exposure internally 

or externally to incompatible chemicals or their vapors or 

fumes could attack and weaken polycarbonate material, 

causing failure. 

DO NOT EXPOSE to acetone, trichloroethane, gasolene, alcohols, 

keytones, esters, chlorinated hydrocarbons, toluene, 

etc. 

Clean polycarbonate bowls with soap and water or kerosene 

only. USE COMPATIBLE LUBRICATING OILS ONLY. Lubricating 

oils used in plastic bowls must be compatible with polycarbonate 

plastic (some “fire resistant” oil additives are not 

compatible). Fumes of these substances in contact with polycarbonate 

bowls internally or externally can also damage the 

bowl. Consult the chemical / oil manufacturer for compatibility 

and temperature limits. Refer to ‘‘Technical Specifications” on 

page 1 of this manual. 

INSTALLATION 

• Install filter with the air flow as indicated by the arrow on the 

unit. 

• Install filter as close as possible to the air operated equipment 

for best performance. 

• Filter must be installed with the bowl downward for proper operation. 

• Locate the filter upstream from the regulator and lubricator. 

OPERATION 

• Monitor the sediment accumulation. 

• If the pressure drop across the filter becomes excessive, 

empty the filter bowl, clean or replace the filter element to assure 

good performance. 

• Clean the filter element periodically. Soak the filter bowl and 

clean with soap and water. Refer to warnings concerning polycarbonate 

bowls. 

MAINTENANCE 

• Filters with manual drain must be drained as frequently as 

necessary to keep the liquid level below the baffle, which 

could cause liquid to be carried downstream.

Product Data Sheet 

e-LINE ® A.C. Motors 

Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled 

Type ELT 

• e-LINE ® Brand Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled Motors 

• All Cast Iron Construction 

• 1 to 250 Horsepower, 3600, 1800 and 1200 rpm 

• 208-230/460 Volt and 575 Volt ratings in stock 

• T-frame and C-face ratings in stock 

• 1.15 to 1.40 Service Factors 

• Class F Insulation with Class B Temperature Rise at Full Load 

• Energy Efficient that meet CSA – C390 and 

DOE (Cert # CC CC030A/CC050A) 

• IP – 55 Enclosure Protection 

• Vacuum Pressure Impregnation (VPI) Varnish System 


Product Overview 

e-LINE ® motors are designed with the users in mind. They 

include the features users demand most in a quality 

motor: Protection, Flexbility and Agency Approvals. 

1. Protection – encloses and protects the internal 

components of the motor 

2. Mounting Flexibility – mounts in many different 

configurations 

3. Electrical Flexibility – operates on various electrical 

supply systems 

4. Application Flexibility – features that extend the use 

of the motor 

5. Agency Approvals – exports anywhere 

Protection 

The e-LINE brand TEFC motor integrates a complete 

package of protection features that provide the motor an 

IP-55 enclosure, including: 

• Cast Iron Frame and End Shields 

• Cast Iron Fan Cover Guard 

• Cast Iron Conduit Box 

• V-ring shaft seal with an umbrella seal over the top 

of the v-ring 

• Zinc Coated Hardware 

• Stainless Steel Nameplate 

• Chemical Resistant Paint 

• Double Shielded Bearings though 280 frame 

• Open Bearings 320 to 440 frame 

• Vacuum Pressure Impregnated Insulation (VPI) 

Mounting Flexibility 

The motors are designed and stocked with mounting flexibility 

in mind. e-LINE ® motors are stocked in T-frame and 

C-face footed mountings. C-face kits are also available for 

field conversion. F1 to F2 field convertible on all frames. 

140 to 440 frames have eight mounting holes for 

mounting flexibility. 

Electrical Flexibility 

e-LINE motors are stocked in three voltage combinations, 

208-230/460, 460 and 575 volt. Full 50HZ and 60HZ data is 

printed on the nameplate with every motor. 50HZ operation 

at full nameplate HP without derating. Other voltage 

and frequency re-rating data are provided online at 

www.e-linemotors.com. Wye start – Delta Run suitable on 

210 frame and larger. 

Application Flexibility 

Many features are included to enhance and expand the 

applications for e-LINE brand motors. Those features 

include: 

• Inverter Capable Insulation System 

10:1 Variable Torque, 4:1 Constant Torque 

• 1.15 to 1.40 Service Factor 

• "C" Design torque on many ratings 

• Class ‘F’ Insulation with Class ‘B’ rise 

Agency Approvals 

e-LINE motors are suitable for export and installation the 

world over. Agency approvals include CE for Europe, CSA 

for the USA and Canada as well as CSA C390, US 

Department of Energy (DOE) CC030A/CC050A, and UL 

component recognition on 1 to 30 HP, pending on 40 to 

250 HP. 

Emerson Motor Technologies, a global leader in the 

design and manufacture of electrical motors, provides a 

complete line of general and special purpose electric 

motors from 1/200 through 5,000 horsepower. Brands 

such Emerson ® , e-LINE ® , U.S. Motors ® , Hurst ® , and 

Doerr ® allow Emerson to support a wide variety of applications 

including commercial and industial, applicance, 

hermetic, automotive, and HVAC. For more information 

about Emerson visit www.emersonmotors.com or 

www.usmotors.com or contact Emerson at (888) 637- 

7333. Emerson (NYSE:EMR) based in St. Louis, is a 

global leader in bringing technology and engineering 

together to provide innovative solutions to customers 

through its network power, process management, industrial 

automation, climate technologies, appliance and 

tools business. Sales in fiscal 2005 were $17.3 billion. 

For more information, www.gotoemerson.com. 

Emerson Motor Co. 



Phone: 888 637 7333 

Fax: 314 553 2087 

www.e-linemotors.com 

PDS E-Line Rev. 10/06 


Section 4 

Controls

Microcontroller 

Repeat Accuracy 

+/-0.1% 

Six 

Switch 

Timing 

Selectable 

Functions are 

0.1 Knob s ... Adjustable 1000 m in Time Six Ranges 

Universal Input Voltage 

Delay 

19...264 10 A, SPDT V AC or & DPDT 19...30 Relay V DC 

Contacts 

Approvals: 

Multifunction, Multirange 

TRU Universal Series Time Delay Relay 

Description 

popular The TRU timing Series functions is a multifunction, selected by knob a slide adjustable, switch. The Universal time delay Time is knob Delay adjustable Relay. It includes and the time six of delay the range most 

face is switch of the selectable. unit. In addition The repeat to multifunctioning accuracy is +0.1%. and multiple Both time function ranges, and the time range Series can features be selected universal on the input top 

voltage; to 1000 competitive 19 to 264 V time AC and delay 19 relay to 30 models. V DC and full 10 A output relay. The TRU Series can directly replace up 

Operation 

A Interval, six position Single Shot, slide Recycling switch selects (ON time Delay first), on Delay Make, 

Break, and Retriggerable Single Shot. 8 Pin DPDT base on 

wiring Recycling is limited functions. to Delay All six functions Make, are Interval, available and 

the 8 pin SPDT and 11 pin DPDT versions. in 

Connection 

8 Pin DPDT 

Delay Interval On Make 

Recycling 

Function 

Accessories 

Panel P/N: BZ1 

mount kit 

Hold 

P/Ns: 

down clips 

PSC8 

PSC11 (NDS-8) 

(NDS-11) 

11 

P/N: 

pin NDS-11 

socket 

Octal 

8 

P/N: 

pin NDS-8 

socket 

See specifications. accessory pages for 

4.6 

8 Pin SPDT 

Delay Interval On Make 

Recycling Single (ON Shot 

Delay on Break Time First) 

Retriggerable Single Shot 

11 Pin DPDT 

S1 = Initiate Switch 

Dashed Relay contacts lines are are internal isolated. connections. 

Ordering Table 

Voltage 

19 ... 264 V AC; 19 ... 30 V DC 

Base 8 Wiring 

SPDT DPDT 

11 pin DPDT 

V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch R = Reset 

TD = Time Delay NO = Normally Open Contact 

t = Incomplete Time Delay 

Functions 

36 

Part TRU1 

Number 

TRU2 TRU3 

Low Voltage Products & Systems 

TRU02B01 07.29.04

Technical Data 

Multifunction, Multirange 

TRU Universal Series Time Delay Relay 

Time Delay 

Range: 

Type 

Switch Selectable** 0.1 

Digital 

s ... 

integrated 

1000 m in 

circuitry 

6 ranges--0.1 ... 10, 1 ... 100 or 10 ... 1000 s; 

Adjustments Multiplier: 

0.1 ... 10, 1 

4 

... 

position 

100 or 

DIP 

10 ... 

switch 

1000 

selects 

m 

x0.1, x1, x10, and s or m 

LED 

Time Setting: Onboard knob adjustment with 1 ... 100 reference dial 

Repeat 

Indication Two LED's indicate input voltage applied & output relay status 

Reset Time Accuracy +/-0.1%, or +/-20 ms, whichever is greater 

≤ 300 ms 

Time 

Input 

Delay vs. Temp. & Voltage +/-2% 

Voltage--Universal Input Range 19 ... 264 V AC and 19 ... 30 V DC 

Line Output 

Frequency 50 ... 60 Hz 

Form Type 

Isolated Electromechanical SPDT & DPDT relay 

Life 

Rating 

Mechanical: 

10 A resistive 

1 

at 

x 

120/240 

107; Electrical: 

V AC & 

1 

28 

x 

V DC; 1/3 hp at 120/240 V AC 

106 

Protection 

Transient 

Isolation Voltage 

38 joules 

≥ 1500 V RMS input to output 

Polarity Mechanical DC units are reversed polarity protected 

Mounting 

Package 

3.44 

Plug-in 

x 2.39 

socket 

x 1.78 in. (87.3 x 60.7 x 45.2 mm) 

Termination Environmental Octal plug (8 Pin) or magnal plug (11 Pin) 

Operating Temperature -20°C... +65°C 

Weight 

Storage Temperature -30°C... +85°C 

≅ 6 oz (170 g) 

** For CE approved applications, power must be removed when a switch position is changed. 

Mechanical View 

Inches (Millimeters) 

TRU02B01 07.29.04 

Low Voltage Products & Systems 4.7

3 Phase Voltage Monitor 

PLMU Universal Series Plug-in Monitor 

Description 

The phase PLMU motors Series and continuously sensitive loads. measures Its microcontroller the voltage of each 

senses 

of the 

under 

three 

and 

phases 

over 

to 

voltage, 

provide 

voltage 

protection 

unbalance, 

for three 

phase 

voltage 

loss, 

operation 

and phase 


reversal. 

standard 

Protection 

base connection 

is provided 

allows 

even 

the 

when 

PLMU 

regenerated 

to replace 

voltages 

hundreds 

are 

of 

present. 

competitive 

Universal 

numbers. 

part 

ANSI Device #27/47/59 

Protects 

Loss, Phase 

Against: 

Reversal, 

Phase 

& 

Overvoltage, 

Unbalanced 

Undervoltage, 

Octal Plug-in with Voltages 

Isolated 10 A Contacts 

SPDT 

Operates 

LED Indicator 

from 200 

Glows 

... 480 

Green 

V AC 

when 

Acceptable, 

Voltages 

Red 

are 

Simple 3-Wire Connection for Faults 

Delta or Wye Systems 

for 

ASME NEMA A17.1 MG1 14:30, rule 210.6 

IEEE C62.41-1991 Level 

14:35 

B 

Approvals: 

Accessories 

Panel P/N: BZ1 

mount kit 

Operation 

Upon 

begins 

application 

and the PLMU 

of power, 

measures 

a 0.6 s random 

the voltage 

start 

levels 

delay 

and The output line frequency relay is energized and selects and the the LED voltage glows range. 

when all voltages are acceptable and the phase 

green 

sequence 

delay, glows 

is correct. 

red when 

LED flashes 

output 

green 

de-energizes. 

during trip 

Undervoltage, 

must be sensed 

overvoltage, 

for continuous 


trip 

voltage 

delay 

unbalance 

relay de-energizes. Re-energization is automatic 

before 

upon 

the 

fault 

fault 

correction. 

condition is 

The 

sensed 

output 

as three 

relay 

phase 

will not 

input 

energize 

voltage 

if a 

is 

setting 

applied. 

the over 

Line 


voltage 

under 

is 

voltage 

selected 

trip points. 

with the 

Voltage 

knob, 

range is automatically selected by the microcontroller. 

Connection 

Fast 2 Amp 

Fuses Acting 

Recommended 

(Not For Required) Safety 

OA 

F Fuses 

A B L1 

OC OB 

Phase C = L2 

NO Open L3 

NC = Normally Closed 

Relay internal contacts connections. are isolated. Dashed lines are 

Octal 

P/N: OT08PC 

8 pin socket 

3-phase 

block/disconnect 

fuse 

P/N: 

2 AMP P0700-241 

P/N: P0600-11 

fuse 

DIN 

017322005 rail P/Ns: 

C103PM (Al) 

(Steel) 

See specifications. accessory pages for 

7.14 

Ordering Table 

Faceplate View 

Voltage 

Adjustable Unbalance 

2 ... 10% Adjustable 

Trip Delay 

0.25 ... 30 s 

Part PLMU11 

Number 

Available with Fixed Unbalance and Trip Delay 

Low Voltage Products & Systems 

PLMU2B01 06.08.04

Technical Data 

3 Phase Voltage Monitor 

PLMU Universal Series Plug-in Monitor 

Line Type 

Voltage 

Line 

Three phase Delta or Wye with no connection to neutral 

Adjustable 

Voltage 

200 ... 480 V AC +/-15%; 50 ... 60 Hz +/-2 Hz 

(Automatic 

Voltage 

Range 

Ranges 

Selection) 200 

340 

... 240 

420 AC, 50 

50 

... 60 Hz 

Maximum Voltage 552 

400 ... 

V AC 

480 V AC, 60 Hz 

Overvoltage, 

Phase Sequence 

Undervoltage, & 

ABC 

Type Voltage Unbalance 

Overvoltage & Undervoltage 

Voltage detection with delayed trip & automatic reset 

Reset 

Undervoltage Trip Point 88 ... 92% of adjusted line voltage 

Overvoltage 

Voltage 

Trip Point 

+2% 

109 ... 

of 

113% 

trip voltage 

of adjusted line voltage 

Voltage 

Reset Voltage -2% of trip voltage 

Reset on 

Unbalance 

Balance (%): 

Trip Point Adjustable from 2 ... 10% or fixed 4 ... 10% 

Selected Unbalance 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 

Trip 

Reset 1.5 2.5 3.5 4.5 5.4 6.3 7.2 8.1 9 

Severe Delay Range Adj. from 0.25 ... 30 s or fixed 2 ... 30 s +/-15% 

Random 

Unbalance 

Start Delay 

- 2X Selected Unbalance 0.25 ... 2 s; disabled when the trip delay is less than 2 s 

≅ Phase Reversal & Phase Loss Trip Time 

0.6 s 

≤ 

Phase Loss Set Point 

150 ms 

≥ 15% unbalance 

Reset Output Type 

Automatic 

Rating 

Type 

Energized when voltages are acceptable 

Life 

10 

Mechanical 

A resistive 

-- 

@ 

1 x 

240 V AC; 1/4 hp @ 125 V AC; 1/3 hp @ 250 V AC; max. voltage 277 V AC 

106 ; Electrical -- 1 x 105 

Protection 

Surge 

Isolation Voltage 

IEEE C62.41-1991 Level B 

≥ Mechanical 

2500 V RMS input to output 

Mounting* 

Plug-in socket rated 600 V AC *CAUTION: 

600 V AC operation. 

Select an octal socket rated for 

Termination 

Package 

3.03 

8 Pin 

x 

octal 

2.39 

plug 

Environmental 

x 1.78 in. (77.0 x 60.7 x 45.2 mm) 

Operating 

Storage Temperature 

Temperature -40°C 

-40°C 

... 

... 

+60°C 

Weight +85°C 

≅ 8.6 oz (244 g) 

Mechanical View 

PLMU2B01 06.08.04 

Inches (Millimeters) 

Low Voltage Products & Systems 7.15

Weekly Timer 

H5L 

1/4 DIN Size Timer Features Prompted 

Programming and Large LCD Display 

■ 24 hours x 7 days programming using 

just 5 switches 

■ 16 program steps and cycle operation 

■ Two independent 15 A control circuits 

■ Manual override switch for each output 

■ Easy-to-read, large, 0.5 inch high LCD 

display 

■ Wide operating voltage range 

■ 10-year battery backup for memory 

protection 

■ Hardware for panel and surface mounting 

included; designed for track mounting 

■ Protective cover and mounting track may 

be ordered separately 

Ordering Information 

■ TIMERS 

Part number 

Supply voltage 

Timing function 

Contact type 

Terminal form 

H5L-A 

100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

Weekly timer, 24 hours x 7 days, ON and OFF programming 

Two SPST time limit contacts with manual override switches 

Screw terminals accessible from front and back 

■ TIME RANGES 

Time setting range 

Program capacity 

Cycle length 

Minimum cycle interval 

00:00 to 23:59 (hours:minutes) 

16 steps: ON = 1 step, OFF = 1 step, CYCLE = 4 steps 

1 minute to 23 hours 59 minutes 

1 minute between OFF and ON periods 

■ ACCESSORIES 

Description 

Part number 

Hard plastic cover 

Y92A-96A 

Mounting track 50 cm (1.64 ft) length PFP-50N 

1 m (3.28 ft) length PFP-100N/N2 

End plate 

PFP-M 

NEMA 4 cover 

Y92A-96N 

■ REPLACEMENT PARTS 

Description 

Part number 

Surface mounting bracket; one supplied with each H5L timer H5L 2433983-6 

Flush mounting bracket; one supplied with each H5L timer H5L 2433982-8

H5L 

H5L 

Specifications 

Part number 

Supply 

voltage 

Operating voltage 

Power consumption 

Timing functions 

Control 

output 

AC 

DC – 

H5L-A 

100 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz 

85 to 110% of rated voltage 

7 VA 

24 hours x 7 days, ON and OFF programming 

16 steps; ON = 1 step, OFF = 1 step, CYCLE = 4 steps 

Type Time limit Two independent SPST relays 

Max. load 

Min. load 

Repeat accuracy 

Long-term error 

Setting error 

Indicators 

Materials 

Mounting 

Connections 

Weight 

Approvals 

Instantaneous – 

Operating ambient temperature 

Humidity 

Vibration Mechanical durability 

Malfunction durability 

10 A at 250 VAC, 15 A at 125 VAC, 10 A at 30 VDC (resistive load at 25°C (77°F) 

100 mA, 5 VDC 

+0.01%, +0.05 sec maximum 

+15 seconds per month at 25°C (77°F) 

Included in "Repeat accuracy" 

LCD display: day, date, time, output status; 12.5 mm (0.05 in) high 

Plastic 

Shock Mechanical durability 30 G 

Malfunction durability 

Variation due to voltage change 

Variation due to temperature change 

Insulation resistance 

Dielectric strength 

Service life 

Panel, track or surface; mounting brackets included 

Front and rear connections, screw terminals 

350 g (12.4 oz.) 

UL/CSA/SEV 

-10° to 55°C (14° to 131°F) 

35 to 85% RH 

10 to 55 Hz; 0.75 mm (0.03 in) double amplitude 

10 to 55 Hz; 0.5 mm (0.2 in) double amplitude 

10 G 



10 MΩ at 500 VDC minimum 

2,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute across current-carrying terminals and exposed 

non-current-carrying metallic parts. 

1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute across control power supply circuit and contact control 

output circuit and across non-continuous contacts. 

100,000 operations minimum (resistive load, 15 A at 250 VAC) 

Engineering Data 

■ AMBIENT OPERATING TEMPERATURE AND CARRY CURRENT 

The upper limit of the ambient operating temperature 

must be derated when a large carry current is being 

applied. This case occurs when both circuits are 

energized simultaneously. 

Maximum ambient operating temperature 

60°C 

(140°F) 

55°C 

(131°F) 

50°C 

(122°F) 

40°C 

(104°F) 

When both circuits are 

energized simultaneously 

0 5 10 12 15 20 

Carry current AC/DC (A) 

2

H5L 

H5L 

Dimensions 

Unit: mm (inch) 

■ TIMER 

■ PROTECTIVE COVER 

The hard plastic cover prevents 

accidental resetting. It also 

shields the front panel from dirt 

and water. The cover is 

intended for use in areas where 

unusual service conditions do 

not exist. 

■ MOUNTING TRACK AND ACCESSORIES 

Mounting Track 

PFP-100N, PFP-50N 

PFP-100N2 

End Plate 

PFP-M 

Spacer 

PFP-S 

3

H5L 

H5L 

Connections 

Power supply terminal numbers Output terminal numbers 

AC (common) AC (hot) Load 1 Load 2 

2 1 7 and 8 5 and 6 

If operating conditions exceed the noise 

values at right, connect a surge absorber to 

prevent malfunction or damage to the 

timer. This is especially important when 

inductive loads are being switched by the 

timer. 

Noise voltage: 

Pulse width: 

Rise time:1 ns 

2 KV 

100 ns 

Installation 

■ WIRING 

Power Supply 

For panel mounting 

For track and surface mounting 

Wire the H5L timer from the rear once the 

unit is mounted in the panel. 

Wire the H5L timer from the front when the unit is track or surface mounted. 

1. Loosen the screw above the "cycle" key on the left front. 

2. Slide the upper part of the housing upward about 15 mm (0.59 in). 

3. Step 2 exposes the terminals. Perform the wiring. 

4. Slide the upper part of the housing to the original position, then tighten the screw. 

Output Circuits 

Perform wiring so that the potential across 

the output contacts is the same. This 

prevents short-circuiting of the contacts. 

Refer to the connections chart above for 

terminal numbers. 

Correct 

Incorrect 

4

H5L 

H5L 

Operation 

■ NOMENCLATURE 

Mode display 

Mode key 

Write key 

Day of week 

display 

Output status indication 

Output ON 

Plus key 

Minus key 

Output OFF 

Invalid instruction 

written to a step 

Cycle key 

Manual override switch 

■ KEY OPERATIONS 

Key Name Function 

MODE 

+ 

- 

Mode key 

Write key 

Plus key 

Minus key 

Cycle key 

Changes program mode 

< < 

RUN mode 

Second circuit 

weekday setting 

mode 

Current time 

setting mode 

< 

To write the set data using the plus and/or minus key 

Reads out the set program 

Plus key increments displayed digits 

Minus key decrements displayed digits 

When the plus key is held down, the displayed digit increments continuously; when the 

minus key is held down, the displayed digit decrements continuously 

When specifying output, the plus key specifies output ON, the minus key specifies output 

OFF. If the same key is pressed twice, the output specification becomes invalid, so 

neither ON nor OFF is set. 

Selects the cycle program. 


operation 

setting mode 

< 

First circuit operation 

setting mode 

< < 

First weekday 

setting mode 

Manual 

override 

switch 

ON: Turns ON output regardless of program 

RUN: Executes program 

OFF: Turns OFF output regardless of program 

Each circuit can be operated independently 

5

H5L 

■ PROGRAMMING SEQUENCE 

The H5L weekly timer has six program modes. Use the mode key 

to change the modes. Use the write key, plus and minus keys and 

cycle key for programming in each mode. 

H5L 

Cycle program 

The cycle program in H5L can be used to repeat ON and OFF 

output patterns for a length of time. A cycle program consists of 

four steps: Start time, ON time, OFF time and Stop time. 

Mode sequence 

Programming details 

Setting Cycle Program 

Set the cycle program with the following four steps: 

Setting 

start time 

↓ 

Setting 

ON time 

Set the "hour" and "minute" 

of start time using the + 

and - keys. 

Set the ON time of the cycle 

frequency in the order of 

"hour" and "minute". 

↓ 

Setting 

OFF time 

Set the OFF time of the cycle 

frequency in the order of 

"hour" and "minute". 

↓ 

Setting 

stop time 

Set the stop time of the 

cycle program. 

↓ 

Normal 

program 

mode 

After the four steps are set, 

H5L automatically returns to 

normal program mode. 

Cautions on Using Cycle Programs 

1. When the current time is included within the set cycle period, 

the cycle operation starts (output turns ON) on completing 

the cycle program setting (when stop time is written). 

2. When any of the following occurs during a cycle period, the 

cycle operation restarts from output ON: 

Recovery after power failure 

Current time adjustment 

Change of start or stop time of the cycle program 

during operation 

For this reason, if the cycle program is set in such a manner 

that outputs 1 and 2 have a phase difference, as shown 

below, the phase difference is changed automatically 

when any of the abovementioned conditions occur. We 

recommend using cycle programs sequentially. 

NOTE: The H5L operates according to the program already set, 

even while another program is being set. The output 

status display shows the program being set. The actual 

output status may not agree with the displayed status 

during programming. 

3. The cycle period (from start time to stop time) must not be a 

multiple of the cycle frequency (ON time plus OFF time). The 

cycle period can be set between 1 minute and 24 hours. 

6 

4. ON time as well as OFF time can be set within a range of 

1 minute to 23 hours 59 minutes.

H5L 

H5L 

■ DELETING ON/OFF PROGRAM STEPS 

Use the MODE and WRITE keys to advance to the output status 

indicator of the steps to be deleted. Use the + and 

– keys to make the output status indicator invalid (no bar). 

Press the WRITE key and the step is deleted. 

■ DELETING CYCLE PROGRAM STEPS 

Use the MODE and WRITE keys to advance to the first step of 

the cycle program. Push the CYCLE key followed by the WRITE 

key. All four stpes of the cycle program are deleted. 

■ CLEARING THE PROGRAM 

The H5L cannot be cleared by cycling the power OFF/ON since a 

built-in battery protects the memory. In order to clear the contents 

of the memory, follow these steps. 

1. Loosen the screw above the cycle key on the left side of timer 

front, then slide the front panel up. 

2. Turn the timer over and depress the metal strip at the top near 

the area of the small hole. 

3. The contents of the memory are cleared and the display will 

show all of the graphics for approximately 5 seconds. This 

may be used for a quick visual check. 

Press here to clear program 

↓ 

CAUTION: Use the front panel override switches to control the 

status of the outputs when clearing the program. This 

maintains the desired functions without interruption. 

Programming Example 

■ CREATE A TIMING CHART BEFORE PROGRAMMING 

Always create a timing chart before 

programming the timer. The hardcopy 

provides an excellent tool if troubleshooting 

is needed. If changes to 

the programming are necessary, having 

the hardcopy will make the job easier. 

The timer will generate outputs during 

programming depending on the logic of 

the current or previous program. Use 

the output override switches to 

manually control the outputs if this is 

undesirable. 

ON 

OFF 

ON 

OFF 

Sample Timing Chart Blank 

First circuit 

0 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 


0 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 

Sun. Mon. Tue. Wed.Thu. Fri. Sat. 

Sun. Mon. Tue. Wed.Thu. Fri. Sat. 

■ SETTING ON AND OFF PROGRAMS, CYCLE PROGRAMS 

In this example, the first circuit is programmed to turn ON at 7:40 and OFF at 

19:30. This circuit is operated from Monday through Friday and stopped on 

Saturday and Sunday. 

The second circuit is cyclically operated with each parameter set as follows: 

Start time: 6:50 

ON time: 5 minutes 

OFF time: 20 minutes 

Stop time: 20:30 

The second circuit is stopped from operating on Sunday and operated from 

Monday through Saturday. The current time is assumed to be 11:15 a.m. on 

Tuesday. 

7

H5L 

H5L 

Creating Timing Chart 

First circuit 


Writing the Program 

Setting the current time 

To set the current time, "day of the week", "hour", and "minute" must be specified. 

First, turn on the power to the H5L. Press the Mode key for more than 1 sec. The 

TIM ADJ indicator is displayed. 

Set 11:15 on Tuesday, the current time in example1. 

Start with setting the day of the week. The blinking indicator indicates the parameter 

that can be set. Set the current day of the week to Tuesday by pressing the + or – 

key. 

When "TUE" is displayed, press the Write key to store the current day of the week in 

memory. Then the "hour" indicator will flash at this time and the "day of the week" 

indicator will stop blinking. 

Set the current hour to 11 by pressing the + or – key, followed by the Write key. 

At this time, the "minute" indicator will blink. Set the current minute to 15 by pressing 

the + key or – key, followed by the Write key. 

This completes the current time setting. 

Next, program the first circuit's operation. 

8

H5L 

H5L 

First Circuit Operation Setting 

To program the operation of the first circuit, "hour", "minute", and "output" must be 

specified. 

Press the MODE key to set the H5L in PROG 1 mode. The display will be as shown 

on the left. 

Since the first circuit is turned ON at 7:40, set the "hour" to 7 by pressing the + or – 

key and then store it in memory by using the Write key. 

Then "minute" will start blinking. Set it to 40 by using the + or – key and store it in 

memory by pressing the Write key. 

Now, the output status indicator will blink. Set the output to the ON status with the + 

key followed by the Write key. 

(If the + key is pressed twice at this time, the display will give an invalid indication 

( ). Then if the Write key is pressed, this program will be deleted.) 

The display returns to the initial status as shown on the left and waits for the next 

program step to be input. 

Since the first circuit should be turned OFF at 19:30, set the hour to 19 and the minute 

to 30 by using the + or – key and then the Write key. 

Now the output status indicator starts blinking. Set the output to OFF status by the – 

key and store it in memory by the Write key. 

The display returns to the initial status and waits for the next program step to be input. 

As the first circuit operation setting is completed, let us turn to setting the "day of the 

week". 

9

H5L 

H5L 

Second Circuit Operation Setting 

Press the MODE key to set the H5L in PROG 2 mode. The display appears as shown 

on the left. 

In example 1, as the second circuit is to be cyclically operated, specify the cycle 

program by pressing the Cycle key. 

START 

Set the start time (6:50) first. Set the hour to 6 and the minute to 50 by pressing the + 

or – key. Write each set value with the Write key. 

START 

Then, set the ON time, which is 0:05 in this example. 

Write the hour of 0 by pressing the Write key. 

Set the minute to 5 and store it in memory by using the Write key. 

Next, set the OFF time. 

The OFF time is to be 0:20. 

Finally, by pressing the Write key, set the hour to 0. In addition, set the minute to 20 

by pressing the + or – key. Write it by pressing the Write key. 

Next, set the time at which the cyclic circuit operation is to be stopped. The stop time 

is to be 20:30. 

STOP 

Set the hour to 20 by pressing the + or – key followed by the Write key. Set the 

minute to 30 by the + or – key followed by the Write key. 

STOP 

Now, the programming of the cyclic operation is completed. 

The display is as shown on the left and waits for the next program to be input. Since 

the second circuit operation in example 1 has been completed, let's move to setting 

the day of the week. 

10

H5L 

H5L 

Second Circuit Day-of-the-Week Setting 

Press the MODE key to set the H5L in the DAY SET mode of the PROG 2 mode. 

The display will be as shown on the left. 

As the initial condition, the second circuit is to be operated on all the days of the 

week, which means all the indications by the day indicators are reverse video except 

that of the SUN indicator which blinks. 

In example 1, the second circuit is not operated on Sunday but on all the other days; 

set Sunday to be stopped accordingly using the – key and the Write key. 

Then, the MON indicator starts blinking. Since on Monday through Saturday the 

operation is set to be activated as the initial condition, there is no more need to set the 


Running the Program 

Now all the parameters have been programmed as in example 1. Press the MODE 

key to set the H5L in the RUN mode. 

The display will be as shown on the left. 

The output status indicators show the current status of both outputs. 

■ PROGRAMMING ERRORS 

1. When the OFF time is set at the same hour and minute as the ON 

time, "hour" indicator blinks twice the normal rate for showing a 

program error. In this case, set the OFF (or ON) time again. 

2. When the ON/OFF program is superimposed on the cyclic period 

(from cycle start to cycle stop), the program error is indicated as 

shown below. Set the "hour" and "minute" outside the cyclic 

period. 

3. When a cycle program is superimposed on the existing program 

(ON time, OFF time, or cycle program), the program error is 

indicated as shown below. Change the start time or stop time of 

the cycle program not to overlap the other existing program. 

11

H5L 

H5L 

Mounting 

The H5L timer comes with mounting brackets for panel and surface mounting. 

A slot on the back of the case allows H5L to be track mounted. 

■ PANEL MOUNTING 

Use the U-shaped mounting bracket supplied. Dimensions Panel cutout 

Flush mounting 

bracket (supplied) 

H5L 2433982-8 

■ SURFACE MOUNTING 

Use the straight mounting bracket supplied. 

Mounting holes 

Surface mounting 

bracket (supplied) 

H5L 2433983-6 

■ TRACK MOUNTING 

Hook the upper part on the rear surface to the upper edge of the 

mounting track and press the unit down. 

59.8 (2.354) 

12

H5L 

H5L 

NOTE: DIMENSIONS ARE SHOWN IN MILLIMETERS. To convert millimeters to inches divide by 25.4. 

OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC OMRON ON-LINE 

OMRON CANADA, INC. 

One East Commerce Drive 

Global - http://www.omron.com 

885 Milner Avenue 

Schaumburg, IL 60173 

USA - http://www.omron.com/oei 

Scarborough, Ontario M1B 5V8 

1-800-55-OMRON Canada - http://www.omron.com/oci 

416-286-6465 

Cat. No. GC TMCN1 3/02 Specifications subject to change without notice. Printed in the U.S.A. 

13

Manual Motor Starters, 

Controllers, and Protectors 

Type GV2, GV3, and GV7 

File 2520 

CONTENTS 

Schneider Electric Brands 

Description 

Page 

General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 

Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 

Accessories Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 

Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 

Indexed Catalog Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

2 

© 2001-2002 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 

10/02

Manual Motor Starters, Controllers, and Protectors 

Table of Contents 

GENERAL INFORMATION 

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 

PRODUCT SELECTION 

GV2/GV3, GV7 Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 

ACCESSORIES SELECTION 

GV2 Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 

GV2 Enclosures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 

GV3 Accessories and Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 

GV7 Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 

SPECIFICATIONS 

GV2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 



DIMENSIONS 

GV2 Mounting Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 

GV3 Mounting Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 

GV7 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 

WIRING DIAGRAMS 

GV2 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 



10/02 © 2001-2002 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 

3


General Information 

INTRODUCTION 

Square D/Telemecanique offers a complete line of products for the manual control and protection of 

motors. This catalog covers those devices designed to meet IEC standards for protection and control. ♣ 

The GV2 and GV3 manual starter and protector provides manual isolation, manual motor control, and 

overcurrent protection in one compact unit. Square D offers four different products that make up the GV 

product family; GV2ME, GV2P, and GV3ME and GV7. These devices are UL Listed as Manual Motor 

Controllers. 

The GV2ME controls motors with full load currents up to 32 A. The GV2P, high performance manual 

starter, offers a higher withstand rating and visible trip indication. The GV3ME controls larger motors 

with full load currents up to 63 A. The GV7 provides control and protection for motors with full load 

currents up to 220 A. 

The GV2 and GV3 manual starters and protectors are also UL Listed for group installation applications. 

See page 6 for maximum fuse or circuit breaker ratings when used in group installations. 

In many European applications, the GV devices are used as circuit breakers because they meet the 

requirements of IEC 60947-2 for circuit breakers. However, the GV starter does not meet North 

American circuit breaker standards such as UL, National Electrical Code, or CSA. 

Standard Features 

The GV family offers such standard features as: 

• UL Listed, CSA Certified, and CE Marked 

• UL Listed for Group Motor Applications (for more details see page 7) 

• Overload relay 

— Class 10, ambient compensated (GV2, GV3) 

— Class 10, solid state (GV7) 

• Single phase sensitivity 

• Magnetic instantaneous short-circuit protection 

• Test trip mechanism 

• Provision for padlocking in the OFF position 

— Standard for GV2, GV3 

— Requires attachment of rotary handle for GV7 

• Fingersafe terminals (meets IP20 standards) 

• North American and European terminal markings 

♣ 

Related catalogs cover products used in conjunction with manual motor protectors: 

IEC Style Contactors and Starters, catalog number 8502CT9901R9/02. 

Wiring, Communication and Busbar System, catalog number 8502CT0101. 

For manual motor starters designed to meet NEMA standards refer to catalog number 2510CT9701. 

® 

® 

4 


10/02

Standard Features (continued) 



GV2ME GV2P GV3ME 

0.1 to 32 A 

Up to 20 hp @ 460 V 

10 kA short circuit current @ 480 V 

Push Button Operator 

Type of protection Thermal-magnetic (overloads are bimetallic - Class 10) 

Mounting 

Connection 

Marking 

Tripping test 

Signalling on front face 

• By the manual control device 

• By mechanical flag indicator 

Padlocking 

Tamper-proof current dial 

Accessories 

• Clip-on mounting on 35 mm DIN rail. Unclips 

without using a tool. 

• Panel mount with metal adapter plate. 

0.1 to 25 A 

Up to 15 hp @ 460 V 


Rotary Handle Operator 

Visible Trip Indication 

• Clip-on mounting on 35 mm DIN rail. Unclips 

without using a tool. 

• Panel mount directly. 

1 to 63 A 

Up to 40 hp @ 460 V 


Push Button Operator 

• Clip-on mounting on 35 mm DIN rail. 

Unclips without using a tool. 

• Panel mount directly. 

Use a cross-head screwdriver; captive screws. Same screwdriver used for connections on GV2 starters and their add-on blocks. 

By marker holder supplied with each unit. 

By means of a fine-blade screwdriver on front face of product. 

• ON or OFF state 


• Tripping by overload, short circuit, undervoltage 

or shunt trip. 

• Tripping by short circuit. 

In the OFF position, with padlock, using the system incorporated in the manual control device. 

— 

The thermal current setting dial is covered by a 

transparent cover which can be sealed. 


Mounted on the front of the product: 

- Either N.C. or N.O., N.O. + N.O. or N.O. + N.C. instantaneous contact blocks which do not increase the width of the product. 

Side-mounting, accessories snap onto the starters, without the use of tools. 

• On the left-hand side, contact blocks which provide the following: 

- N.O. + N.O. or N.O. + N.C. Start-Stop contacts, 

- N.O. or N.C. trip signalling contact, incorporating a mechanical flag indicator, and N.O. or N.C. Start-Stop contact, 

- C/O magnetic trip signalling contact, associated with a mechanical flag indicator, used for reset. 

• On the right-hand side: 

- Shunt trip or undervoltage trip. 

- Combination block for use with K contactor. 

- Bus bars and connectors 

- For GV2P, visible isolation block which mounts 

on the incoming terminals of the device 

- Door interlock mechanism. 

Selection Page 9 Page 9 Page 9 

— 

GV7RE / GV7RS 

Type of protection 

Mounting 

Connection 

Marking 

Signaling on Front Face 

- By manual control 

- By mechanical flag 

Padlocking 

Accessories 

25 to 220 A 

Up to 150 hp @ 460 V 


Toggle Operator 

Solid state overload - magnetic short circuit 

Panel mount directly, door mounting optional 

Clip-on connectors (sold separately) 

Continue existing cell from previous column. 

On or Off state 

Tripping by overload or short circuit 

When used with door mounted rotary handle or with separate locking device 

Front accessible, internally mounted 

- Auxiliary contacts 

- Trip indication contacts 

- Shunt trip 

- Undervoltage trip 

Rotary Handles 

Selection Page 9 


5



GROUP INSTALLATION SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT 

The GV2/GV3/GV7 devices are UL 508 listed, Manual Motor Controllers for use in group installations. 

If each motor in the grouping is controlled by a GV2/GV3/GV7 device, only one branch circuit protective 

device (circuit breaker or fusing) is necessary for the entire group per NEC 430-53c, provided that: 

• The controller is UL listed for group installation 

• The overload device is UL listed for group installation 

Refer to the table below to determine the maximum RMS short circuit current capacity for the GV2/GV3/ 

GV7. The GV1L3 current limiter module may be used to increase the maximum RMS short circuit 

current values for the GV2M14-M32. 

The maximum RMS short circuit current rating for the complete group installation is determined by the 

individual GV device with the lowest RMS short circuit current value. 

For example: a group installation uses a GV2M08, GV2M16 and GV2M22. The respective maximum 

RMS short circuit values @ 480 V, without the use of a GV1L3 current limiter module, are: 50 kA, 25 kA 

and 10 kA. Therefore, the group installation has a maximum RMS short circuit value of 10 kA. 

Current 

Range (A) 

GV2 ■ 

UL Maximum RMS Short Circuit Current 

Max RMS, kA 

Max RMS, kA 

Max RMS, kA 

Max RMS, kA 

Max RMS, kA 

GV2 

GV3 

GV7 

GV7 

480 V 600 V 480 V 600 V 480 V 600 V 240/480 V 600 V 240/480 V 600 V 

0.1 - 0.16 ME01 50 30 P01 50 30 — — — — — — — — — 

0.16 - 0.25 ME02 50 30 P02 50 30 — — — — — — — — — 

0.25 - 0.40 ME03 50 30 P03 50 30 — — — — — — — — — 

0.40 - 0.63 ME04 50 30 P04 50 30 — — — — — — — — — 

0.63 - 1.0 ME05 50 30 P05 50 30 — — — — — — — — — 

1.0 - 1.6 ME06 50 30 P06 50 30 ME06 50 23 — — — — — — 

1.6 - 2.5 ME07 50 30 P07 50 30 ME07 50 23 — — — — — — 

2.5 - 4.0 ME08 50 30 P08 50 30 ME08 50 23 — — — — — — 

4.0 - 6.3 ME10 50 30 P10 50 30 ME10 50 23 — — — — — — 

6 - 10 ME14 30 30 P14 50 30 ME14 50 23 — — — — — — 

9 - 14 ME16 25 10 P16 50 18 — — — — — — — — — 

10 - 16 — — — — — — ME20 50 23 — — — — — — 

13 - 18 ME20 ♦ 25 10 P20 50 18 — — — — — — — — — 

16 - 25 — — — — — — ME25 50 23 — — — — — — 

17 - 23 ME21 ♦ 10 10 P21 50 18 — — — — — — — — — 

20 - 25 ME22 ♦ 10 10 P22 50 18 — — — — — — — — — 

24 - 32 ME32 ♦ 10 10 P32 50 18 — — — — — — — — — 

12 - 20 — — — — — — — — — RE20 25 10 RS20 65 10 

15 - 25 — — — — — — — — — RE25 25 12 RS25 65 10 

25 - 40 — — — — — — ME40 50 23 RE40 25 10 RS40 65 10 

30 - 50 — — — — — — — — — RE50 25 10 RS50 65 10 

40 - 63 — — — — — — ME63 50 23 — — — — — — 

48 - 80 — — — — — — — — — RE80 25 10 RS80 65 10 

60 -100 — — — — — — — — — RE100 25 10 RS100 65 10 

90 - 150 — — — — — — — — — RE150 25 10 RS150 65 10 

132 - 220 — — — — — — — — — RE220 25 10 RS220 65 10 

♦ 

■ 

When used with GV1L3 Current Limiter Max kA RMS at 480 V is 50 kA and at 600 V 30 kA. 

For Spring terminals add 3 to the catalog number. Example: GV2ME013. 

6 


10/02

FUSE AND CIRCUIT BREAKER SELECTION 



Motor 

Disconnect 

Fuse or 

Circuit Breaker 

D-Line or K-Line Contactor 

GV2 Manual Motor Starter 

Selecting the proper upstream short circuit protection for Group Motor installations can sometimes be 

a confusing process. Specific National Electric Code rules must be applied for Group Motor installations. 

The examples below illustrate the most common applications of GV manual starters with upstream short 

circuit protection in a Group Motor installation. Refer to NEC Section 430-53 C and D for proper 

conductor ampacity selection. 

NOTE: Examples below show full load currents that may not be typical. Use actual motor nameplate 

date for determining actual values. 

Example 1: 

Eight motors with the sizes shown below are installed on a conveying system. Choose the correct GV 

manual starter and the proper size short circuit protection for this application. The user prefers timedelay 

fuses. 

Motor Qty HP Voltage FLA 

1 5 460 7.6 

2 3 460 4.8 

5 2 460 3.4 

One GV2M14, two GV2M10, and five GV2M08 manual starters would be selected for this group motor 

installation. 

Per N.E.C. section 430-52 & -53 and N.E.C. table 430-152, the time-delay fuse must be sized as follows: 

175% FLA for largest motor + sum of FLAs for all other motors 

==> (1.75 x 7.6) + (2 x 4.8) + (5 x 3.4) = 39.9 A 

N.E.C. 430-52 allows use of the next largest standard size fuse — which in this case is 40 A. If nuisance 

tripping is a problem with this fuse selection, N.E.C. does allow 225% of largest motor FLA to be used 

in lieu of 175% when calculating the size. In this case, the calculation would be as follows: 

(2.25 x 7.6) + (2 x 4.8) + (5 x 3.4) = 43.7 A 

The next largest standard size in this case is a 45 A fuse. 

Example 2: 

Ten motors with the sizes shown below are installed on a packaging machine. Choose the proper size 

circuit breaker for this application. 

Motor Qty HP Voltage FLA 

2 10 460 14 

1 5 460 7.6 

2 3 460 4.8 

5 2 460 3.4 

Per N.E.C. section 430-52 & -53 and N.E.C. table 430-152, the circuit breaker must be sized as follows: 

250% FLA for largest motor + sum of FLAs for all other motors 

==> (2.5 x 14) + 14 +7.6 + (2 x 4.8) + (5 x 3.4) = 83.2 A 

The next largest standard size circuit breaker is 90 A. 

If nuisance tripping is a problem, N.E.C. allows for circuit breaker sizes that “shall in no case exceed 

400% for full load currents of 100 amps or less, or 300% for full load current greater than 100 amps”. 

In this case: 

(4.0 x 14) + 14 +7.6 + (2 x 4.8) + (5 x 3.4) = 104.2 A 

The next largest standard size in this case is a 110 A circuit breaker. 


7



TYPE 2 COORDINATION 

IEC Standard 60947-4-1 defines Type 2 Coordination as a level of protection which assures that a motor 

starter will be suitable for further use following a short circuit. The standard allows small tack welds that 

can be easily broken. Device should be replaced during regular maintenance. Proper combination of 

GV manual motor starters with LC1D contactors can yield a Type 2 Coordinated installation. Refer to 

the table below for selection. 

Three Phase HP Rating 

200 V 230 V 460 V 

Manual Starter 

Contactor 

- - - GV2P02 LC1D09 50 

- - - GV2P03 LC1D09 50 

- - - GV2P04 LC1D09 50 

- - 0.5 GV2P05 LC1D09 50 

- - 0.75 GV2P06 LC1D09 50 

0.5 0.5 1 GV2P07 LC1D09 50 

0.75 1 2 GV2P08 LC1D09 50 

1.5 1.5 3 GV2P10 LC1D09 50 

2 3 5 GV2P14 LC1D09 50 

3 3 10 GV2P16 LC1D25 50 

5 5 10 GV2P20 LC1D25 50 

5 7.5 15 GV2P21 LC1D25 30 

5 7.5 15 GV2P22 LC1D32 30 

10 10 30 GV3ME40 LC1D40 8 

20 20 40 GV3ME63 LC1D115 8 

(1) Higher maximum fault currents can be applied at lower voltages. 

Max. Available 

Fault Current (kA) 

at 460 Vac (1) 

8 


10/02

Setting Range of 

Thermal Trips (A) 

0.11 - 0.16 

0.016 - 0.25 

0.25 - 0.40 

0.40 - 0.63 

0.63 - 1 

1 - 1.6 

1.6 - 2.5 

2.5 - 4 

4 - 6.3 

6 - 10 

9 - 14 

13 - 18 

17 - 23 

20 - 25 

24 - 32 

1 - 1.6 

1.6 - 2.5 

2.5 - 4 

4 - 6 

6 - 10 

10 - 16 

16 - 25 

25 - 40 

40 - 63 

■ 

GV2/GV3 SELECTION 

GV2/GV3 Manual Motor Controller and Protector 

. 


Product Selection 

Maximum Horsepower Ratings 

GV2ME ■ GV2P 

Single Phase 

Three Phase 

Pushbutton Rotary Handle 

115 V HP 230 V HP 200 V HP 230 V HP 460 V HP 575 V HP Catalog Number Catalog Number 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

1/8 

1/4 

1/2 

3/4 

1 

1-1/2 

2 

2 

– 

– 

1/8 

1/4 

1/2 

1 

2 

3 

5 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

1/10 

1/6 

1/3 

1/2 

1-1/2 

2 

3 

3 

3 

5 

1/10 

1/16 

1/3 

1/2 

1-1/2 

2 

3 

5 

10 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

1/2 

3/4 

1-1/2 

2 

3 

5 

5 

5 

10 

– 

1/2 

3/4 

1-1/2 

2 

3 

5 

10 

20 

For Spring terminals add 3 to the catalog number. Example: GV2ME013. 

Weight: 0.260 kg (0.57 lbs). 

Note: GV2ME32 is not available with spring terminals. 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

1/2 

1 

1-1/2 

3 

3 

5 

7-1/2 

7-1/2 

10 

– 

1/2 

1 

1-1/2 

3 

5 

7-1/2 

10 

20 

– 

– 

– 

– 

1/2 

3/4 

1 

2 

3 

5 

10 

10 

15 

15 

20 

3/4 

1 

2 

3 

5 

10 

15 

30 

40 

– 

– 

– 

– 

1/2 

1 

1-1/2 

3 

5 

7-1/2 

10 

15 

20 

20 

30 

1 

1-1/2 

3 

- 

7-1/2 

10 

20 

30 

60 

GV2ME01 

GV2ME02 

GV2ME03 

GV2ME04 

GV2ME05 

GV2ME06 

GV2ME07 

GV2ME08 

GV2ME10 

GV2ME14 

GV2ME16 

GV2ME20 

GV2ME21 

GV2ME22 

GV2ME32 

GV3ME06 

GV3ME07 

GV3ME08 

GV3ME10 

GV3ME14 

GV3ME20 

GV3ME25 

GV3ME40 

GV3ME63 

File E164864 

CCN NLRV 

GV2P01 

GV2P02 

GV2P03 

GV2P04 

GV2P05 

GV2P06 

GV2P07 

GV2P08 

GV2P10 

GV2P14 

GV2P16 

GV2P20 

GV2P21 

GV2P22 

GV2P32 

File LR 81630 

Class 3211 05 

GV2ME GV2ME••3 GV2P GV3ME 

Accessories and Enclosures GV2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 10 through 15 

Accessories and Enclosures GV3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 16 

GV7 SELECTION 

Standard manual controllers and protectors include terminal and device mounting hardware. Cable 

clamps and accessories are listed on page 17. 

GV7R•••• Manual Motor Controller and Protector 

Setting Range of 

Thermal Trips (A) 

12 – 20 

IEC Breaking 

Capacity at 415 V 

■ 


3 PH 

200 V HP 230 V HP 460 V HP 575 V HP 

Catalog 

Number 

Weight / kg 

(lbs) 

5 10 15 GV7RE20 2.010 (4.43) 

15 – 25 7.5 15 20 GV7RE25 2.010 (4.43) 

25 – 40 10 30 30 GV7RE40 2.010 (4.43) 

25 kA 

30 – 50 15 30 40 GV7RE50 2.015 (4.44) 

48 – 80 30 60 75 GV7RE80 2.040 (4.5) 

60 – 100 A 30 75 100 GV7RE100 2.040 (4.5) 

90 – 150 A 

50 100 150 GV7RE150 2.020 (4.45) 

35 kA 

132 – 220 A 75 150 200 GV7RE220 2.350 (5.18) 

12 – 20 

5 10 15 GV7RS20 2.010 (4.43) 

15 – 25 7.5 15 20 GV7RS25 2.010 (4.43) 

25 – 40 A 10 30 30 GV7RS40 2.010 (4.4) 

30 – 50 A 15 30 40 GV7RS50 2.015 (4.44) 

65 kA 

48 – 80 A 30 60 75 GV7RS80 2.040 (4.5) 

60 – 100 A 30 75 100 GV7RS100 2.040 (4.5) 

90 – 150 A 50 100 150 GV7RS150 2.020 (4.45) 

132 – 220 A 75 150 200 GV7RS220 2.350 (5.18) 

■ 

Refer to table on page 54 for ratings at other voltages. 


9


Accessories Selection 

GV2 ACCESSORIES 

GV2V02 

GV1L3 

GV2AK00 

GV2ME 

GVAD 

GVAM11 

GVAU 

GV2P 

GVAM11 

GVAS 

LS1D30 

GVAE11, AE20 

GVAN 

GVAN 

GVAE1 (N.O.) 

Flip window cover 180˚ 

GVAE1 (N.C.) 

Auxiliary Contact Blocks 

Description Mounting Location Max. No. of Blocks Contact Type Sold in Lots Of Catalog Number Weight / kg (lbs) 

Instantaneous auxiliary contacts 

Fault signalling contact + 

instantaneous auxiliary contact 

Front (3) 

Left Hand Side 

Left Hand Side (2) 

1 

2 

1 

N.O. or N.C. (1) 

N.O. + N.C. 

N.O. + N.O. 

N.O. + N.C. 

N.O. + N.O. 

N.O. (fault) + N.O. 

N.O. (fault) + N.C. 

N.C. (fault) + N.O. 

N.C. (fault) + N.C. 

(1) Mounting of a GVAE contact block or a GV2AK00 visible isolation block on GV2P and GV2L. 

(2) Choice of N/C or N/O contact operation, depending on which way round the reversible block is mounted, flip window 180°. 

(3) The GVAD is always mounted next to the circuit-protector. 

■ For Spring terminals add 3 to the catalog number. Example: GV2ME013. 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

GVAE1 

GVAE11 ■ 

GVAE20 ■ 

GVAN11 ■ 

GVAN20 ■ 

GVAD1010 

GVAD1001 

GVAD0110 

GVAD0101 

0.015 (0.03) 

0.020 (0.04) 

0.020 (0.04) 

0.050 (0.11) 

0.050 (0.11) 

0.055 (0.12) 

0.055 (0.12) 

0.055 (0.12) 

0.055 (0.12) 

Short circuit signalling contact Left Hand Side 1 SPDT 1 GV2AM11 0.045 (0.10) 

10 


10/02



Electric Trips 

Description Voltage Hz Catalog Number Weight lb (kg) 

Undervoltage or shunt trips (1) 

Side 

(1 block on RH side 

of GV2) 

24 V 

48 V 

50 Hz GVA/025 0.23 (0.105) 

60 Hz GVA/026 0.23 (0.105) 

50 Hz GVA/055 0.23 (0.105) 

60 Hz GVA/056 0.23 (0.105) 

100 V 50 Hz GVA/107 0.23 (0.105) 

100…110 V 60 Hz GVA/107 0.23 (0.105) 

110…115 V 

50 Hz GVA/115 0.23 (0.105) 

60 Hz GVA/116 0.23 (0.105) 

120…127 V 50 Hz GVA/125 0.23 (0.105) 

127 V 60 Hz GVA/115 0.23 (0.105) 

200 V 50 Hz GVA/207 0.23 (0.105) 

200 V…220 V 60 Hz GVA/207 0.23 (0.105) 

220 V…240 V 

380 V…400 V 

50 Hz GVA/225 0.23 (0.105) 

60 Hz GVA/226 0.23 (0.105) 

50 Hz GVA/385 0.23 (0.105) 

60 Hz GVA/386 0.23 (0.105) 

415 V…440 V 50 Hz GVA/415 0.23 (0.105) 

415 V 60 Hz GVA/416 0.23 (0.105) 

440 V 60 Hz GVA/385 0.23 (0.105) 

480 V 60 Hz GVA/415 0.23 (0.105) 

500 V 50 Hz GVA/505 0.23 (0.105) 

600 V 60 Hz GVA/505 0.23 (0.105) 

Undervoltage trip, INRS (can only be mounted on GV2-ME) 

Safety device for dangerous machines, conforming to INRS and VDE 0113 

Side 

(1 block on RH side 

of GV2) 

110…115 V 

50 Hz GVAX115 0.24 (0.110) 

60 Hz GVAX116 0.24 (0.110) 

127 V 60 Hz GVAX115 0.24 (0.110) 

220…240 V 

380…400 V 

50 Hz GVAX225 0.24 (0.110) 

60 Hz GVAX226 0.24 (0.110) 

50 Hz GVAX385 0.24 (0.110) 

60 Hz GVAX386 0.24 (0.110) 

415…440 V 50 Hz GVAX415 0.24 (0.110) 

440 V 60 Hz GVAX385 0.24 (0.110) 

Add-on contact blocks 

Description Mounting Maximum number Catalog Number Weight lb (kg) 

Visible isolation block (2) Front (3) 1 GV2AK00 0.33 (0.150) 

Limiters 

At top (GV2ME and GV2P) 1 GV1L3 0.29 (0.130) 

Independent 1 LA9LB920 0.70 (0.320) 

(1) To order an undervoltage trip: replace the dot (/) with a U, example: GVAU025. To order a shunt trip: replace the dot (/) with an S, example: GVAS025. 

(2) Visible isolation of the 3 poles upstream of circuit-breaker GV2P and GV2L. 

(3) Mounting of a GVAE contact block or a GV2AK00 visible isolation block on GV2P and GV2L. 

Fuse Holder, 30 amp maximum 

Description For Fuse Type For Use In 

Sold in 

Lots of 

Catalog Number 

Weight 

lb (kg) 

Screw clamp terminals, 3-pole CC, KTK-R 0.41 X 1.5 (10.3 X 38 mm) US Markets 1 LS1D30 0.5 (0.23) 

Spring Terminals, 3-pole CC, KTK-R 0.41 X 1.5 (10.3 X 38 mm) US Markets 1 LS1D303 0.5 (0.23) 

Screw clamp terminals, 3-pole aM, gG 0.39 X 1.5 (10 X 38 mm) European Markets 1 LS1D32 0.5 (0.23) 

Sprint terminals, 3-pole aM, gG 0.39 X 1.5 (10 X 38 mm) European Markets 1 LS1D323 0.5 (0.23) 

Screw clamp terminals, 4-pole aM, gG 0.39 X 1.5 (10 X 38 mm) European Markets 1 LS1DT32 0.5 (0.23) 


11



GV2G454 

GV2G254 

LAD31 

GV1G09 

GV2G454 

LAD31 

GV2G254 

GV1G10 

GV2G05 

LA9E07 

GV2AF3 

GV2AF01 

GV2AF4 

LAD311 

GK2AF01 

GV2GA01 

GV2AF02 

GV1G02 

GV2AP0 2 

TRIP. 

RESET 

GV2V03 

O 

12 


10/02



Mounting Accessories 

GV2GH7 

Description Application Sold in Lots Of Catalog Number Weight / kg (lbs) 

Motor starter adaptor plate 

Adaptor plate 

Mounting bracket 

7.5 mm height compensation plate 

Combination block 

With 3-pole connection for 

mounting of a GV2 and an 

LC1-D09 to D25 contactor 

For screw mounting of a 

GV2ME or LS1D30• 

For mounting GV2ME or 

GV2P and LC1D09 through 

LC1D32 contactor with front 

faces aligned. 

For mounting GV2ME or 

GV2P and LC1D09 through 

LC1D38 on common base 

using 2 din rails. 

To allow GV2ME and GV2P 

to be mounted on a common 

busbar 

Between GV2ME, LS1D30 

and LC1K or LP1K contactor 

Between GV2, LS1D30 and 

contactor LC1D09 to D38 

Between GV2/LS1D30 

mounted on LAD31 and 

contactor LC1D09 to D38 

10 GK2AF01 0.120 (0.26) 

10 GV2AF02 0.021 (0.05) 

1 LAD31 0.040 (0.09) 

1 LAD311 0.080 (0.18) 

10 GV1F03 0.003 (0.01) 

10 GV2AF01 0.020 (0.04) 

10 GV2AF3 0.016 (0.03) 

10 GV2AF4 0.016 (0.03) 

LAD31 

LAD311 

Wiring Accessories 

Description 

Sets of 3-pole, 63 A 

busbars 

Description 

Number of GVs 

to be Mounted 

2 

3 

4 

Number of Side 

Mounted-Auxiliary 

Blocks on Each 

GV Starter 

Busbar 

Pitch (mm) 

Sold in 

Lots Of 

Catalog 

Number 

Weight / 

kg (lbs) 

none 45 1 GV2G245 0.036 (0.08) 

1 GV2AN, AM, AD 54 1 GV2G254 0.038 (0.84) 

1 or 2 GV2AN, AM, AD; 

or 1 GV2AS, AU 

72 1 GV2G272 0.042 (0.09) 

None 45 1 GV2G345 0.052 (0.12) 

1 GV2AN, AM, AD 54 1 GV2G354 0.060 (0.13) 

None 45 1 GV2G445 0.077 (0.17) 

1 GV2AN, AM, AD 54 1 GV2G454 0.085 (0.19) 

1 or 2 GV2AN, AM, AD; 

or 1 GV2AS, AU 

72 1 GV2G472 0.094 (0.21) 

5 1 GV2AN, AM, AD 54 1 GV2G554 0.100 (0.22) 

Application 

Sold in 

Lots Of 

Catalog 

Number 

Weight / 

kg (lbs) 

Protective end cover For unused busbar outlets 5 GV1G10 0.005 (0.02) 

Terminal blocks for 

supply to one or more 

GV2G• busbar sets 

Connection from the top 1 GV1G09 0.040 (0.09) 

Connection from bottom can be fitted with a GV1L3 current limiter 1 GV2G05 0.115 (0.25) 

Cover for terminal block For mounting in modular panels 10 LA9E07 0.005 (0.01) 

Flexible 3-pole 

connector 

Clip-in marker holders 

(supplied with each 

motor starter) 

For connecting a GV2 / LS1D30 to an LC1D09 to D25 contactor (AC coil) 10 GV1G02 0.013 (0.03) 

For GV2P (0.31 x 0.87 in) 

(8 x 22 mm) 

100 LA9D92 0.001 (0.02) 

Incoming line insulator For GV2P when in UL508 Type E applications 10 GV2GH7 0.020 (0.04) 

Padlockable External Operator 

Description Catalog Number Weight / kg (lbs) 

For GV2P 

(6.0 to 11.4 in) 

(150 to 290 mm) 

Black handle, blue legend plate GV2AP01 0.200 (0.44) 

Red handle, yellow legend plate GV2AP02 0.200 (0.44) 

Padlocking Device 

GV2AF3 / GV2AF4 

For all GV2 devices 

6 padlocks, Ø 6 mm shank max. 

(padlock not supplied) 

GV2V03 0.130 (0.29) 


13



GV2 ENCLOSURES 

GV2MC• 

GV2V01 

GV2K• 

GV2MP•• 

GV2E01• 

GV2SN• 

14 


10/02



GV2ME Enclosures 

Application 

For GV2ME manual starters and 

protectors with or without accessories 

(maximum of 1 accessory on right and 

left for GV2MC and GV2MP01 or 

MP02, 1 accessory only on right for 

GV2MP03 and GV2MP04) 

Type 

Surface mounting, 

double insulated with 

protective (saleable) cover. 

Flush with protective cover. 

Degree of Protection 

of Enclosure 


Weight / kg (lbs) 

IP 41 GV2MC01 0.290 (0.64) 

IP 55 GV2MC02 0.300 (0.66) 

IP 55 for 

temperature < + 5 °C (41 °F) 

GV2MC03 0.300 (0.66) 

IP 41 (full size) mounting GV2MP01 0.115 (0.25) 

IP 41 (reduced size) GV2MP03 0.115 (0.25) 

IP 55 (full size) GV2MP02 0.130 (0.29) 

IP 55 (reduced size) GV2MP04 0.130 (0.29) 

Front Plate 

Application 

Padlocking device (1) 

for GV2M operator 

(padlocking is only 

possible in the “O” 

position) 

Mushroom head “stop” 

pushbutton (1) Ø 40 

mm, red 

Sealing kit 


of Enclosure 

Sold in Lots Of 

Catalog 

Number 


1 GV2V01 0.075 (0.17) 

Spring return 1 GV2K011 0.052 (0.11) 

Latching 

Key release (key #455) 1 GV2K021 0.100 (0.22) 

Turn to release 1 GV2K031 0.052 (0.11) 

Latching/Padlockable Turn to release 1 GV2K04 0.120 (0.26) 

For enclosures 

and front plate 

IP 55 10 GV2E01 0.120 (0.26) 

IP 55 for 

temperature < + 5 °C (41 °F) 

10 GV2E02 0.120 (0.26) 

Neutral link 10 GV2N01 0.030 (0.06) 

Description Voltage Color Sold in Lots Of 

Neon indicator light (2) 

110 V 

220/240 V 

380/440 V 

(1) Supplied with IP 55 sealing kit. 

(2) Leads are approximately 9.5" (260 mm). 

Catalog 

Number 


Green 10 GV2SN13 0.019 (0.06) 

Red 10 GV2SN14 0.019 (0.06) 

Orange 10 GV2SN15 0.019 (0.06) 

Clear 10 GV2SN17 0.019 (0.06) 

Green 10 GV2SN23 0.019 (0.06) 

Red 10 GV2SN24 0.019 (0.06) 

Orange 10 GV2SN25 0.019 (0.06) 

Clear 10 GV2SN27 0.019 (0.06) 

Green 10 GV2SN33 0.019 (0.06) 

Red 10 GV2SN34 0.019 (0.06) 

Orange 10 GV2SN35 0.019 (0.06) 

Clear 10 GV2SN37 0.019 (0.06) 


15



GV3 ACCESSORIES AND ENCLOSURES 

GV3B 

GV1A01 

Description Characteristics Voltage Sold in Lots Of 

Voltage trips (1) 

(internal mount) 

Instantaneous auxiliary 

contact blocks 

(1 per GV3) 

(side-mounted) 

Under voltage trips 

Shunt trips 

110, 120, 127 V 50 Hz 

120, 127 V 60 Hz 

220, 240 V 50 Hz 

240, 277 V 60 Hz 

380, 415 V 50 Hz 

480 V 60 Hz 

110, 120, 127 V 50 Hz 

120, 127 V 60 Hz 

220, 240 V 50 Hz 

240, 277 V 60 Hz 

380, 415 V 50 Hz 

480 V 60 Hz 

Catalog 

Number 

Weight / 

kg (lbs) 

1 GV3B11 0.070 (0.15) 

1 GV3B22 0.070 (0.15) 

1 GV3B38 0.070 (0.15) 

1 GV3D11 0.070 (0.15) 

1 GV3D22 0.070 (0.15) 

1 GV3D38 0.070 (0.15) 

Normal early break type contacts N.C. + N.O. 1 GV3A01 0.060 (0.13) 

N.O. + N.O. 1 GV3A02 0.060 (0.13) 

N.C. + N.O. + N.O. 1 GV3A03 0.070 (0.15) 

N.O. + N.O. + N.O. 1 GV3A05 0.070 (0.15) 

N.O. + N.O. + 2 spare terminal blocks 1 GV3A06 0.070 (0.15) 

N.C. + N.O. + 2 spare terminal blocks 1 GV3A07 0.070 (0.15) 

Fault signalling contacts (1) N.C. 1 GV3A08 0.030 (0.70) 

(internal mount) N.O. 1 GV3A09 0.030 (0.70) 

Padlocking device for Start button 5 GV1V02 0.010 (0.01) 

(1) only 1 voltage trip OR 1 fault signalling contact to be added inside the GV3 device. 

GV3CE01 

Metal Enclosure 

Application 

For GV3 with or 

without accessories 

Type 


of Enclosure 



Surface mounting IP 55 GV3CE01 2.000 (4.41) 

Enclosure Accessories (to be ordered separately) 

GV3CE01 

Description Reference Characteristics Sold in Lots Of 

Catalog 

Number 

Weight / 

kg (lbs) 

Neutral terminal, 2-pole LA9D40959 0.001 (0.01) 

IP 55 padlocking device for operators (when padlocked, the motor circuit is automatically in the Open (OFF) position) GV1V01 0.044 (0.10) 

Mushroom head 

“stop” pushbutton (2) 

Ø 40 mm, red 

Spring return 1 GV1K01 0.052 (0.11) 

Latching Key release (key #455) 1 GV1K02 0.095 (0.21) 

Turn to release 1 GV1K03 0.052 (0.11) 

Sealing screw for enclosure cover DE1DS4091 0.001 (0.01) 

(2) Supplied with IP 55 sealing kit. 

GV3CE01 

16 


10/02



GV7 ACCESSORIES 

GV7AC03 

GV7AC01 

GV7AC02 

GV7AC04 

GV7RE, RS 

GV7AC01 

GV7AC04 

Standard manual controllers and protectors include terminal and device mounting hardware. Cable 

clamps and accessories should be selected from the table below. 

Cabling Accessories 

Description 

Clip-On Connectors 

Spreaders 

Application 

For GV7R•40 through GV7R•150, 

1.5–95 mm 2 (#14 to # 3/0 awg). 

For GV7R•220 

1.5–185 mm 2 (#14 to 350 mcm). 

To increase the center line distance between phase 

to 45 mm. 

▲ Terminal shields cannot be used together with phase barriers. 

Sold in 

Lots Of 



3 GV7AC021 0.300 (0.66) 

3 GV7AC022 0.350 (0.77) 

3 GV7AC03 0.180 (0.40) 

Terminal Shields IP 405 ▲ Supplied with the sealing accessory. 1 GV7AC01 0.125 (0.28) 

Phase Barriers ▲ 

Insulating Screens 

Sets of Busbars with Cover 

Provides maximum phase separation at the power 

connection points. 

Provides insulation between the connections and the 

backplate. 

Providing a direct link between the starter and the 

contactor, the cover provides protection against 

direct finger contact. 

2 GV7AC04 0.075 (0.17) 

2 GV7AC05 0.075 (0.17) 

1 GV7AC06 0.550 (1.21) 


17



1 

2 

3 

4 

GV7AE11, AB11 

GV7RE, RS 

GV7AU, AS 

GV7AD•• 

Add-On Auxiliary Contacts 

Add-on auxiliary contacts provide remote indication of the starter contact state. They can be used for 

signalling, electrical locking, or relaying. Two versions are available: standard and low level. The 

auxiliary contacts include a terminal block. A hole is provided for wiring exit. 

An auxiliary contact can perform any of the following functions, depending on where it is located in the 

starter: 

Location Function Application 

1 N.O./N.C. contact Indicates the position of the starter poles. 

2 Trip indication 

3 

Electrical fault 

indication 

Indicates that the starter has tripped due to an overload, short-circuit, differential fault, operation of a voltage 

release (under voltage or shunt release), or by the “push to trip” button. It resets when the starter is reset. 

Indicates that the starter has tripped due to an overload, short-circuit, or differential fault. It resets when the starter 

is reset. 

4 N.O./N.C. Contact Indicates the position of the starter poles. 

Type Voltage Catalog Number Weight / kg (lbs) 

Standard – GV7AE11 0.015 (0.03) 

Low level – GV7AB11 0.015 (0.03) 

18 


10/02

Magnetic Fault Indication Device 



The magnetic fault indication device either differentiates a thermal fault from a magnetic fault or opens 

the contactor only in the event of a thermal fault (see page 18). 

Voltage Catalog Number Weight / kg (lbs) 

24–48 VAC / 24–72 VDC GV7AD111 0.100 (0.22) 

110–240 VAC/DC GV7AD112 0.100 (0.22) 

Undervoltage Trip GV7AU 

The undervoltage trip opens the motor starter when the control voltage drops below the tripping 

threshold of 0.35–0.7 times the rated voltage. For the starter contacts to be closed again, the control 

voltage must be above 0.85 times the rated voltage. The GV7AU undervoltage trip meets the 

requirements of IEC 60947-2. For location of the undervoltage trip unit, see page 18. 

Shunt Trip GV7AS 

The shunt trip opens the motor starter when the control voltage rises above 0.7 times the rated voltage. 

For location of the shunt trip unit, see page 18. 

Operation (GV7AU or GV7AS) 

When the motor starter has been tripped by a GV7AU or AS trip, it must be reset either locally or by 

remote control. (For remote control, please consult your Square D Regional Sales Office). 

Tripping has priority over manual closing. If a tripping instruction is present, manual action does not 

result in the closing of the contacts even temporarily. 

Both the undervoltage trip and shunt trip have a durability of 50% of the mechanical life of the motor 

starter. 

Type Voltage Catalog Number Weight / kg (lbs) 

48V, 50 Hz GV7AU055 0.105 (0.23) 

110–130 V, 50/60 Hz GV7AU107 0.110 (0.24) 

Undervoltage Trip 

Shunt Trip 

200–240 V, 50/60 Hz GV7AU207 0.110 (0.24) 

380–440 V, 50/60 Hz GV7AU387 0.105 (0.23) 

525 V, 50 Hz GV7AU525 0.100 (0.22) 

48V, 50 Hz GV7AS055 0.105 (0.23) 

110–130 V, 50/60 Hz GV7AS107 0.110 (0.24) 

200–240 V, 50/60 Hz GV7AS207 0.110 (0.24) 

380–440 V, 50/60 Hz GV7AS387 0.105 (0.23) 

525 V, 50 Hz GV7AS525 0.100 (0.22) 


19



GV7R shown with the following options and accessories: 

• Extended rotary handle (GV7AP01 or GV7AP02). 

• Direct rotary handle (GV7AP03 or GV7AP04). 

• Conversion accessory (GV7AP05). 

• Locking device (GV7V01). 

GV7AP03 

ON 

GV7RE, RS 

GV7AP04 

O 

OFF 

ON 

ON 

O 

OFF 

O 

OFF 

ON 

GV7AP05 

O 

OFF 

GV7AP01, AP02 

ON 

O 

OFF 

ON 

GV7V01 

O 

OFF 

20 


10/02


GV7 Accessories Selection 

Direct Rotary Handle 

The direct rotary handle replaces the starter front cover and is secured by screws (see the diagram 

on page 20). It includes a device for locking the starter in the O (Off) position by a padlock. As many as 

3 padlocks with a shank diameter of 5 to 8 mm (0.2 to 0.3 in) can be used. The padlocks are not 

supplied. A conversion accessory allows the direct rotary handle to be mounted on an enclosure door. 

In this case, the door cannot be opened if the starter is in the “tripped” position. Starter closing is 

inhibited if the enclosure door is open. Refer to the diagram on page 20. 

Description Type Catalog Number Weight / kg (lbs) 

Direct Rotary Handle 

Conversion Accessory ▲ 

Black handle, black legend plate GV7AP03 0.205 (0.45) 


For mounting direct rotary handle on 

enclosure door 

GV7AP05 0.100 (0.22) 

▲ 

This conversion accessory makes it impossible to open the door if the device is closed and prevents the device from being closed if the door is open. 

Extended Rotary Handle 

The extended rotary handle makes it possible to operate controllers installed in the back of an enclosure 

from the front of the enclosure. Refer to the diagram on page 20. 

It consists of the following: 

— a unit which screws onto the front cover of the starter 

— an assembly (handle and front plate) to be fitted on the enclosure door 

— an extension shaft which must be adjusted – distance between the mounting surface and the 

door: 185 mm (7.28 in) minimum, 600 mm (23.62 in) maximum 

It includes a device for locking the starter in the O (Off) position by a padlock. As many as 3 padlocks 

with a shank diameter of 5 to 8 mm (0.2 to 0.3 in) can be used. The padlocks are not supplied. This 

prevents the enclosure door from being opened. 

Description Type Catalog Number Weight / kg (lbs) 

Extended Rotary Handle 

Black handle, black legend plate GV7AP01 0.775 (1.71) 


Locking Device 

The locking device allows controllers without a rotary handle installed, to be locked in the O (Off) position 

by a padlock. As many as 3 padlocks with a shank diameter of 5 to 8 mm (0.2 to 0.3 in) can be used. 

The padlocks are not supplied. Refer to the diagram on page 20. 

Description Application Catalog Number Weight / kg (lbs) 

Locking Device 

For GV7 not fitted with a rotary 

handle 

GV7V01 0.100 (0.22) 


21



GV2 SPECIFICATIONS 

Environment 

Type GV2ME GV2P LS1D30, LS1D303 

LS1D32, LS1DT32, 

LS1D323 

Conforming to standards IEC 60947-1, 60947-2, 60947-4-1, EN 60204, BS 4752, BS 4941, UL 508, CSA C22.2 No. 14, NF C 63-650, NFC63-120, 79-130, VDE 0113, 0660. 

Product approvals 

DEMKO, NEMKO, SEMKO, CSA. UL, BV, GL, 

LROS, DNV, PTB 

CSA, UL, PTB UL, CSA BV 

UL File Number File E164864, CCN NLRV – – 

CSA File Number File LR 81630, Class 3211 05 – – 

Protective treatment – – “TH” “TH” 

Degree of protection 

conforming to IEC 60529 

Shock resistance 

conforming to IEC 60068-2-27 

Vibration resistance 


Ambient air temperature 

- storage 

- operation 

Temperature compensation 

Flame resistance 


In enclosure GV2ME01: 

IP 41 In enclosure GV2ME02: IP 55 

– – – 

30 g 30 g – – 

5 g (5 to 150 Hz) 5 g (5 to 150 Hz) – – 

-40 to +176 °F (-40 to + 80 °C) – – 

-4 to +140 °F (-20 to + 60 °C) Open 

-4 to 104 °F enclosed (-20 to 40 °C) Enclosed 

-4 to +140 °F (-20 to + 60 °C) Open 

-4 to 104 °F enclosed (-20 to 40 °C) Enclosed 

1760 °F (960 °C) 

-4 to +140 °F (-20 to + 60 °C) 

-58 to +158 °F 

(-50 to +70 °C) 

-4 to +140 °F (-20 to + 60 °C) – – 

Maximum operating altitude 6562 ft (2000 m) 6562 ft (2000 m) – – 

-58 to +158 °F 

(-50 to +70 °C) 

Operating positions 

in relation to normal 

vertical mounting position 

90° 

90° 

90° 

90° 

30° 

30° 

90° 

90° 

± 23 ° – 

Wiring 

Number of conductors and cross 

sectional area (c.s.a.) 

Solid cable 

Max Min Max Min Max Min 

2-#8 AWG (2-6 mm 2 ) 2-#16 AWG (2-1 mm 2 ) 2-#8 AWG (2-6 mm 2 ) 2-#16 AWG (2-1 mm 2 ) 2-#8 AWG (2-6 mm 2 ) 2-#16 AWG (2-1 mm 2 ) 

Flexible cable without cable end 2-#8 AWG (2-6 mm 2 ) 2-#14 AWG (2-1 mm 2 ) 2-#8 AWG (2-6 mm 2 ) 2-#14 AWG (2-1 mm 2 ) 2-#8 AWG (2-6 mm 2 ) 2-#14 AWG (2-1 mm 2 ) 

Flexible cable with cable end 2-#10 AWG (2-4 mm 2 ) 2-#16 AWG (2-1 mm 2 ) 2-#10 AWG (2-4 mm 2 ) 2-#16 AWG (2-1 mm 2 ) 2-#10 AWG (2-4 mm 2 ) 2-#16 AWG (2-1 mm 2 ) 

Suitable for isolation 

conforming to IEC 60947-1 § 7-1- 

6 

Yes Yes No No 

Tightening torque 

Resistance to 

mechanical impact 

15 lb-in (1.7 N•m) 

0.5 J 0.5 J 

Sensitivity to phase failure Yes, conforming to IEC 60947-4-1, paragraph 7-2-1-5-2 No No 

22 


10/02



GV2 Specifications / Characteristics 

Type GV2ME GV2P LS1D30, LS1D303 

Utilization category 

conforming to IEC 60947-2 

conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 AC-3 AC-3 

Rated operational voltage (Ue) 


Rated insulation voltage (Ui) 


▲ Conforming to IEC 60947-3 

A 

A 

– AC 20B# 

V 690 (590: GV2ME••3) 690 690 690 

V 690 (590: GV2ME••3) 690 

conforming to CSA C22.2 No. 14 and UL 508 V 600 (590: GV2ME••3) 600 (B600) 

Rated operational frequency 


Rated impulse withstand voltage (U imp) 


– 690 

Hz 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 

kV 6 6 – – 

Total power dissipated per pole W 2.5 2.5 3.2 3.2 

Mechanical life 

(ops: closing, opening) 

Electrical life 

for AC-3 duty 

Duty class 

(maximum operating rate) 

Rated duty 


ops 100 000 100 000 – – 

ops 100 000 100 000 – – 

ops/h 25 25 – – 

– 

Continuous 

duty 

– – 

LS1D32, LS1DT32, 

LS1D323 ▲ 


23



GV2 TRIP MODULE SPECIFICATIONS 

Characteristics 

Type GV2AU GV2AS 



Operational voltage 


V 690 690 

V 0.85-1.1 Ue 0.7-1.1 Ue 

Drop-out voltage V 0.35-0.7 Ue 0.2-0.75 Ue 

Inrush consumption VA 12 14 

W 8 10.5 

Sealed consumption VA 3.5 5 

W 1.1 1.6 

Operating time 


msec 

From the moment the voltage reaches its operational value until opening of the GV2••10-15 

On-load factor 100% 

Wiring 


Min 

Max 


Solid cable 

1-#16 to #12 AWG (1-2.5 mm 2 ) 2-#16 to #12 AWG (1-2.5 mm 2 ) 

Flexible cable without cable end 1-#18 to #12 AWG (0.75-2.5 mm 2 ) 2-#18 to #12 AWG (0.75-2.5 mm 2 ) 

Flexible cable with cable end 1-#18 to #14 AWG (0.75-1.5 mm 2 ) 2-#18 to #14 AWG (0.75-1.5 mm 2 ) 



(ops: closing-opening) 

ops 100 000 

12 lb-in (1.4 N•m) max 

24 


10/02

GV2 AUXILIARY CONTACT SPECIFICATIONS 

Type 


(associated insulation coordination) 




Instantaneous Auxiliary Contacts 

GVAN, GVAD 

V 690 690 

to CSA C22.2 No. 14 and UL 508 V 600 300 

Conventional rated thermal current 

(Ith) 


A 6 2.5 

to CSA C22.2 No. 14 and UL 508 A 5 1 


(ops: closing-opening) 

Operational power and current 


a.c. operation 

Rated operational voltage (Ue) V 48 

ops 100 000 1000 

AC-15/100 000 ops 

110 

127 

230 

240 

380 

415 

Fault Signalling Contacts 

GV2AD, GV2 AM11 

AC-14/1000 ops 

440 500 690 24 48 

Operational power, normal conditions VA 300 500 720 850 650 500 400 36 48 72 72 

Occasional breaking and making 

capacities, abnormal conditions 

VA 3000 7000 13 000 15 000 13 000 12 000 9000 220 300 450 450 

Rated operational current (Ie) A 6 4.5 3.3 2.2 1.5 1 0.6 1.5 1 0.5 0.3 



d.c. operation 

DC-13/100 000 ops 

DC-13/1000 ops 

Rated operational voltage (Ue) V 24 48 60 110 240 (1) – – 24 48 60 – 

Operational power, normal conditions W 140 240 180 140 120 – – 24 15 9 – 



110 

127 

W 240 360 240 210 180 – – 100 50 50 – 

Rated operational current (Ie) A 6 5 3 1.3 0.5 – – 1 0.3 0.15 – 

Minimum operational conditions 

d.c. operation 

Short circuit protection 

V 17 

mA 5 

By GB2CB•• circuit breaker (rating according to operational current for Ue = 415 V) 

or by gG fuse 10 A max (or equivalent). 

Wiring (screw clamp) Min Max 



Solid cable 




Wiring (spring terminal) Min (GVAN only) Max (GVAN only) 



12 lb-in (1.4 N•m) max 

(1) Add an RC circuit type LA4 D to the load terminals, see Square D Digest. 

230 

240 


25



GV2 Auxiliary Contact Specifications (continued) 

Type 

Rated insulation voltage (Ui) (associated 

insulation coordination) conforming to 

IEC 60947-1 

V 

Instantaneous Auxiliary Contacts GV2AE 

250 (690 with respect to main circuit) 

to CSA C22.2 No. 14 and UL 508 V 300 


(Ith) conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 

A 2.5 

to CSA C22.2 No. 14 and UL 508 A 1 

Mechanical life ops 100 000 


to IEC 60947-5-1. a.c. operation 

AC-15/100 000 ops (closing / opening) 

Rated operational voltage (Ue) V 24 48 

110 

127 

230 

240 

Operational power, normal conditions VA 48 60 120 120 



VA 480 600 1270 2400 

Rated operational current (Ie) A 2 1.25 1 0.5 


to IEC 60947-5-1. d.c. operation 

Rated operational voltage (Ue) 

Operational power, normal conditions 



Rated operational current (Ie) 

DC-13/100 000 ops (closing / opening) 

V 24 48 60 – 

W 24 15 9 – 

W 100 50 50 – 

A 1 0.3 0.15 – 

Low level switching contact reliability Number of faults for “n” million operating cycles (17 V-5 mA): = 10- 6 


By GB2CB06 circuit breaker or gG fuse, 10 A max 

Wiring (screw clamp) Min Max 


sectional area (c.s.a.) Solid cable 




Wiring (spring terminal) Min (GVAN only) Max 



12 lb-in (1.4 N•m) max 

Power Pole 

GV2AN20 

0 1 

N.O. 

N.O. 

Contact open 

Contact closed 

GV2AN11 

N.O. 

N.C. 

Operation of fault 

signalling contacts 

Contact operation 

instantaneous auxiliary contacts 

GV2AE1 

GV2AE20 

GV2AE11 

GV2AD10 

N.O. 

N.C. 

N.O. 

N.O. 

N.O. 

N.C. 

N.O. 

GV2AM11 

Change of state 

following tripping on 

short circuit. 

GV2AD10 and AD01 

Change of state 

following tripping on 

short circuit, overload 

or undervoltage. 

GV2AD01 

N.C. 

26 


10/02

GV2 ACCESSORY SPECIFICATIONS 

3-Pole Busbars and GV2G• 



Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC 60947-1 V 690 


(Ith) 

Permissible peak current 

(I peak) 

Permissible thermal limit 

(I 2 t) 

Conforming to IEC 60439-1 A 63 

kA 11 

kA 2 s 104 

Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60529 IP 20 

Terminal Blocks GV2G05 and GV1G09 


Conventional rated thermal current (Ith) Conforming to IEC 60439-1 A 63 

Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60529 IP 20 

Wiring 

Solid cable 

Flexible cable without cable end 

Flexible cable with cable end 

Tightening torque Connector 20 lb-in (2.2 N•m) 

Screw clamp 

1-#14 to #2 AWG (1.5 to 25 mm 2 ) conductor or 

2-#14 to #6 AWG (1.5 to 10 mm 2 ) conductors 





15 lb-in (1.7 N•m) 

Current Limiter GV1L3 (European applications only) 


Conventional rated thermal current (Ith) Conforming to IEC 60947-1 A 63 

Operating threshold rms current A 1500 (non adjustable threshold) 

Wiring 


Solid cable 


Flexible cable with cable end 







20 lb-in (2.2 N•m) 


27



GV2 OPERATING CURVES 

Thermal-Magnetic Tripping Curves for GV2ME and GV2P 

Average operating time at 20° C according to multiples of the setting current 

Time (s) 

10 000 

1000 

100 

10 

1 

2 

3 

1 

0,1 

0,01 

0,001 

1 1,5 10 100 

x setting current (Ir) 

1 3 poles from cold state 

2 2 poles from cold state 

3 3 poles from hot state 

28 


10/02

GV2 OPERATING CURVES (CONTINUED) 

Current Limitation on Short Circuit 

For GV2M and GV2P 

Three-phase 400/415 V 

Dynamic stress 

1 peak = f (prospective Isc) at 1.05 Ue = 435 V 



Maximum peak current (A) 

100 000 

1 

= 0.25 

= 0.3 

2 

10 000 

= 0.7 

= 0.5 

3 

4 

5 

= 0.8 

6 

7 

1000 

cos ϕ = 0.95 = 0.9 

8 

9 

10 

100 

100 1000 10 000 15 000 (11) 

100 000 

Prospective Isc (A) 

1 I peak max. 6 6-10 A 

2 20-25 A 7 4-6.3 A 

3 17-23 A 8 2.5-4 A 

4 13-18 A 9 1.6-2.5 A 

5 9-14 A 10 1-1.6 A 

11 Limit of rated ultimate breaking capacity on short circuit of GV2M 

(14, 18, 23 and 25 Amp ratings) 


29




Thermal Limit on Short Circuit for GV2ME 

Thermal limit in kA 2 s in the magnetic operating zone 

Sum of L 2 dt = f (prospective Isc) at 1.05 Ue = 435 V 

Sum of I 2 dt (kA 2 s) 

100 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

10 

7 

8 

1 

9 

0,1 

0,01 

0,1 1 10 100 

Prospective Isc (kA) 

1 20-25 A 6 4-6.3 A 

2 17-23 A 7 2.5-4 A 

3 13-18 A 8 1.6-2.5 A 

4 9-14 A 9 1-1.6 A 

5 6-10 A 

30 


10/02


Thermal Limit on Short Circuit for GV2P 


Sum of I 2 dt = f (prospective Iso) at 1.05 Ue = 435 V 




100 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

10 

7 

8 

1 

9 

0,1 

0,01 

0,1 1 10 100 


1 20-25 A 6 4-6.3 A 

2 17-23 A 7 2.5-4 A 

3 13-18 A 8 1.6-2.5 A 

4 9-14 A 9 1-1.6 A 

5 6-10 A 


31



GV2 BREAKING CAPACITY FOR EUROPEAN APPLICATIONS 

Type 

Rating 

Breaking capacity 

conforms to 

IEC 60947-2 

Associated fuses 

(if required) 

if Isc > breaking 

capacity Icu 

conforms to 

IEC 60947-2 

f > 100 kA. 

(1) As% of Icu. 

230/ 

240 V 

400/ 

415 V 

A 

GV2 

ME01 

to 

ME06 

0.1 to 

1.6 

ME07 ME08 ME10 ME14 ME16 ME20 ME21 ME22 

2.5 4 6.3 10 14 18 23 25 

GV2 

P01 

to 

P06 

0.1 

to 

1.6 

P07 P08 P10 P14 P16 P20 

2.5 4 6.3 10 14 18 

Icu kA f f f f f f f 50 50 f f f f f f f f f 

Ics 

% (1) 

f f f f f f f 100 100 f f f f f f f f f 

Icu kA f f f f f 15 15 15 15 f f f f f f 50 50 50 

Ics 

% (1) 

f f f f f 50 50 40 40 f f f f f f 50 50 50 

440 V Icu kA f f f 50 15 8 8 6 6 f f f f f 50 20 20 20 

Ics 

% (1) 

f f f 100 100 50 50 50 50 f f f f f 75 75 75 75 

500 V Icu kA f f f 50 10 6 6 4 4 f f f f 50 42 10 10 10 

Ics 

% (1) 

f f f 100 100 75 75 75 75 f f f f 100 75 75 75 75 

690 V Icu kA f 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 f 8 8 6 6 6 4 4 4 

230/ 

240 V 

400/ 

415 V 

Ics 

% (1) 

f 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 f 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 

aM A f f f f f f f 80 80 f f f f f f f f f 

gl A f f f f f f f 100 100 f f f f f f f f f 

aM A f f f f f 63 63 80 80 f f f f f f 100 100 100 

gl A f f f f f 80 80 100 100 f f f f f f 125 125 125 

440 V aM A f f f 50 50 50 50 63 63 f f f f f 50 63 80 80 

gl A f f f 63 63 63 63 80 80 f f f f f 63 80 100 100 

500 V aM A f f f 50 50 50 50 50 50 f f f f 50 50 50 50 50 

gl A f f f 63 63 63 63 63 63 f f f f 63 63 63 63 63 

690 V aM A f 16 25 32 32 40 40 40 40 f 20 25 40 40 50 50 50 50 

gl A f 20 32 40 40 50 50 50 50 f 25 32 50 50 63 63 63 63 

P21 

& 

P22 

23 & 

25 

P32 

32 

32 


10/02

Type 



GV2 BREAKING CAPACITY FOR EUROPEAN APPLICATIONS (CONTINUED) 

Used in Association with Current Limiter GV1L3 

GV2 

ME01 

to 

ME06 


Rating A 0.1 to 1.6 2.5 4 6.3 10 14 18 23 25 


conforms 

to IEC 60947-2 

Type 

230/240 V Icu kA f f f f f f f f f 

Ics 

% (1) 

f f f f f f f f f 

400/415 V Icu kA f f f f f 100 100 100 100 

Ics 

% (1) 

f f f f f 50 50 40 40 

440 V Icu kA f f f f f 50 20 20 20 

Ics 

% (1) 

f f f f f 75 75 75 75 

500 V Icu kA f f f f 50 42 10 10 10 

Ics 

% (1) 

f f f f 100 100 75 75 75 

GV2 

P01 

to 

P06 

P07 P08 P10 P14 P16 P20 

Rating A 0.1 to 1.6 2.5 4 6.3 10 14 18 21 & 23 32 


conforms 

to IEC 60947-2 

Type 

P21 & 

P25 


Ics 

% (1) 



Ics 

% (1) 


440 V Icu kA f f f f f 100 100 100 100 

Ics 

% (1) 

f f f f f 50 50 50 50 

500 V Icu kA f f f f 100 100 100 100 100 

Ics 

% (1) 

f f f f 50 50 50 50 50 

GV2 

ME01 

to 

ME06 

P32 


Rating A 0.1 to 1.6 2.5 4 6.3 10 14 18 23 25 

Cable protection against thermal stress 

in the event of short circuit 

(PVC insulated copper cables) 

Minimum cross sectional area 

(c.s.a.) protected to 40 °C at 

Isc max 

0.04 in 2 

1 mm 2 (3) (3) (3) 10kA 6 kA (2) (2) (2) (2) 

0.06 in 2 

1.5 mm 2 (3) (3) (3) 20kA 10 kA (2) (2) (2) (2) 

0.10-0.24 in 

2.5-6 mm 

(3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) 

f > 100 kA. (1) As% of Icu. (2) Cable c.s.a. not protected (3) cable c.s.a. protected. 


33

90° 

90° 

90° 

90° 



Conforming to standards 

Approvals 

UL File Number 


Environment 

IEC, NF C, BS, IEC, VDE 

ASE, CSA, UL, LROS, ÖVE 

File E164864, CCN NLRV 

CSA File Number File LR 81630, Class 3211 05 

Protective treatment 

Degree of protection / Conforming to IEC 60529 

Shock resistance / Conforming to IEC 68-2-27 

Vibration resistance / Conforming to IEC 68-2-6 


“TC” 

GV3ME open-mounted: IP 20 

GV3ME in enclosure GV3CE01: IP 55 

22 g for 20 ms duration 

2.5 g (0-25 Hz) 

Storage 

Operation 

Temperature compensation Conforming to IEC 60157-1 

-40 to +176 °F (-40 to + 80 °C) 

Open 

Enclosed 

Open 

Enclosed 

-4 to +140 °F (-20 to + 60 °C) 

-4 to +104 °F (-20 to + 40 °C) 

-4 to +140 °F (-20 to + 60 °C) 

-4 to +104 °F (-20 to + 40 °C) 

Flame resistance Conforming to IEC 60695-2-1 Conforms for 1760 °F (960 °C) 

Maximum operating altitude Without derating 9843 ft. (3000 m) 

Operating position 

Type GV3ME06 through ME20 GV3ME25 through ME63 

Wiring 



Solid cable 

Min Max Min Max 

1-#16 to #8 AWG (1-6 mm 2 ) 2-#16 to #8 AWG (1-6 mm 2 ) 1-#12 to #1 AWG (2.5-35 mm 2 ) 

Flexible cable without cable end 1-#16 to #8 AWG (1-6 mm 2 ) 2-#16 to #8 AWG (1-6 mm 2 ) 1-#12 to #2 AWG (2.5-25 mm 2 ) 2-#12 to #4 AWG (2.5-16 mm 2 ) 

Flexible cable with cable end 1-#16 to #10 AWG (1-4 mm 2 ) 2-#16 to #10 AWG (1-4 mm 2 ) 1-#12 to #2 AWG (2.5-25 mm 2 ) 2-#12 to #4 AWG (2.5-16 mm 2 ) 

Tightening Torque 15 lb-in (1.7 N•m) 44 lb-in (5 N•m) 

Technical Characteristics 

Type GV3ME06 through ME25 GV3ME40 through ME63 

Rated insulation voltage (UI) 

Conforming to IEC 60158-1 V 690 

Conforming to 

CSA C 22.2 No. 14 and UL 508 

Maximum conventional rated thermal current (lth) Conforming to IEC 60157-1 A 63 

V 

600 (B600) 

Mechanical life ops 100 000 50 000 

Electrical life 

ops: Closing-opening 

AC-3 duty ops 100 000 50 000 

Maximum operating rate ops/h 25 

Sensitivity to phase failure Conforms to IEC 60947-4-1 Sec 7-2-1-5-2 

34 


10/02


Pick-up voltage 

Drop-out voltage 

GV3 SPECIFICATIONS (CONTINUED) 

Voltage Trip Characteristics 


Conforming to CSA C22.2 No. 14 and UL 508 V 600 (B600) 



0.8-1.1 Un 

0.7-0.35 Un 

Inrush consumption 12 VA (7 W) 

Sealed consumption 7 VA (2.5 W) 

Operating time (1) ms GV3B: 10. GV3D: 15 

On-load factor 100% 

Wiring 


sectional (c.s.a.) 

Solid cable 

Min 

Max 




(1) From the disappearance of Ue at the trip terminals to opening of the GV3. 


35




Auxiliary and Fault Signalling Contact Characteristics 

Type Instantaneous Auxiliary Contacts GV1A01 to A07 Fault Signalling Contacts GV3A08 and A09 



conforming to 

CSA C22.2 No. 14 and UL 508 

Conventional rated thermal 

current (Ith) 


conforming to 

CSA C22.2 No.14 and UL 508 

V 690 690 

V 600 (B600) 600 (B600) 

A 6 6 

A 5 (B600) 5 (B600) 

Mechanical life ops 100 000 1000 


conforms to 

V 48 

110 

127 

220 

240 

380 

415 

440 500 690 48 

IEC 60337-1 a.c operation AC-11/100 000 ops (Closing-opening) AC-11/1000 ops (Closing-opening) 

110 

127 

220 

240 

380 

415 

440 500 690 

Operational power VA 350 500 800 850 700 700 400 240 460 800 850 450 450 200 

Occasional breaking and 

making capacities 

VA 4000 12 000 20 000 20 000 15 000 15 000 10 000 2400 8000 12 000 15 000 12 000 12 000 8000 

Operational current (Ie) A 6 4.5 3.5 2.2 1.5 1.5 0.6 5 3.6 3.5 2.2 1 1 0.3 


conforming to 

IEC 60337-1 d.c. operation 

V 24 48 60 110 220 24 48 60 110 220 

DC-11/100 000 ops (Closing-opening) 

DC-11/1000 ops (Closing-opening) 

Operational power W 180 240 180 140 120 120 120 90 70 60 

Occasional breaking and 

making capacities 

W 240 360 240 210 180 180 180 135 105 90 

Operational current (Ie) A 6 5 3 1.3 0.5 5 2.5 1.5 0.7 0.3 



Contact operation 

O = N.C. 

F = N.O. 

Power poles: 

GV1A01, A07 

GV1A02 

GV1A03 

GV1A05 

GV1A06 

By GB2CB08 circuit breaker for control circuits 

or g l fuse, 6 A max (or equivalent) 

By GB2CB08 circuit breaker for control circuits 

or g l fuse, 6 A max (or equivalent) 

GV3A08 and A09 change state 

following an overload or short circuit fault 

Type Instantaneous Auxiliary Contacts GV1A01 to A07 Fault Signalling Contacts GV3A08 and A09 

Wiring 


sectional area (c.s.a.) - solid cable 

0 1 

P 

O 

F 

F 

F 

F 

F 

O 

F 

F 

F 

F 

F 

Contact: 

Min Max Min Max 

1-#16 to #12 AWG (1-2.5 mm 2 ) 2-#16 to #12 AWG (1-2.5 mm 2 ) 1-#16 to #12 AWG (1-2.5 mm 2 ) 2-#16 to #12 AWG (1-2.5 mm 2 ) 

flexible cable without cable end 1-#18 to #12 AWG (.75-2.5 mm 2 ) 2-#18 to #12 AWG (.75-2.5 mm 2 ) 1-#18 to #12 AWG (.75-2.5 mm 2 ) 2-#18 to #12 AWG (.75-2.5 mm 2 ) 

flexible cable with cable end 1-#18 to #12 AWG (.75-2.5 mm 2 ) 2-#18 to #14 AWG (.75-1.5 mm 2 ) 1-#18 to #12 AWG (.75-2.5 mm 2 ) 2-#18 to #14 AWG (.75-1.5 mm 2 ) 

Open 

Closed 

36 


10/02


Thermal-Magnetic Tripping Curves for GV3ME 

Average operating time at 68° F (20 °C) according to multiples of the setting current. 

Time (s) 



10 000 

1000 

100 

3 

1 

10 

2 

4 

1 

0,1 

0,01 

0,001 

1 10 100 

1 3 poles from cold state, rating 1.6 - 10 A 

2 3 poles from hot state, rating 1.6 - 10 A 

3 3 poles from cold state, rating 16 - 63 A 

4 3 poles from hot state, rating 16 - 63 A 

X setting current (Ir) 


37




Current Limitation on Short Circuit for GV3ME 

3-phase 400/415 V 


I peak = f (prospective Isc) at 1.05 Ue = 435 V 

Maximum peak current (kA) 

100 

1 

= 0.25 

= 0.3 

2 

3 

10 

= 0.7 

= 0.5 

4 

5 

6 

= 0.8 

7 

1 

cos ϕ = 0.95 = 0.9 

8 

9 

10 

0,1 

0,1 1 10 15 

100 

1 I peak max 6 6-10 A 

2 40-63 A 7 4-6 A 

3 25-40 A 8 2.5-4 A 

4 16-25 A 9 1.6-2.5 A 

5 10-16 A 10 1-1.6 A 

Prospective Iso (kA) 

38 


10/02


Thermal Limit on Short Circuit for GV3ME 


Sum of I 2 dt = f (prospective Isc) at 1.05 Ue = 435 V 




100 

1 

2 

3 

4 

10 

5 

6 

7 

1 

8 

0,1 

0,1 1 10 15 

100 

1 40-63 A 5 6-10 A 

2 25-40 A 6 4-6 A 

3 16-25 A 7 2.5-4 A 

4 10-16 A 8 1.6-2.5 A 



39



GV3 BREAKING CAPACITY FOR EUROPEAN APPLICATIONS 

Type 

Breaking capacity (Icn) 

conforms to IEC 60157-1 (P1) 

Associated fuses (if required) 

if Isc > breaking capacity Icn 

f Fuse not required: breaking capacity Icn > Isc. 

GV3 

ME06 


ME07 

ME08 ME10 ME14 ME20 ME25 ME40 ME63 

230 V kA 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 

400/415 V kA 100 100 100 100 100 100 35 35 

440 V kA 100 100 100 25 25 25 25 25 

500 V kA 100 100 100 8 8 8 8 8 

690 V kA 100 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 

230 V aM A f f f f f f f f 

gl A f f f f f f f f 

400/415 V aM A f f f f f f 250 315 

gl A f f f f f f 315 400 

440 V aM A f f f 125 160 200 250 315 

gl A f f f 160 200 250 315 400 

500 V aM A f f f 80 100 125 160 200 

gl A f f f 100 125 160 200 250 

690 V aM A f 40 50 80 100 125 160 200 

gl A f 50 63 100 125 160 200 250 

40 


10/02




Environment 

Conforming to Standards 

Approvals 

Protective Treatment 


conforming to IEC 60529 

Ambient Air Temperature 

Temperature Compensation 

Maximum Operating Altitude 

Storage 

Operation 

IEC 60947-1, 60947-2, 60947-4-1, EN 60947-1, 60947-2, 60947-4-1, NF C 63-650, 63-120, 

79-130, VDE 0113, UL 508, CSA C22.2 No.14 

UL File E 164864 CCN NLRV 

CSA File LR 81630 Class 3211 05 

“TC” 

IP 405 with terminal shields 

-55 °C to +95 °C (-68 °F to +203 °F) 

-25 °C to +70 °C (-13 °F to +158 °F) 

-25 °C to +55 °C (-13 °F to +130 °F) 

For use up to 70 °C (+158 °F), please consult your Regional Sales Office 

2000 m (6562 ft.) 

Operating Position 

90 90 90 90 

Suitability for Isolation Conforming to IEC 60947-1 7-1-6 Yes 

Vibration Resistance 

2.5 g n at 25 Hz 

Phase Loss Sensitivity Yes, conforming to IEC 60947-4-1, 7-2-1-5-2 

Cabling Characteristics 

Connection to Bars, and Cables with Lugs or Bare Cables 

GV7R ●40 – GV7R ●100 GV7R ●150 GV7R ●220 

Type 

d 

d 

e 

L 

L 

h 

Pitch 

Bars or Cables with Lugs 

Screws 

Bare Cables 

(Copper or Aluminum) 

with Connectors 

without spreaders 35 mm (1.4 in) 35 mm (1.4 in) 35 mm (1.4 in) 

with spreaders 45 mm (1.8 in) 45 mm (1.8 in) 45 mm (1.8 in) 

e ≤6 (0.24 in) ≤6 mm (0.24 in) ≤6 mm (0.24 in) 

L ≤25 (1 in) ≤25 mm (1 in) ≤25 mm (1 in) 

d ≤10 (0.39 in) ≤10 mm (0.39 in) ≤10 mm (0.39 in) 

size M6 M8 M8 

tightening torque 10 N•m (7.5 lb.-ft.) 15 N•m (11.3 lb.-ft.) 15 N•m (11.3 lb.-ft.) 

height 20 mm (0.78 in) 20 mm (0.78 in) 20 mm (0.78 in) 

cross-sectional area 

1.5 mm 2 (#16 AWG) 

1.5–95 mm 2 

(#16-#3/0 AWG) 

1.5–185 mm 2 

(#16-350 mcm AWG) 

tightening torque 15 N•m (11.3 lb.-ft.) 15 N•m (11.3 lb.-ft.) 15 N•m (11.3 lb.-ft.)) 


41



Technical Characteristics 

Type 

Utilization Category 

Rated Operational Voltage (Ue) 

Conforming to IEC 60947-2 

Rated Insulation Voltage (Ui) 


Rated Operational Frequency ▲ 


Rated Impulse Withstand Voltage (U imp) 


GV7 

RE20–RE100 RS40–RS100 RE150 RS150 RE220 RS220 

Conforming to IEC 60947-2 A A A 

Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 AC-3 AC-3 AC-3 

690 V 690 V 690 V 

750 V 750 V 750 V 

50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 

8 kV 8 kV 8 kV 

Total Power Dissipated Per Pole 5 W 8.7 W 14.5 W 

Mechanical Durability (C.O. – Close, Open) 50,000 C.O. 40,000 C.O. 20,000 C.O. 

Electrical Durability 

440 V In/2 50,000 C.O. 40,000 C.O. 20,000 C.O. 

440 V In 30,000 C.O. 20,000 C.O. 10,000 C.O. 

Rated Duty Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 Continuous duty Continuous duty Continuous duty 

Type 

GV7 

RE40–RE100 RS40–RS100 RE150 RS150 RE220 RS220 

Rating 25–40 A to 60–100 A 90–150 A 90–150 A 132–220 A 132–220 A 

Breaking Capacity 

Conforming to 

IEC 60947-2 

▲ 

◆ 

■ 

230/240 V 

400/415 V 

440 V 

500 V 

690 V 

Icu ◆ 85 kA 100 kA 85 kA 100 kA 85 kA 100 kA 

Ics% ■ 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 


Ics% ■ 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 


Ics% ■ 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 


Ics% ■ 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 


Ics% ■ 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 

GV7R motor controllers and protectors are not recommended for use with variable speed controllers or soft start units for applications under 40 Hz. 

Icu - interrupting capacity at full voltage. 

Ics - short-circuit interrupting capacity as a percentage of Icu. 

UL Maximum RMS Short-Circuit Current (ka) 

Type Range 240 V ● 480 V ● 600 V ● 

GV7 - RE40 25 to 40 A 25 25 10 

GV7 - RE50 30 to 50 A 25 25 10 

GV7 - RE80 48 to 80 A 25 25 10 

GV7 - RE100 60 to 100 A 25 25 10 

GV7 - RE150 90 to 150 A 25 25 10 

GV7 - RE220 132 to 220 A 25 25 10 

GV7 - RS40 25 to 40 A 65 65 10 

GV7 - RS50 30 to 50 A 65 65 10 

GV7 - RS80 48 to 80 A 65 65 10 

GV7 - RS100 60 to 100 A 65 65 10 

GV7 - RS150 90 to 150 A 65 65 10 

GV7 - RS220 132 to 220 A 65 65 10 

Group Installation: Maximum NTD fuse size: 1200 A / Maximum circuit breaker rating: 1200 A. Suitable for use on a circuit with an available short circuit 

current level no greater than the short circuit current rating of the manual motor controller, or circuit breaker, whichever is less. 

● 

Nominal system voltage. 

42 


10/02


Auxiliary Contact Characteristics 



Type GV7AE11 GV7AB11 


(associated insulation co-ordination) 


from CSA C22.2 No. 14 & UL 508 

690 690 

600 300 

Conventional Thermal Current (Ith) 6 A 6 A 

Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 

from CSA C22.2 No. 14 & UL 508 

Mechanical Durability 

(C.O.: Close-Open) 

5 A 1 A 

50,000 C.O. 50,000 C.O. 

Operational Current 


AC Operation AC-12 or AC-15, 50,000 C.O. AC-12 or AC-15, 50,000 C.O. 

Rated Operational Voltage (Ue) V 24 48 110 230/240 380/415 440 690 24 48 110 230/240 380/415 440 690 

Rated Operational Current (le) 

Operational Current 


AC-12 A 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 

AC-15 A 6 6 5 4 3 3 0.1 5 5 4 3 2.5 2.5 0.1 

DC Operation DC-12 or DC-14, 50,000 C.O. DC-12 or DC-14, 50,000 C.O. 

Rated Operational Voltage (Ue) V 24 48 110 250 24 48 110 250 

Rated Operational Current (le) 

DC-12 A 2.5 2.5 0.8 0.3 2 2 0.5 – 

DC-14 A 1 0.2 0.5 0.03 0.5 0.1 0.25 – 

Minimum operating conditions 17 V 12 V 

DC Operation 5 mA 5 mA 

Short-circuit Protection 

Cabling 

Solid Cable 

By GB2CB●● circuit breaker (rated according to operational current for Ue ≤ 415 V) or by gl fuse, 10 A max. 

1 x 1.5 mm 2 (1 x #16 AWG) 1 x 1.5 mm 2 (1 x #16 AWG) 

Flexible Cable without Cable End 1 x 1.5 mm 2 (1 x #16 AWG) 1 x 1.5 mm 2 (1 x #16 AWG) 

Flexible Cable with Cable End 1 x 1.5 mm 2 (1 x #16 AWG) 1 x 1.5 mm 2 (1 x #16 AWG) 

Characteristics of Electric Releases 

Type GV7AU GV7AS 



Operational Voltage 


690 V 690 V 

0.85–1.1 Ue (V) 0.7–1.1 Ue (V) 

Drop-Out Voltage 0.35–0.7 Ue (V) 0.2–0.75 Ue (V) 

Inrush Consumption 

Sealed Consumption 

Operating Time 





The current limiting capacity of the motor starter and protector is expressed by two curves which give, 

as a function of the prospective short-circuit current (the current which would flow if no protection 

devices were installed): 

• The actual peak current (limited), 

• The thermal stress (in A 2 s), i.e. the energy dissipated by the short-circuit in a conductor with a 

resistance of 1 Ω. 

Example: The real value of a 70 kA prospective short-circuit current limited by a GV7RS220 is 20kA 

peak, see page 46. 

Permissible Thermal Stresses for Cables (A 2 s) 

S (mm 2 ) 1.5 2.5 4 6 10 16 25 35 50 

AWG #16 #14 #12 #10 #8 #6 #4 #2 #1 

PVC 

Insulation 

PRC 

Cu 2.97 x 10 4 8.26 x 10 4 2.12 x 10 5 4.76 x 10 5 1.32 x 10 6 3.4 x 10 6 8.26 x 10 6 1.62 x 10 7 3.31 x 10 7 

Al – – 5.41 x 10 5 1.39 x 10 6 3.38 x 10 6 6.64 x 10 6 1.35 x 10 7 – – 

Cu 4.10 x 10 4 1.39 x 10 5 2.92 x 10 5 6.56 x 10 5 1.82 x 10 6 4.69 x 10 6 1.39 x 10 7 2.23 x 10 7 4.56 x 10 7 

Al – – 7.52 x 10 5 1.93 x 10 6 4.70 x 10 6 9.23 x 10 6 1.88 x 10 7 – – 

PRC = Cross-linked polyethylene 

Example 1: For a GV7RS220, the peak value is limited to 20 kA for a prospective Isc of 40 kA. 

Example 2: For a GV7RS220, and with a prospective Isc of 40 kA, an I 2 t of 7.5 x 10 5 A 2 s is obtained, 

which requires the use of a PVC insulated copper cable with a cross-sectional area of 10 

mm 2 (# 8 AWG). 

44 


10/02



Thermal-Magnetic Tripping Curves for GV7R 

Average operating time at 20 °C according to multiples of the setting current 

Time (s) 

10 000 

5000 

2000 

1000 

500 

200 

100 

50 

20 

10 

5 

2 

1 

1 

2 

0.5 

0.2 

3 

0.1 

0.05 

0.02 

0.01 

0.005 

0.002 

0.001 

1 1.12 

2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 40 50 70 100 

x setting current (Ir) 

1 Curve from cold state 

2 Curve from hot state 

3 12 - 14 Ir 

In the event of total phase failure, tripping occurs after 4 s ± 20% 


45



Current Limitation on Short-Circuit for GV7R 

3-phase 400/415 V 


1 peak = f (Prospective Isc) 

For GV7RE only 

Limited peak current (kA) 

100 

80 

70 

60 

50 

40 

30 

20 

10 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

2 

1 

2 

3 

3 4 5 6 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 100 

Prospective short-circuit current, Isc (kA) 

1GV7RE220 

2GV7RE150 

3GV7RE100 

For GV7RS only 


100 

80 

70 

60 

50 

40 

30 

20 

10 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

2 

1 

2 

3 

3 4 5 6 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 100 


1 GV7RS220 

2 GV7RS150 

3 GV7RS100 

46 


10/02



Thermal Limit on Short-Circuit for GV7R 

3-phase 400/415 V 

Thermal limit 

I 2 dt = f (Prospective Isc) 


10 7 

Sum of i 2 dt (A 2 s) 

5x10 6 

2x10 6 

10 6 

5x10 5 

1 

2 

3 

2x10 5 

10 5 

5x10 4 

3x10 6 

3x10 5 3 4 5 6 50 70 100 

3x10 4 

2x10 4 2 

10 

20 30 40 60 


1GV7RE220 

2GV7RE150 

3GV7RE100 


10 7 

Sum of i 2 dt (A 2 s) 

5x10 6 

2x10 6 

10 6 

5x10 5 

1 

2 

3 

2x10 5 

10 5 

5x10 4 

3x10 6 

3x10 5 3 4 5 6 50 70 100 

3x10 4 

2x10 4 2 

10 

20 30 40 60 


1GV7RS220 

2GV7RS150 

3GV7RS100 


47



Current Limitation on Short-Circuit for GV7R 

3-phase 690 V 


1 peak = f (Prospective Isc) 


50 


40 

30 

20 

10 

1 

2 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

2 

3 4 5 6 9 10 

20 


1GV7RE220 

2GV7RE150 and GV7RE100 


50 


40 

30 

20 

10 

1 

2 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

2 

3 4 5 6 10 

20 


1GV7RS220 

2GV7RS150 and GV7RS100 

48 


10/02



Thermal Limit on Short-Circuit for GV7R 

3-phase 690 V 

Thermal limit 

I 2 dt = f (Prospective Isc) 


Sum of I 2 dt (A 2 s) 

3x10 6 

2x10 6 

1 

10 6 

5x10 5 

2 

3x10 5 

2x10 5 

10 5 

2 3 4 5 6 8 10 

20 

1 GV7RE220 

2 GV7RE150 and GV7RE100 



3x10 6 1 

Sum of I 2 dt (A 2 s) 

2x10 6 

10 6 

5x10 5 

2 

3x10 5 

2x10 5 

10 5 

2 3 4 5 6 10 

20 

1 GV7RE220 

2 GV7RE150 and GV7RE100 



49


Dimensions 

GV2 MOUNTING DIMENSIONS 

GV2ME GV2AD, AM AN, AU, AS, AX GV2AE LS1D30 

.43 .63 

11 

16 

1.7 

44 

2.6 

66 

X1 

89 

3.5 

X1 

GV2ME··3: 

3.92 

101 

1.8 

44.5 

= 

1.8 

45 

= 

.37 

9.3 

Block GV2AD, AM, AN 

Block GV2AU, AS 

.37 .71 

9.3 18 

3.2 

81(1) 

.59 

15 

.39 

10 

LS1D7323: 

3.92 

101 

63 

16 

46 

67.2 

X1 

89 X1 

3.5 

··· 

1.8 

44.5 

= 

1.8 

45 

= 

X1 Electrical clearance = 1.8" (40 mm) for Ue ≤ 690 V 

GV2P GV2AD, AM, AN, AU, AS GV2AK00 

X1 

Block GV2AD, AM, AN 

Block GV2AU, AS 

.55 3.9 

14 98 

3.5 

89 

1.8 

45 

2.4 

61 

= 

1.3 

32 

1.0 

26 

.59 

15 

1.1 

50 

3.2 

82 

X2 

X2 = 1.8" (40 mm) 

X1 Electrical clearance = 1.8" (40 mm) for Ue ≤ 415 V, or 3.2" (80 mm) for Ue = 440 V, or 4.7" (120 mm) for Ue = 500 and 690 V 

Mounting of GV2M 

On Panel with Adaptor Plate GV2AF02 

On 1.4" (35 mm) rail 

C = 78.5 on AM1DP200 (35 x 7.5) 

C = 86 on AM1DE200, ED200 (35 x 15) 

1.8 

44.5 

= 

.37 

9.3 

.37 

9.3 

3.2 

81(1) 

.71 

18 

On Pre-slotted 

Mounting Plate AM1PA 

1.8 

44.5 

On Mounting Rail DZ5MB201 

1.7 

4.2 

AF1EA4 

GV2AF02 

DZ5MB201 

DZ5ME8 

1.8 

44.5 

1.1/2.4 

50/60 

1.1/2.4 

50/60 

1.1 

50 

2.4 

60 

1.8 

44.5 

c 

Mounting of GV2P 

On Panel 

On 1.4" (35 mm) rail 

C = 98.5 on AM1DP200 (35 x 7.5) 

C = 106 on AM1DE200, ED200 (35 x 15) 

3.1 

80 

1.4 

35 

On Pre-slotted Mounting 

Plate AM1PA 

1.4 

35 

Adaptor Plate GK2AF01 

.59 

15 

1.4 

35 

AF1EA4 

1.8 

44.5 

3.3 

84 

3.3 

84 

2.2 

55 

1.8 

45 

1.4 

35 

5.3 

135 

1.8 

45 

.20 

5 

.22 

È5.5 

4.1 .20 

105 5 

c 

1.8 

44.5 

GV2AF01 

GV2M + K contactor combination 

.53 

13.5 

GV2M + GV1L3 

(current limiter) 

.53 

13.5 

.94 .37 

24 9.5 

1.4 

35 

2.1 

54 

GV1F03 

7.5 mm height compensation plate 

X1 

3.1 

79 

1.8 

45 

6.0 

152 

3.0 

77 

3.5 1.6 

X1 89 40 

1.8 

44.5 

1.8 

45 

5.1 

129 

X1 = 0.40" / 10 mm for Ue = 230 V or 1.2 " / 30 mm for 230 V < Ue ≤ 690 V 

.51 

13 

1.4 

35 

Dual Dimensions 

1.5 

39 

inches 

mm 

50 


10/02

GV2 MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (CONTINUED) 


Dimensions 

GV2-AF4 + LAD-31 

Combination GV2-ME + D range contactor 

Combination GV2-P + D range contactor 

b 

b 

c1 

c 

d1 

d 

45 

c1 

c 

45 

GV2-ME + LC2-D09 to D18 LC2-D25 and D32 GV2-P + LC2-D09 to D18 LC2-D25 and D32 

b 7.4 (188.6) 7.8 (199) b 6.61 (169.1) 7.9 (199.5) 

c1 3.6 (92.7) 3.9 (99) c1 4.6 (116.8) 4.6 (116.8) 

c 3.9 (98.2) 4.11 (104.5) c 4.8 (122.3) 4.8 (122.3) 

d1 3.9 (98.3) 3.9 (98.3) 

d 4.1 (103.8) 1.4 (103.8) 

Mounting of External Operator GV2AP01 or GV2AP02 

Door Cut-out 

4x0.14 

4x3.5 

1.7 

43 

2.6 

65 

.28 

7 

= = 

2.1 

54 

.06-20 

2.1 

1.5-5 

53 (1) 

.24 

6 

.20 

5.2 

= = 

= = 

2.1 

54 

(1) 135 mm min., 284 mm max. with operating rod uncut, 88 with operating rod cut. 

Surface Mounting Enclosure GV2MC0• 

Front Plate GV2CP21 

5.8 

147 

2x0.21x0.25 

(1) 2x5.3x6.3 

5.1 

130 = 

2x0.13 

2x3.3 

0.70 

17 

= = 

2.4 .83 .45 

62 21 11.5 

4.6 

118 

5.2 

133 

3.3 3.7 

84 

93 

= 

= 

= 

.04-16 

1-4 

.47 

12 

3.0 0 .30 

76 7.5 

3.7 

93 

(1) 4 knock-outs for 0.63 " / 16 mm plastic cable glands or n ° 16 conduit 

Flush Mounting Enclosure GV2MP0• (bracket cut-out dimensions) 

GV2MP0• GV2MP01, MP02 GV2MP03 

a 

= 

= = 

5 

127 

5.5 

140 

4.6 

117 

.37 

9.5 

5.2 

133 

.47 

12 

.04-.24 

1-6 

a1 

= 

= 

3.7 

93.5 

4.2 

106.5 

= 

2.8 

71 

3.7 

93 

.26 

6.5 

GV2 a a1 

MP01, MP02 2.8 " (71 mm) − 

MP03, MP04 2.8 " (71 mm) 3.4 " (86 mm) 


inches 

mm 


51


Dimensions 

GV2 MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (CONTINUED) 

Sets of Busbars GV2G445, GV2G454, GV2G472 with Terminal Block GV2G05 

.12 

3 

a 

l 

p 

2.5 

63 

.71 

18 

1.8 

45 

l 

p 

GV2G454 (0.16 x 2.1 in/4 x 54 mm) 8.1 in (206 mm) 2.1 in (54 mm) 



a 

No. of Taps 5 6 7 8 

GV2G454 10.2 in (260 mm) 12.4 in (314 mm) 14.5 in (368 mm) 16.6 in (422 mm) 



Sets of Busbars with Terminal Block GV1G09 

Sets of Busbars GV2G245, GV2G254, GV2G272 

l 

1.2 

30 

I 

GV2G254 (0.08 x 2.1 in/2 x 54 mm) 

GV2G245 (0.08 x 1.8 in/2 x 45 mm) 

GV2G272 (0.08 x 2.8 in/2 x 72 mm) 

3.9 in (98 mm) 

3.5 in (89 mm) 

4.6 in (116 mm) 

Set of Busbars GV2G554 

Set of Busbars GV2G354 

10.2 

260 

6.0 

152 


inches 

mm 

52 


10/02

GV3 MOUNTING DIMENSIONS 


Dimensions 

GV3M 

Mounting on Rail AM1DE200 or AM1ED201 

.68 

17.3 

.18 

4.5 

X1 

.79 

20 

2x0.16 

2x4 

(1) 

100º110 

4.7 

120 

2.8 

70 

1.8 

= 45 = 

.87 

22 

3.0 

75 

4.4 

113 

.22 

5.5 

X1 

.83 

21.2 

2.4 

61.2 

2.8 

70.4 

4.8 

122.5 

X1 = Electrical clearance 

(breaking at Isc max.) 

Mounting on Panel 

1.6 " / 40 mm for Ue < 500 V 

2.0 " / 50 mm for Ue = 690 V 

(1) Auxiliary contact blocks GV1A01 to A07 

Mounting on Pre-slotted Mounting Plate AM1PA 

2x0.16 

2x 4 

AF1EA4 

4.4 

113 

.79 

20 

.79 

20 

61,2 

61.2 

.83 

21.2 

= 100º110 = 

4.4 

113 

.79 

20 

100º110 

Surface Mounting Enclosure GV3CE01 

(1) 

(2) 

12.2 

312 

4x0.30 

4x 7.7 

7.7 

= 195 

= 

12.2 

312 

5.9 

150 

6.1 

154.4 

4.1 

= 105 = 

7.1 

181 

(1) 0.04 x 0.83 " / 1 x 21 mm and 0.04 x 1.5 " / 1 x 37.5 mm blanking plugs for cable entries 

(2) 0.04 x 0.83 " / 1 x 21 mm and 0.08 x 1.5 " / 1 x 37.5 mm blanking plugs for cable entries 


inches 

mm 


53

= 


Dimensions 

GV7 DIMENSIONS 

The following table lists the maximum horsepower ratings for the GV7 manual controllers depending on 

the supply voltage. 


FLC = Full load current. The values listed are for three-phase AC induction motors. 

220-240 Vac 440-480 Vac 550-600 Vac 

Maximum horsepower rating 75 Hp (FLC=192 A) 150 Hp (FLC=180 A) 200 Hp (FLC=192 A) 

Motor Controllers 

GV7R 

Motor Controllers with Terminal Shields and Phase Barriers 

GV7R + GV7AC01 + GV7AC04 

1.38 

35 

(2) 

(3) 

= = 

= 

= 

= 

= 

= 

= 

= 

3.19 

81 3.39 

86 4.37 

111 (1) 

= 

6.34 

161 

= 

4.13 

105 

= 

= 

4.92 

125 

= 6.34 

161 

= 

3.19 

81 

= 

12.64 

321 

= 

14.06 

357 

(1) 126 for GV7R• 220 (2) Phase barriers – GV7AC04 

(3) Terminal shields – GV7AC01 

Safety Clearance x1 x2 

Inches (mm) Inches (mm) 

x1 

x2 

Painted or insulated metal plate, insulation or insulated bar 0 (0) 1.18 (30) 

Bare metal plate U ≤ 440 V 0.20 (5) 1.38 (35) 

440 V 

x1 

U Š 600 V 0.79 (20) 1.38 (35) 

Minimum distance between 2 circuit breakers mounted side by side = 0. 

x2 

Combination of GV7 and LC1F with Kit GV7AC0 a b c 

c 

a 

GV7R + LC1F115 or 

F150 + GV7AC06 

Inch (mm) 

4.69 (119) 13.15 (334) 7.13 (181) 

GV7R + LC1F185 + GV7AC06 4.69 (119) 13.31 (338) 7.40 (188) 

GV7R + LC1F225 + GV7AC07 5.16 (131) 14.09 (358) 7.40 (188) 

GV7R + LC1F265 + GV7AC07 5.12 (130) 14.33 (364) 8.46 (215) 

LC1D hardware available soon. 

b 


inches 

mm 

54 


10/02

GV7 DIMENSIONS (CONTINUED) 


Dimensions 

On Panel 

On Two DZ5-MB201 Mounting Rails 

2xØ0.24 

2xØ6 

DZ5-ME5 

4.92 

125 

5.31 

135 

4.92 

125 

= 

1.38 

35 

1.38 1.38 

35 35 

= 

0.59 

15 

1.38 

35 

Flush Mounting 

1 Starter n Controllers GV7R 

GV7R 

Side by Side 

3.0 

76 

1.85 

47 

= = 

4.25 

108 

= = 

4.25 

108 

1.14 

29 

3.46 

88 

= = 

1.14 

29 

3.27 

83 

= = 

4.25 

108 

Combination of GV7R and LC1F with Kit GV7AC0• E G H 

G 

Ø0.28x0.39 

Ø7x10 

E H 

Inch (mm) 

GV7R + LC1F115 + GV7AC06 1.73 (44) 3.35 (85) 4.72 (120) 

GV7R + LC1F150 + GV7AC06 1.81 (46) 3.35 (85) 4.72 (120) 

GV7R + LC1F165 + GV7AC06 1.89 (48) 3.35 (85) 4.72 (120) 

GV7R + LC1F225 + GV7AC07 2.24 (57) 3.35 (85) 4.72 (120) 

GV7R + LC1F265 + GV7AC07 2.36 (60) 3.35 (85) 4.72 (120) 

LC1D hardware available soon. 


inches 

mm 


55


Dimensions 

GV7 DIMENSIONS (CONTINUED) 

Spreaders GV7AC03 Cabling Smooth Terminals Connectors 

1.77 

45 

4.49 

114 

1.77 

45 

1.61 

41 

Z 

1.18 

30 

X 

0.41 

10.5 

a 

Z 

0.75 

19 

Z 

2.76 

70 

X 

2.76 

70 

X 

a (in/mm) 

GV7R• 0.77/19.5 

GV7R• 220 0.85/21.5 

Direct Rotary Handle GV7AP03, GV7A04 

Flush Mounting 

6.10 

155 

4.76 

121 

3.58 

91 

60 

DD 

60 

I 

0 

2.17 

55 

1.42 

36 

1.77 

45 

2.87 

73 

1.10 

28 

Direct Rotary Handle GV7AP03 or GV7AP04 GV7AP05 Front Fuse Center Enclosure Viewed from Top 

3.5 

89 

= = 

3.82 

97 

1.85 

47 

3.0 

76 

1.14 

29 

e 

0.36 

9.25 

h 

4.92 

125 

0.35 

9 

4.72 

120 

2.72 

69 

2.0 

51 

= 

= 

4.72 

120 

= = 

3.94 

100 

2.32 

59 

3.94 

100 

1.61 

41 

d 

Door cutouts require a minimum 

distance between the center of the 

circuit breaker and the door hinge 

point d ≥ 3.94 in (100 mm) + (h x 5) 

Extended Rotary Handle GV7AP01, GV7AP02 

0.36 

9.25 

60 

0.35 

9 

I 

0 

= 

= 

2.95 

75 

l 

60 

= 

2.95 

75 

= 

l: 7.28 in (185 mm) minimum, 23.62 in (600 mm) maximum. 

The shaft of the extended rotary handle GV7AP01 or GV7AP02 must be cut to length: l - 4.96 in (126 mm) 


inches 

mm 

56 


10/02

GV2 WIRING DIAGRAMS 


Wiring Diagrams 

GV2ME GV2P Current Limiter GV1L3 

2/T1 

4/T2 

6/T3 

2/T1 

4/T2 

6/T3 

1/L1 

3/L2 

5/L3 

1/L1 

3/L2 

5/L3 

1/L1 

3/L2 

5/L3 

Front Mounting Add-on Contact Blocks 


GV2AE1 GV2AE11 GV2AE20 

or 

Side Mounting Add-on Contact Blocks 

Instantaneous Auxiliary Contact and Fault Signalling Contacts 

GV2AD0110 GV2AD0101 GV2AD1010 GV2AD1001 


GV2AN11 GV2AN20 GV2AM11 

Voltage Trips 

GV2AU GV2AS GVAX••• 

E1 

E2 

D2 

C2 

D1 

C1 

D1 

D2 

(62) 

32 

44 

(74) 

(64) 

34 

44 

(74) 

05 

(61) 

31 

43 

(73) 

(63) 

33 

43 

(73) 

08 

06 

96 95 

54 

53 

96 95 

52 51 

98 

97 

54 

53 

98 

97 

52 

51 

14 

13 

12 11 

14 

13 

22 21 

14 

13 

24 

23 

Use of Fault Signalling Contact and Short-circuit Signalling Contact 

GV2AM11 

GV2AD10 

Short-circuit 

signalling 

Trip 

signalling 

N/C or N/O 

Start-Stop Contact 


57




Motor Circuit Breakers 

GV3M 

Auxiliary Contact Blocks 

GV1A01 GV1A02 GV1A03 GV1A05 GV1A06 GV1A07 

Fault Signalling Contacts 

GV3A08 

GV3A09 

96 95 

98 

97 

14 

13 

22 21 

14 

13 

24 

23 

14 

13 

24 

23 

32 31 

14 

13 

24 

23 

34 

33 

14 

13 

24 

23 

34 

33 

14 

13 

24 

23 

32 31 

2/T1 1/L1 

4/T2 3/L2 

6/T3 5/L3 

Voltage Trips 

GV3B 

GV3D 

D1 

U 

D2 

C1 

C2 


Motor controllers GV7R 

Add-on auxiliary Contacts GV7AE11, GV7AB11 

1/L1 

3/L2 

5/L3 

11 14 

12 

2/T1 

4/T2 

6/T3 

91 94 

92 

81 84 

82 

21 24 

22 

A self-adhesive label, supplied with the contact, can be affixed to the front face of the starter to allow personalized 

marking according to the function of the contact or contacts. 

Electric Trips GV7AU••• GV7AS••• GV7AD111, AD112 

D1 

D4 

C1 

C2 

98 97 

50 ms 

98 97 

50 ms 

– KA1 

13 

14 

98 97 

50 ms 

23 

24 

– KA1 

21 

22 

– KA1 

– KA1 

A1 

A2 

B1 

– KM1 

A1 

A2 

58 


10/02


Indexed Catalog Numbers 

DE1DS4091 16 

GK2AF01 13 

GV1F03 13 

GV1G02 13 

GV1G09 13 

GV1G10 13 

GV1K01 16 

GV1K02 16 

GV1K03 16 

GV1L3 11 

GV1V01 16 

GV1V02 16 

GV2AF01 13 

GV2AF02 13 

GV2AF3 13 

GV2AF4 13 

GV2AK00 11 

GV2AM11 10 

GV2AP01 13 

GV2AP02 13 

GV2E01 15 

GV2E02 15 

GV2G05 13 

GV2G245 13 

GV2G254 13 

GV2G272 13 

GV2G345 13 

GV2G354 13 

GV2G445 13 

GV2G454 13 

GV2G472 13 

GV2G554 13 

GV2K011 15 

GV2K021 15 

GV2K031 15 

GV2K04 15 

GV2MC01 15 

GV2MC02 15 

GV2MC03 15 

GV2ME01 9 

GV2ME02 9 

GV2ME03 9 

GV2ME04 9 

GV2ME05 9 

GV2ME06 9 

GV2ME07 9 

GV2ME08 9 

GV2ME10 9 

GV2ME14 9 

GV2ME16 9 

GV2ME20 9 

GV2ME21 9 

GV2ME22 9 

GV2ME32 9 

GV2MP01 15 

GV2MP02 15 

GV2MP03 15 

GV2MP04 15 

GV2N01 15 

GV2P01 9 

GV2P02 9 

GV2P03 9 

GV2P04 9 

GV2P05 9 

GV2P06 9 

GV2P07 9 

GV2P08 9 

GV2P10 9 

GV2P14 9 

GV2P16 9 

GV2P20 9 

GV2P21 9 

GV2P22 9 

GV2P32 9 

GV2SN13 15 

GV2SN14 15 

GV2SN15 15 

GV2SN17 15 

GV2SN23 15 

GV2SN24 15 

GV2SN25 15 

GV2SN27 15 

GV2SN33 15 

GV2SN34 15 

GV2SN35 15 

GV2SN37 15 

GV2V01 15 

GV2V03 13 

GV3A01 16 

GV3A02 16 

GV3A03 16 

GV3A05 16 

GV3A06 16 

GV3A07 16 

GV3A08 16 

GV3A09 16 

GV3B11 16 

GV3B22 16 

GV3B38 16 

GV3CE01 16 

GV3D11 16 

GV3D22 16 

GV3D38 16 

GV3ME06 9 

GV3ME07 9 

GV3ME08 9 

GV3ME10 9 

GV3ME14 9 

GV3ME20 9 

GV3ME25 9 

GV3ME40 9 

GV3ME63 9 

GV7AB11 18 

GV7AC01 17 

GV7AC021 17 

GV7AC022 17 

GV7AC03 17 

GV7AC04 17 

GV7AC05 17 

GV7AC06 17 

GV7AD111 19 

GV7AD112 19 

GV7AE11 18 

GV7AP01 21 

GV7AP02 21 

GV7AP03 21 

GV7AP04 21 

GV7AP05 21 

GV7AS055 19 

GV7AS107 19 

GV7AS207 19 

GV7AS387 19 

GV7AS525 19 

GV7AU055 19 

GV7AU107 19 

GV7AU207 19 

GV7AU387 19 

GV7AU525 19 

GV7RE100 9 

GV7RE150 9 

GV7RE20 9 

GV7RE220 9 

GV7RE25 9 

GV7RE40 9 

GV7RE50 9 

GV7RE80 9 

GV7RS100 9 

GV7RS150 9 

GV7RS20 9 

GV7RS220 9 

GV7RS25 9 

GV7RS40 9 

GV7RS50 9 

GV7RS80 9 

GV7V01 21 

GVAD0101 10 

GVAD0110 10 

GVAD1001 10 

GVAD1010 10 

GVAE1 10 

GVAE11 10 

GVAE20 10 

GVAN11 10 

GVAN20 10 

GVAP025 11 

GVAP026 11 

GVAP055 11 

GVAP056 11 

GVAP107 11 

GVAP115 11 

GVAP116 11 

GVAP125 11 

GVAP207 11 

GVAP225 11 

GVAP226 11 

GVAP385 11 

GVAP386 11 

GVAP415 11 

GVAP416 11 

GVAP505 11 

GVAX115 11 

GVAX116 11 

GVAX225 11 

GVAX226 11 

GVAX385 11 

GVAX386 11 

GVAX415 11 

LA9D40959 16 

LA9D92 13 

LA9E07 13 

LA9LB920 11 

LAD31 13 

LAD311 13 

LS1D30 11 

LS1D303 11 

LS1D32 11 

LS1D323 11 

LS1DT32 11 

59 


09/02

Square D Company 

8001 Highway 64 East 

Knightdale, NC 27545 

1-888-SquareD 

(1-888-778-2733) 

www.SquareD.com 

Schneider Canada Inc. 

19 Waterman Avenue, 

M4B 1 Y2 

Toronto, Ontario 

1-800-565-6699 

www.schneider-electric.ca 

Catalog No. 2520CT0001R9/02 October 2002 © 2001–2002 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 

Replaces 2520CT0001 dated 05/01.

TeSys D-Line Contactors, 

Enclosed Starters, 

Overload Relays, and Accessories 

File 8502 

D-Line 

CONTENTS 

Schneider Electric Brands 

Description 

Page 

CONTENTS 

General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 

Description Contactors 

Page 

General Characteristics Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 80 

Contactors Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 

Characteristics Auxiliary Contacts, . . . Timers, . . . . . . . and . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 . 80 

Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 . 88 

Auxiliary D-line Voltage Contacts, Code Timers, Table. . and . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 115 

Selection Replacement . . . . Coils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 106 

Replacement Dimensions and Coils Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 122 

Schematics Dimensions . and . . . Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 126 

Schematics Overload Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 

Overload Characteristics Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 

Characteristics Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 134 

Selection Dimensions, . . . Mounting, . . . . . . . . . and . . . Schematics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 134 

Dimensions, Plate-mounted Mounting, Starters and . . Schematics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 138 

Plate-mounted Wye-delta Starters Starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 146 

Enclosed Wye-delta Contactors Starters . . and . . . . Starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 

Enclosed Horsepower Contactors Rated Devices and Starters for North American Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 

Horsepower Kilowatt Rated Rated Devices Devices for International for North American Applications. Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 159 

Kilowatt Cross Reference Rated Devices List . . for . . International . . . . . . . . . . . Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 159

78 


11/02

TeSys D-Line Contactors, and Starters 




The D-line contactors and overload relays are the largest selling line of contactors and starters in the 

world. They offer high reliability with long mechanical and electrical life and the most complete line of 

accessories in the industry. 

Contactor Ratings 

• D-line contactors and overload relays are available in 11 contactor ratings for the USA market for 

inductive motor applications up to 150 full-load amps and resistive loads up to 200 A. They offer 

motor control and overload protection for motors rated up to 100 hp at 480 Vac or 125 hp at 600 Vac. 

• 3-pole and 4-pole contactor versions available. 

• All contactors include built-in auxiliary contacts. 

• All screw connections have IP20 rated touch-safe terminals with both North American and 

International terminal markings. 

• D-line contactors can be panel mounted with screws or DIN rail mounted. 

Easily Installed Accessories 

• Auxiliary contact blocks with serrated wiping action 

• Front mount dust tight auxiliary contact blocks 

• Pneumatic time delay blocks 

• Transient voltage surge suppressors 

• Interface modules and electronic timers 

• Mechanical latching blocks 

Control Circuit Flexibility 

The D-line contactors are available with ac or dc operating coils. Several devices utilize a lowconsumption 

dc coil with built-in transient suppression for operation with a low-level dc signal from a 

computer or PLC without need for an interposing relay. 

Overload Relays 

Class 10 or Class 20 bimetallic overload relays are available up to 140 A. They are bimetallic ambient 

compensated and are available with or without single-phase sensitivity for phase unbalance and phase 

loss protection. New solid state overload relays are available for 90 to 150 A applications. Both bimetallic 

and solid-state overload relays include the following features: 

• Isolated N.C. trip contact and N.O. alarm contacts. 

• Manual or Automatic reset function. 

• Tamper-resistant window for FLA settings. 

• Test trip button. 


79


Characteristics of Type LC•D and LP•D Contactors 

Characteristics of Type LC\bD and LP\bD Contactors 

Environment 

Type 

LC1D09 LC1D12 LC1D18 LC1D25 

Rated insulation voltage (Vi) 

Rated impulse withstand voltage 

(Vimp) 

UL/CSA V 690 690 690 690 

To IEC 60947-4-1, overvoltage 

category III, degree of pollution: 3 

V 1000 1000 1000 1000 

Conforming to UL, CSA V 600 600 600 600 

Conforming to IEC 60947 kV 6 6 6 6 


Meets the essential requirements of the 

LV & EMC directives 

IEC 60947-1, 60947-4-1, NFC 63-110, VDE 0660, BS 5424, JEM 1038., EN 60947-1, 

EN 60947-4-1. 

Approvals 

E164862 

CCN NLDX 

LR43364 

Class 3211 04 

ASE, UL, CSA, DEMKO, NEMKO, SEMKO, FI, Conforming to SNCF, Sichere Trennung 

recommendations 

Power connections Protection against direct finger contact IP 2X 

Degree of protection f Conforming to VDE 0106 

Coil connections 

Protection against direct finger contact IP 2X 

Protective treatment Conforming to IEC 60068 “TH” 

Ambient air temperature around 

the device 

Storage 

Operation at 80 to 110% nominal control voltage 

Permissible at nominal control voltage 

- 60 to + 80 °C (-76 to +176 °F) 

- 5 to + 60 °C (+23 to +140 °F) 

- 40 to + 70 °C (-40 to +158 °F) 

Maximum operating altitude Without derating 3000m (8900 ft.) 

Operating positions Without derating ± 30° possible, in relation to normal vertical mounting plane 

Flame resistance 

Shock resistance q 

1/2 sine wave = 11ms 

Vibration resistance q 

5 to 300 Hz 

Pole characteristics 

Conforming to UL 94 V 1 V1 V1 V1 

Conforming to IEC 60695-2-1 960° 960° 960° 960° 

Contactor open 10 g 10 g 10 g 8 g 

Contactor closed 15 g 15 g 15 g 15 g 

Contactor open 2 g 2 g 2 g 2 g 

Contactor closed 4 g 4 g 4 g 4 g 

Number of poles 3 3 or 4 3 3 or 4 

Rated operational current (Ie) 

In ac-3, θ ≤ 55°C (131°F) A 9 12 18 25 

In ac-1, θ ≤ 40°C (104°F) A 25 25 32 40 

Rated operational voltage (Ve) Up to V 690 690 690 690 

Frequency limits Of the operational current Hz 25 to 400 25 to 400 25 to 400 25 to 400 

Rated thermal current (Ith) θ ≤ 40°C (104°F) A 25 25 32 40 

Rated making capacity (1 rms) Conforming to IEC 60947-4 A 250 250 300 450 

220-380-415-440 V 

250 250 300 450 

Rated breaking capacity (1 rms) Conforming to IEC 60947 500 V A 175 175 250 400 

Permissible short time rating 

from cold state, no current 

flowing 

for previous 15 minutes, 

at θ ≤ 40 °C (104 °F) 

Short-circuit protection 

690 V 85 85 120 180 

For 1 s A 210 210 240 380 

For 10 s A 105 105 145 240 

For 1 min A 61 61 84 120 

For 10 min A 30 30 40 50 

By circuit breaker 

By fuses 

Select circuit breaker in accordance with NEC and local codes 

Maximum 400% of motor full load Amps 

Average impedance per pole A Ith and 50 Hz mΩ 2.5 2.5 2.5 2 

Power dissipation per pole for the 

above operational currents 

f 

q 

AC-3 W 0.20 0.36 0.8 1.25 

AC-1 W 1.56 1.56 2.5 3.2 

Protection provided for the cable c.s.a. indicated on page 86 and for cable connections. 

In the least favorable direction, without change of contact state (coil supplied at Ve). 

80 


11/02



Continued from previous page. 

LC1D32 LC1D38 LC1D40 LC1D50 LC1D65 LC1D80 LC1D95 LC1D115 LC1D150 

LP1D40 LP1D50 LP1D65 LP1D80 

690 690 690 690 690 690 690 690 690 

1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 

600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 

6 6 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 

IEC 60947-1, 60947-4-1, NFC 63-110, VDE 0660, BS 5424, JEM 1038., EN 60947-1, EN 60947-4-1. 

ASE, UL, CSA, DEMKO, NEMKO, SEMKO, FI, 

Conforming to SNCF, Sichere Trennung 

recommendations 

- 

UL 508, CSA C22.2 No.14 

Protection against direct finger contact IP 2X 

Protection against direct finger contact IP 2X except LP1D40 to LP1D80 

“TH” 

- 60 to + 80 °C (-76 to +176 °F) 

- 5 to + 55 °C (+23 to +131 °F) 

- 40 to + 70 °C (-40 to +158 °F) 

3000m (8900 ft.) 

± 30° possible, in relation to normal vertical mounting plane 

V 1 V 1 V 1 V 1 V 1 V 1 V 1 V 1 V 1 

960° 960° 960° 960° 960° 960° 960° 960° 960° 

8 g 8 g 8 g 8 g 8 g 8 g 8 g 6 g 6 g 

15 g 10 g 10 g 10 g 10 g 10 g 10 g 15 g 15 g 

2 g 2 g 2 g 2 g 2 g 2 g 2 g 2 g 2 g 

4 g 4 g 3 g 3 g 3 g 3 g 3 g 4 g 4 g 

3 3 3 or 4 3 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 3 or 4 3 

32 38 40 50 65 80 95 115 150 

50 50 60 80 80 125 125 200 200 

690 690 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 

25 to 400 25 to 400 25 to 400 25 to 400 25 to 400 25 to 400 25 to 400 25 to 400 25 to 400 

50 50 60 80 80 125 125 200 200 

550 – 800 900 1000 1100 – – – 

550 – 800 900 1000 1100 – – – 

450 – 800 900 1000 1100 – – – 

180 – 400 400 630 640 – – – 

430 430 720 810 900 990 1100 1100 1400 

260 310 320 400 520 640 800 950 1200 

138 150 165 208 260 320 400 550 580 

60 60 72 84 110 135 135 250 250 

Select circuit breaker in accordance with NEC and local codes 

Maximum 400% of motor full load Amps 

2 2 1.5 1.5 1 0.8 0.8 0.6 0.6 

2 2 2.4 3.7 4.2 5.1 7.2 7.9 13.5 

5 5 5.4 9.6 6.4 12.5 12.5 24 24 


81



Control Circuit Characteristics 

Type LC1D09 LC1D12 LC1D18 LC1D25 

Rated control circuit voltage (Vc) 50 or 60 Hz V 21 to 660 

Control voltage limits 

(θ ≤ 55 °C [131 °F]) 

Average consumption 

at 20 °C (68 °F) and at Vc 

Operational 

50 or 60 Hz coils 

Drop-out 

50/60 Hz coils 

50 Hz ac 

60 Hz ac 

Operational 

Drop-out 

Inrush 

Sealed 

Inrush 

Sealed 

0.8 to 1.1 Vac 

0.3 to 0.6 Vac 

0.85 to 1.1 Vac at 60 Hz 

0.3 to 0.6 Vac 

50 Hz coil VA – – – – 

Cos ϕ 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 

50/60 Hz coil VA 70 70 70 70 

50 Hz coil VA – – – – 

Cos ϕ 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 

50/60 Hz coil VA 7 7 7 7 

60 Hz coil VA – – – – 

Cos ϕ 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 

50/60 Hz coil VA 70 70 70 100 

60 Hz coil VA – – – – 

Cos ϕ 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 

50/60 Hz coil VA 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 

Heat dissipation 50/60 Hz W 2 to 3 2 to 3 2 to 3 2.5 to 3.5 

Operating time 

Mechanical durability in millions of 

operating cycles 

Maximum operating rate at ambient 

temperature ≤ 55 °C (131 °F) 

Closing “C” c ms 12 to 22 12 to 22 12 to 22 15 to 24 

Opening “O” q ms 4 to 19 4 to 19 4 to 19 5 to 19 

50 or 60 Hz coil – – – – 

50/60 Hz coil at 50 Hz 15 15 15 15 

In operating cycles per hour 3600 3600 3600 3600 

c 

q 

The closing time “C” is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to initial contact of the main poles. 

The opening time “O” is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched off to the moment the mains poles separate. 

82 


11/02



Continued from previous page. 

LC1D32 LC1D38 LC1D40 LC1D50 LC1D65 LC1D80 LC1D95 LC1D115 LC1D150 

21 to 660 24 to 660 24 to 500 

0.8 to 1.1 Vac 0.85 to 1.1 Vac – 

0.3 to 0.6 Vac 0.3 to 0.5 Vc – 

0.85 to 1.1 Vac at 60 Hz 0.8 to 1.15 Vac at 50/60 Hz 

0.3 to 0.6 Vac 0.3 to 0.5 Vac 

– – 200 200 200 200 200 300 – 

0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.8 0.9 

70 70 245 245 245 245 245 280-350 280-350 

– – 20 20 20 20 20 22 – 

0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.9 

7 7 26 26 26 26 26 2 to 18 2 to 18 

– – 220 220 220 220 220 300 – 

0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.8 0.9 

70 70 245 245 245 245 245 280-350 280-350 

– – 22 22 22 22 22 22 – 

0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.9 

7.5 7.5 26 26 26 26 26 6 6 




– – 16 16 16 10 10 8 – 

15 15 6 6 6 4 4 8 8 

3600 3600 3600 3600 3600 3600 3600 2400 1200 


83



DC Control Circuit Characteristics 

Type of contactor 

LC1 

D09 to D38 

LP1 

D12 and D25 

LC1 or LP1 

D40 to D65 

LC1 or 

LP1D80 

LC1D115 & 

LC1D150 

Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) dc V 12 to 440 12 to 440 24 to 440 

Rated insulation voltage 

Control voltage limits 

Average consumption at 20 °C and at Uc 

Average operating time at Uc (1) 


Conforming to UL, CSA V 600 

Operational 

Drop-out 

dc 

Standard coil 

Wide range coil – 

0.7 to 1.25 Uc 

at 60 °C 

0.1 to 0.25 Uc 

at 60 °C 

0.8 to 1.1 Uc 

@ 55 °C 

0.7 to 1.25 Uc 

@ 55 °C 

0.85 to 1.1 Uc at 55 °C 

0.75 to 1.2 Uc at 55 °C – 

0.1 to 0.3 Uc at 55 °C 

0.75 to 1.2 Uc 

at 55 °C 

0.15 to 0.4 Uc 

at 55 °C 

Inrush W 5.4 9/11 22 22 270 to 365 

Sealed W 5.4 9/11 22 22 2.4 to 5.1 

Closing “C” ms 55 52 - 64 85 to 110 95 to 130 20 to 35 

Opening “O” ms 20 8 - 14 20 to 35 20 to 35 40 to 75 

Note: The arcing time depends on the circuit switched by the poles. For normal three-phase applications, the arcing time is usually less than 10 ms. 

The load is isolated from the supply after a time equal to the sum of the opening time and the arcing time. 

Time constant (L/R) ms 28 42 65 75 25 

Mechanical life at Uc In millions of operating cycles 30 30 20 20 8 

Maximum operating rate 

at ambient temperature ≤ 60 °C 

In operating cycles per hour 3600 3600 3600 3600 1200 

Low Consumption Control Circuit Characteristics 




Maximum voltage Of the control circuit on dc 250 

Average consumption dc 

at 20 °C and at Uc 

Operating time (1) at Uc and at 20 °C 

Voltage limits (θ ≤ 60 °C) 

of the control circuit 

Wide range coil 

(0.7 to 1.25 Uc) 

Inrush W 2.4 

Sealed W 2.4 

Closing “C” ms 70 

Opening “O” ms 25 

Operational 

Drop-out 

Time constant (L/R) ms 40 

Mechanical life In millions of operating cycles 30 

Maximum operating rate At ambient temperature ≤ 60 °C ops/h 3600 




0.7 to 1.25 Uc 

0.1 to 0.3 Uc 

(1) Operating times depend on the type of contactor electromagnet and its control mode. 

The closing time “C” is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to initial contact of the main poles. The opening time “O” is measured from the moment the coil supply is 

switched off to the moment the main poles separate. 

84 


11/02



Contactor Integral Auxiliary Contact Characteristics 

Linked contacts conforming to draft 

standard IEC 60947-4-5 

Each contactor has two N.O. and N.C. contacts mechanically linked on the same movable contact holder. 

Mirror contact 

The N.C. contact on each contactor represents the state of the power contacts and can be connected to a PREVENTA safety module 

Rated operational voltage (Ue) Up to V 690 



Conventional thermal current (Ith) For ambient temperature ≤ 60 °C A 10 

Operating current frequency Hz 25 to 400 

Minimum switching capacity 

U min. V 17 

I min. mA 5 

Short-circuit protection Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 gG fuse: 10 A 

Rated making capacity Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1, I rms A ac: 140; dc: 250 

Short-time rating 

Permissible for 

1 s A 100 

500 ms A 120 

100 ms A 140 

Insulation resistance MΩ > 10 

Non-overlap time Guaranteed between N.C. and N.O. contacts ms 1.5 on energizing and on de-energizing 

Contact operating power 


ac supply categories AC-14 and AC-15 

Electrical life (valid for up to 3600 operating cycles/hour) 

on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet: 

making power (cos ϕ 0.7) = 10 times the power broken 

(cos ϕ 0.4). 

dc supply category DC-13 

Electrical life (valid for up to 1200 operating cycles/hour) 

on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet, 

without economy resistor, the time constant increasing 

with the load. 

V 24 48 115 230 400 440 600 V 24 48 125 250 440 

1 million operating cycles VA 60 120 280 560 960 1050 1440 W 96 76 76 76 44 

3 million operating cycles VA 16 32 80 160 280 300 420 W 48 38 38 32 – 

10 million operating cycles VA 4 8 20 40 70 80 100 W 14 12 12 – – 

AC-15 

DC-13 

1 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

1 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

125 V 

48 V 

24 V 

3 

3 

2 

2 

250 V 

1 

0.8 

0.7 

0.6 

0.5 

0.4 

0.3 

0.2 

1 

0.8 

0.7 

0.6 

0.5 

0.4 

0.3 

0.2 

440 V 

0.1 

0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 

0.6 0.8 1 2 3 4 

0.5 0.7 0.9 

6 8 

5 7 

Current broken in A 

10 

9 

0.1 

0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 

0.6 0.8 1 2 3 4 

0.5 0.7 0.9 

6 8 

5 7 


10 

9 


85



Power Circuit Connections 

Type 

Cabling 

(for screw clamp terminals) 

Bus bar connection 

(for bus bar or 

ring tongue terminals) 

Stranded cable without cable end 

Stranded cable with cable end 

Solid cable without cable end 

Connector type 

LC1D09 

LC1D12 

Screw clamp terminals 

LC1D18 

1 conductor AWG 18-10 18-8 18-8 

2 conductors AWG 18-10 18-8 18-8 

LC1D25 

1 conductor mm 2 1/4 1.5/6 1.5/10 

2 conductors mm 2 1/4 1.5/6 1.5/6 

1 conductor AWG 18-10 18-3 18-3 


1 conductor mm 2 1/4 1/6 1/6 

2 conductors mm 2 1/2.5 1/4 1/4 

1 conductor AWG 18-8 18-8 18-8 


1 conductor mm 2 1/4 1.5/6 1.5/6 

2 conductors mm 2 1/4 1.5/6 1.5/6 

Phillips head type N° 2 N° 2 N° 2 

Screwdriver Ø Ø 6 Ø 6 Ø 6 

Hexagon spanner – – – 


15 lb.-in. 

1.7 N•m 

15 lb.-in. 

1.7 N•m 

Connection by bus bar or ring tongue terminals 

Bar c.s.a. – – – 

Lug external Ø mm 8 8 10 

Screw Ø mm M3.5 M3.5 M4 


Screwdriver Ø Ø 6 Ø 6 Ø 6 

23 lb.-in. 

2.5 N•m 

Flexible cabling 

(for spring terminals) 

Hexagon spanner – – – 



15 lb.-in. 

1.7 N•m 

Spring terminals 

15 lb.-in. 

1.7 N•m 

1 conductor AWG 14 12 12 

2 conductors AWG 14 12 12 

1 conductor mm 2 2.5 4 4 

2 conductors mm 2 2.5 4 4 

15 lb.-in. 

1.7 N•m 

Control Circuit Connections 

Type 

Connection by cable 


Cabling 

Stranded cable without cable end 

Stranded cable with cable end 

Solid cable without cable end 

LC1D09 

LC1D12 

LC1D18 

LC1D25 

1 conductor AWG (mm 2 ) 18 - 10 (1/4) 18 - 10 (1/4) 18 - 10 (1/4) 

2 conductors AWG (mm 2 ) 18 - 10 (1/4) 18 - 10 (1/4) 18 - 10 (1/4) 


2 conductors AWG (mm 2 ) 18 - 12 (1/2.5) 18 - 12 (1/2.5) 18 - 12 (1/2.5) 


2 conductors AWG (mm 2 ) 18 - 10 (1/4) 18 - 10 (1/4) 18 - 10 (1/4) 


Screwdriver Ø mm Ø 6 Ø 6 Ø 6 



15 lb.-in. 

1.7 N•m 

15 lb.-in. 

1.7 N•m 

Lug external Ø mm 8 8 8 

Screw Ø mm M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 


Screwdriver Ø 


3/16 in. 

Ø 6 

15 lb.-in. 

1.7 N•m 

3/16 in. 

Ø 6 

15 lb.-in. 

1.7 N•m 

17 lb.-in. 

1.7 N•m 

3/16 in. 

Ø 6 

15 lb.-in. 

1.7 N•m 

86 


11/02



Power Circuit Connections (continued) 

LC1D32 

LC1D38 

LC1D40 

LP1D40 

LC1D50 

LP1D50 

q One of each size range. 

Box lug terminals 

LC1D65 

LP1D65 

LC1D80 

LP1D80 

LC1D95 LC1D115 LC1D150 

LA9D11560• terminals 

14-6 – 10-3 10-3 10-3 10-2 – 8-250 mcm 8-250 mcm 

14-6 – 10-4 10-4 10-4 10-4 – 8-1+8-250 mcm q 8-1+8-250 mcm q 

2.5/10 2.5/10 2.5/25 2.5/25 2.5/25 4/50 4/50 10/120 10/120 

2.5/10 2.5/10 2.5/16 2.5/16 2.5/16 4/25 4/25 10/120+ 10/50 q 10/120+ 10/50 q 

18-3/0 – 10-4 10-4 10-4 10-4 – – – 

14-2 – 12-2 12-2 12-2 12-2 – – – 

1/10 1/10 2.5/25 2.5/25 2.5/25 4/50 4/50 10/120 10/120 

1.5/6 1.5/6 2.5/10 2.5/10 2.5/10 4/16 4/16 10/120+ 10/50 q 10/120+ 10/50 q 

14-8 – 10-3 10-3 10-3 10-3 – 8-250 mcm 8-250 mcm 

10-8 – 10-6 10-6 10-6 10-2 – 8-0+ 8-250mcm q 8-0+8-250 mcm q 

1.5/10 1.5/10 2.5/25 2.5/25 2.5/25 4/50 4/50 10/120 10/120 

2.5/10 2.5/10 2.5/16 2.5/16 2.5/16 4/25 4/25 10/120+ 10/50 q 10/120+ 10/50 q 

N° 2 N° 2 – – – – – – – 

Ø 6 Ø 6 Ø 6 to Ø 8 Ø 6 to Ø 8 Ø 6 to Ø 8 Ø 6 to Ø 8 Ø 6 to Ø 8 – – 

– – 4 mm 4 mm 4 mm 4 mm 4 mm 4 mm 4 mm 

23 lb.-in. 

2.5 N•m 

23 lb.-in. 

2.5 N•m 

45 lb.-in. 

5 N•m 


45 lb.-in. 

5 N•m 

45 lb.-in. 

5 N•m 

100 lb.-in. 

11.3 N•m 

100 lb.-in. 

11.3 N•m 

100 lb.-in. 

11.3 N•m 

– – – – – 3 x 16 3 x 16 5 x 25 5 x 25 

10 10 13 16 16 17 17 25 25 

M4 M4 M5 M6 M6 M6 M6 M8 M8 

N° 2 N° 2 N° 2 N° 3 N° 3 – – – – 

3/16 in. 

Ø 6 mm 

3/16 in. 

Ø 6 mm 

Ø 8 mm Ø 8 mm Ø 8 mm Ø 8 mm Ø 8 mm – – 

– – – – – 10 mm 10 mm 13 mm 13 mm 

20 lb.-in. 

7.5 N•m 

Spring terminals 

20 lb.-in. 

7.5 N•m 

53 lb.-in. 

6 N•m 

71 lb.-in. 

6 N•m 

71 lb.-in. 

6 N•m 

71 lb.-in. 

8 N•m 

71 lb.-in. 

8 N•m 

124 lb.-in. 

14 N•m 

12 12 – – – – – – – 

12 12 – – – – – – – 

4 4 – – – – – – – 

4 4 – – – – – – – 

100 lb.-in. 

11.3 N•m 

124 lb.-in. 

14 N•m 

Control Circuit Connections (continued) 

LC1D32 

Connection by cable 


LC1D38 

LC1D40 

LP1D40 

LC1D50 

LP1D50 

LC1D65 

LP1D65 

LC1D80 

LP1D80 

LC1D95 LC1D115 LC1D150 

1/4 18 - 10 (1/4) 18 - 10 (1/4) 18 - 10 (1/4) 18 - 10 (1/4) 18 - 10 (1/4) 18 - 10 (1/4) 18 - 12 (1/2.5) 18 - 12 (1/2.5) 

1/4 18 - 10 (1/4) 18 - 10 (1/4) 18 - 10 (1/4) 18 - 10 (1/4) 18 - 10 (1/4) 18 - 10 (1/4) 18 - 12 (1/2.5) 18 - 12 (1/2.5) 

1/4 18 - 10 (1/4) 18 - 10 (1/4) 18 - 10 (1/4) 18 - 10 (1/4) 18 - 10 (1/4) 18 - 10 (1/4) 18 - 12 (1/2.5) 18 - 12 (1/2.5) 

18 - 12 (1/2.5) 18 - 12 (1/2.5) 18 - 12 (1/2.5) 18 - 12 (1/2.5) 18 - 12 (1/2.5) 18 - 12 (1/2.5) 18 - 12 (1/2.5) 18 - 12 (1/2.5) 18 - 12 (1/2.5) 

1/4 18 - 10 (1/4) 18 - 10 (1/4) 18 - 10 (1/4) 18 - 10 (1/4) 18 - 10 (1/4) 18 - 10 (1/4) 18 - 12 (1/2.5) 18 - 12 (1/2.5) 

1/4 18 - 10 (1/4) 18 - 10 (1/4) 18 - 10 (1/4) 18 - 10 (1/4) 18 - 10 (1/4) 18 - 10 (1/4) 18 - 12 (1/2.5) 18 - 12 (1/2.5) 

N° 2 N° 2 N° 2 N° 2 N° 2 N° 2 N° 2 N° 2 N° 2 

Ø 6 Ø 6 Ø 6 Ø 6 Ø 6 Ø 6 Ø 6 Ø 6 Ø 6 

15 lb.-in. 

1.7 N•m 

15 lb.-in. 

1.7 N•m 

15 lb.-in. 

1.7 N•m 


15 lb.-in. 

1.7 N•m 

15 lb.-in. 

1.7 N•m 

15 lb.-in. 

1.7 N•m 

15 lb.-in. 

1.7 N•m 

15 lb.-in. 

1.7 N•m 

8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 

M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 

N° 2 N° 2 N° 2 N° 2 N° 2 N° 2 N° 2 N° 2 N° 2 

3/16 in. 

Ø 6 

15 lb.-in. 

1.7 N•m 

3/16 in. 

Ø 6 

15 lb.-in. 

1.7 N•m 

3/16 in. 

Ø 6 

15 lb.-in. 

1.7 N•m 

3/16 in. 

Ø 6 

15 lb.-in. 

1.7 N•m 

3/16 in. 

Ø 6 

15 lb.-in. 

1.7 N•m 

3/16 in. 

Ø 6 

15 lb.-in. 

1.7 N•m 

3/16 in. 

Ø 6 

15 lb.-in. 

1.7 N•m 

3/16 in. 

Ø 6 

15 lb.-in. 

1.7 N•m 

15 lb.-in. 

1.7 N•m 

3/16 in. 

Ø 6 

15 lb.-in. 

1.7 N•m 


87


Selection of Contactors for Motor Control 


The tables below show the kilowatt ratings (for international applications) and horsepower ratings (for 

North American applications) of contactors for motor control. 

AC and DC Control Circuit — 3-pole Contactors with Touch-safe Terminals for Power Cabling (AC-3 category) 

Maximum horsepower ratings 

1-phase 50/60 Hz 

115/ 

120 V 

230/ 

240 V 


200/ 

208 V 

220/ 

240 V 

460/ 

480 V 

575 V 

600 V 

Maximum 

Inductive 

Current in 

AC-3 

Category 

600 V 

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in 

category AC-3 

220 V 

230 V 

380 V 

400 V 

415 V 440 V 500 V 

660 V 

690 V 1000 V 

Rated 

Operating 

Current in 

AC-3 up to 

440 V 

Instantaneous 

Auxiliary 

Contacts 

Catalog 

Number 

p f 

Weight 

lb (kg) 

HP HP HP HP HP HP A kW kW kW kW kW kW kW A N.O. N.C. 

0.5 1 2 2 5 7.5 9 2.2 4 4 4 5.5 5.5 – 9 1 1 LC1D09•• 0.71 (0.320) 

1 2 3 3 7.5 10 12 3 5.5 5.5 5.5 7.5 7.5 – 12 1 1 LC1D12•• 0.72 (0.325) 

1 3 5 5 10 15 18 4 7.5 9 9 10 10 – 18 1 1 LC1D18•• 0.73 (0.330) 

2 3 7.5 7.5 15 20 25 5.5 11 11 11 15 15 – 25 1 1 LC1D25•• 0.82 (0.370) 

2 5 10 10 20 30 32 7.5 15 15 15 18.5 18.5 – 32 1 1 LC1D32•• 0.83 (0.375) 

Not for North American applications c 38 9 18.5 18.5 18.5 18.5 18.5 – 38 1 1 LC1D38•• 0.84 (0.380) 

3 5 10 10 30 30 40 11 18.5 22 22 22 30 22 40 1 1 LC1D40•• 3.11 (1.400) 

3 7.5 15 15 40 40 50 15 22 25 30 30 33 30 50 1 1 LC1D50•• 3.11 (1.400) 

5 10 20 20 50 50 65 18.5 30 37 37 37 37 37 65 1 1 LC1D65•• 3.11 (1.400) 

7.5 15 25 30 60 60 80 22 37 45 45 55 45 45 80 1 1 LC1D80•• 3.53 (1.590) 

Not for North American applications c 95 25 45 45 45 55 45 45 95 1 1 LC1D95•• 3.58 (1.610) 

– – 30 40 75 100 115 30 55 59 59 75 80 75 115 1 1 LC1D115•• 5.38 (2.420) 

– – 40 50 100 125 150 40 75 80 80 90 100 90 150 1 1 LC1D150•• 5.42 (2.440) 

f 

p 

c 

For LC1D09 to LC1D38: clip-on mounting on 35 mm DIN rail AM1DP or screw mounting. 

For LC1D40 to LC1D95: clip-on mounting on 35 mm DIN rail AM1DE or 75 mm DIN rail AM1DL or screw mounting. 

For LC1D115 and LC1D150: clip-on mounting on 2 x 35 mm DIN rails AM1DP or screw mounting. 

Use voltage codes on page 115 “Voltage Code Table” to complete catalog number. 

Devices are UL Listed at the same HP ratings as 32 and 80 amp devices, respectively. 

LC1D09•• LC1D65•• LC1D150•• 

88 


11/02





LC1D123•• 

AC and DC Control Circuit — 3-pole Contactors for Spring Terminal Connections (AC-3 category) 



115/ 

120 V 

230/ 

240 V 


200/ 

208 V 

220/ 

240 V 

460/ 

480 V 

575 V 

600 V 

Maximum 

Inductive 

Current in 

AC-3 

Category 

600 V 

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in 

category AC-3 

220 V 

230 V 

380 V 

400 V 

415 V 440 V 500 V 

660 V 

690 V 1000 V 

Rated 

Operating 

Current in 

AC-3 up to 

440 V 

Instantaneous 

Auxiliary 

Contacts 

Catalog 

Number 

p f 

Weight 

lb (kg) 


0.5 1 2 2 5 7.5 9 2.2 4 4 4 5.5 5.5 – 9 1 1 LC1D093•• 0.71 (0.320) 

1 2 3 3 7.5 10 12 3 5.5 5.5 5.5 7.5 7.5 – 12 1 1 LC1D123•• 0.72 (0.325) 

1 3 5 5 10 15 18 4 7.5 9 9 10 10 – 18 1 1 LC1D183•• 0.73 (0.330) 

2 3 7.5 7.5 15 20 25 5.5 11 11 11 15 15 – 25 1 1 LC1D253•• 0.82 (0.370) 

2 5 10 10 20 30 32 7.5 15 15 15 18.5 18.5 – 32 1 1 LC1D323•• 0.83 (0.375) 


f 

p 

c 



Device is UL Listed at the same HP ratings as 32 amp device.. 


89





LC1D150•• 

AC and DC Control Circuit — 3-pole Contactors for Ring-tongue Terminals or Bus Bar Power Connections 

(AC-3 category) 



115/120 

V 

230/ 

240 V 


200/ 

208 V 

220/ 

240 V 

460/ 

480 V 

575 V 

600 V 

Maximum 

Inductive 

Current 

in AC-3 

Category 

600 V 

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 

50/60 Hz in category AC-3 Rated 

Operating 

Current in 

220 V 

230 V 

380 V 

400 V 

415 V 440 V 500 V 

660 V 

690 V 1000 V 

AC-3 up to 

440 V 

Instantaneous 

Auxiliary 

Contacts 

Catalog 

Number 

f p 

Weight 

lb (kg) 


0.5 1 2 2 5 7.5 9 2.2 4 4 4 5.5 5.5 – 9 1 1 LC1D096•• 0.71 (0.320) 

1 2 3 3 7.5 10 12 3 5.5 5.5 5.5 7.5 7.5 – 12 1 1 LC1D126•• 0.72 (0.325) 

1 3 5 5 10 15 18 4 7.5 9 9 10 10 – 18 1 1 LC1D186•• 0.73 (0.330) 

2 3 7.5 7.5 15 20 25 5.5 11 11 11 15 15 – 25 1 1 LC1D256•• 0.82 (0.370) 

2 5 10 10 20 30 32 7.5 15 15 15 18.5 18.5 – 32 1 1 LC1D326•• 0.83 (0.375) 


3 5 10 10 30 30 40 11 18.5 22 22 22 30 22 40 1 1 LC1D406•• 2.93 (1.320) 

3 7.5 15 15 40 40 50 15 22 25 30 30 33 30 50 1 1 LC1D506•• 2.93 (1.320) 

5 10 20 20 50 50 65 18.5 30 37 37 37 37 37 65 1 1 LC1D656•• 2.93 (1.320) 

7.5 15 25 30 60 60 80 22 37 45 45 55 45 45 80 1 1 LC1D806•• 3.55 (1.600) 

Not for North American applications c 95 25 45 45 45 55 45 45 95 1 1 LC1D956•• 3.55 (1.600) 

– – 30 40 75 100 115 30 55 59 59 75 80 75 115 1 1 LC1D1156•• 4.69 (2.110) 

– – 40 50 100 125 150 40 75 80 80 90 100 90 150 1 1 LC1D1506•• 4.69 (2.130) 

f 

p 

c 






AC and DC Control Circuit — 3-pole Contactors for Connection with Slip-on Connectors 

For contactors LC1D09 and LC1D12 only, replace the last digit in the catalog numbers shown in the 

table above (“6”) with a 9. For example, LC1D096•• becomes LC1D099••. These contactors include 

slip-on connectors: UL Recognized E164862 NLDX2, 2 x 6.35 mm (0.25 in.) on the power poles and 

1 x 6.35 mm (0.25 in.) on the coil terminals. 

90 


11/02


Selection of Contactors for Resistive Loads 

Selection of Contactors for Resistive Loads 

AC and DC Control Circuit — 3- or 4-Pole Screw Terminal Connections (AC-1 Category) 

Maximum Current Utilization 

Categories 

Number of 

Poles 

Instantaneous 

Auxiliary Contacts 

Catalog 

Number 

f p 

Weight lb (kg) 

LC1DT20•• 

AC-1 N.O. N.C. N.O. N.C. 

20 

25 

32 

40 

50 

60 

80 

125 

200 

3 0 1 1 LC1D09•• 0.71 (0.320) 

4 0 1 1 LC1DT20•• 0.80 (0.365) 

2 2 1 1 LC1D098•• 0.80 (0.365) 

3 0 1 1 LC1D12•• 0.75 (0.340) 

4 0 1 1 LC1DT25•• 0.80 (0.365) 

2 2 1 1 LC1D128•• 0.80 (0.365) 

3 0 1 1 LC1D18•• 0.79 (0.355) 

4 0 1 1 LC1DT32•• 0.93 (0.425) 

2 2 1 1 LC1DT188•• 0.93 (0.425) 

3 0 1 1 LC1D25•• 0.82 (0.370) 

4 0 1 1 LC1DT40•• 0.93 (0.425) 

2 2 1 1 LC1D258•• 0.93 (0.425) 

3 0 1 1 LC1D32•• 0.83 (0.375) 

3 0 1 1 or q LC1D38•• c 0.84 (0.380) 

3 0 1 1 LC1D40•• 3.11 (1.400) 

4 0 1 1 LC1D40004•• 0.93 (0.425) 

2 2 1 1 LC1D40008•• 0.93 (0.425) 

3 0 1 1 LC1D50•• 3.22 (1.450) 

3 0 1 1 or q LC1D65•• 3.11 (1.400) 

4 0 0 0 LC1D65004•• 3.20 (1.440) 

4 0 0 0 or q LP1D65004•• 4.89 (2.220) 

2 2 0 0 LC1D65008•• 3.22 (1.450) 

2 2 0 0 or q LP1D65008•• 4.89 (2.220) 

3 0 1 1 LC1D80•• 3.53 (1.590) 

3 0 1 1 or q LC1D95•• c 3.55 (1.600) 

4 0 0 0 LC1D80004•• 3.91 (1.760) 

4 0 0 0 or q LP1D80004•• 4.87 (2.210) 

2 2 0 0 LC1D80008•• 4.09 (1.940) 

2 2 0 0 or q LP1D80008•• 5.84 (2.650) 

3 0 1 1 LC1D115•• 5.38 (2.420) 

3 0 1 1 or q LC1D150•• 5.42 (2.440) 

4 0 0 0 LC1D115004•• 6.35 (2.860) 

AC and DC Control Circuit — 3- or 4-Pole Spring Terminal Connections (AC-1 Category) 

20 

25 

32 

40 

f 

g 

q 

p 

c 

3 0 1 1 g LC1D093•• 0.710 (0.320) 

4 0 1 1 g LC1DT203•• 0.837 (0.380) 

2 2 1 1 g LC1D0983•• 0.837 (0.380) 

3 0 1 1 g LC1D123•• 0.710 (0.320) 

4 0 1 1 g LC1DT253•• 0.840 (0.380) 

2 2 1 1 g LC1D1283•• 0.840 (0.380) 

3 0 1 1 g LC1D183•• 0.730 (0.330) 

4 0 1 1 g LC1DT323•• 0.940 (0.425) 

2 2 1 1 g LC1DT2583•• 0.940 (0.425) 

3 0 1 1 g LC1D253•• 0.820 (0.370) 

4 0 1 1 g LC1DT403•• 0.940 (0.425) 

2 2 1 1 g LC1D2583•• 0.940 (0.425) 





Select between the two shown based upon the number of operating cycles; see the AC-1 graph on page 22 for further information. 


Devices are UL Listed at the same ratings as 32 and 80 amp devices, respectively. 


91


Resistive Loads 

AC and DC Control Circuit — 3- or 4-pole Contactors 

For Ring Terminals or Bus Bar Power Connections (AC-1 category) 

Maximum Current Utilization 

Categories 

Number of 

Poles 

Instantaneous 


Catalog 

Number 

f p 


LC1D150•• 

AC-1 N.O. N.C. N.O. N.C. 

20 

25 

32 

40 

50 

60 

80 

125 

200 

f 

q 

p 

c 

3 0 1 1 LC1D096•• 0.71 (0.320) 

4 0 1 1 LC1DT206•• 0.80 (0.365) 

2 2 1 1 LC1D0986•• 0.80 (0.365) 

3 0 1 1 LC1D126•• 0.75 (0.340) 

4 0 1 1 LC1DT256•• 0.80 (0.365) 

2 2 1 1 LC1D1286•• 0.80 (0.365) 

3 0 1 1 LC1D186•• 0.79 (0.355) 

4 0 1 1 LC1DT326•• 0.93 (0.425) 

2 2 1 1 LC1DT1886•• 0.93 (0.425) 

3 0 1 1 LC1D256•• 0.82 (0.370) 

4 0 1 1 LC1DT406•• 0.93 (0.425) 

2 2 1 1 LC1D2586•• 0.93 (0.425) 

3 0 1 1 LC1D326•• 0.83 (0.375) 

3 0 1 1 or q LC1D386•• c 0.84 (0.380) 

3 0 1 1 LC1D406•• 3.11 (1.400) 

4 0 1 1 LC1D400046•• 0.93 (0.425) 

2 2 1 1 LC1D400086•• 0.93 (0.425) 

3 0 1 1 LC1D656•• 3.11 (1.400) 

4 0 0 0 LC1D650046•• 3.20 (1.440) 

4 0 0 0 or q LP1D650046•• 4.89 (2.220) 

2 2 0 0 LC1D650086•• 3.22 (1.450) 

2 2 0 0 or q LP1D650086•• 4.89 (2.220) 

3 0 1 1 LC1D806•• 3.53 (1.590) 

4 0 0 0 LC1D800046•• 3.91 (1.760) 

4 0 0 0 or q LP1D800046•• 4.87 (2.210) 

2 2 0 0 LC1D800086•• 4.09 (1.940) 

2 2 0 0 or q LP1D800086•• 5.84 (2.650) 

3 0 1 1 LC1D95•• c 3.55 (1.600) 

3 0 1 1 LC1D1156•• 5.38 (2.420) 

3 0 1 1 or q LC1D1506•• 5.42 (2.440) 

4 0 0 0 LC1D1150046•• 6.35 (2.860) 




Select between the two shown based upon the number of operating cycles and control voltage; see the AC-1 graph on page 22 for further information. 


Devices are UL Listed at the same ratings as 32 and 80 amp devices, respectively. 

AC and DC Control Circuit — 3- or 4-pole Contactors for Connection with Slip-on Connectors 






92 


11/02


Selection of Reversing Contactors for Motor Control 




The contactors are pre-assembled, horizontally-mounted, and have pre-wired power connections. 

Order accessories separately. For information on auxiliary contact blocks and modules, see pages 106 

to 107. 

AC and DC Control Circuit — 3-pole Reversing Contactors with Touch-safe Terminals for Power Cabling (AC-3 category) 


1-phase 50/60 Hz 3-phase 50/60 Hz 

115/ 

120 V 

230/ 

240 V 

200/ 

208 V 

220/ 

240 V 

460/ 

480 V 

575 V 

600 V 

Maximum 

Inductive 

Current in 

AC-3 

Category 

600 V 



Operating 

Current in 

220 V 

230 V 

380 V 

400 V 

415 V 440 V 500 V 

660 V 

690 V 1000 V 

AC-3 up to 

440 V 

Instantaneous 

Auxiliary 

Contacts 

Catalog 

Number 

f p 

Weight 

lb (kg) 


0.5 1 2 2 5 7.5 9 2.2 4 4 4 5.5 5.5 – 9 1 1 LC2D09•• q k 1.55 (0.700) 

1 2 3 3 7.5 10 12 3 5.5 5.5 5.5 7.5 7.5 – 12 1 1 LC2D12•• q k 1.55 (0.700) 

1 3 5 5 10 15 18 4 7.5 9 9 10 10 – 18 1 1 LC2D18•• q k 1.670 (0.75) 

2 3 7.5 7.5 15 20 25 5.5 11 11 11 15 15 – 25 1 1 LC2D25•• q k 2.44 (1.100) 

2 5 10 10 20 30 32 7.5 15 15 15 18.5 18.5 – 32 1 1 LC2D32•• q k 2.67 (1.200) 

Not for North American applications q 38 9 18.5 18.5 18.5 18.5 18.5 – 38 1 1 LC2D38•• q k w 2.67 (1.200) 

3 5 10 10 30 30 40 11 18.5 22 22 22 30 – 40 1 1 LC2D40•• q 5.33 (2.400) 

3 7.5 15 15 40 40 50 15 22 25 30 30 33 – 50 1 1 LC2D50•• q 5.33 (2.400) 

5 10 20 20 50 50 65 18.5 30 37 37 37 37 – 65 1 1 LC2D65•• q 5.33 (2.400) 

7.5 15 25 30 60 60 80 22 37 45 45 55 45 – 80 1 1 LC2D80•• q 7.11 (3.200) 

Not for North American applications 95 25 45 45 45 55 45 – 95 1 1 LC2D95•• q w 7.11 (3.200) 

– – 30 40 75 100 115 30 55 59 59 75 80 75 115 1 1 LC2D11500 c 14.44 (6.500) 

– – 40 50 100 125 150 40 75 80 80 90 100 90 150 1 1 LC2D15000 c 14.44 (6.500) 

f 

q 

c 

p 

k 

w 




Includes mechanical interlock without electrical contacts. Installer to complete wiring for electrically interlocking contactor operating coils by utilizing a N.C. auxiliary contact integrated in the 

contactor or optional LADN or LAD8N type auxiliary contact block. 

Included with electrical contacts integrated in mechanical interlock (type LA9D••02). 


For reversing contactors with electrical interlocking pre-wired at the factory, add suffix V to the catalog number reflected above. Example: LC2D09•• becomes LC2D09••V. 



93





The contactors are pre-assembled, horizontally-mounted, and have pre-wired power connections. 

Order accessories separately. For information on auxiliary contact blocks and modules, see pages 106 

to 107. 

AC and DC Control Circuit — 3-pole Reversing Contactors for Spring Terminal Connections (AC-3 category) 



115/ 

120 V 

230/ 

240 V 

200/ 

208 V 

220/ 

240 V 

460/ 

480 V 

575 V 

600 V 

Maximum 

Inductive 

Current in 

AC-3 

Category 

600 V 



Operating 

Current in 

220 V 

230 V 

380 V 

400 V 

415 V 440 V 500 V 

660 V 

690 V 1000 V 

AC-3 up to 

440 V 

Instantaneous 

Auxiliary 

Contacts 

Catalog 

Number 

f p t 

Weight 

lb (kg) 


0.5 1 2 2 5 7.5 9 2.2 4 4 4 5.5 5.5 – 9 1 1 LC2D093•• q 1.55 (0.700) 

1 2 3 3 7.5 10 12 3 5.5 5.5 5.5 7.5 7.5 – 12 1 1 LC2D123•• q 1.55 (0.700) 

1 3 5 5 10 15 18 4 7.5 9 9 10 10 – 18 1 1 LC2D183•• q 1.670 (0.75) 

2 3 7.5 7.5 15 20 25 5.5 11 11 11 15 15 – 25 1 1 LC2D253•• q 2.44 (1.100) 

2 5 10 10 20 30 32 7.5 15 15 15 18.5 18.5 – 32 1 1 LC2D323•• q 2.67 (1.200) 

Not for North American applications q 38 9 18.5 18.5 18.5 18.5 18.5 – 38 1 1 LC2D383•• q k 2.67 (1.200) 

f 

q 

p 

t 

k 


Includes mechanical interlock without electrical contacts. Installer to complete wiring for electrically interlocking contactor operating coils by utilizing a N.C. auxiliary contact integrated in the 

contactor or optional LADN or LAD8N type auxiliary contact block. 


For reversing contactors with electrical interlocking pre-wired at the factory, add suffix V to the catalog number reflected above. Example: LC2D09•• becomes LC2D09••V. 

LC2D38 is UL Listed at the same HP rating as the 32 amp device. 

94 


11/02





The contactors have pre-wired power connections. Order accessories separately. For information on 

auxiliary contact blocks and modules, see pages 106 to 107. 

LC2D18•• 

AC and DC Control Circuit — 3-pole Reversing Contactors for Ring-tongue Terminals or Bus Bar Power Connections 




Maximum 

Inductive 

Current in 

AC-3 

Category 

600 V 


50/60 Hz in category AC-3 

Rated 

Operating 

Current in 

AC-3 up 

to 440 V 

Instantaneous 

Auxiliary 

Contacts 

Catalog 

Number 

f p 

Weight 

115/ 

120 V 

230/ 

240 V 

200/ 

208 V 

220/ 

240 V 

460/ 

480 V 

575 V 

600 V 

220 V 

230 V 

380 V 

400 V 

415 V 440 V 500 V 

660 V 

690 V 1000 V 

HP HP HP HP HP HP A kW kW kW kW kW kW kW A N.O. N.C. lb (kg) 

0.5 1 2 2 5 7.5 9 2.2 4 4 4 5.5 5.5 – 9 1 1 LC2D096•• c 1.55 (0.700) 

1 2 3 3 7.5 10 12 3 5.5 5.5 5.5 7.5 7.5 – 12 1 1 LC2D126•• c 1.55 (0.700) 

1 3 5 5 10 15 18 4 7.5 9 9 10 10 – 18 1 1 LC2D186•• c 1.67 (0.750) 

2 3 7.5 7.5 15 20 25 5.5 11 11 11 15 15 – 25 1 1 LC2D256•• c 2.44 (1.100) 

2 5 10 10 20 30 32 7.5 15 15 15 18.5 18.5 – 32 1 1 LC2D326•• c 2.67 (1.200) 

Not for North American applications q 38 9 18.5 18.5 18.5 18.5 18.5 – 38 1 1 LC2D386•• q k 2.67 (1.200) 

– – 30 40 75 100 115 30 55 59 59 75 80 75 115 1 1 LC2D1156•• c 13.22 (5.950) 

– – 15 15 40 40 150 40 70 80 80 90 100 90 150 1 1 LC2D1506•• c 13.22 (5.950) 

f 

q 

c 

p 

k 



Includes mechanical interlock without electrical contacts. Installer to complete wiring for electronically interlocking contactor operating coils by utilizing a N.C. auxiliary contact integrated in 

the contactor or optional LADN or LAD8N type auxiliary contact block. 

Included with electrical contacts integrated in mechanical interlock (type LA9D••02). 


Devices are UL Listed at the same HP rating as the 32 amp device. 

AC and DC Control Circuit — 3-pole Reversing Contactors for Connection with Slip-on 

Connectors 






Power connections are to be made by the customer. 


95


Selection of Changeover Contactors for Resistive Loads 


The contactors have pre-wired power connections. Order accessories separately. For information on 

auxiliary contact blocks and modules, see pages 106 to 107. 

AC and DC Control Circuit — 4-pole 

Changeover Contactors with Touch-safe Terminals for Power Cabling (AC-1 category) 

LC2DT20•• 

Utilization category AC-1 

Non-inductive loads 

Maximum rated operational current 

(θ < 55 °C [131 °F]) 

Instantaneous 


Catalog 

Number 

f p 

Weight 

A N.O. N.C. lb (kg) 

AC Control 

20 1 1 LC2DT20•• q 1.60 (0.730) 

25 1 1 LC2DT25•• q 1.55 (0.700) 

32 1 1 LC2DT32•• q 1.86 (0.450) 

40 1 1 LC2DT40•• q 2.43 (1.100) 

60 1 1 LC2DT60•• q 5.30 (2.400) 

80 – – LC2D65004•• q 7.07 (3.200) 

125 – – LC2D80004•• q 7.07 (3.200) 

200 – – LC2D115004•• c 16.0 (27.250) 

f 

q 

c 

p 

For LC2D12 and LC2D25: clip-on mounting on 35 mm DIN rail AM1DP or screw mounting. 


For LC2D115: clip-on mounting on 2 x 35 mm DIN rails AM1DP or screw mounting. 

Includes mechanical interlock (type LA9••D978) without electrical contacts. Installer to complete wiring for electronically interlocking contactor 

operating coils by utilizing a N.C. auxiliary contact integrated in the contactor or optional LA1DN or LA8DN type auxiliary contact block. 

Includes mechanical interlock (Type LA9D11502) with pre-wired electrical contacts for interlocking contactor operating coils. 


96 


11/02



AC and DC Control Circuit— 4-pole 

Changeover Contactors with Ring-tongue Terminal or Bus Bar Power Connection 


Utilization category AC-1 

Non-inductive loads 

Maximum rated operational current 

(θ < 55 °C [131 °F]) 

Instantaneous 


Catalog 

Number 

f p 

Weight 

lb (kg) 

A N.O. N.C. 

AC Control 

20 1 1 LC2DT206•• q 1.60 (0.730) 

25 1 1 LC2DT256•• q 1.55 (0.700) 

32 1 1 LC2DT326•• q 1.86 (0.450) 

40 1 1 LC2DT406•• q 2.43 (1.100) 

60 1 1 LC2DT606•• q 5.30 (2.400) 

80 – – LC2D650046•• q 7.07 (3.200) 

125 – – LC2D800046•• q 7.07 (3.200) 

200 – – LC2D1150046•• c 16.0 (27.250) 

f 

q 

c 

p 

For LC2D12 and LC2D25: clip-on mounting on 35 mm DIN rail AM1DP or screw mounting. 


For LC2D115: clip-on mounting on 2 x 35 mm DIN rails AM1DP or screw mounting. 

Includes mechanical interlock (Type LA9••D978) without electrical contacts. Installer to complete wiring for electronically interlocking contactor 

operating coils by utilizing a N.C. auxiliary contact integrated in the contactor or optional LA1DN or LA8DN type auxiliary contact block. 

Includes mechanical interlock (Type LA9D11502) with pre-wired electrical contacts for interlocking contactor operating coils. 


4-pole Changeover Contactors for Connection with Slip-on Connectors (AC-1 category) 

For contactor LC2D12 only, replace the last digit in the catalog number shown in the table above (“6”) 

with a 9. For example, LC2D120046•• becomes LC2D120049••. These contactors include slip-on 

connectors: UL Recognized E164862 NLDX2, 2 x 6.35 mm (0.25 in.) on the power poles and 1 x 

6.35 mm (0.25 in.) on the coil terminals. 

Power connections are to be made by the customer. 


97


Component Parts for Reversing and Two Speed Contactors 

Component Parts for Reversing and Two Speed Contactors 

LA9D4002 

LA9D6569 

LA9D8069 

LAD9R1 

For 3-pole Motor Reversing Contactors 

Contactors with Screw Clamp Terminals or Connectors 

Horizontally Mounted, Assembled by Customer 

Using 2 Identical Contactors (1) 

Set of Power Connections 

Mechanical Interlock 

Catalog Number Weight lb (kg) Catalog Number of Kit Weight lb (kg) 

Including mechanical interlock and an electrical interlocking kit for the contactors 

Power Connections for LC1D09 to D38 

Use with screw terminal versions LC1D09 - LC1D38 

Line Side (Parallel) Connector LAD9V5 0.037 (0.17) LAD9R1V (2) – 

Load Side (Reversing) Connector LAD9V6 0.037 (0.17) LAD9R1V (2) – 

Low Voltage Control Circuit 

Interlock 

Use with spring terminal versions LC1D093 - LC1D383 

When using LAD34 and LAD33 Power Connectors 

LAD9V1 (3) 0.037 (0.17) LAD9R1V (2) – 



When using cable/wire 



Including mechanical interlock with integral electrical interlocking 

LC1D40 to D65 LA9D6569 0.290 (0.64) LA9D4002 0.37 (0.170) 

LC1D80 and D95 (ac) LA9D8069 0.290 (0.64) LA9D4002 0.37 (0.170) 

LC1D80 and D95 (dc) LA9D8069 0.490 (1.08) LA9D8002 0.37 (0.170) 

LC1D115 and D150 LA9D11569 1.450 (3.20) LA9D11502 0.63 (0.290) 

Including mechanical interlock without electrical interlocking 

LC1D09 to D38 LAD9R1 (2) 0.045 (0.10) – – 

LC1D40 to D65 LA9D6569 0.290 (0.64) LA9D50978 0.37 (0.170) 

LC1D80 and D95 (ac) LA9D8069 0.490 (1.08) LA9D50978 0.37 (0.170) 

LC1D80 and D95 (dc) LA9D8069 0.490 (1.08) LA9D80978 0.37 (0.170) 

For Low Speed – High Speed Starter 

Description For Contactors with Connections Catalog Number Weight lb (kg) 

Connection kit enabling reversing 

of slow and high speed directions, 

using a reversing contactor and a 

2 N.O. + 2 N.C. main pole contactor 

Screw clamps or connectors LA9D9PVGV 0.03 (0.016) 

Spring terminals LAD3PVPG 0.15 (0.068) 

(1) To order the 2 contactors: see pages 88, 89 and 90. 

(2) Mechanical interlock kit includes line and load side power connectors, mechanical interlock, control circuit interlock (LAD9R1V only), and clip. 

Interlock only -- LAD9V2 (includes retaining clip). Retaining clip only -- W116430980111 (std. package of 10). 

(3) There is no spring terminal equivalent for this part. 

Characteristics: pages 80, 87 Dimensions, Schematics: pages 128, 129 

98 


11/02


Component Parts for Assembling Changeover Contactor Parts for Distribu- 

Component Parts for Assembling Changeover Contactor Parts for Distribution 

LA9D4002 

LA9D50978 

LA9D6570 

For 4-pole Changeover Contactor Pairs (3-phase distribution + neutral) 

Contactors with Screw Clamp Terminals or Connectors 

Horizontally Mounted, Assembled by Customer 

Using 2 Identical Contactors (1) 

Set of Power Connections 

Mechanical Interlock 

Catalog Number Weight lb (kg) Catalog Number of Kit Weight lb (kg) 

Including mechanical interlock and an electrical interlocking kit for the contactors 

LC1DT20 to DT32 

LC1DT40 and DT60 

LAD92560 (standard) 0.045 (0.10) 

– 

LADT9R1V 

LAD96060 (standard) 0.045 (0.10) – 

LAD92561 (ring tongue) 0.045 (0.10) 

Including mechanical interlock with integral electrical interlocking 

LAD96061 (ring tongue) 0.045 (0.10) LADT9R2V 

– 

LAD32561 (spring terminal) 0.045 (0.10) – 

LC1D65004 LA9D6570 0.150 (0.33) LA9D4002 0.37 (0.170) 

LC1D80004 LA9D8070 0.280 (0.62) LA9D4002 0.37 (0.170) 

LP1D80004 LA9D8070 0.280 (0.62) LA9D8002 0.37 (0.170) 

LC1D115004 LA9D11570 1.100 (2.43) LA9D11502 0.62 (0.280) 

Including mechanical interlock without electrical interlocking 

LC1DT20 to DT32 LADT9R1 (2) 0.035 (0.08) – – 

LC1DT40 and DT60 LADT9R2 (2) 0.040 (0.09) – – 

LC1 or LP1D65004 LA9D6570 0.150 (0.33) LA9D50978 0.34 (0.155) 

LC1D80004 LA9D8070 0.280 (0.62) LA9D50978 0.34 (0.155) 

LP1D80004 LA9D8070 0.280 (0.62) LA9D80978 0.40 (0.180) 

For 3-pole changeover contactor pairs 

LC1D115 and D150 LA9D11571 0.960 (2.12) LA9D11502 0.62 (0.280) 

(1) To order the two contactors: see page 91. 

(2) Including mechanical interlock. 

– 

LA9D8070 

Characteristics: pages 80, 87 Dimensions, Schematics: pages 128, 129 


99


Characteristics of Auxiliary Contacts, Timers, and Accessories 

Environment 

Characteristics of Auxiliary Contact Blocks, Timers, and Accessories 

Auxiliary Contact Blocks without Dust and Damp Protected Contacts for Contactors 

Contact block type LADN or C LADT and S LADR LAD8 


Meets the essential requirements 

of the LV & EMC directives 

IEC 60947-5-1, NF C 63-140, VDE 0660, BS 4794, EN 60947-5-1 

Product certifications 

UL, CSA 


Degree of protection Conforming to VDE 0106 Protection against direct finger contact IP 2X 

Ambient air temperature around the device 

Storage °C - 60 to + 80 

Operation °C - 5 to + 60 

Permissible for operation at Uc °C - 40 to + 70 

Maximum operating altitude Without derating m 3000 

Cabling 

Phillips N° 2 and Ø 6 mm 

Flexible or solid cable with or without cable end 

mm 2 Min.: 1 x 1; max.: 2 x 2.5 

Connection by spring terminals Flexible or solid cable without cable end mm 2 Max.: 2 x 2.5 

Instantaneous and Time Delay Contact Characteristics 

Number of contacts 1, 2 or 4 2 2 2 

Rated operational voltage (Ue) Up to V 690 


Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 V 690 


Conventional thermal current (Ith) For ambient temperature ≤ 60 °C A 10 

Frequency of operational current Hz 25 to 400 

Minimum switching capacity 

U min. V 17 

I min. mA 5 

Short-circuit protection Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 and VDE 0660. gG fuse A 10 

Rated making capacity Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1, I rms A ac: 140; dc: 250 


Permissible for: 1 s A 100 

500 ms A 120 

100 ms A 140 

Insulation resistance MΩ > 10 

Non-overlap time Guaranteed between N.C. and N.O. contacts ms 1.5 (on energizing and on de-energizing) 

Overlap time Guaranteed between N.C. and N.O. on LADC22 ms 1.5 – – – 

Time delay 

(LADT, R and S contact blocks) 

Accuracy only valid for setting range 

indicated on the front face 

Ambient air temperature for operation °C – - 40 to + 70 - 40 to + 70 – 

Repeat accuracy – ± 2% ± 2% – 

Drift up to 0.5 million operating cycles – + 15% + 15% – 

Drift depending on ambient air temperature – 0.25% per °C 0.25% per °C – 

Mechanical durability In millions of operating cycles 30 5 5 30 

Operational power of contacts See page 101. 

Catalog Number: pages 107, 108 Dimensions: pages 122, 123 Schematics: pages 126, 127 

100 


11/02



Auxiliary Contact Blocks with Dust and Damp Protected Contacts for Contactors 

Operational Power of Contacts (conforming to IEC 60947-5-1) 

AC supply, categories AC-14 and AC-15 

Electrical durability (valid up to 3600 operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet: making power (cos ϕ 0.7) = 10 

times the power broken (cos ϕ 0.4) 

V 24 48 115 230 400 440 600 

1 million operating cycles VA 60 120 280 560 960 1050 1440 



1 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

0.8 

0.7 

0.6 

0.5 

0.4 

0.3 

0.2 

DC supply, category DC-13 

0.1 

0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 

0.6 0.8 1 2 3 4 

0.5 0.7 0.9 


Electrical durability (valid up to 1200 operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet, without economy resistor, the time 

constant increasing with the power. 

V 24 48 125 250 440 

1 million operating cycles W 120 90 75 68 61 



5 

6 8 

7 

10 

9 

1 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

125 V 

48 V 

24 V 

3 

2 

250 V 

1 

0.8 

0.7 

0.6 

0.5 

0.4 

0.3 

440 V 

0.2 

0.1 

0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 

0.6 0.8 1 2 3 4 

0.5 0.7 0.9 


5 

6 8 

7 

10 

9 



101



Auxiliary Contact Blocks with Dust and Damp Protected Contacts for Contactors 

Environment 

Contact block type 

LA1DX 

LA1DX 

protected 

non protected 

LA1DY 




IEC 60947-5-1, VDE 0660 


UL, CSA 



Ambient air temperature Storage and operation °C - 25 to + 70 

Cabling 


Flexible or solid cable 

with or without cable end 

mm 2 Min.: 1 x 1 

Max.: 2 x 2.5 

Number of contacts 2 2 2 2 

Contact Characteristics 

Rated operational voltage (Ue) Up to V 50 50 690 24 


Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 V 250 250 690 250 

Conforming to UL, CSA V – – 600 – 

Conventional thermal current (Ith) For ambient temperature ≤ 40 °C A – – 10 – 

Maximum operational current (Ie) mA 50 50 10 50 

Frequency of operational current Hz – – 25 to 400 – 

Minimum switching capacity U min. V 3 3 17 3 

I min. mA 0.3 0.3 5 0.3 

Short-circuit protection Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1. gG fuse A – – 10 – 

Rated making capacity Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1, I rms A – – ac: 140; dc: 250 – 


Permissible for: 1 s A – – 100 – 

500 ms A – – 120 – 

100 ms A – – 140 – 

Insulation resistance MΩ > 10 > 10 > 10 > 10 

Mechanical durability In millions of operating cycles 5 5 30 5 

Materials and technology 

used for dust and damp 

protected contacts 

Gold - Single 

break with 

crossed bars 

Gold - Single 

break with 

crossed bars 

– 

Gold - Single 

break with 

crossed bars 


102 


11/02

Interface Modules for Contactors 



Environment 





IEC 60255-5 

UL, CSA 




around the device 

Other Characteristics 

Module type 




Rated insulation voltage Conforming to IEC 60947-1 V 5 250 

Rated operational voltage Conforming to IEC 60947-1 V 415 250 

Indication of input state 

Input signals 

Built-in protection 

By integral LED which illuminates when the contactor coil is energized 

LA4DFBQ LA4DFB LA4DFE LA4DLB LA4DLE LA4DWB 

With relay With relay With relay With relay + override Solid state 

Control voltage (E1-E2) V dc 24 dc 24 dc 48 dc 24 dc 48 dc 24 

Permissible variation V 17 to 30 17 to 30 33 to 60 17 to 30 33 to 60 5 to 30 

Current consumption at 20 °C mA 25 25 15 25 15 

State “0” guaranteed for 

U V < 2.4 < 2.4 < 4.8 < 2.4 < 4.8 < 2.4 

I mA < 2 < 2 < 1.3 < 2 < 1.3 < 2 

State “1” guaranteed for U V 17 17 33 17 33 5 

Against reverse polarity 

Of the input 

By diode 

By diode 

Electrical durability at 220/240 V In millions of operating cycles 3 10 10 3 3 20 

Maximum immunity time to micro-breaks ms 4 4 4 4 4 1 

Power dissipated At 20 °C W 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.4 

Direct mounting without contactor 

Mounting with cabling adaptor LAD-4BB 

Total operating time 

at Uc (of the contactor) 

Cabling 

With coil: ac 24 to 250 V – LC1D40 to D150 – 

8.5 for 5 V 

15 for 24 V 

ac 100 to 250 V – – LC1D40 to D115 

ac 380 to 415 V LC1D40 to D150 – – 

With coil: ac 24 to 250 V – LC1D09 to D38, DT20 to DT60 

ac 380 to 415 V 

LC1D09 to D38, 

DT20 to DT60 

– – 


DT20 to DT60 

Operating times depend on the type of contactor electromagnet and its control mode. 

The closing time “C” is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to initial contact of the main poles. The opening time “O” is 

measured from the moment the coil supply is switched off to the moment the main poles separate. 

With LA4DF, DL 


Flexible or solid cable 

with or without cable end 

LC1D09 to D38, DT20 to DT60 LC1D40 to D65 LC1D80 and D95 

N.O. ms 20 to 30 28 to 34 28 to 43 

N.C. ms 16 to 24 20 to 24 18 to 32 

mm 2 Min.: 1 x 1 

mm 2 Min.: 2 x 2.5 

Catalog Number: page 111 Dimensions: pages 122, 123 Schematics: pages 126, 127 


103



Electronic Serial Timer Modules for Contactors 

Environment 

Module type LA4DT (On-delay) LA4DR (Off-delay) for LC1D 


Meets the essential 

requirements of the LV & EMC 

directives 

IEC 60255-5 



UL, CSA 






For operation at Uc °C - 25 to + 70 


Cabling 

Control Circuit Characteristics 

Built-in protection 

Phillips N° 2 and Ø 6 mm Flexible or 

solid cable with or without cable end 

mm 2 Min.: 1 x 1 

Max.: 2 x 2.5 

On input By varistor By varistor 

Suppression of contactor By varistor By bidirectional peak limiting diode 

Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) V ac or dc 24 to 250 ac 24 to 250 

Permissible variation 0.8 to 1.1 Uc 0.8 to 1.1 Uc 

Type of control 

Time Delay Characteristics 

By mechanical contact only 

By mechanical contact only, 

connecting cable < 10 m 

Timing ranges s 0.1 to 2; 1.5 to 30; 25 to 500 0.1 to 2; 1.5 to 30; 25 to 500 

Repeat accuracy 0 to 40 °C ± 3% (10 ms minimum) ± 3% (10 ms minimum) 

Reset time 

Immunity to micro-breaks 

During the time delay period ms 150 225 

After the time delay period ms 50 – 

During the time delay period ms 10 20 

After the time delay period ms 2 – 

Indication of time delay By LED Illuminates during time delay period Illuminates during time delay period 

Switching Characteristics (solid state type) 

Maximum power dissipated W 2 3.5 

Leakage current mA < 5 < 5 

Residual voltage V 3.3 3.3 

Overvoltage protection 3 kV; 0.5 N•m 3 kV; 0.5 N•m 

Electrical durability In millions of operating cycles 30 30 

Operating Diagrams 

LA4DT “On-delay” electronic timers 

LA4DR “Off-delay” electronic timers 

U supply 

(A1-A2) 

Time delay output 

Contactor coil 

Red LED 

1 

0 

1 

0 

t 

U supply 

(A1-A2) 

Control 

(A2-B2) 

Time delay output 

Contactor coil 

1 

0 

1 

0 

1 

0 

40 ms 

t 

Red LED 

Catalog Number: page 111 Dimensions: pages 122, 123 Schematics: pages 126, 127 

104 


11/02



Control Modules, Coil Suppressor Modules and Mechanical Latch Blocks for Contactors 

Environment 

Conforming to standards IEC 60947-5-1 



UL, CSA 




“Auto - Man - Stop” Control Modules 

Recommendation 




The Auto - Man selector switch must only be operated with the Start - Stop (“O” “I”) switch in position “O” 

Rated insulation voltage Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 V 250 

Rated operational voltage Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 V 250 

Protection Against electric shocks kV 2 

Built-in protection Contactor coil suppression By varistor 

Indication By integral LED Illuminates when the contactor coil is energized 

Electrical durability In operating cycles 20,000 

Coil Suppressor Modules 

Module type 

Type of protection 

Rated control circuit voltage (Uc) 

V 

LA4DA 

LAD4RC 

RC circuit 

ac 

24 to 415 

LA4DB 

LAD4T 

Bidirectional 

peak limiting 

diode 

ac or dc 

24 to 72 

LA4DC 

Diode 

dc 

12 to 250 

Maximum peak voltage 3 Uc 2 Uc Uc 2 Uc 

Natural RC frequency 

Mechanical Latch Blocks 

24/48 V Hz 400 – – – 

50/127 V Hz 200 

110/240 V Hz 100 – – – 

380/415 V Hz 150 – – – 

Mechanical latch block type LA6DK10 LAD6K10 LA6DK20 

For mounting on contactor 


LP1D65 


DT20 to DT60 

Certification UL, CSA UL, CSA 

Rated insulation voltage Conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 V 690 690 

Rated control circuit voltage ac 50/60 Hz and dc V 24 to 415 24 to 415 

Power required 

For unlatching 

ac VA 25 25 

dc W 30 30 

Maximum operating rate In operating cycles/hour 1200 1200 

On-load factor 10% 10% 

Mechanical durability at Uc In millions of operating cycles 0.5 0.5 

LA4DE 

LAD4V 

Varistor 

LC1D80 to D150 

LP1D80 and LC1D115 

ac or dc 

24 to 250 

Catalog Number: pages 108, 110 - 112 Dimensions: pages 122, 123 Schematics: pages 126, 127 


105


Selection of Auxiliary Contact Blocks 


aaa 

LA6-DK 

or 

LAD-6K 

LC1 

LAD-N10, N01 

(for LC1-D40 through D95 only) 

LAD-8N 

LAD-N 

LAD-N 

LAD-C 

LAD-T 

LAD-S2 

LAD-R 

LA1-DX, DY, DZ 

106 


11/02



Instantaneous Auxiliary Contact Blocks for Connection by Screw Clamp Terminals 

For use in normal operating environments 

Clip-on mounting 

Number of contacts per block (see table below for 

maximum number of contacts) 

Composition 



f 

q 

k 

Front 

Side 2 

1 

2 

4 

For LC1D40 through LC1D95 only. 

Device with 4 shield bonding terminals. 

Not allowed on LCkD09 through D38 with DC coils. 

– – – 1 – LADN10 f 0.04 (0.020) 

– – – – 1 LADN01 f 0.04 (0.020) 

– – – 1 1 LADN11 0.07 (0.030) 

– – – 2 – LADN20 0.07 (0.030) 

– – – – 2 LADN02 0.07 (0.030) 

– – – 2 2 LADN22 0.11 (0.050) 

– – – 1 3 LADN13 0.11 (0.050) 

– – – 4 – LADN40 0.11 (0.050) 

– – – – 4 LADN04 0.11 (0.050) 

– – – 3 1 LADN31 0.11 (0.050) 

4 includes one N.O. and one N.C. make before break – – – 2 2 LADC22 0.11 (0.050) 

For terminal referencing conforming to standard EN 50012 

Front, on 

3P contactors & 

4P contactors 20 to 60A 

– – – 1 1 LAD8N11k 0.07 (0.030) 

– – – 2 – LAD8N20 k 0.07 (0.030) 

– – – – 2 LAD8N02 k 0.07 (0.030) 

2 – – – 1 1 LADN11G 0.07 (0.030) 

4 – – – 2 2 LADN22G 0.11 (0.050) 

Front, on 

2 – – – 1 1 LADN11P 0.07 (0.030) 

4P contactors 80 to 200A 4 – – – 2 2 LADN22P 0.11 (0.050) 

With dust and damp protected terminals, for use in particularly harsh industrial environments 

Front 

2 – 2 – – LA1DX20 0.09 (0.040) 

2 – – – – LA1DX02 0.09 (0.040) 

– 2 2 – – LA1DY20 q 0.09 (0.040) 

4 – 2 – 2 – LA1DZ40 0.11 (0.050) 

– 2 – 1 1 LA1DZ31 0.13 (0.060) 

Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks for connection by lugs 

This type of connection is not possible for blocks with dust and damp protected contacts. For all other instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks, add the digit 6 to the end of the references selected 

above. Example: LADN10 becomes LADN106. 

Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks for connection by spring terminals 

This type of connection is not possible for LAD8, LADN with 1 contact or blocks with dust and damp protected contacts. For all other contact blocks, add the digit 3 to the end of the references selected 


Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks for connection by Faston connectors 

This type of connection is not possible for LAD8, LADN with 1 contact or blocks with dust and damp protected contacts. For all other contact blocks, add the digit 9 to the end of the references selected 


Maximum Number of Auxiliary Contacts 

Contactors Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks Time delay 

Front mounted 

Front 

Side mounted 

Type Number of poles and size 1 contact 2 contacts 4 contacts mounted 

ac 

dc 

LC (1) 

3P LC1D09 to D38 1 on left-hand side and – 1 or 1 or 1 

LC1D40 to D95 (50/60 Hz) 1 on each side or 2 and 1 or 1 or 1 

LC1D40 to D95 (50 or 60 Hz) 1 on each side and 2 and 1 or 1 or 1 

LC1D115 and D150 1 on left-hand side and – 1 or 1 or 1 

4P LC1DT20 to DT60 1 on left-hand side and – 1 or 1 or 1 

LC1D65 and D80 1 on each side or 1 or 1 or 1 or 1 

LC1D115 1 on each side and 1 or 1 or 1 or 1 

3P LC1D09 to D38 – – 1 or 1 or 1 

LC1D40 to D95 – 1 or 1 or 1 or 1 

LC1D115 and D150 1 on left-hand side and – 1 or 1 or 1 

4P LC1DT20 to DT80 1 on left-hand side or – 1 or 1 or 1 

LP1D65 and D80 – 2 and 1 or 1 or 1 

LC1D115 1 on each side – and 1 or 1 or 1 

3P LC1D09 to D38 – – 1 (2) – – 

4P LC1DT20 to DT60 1 on left-hand side and – 1 or 1 or 1 

(1) LC: low consumption. 

(2) Except LADN02. 

In order to mount on an LAD8N on an LC1D40 to D95, a set of shims must be ordered separately, see page 114. 

Characteristics: page 100-102 Dimensions: pages 122, 123 Schematics: pages 126, 127 


107


Selection of Time-Delay Blocks, and Mechanical-Latch Blocks 

Selection of Time-Delay Blocks, and Mechanical-Latch Blocks 

Time Delay Auxiliary Contact Blocks for Connection by Screw Clamp Terminals 

Maximum number of auxiliary contact blocks that can be attached per contactor, see page 107. 

Sealing cover to be ordered separately, see page 114. 

LADT0 and LADR0: with extended scale from 0.1 to 0.6 s. 

LADS2: with switching time of 40 ms ± 15 ms between opening of the N.C. contact and closing of the N.O. contact. 

LADTk 

LA6DKkk 

Time Delay 

Clip-on Mounting Number of Contacts 

Catalog Number Weight lb (kg) 

Type Setting Range 

Front 1 N.O. + 1 N.C. On-delay f 0.1 to 3 s LADT0 (0.13) 0.060 

0.1 to 30 s LADT2 (0.13) 0.060 

10 to 180 s LADT4 (0.13) 0.060 

1 to 30 s LADS2 (0.13) 0.060 

Off-delay f 0.1 to 3 s LADR0 (0.13) 0.060 

0.1 to 30 s LADR2 (0.13) 0.060 

10 to 180 s LADR4 (0.13) 0.060 

f Also fit pre-TeSys Contactors. 

Time delay auxiliary contact blocks for connection by ring-torque connectors 

Add the digit 6 to the end of the references selected above. Example: LADT0 becomes LADT06. 

Time delay auxiliary contact blocks for connection by spring terminals 


Time delay auxiliary contact blocks for connection by Faston connectors 


Mechanical latch blocks (2) 

LADTk3 

Clip-on 

Mounting 

Front 

Unlatching 

Control 

Manual or 

electric 

For use on Contactor 

LC1D40 to D65 3P ac or dc 

LC1D65 4P ac 

LP1D65 4P dc 

LC1D80 to D150 3P ac 

LC1D80 and D115 3P dc 

LP1D80 and LC1D115 4P c 

LC1D09 to D38 ac or dc 

LC1DT20 to DT60 ac or dc 

Basic Reference. 

Complete with Code 

Indicating Control Voltage 

(1) Standard control circuit voltages (for other voltages please consult your Regional Sales Office). 

Standard Voltages (1) 


LA6DK10• B E F M Q (0.15) 0.070 

LA6DK20• B E F M Q (0.20) 0.090 

LAD6K10• B E F M Q (0.15) 0.070 

Vdc 50/60 Hz, 24 32/36 42/48 60/72 100 110/127 220/240 256/277 380/415 

Code B C E EN K F M U Q 

(2) The mechanical latching block must not be powered up at the same time as the contactor. The duration of the control signal for the mechanical 

latching block and the contactor should be ≥ 100 ms. 

LA6DKkk 

Characteristics: pages 100 - 102 Dimensions: pages 122, 123 Schematics: pages 126, 127 

SERIPLEX ® Module 

Approvals 

File E114926 

CCN NRAQ 

LR53531 

Class 2252 01 

LA4SPX q 

SERIPLEX 

Contactor adaptor module f 

f 

q 

1 block per contactor 

Clip-on front mounting 

LC1D09 to LC1D80 

LP1D09 to LP1D80 

Operates coils up to Catalog Number Weight – lb (kg.) 

277 Vac 

24 Vdc 

For more information, refer to SERIPLEX catalog 8330CT9601. 

Attaches similarly to all other accessories. 

LA4SPX 0.160 (0.072) 

108 


11/02


Selection of Low Voltage Ride Through Module 

Selection of Low Voltage Ride Through Module 

SEMI F47 Low Voltage Ride Through Module 

LADLVRT 

A1 

E1 

E2 

1.9 

(47) 

A2 

By ensuring SEMI F47 compliance of AC powered IEC contactors and relays, the Low Voltage Ride Through Modules can be used to 

increase the voltage sag immunity of semiconductor processing equipment. These modules make it possible for AC powered 

TELEMECANIQUE contactors and relays to exceed the requirements of SEMI F47, both in the magnitude and duration of a voltage sag 

event – even with accessories such as auxiliary contact blocks and pneumatic timers. 

More and more wafer fabs are insisting that front-end wafer processing equipment comply with SEMI F47. Many of the contactors and 

pilot relays used on equipment, particularly in the EMO circuit, are not able to meet the standard. As a result, equipment can drop out 

during a voltage sag of 50% in magnitude and 200ms in duration, causing equipment shutdown. 

The Low Voltage Ride Through Modules can be used with TELEMECANIQUE contactors from 9A through 80A, as well as the CAD 

series of control relays. 

Contactors 32 A and less 

A1 

LADLVRT 

A2 

Contactors 40 A - 80 A 

Dimensions 

1.84 

46.8 

1.08 

27.5 

1.77 

45 

LAD4BB 

A1 

E1 

E2 

1.3 

(32) 

A2 

1.67 

42.4 

Selection 

LADLVRT24V LADLVRT120V LADLVRT208V Bracket Fuse 

For use on: 

LC1D09B7, LC1D12B7, 

LC1D18B7, LC1D25B7 

LC1D32B7, LC1D40B7, 

LCD50B7, LC1D65B7 

For use on: 

LC1D09G7, LC1D12G7, 

LC1D18G7, LC1D25G7 

LC1D32G7, LC1D40G7, 

LC1D50G7, LC1D65G7 

For use on: 

LC1D09LE7, LC1D12LE7, 

LC1D18LE7, LC1D25LE7 

LC1D32LE7, LC1D40L7, 

LC1D50L7, LC1D65L7 

CADxxxB7 CADxxxG7 CADxxxLE7 - 

LAD4BB* 

LA9D941 

* The Low Voltage Ride Through Module can be used with all TeSys control relays with 24 VAC, 120 VAC or 208 VAC dual frequency 

coils. 

** LAD4BB must be used when the Low Voltage Ride Through Module is being used with contactors 32 A and less, and TeSys CAD 

Series of Control Relays. 


Continuous operating voltage range and line frequency 

Max. installed accessories 

Dropout time 

Max. operation rate 

Max. mechanical and electrical durability 

85–110% of the rated voltage at 47–63 Hz 

- 

1 front mount and 1 side mount auxiliary device for contactors 

1 auxiliary device for TeSys Control Relays 

150 ms 

20 operations/min. for LC1D09–LC1D32 

30 operations/min. for LC1D40–LC1D80 

250 000 operations 

Leakage current capability 6 ma maximum as per IEC 1131 

MTBF 

Standards 

100,000 hours 

Pickup performance per UL508 and IEC 60947 

Storage temperature -40 to +80 °C 

Operating temperature 

Relative humidity 

Maximum operating altitude 

SEMI F47-0999, cULus, CE, UL 508 

IEC 60947-5-1 (Control Circuit Devices and Switching Elements) 

IEC 60068 (Mechanical Environmental Testing) 

NSTA (Shipping and Handling) 

IEC 1000-4-2 Electrostatic Discharge 

IEC 1000-4-3 Electromagnetic Field 

IEC 1000-4-4 Fast Transient and Burst 

IEC 1000-4-5 Surge Immunity 

IEC 1000-4-6 Conducted RFI 

IEC 60068-2-6 Operational Vibration 

IEC 60068-2-27 Operational Shock 

0 to 40°C (ambient surrounding ride through module) 

5 to 95%, at 40°C (non-condensing) 

3000 meters 

1.51 

38.4 

90 

(Initial Condition = Nominal Voltage) 

80 

Typical Wiring Scheme for 3-Wire Control 

70 

L1 

LA9D941 

A1 

E1 

E2 

A2 

L2 

LADLVRT*** LC1D09Ð32 

14 13 A1 A2 LC1D40Ð80* 

Do not connect 

Percent Rated Control Voltage 

60 

50 

40 

30 

20 

10 

Must NOT Drop Out above this line 

Must Drop Out below this line 

SEMI Ride Through Standard 

Contactor Must Drop Out 

Contactor Must Ride Through 

0 

0.00 100.00 200.00 300.00 400.00 500.00 600.00 

Duration (msec) 

Curves Extend 

to 1000 ms 


109


Selection of Electronic Timers and Interface Modules 


LA4-DT 

LA4-DF 

LA4-DL 

LA4-DW 

LA4-DM 

LAD-4BB ** 

LC1-D09 D38 

LA4-DT 

LA4-DF LA4-DL LA4-DM 

LP1-D12,D25 

**See Cabling Accessories page 114. 

110 


11/02



q 

Electronic Serial Timer Modules (1) 

k 

k 

3-pole contactors LC1D09 to D38 and 4-pole contactors LC1DT20 to DT60: mounted using adaptor LAD4BB, to be ordered separately, 

see page 114. 

3-pole contactors LC1D40 to D150 and 4-pole contactors LC1D65 to D115: mounted directly across terminals A1 and A2 of contactor 

(screw mounting). 

On-delay Type 


AC 24 to 250 V 

LC1 

D09 to D38 (3P) 

and DT20 to DT60 (4P) 

100 to 250 V 

LC1 

D40 to D150 (3P) 

Time Catalog Number Weight lb (kg) 

0.1 to 2 s LA4DT0U 0.09 (0.040) 

1.5 to 30 s LA4DT2U 0.09 (0.040) 

25 to 500 s LA4DT4U 0.09 (0.040) 

Interface Modules 

k 3-pole contactors LC1D09 to D38 and 4-pole contactors LC1DT20 to DT60: mounted using adaptor LAD-4BB, to be ordered separately, 

see page 114. 

k 3-pole contactors LC1D40 to D150 and 4-pole contactors LC1D65 to D115: mounted directly across terminals A1 and A2 of contactor ( 

screw mounting). 

Relay Interface 


AC 24 to 250 V 

– 

LC1D09 to D150 (3P) 


AC 380 to 415 V 

LC1D09 to D150 (3P) 



E1-E2 (dc) 



24 V LA4DFBQ 0.12 (0.055) 

– 24 V LA4DFB 0.11 (0.050) 

Relay Interface with Manual Override Switch (output forced “ON”) 


AC 24 to 250 V 

LC1D09 to D150 (3P) 


Solid State Interface 

LC1D09 to D38 (3P) 


AC 100 to 250 V 

48 V LA4DFE 0.11 (0.050) 

Supply Voltage 

E1-E2 (dc) 



– 24 V LA4DLB 0.10 (0.045) 

48 V LA4DLE 0.10 (0.045) 

LC1D40 to D115 (3P) 24 V LA4DWB 0.10 (0.045) 

Auto-Man-Stop Control Modules 

For local override operation tests with two-position “Auto-Man” switch and “O-I” switch 

k 

k 

3-pole contactors LC1D09 to D38 and 4-pole contactors LC1DT20 to DT60: mounted using adaptor LAD-4BB, to be ordered separately, see 

page 114. 

3-pole contactors LC1D40 to D150 and 4-pole contactors LC1D65 to D115: mounted directly across terminals A1 and A2 of contactor 

(screw mounting). 

Operational voltage 

AC 24 to 100 V 

LC1D09 to D150 (3P) 


AC 100 to 250 V 

– 



LA4DMK 0.09 (0.040) 

– LC1D40 to D150 (3P) LA4DMU 0.09 (0.040) 

(1) For 24 V operation, the contactor must be fitted with a 21 V coil (code Z7). See pages 117. 



111


Selection of Coil Suppressor Modules 

Selection of Coil Suppressor Modules 

RC Circuits (resistor-capacitor) 

LAD4 

k 

k 

k 

Effective protection for circuits highly sensitive to “high frequency” interference. For use only in cases where the voltage is virtually sinusoidal, i.e. 

less than 5% total harmonic distortion. 

Voltage limited to 3 Uc maximum and oscillating frequency limited to 400 Hz maximum. 

Slight increase in drop-out time (1.2 to 2 times the normal time). 

Mounting 

Clip-on (3) 

Screw mounting(4) 

For use with Contactor (1) 

Type 

Rating Vac Vdc 

D09 to D38 (3P) 


DT20 to DT60 

D40 to D150 (3P) 


D40 to D115 (4P) 



24 to 48 – LAD4RCE 0.03 (0.012) 

110 to 250 – LAD4RCU 0.03 (0.012) 

24 to 48 – LA4DA2E 0.04 (0.018) 

50 to 127 – LA4DA2G 0.04 (0.018) 

110 to 250 – LA4DA2U 0.04 (0.018) 

380 to 415 – LA4DA2N 0.04 (0.018) 

Varistors (peak limiting) 

LA4D 

k 

k 

k 

Protection provided by limiting the transient voltage to 2 Uc max. 

Maximum reduction of transient voltage peaks. 

Slight increase in drop-out time (1.1 to 1.5 times the normal time). 

Clip-on (3) 

Screw mounting (4) 

D09 to D38 (3P) (2) 

DT20 to DT60 

D40 to D115 (3P) 


D40 to D115 (4P) 

D40 to D115 (3P) 


D40 to D115 (4P) 

24 to 48 – LAD4VE 0.03 (0.012) 

50 to 127 – LAD4VG 0.03 (0.012) 

110 to 250 – LAD4VU 0.03 (0.012) 

24 to 48 – LA4DE2E 0.04 (0.018) 

50 to 127 – LA4DE2G 0.04 (0.018) 

110 to 250 – LA4DE2U 0.04 (0.018) 

– 24 to 48 LA4DE3E 0.04 (0.018) 

– 50 to 127 LA4DE3G 0.04 (0.018) 

– 110 to 250 LA4DE3U 0.04 (0.018) 

Diodes 

k 

k 

k 

No over voltage or oscillating frequency. 

Increase in drop-out time (6 to 10 times the normal time). 

Polarized component. 

Clip-on (3) D12 and D25 (4P) – 12 to 250 LA4DC1U 0.03 (0.012) 


D40 to D95 (3P) 

D40 and D80 (4P) 

– 24 to 250 LA4DC3U 0.04 (0.018) 

Bidirectional peak limiting diode 

k 

k 

Protection provided by limiting the transient voltage to 2 Uc max. 

Maximum reduction of transient voltage peaks. 

Clip-on (3) 


D09 to D38 (3P) (2) 24 – LAD4TB 0.03 (0.012) 

DT20 to DT60 72 – LAD4TS 0.03 (0.012) 

D40 to D95 (3P) 24 – LA4DB2B 0.04 (0.018) 

D40 and D80 (4P) 72 – LA4DB2S 0.04 (0.018) 

D40 to D95 (3P) – 24 LA4DB3B 0.04 (0.018) 

D40 and D80 (4P) – 72 LA4DB3S 0.04 (0.018) 

(1) For satisfactory protection, a suppressor module must be installed across the coil of each contactor. 

(2) From LC1D09 to D38 and LC1DT20 to DT60, dc and low consumption 3-pole contactors are fitted with built-in suppression as standard. 

(3) Clipping-on makes the electrical connection. The overall size of the contactor remains unchanged. 

(4) Mounting at the top of the contactor on coil terminals A1 and A2. 


112 


11/02


Selection of Accessories for Contactors and Reversing Contactors 


Accessories for Main Pole and Control Connections 

LA9D3260 

LA9D11550• 

LA9D11560• 

Description 

Connectors for 

cable, sizes 

(1 connector) 

Connectors for 

cable, sizes 

(2 connectors) 

Connector for lug 

type terminals 

(2 connectors) 

Protective 

covers for 

lug type 

terminals 

Links for 

parallel 

connection of 

For Use on Contactors 

AC 

DC 

Sold In 

Lots Of 


Weight 

lb (kg) 

4-pole 10 mm 2 (8 AWG) D09, D12, DT20, DT25 D09, D12, DT20, DT25 1 LA9D1260 0.67 (0.030) 

3-pole 25 mm 2 (4 AWG) D09 to D38 D09 to D38 1 LA9D3260 0.09 (0.040) 

4-pole 25 mm 2 (4 AWG) DT32 to DT60 DT32 to DT60 1 LAD96060 0.13 (0.060) 

3-pole 120 mm 2 (250 MCM) D115, D150 D115, D150 1 LA9D115603B 1.2 (0.560) 

4-pole 120 mm 2 (250 MCM) D115 D115 1 LA9D115604 1.6 (0.740) 

3-pole D115, D150 D115, D150 1 LA9D115503B 0.66 (0.300) 

4-pole D115 D115 1 LA9D115504 0.80 (0.360) 

3-pole (1) D115, D150 D115, D150 1 LA9D115703 0.55 (0.250) 

4-pole (1) D115, D150 D115, D150 1 LA9D115704 0.66 (0.300) 

2 poles 

3 poles (star connection) 

4 poles 

D09 to D38 D09 to D38 10 LA9D2561 0.13 (0.060) 

DT20 & DT25 (4P) DT20 & DT25 (4P) 10 LA9D1261 0.03 (0.012) 

DT32 to DT60 (4P) DT32 to DT60 (4P) 10 LA9D2561 0.13 (0.060) 

D40 to D65 D40 to D65 2 LA9D40961 0.05 (0.021) 

D80, D95 D80 2 LA9D80961 0.13 (0.060) 

D09 to D38 D09 to D38 10 LAD9P3 (2) 0.01 (0.005) 

D80, D95 D80 1 LA9D80962 0.18 (0.080) 

DT20 to DT60 DT20 to DT60 2 LA9D1263 0.05 (0.024) 

D40 to D65 D40 to D65 2 LA9D40963 0.15 (0.070) 

D80, D95 D80 2 LA9D80963 0.22 (0.100) 

Staggered coil connection – D40 to D80 10 LA9D09966 0.01 (0.006) 

Control circuit take-off from main pole 

D40 to D65 D40 to D65 10 LA9D6567 0.02 (0.010) 

D80, D95 D80 10 LA9D8067 0.02 (0.010) 

Spreaders for increasing the pole pitch to 45 mm D115, D150 D115, D150 3 GV7AC03 0.4 (0.180) 

(1) For 3-pole contactors: 1 set of 6 covers, for 4-pole contactors: 1 set of 8 covers. 

(2) Separate connecting bar for connecting 2 poles in parallel. 

Dimensions: pages 122, 123 Schematics: pages 126, 127 

LA9D11570• 

LA9D80962 


113



GV2G245 

GV1G09 

LA9D941 

LAD9ET• 

XBY1U 

Sets of Contacts and Arc Chambers 

Description For Use on Contactors Catalog Number Weight lb (kg) 

Set of contacts 

Arc chambers 

Cabling Accessories 

For adapting existing wiring 

to a new product 

Set of 63 A busbars for 

paralleling of contactors 

3-pole LC1D115 LA5D1158031 0.60 (0.260) 

LC1D150 LA5D150803 0.60 (0.260) 

4-pole LC1D115004 LA5D115804 0.72 (0.330) 

3-pole 

LC1D115 LA5D11550 0.87 (0.395) 

LC1D150 LA5D15050B 0.87 (0.395) 

4-pole LC1D115004 LA5D115450B 1.03 (0.470) 

LC1D09 to D38 


LC1DT20 to DT60 

Without coil suppression LAD4BB 0.04 (0.019) 

With coil 

suppression 

ac 24 to 48 V LAD4BBVE 0.03 (0.014) 

ac 50 to 127 V LAD4BBVG 0.03 (0.014) 

ac 110 to 250 V LAD4BBVU 0.03 (0.014) 

2 contactors LC1D09 to D18 or D25 to D38 GV2G245 0.08 (0.036) 

4 contactors LC1D09 to D18 or D25 to D38 GV2G445 0.17 (0.077) 

Terminal block for supply to: One or more GV2G busbar sets GV1G09 0.09 (0.040) 

Protection Accessories 

Description Application Sold in Lots Of Catalog Number Weight lb (kg) 

Miniature fuse holder 5 x 20 with 4 A-250 V fuse 1 LA9D941 0.05 (0.025) 

Sealing cover For LADT, LADR 1 LA9D901 0.01 (0.005) 

Safety cover 

preventing access to the 

moving contact carrier 

LC1D09 to D38 and DT20 to DT60 1 LAD9ET1 0.06 (0.026) 

LC1D40 to D65 1 LAD9ET2 0.03 (0.012) 

LC1D80 and D95 1 LAD9ET3 0.008 (0.004) 

LC1D115 and D150 1 LAD9ET4 0.008 (0.004) 

Lens cap for safety cover LC1D09...D38 and DT20 to DT60 100 LAD9ECT1 0.002 (0.001) 

Marking Accessories 

Description Application Sold in Lots Of Catalog Number Weight lb (kg) 

Sheet of 80 blank labels 

self-adhesive, 8 x 33 (1) 


self-adhesive, 8 x 12 (1) 


for marking using plotter or 

8 x 33 engraver 

Sheet of 112 blank labels for 

marking using plotter or 8 x 12 mm 

engraver 

Label holder snap-in, 8 x 22 mm 

Bag of 300 blank labels 

self-adhesive, 7 x 21 mm 

Contactors (excluding 4-pole LC1-D65 to 

D115) LADN (4 contacts), LA6DK 

LADN (2 contacts), 

LADT, LADR, LRD 

Contactors (excluding 

4-pole LC1D65 to D115) 

LAD (4 contacts), LA6DK 

10 LAD21 0.04 (0.020) 

10 LAD22 0.04 (0.020) 

10 LAD23 0.11 (0.050) 

All products 35 LAD24 0.44 (0.200) 

4-pole contactors LC1D65 and D80, 

LA6DK 

100 LA9D92 0.002 (0.001) 

On holder LA9D92 1 LA9D93 0.002 (0.001) 

“SIS Label” label creation software Multi-language version (EN, FR, GE) q 1 XBY1U 0.13 (0.060) 

q 

System requirement: 486 processor or better; Windows 95, 98 or NT 4.0 or better. 

Mounting Accessories 

Mounting plate 

Set of shims 

For replacement of LC1F115 

or F150 by LC1D115 or D150 

For fitting side mounting blocks 

LAD8N on LC1D40 to D95 

(1) These legends are for sticking onto the safety cover of the contactors or add-on block, if fitted. 

1 LA9D730 0.80 (0.360) 

1 LA9D511 0.04 (0.020) 

114 


11/02


D-line Voltage Code Table 


D-line Voltage Code 

Voltage 

Frequency 

5 Low Consump 

DC 

12 

20 

24 

36 

42 

48 

60 

72 

96 

100 

D-line (see notes at end of table) 

LC1D09 - 

D38 

LC2D09 - 

D38 

Notes D1, D3 

LC1D40 - 

D95 

LC2D40 - 

D95 

Note D1 

LC1D115 - 

D150 

Note 

D1, D2, D4 

AL - - 

50/60 J7 - - 

50 - J5 - 

DC JD JD - 

Low Consump 

DC 

Wide Range 

DC 

JL - - 

- JW - 

50/60 - Z7 - 

50 - Z5 - 

60 - Z6 - 

DC - - - 

Low Consump 

DC 

ZL - - 

50/60 B7 B7 B7 

50 - B5 B5 

60 - B6 B6 

40-400 - - - 

DC BD BD BD 

Low Consump 

DC 

Wide Range 

DC 

BL - - 

- BW - 

50/60 CC7 - - 

DC CD CD - 

Wide Range 

DC 

- CW - 

50/60 D7 D7 D7 

50 - D5 D5 

60 - - - 

50/60 E7 E7 E7 

50 - E5 E5 

60 - E6 E6 

40-400 - - - 

DC ED ED ED 

Low Consump 

DC 

Wide Range 

DC 

EL - - 

- EW - 

50/60 - - - 

DC ND ND ND 

DC SD SD SD 

Low Consump 

DC 

Wide Range 

DC 

Low Consump 

DC 

SL - - 

- SW - 

DL - - 

50/60 K7 K7 - 

DC - - - 

D-line Voltage Code (Continued) 

Voltage 

110 

50/60 F7 F7 F7 

50 - F5 F5 

60 - F6 F6 

40-400 - - - 

DC FD FD FD 

Low Consump 

DC 

Wide Range 

DC 

FL - - 

- FW - 

110/127 40-400 - - - 

115 

120 

50/60 FE7 FE7 FE7 

50 - FE5 FE5 

40-400 - - - 

50/60 G7 G7 G7 

50 - - - 

60 - G6 G6 

40-400 - - - 

DC - - - 

Low Consump 

DC 

- - - 

125 DC GD GD GD 

127 

50/60 FC7 - FC7 

60 - G5 FC5 

40-400 - - - 

155 DC - - - 

174 DC - - - 

200 

200/208 

208 

220 

220/230 

220/240 

Frequency 

50/60 L7 L7 - 

DC - - - 

50/60 - - - 

60 - - - 

40-400 - - - 

50/60 LE7 - LE7 

60 L6 L6 L6 

40-400 - - - 

50/60 M7 M7 M7 

50 - - M5 

60 - M6 M6 

40-400 - - - 

DC MD MD MD 

Low Consump 

DC 

Wide Range 

DC 


LC1D09 - 

D38 

LC2D09 - 

D38 

Notes D1, D3 

LC1D40 - 

D95 

LC2D40 - 

D95 

Note D1 

LC1D115 - 

D150 

Note 

D1, D2, D4 

ML - - 

- MW - 

50/60 - - - 

50 - M5 - 

60 - - - 

40-400 - - - 

DC - - - 

40-400 - - - 

DC - - - 


115




Voltage 

230 

50/60 P7 P7 P7 

50 U7 P5 P5 

60 - - - 

40-400 - - - 

DC - - - 

230/240 50/60 - - - 

240 

250 

256 

277 

380 

380/400 

50/60 U7 U7 U7 

50 - U5 U5 

60 - U6 U6 

40-400 - - - 

DC - - - 

DC UD UD UD 

Low Consump 

DC 

UL - - 

50/60 - - - 

50 - W5 - 

50/60 W7 - UE7 

50 W6 W6 W6 

40-400 - - - 

50/60 Q7 Q7 Q7 

50 - - Q5 

60 - Q6 Q6 

40-400 - - - 

50/60 - - - 

50 - Q5 - 

60 - - - 

40-400 - - - 

DC - - - 

380/440 40-400 - - - 

400 

50/60 V7 V7 V7 

50 - V5 V5 

40-400 - - - 

400/415 50/60 - - - 

415 

415-440 

440 

50/60 N7 N7 N7 

50 - N5 N5 

40-400 - - - 

50 - - - 

40-400 - - - 

50/60 R7 R7 R7 

50 - R5 R5 

60 - R6 R6 

40-400 - - - 

DC RD RD RD 

440/460 DC - - - 

460/480 60 - - - 

480 

500 

575 

Frequency 


LC1D09 - 

D38 

LC2D09 - 

D38 

Notes D1, D3 

LC1D40 - 

D95 

LC2D40 - 

D95 

Note D1 

LC1D115 - 

D150 

Note 

D1, D2, D4 

50/60 T7 - T7 

50 - - - 

60 T6 T6 T6 

40-400 - - - 

50/60 S7 - S7 

50 - S5 S5 

40-400 - - - 

50/60 SC7 - - 

60 - S6 - 


Voltage 

600 

660 

50/60 X7 - - 

60 X6 X6 - 

40-400 - - - 

50 Y5 Y5 - 

60 - - - 

660/690 50/60 - - - 

Notes: 

Frequency 


LC1D09 - 

D38 

LC2D09 - 

D38 

Notes D1, D3 

LC1D40 - 

D95 

LC2D40 - 

D95 

Note D1 

D1 For operating ranges refer to technical data section of the D-line contactors. Ranges vary 

as a function of the current rating of the 

contactor and type of supply (AC/DC) 

D2 LC1-D150 Contactors utilize dual frequency 50/60 Hz. coils only. Single frequency coils 

are not available. 

D3 LC1D09 -LC1D38 contactors with DC coil have integral suppression device (bi-directional 

diode) as standard. 

D4 D115 and D150 coils have integral suppression device fitted as standard. 

LC1D115 - 

D150 

Note 

D1, D2, D4 

116 


11/02


Selection of AC Coils 


LXD1k 

AC Coils for 3-pole Contactors LC1D09 to D38 and LC1DT20 to DT60 


Control circuit voltage Uc Average resistance at 20 °C ± 10% Inductance of closed circuit Catalog Number (1) 

V Ω H 50/60 Hz 

Average consumption at 20 °C: 

- inrush (cos ϕ = 0.75) 70 VA, 

- sealed (cos ϕ = 0.3) 50 Hz: 7 VA, 60 Hz: 7.5 VA. 

Operating range (θ ≤ 60 °C): 50 Hz: 0.8 to 1.1 Uc, 60 Hz: 0.85 to 1.1 Uc. 


12 6.3 0.26 LXD1J7 0.15 (0.070) 

21 (2) 5.6 0.24 LXD1Z7 0.15 (0.070) 

24 6.19 0.26 LXD1B7 0.15 (0.070) 

32 12.3 0.48 LXD1C7 0.15 (0.070) 

36 12.83 LXD1CC7 0.15 (0.070) 

42 19.15 0.77 LXD1D7 0.15 (0.070) 

48 25 1 LXD1E7 0.15 (0.070) 

60 34.6 – LXD1EE7 0.15 (0.070) 

100 100.4 – LXD1K7 0.15 (0.070) 

110 130 5.5 LXD1F7 0.15 (0.070) 

115 129.8 – LXD1FE7 0.15 (0.070) 

120 159 6.7 LXD1G7 0.15 (0.070) 

127 192.5 7.5 LXD1FC7 0.15 (0.070) 

200 410.7 – LXD1L7 0.15 (0.070) 

208 417 16 LXD1LE7 0.15 (0.070) 

220 539 22 LXD1M7 0.15 (0.070) 

230 595 21 LXD1P7 0.15 (0.070) 

240 645 25 LXD1U7 0.15 (0.070) 

277 781 30 LXD1W7 0.15 (0.070) 

380 1580 60 LXD1Q7 0.15 (0.070) 

400 1810 64 LXD1V7 0.15 (0.070) 

415 1938 74 LXD1N7 0.15 (0.070) 

440 2242 79 LXD1R7 0.15 (0.070) 

480 2300 85 LXD1T7 0.15 (0.070) 

575 3432 119 LXD1SC7 0.15 (0.070) 

600 3600 135 LXD1X7 0.15 (0.070) 

690 5600 190 LXD1Y7 0.15 (0.070) 

(1) The last two digits of the reference represent the voltage code. 

(2) Voltage for special coils installed in contactors with serial timer modules, with 24 V supply. 


117

TeSys D-Line Contactors and Starters 


LX1D6k 

AC Coils for 3 or 4-pole Contactors LC1D40, D50, D65, D80, D95 


Control circuit 

voltage Uc 

Average resistance 

at 20 °C ± 10% 

Inductance of 

closed circuit 

Catalog 

Number (1) 

Average resistance 

at 20 °C ± 10% 

Inductance of 

closed circuit 

V Ω H 50 Hz W H 60 Hz 


- inrush (cos ϕ = 0.75) 50 Hz: 200 VA, 60 Hz: 220 VA, 

- sealed (cos ϕ = 0.3) 50 Hz: 20 VA, 60 Hz: 22 VA. 

Operating range (θ ≤ 55 °C): 0.85 to 1.1 Uc. 

Catalog 

Number (1) 


24 1.4 0.09 LX1D6B5 1.05 0.06 LX1D6B6 0.61 (0.280) 

32 2.6 0.16 LX1D6C5 – – – 0.61 (0.280) 

42 4.4 0.27 LX1D6D5 – – – 0.61 (0.280) 

48 5.5 0.35 LX1D6E5 4.2 0.23 LX1D6E6 0.61 (0.280) 

110 31 1.9 LX1D6F5 22 1.2 LX1D6F6 0.61 (0.280) 

115 31 1.9 LX1D6FE5 – – – 0.61 (0.280) 

120 – – – 28 1.5 LX1D6G6 0.61 (0.280) 

127 41 2.4 LX1D6G5 – – – 0.61 (0.280) 

208 – – – 86 4.3 LX1D6L6 0.61 (0.280) 

220 – – – 98 4.8 LX1D6M6 0.61 (0.280) 

220/230 127 7.5 LX1D6M5 – – – 0.61 (0.280) 

230 133 8.1 LX1D6P5 – – – 0.61 (0.280) 

240 152 8.7 LX1D6U5 120 5.7 LX1D6U6 0.61 (0.280) 

256 166 10 LX1D6W5 – – – 0.61 (0.280) 

277 – – – 157 8 LX1D6W6 0.61 (0.280) 

380 – – – 300 14 LX1D6Q6 0.61 (0.280) 

380/400 381 22 LX1D6Q5 – – – 0.61 (0.280) 

400 411 25 LX1D6V5 – – – 0.61 (0.280) 

415 463 26 LX1D6N5 – – – 0.61 (0.280) 

440 513 30 LX1D6R5 392 19 LX1D6R6 0.61 (0.280) 

480 – – – 480 23 LX1D6T6 0.61 (0.280) 

500 668 38 LX1D6S5 – – – 0.61 (0.280) 

575 – – – 675 33 LX1D6S6 0.61 (0.280) 

600 – – – 775 36 LX1D6X6 0.61 (0.280) 

660 1220 67 LX1D6Y5 – – – 0.61 (0.280) 



- inrush (cos ϕ = 0.75) 50/60 Hz: 245 VA at 50 Hz, 

- sealed (cos ϕ = 0.3) 50/60 Hz: 26 VA at 50 Hz. 

Operating range (θ ≤ 55 °C): 0.85 to 1.1 Uc. 

50/60 Hz 

24 – – – 1.22 0.08 LX1D6B7 0.61 (0.280) 

42 – – – 3.5 0.25 LX1D6D7 0.61 (0.280) 

48 – – – 5 0.32 LX1D6E7 0.61 (0.280) 

110 – – – 26 1.7 LX1D6F7 0.61 (0.280) 

115 – – – – – LX1D6FE7 0.61 (0.280) 

120 – – – 32 2 LX1D6G7 0.61 (0.280) 

220/230 (2) – – – 102 6.7 LX1D6M7 0.61 (0.280) 

230 – – – 115 7.7 LX1D6P7 0.61 (0.280) 

230/240 (3) – – – 131 8.3 LX1D6U7 0.61 (0.280) 

380/400 (4) – – – 310 20 LX1D6Q7 0.61 (0.280) 

400 – – – 349 23 LX1D6V7 0.61 (0.280) 

415 – – – 390 24 LX1D6N7 0.61 (0.280) 

440 – – – 410 27 LX1D6R7 0.61 (0.280) 

(1) The last two digits of the reference represent the voltage code. 

(2) For use on 230 V 50 Hz, apply a coefficient of 0.6 to the mechanical durability of the contactor (see page 82). This coil can be used on 240 V at 60 Hz. 

(3) This coil can be used on 220/240 V at 50 Hz and on 240 V only at 60 Hz. 

(4) For use on 400 V 50 Hz, apply a coefficient of 0.6 to the mechanical durability of the contactor. 

118 


11/02

Transient Voltage 

Surge Suppressors By: 

AC Distribution Panel Unit 

Series LSE 

Dedicated Protection Components And Circuitry For Each Mode 

Listed1283 

“Our Name Says It All” 

P.O. Box 674 

Destin, FL 32540-0674 

Phone: 888-987-8877 

Fax: 888-900-8879 

www.surgesuppression.com 

The Series LSE device is the workhorse of our product line. This fixed clamping type device is intended for 

general load applications at service entrance locations, main distribution panels, motor control centers and even 

individual equipment disconnects. It is intended as a first or second line of defense from high energy pulses 

entering the facility from outside. 

This economical device has many of the features that you would expect to find in devices costing many times its 

price. Its compact size makes installation a breeze and the warranty is the best in the industry. Add to all that, 

dedicated “all mode” circuitry and our exclusive, encapsulated Optimal Response Network (80kA per mode), to provide 

the lowest possible let-through voltages, and you get effective and reliable surge suppression that is the best value 

available anywhere. 

We believe that we offer the most versatile TVSS devices on the market with performance specs that are superior 

to our competitors and a warranty that is second to none. 

GENERAL 

Description: 

Parallel connected, fixed clamping type, transient voltage surge suppressor utilizing 

encapsulated Optimal Response Network circuitry, which provides the lowest possible 

Let-Through Voltages. 

Application: 

Designed for use at ANSI/IEEE Categories C, B and A with susceptibility up to medium 

exposure levels. Designed to protect all types of loads fed from distribution panels, branch 

panels and/or individual equipment panels. 

Warranty: 

25 Years Unlimited Free Replacement 

Unit Listings: UL 1449 Second Edition, CUL, UL 1283 

MECHANICAL 

Enclosure: 

Mounting: 

Connection Method: 

Shipping Weight: 

Steel, NEMA 12 (Steel NEMA 4 enclosure optional) 

Conduit fitting (internally threaded) and external mounting feet. 

#10 stranded wire. 

14lbs 

ELECTRICAL 

Circuit Design: Parallel connected, hybrid circuit design incorporating discrete all mode protection (10 

modes for 3 phase, 4 wire units). All protection circuits are completely encapsulated in our 

exclusive compound to assure long component life and complete protection from the 

environment and/or vibration. 

Protection Modes: 

Dedicated protection components and circuitry for each mode. Discrete L-N, L-L (Normal 

Mode), and Discrete L-G, N-G (Common Mode). 10 modes / 3 phase, 4 wire system. 

Input Power Frequency: 50-420Hz (60Hz typical) 

Response Time: 

MEASURED LIMITING VOLTAGE PERFORMANCE AND ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS 

Model Circuit Type MCOV 

LSE1P1 

LSE1S1 

LSE3Y1 

LSE3D1 

LSE3Y2 

LSE3N2 

LSE3N4 

120V, Single Ø 

(2 wire + ground) 

120/240V, Split Ø 


120/208V, 3ØY 


120/240V, 3Ø∆ 


277/480V, 3ØY 


240V, 3∅∆ 


480V, 3∅∆ 


150 L-N 

150 L-G 

150 N-G 

300 L-L 

150 L-N 

150 L-G 

150 N-G 

300 L-L 

150 L-N 

150 L-G 

150 N-G 

320 L-L 

150 L-N 

300 HiLeg-N 

150 L-G 

300 HiLeg-G 

150 N-G 

550 L-L 

320 L-N 

320 L-G 

320 N-G 

320 L-L 

320 L-G 

550 L-L 

550 L-G 

Peak Surge 

Current (Amps) 

Per Mode 

80,000 L-N 

80,000 L-G 

80,000 N-G 

240,000 Total 

80,000 L-L 

80,000 L-N 

80,000 L-G 

80,000 N-G 

480,000 Total 

80,000 L-L 

80,000 L-N 

80,000 L-G 

80,000 N-G 

800,000 Total 

80,000 L-L 

80,000 L-N 

80,000 L-G 

80,000 N-G 

800,000 Total 

80,000 L-L 

80,000 L-N 

80,000 L-G 

80,000 N-G 

800,000 Total 

80,000 L-L 

80,000 L-G 

480,000 Total 

80,000 L-L 

80,000 L-G 

480,000 Total 

Mode 

L-N 

L-G 

N-G 

L-L 

L-N 

L-G 

N-G 

L-L 

L-N 

L-G 

N-G 

L-L 

L-N 

HiLeg-N 

L-G 

HiLeg-G 

N-G 

L-L 

L-N 

L-G 

N-G 

A3 

6kV, 200A 

100KHz Ring Wave 

90º Phase Angle 

190 

200 

225 

460 

190 

200 

225 

505 

190 

200 

225 

460 

190 

505 

200 

505 

225 

711 

408 

408 

800 

ANSI/IEEE C62.41 & C62.45 

Let-Through Voltage Test Results 

B3/C1 

6kV, 3kA 

Impulse Wave 


380 

380 

530 

550 

380 

380 

530 

595 

380 

380 

530 

590 

380 

595 

380 

595 

530 

731 

538 

538 

930 

C3 

20kV, 10kA 

Impulse Wave 


Let-Through Voltage Test Environment: Positive Polarity. Time base=1ms. All voltages are peak (±10%). Surge voltages are measured from the insertion point of surge on 

the sine wave to the peak of the surge. All tests are Dynamic (voltage applied) except N-G which is static (no voltage applied). All tests were performed with 6 inches of lead 

length outside the device enclosure which simulates actual “as installed” performance. 

Single-pulse, surge current testing for all modes at rated currents, is in compliance with NEMA LS 1-1992. Single-pulse, surge current capacities of 200,000 amps or less are 

determined by single-unit testing of all components within each mode. Present industry test equipment limitations require testing of individual components or sub-assemblies 

within a mode for single-pulse, surge current capacities over 200,000 amps. 

L-L 

L-G 

L-L 

L-G 

460 

460 

590 

590 

711 

711 

731 

731 

670 

670 

960 

1020 

670 

670 

960 

1060 

670 

670 

960 

1020 

670 

1060 

670 

1060 

960 

800 

950 

970 

1400 

1060 

1020 

1400 

1320 

Because we are constantly seeking to improve our products, specifications are subject to change at any time. 

© 2002 Surge Suppression Incorporated. Specification Last Changed 10/02 LSE102302.doc

TECHNICAL DATA FOR 1PH115VSUPER & 1PH230VSUPER 

UNDERLOAD OR LACK OF FLUID 

Coyote shuts off the pump within one second of 

running dry, and automatically restarts the pump at 

any time you dial on the timer from one minute to 

twelve hours. 

trip delay reset delay 

1 second adjustable 

1 minute - 12 hours 

OVERLOAD 

Coyote's microprocessor circuit memorizes the normal 

running current of your pump's motor. If Coyote shuts 

down the pump due to excessive current, it will restart 

it sixty seconds later. If the motor draws normal 

current Coyote will allow it to run. If, however, after 

two consecutive attempts one minute apart the motor 

continues to draw excessive current, Coyote locks out 

the pump so as not to burn out a motor winding and 

the overload light changes from on steady to blinking. 

HORSEPOWER RATING 

1PH115VSUPER 1/3 - 1 HP 

1PH230VSUPER 1/3 - 2 HP 

OPERATING RANGE 

-20° to 70° C temperature 

0% to 95% humidity noncondensing 

OVERALL DIMENSIONS 

11 1/2"H x 6"W x 4"D 

(including mounting tab at top) 

trip amps trip delay reset delay 

150% of normal 1/4 second 60 seconds 

VOLTAGE FAULT 

Plus or minus 2% 

low voltage high voltage 

Model trip reset reset trip 

1PH115VSUPER 95V 100V 130V 135V 

1PH230VSUPER 190V 200V 260V 270V 

trip delay reset delay 

2 seconds 60 seconds 

RANDOM START 

When energizing Coyote by turning on power at 

circuit breaker or fused disconnect there is a delay of 4 

to 10 seconds before Coyote turns on the pump. This 

"random start" feature is designed to prevent many 

pumps served by a single power source from all 

restarting at the same instant when power is restored 

after a power outage. 

ALARM 

If you wish to ring a bell, light a light, or activate 

some other alarm, Coyote's normally open dry alarm 

contact closes on any fault condition. 

http://www.coyotemfg.com/index.htm

w w w.apc.com 

1 

Connect Battery 

Back-UPS 

® 

ES 350/500 

User’s Guide 

For safety, the Back-UPS ES is shipped with one battery wire disconnected. The Back-UPS ES will not operate until the wire is connected to the touch 

safe battery terminal. NOTE: Small sparks may occur during battery connection. This is normal. 

1 

® 

TURN the Back-UPS ES over and 

slide the battery compartment 

cover off of the battery housing. 

2 

LIFT the battery out of the compartment and connect the black wire to the negative (-) battery 

terminal. Ensure the batteries are installed as shown below. 

3 

Slide the battery compartment cover 

completely onto the Back-UPS ES. 

Back-UPS ES 350 

Back-UPS ES 500 

Battery Backup 

Surge Protection 

These outlets are powered whenever the Back-UPS ES is 

switched ON. During a power outage or other utility problems 

(brownouts, over-voltages), these outlets will be powered for a 

limited time by the Back-UPS ES. Plug your computer, monitor, 

and two other data-sensitive devices (external disk or tape drive) 

into these outlets. 

w w w.apc.com 

® 

Battery Backup 

Surge Protection 

AC LINE 

CORD 

2 

Connect Equipment 

Place the Back-UPS ES to avoid: 

- Direct sunlight 

- Excessive heat 

- Excessive humidity or contact with fluids 

Plug the Back-UPS ES power cord directly into a wall outlet; not a 

surge protector or power strip. 

Connect FAX/Modem/Phone 

Back-UPS ES protects a single line (2-wire) fax, modem or phone from 

surges when it is connected through the Back-UPS ES as shown. 

Connect Computer Cable 

The supplied cable and software provide automatic file saving and 

shutdown of the operating system in the case of a sustained power outage. 

Connect the cable to the Data Port of the Back-UPS ES. Connect the other 

end of the cable to the USB port on your computer. The software will 

automatically find the USB Port of your computer. 

POWER ON/ 

REPLACE BATTERY 

INDICATOR 

Back-UPS ES 

5 0 0 

Power On 

Replace Battery 

Surge Protection Only 

BUILDING WIRING 

FAULT INDICATOR 

FROM WALL JACK 

Building 

Wiring 

Fault 

Wall 

Outlet 

Circut Breaker 

Push to Reset 

CAUTION - Refer to bottom 

of unit for safety markings. 

DATALINE OUTPUT TO 

DSL MODEM or PHONE 

Modem/ 

Phone/Fax 

Data Port 

3 

Surge Protection Only 

These outlets provide full-time protection from surges even if 

the Back-UPS ES is switched OFF. Plug your printer, fax 

machine, scanner, or other peripherals that do not need 

battery power into these outlets. 

Power On and 

Install Software 

Press the ON/OFF switch to power the unit 

ON. 

A single short beep and the green “Power On” 

indicator confirms that Back-UPS ES is on and 

ready to provide protection. 

The Back-UPS ES should charge for at least 

16 hours to ensure sufficient runtime. The unit 

is being charged whenever it is connected to 

utility power, whether the unit is turned ON or 

OFF. 

If the red Building Wiring Fault indicator 

(located on the end near the power cord) is lit, 

your building wiring presents a shock hazard 

that should be corrected by a qualified 

electrician. 

Install the PowerChute Personal ® Edition 

software 

Place the PowerChute Personal Edition CD- 

ROM into your computer and follow the 

installation instructions on the screen. 

Status Indicators 

The Back-UPS ES indicates operating status using a combination of visual and audible indicators. 

Use the following table to identify the status of the Back-UPS ES. 

Status 

Power On - UPS is supplying conditioned 

utility power to the load. 

On Battery - UPS is supplying battery 

power to the load connected to the Battery 

outlets. 

Low Battery Warning - UPS is supplying 

battery power to the load connected to the 

Battery outlets and the battery is near 

exhaustion. 

Replace Battery - The battery is 

disconnected. 

The battery is in need of charging or is at 

the end of its usual life and must be 

replaced. 

Overload Shutdown - During On Battery 

operation a battery power supplied outlet 

overload was detected. 

TO COMPUTER 

USB PORT 

Sleep Mode - During On Battery operation 

the battery power has been completely 

exhausted and the UPS is waiting for utility 

power to return to normal. 

Building Wiring Fault - Your building 

wiring presents a shock hazard that should 

be corrected by a licensed electrician. 

Visual Indications 

(Power On - Green) 

(Replace Battery - Red) 

Audible Indication 

Alarm Terminates 

When 

Power On LED - ON None Not applicable. 

Power On LED - ON (off 

during beep) 

Power on LED - flashing 

Replace Battery LED - 

flashing 

Power On and Replace 

Battery LEDs- Flashing 

(alternating) 

Beeping 4 times every 

30 seconds 

Rapid beeping (every 

1/2 second) 

Constant tone 

Constant tone 

UPS transfers back to 

Power On operation, or 

when UPS is turned off. 

UPS transfers back to 

normal operation, or 

when UPS is turned off. 

UPS turned off with the 

power switch. 

None Constant tone UPS turned off with the 

power switch. 

None Beeping once every 4 

seconds 

Building Wiring Fault LED 

(red) - ON 

See the Troubleshooting section for additional assistance. 

CIRCUIT BREAKER 

PUSH TO RESET 

None 

Utility power is restored, 

or if utility power is not 

restored within 32 

seconds, or the UPS is 

turned off. 

UPS is unplugged, or is 

plugged into a properly 

wired outlet. 

990-1988 Copyright © 2005 American Power Conversion Corp. 

APC, Back-UPS and PowerChute are registered trademarks of American Power Conversion Corp. 

All other trademarks are property of their respective owners.

Troubleshooting 

Use the table below to solve minor Back-UPS ES installation or operation problems. Consult APC Online Technical Support or call APC 

Technical Support for assistance with problems that cannot be resolved using the table below: 

Problem Probable Cause Solution 

Back-UPS ES will not turn on. 

No power available at the Surge Protection 

Only outlets. 

Connected equipment loses power. 

The Power On indicator is lit and the Back- 

UPS ES is beeping four times every 30 

seconds. 

The Power On indicator flashes once per 

second and the Back-UPS ES beeps once 

per second at the same time. 

Building Wiring Fault indicator is lit. 

Inadequate runtime. 

Battery is disconnected and utility power is not available at 

the wall outlet. 

Surge Protection Only outlets have been overloaded. 

Utility power not available at the wall outlet. 

Equipment is connected to the “Surge Protection Only” 

outlets. 

The Back-UPS ES is overloaded. 

PowerChute Personal Edition software has performed a 

shutdown due to a power failure. 

The Back-UPS ES has exhausted its available battery 

power. 

Connected equipment does not accept the stepapproximated 

sine waveform the Back-UPS ES. 

The Back-UPS ES may require service. 

The Back-UPS ES is using battery. 

Battery capacity is low (about 2 minutes of use remaining). 

Your building wiring presents a shock hazard. Using the 

Back-UPS with this condition will void the warranty. 

The battery is not fully charged. 

Battery is near the end of useful life. 

Connect the battery (see Connect Battery) and ensure power is available at the wall 

outlet. 

Reduce the amount of equipment plugged into Surge Protection Only outlets. 

Ensure that the fuse or circuit breaker for the outlet is not tripped, and that the wall 

switch controlling the outlet (if any) is in the ON position. 

Ensure that the equipment you want to stay powered during a power failure is 

plugged into the “Battery Backup/Surge Protection” outlets and NOT the “Surge 

Protection Only” outlets. 

Make sure that the equipment plugged into the outlets of the unit are not 

overloading the capacity of the unit. Try removing some of the equipment and see if 

the problem continues. 

The Back-UPS ES is operating normally. 

The Back-UPS ES can only operate on battery power for a limited amount of time. 

The unit will eventually turn off when the available battery power has been used. 

Allow the unit to recharge for 16 hours before continuing use of the unit. 

The output waveform is designed for computers and computer-related equipment. It 

is not designed for use with motor-type equipment. 

Contact APC Technical Support for further troubleshooting. 

The Back-UPS ES is operating normally and using battery power. Once On Battery, 

you should save your current work, power down your equipment, and turn the unit 

OFF. Once normal power is restored, you may turn the unit back ON and power 

your equipment. 

The Back-UPS ES is about to shut off due to a low battery charge condition! When 

the unit beeps once every second, the battery has about 2 minutes of power 

remaining. Immediately power down your computer and turn the unit OFF. When 

normal power returns, the unit will recharge the battery. 

Call a qualified electrician for service. 

Allow the unit to charge by leaving it plugged into the wall at least 16 hours. 

As a battery ages, the amount of runtime available will decrease. You can replace 

the battery by ordering one at www.apc.com. Batteries also age prematurely if the 

Back-UPS ES is placed near excessive heat. 


Item Specification BE350R BE500R 

Input Voltage 120 Vrms Nominal 

Frequency 

Brownout Transfer 

Over-voltage Transfer 

50 - 60 Hz (autosensing) 

88 Vrms, typical 

139 Vrms, typical 

Output UPS Capacity (4 outlets) 350 VA / 200 W 500 VA / 300 W 

Surge Capacity (8 outlets) 

Voltage 

On Battery 

Frequency - On Battery 

Transfer Time 

Protection and Filter AC Surge Protection 

Telephone Surge Protection 

EMI/RFI Filter 

AC Input 

12 Amps (including UPS output) 

115 Vrms + 8% 

(step-approximated sine wave) 

50-60 Hz + 1 Hz 

6 ms typical, 10 ms maximum 

Full time, 375 joules 

Single line (2-wire) 

Full time 

Resettable circuit breaker 

Battery Type Sealed, maintenance-free lead acid 

Average Life 

3 - 5 years depending on the number of discharge 

cycles and environmental temperature 

Physical Net Weight 9 lbs. (4 kg.) 13 lbs. (6 kg.) 

Dimensions (H x W x D) 3.4" x 10.9" x 7.1" 

(8.6 x 27.7 x 18.0 cm) 

Operating Temperature +32 o F to 104 o F (0 o C to 40 o C) 

Storage Temperature +5 o F to 113 o F (-15 o C to 45 o C) 

Operating Relative Humidity 

Operating Elevation 

0 to 95% non-condensing 

0 to 10,000 ft (0 to 3,000m) 

Safety/Regulatory Safety Approvals UL 1778 listed, cUL certified per 

CSA standard C22.2 No. 107.1, NOM-001 

EMC Compliance 

FCC part 68, FCC part 15 Class B 

Notice: This device complies with part 15 of 

the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the 

following two conditions: (1) This device may 

not cause harmful interference, and (2) This 

device must accept any interference received, 

including interference that may cause 

undesired operation. 

On the bottom of this equipment is a label that 

contains, among other information, the FCC 

registration number and ringer equivalence 

number (REN) for this equipment. If 

requested, this information must be provided 

to the telephone company. 

Order Replacement Battery 

Replace with an APC qualified battery. Replacement batteries can be ordered from 

www.apc.com (valid credit card required). For a Back-UPS ES 350, order RBC35 as 

directed by APC Technical Support. For a Back-UPS ES 500, order RBC2. 

Warranty 

The standard warranty is 3 years from the date of purchase. APC’s standard 

procedure is to replace the original unit with a factory reconditioned unit. Customers 

who must have the original unit back due to assigned asset tags and set depreciation 

schedules must declare such a need at first contact with APC Technical Support. APC 

will ship the replacement unit once the defective unit is received by the repair 

department or cross-ship upon the provision of a valid credit card number. The 

customer pays for shipping to APC, and APC pays ground freight transportation costs 

back to the customer. 

Service 

Please DO NOT RETURN Back-UPS ES to the place of purchase under any 

circumstances. 

1. Consult the Troubleshooting section to eliminate common problems. 

2. Verify the battery is connected (see Connect Battery) and that the Circuit Breaker is 

not tripped (see Troubleshooting section). 

If you still have problems or questions, please contact APC via the internet or at one of 

the phone numbers listed below. 

3. Before contacting APC, please be sure to record the date purchased, UPS model, 

and serial number (on bottom of unit). 

4. Be prepared to troubleshoot the problem over the telephone with a Technical 

Support Representative. If this is not successful, the representative will issue a Return 

Material Authorization Number (RMA#) and a shipping address. 

5. Pack the unit in its original packaging. If the original packaging is not available, ask 

APC Technical Support about obtaining a new set. Pack the unit properly to avoid 

damage in transit. Never use foam beads for packaging. Damage sustained in transit 

is not covered under warranty (insuring the package for full value is recommended). 

6. Write the RMA# on the outside of the package. 

7. Return the unit by insured carrier to the address given to you by APC Technical 

Support. 

APC Contact Information 

Online Technical Support http://support.apc.com 

Web Site 

www.apc.com 

USA/Canada 1.800.800.4272 

Mexico +52.292.0253 / 52.292.0255 

Brazil +0800.12.72.1 

Worldwide +1.401.789.5735 

6.50 in. 

(165 mm) 

Wall Mounting Template

MicroLogix 1100 

Programmable 

Controllers 

Bulletin 1763 Controllers and 1762 

Expansion I/O 

User Manual

Important User Information 

Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of 

electromechanical equipment. Safety Guidelines for the Application, 

Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls (Publication SGI-1.1 

available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at 

http://www.ab.com/manuals/gi) describes some important differences 

between solid state equipment and hard-wired electromechanical devices. 

Because of this difference, and also because of the wide variety of uses for 

solid state equipment, all persons responsible for applying this equipment 

must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is 

acceptable. 

In no event will Rockwell Automation, Inc. be responsible or liable for 

indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of 

this equipment. 

The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative 

purposes. Because of the many variables and requirements associated with 

any particular installation, Rockwell Automation, Inc. cannot assume 

responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams. 

No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation, Inc. with respect to 

use of information, circuits, equipment, or software described in this manual. 

Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without 

written permission of Rockwell Automation, Inc. is prohibited. 

Throughout this manual we use notes to make you aware of safety 

considerations. 

WARNING 

Identifies information about practices or circumstances 

that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment, 

which may lead to personal injury or death, property 

damage, or economic loss. 

IMPORTANT 

Identifies information that is critical for successful 

application and understanding of the product. 

ATTENTION 

Identifies information about practices or circumstances 

that can lead to personal injury or death, property 

damage, or economic loss. Attentions help you: 

• identify a hazard 

• avoid a hazard 

• recognize the consequence 

SHOCK HAZARD 

Labels may be located on or inside the drive to alert 

people that dangerous voltage may be present. 

BURN HAZARD 

Labels may be located on or inside the drive to alert 

people that surfaces may be dangerous temperatures.


Preface Who Should Use this Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-1 

Purpose of this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-1 

Related Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-2 

Common Techniques Used in this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-2 

Chapter 1 

Hardware Overview Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 

Component Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 

MicroLogix 1100 Memory Module and Built-in Real-Time 

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 

1762 Expansion I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 

Communication Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 

Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 

Firmware Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 

Communication Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 

Chapter 2 

Installing Your Controller Agency Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 

Compliance to European Union Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 

EMC Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 

Low Voltage Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 

Installation Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 

Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 

Hazardous Location Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 

Disconnecting Main Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 

Safety Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 

Power Distribution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 

Periodic Tests of Master Control Relay Circuit . . . . . . . . 2-5 

Power Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 

Isolation Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 

Power Supply Inrush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 

Loss of Power Source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 

Input States on Power Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 

Other Types of Line Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 

Preventing Excessive Heat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 

Master Control Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 

Using Emergency-Stop Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 

Schematic (Using IEC Symbols) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 

Schematic (Using ANSI/CSA Symbols). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 

Installing a Memory Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 

Using the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 

Connecting the Battery Wire Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 

Controller Mounting Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 

Controller and Expansion I/O Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 

Mounting the Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 

DIN Rail Mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 

Panel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 

i Publication 1763-UM001A-EN-P - August 2005


ii 

1762 Expansion I/O Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 

Mounting 1762 Expansion I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 

DIN Rail Mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 

Panel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 

Connecting Expansion I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 

Chapter 3 

Wiring Your Controller Wiring Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 

Wiring Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 

Wiring the Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 

Using Surge Suppressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 

Recommended Surge Suppressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 

Grounding the Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 

Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 

Terminal Block Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 

Terminal Groupings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 

Sinking and Sourcing Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 

1763-L16AWA, 1763-L16BWA and 1763-L16BBB 

Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 

Controller I/O Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 

Minimizing Electrical Noise. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 

Wiring Your Analog Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 

Analog Channel Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 

Minimizing Electrical Noise on Analog Channels . . . . . . 3-13 

Grounding Your Analog Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 

Expansion I/O Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 

Digital Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 

Analog Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 

Chapter 4 

Communication Connections Supported Communication Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 

Default Communication Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 

Using the Communications Toggle Functionality . . . . . . . . 4-2 

Changing Communication Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 

Connecting to the RS-232 Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 

Making a DF1 Point-to-Point Connection . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 

Using a Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 

Connecting to a DF1 Half-Duplex Network. . . . . . . . . . 4-11 

Connecting to a DH-485 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 

DH-485 Configuration Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 

Recommended Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 

DH-485 Communication Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 

Connecting the Communication Cable to the DH-485 

Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 

Grounding and Terminating the DH-485 Network . . . . . 4-18 

Publication 1763-UM001A-EN-P - August 2005


iii 

Connecting the AIC+. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 

Cable Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 

Recommended User-Supplied Components. . . . . . . . . . 4-22 

Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24 

Installing and Attaching the AIC+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24 

Powering the AIC+. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25 

Connecting to DeviceNet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27 

Cable Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27 

Connecting to Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28 

Ethernet Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28 

Chapter 5 

Using the LCD Operating Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 

Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 

Startup Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 

Main Menu and Default Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 

Operating Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 

Using Menus to Choose Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 

Selecting Between Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 

Cursor Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 

Setting Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 

I/O Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 

Viewing I/O Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 

Monitoring Bit File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 

Target Bit File Number (TBF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 

Monitoring a Bit File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 

Monitoring Integer File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 

Target Integer File Number (TIF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 

Monitoring an Integer File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 

Using the Mode Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 

Controller Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 

Changing Mode Switch Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26 

Using a User Defined LCD Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28 

User Defined LCD Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29 

Configuring Advanced Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31 

Changing Key In Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31 

Key In Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31 

Changing Key In Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32 

Using Communications Toggle Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34 

Viewing Ethernet Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34 

Using Trim Pots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36 

Trim Pot Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36 

Changing Data Value of a Trim Pot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36 

Trim Pot Configuration in LCD Function File. . . . . . . . . 5-38 

Error Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38 

Viewing System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39 



iv 

Viewing Fault Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40 

Using Real-Time Clock and 

Memory Modules 

Chapter 6 

Real-Time Clock Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 

Operation at Power-up and Entering a Run or Test Mode 6-1 

Writing Data to the Real-Time Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 

RTC Battery Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 

Memory Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 

User Program , User Data and Recipe Back-up . . . . . . . 6-3 

Program Compare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 

Data File Download Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 

Memory Module Write Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 

Removal/Insertion Under Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 

Memory Module Information File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 

Program /Data Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 

Program /Data Upload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 

Chapter 7 

Online Editing Overview of Online Editing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 

Online Editing Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 

Effects of Online Editing On Your System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 

System Impacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 

Data Table File Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 

Online Edit Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 

Directions and Cautions for MicroLogix 1100 Online Edit User . 

7-5 

Change the RSLinx "Configure CIP Option" . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 

A Download Before Starting Online Edit. . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 

Types of Online Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 

Edit Functions in Runtime Online Editing . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 

Edit Functions in Program Online Editing . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 

Appendix A 

Specifications Controller Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1 

Expansion I/O Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8 

Digital I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8 

Analog Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14 

Appendix B 

Replacement Parts MicroLogix 1100 Replacement Kits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1 

Lithium Battery (1763-BA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2 

Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2 

Battery Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3 

Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3 

Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3 



v 

Disposing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5 

1762 Expansion I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6 

Expansion I/O Replacement Doors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6 

Expansion I/O Replacement DIN Latches . . . . . . . . . . . B-6 

Expansion I/O Replacement Door Labels . . . . . . . . . . . B-6 

Appendix C 

Troubleshooting Your System Understanding the Controller Indicator Status. . . . . . . . . . . C-1 

Controller Status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1 

Status Indicators on the LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2 

I/O Status Indicators on the LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3 

Normal Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3 

Error Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3 

Controller Error Recovery Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5 

Analog Expansion I/O Diagnostics and Troubleshooting. . . C-6 

Module Operation and Channel Operation . . . . . . . . . . C-6 

Power-up Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6 

Critical and Non-Critical Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7 

Module Error Definition Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7 

Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9 

Calling Rockwell Automation for Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . C-10 

Using Control Flash to Upgrade 

Your Operating System 

Connecting to Networks via 

RS-232/RS-485 Interface 

Appendix D 

Preparing for Upgrade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1 

Install ControlFlash Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1 

Prepare the Controller for Updating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2 

Sequence of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2 

Missing/Corrupt OS LED Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3 

Appendix E 

RS-232 Communication Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1 

DF1 Full-Duplex Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1 

DF1 Half-Duplex Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-2 

DF1 Half-Duplex Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-2 

Considerations When Communicating as a DF1 Slave 

on a Multi-drop Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-4 

Using Modems with MicroLogix 1100 Programmable 

Controllers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-5 

DH-485 Communication Protocol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-7 

DH-485 Configuration Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-7 

Devices that use the DH-485 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-8 

Important DH-485 Network Planning Considerations. . . E-9 

Example DH-485 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-13 

Modbus Communication Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-15 

ASCII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-15 



vi 

Connecting to Networks via 

Ethernet Interface 

Appendix F 

MicroLogix 1100 Controllers and Ethernet Communication . F-1 

MicroLogix 1100 Performance Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . F-2 

MicroLogix 1100 and PC Connections to the Ethernet Network . 

F-3 

Ethernet Network Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-3 

Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-3 

Ethernet Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-3 

Configuring the Ethernet Channel on the MicroLogix 1100 . F-4 

Configuration Using RSLogix 500 Programming Software . . F-5 

Configuration Via BOOTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-5 

Using the Rockwell BOOTP/DHCP Utility. . . . . . . . . . . F-7 

Using a DHCP Server To Configure Your Processor . . . . . . F-9 

Using Subnet Masks and Gateways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-9 

Manually Configuring Channel 1 for Controllers on Subnets. 

F-11 

MicroLogix 1100 Embedded Web Server Capability . . . . . F-12 

System Loading and Heat 

Dissipation 

Appendix G 

System Loading Calculations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1 

System Loading Example Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-2 

System Loading Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-4 

Current Loading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-4 

Calculating Heat Dissipation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-6 

Glossary 

Index Rockwell Automation Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 

Installation Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 

New Product Satisfaction Return. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 


Preface 

Read this preface to familiarize yourself with the rest of the manual. It 

provides information concerning: 

• who should use this manual 

• the purpose of this manual 

• related documentation 

• conventions used in this manual 

• Rockwell Automation support 

Who Should Use this 

Manual 

Use this manual if you are responsible for designing, installing, 

programming, or troubleshooting control systems that use 

MicroLogix 1100 controllers. 

You should have a basic understanding of electrical circuitry and 

familiarity with relay logic. If you do not, obtain the proper training 

before using this product. 

Purpose of this Manual 

This manual is a reference guide for MicroLogix 1100 controllers and 

expansion I/O. It describes the procedures you use to install, wire, 

and troubleshoot your controller. This manual: 

• explains how to install and wire your controllers 

• gives you an overview of the MicroLogix 1100 controller system 

Refer to Publication 1763-RM001, MicroLogix 1100 Programmable 

Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual for the MicroLogix 1100 

instruction set and for application examples to show the instruction 

set in use. Refer to your RSLogix 500 programming software user 

documentation for more information on programming your 

MicroLogix 1100 controller. 

1 Publication 1763-UM001A-EN-P - August 2005

P-2 Preface 

Related Documentation 

The following documents contain additional information concerning 

Rockwell Automation products. To obtain a copy, contact your local 

Rockwell Automation office or distributor. 

For Read this Document Document Number 

Information on understanding and applying micro controllers. MicroMentor 1761-MMB 

Information on the MicroLogix 1100 Controllers instruction set. 

Information on mounting and wiring the MicroLogix 1100 

Controllers, including a mounting template for easy installation. 

A description on how to install and connect an AIC+. This manual 

also contains information on network wiring. 

MicroLogix 1100 Programmable 

Controllers Instruction Set Reference 

Manual 

MicroLogix 1100 Programmable 

Controllers Installation Instructions 

Advanced Interface Converter (AIC+) 

User Manual 

1763-RM001 

1763-IN001 

1761-6.4 

Information on how to install, configure, and commission a DNI. DeviceNet Interface User Manual 1761-6.5 

Information on DF1 open protocol. 

DF1 Protocol and Command Set 

Reference Manual 

1770-6.5.16 

Information about the Modbus protocol. Modbus Protocol Specifications Available from 

www.modbus.org 

In-depth information on grounding and wiring Allen-Bradley 

programmable controllers. 

A description of important differences between solid-state 

programmable controller products and hard-wired electromechanical 

devices. 

Allen-Bradley Programmable 

Controller Grounding and Wiring 

Guidelines 

Application Considerations for 

Solid-State Controls 

1770-4.1 

SGI-1.1 

An article on wire sizes and types for grounding electrical 

equipment. 

National Electrical Code - Published by the National Fire Protection 

Association of Boston, MA. 

A complete listing of current documentation, including ordering 

instructions. Also indicates whether the documents are available on 

CD-ROM or in multi-languages. 

A glossary of industrial automation terms and abbreviations. 

Allen-Bradley Publication Index 

Allen-Bradley Industrial Automation 

Glossary 

SD499 

AG-7.1 

Common Techniques Used 

in this Manual 

The following conventions are used throughout this manual: 

• Bulleted lists such as this one provide information, not 

procedural steps. 

• Numbered lists provide sequential steps or hierarchical 

information. 

• Italic type is used for emphasis. 


Chapter 1 

Hardware Overview 

Hardware Features 

The Bulletin 1763, MicroLogix 1100 programmable controller contains 

a power supply, input and output circuits, a processor, an isolated 

combination RS-232/485 communication port, and an Ethernet port. 

Each controller supports 18 I/O points (10 digital inputs, 2 analog 

inputs, and 6 discrete outputs). 

The hardware features of the controller are: 

Side View 

Top View 

6 

5 

12 

8 

4 

11 

7 

ESC 

OK 

3 

9 

2 

10 

1 

Table 1.1 Hardware Features 

Feature Description Feature Description 

1 Output Terminal Block 7 LCD Keypad 

(ESC, OK, Up, Down, Left, Right) 

2 Battery Connector 8 Status LEDs 

3 Bus Connector Interface to Expansion I/O 9 Memory Module Port Cover (1) -or- 

Memory Module (2) 

4 Battery 10 DIN Rail Latches 

5 Input Terminal Block 11 RS-232/485 Communication Port 

(Channel 0, isolated) 

6 LCD 12 Ethernet Port 

(Channel 1) 

(1) 

Shipped with controller. 

(2) Optional equipment. 


1-2 Hardware Overview 

Table 1.2 Controller Input Power and Embedded I/O 

Catalog Number Description 

Input Power Digital Inputs Analog Inputs Digital Outputs 

1763-L16AWA 120/240V ac (10) 120V ac (2) voltage input (6) relay 

0 to 10V dc 

1763-L16BWA 120/240V ac (6) 24V dc 

(2) voltage input 

(4) high-speed 24V dc (1) 0 to 10V dc 

1763-L16BBB 24V dc (6) 24V dc 

(2) voltage input 

(4) high-speed 24V dc (1) 0 to 10V dc 

All individually isolated 

(6) relay 

All individually isolated 

(2) relay (isolated) 

(2) 24V dc FET 

(2) high-speed 24V dc FET 

(1) 

The 4 high-speed inputs (inputs 0 through 3) can be used individually for pulse catch/latching inputs or combined as a high speed counter. Refer to Digital Input 

Specifications on page A-2 and the MicroLogix 1100 Instruction Set Reference Manual, publication 1763-RM001, for more information. 

Component Descriptions 

MicroLogix 1100 Memory Module and Built-in Real-Time Clock 

The controller has a built-in real-time clock to provide a reference for 

applications that need time-based control. 

The controller is shipped with a memory module port cover in place. 

You can order a memory module, 1763-MM1, as an accessory. The 

memory module provides optional backup of your user program and 

data, and is a means to transport your programs between controllers. 

The program and data in your MicroLogix 1100 is non-volatile and is 

stored when the power is lost to the controller. The memory module 

provides additional backup that can be stored separately. The memory 

module does not increase the available memory of the controller. 

Table 1.3 Memory Module 


1763-MM1 

Description 

Memory Module 


Hardware Overview 1-3 

1762 Expansion I/O 

1762 expansion I/O can be connected to the MicroLogix 1100 

controller, as shown below. 

at 

TIP 

A maximum of four I/O modules, in any 

combination, can be connected to a controller. See 

Appendix G to determine how much heat a certain 

combination generates. 

1762 Expansion I/O 1762 Expansion I/O Connected to MicroLogix 1100 Controller 

Table 1.4 Expansion I/O 


Digital: 

1762-IA8 

1762-IQ8 

1762-IQ16 

1762-OA8 

1762-OB8 

1762-OB16 

1762-OW8 

1762-OW16 

1762-OX6I 

Analog: 

1762-IF4 

1762-OF4 

1762-IF2OF2 

Temperature: 

1762-IR4 

1762-IT4 

Description 

8-Point 120V ac Input Module 

8-Point Sink/Source 24V dc Input Module 

16-Point Sink/Source 24V dc Input Module 

8-Point 120/240V ac Triac Output Module 

8-Point Sourcing 24V dc Output Module 

16-Point Sourcing 24V dc Output Module 

8-Point AC/DC Relay Output Module 

16-Point AC/DC Relay Output Module 

6-Point Isolated AC/DC Relay Output Module 

4-Channel Voltage/Current Analog Input Module 

4-Channel Voltage/Current Analog Output Module 

Combination 2-Channel Input 2-Channel Output 

Voltage/Current Analog Module 

4-Channel RTD/Resistance Input Module 

4-Channel Thermocouple/mV Input Module 



Communication Cables 

Use only the following communication cables with the MicroLogix 

1100 controllers. These cables are required for Class I Div. 2 

applications. 

• 1761-CBL-AM00 Series C or later 

• 1761-CBL-AP00 Series C or later 

• 1761-CBL-PM02 Series C or later 

• 1761-CBL-HM02 Series C or later 

• 2707-NC9 Series C or later 

• 1763-NC01 Series A or later 

ATTENTION 

UNSUPPORTED CONNECTION 

Do not connect a MicroLogix 1100 controller to 

another MicroLogix family controller such as 

MicroLogix 1000, MicroLogix 1200, MicroLogix 1500, 

or the network port of a 1747-DPS1 Port Splitter 

using a 1761- CBL-AM00 (8-pin mini-DIN to 8-pin 

mini-DIN) cable or equivalent. 

This type of connection will cause damage to the 

RS-232/485 communication port (Channel 0) of the 

MicroLogix 1100 and/or the controller itself. The 

communication pins used for RS-485 

communications on the MicroLogix 1100 are 

alternately used for 24V power on the other 

MicroLogix controllers and the network port of the 

1747-DPS1. 


Hardware Overview 1-5 

Programming 

Programming the MicroLogix 1100 controller is done using RSLogix 

500, Revision 7.0 or later. Communication cables for programming are 

available separately from the controller and software. 

Firmware Revision History 

Features are added to the controllers through firmware upgrades. Use 

the listing below to be sure that your controller’s firmware is at the 

level you need. Firmware upgrades are not required, except to allow 

you access to the new features. 


Catalog 

Number 

1763-L16AWA 

1763-L16BWA 

1763-L16BBB 

OS (1) 

Series 

Letter 

OS 

Revision 

Letter 

OS 

Firmware 

Release No. 

Release Date 

Enhancement 

A A FRN1 August 2005 Initial product release. 

(1) OS = Operating System. 



Communication Options 

The MicroLogix 1100 controllers provide two communications ports, 

an isolated combination RS-232/485 communication port (Channel 0) 

and an Ethernet port (Channel 1). 

The isolated Channel 0 port on the MicroLogix 1100 can be connected 

to the following: 

• operator interfaces, personal computers, etc. using DF1 Full 

Duplex point-to-point 

• a DH-485 network 

• a DF1 Radio Modem network 

• a DF1 Half Duplex network as an RTU Master or RTU Slave 

• a Modbus network as an RTU Master or RTU Slave 

• a DeviceNet network as a slave or peer using a DeviceNet 

Interface (catalog number 1761-NET-DNI) 

• an Ethernet network using the Ethernet Interface module 

(catalog number 1761-NET-ENI, or 1761-NET-ENIW) 

When connecting to a DH-485 network or a Modbus network, the 

MicroLogix 1100 can be connected directly via Channel 0 (without an 

Advanced Interface Converter, catalog number 1761-NET-AIC). 

However, for a DF1 Half Duplex network, it needs AIC+. The Channel 

0 combo port provides both RS-232 and RS-485 isolated connections. 

The appropriate electrical interface is selected through your choice of 

communication cable. The existing MicroLogix 1761 communication 

cables provide an interface to the RS-232 drivers. The 1763-NC01 

cable provides an interface to the RS-485 drivers (for DH-485 and 

Modbus RTU Master and RTU slave networks). 

The controller may also be connected to serial devices, such as bar 

code readers, weigh scales, serial printers, and other intelligent 

devices, using ASCII. See Default Communication Configuration on 

page 4-2 for the configuration settings for Channel 0. 

The MicroLogix 1100 supports Ethernet communication via the 

Ethernet communication Channel 1. You can connect your controller 

to a local area network that provides communication between various 

devices at 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps. This port supports CIP explicit 

messaging (message exchange) only. The controller cannot be used 

for CIP implicit messaging (real-time I/O messaging). The controller 

also includes an embedded web server which allows viewing of not 

only module information, TCP/IP configuration, and diagnostic 

information, but also includes the data table memory map and data 

table monitor screen using a standard web browser. 

See Chapter 4 for more information on connecting to the available 

communication options. 


Chapter 2 

Installing Your Controller 

This chapter shows you how to install your controller. The only tools 

you require are a flat or Phillips head screwdriver and drill. Topics 

include: 

• agency certifications 

• compliance to European Union Directives 

• installation considerations 

• safety considerations 

• power considerations 

• preventing excessive heat 

• master control relay 

• installing a memory module 

• using the battery 

• controller mounting dimensions 

• controller and expansion I/O spacing 

• mounting the controller 

• mounting 1762 expansion I/O 

• connecting 1762 expansion I/O 

Agency Certifications • UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment for use in Class I, 

Division 2, Hazardous Locations, Groups A, B, C, D 

• C-UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment for use in Canada 

• CE marked for all applicable directives 

• C-Tick marked for all applicable acts 

Compliance to European 

Union Directives 

This product has the CE mark and is approved for installation within 

the European Union and EEA regions. It has been designed and tested 

to meet the following directives. 


2-2 Installing Your Controller 

EMC Directive 

This product is tested to meet Council Directive 89/336/EEC 

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) and the following standards, in 

whole or in part, documented in a technical construction file: 

• EN 61000-6-4 

EMC - Part 6-4: Generic Standards - Emission Standard for 

Industrial Environments 

• EN 61000-6-2 

EMC - Part 6-2: Generic Standards - Immunity for Industrial 

Environments 

This product is intended for use in an industrial environment. 

Low Voltage Directive 

This product is tested to meet Council Directive 73/23/EEC Low 

Voltage, by applying the safety requirements of EN 61131-2 

Programmable Controllers, Part 2 - Equipment Requirements and 

Tests. 

For specific information required by EN 61131-2, see the appropriate 

sections in this publication, as well as the following Allen-Bradley 

publications: 

• Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for 

Noise Immunity, publication 1770-4.1 

• Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries, publication AG-5.4 

• Automation Systems Catalog, publication B115 

Installation Considerations 

Most applications require installation in an industrial enclosure 

(Pollution Degree 2 (1) ) to reduce the effects of electrical interference 

(Over Voltage Category II (2) ) and environmental exposure. Locate 

your controller as far as possible from power lines, load lines, and 

other sources of electrical noise such as hard-contact switches, relays, 

and AC motor drives. For more information on proper grounding 

guidelines, see the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding 

Guidelines publication 1770-4.1. 

(1) Pollution Degree 2 is an environment where normally only non-conductive pollution occurs except that 

occasionally temporary conductivity caused by condensation shall be expected. 

(2) 

Overvoltage Category II is the load level section of the electrical distribution system. At this level, transient 

voltages are controlled and do not exceed the impulse voltage capability of the products insulation. 


Installing Your Controller 2-3 

ATTENTION 

Electrostatic discharge can damage semiconductor 

devices inside the controller. Do not touch the 

connector pins or other sensitive areas. 

ATTENTION 

Vertical mounting of the controller is not supported 

due to heat build-up considerations. 

ATTENTION 

Be careful of metal chips when drilling mounting 

holes for your controller or other equipment within 

the enclosure or panel. Drilled fragments that fall 

into the controller or I/O modules could cause 

damage. Do not drill holes above a mounted 

controller if the protective debris shields are 

removed or the processor is installed. 

Safety Considerations 

Safety considerations are an important element of proper system 

installation. Actively thinking about the safety of yourself and others, 

as well as the condition of your equipment, is of primary importance. 

We recommend reviewing the following safety considerations. 

Hazardous Location Considerations 

This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, 

C, D or non-hazardous locations only. The following WARNING 

statement applies to use in hazardous locations. 



WARNING 

EXPLOSION HAZARD 

• Substitution of components may impair suitability 

for Class I, Division 2. 

• Do not replace components or disconnect 

equipment unless power has been switched off. 

• Do not connect or disconnect components unless 

power has been switched off. 

• This product must be installed in an enclosure. 

All cables connected to the product must remain 

in the enclosure or be protected by conduit or 

other means. 

• All wiring must comply with N.E.C. article 

501-10(b). 

Use only the following communication cables in Class I, Division 2 

hazardous locations. 

Communication Cables for Class I, Division 2 Hazardous Locations 

1761-CBL-AM00 Series C or later 

1761-CBL-AP00 Series C or later 

1761-CBL-PM02 Series C or later 

1761-CBL-HM02 Series C or later 

2707-NC9 Series C or later 

1763-NC01 Series A or later 

Disconnecting Main Power 

WARNING 

Explosion Hazard 

Do not replace components, connect equipment, or 

disconnect equipment unless power has been 

switched off. 

The main power disconnect switch should be located where operators 

and maintenance personnel have quick and easy access to it. In 

addition to disconnecting electrical power, all other sources of power 

(pneumatic and hydraulic) should be de-energized before working on 

a machine or process controlled by a controller. 



Safety Circuits 

WARNING 

Explosion Hazard 

Do not connect or disconnect connectors while 

circuit is live. 

Circuits installed on the machine for safety reasons, like overtravel 

limit switches, stop push buttons, and interlocks, should always be 

hard-wired directly to the master control relay. These devices must be 

wired in series so that when any one device opens, the master control 

relay is de-energized, thereby removing power to the machine. Never 

alter these circuits to defeat their function. Serious injury or machine 

damage could result. 

Power Distribution 

There are some points about power distribution that you should 

know: 

• The master control relay must be able to inhibit all machine 

motion by removing power to the machine I/O devices when 

the relay is de-energized. It is recommended that the controller 

remain powered even when the master control relay is 

de-energized. 

• If you are using a dc power supply, interrupt the load side rather 

than the ac line power. This avoids the additional delay of 

power supply turn-off. The dc power supply should be powered 

directly from the fused secondary of the transformer. Power to 

the dc input and output circuits should be connected through a 

set of master control relay contacts. 

Periodic Tests of Master Control Relay Circuit 

Any part can fail, including the switches in a master control relay 

circuit. The failure of one of these switches would most likely cause 

an open circuit, which would be a safe power-off failure. However, if 

one of these switches shorts out, it no longer provides any safety 

protection. These switches should be tested periodically to assure they 

will stop machine motion when needed. 



Power Considerations 

The following explains power considerations for the micro controllers. 

Isolation Transformers 

You may want to use an isolation transformer in the ac line to the 

controller. This type of transformer provides isolation from your 

power distribution system to reduce the electrical noise that enters the 

controller and is often used as a step-down transformer to reduce line 

voltage. Any transformer used with the controller must have a 

sufficient power rating for its load. The power rating is expressed in 

volt-amperes (VA). 

Power Supply Inrush 

During power-up, the MicroLogix 1100 power supply allows a brief 

inrush current to charge internal capacitors. Many power lines and 

control transformers can supply inrush current for a brief time. If the 

power source cannot supply this inrush current, the source voltage 

may sag momentarily. 

The only effect of limited inrush current and voltage sag on the 

MicroLogix 1100 is that the power supply capacitors charge more 

slowly. However, the effect of a voltage sag on other equipment 

should be considered. For example, a deep voltage sag may reset a 

computer connected to the same power source. The following 

considerations determine whether the power source must be required 

to supply high inrush current: 

• The power-up sequence of devices in a system. 

• The amount of the power source voltage sag if the inrush 

current cannot be supplied. 

• The effect of voltage sag on other equipment in the system. 

If the entire system is powered-up at the same time, a brief sag in the 

power source voltage typically will not affect any equipment. 

Loss of Power Source 

The power supply is designed to withstand brief power losses without 

affecting the operation of the system. The time the system is 

operational during power loss is called “program scan hold-up time 

after loss of power.” The duration of the power supply hold-up time 



depends on the type and state of the I/O, but is typically between 10 

milliseconds and 3 seconds. When the duration of power loss reaches 

this limit, the power supply signals the processor that it can no longer 

provide adequate dc power to the system. This is referred to as a 

power supply shutdown. The processor then performs an orderly 

shutdown of the controller. 

Input States on Power Down 

The power supply hold-up time as described above is generally 

longer than the turn-on and turn-off times of the inputs. Because of 

this, the input state change from “On” to “Off” that occurs when 

power is removed may be recorded by the processor before the 

power supply shuts down the system. Understanding this concept is 

important. The user program should be written to take this effect into 

account. 

Other Types of Line Conditions 

Occasionally the power source to the system can be temporarily 

interrupted. It is also possible that the voltage level may drop 

substantially below the normal line voltage range for a period of time. 

Both of these conditions are considered to be a loss of power for the 

system. 



Preventing Excessive Heat 

For most applications, normal convective cooling keeps the controller 

within the specified operating range. Ensure that the specified 

temperature range is maintained. Proper spacing of components 

within an enclosure is usually sufficient for heat dissipation. 

In some applications, a substantial amount of heat is produced by 

other equipment inside or outside the enclosure. In this case, place 

blower fans inside the enclosure to assist in air circulation and to 

reduce “hot spots” near the controller. 

Additional cooling provisions might be necessary when high ambient 

temperatures are encountered. 

TIP 

Do not bring in unfiltered outside air. Place the 

controller in an enclosure to protect it from a 

corrosive atmosphere. Harmful contaminants or dirt 

could cause improper operation or damage to 

components. In extreme cases, you may need to use 

air conditioning to protect against heat build-up 

within the enclosure. 



Master Control Relay 

A hard-wired master control relay (MCR) provides a reliable means for 

emergency machine shutdown. Since the master control relay allows 

the placement of several emergency-stop switches in different 

locations, its installation is important from a safety standpoint. 

Overtravel limit switches or mushroom-head push buttons are wired 

in series so that when any of them opens, the master control relay is 

de-energized. This removes power to input and output device circuits. 

Refer to the figures on pages 2-11 and 2-12. 

ATTENTION 

Never alter these circuits to defeat their function 

since serious injury and/or machine damage could 

result. 

TIP 

If you are using an external dc power supply, 

interrupt the dc output side rather than the ac line 

side of the supply to avoid the additional delay of 

power supply turn-off. 

The ac line of the dc output power supply should be 

fused. 

Connect a set of master control relays in series with 

the dc power supplying the input and output 

circuits. 

Place the main power disconnect switch where operators and 

maintenance personnel have quick and easy access to it. If you mount 

a disconnect switch inside the controller enclosure, place the switch 

operating handle on the outside of the enclosure, so that you can 

disconnect power without opening the enclosure. 

Whenever any of the emergency-stop switches are opened, power to 

input and output devices should be removed. 

When you use the master control relay to remove power from the 

external I/O circuits, power continues to be provided to the 

controller’s power supply so that diagnostic indicators on the 

processor can still be observed. 

The master control relay is not a substitute for a disconnect to the 

controller. It is intended for any situation where the operator must 

quickly de-energize I/O devices only. When inspecting or installing 

terminal connections, replacing output fuses, or working on 

equipment within the enclosure, use the disconnect to shut off power 

to the rest of the system. 



TIP 

Do not control the master control relay with the 

controller. Provide the operator with the safety of a 

direct connection between an emergency-stop 

switch and the master control relay. 

Using Emergency-Stop Switches 

When using emergency-stop switches, adhere to the following points: 

• Do not program emergency-stop switches in the controller 

program. Any emergency-stop switch should turn off all 

machine power by turning off the master control relay. 

• Observe all applicable local codes concerning the placement 

and labeling of emergency-stop switches. 

• Install emergency-stop switches and the master control relay in 

your system. Make certain that relay contacts have a sufficient 

rating for your application. Emergency-stop switches must be 

easy to reach. 

• In the following illustration, input and output circuits are shown 

with MCR protection. However, in most applications, only 

output circuits require MCR protection. 

The following illustrations show the Master Control Relay wired in a 

grounded system. 

TIP 

In most applications input circuits do not require 

MCR protection; however, if you need to remove 

power from all field devices, you must include MCR 

contacts in series with input power wiring. 



Schematic (Using IEC Symbols) 

L1 

L2 

230V ac 

Disconnect 

Fuse 

MCR 

230V ac 

I/O 

Circuits 

X1 

Isolation 

Transformer 

115V ac 

or 230V ac 

Fuse 

X2 

Operation of either of these contacts will 

remove power from the external I/O 

circuits, stopping machine motion. 

Emergency-Stop 

Push Button 

Overtravel 

Limit Switch 

Stop 

Start 

Master Control Relay (MCR) 

Cat. No. 700-PK400A1 

Suppressor 

Cat. No. 700-N24 

MCR 

MCR 

Suppr. 

(Lo) 

(Hi) 

Line Terminals: Connect to terminals of Power 

Supply (1763-L16AWA, 1763-L16BWA). 

MCR 

115V ac or 

230V ac 

I/O Circuits 

dc Power Supply. 

Use IEC 950/EN 60950 

_ MCR 

+ 

24V dc 

I/O 

Circuits 

Line Terminals: Connect to 24V dc terminals of 

Power Supply (1763-L16BBB). 



Schematic (Using ANSI/CSA Symbols) 

L1 

230V ac 

L2 

Disconnect 

Fuse 

MCR 

230V ac 

Output 

Circuits 

Isolation 

Transformer 

X1 

115V ac or 

230V ac 

Fuse 

X2 

Operation of either of these contacts will 

remove power from the external I/O 

circuits, stopping machine motion. 

Emergency-Stop 

Push Button 

Overtravel 

Limit Switch 

Stop 

Start 


Cat. No. 700-PK400A1 

Suppressor 

Cat. No. 700-N24 

MCR 

MCR 

Suppr. 

MCR 

115V ac or 

230V ac 

I/O Circuits 

(Lo) 

(Hi) 

Line Terminals: Connect to terminals of Power 

Supply (1763-L16AWA, 1763-L16BWA). 

dc Power Supply. Use 

NEC Class 2 for UL 

Listing. 

_ + 

MCR 

24 V dc 

I/O 

Circuits 

Line Terminals: Connect to 24V dc terminals of 

Power Supply (1763-L16BBB). 



Installing a Memory 

Module 

1. Remove the memory module port cover. 

2. Align the connector on the memory module with the connector 

pins on the controller. 

MEMORY 

MODULE 

3. Firmly seat the memory module into the controller. 

MEMORY 

MODULE 

MEMORY 

MODULE 



Using the Battery 

The MicroLogix 1100 controller is equipped with a replaceable 

battery. The Battery Low indicator on the LCD display of the controller 

shows the status of the replaceable battery. When the battery is low, 

the indicator is set (displayed as a solid rectangle). This means that 

either the battery wire connector is disconnected, or the battery may 

fail within 2 weeks if it is connected. When the battery level is 

acceptable, the indicator is clear (displayed as an empty rectangle). 

IMPORTANT 

The MicroLogix 1100 controller ships with the battery 

wire connector connected. 

Ensure that the battery wire connector is inserted 

into the connector port if your application needs 

battery power. For example, when using a real-time 

clock (RTC), or to store the program in the 

controller's memory for an extended period of time 

while the power is removed. 

See Lithium Battery (1763-BA) in the Appendix B. 

Replacement Parts, for more information on 

installation, handling, usage, storage, and disposal of 

the battery. 

See RTC Battery Operation on page 6-2, for more 

information on the use of the battery in relation with 

RTC. 

IMPORTANT 

When the controller’s Battery Low indicator is set 

(displayed as a solid rectangle) with the battery wire 

connector connected, we recommend strongly to 

install a new battery immediately. 



Connecting the Battery Wire Connector 

Follow the procedure below to connect the battery wire connector to 

the battery connector. 

1. Insert the replaceable battery wire connector into the battery 

connector. 

2. Secure the battery connector wires along the wire guide as 

shown below. 

Replaceable Battery Pocket 

Replaceable Battery 

Wire Guide 

Battery Connector Wires 

ESC 

OK 

Battery Wire Connector 

Battery Connector 



Controller Mounting 

Dimensions 

C 

A 

B 

1763-L16AWA, 1763-L16BWA, 1763-L16BBB 

Table 2.1 Controller Dimensions 

Dimension 1763-L16AWA 1763-L16BWA 1763-L16BBB 

A 

90 mm (3.5 in.) 

B 

110 mm (4.33 in.) 

C 

87 mm (3.43 in.) 

Controller and Expansion 

I/O Spacing 

The controller mounts horizontally, with the expansion I/O extending 

to the right of the controller. Allow 50 mm (2 in.) of space on all sides 

of the controller system for adequate ventilation. Maintain spacing 

from enclosure walls, wireways, adjacent equipment, etc., as shown 

below. 

Top 

Side 

MicroLogix 

1100 

1762 I/O 

1762 I/O 

1762 I/O 

Side 

Bottom 



Mounting the Controller 

MicroLogix 1100 controllers are suitable for use in an industrial 

environment when installed in accordance with these instructions. 

Specifically, this equipment is intended for use in clean, dry 

environments (Pollution degree 2 (1) ) and to circuits not exceeding 

Over Voltage Category II (2) (IEC 60664-1). (3) 

ATTENTION 

Do not remove the protective debris shield until after 

the controller and all other equipment in the panel 

near the controller are mounted and wiring is 

complete. Once wiring is complete, remove 

protective debris shield. Failure to remove shield 

before operating can cause overheating. 

debris shield 

ATTENTION 

Electrostatic discharge can damage semiconductor 

devices inside the controller. Do not touch the 

connector pins or other sensitive areas. 

TIP 

For environments with greater vibration and shock 

concerns, use the panel mounting method described 

on page 2-19, rather than DIN rail mounting. 

(1) Pollution Degree 2 is an environment where, normally, only non-conductive pollution occurs except that 

occasionally a temporary conductivity caused by condensation shall be expected. 

(2) Over Voltage Category II is the load level section of the electrical distribution system. At this level transient 

voltages are controlled and do not exceed the impulse voltage capability of the product’s insulation. 

(3) 

Pollution Degree 2 and Over Voltage Category II are International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) 

designations. 



DIN Rail Mounting 

The maximum extension of the latch is 14 mm (0.55 in.) in the open 

position. A flat-blade screwdriver is required for removal of the 

controller. The controller can be mounted to EN50022-35x7.5 or 

EN50022-35x15 DIN rails. DIN rail mounting dimensions are shown 

below. 

27.5 mm 

(1.08 in.) 

90 mm 

(3.5 in.) 

27.5 mm 

(1.08 in.) 

To install your controller on the DIN rail: 

1. Mount your DIN rail. (Make sure that the placement of the 

controller on the DIN rail meets the recommended spacing 

requirements, see Controller and Expansion I/O Spacing on 

page 2-16. Refer to the mounting template inside the back cover 

of this document.) 

2. Close the DIN latch, if it is open. 

3. Hook the top slot over the DIN rail. 

4. While pressing the controller down against the top of the rail, 

snap the bottom of the controller into position. 

5. Leave the protective debris shield attached until you are finished 

wiring the controller and any other devices. 

To remove your controller from the DIN rail: 

1. Place a flat-blade screwdriver in the DIN rail latch at the bottom 

of the controller. 

2. Holding the controller, pry downward on the latch until the latch 

locks in the open position. 

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the second DIN rail latch. 



4. Unhook the top of the DIN rail slot from the rail. 

ESC 

OK 

open 

closed 

Panel Mounting 

Mount to panel using #8 or M4 screws. To install your controller using 

mounting screws: 

1. Remove the mounting template from inside the back cover of 

the MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers Installation 

Instructions, publication 1763-IN001. 

2. Secure the template to the mounting surface. (Make sure your 

controller is spaced properly. See Controller and Expansion I/O 

Spacing on page 2-16.) 

3. Drill holes through the template. 

4. Remove the mounting template. 

5. Mount the controller. 

6. Leave the protective debris shield in place until you are finished 

wiring the controller and any other devices. 

Mounting Template 

(Remove before 

installing controller) 

Debris Shield 



1762 Expansion I/O 

Dimensions 

A 

C 

B 

Dimension 

A 

B 

C 

Expansion I/O Module 

90 mm (3.5 in.) 

40 mm (1.57 in.) 

87 mm (3.43 in.) 

Mounting 1762 Expansion 

I/O 

ATTENTION 

During panel or DIN rail mounting of all devices, be 

sure that all debris (metal chips, wire stands, etc.) is 

kept from falling into the module. Debris that falls 

into the module could cause damage when the 

module is under power. 


The module can be mounted using the following DIN rails: 

• 35 x 7.5 mm (EN 50 022 - 35 x 7.5), or 

• 35 x 15 mm (EN 50 022 - 35 x 15). 

Before mounting the module on a DIN rail, close the DIN rail latch. 

Press the DIN rail mounting area of the module against the DIN rail. 

The latch momentarily opens and locks into place. 



Use DIN rail end anchors (Allen-Bradley part number 1492-EA35 or 

1492-EAH35) for vibration or shock environments. The following 

illustration shows the location of the end anchors. 

End Anchor 

End Anchor 

TIP 

1762 expansion I/O must be mounted horizontally as 

illustrated. 

TIP 

For environments with greater vibration and shock 

concerns, use the panel mounting method described 

below, instead of DIN rail mounting. 


Use the dimensional template shown below to mount the module. 

The preferred mounting method is to use two M4 or #8 panhead 

screws per module. Mounting screws are required on every module. 

For more than 2 modules: (number of modules - 1) x 40 mm (1.59 in.) 

14.5 

(0.57) 

40.4 

(1.59) 

100 90 

(3.94) (3.54) 

MicroLogix 

1100 

1762 I/O 

1762 I/O 

1762 I/O 

A = 95 mm (3.740 in.) 

1763-L16AWA, 1763-L16BWA, 1763-L16BBB 

40.4 

A 

(1.59) 

NOTE: All dimensions are in mm (inches). 

Hole spacing tolerance: ±0.4 mm (0.016 in.). 



Connecting Expansion I/O 

The expansion I/O module is attached to the controller or another I/O 

module by means of a flat ribbon cable after mounting, as shown 

below. 

TIP 

Use the pull loop on the connector to disconnect 

modules. Do not pull on the ribbon cable. 

TIP 

Up to four expansion I/O modules can be connected 

to a controller. 

ATTENTION 

Remove power before removing or inserting an I/O 

module. When you remove or insert a module with 

power applied, an electrical arc may occur. An 

electrical arc can cause personal injury or property 

damage by: 

• sending an erroneous signal to your system’s field 

devices, causing the controller to fault 

• causing an explosion in a hazardous environment 

Electrical arcing causes excessive wear to contacts on 

both the module and its mating connector. Worn 

contacts may create electrical resistance, reducing 

product reliability. 



WARNING 


In Class I, Division 2 applications, the bus connector 

must be fully seated and the bus connector cover 

must be snapped in place. 

In Class I, Division 2 applications, all modules must 

be mounted in direct contact with each other as 

shown on page 2-22. If DIN rail mounting is used, an 

end stop must be installed ahead of the controller 

and after the last 1762 I/O module. 




Chapter 3 

Wiring Your Controller 

This chapter describes how to wire your controller and expansion 

I/O. Topics include: 

• wire requirements 

• using surge suppressors 

• grounding the controller 

• wiring diagrams 

• sinking and sourcing wiring diagrams 

• controller I/O wiring 

• wiring your analog channels 

• expansion I/O wiring 

Wiring Requirements 

Wiring Recommendation 

ATTENTION 

Before you install and wire any device, disconnect 

power to the controller system. 

ATTENTION 

Calculate the maximum possible current in each 

power and common wire. Observe all electrical 

codes dictating the maximum current allowable for 

each wire size. Current above the maximum ratings 

may cause wiring to overheat, which can cause 

damage. 

United States Only: If the controller is installed within 

a potentially hazardous environment, all wiring must 

comply with the requirements stated in the National 

Electrical Code 501-10 (b). 

• Allow for at least 50 mm. (2 in.) between I/O wiring ducts or 

terminal strips and the controller. 

• Route incoming power to the controller by a path separate from 

the device wiring. Where paths must cross, their intersection 

should be perpendicular. 


3-2 Wiring Your Controller 

TIP 

Do not run signal or communications wiring and 

power wiring in the same conduit. Wires with 

different signal characteristics should be routed by 

separate paths. 

• Separate wiring by signal type. Bundle wiring with similar 

electrical characteristics together. 

• Separate input wiring from output wiring. 

• Label wiring to all devices in the system. Use tape, 

shrink-tubing, or other dependable means for labeling purposes. 

In addition to labeling, use colored insulation to identify wiring 

based on signal characteristics. For example, you may use blue 

for dc wiring and red for ac wiring. 

Table 3.1 Wire Requirements 

Wire Type 

Wire Size (2 wire maximum per terminal screw) 

1 wire per terminal 2 wire per terminal 

Solid Cu-90°C (194°F) #12 to #20 AWG #16 to #20 AWG 

Stranded Cu-90°C (194°F) #14 to #20 AWG #18 to #20 AWG 

Wiring torque = 0.56 Nm (5.0 in-lb) rated 

Wiring the Terminal Block 

The MicroLogix 1100 controllers have screw-cage clamps on the input 

and output terminal blocks. With screw-cage clamp terminal blocks, 

there is no need to attach additional hardware such as a spade lug to 

the wire, or use a finger-safe cover. 

To wire the terminal block: 

1. Strip the end of the wire. 

The recommended length for the stripped end of the wire is 11.0 

mm (0.440 in.). 

2. Insert it into an open clamp. 

3. Using a small, flat-blade screwdriver, tighten the terminal screw. 

To ensure that the wire conductor is secured inside the clamp, 

tighten it to the rated torque, 0.56 Nm (5.0 in-lb). 

The diameter of the terminal screw head is 5.5 mm (0.220 in.). 


Wiring Your Controller 3-3 

Screw-cage clamp terminal block 

Using Surge Suppressors 

Because of the potentially high current surges that occur when 

switching inductive load devices, such as motor starters and solenoids, 

the use of some type of surge suppression to protect and extend the 

operating life of the controllers output contacts is required. Switching 

inductive loads without surge suppression can significantly reduce the 

life expectancy of relay contacts. By adding a suppression device 

directly across the coil of an inductive device, you prolong the life of 

the output or relay contacts. You also reduce the effects of voltage 

transients and electrical noise from radiating into adjacent systems. 

The following diagram shows an output with a suppression device. 

We recommend that you locate the suppression device as close as 

possible to the load device. 

ac or dc 

Outputs 

VAC/DC 

Out 0 

Out 1 

Out 2 

Out 3 

Out 4 

Out 5 

Out 6 

Out 7 

COM 

+dc or L1 

Suppression 

Device 

Load 

dc COM or L2 

If the outputs are dc, we recommend that you use an 1N4004 diode 

for surge suppression, as shown below. For inductive dc load devices, 



a diode is suitable. A 1N4004 diode is acceptable for most 

applications. A surge suppressor can also be used. See Table 3.2 for 

recommended suppressors. As shown below, these surge suppression 

circuits connect directly across the load device. 

+24V dc 

Relay or Solid 

State dc Outputs 

VAC/DC 

Out 0 

Out 1 

Out 2 

Out 3 

Out 4 

Out 5 

Out 6 

Out 7 

COM 

24V dc common 

IN4004 Diode 

(A surge suppressor 

can also be used.) 

Suitable surge suppression methods for inductive ac load devices 

include a varistor, an RC network, or an Allen-Bradley surge 

suppressor, all shown below. These components must be 

appropriately rated to suppress the switching transient characteristic of 

the particular inductive device. See the table on page 3-5 for 

recommended suppressors. 

Surge Suppression for Inductive ac Load Devices 

Output Device 

Output Device 

Output Device 

Varistor 

RC Network 

Surge 

Suppressor 



Recommended Surge Suppressors 

Use the Allen-Bradley surge suppressors shown in the following table 

for use with relays, contactors, and starters. 

Table 3.2 Recommended Surge Suppressors 

Device Coil Voltage Suppressor Catalog 

Number 

Bulletin 509 Motor Starter 

Bulletin 509 Motor Starter 

Bulletin 100 Contactor 

Bulletin 100 Contactor 

120V ac 

240V ac 

120V ac 

240V ac 

(1) Varistor – Not recommended for use on relay outputs. 

(2) 

RC Type – Do not use with Triac outputs. 

599-K04 (1) 

599-KA04 (1) 

199-FSMA1 (2) 

199-FSMA2 (2) 

Bulletin 709 Motor Starter 120V ac 1401-N10 (2) 

Bulletin 700 Type R, RM Relays ac coil None Required 

Bulletin 700 Type R Relay 

12V dc 

199-FSMA9 

Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay 

12V dc 









24V dc 

24V dc 

48V dc 

48V dc 

115-125V dc 

115-125V dc 

230-250V dc 

230-250V dc 

199-FSMA9 

199-FSMA9 

199-FSMA10 

199-FSMA11 

Bulletin 700 Type N, P, or PK Relay 150V max, ac or DC 700-N24 (2) 

Miscellaneous electromagnetic 

devices limited to 35 sealed VA 

150V max, ac or DC 700-N24 (2) 



Grounding the Controller 

In solid-state control systems, grounding and wire routing helps limit 

the effects of noise due to electromagnetic interference (EMI). Run the 

ground connection from the ground screw of the controller to the 

ground bus prior to connecting any devices. Use AWG #14 wire. For 

AC-powered controllers, this connection must be made for safety 

purposes. 

ATTENTION 

All devices connected to the RS-232/485 communication port must be referenced to 

controller ground, or be floating (not referenced to a potential other than ground). 

Failure to follow this procedure may result in property damage or personal injury. 

• For 1763-L16BWA controllers: 

The COM of the sensor supply is also connected to chassis ground internally. The 

24V dc sensor power source should not be used to power output circuits. It should 

only be used to power input devices. 

• For 1763-L16BBB controllers: 

The VDC NEUT or common terminal of the power supply is also connected to 

chassis ground internally. 

This product is intended to be mounted to a well grounded mounting 

surface such as a metal panel. Refer to the Industrial Automation 

Wiring and Grounding Guidelines, publication 1770-4.1, for 

additional information. Additional grounding connections from the 

mounting tab or DIN rail, if used, are not required unless the 

mounting surface cannot be grounded. 

TIP 

Use all four mounting positions for panel mounting 

installation. 

ESC 

OK 

Grounding Stamping 

ATTENTION 

Remove the protective debris strip before applying 

power to the controller. Failure to remove the strip 

may cause the controller to overheat. 




The following illustrations show the wiring diagrams for the 

MicroLogix 1100 controllers. Controllers with dc inputs can be wired 

as either sinking or sourcing inputs. (Sinking and sourcing does not 

apply to ac inputs.) Refer to Sinking and Sourcing Wiring Diagrams on 

page 3-9. 

The controller terminal block layouts are shown below. The shading 

on the labels indicates how the terminals are grouped. A detail of the 

groupings is shown in the table following the terminal block layouts. 

TIP 

This symbol denotes a protective earth ground 

terminal which provides a low impedance path 

between electrical circuits and earth for safety 

purposes and provides noise immunity 

improvement. This connection must be made for 

safety purposes on ac-powered controllers. 

This symbol denotes a functional earth ground 

terminal which provides a low impedance path 

between electrical circuits and earth for non-safety 

purposes, such as noise immunity improvement. 

Terminal Block Layouts 

Figure 3.1 1763-L16AWA 

Group 0 

Group 1 Group 2 

Input Terminal Block 

NOT NOT AC 

USED USED COM I/0 I/1 I/2 I/3 

AC 

COM I/4 I/5 

I/6 I/7 I/8 I/9 

IA 

COM IV1(+) IV2(+) 

Output Terminal Block 

L1 L2/N 

100-240 VAC 

NOT 

USED 

VAC O/0 

VDC 

VAC O/1 

VDC 

VAC O/2 

VDC 

VAC O/3 

VDC 

VAC O/4 

VDC 

VAC O/5 

VDC 

NOT 

USED 

Group 0 

Group 1 

Group 2 

Group 3 

Group 4 

Group 5 



Figure 3.2 1763-L16BWA 

Group 0 



DC OUT 

DC 

+ 24V - COM I/0 I/1 I/2 I/3 

DC 

COM I/4 I/5 

I/6 I/7 I/8 I/9 

IA 

COM IV1(+) IV2(+) 


L1 L2/N 

100-240 VAC 

NOT 

USED 

VAC O/0 

VDC 

VAC O/1 

VDC 

VAC O/2 

VDC 

VAC O/3 

VDC 

VAC O/4 

VDC 

VAC O/5 

VDC 

NOT 

USED 

Group 0 

Group 1 

Group 2 

Group 3 

Group 4 

Group 5 

ATTENTION 

The 24V dc sensor supply of the 1763-L16BWA 

should not be used to power output circuits. It 

should only be used to power input devices (e.g. 

sensors, switches). See Master Control Relay on page 

2-9 for information on MCR wiring in output circuits. 

Figure 3.3 1763-L16BBB 

Group 0 



NOT NOT DC 


DC 

COM I/4 I/5 

I/6 I/7 I/8 I/9 

IA 

COM IV1(+) IV2(+) 


+ 24V - 

DC IN 

NOT 

USED 

VAC O/0 

VDC 

VAC O/1 

VDC 

NOT 

USED 

NOT 

USED 

DC O/2 O/3 

24V+ 

O/4 O/5 

DC 

24V- 

NOT 

USED 

Group 0 

Group 1 

Group 2 

Terminal Groupings 

Table 3.3 Input Terminal Grouping 

Controller 

1763-L16AWA 

1763-L16BWA 

1763-L16BBB 

Inputs 

Input Group Common Terminal Input Terminal 

Group 0 AC COM 0 I/0 through I/3 

Group 1 AC COM 1 I/4 through I/9 

Group 2 IA COM IV1(+) and IV2(+) 

Group 0 DC COM 0 I/0 through I/3 








Table 3.4 Output Terminal Grouping 

Controller 

1763-L16AWA 

1763-L16BWA 

1763-L16BBB 

Outputs 

Output Group Voltage Terminal Output Terminal 

Group 0 VAC/VDC 0 O/0 














Group 2 DC +24V, DC -24V O/2 through O/5 

Sinking and Sourcing 


Any of the MicroLogix 1100 DC embedded input groups can be 

configured as sinking or sourcing depending on how the DC COM is 

wired on the group. Refer to pages 3-10 through 3-11 for sinking and 

sourcing wiring diagrams. 

Type 

Sinking Input 

Sourcing Input 

Definition 

The input energizes when high-level voltage is applied to the input 

terminal (active high). Connect the power supply VDC (-) to the input 

group’s COM terminal. 

The input energizes when low-level voltage is applied to the input 

terminal (active low). Connect the power supply VDC (+) to the input 

group’s COM terminal. 

ATTENTION 

The 24V dc sensor power source must not be used to 

power output circuits. It should only be used to 

power input devices (e.g. sensors, switches). See 

Master Control Relay on page 2-9 for information on 

MCR wiring in output circuits. 



1763-L16AWA, 1763-L16BWA and 1763-L16BBB 


TIP 

In the following diagrams, lower case alphabetic 

subscripts are appended to common-terminal 

connections to indicate that different power sources 

may be used for different isolated groups, if desired. 

Figure 3.4 1763-L16AWA Input Wiring Diagram (1) 

L1a 

L2a 

L1b 

L2b 

L1c 

L2c 

NOT NOT AC 


AC 

COM I/4 I/5 

I/6 I/7 I/8 I/9 

IA 

COM IV1(+) IV2(+) 

(1) “NOT USED” terminals are not intended for use as connection points. 

Figure 3.5 1763-L16BWA Sinking Input Wiring Diagram 

24V dc Sensor Power 

+DCa 

+DCb 

L1c 

+DC 

-DC 

-DCa 

-DCb 

L2c 

DC OUT DC 

+ 24V - COM I/0 I/1 I/2 I/3 

DC 

COM I/4 I/5 

I/6 I/7 I/8 I/9 

IA 

COM IV1(+) IV2(+) 

Figure 3.6 1763-L16BWA Sourcing Input Wiring Diagram 

24V dc Sensor Power 

-DCa 

-DCb 

L1c 

+DC 

-DC 

+DCa 

+DCb 

L2c 

DC OUT DC 

+ 24V - COM I/0 I/1 I/2 I/3 

DC 

COM I/4 I/5 

I/6 I/7 I/8 I/9 

IA 

COM IV1(+) IV2(+) 



Figure 3.7 1763-L16BBB Sinking Input Wiring Diagram 

+DCa 

-DCa 

+DCb 

-DCb 

L1c 

L2c 

NOT NOT DC 


DC 

COM I/4 I/5 

I/6 I/7 I/8 I/9 

IA 

COM IV1(+) IV2(+) 

Figure 3.8 1763-L16BBB Sourcing Input Wiring Diagram 

-DCa 

+DCa 

-DCb 

+DCb 

L1c 

L2c 

NOT NOT DC 


DC 

COM I/4 I/5 

I/6 I/7 I/8 I/9 

IA 

COM IV1(+) IV2(+) 

Figure 3.9 1763-L16AWA and 1763-L16BWA Output Wiring Diagram 

+DCa 

-DCa L1a L2a L1b 

L2b 

L1c 

L2c L1d L2d L1e L2e 

L2 

L1 

CR 

CR 

L1 L2/N 

100-240 VAC 

NOT 

USED 

VAC O/0 

VDC 

VAC O/1 

VDC 

VAC O/2 

VDC 

VAC O/3 

VDC 

VAC O/4 

VDC 

VAC O/5 

VDC 

NOT 

USED 

Figure 3.10 1763-L16BBB Output Wiring Diagram 

+DCa 

-DCa +DCb -DCb 

+DCc 

-DCc 

-DC 

+DC 

CR 

CR CR CR 

+ 24V - 

DC IN 

NOT 

USED 

VAC O/0 

VDC 

VAC O/1 

VDC 

NOT 

USED 

NOT 

USED 

DC O/2 O/3 

24V+ 

O/4 O/5 

DC 

24V- 

NOT 

USED 



Controller I/O Wiring 

Minimizing Electrical Noise 

Because of the variety of applications and environments where 

controllers are installed and operating, it is impossible to ensure that 

all environmental noise will be removed by input filters. To help 

reduce the effects of environmental noise, install the MicroLogix 1100 

system in a properly rated (i.e. NEMA) enclosure. Make sure that the 

MicroLogix 1100 system is properly grounded. 

A system may malfunction due to a change in the operating 

environment after a period of time. We recommend periodically 

checking system operation, particularly when new machinery or other 

noise sources are installed near the MicroLogix 1100 system. 

Wiring Your Analog 

Channels 

Analog input circuits can monitor voltage signals and convert them to 

serial digital data. 

Sensor 2 

(V) Voltage Sensor 1 

(V) Voltage 

IA 

COM IV1(+) IV2(+) 

Analog Channel Wiring Guidelines 

Consider the following when wiring your analog channels: 

• The analog common (COM) is connected to earth ground inside 

the module. These terminals are not electrically isolated from the 

system. They are connected to chassis ground. 

• Analog channels are not isolated from each other. 

• Use Belden 8761, or equivalent, shielded wire. 

• Under normal conditions, the drain wire (shield) should be 

connected to the metal mounting panel (earth ground). Keep 

the shield connection to earth ground as short as possible. 

• To ensure optimum accuracy for voltage type inputs, limit 

overall cable impedance by keeping all analog cables as short as 

possible. Locate the I/O system as close to your voltage type 

sensors or actuators as possible. 



• The controller does not provide loop power for analog inputs. 

Use a power supply that matches the transmitter specifications 

as shown below. 

2-Wire Transmitter 

Power 

Supply 

+ 

- 


Power 

Supply 

+ 

- 

Transmitter 

+ - 

Transmitter 

Supply Signal 

GND 

Controller 

IV1(+) or IV2(+) 

IA COM 

Controller 

IV1(+) or IV2(+) 

IA COM 


Power 

Supply 

+ 

- 

Transmitter 

Supply Signal 

+ 

- 

+ 

- 

Controller 

IV1(+) or IV2(+) 

IA COM 

Minimizing Electrical Noise on Analog Channels 

Inputs on analog channels employ digital high-frequency filters that 

significantly reduce the effects of electrical noise on input signals. 

However, because of the variety of applications and environments 

where analog controllers are installed and operated, it is impossible to 

ensure that all environmental noise will be removed by the input 

filters. 

Several specific steps can be taken to help reduce the effects of 

environmental noise on analog signals: 

• install the MicroLogix 1100 system in a properly rated (i.e., 

NEMA) enclosure. Make sure that the MicroLogix 1100 system is 

properly grounded. 

• use Belden cable #8761 for wiring the analog channels, making 

sure that the drain wire and foil shield are properly earth 

grounded. 

• route the Belden cable separately from any ac wiring. Additional 

noise immunity can be obtained by routing the cables in 

grounded conduit. 



Grounding Your Analog Cable 

Use shielded 

communication cable 

(Belden #8761). The 

Belden cable has two 

signal wires (black and 

clear), one drain wire, and 

a foil shield. The drain 

wire and foil shield must 

be grounded at one end of 

the cable. 

Insulation 

Foil Shield 

Clear Wire 

Black Wire 

Drain Wire 

IMPORTANT 

Do not ground the drain wire and foil shield at 

both ends of the cable 



Expansion I/O Wiring 

Digital Wiring Diagrams 

The following illustrations show the digital expansion I/O wiring 

diagrams. 

Figure 3.11 1762-IA8 Wiring Diagram 

L1 

100/120V ac 

IN 1 

IN 3 

IN 5 

IN 7 

IN 0 

IN 2 

IN 4 

IN 6 

L2 

Figure 3.12 1762-IQ8 Wiring Diagram 

+DC (sinking) 

AC 

COM 

AC 

COM 

Common 

connected 

internally. 

24V dc 

IN 1 

IN 3 

IN 5 

IN 7 

IN 0 

IN 2 

IN 4 

IN 6 

-DC (sinking) 

+DC (sourcing) 

DC 

COM 

DC 

COM 

Common connected 

internally. 



Figure 3.13 1762-IQ16 Wiring Diagram 

+DC (Sinking) 

-DC (Sourcing) 

IN 1 

IN 3 

IN 5 

IN 7 

IN 0 

IN 2 

IN 4 

IN 6 

24V dc 

DC 

COM 0 

-DC (Sinking) 

+DC (Sourcing) 

+DC (Sinking) 

-DC (Sourcing) 

IN 8 

-DC (Sinking) 

+DC (Sourcing) 

24V dc 

IN 9 

IN 11 

IN 13 

IN 15 

IN 10 

IN 12 

IN 14 

DC 

COM 1 

Figure 3.14 1762-OA8 Wiring Diagram 

CR 

OUT 0 

OUT 2 

VAC 

0 

OUT 1 

OUT 3 

CR 

CR 

L1 

L2 

L1 

L2 

CR 

VAC 

1 

OUT 5 

OUT 4 

CR 

CR 

OUT 6 

OUT 7 



Figure 3.15 1762-OB8 Wiring Diagram 

CR 

CR 

CR 

OUT 0 

OUT 2 

OUT 4 

OUT 6 

+VDC 

OUT 1 

OUT 3 

OUT 5 

CR 

CR 

+DC 

24V dc (source) 

CR 

OUT 7 

DC COM 

-DC 

Figure 3.16 1762-OB16 Wiring Diagram 

CR 

CR 

OUT 0 

OUT 2 

OUT 4 

VDC+ 

OUT 1 

OUT 3 

CR 

CR 

+DC 

CR 

OUT 6 

OUT 5 

CR 

OUT 7 

CR 

OUT 8 

24V dc (source) 

CR 

CR 

CR 

OUT 9 

OUT 11 

OUT 13 

OUT 15 

OUT 10 

OUT 12 

OUT 14 

DC COM 

-DC 



Figure 3.17 1762-OW8 Wiring Diagram 

CR 

OUT 0 

OUT 2 

VAC-VDC 1 

OUT 1 

OUT3 

CR 

CR 

L1 VAC1 + 

L2 

DC1 COM 

L2 

L1 VAC2 + 

DC2 COM 

CR 

VAC-VDC2 

OUT 5 

OUT 4 

CR 

CR 

OUT 6 

OUT 7 

Figure 3.18 1762-OW16 Wiring Diagram 

CR 

CR 

OUT 0 

OUT 2 

OUT 4 

OUT 6 

VAC-VDC 

0 

OUT 1 

OUT 3 

OUT 5 

CR 

CR 

CR 

L1 

L2 

CR 

OUT 7 

VAC-VDC 

1 

+DC 

CR 

CR 

OUT 8 

OUT 10 

OUT 12 

OUT 14 

OUT 9 

OUT 11 

OUT 13 

OUT 15 

CR 

CR 

CR 

CR 

-DC 



Figure 3.19 1762-OX6I Wiring Diagram 

OUT0 N.C. 

L1-0 

OUT0 N.O. 

L1 OR +DC 

CR 

L2 OR -DC 

L2 OR -DC 

L1 OR +DC 

L1-1 

OUT1 N.O. 

OUT1 N.C. 

CR 

L2 OR -DC 

CR 

OUT2 N.C. 

L1-2 

L1 OR +DC 

OUT2 N.O. 

L1 OR +DC 

L1-3 

L2 OR -DC 

CR 

OUT3 N.C. 

OUT3 N.O. 

L2 OR -DC 

L1 OR +DC 

L1-4 

OUT4 N.O. 

OUT4 N.C. 

CR 

CR 

OUT5 N.C. 

L1-5 

OUT5 N.O. 

L1 OR +DC 

L2 OR -DC 

Analog Wiring 

System Wiring Guidelines 

Consider the following when wiring your analog modules: 

• The analog common (COM) is not connected to earth ground 

inside the module. All terminals are electrically isolated from the 

system. 

• Channels are not isolated from each other. 

• Use Belden 8761, or equivalent, shielded wire. 

• Under normal conditions, the drain wire (shield) should be 

connected to the metal mounting panel (earth ground). Keep 

the shield connection to earth ground as short as possible. 



• To ensure optimum accuracy for voltage type inputs, limit 

overall cable impedance by keeping all analog cables as short as 

possible. Locate the I/O system as close to your voltage type 

sensors or actuators as possible. 

• The module does not provide loop power for analog inputs. Use 

a power supply that matches the input transmitter specifications. 

1762-IF2OF2 Input Type Selection 

Select the input type, current or voltage, using the switches located on 

the module’s circuit board and the input type/range selection bits in 

the Configuration Data File. Refer to MicroLogix 1100 Programmable 

Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual, publication number 

1763-RM001. You can access the switches through the ventilation slots 

on the top of the module. Switch 1 controls channel 0; switch 2 

controls channel 1. The factory default setting for both switch 1 and 

switch 2 is Current. Switch positions are shown below. 

Switch Location 

Ch0 

Ch1 

Voltage (OFF) 

ON 

1 

2 

Current (ON) Default 

1762-IF2OF2 Output Type Selection 

The output type selection, current or voltage, is made by wiring to the 

appropriate terminals, Iout or Vout, and by the type/range selection 

bits in the Configuration Data File. Refer to MicroLogix 1100 

Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual, 

publication number 1763-RM001. 

ATTENTION 

Analog outputs may fluctuate for less than a second 

when power is applied or removed. This 

characteristic is common to most analog outputs. 

While the majority of loads will not recognize this 

short signal, it is recommended that preventive 

measures be taken to ensure that connected 

equipment is not affected. 



1762-IF2OF2 Wiring 

The following illustration shows the 1762-IF2OF2 analog expansion 

I/O terminal block. 

Figure 3.20 1762-IF2OF2 Terminal Block Layout 

IN 0 (-) 

IN 1 (-) 

I Out 0 

I Out 1 

COM 

COM 

IN 0 (+) 

IN 1 (+) 

V Out 0 

V Out 1 

Common connected 

internally. 

Figure 3.21 Differential Sensor Transmitter Types 

Analog Sensor 

IN 0 (+) 

IN 0 (-) 

IN 1 (+) 

IN 1 (-) 

Load 

I out 0 

I out 1 

V out 0 

V out 1 

COM 

COM 



Figure 3.22 Single-ended Sensor/Transmitter Types 


+ 

- 

Power 

Supply (1) 

Transmitter 

+ 

- 

Module 

IN + 

IN - 

COM 


+ 

- 

Power 

Supply (1) 

Transmitter 

Supply 

Signal 

Module 

IN + 

IN - 

COM 


+ 

- 

Power 

Supply (1) 

Transmitter 

Supply Signal 

+ 

- 

+ 

- 

Module 

IN + 

IN - 

COM 

(1) All power supplies rated N.E.C. Class 2. 

1762-IF4 Input Type Selection 

Select the input type, current or voltage, using the switches located on 

the module’s circuit board and the input type/range selection bits in 

the Configuration Data File. Refer to MicroLogix 1100 Programmable 

Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual, publication number 

1763-RM001. You can access the switches through the ventilation slots 

on the top of the module. 

Switch Location 

Ch0 Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 

Voltage (OFF) 

ON 

1 

ON 

2 1 

2 Current (ON Default) 



Figure 3.23 1762-IF4 Terminal Block Layout 

IN 0 (-) 

IN 1 (-) 

IN 2 (-) 

IN 3 (-) 

COM 

COM 

IN 0 (+) 

IN 1 (+) 

IN 2 (+) 

IN 3 (+) 

Commons internally connected. 

Figure 3.24 Differential Sensor Transmitter Types 

Analog Sensor 

IN 0 (+) 

IN 0 (-) 

IN 1 (+) 

IN 1 (-) 

IN 2 (+) 

IN 2 (-) 

IN 3 (+) 

IN 3 (-) 

COM 

COM 

TIP 

Grounding the cable shield at the module end only 

usually provides sufficient noise immunity. 

However, for best cable shield performance, earth 

ground the shield at both ends, using a 0.01µF 

capacitor at one end to block AC power ground 

currents, if necessary. 



Figure 3.25 Sensor/Transmitter Types 


Power 

Supply (1) 

+ 

- 

Transmitter 

+ 

- 

Module 

IN + 

IN - 

COM 


Power 

Supply (1) 

+ 

- 

Supply 

Transmitter 

Signal 

Module 

IN + 

IN - 

COM 


Power 

Supply (1) 

+ 

- 

Transmitter 

Supply Signal 

+ 

- 

+ 

- 

Module 

IN + 

IN - 

COM 

(1) All power supplies rated N.E.C. Class 2. 

1762-OF4 Output Type Selection 

The output type selection, current or voltage, is made by wiring to the 

appropriate terminals, Iout or Vout, and by the type/range selection 

bits in the Configuration Data File. 

1762-OF4 Terminal Block Layout 

I out 0 

I out 1 

I out 2 

I out 3 

COM 

COM 

V out 0 

V out 1 

V out 2 

V out 3 

Commons connected internally 



1762-OF4 Wiring 

Current Load 

I out 0 

I out 1 

I out 2 

I out 3 

Voltage Load 

V out 0 

V out 1 

V out 2 

V out 3 

COM 

COM 




Chapter 4 

Communication Connections 

This chapter describes how to communicate with your control system. 

The method you use and cabling required to connect your controller 

depends on what type of system you are employing. This chapter also 

describes how the controller establishes communication with the 

appropriate network. Topics include: 

• supported communication protocols 

• default communication configurations 

• using communications toggle functionality 

• connecting to RS-232 port 

• connecting to DH-485 network 

• connecting to AIC+ 

• connecting to DeviceNet 

• connecting to Ethernet 

The MicroLogix 1100 controllers provide two communication 

channels, an isolated RS-232/485 communication port (Channel 0) and 

an Ethernet port (Channel 1). 

Supported Communication 

Protocols 

MicroLogix 1100 controllers support the following communication 

protocols from the primary RS-232/485 communication channel, 

Channel 0: 

• DH-485 

• DF1 Full-Duplex 

• DF1 Half-Duplex Master and Slave 

• DF1 Radio Modem 

• Modbus Master and Slave 

• ASCII 

The Ethernet communication channel, Channel 1, allows your 

controller to be connected to a local area network for various devices 

providing 10 Mbps/100 Mbps transfer rate. MicroLogix 1100 

controllers support CIP explicit messaging (message exchange). 

MicroLogix 1100 controllers do not support Ethernet I/O master 

capability through CIP implicit messaging (real-time I/O messaging). 


4-2 Communication Connections 

For more information on MicroLogix 1100 communications, refer to 

the MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set 

Reference Manual, publication number 1763-RM001. 

Default Communication 

Configuration 

The MicroLogix 1100 communication Channel 0 has the following 

default communication configuration. 

TIP 

For Channel 0, the default configuration is present 

when: 

• The controller is powered-up for the first time. 

• The communications toggle functionality 

specifies default communications (specified using 

the LCD Display. The DCOMM indicator on the 

LCD Display is on, i.e., lit in solid rectangle). 

• An OS upgrade is completed. 

See Chapter 5 for more information about using the LCD Display. 

See Appendix E for more information about communicating. 

Table 4.1 DF1 Full-Duplex Default Configuration Parameters 

Parameter 

Default 

Baud Rate 19.2K 

Parity 

none 

Source ID (Node Address) 1 

Control Line 

no handshaking 

Error Detection 

CRC 

Embedded Responses 

auto detect 

Duplicate Packet (Message) Detect 

enabled 

ACK Timeout 

50 counts 

NAK retries 

3 retries 

ENQ retries 

3 retries 

Stop Bits 1 

Using the Communications 

Toggle Functionality 

The Communications Toggle Functionality can be operated using the 

LCD display on the controller, as shown below. 

Use the Communications Toggle Functionality to change from the 

user-defined communication configuration to the default 

communications mode and back on Channel 0. The Default 

Communications (DCOMM) indicator on the LCD display operates to 


Communication Connections 4-3 

show when the controller is in the default communications mode 

(settings shown on page 4-2). 

COMM0 

COMM1 

DCOMM 

BAT. LO 

U-MSG 

TIP 

The Communication Toggle Functionality only 

affects the communication configuration of 

Channel 0. 

Changing Communication Configuration 

Follow the procedure below to change from the user-defined 

communication configuration to the default communications mode 

and back. In this example, we will start from the Main Menu screen of 

the LCD display, as shown below. If necessary, press the ESC key 

repeatedly until you return to the Main Menu screen. 

1. On the Main Menu screen, select Advance Set by using the Up 

and Down keys on the LCD keypad, as shown below. If the 

menu items shown in the figure below are not displayed on the 

Main Menu screen, you need to scroll down the screen by 

pressing the Down key. 



2. Then, press the OK key on the LCD keypad. The Advanced 

Settings Menu screen is displayed, as shown below. 

3. Select DCOMM Cfg using the Up and Down keys, as shown 

below, and then press the OK key. 

4. The DCOMM Configuration screen is displayed, as shown 

below. The current status, Disable in this example, is selected by 

default. 

COMM0 

COMM1 

DCOMM 

BAT. LO 

U-MSG 

The DCOMM status indicator, which is the third of the five 

indicators at the top left of the LED display, is displayed in 

empty rectangle. It means that the communication configuration 

is set to a user-defined communication mode at present. 



If the communication configuration is set to the default 

communication mode, the DCOMM Configuration screen is 

displayed as shown below. The DCOMM status indicator is 

displayed in solid rectangle. 

COMM0 

COMM1 

DCOMM 

BAT. LO 

U-MSG 

5. Use the up arrow to change the indicator position so that it is 

pointing to Enable.Press the OK key to change to the default 

communication mode. The DCOMM Mode Change Notification 

screen is displayed, as shown below. It indicates that the 

communication configuration is changed to the default 

communication mode. The DCOMM status indicator is displayed 

in solid rectangle. 

If you change to the user-defined configuration from the default 

configuration mode by selecting Disable and pressing the OK 



key, the DCOMM Mode Change Notification will be displayed as 

shown below. 

6. Press the ESC key to return to the Advanced Settings Menu 

screen, as shown in step 3. 



Connecting to the RS-232 

Port 

There are two ways to connect the MicroLogix 1100 programmable 

controller to your personal computer using the DF1 protocol: using a 

point-to-point connection, or using a modem. Descriptions of these 

methods follow. 

ATTENTION 

All devices connected to the RS-232/485 

communication port must be referenced to controller 

ground, or be floating (not referenced to a potential 

other than ground). Failure to follow this procedure 

may result in property damage or personal injury. 

• For 1763-L16BWA controllers: 

The COM of the sensor supply is also connected 

to chassis ground internally. The 24V dc sensor 

power source should not be used to power 

output circuits. It should only be used to power 

input devices. 

• For 1763-L16BBB controller: 

The VDC NEUT or common terminal of the 

power supply is also connected to chassis ground 

internally. 

Table 4.2 Available Communication Cables 


1761-CBL-AM00 Series C or later cables are required for Class I Div 2 applications. 

1761-CBL-AP00 Series C or later cables are required for Class I Div 2 applications. 

1761-CBL-PM02 Series C or later cables are required for Class I Div 2 applications. 

1761-CBL-HM02 Series C or later cables are required for Class I Div 2 applications. 

2707-NC9 Series C or later cables are required for Class I Div 2 applications. 


Length 

45 cm (17.7 in) 

45 cm (17.7 in) 

2m (6.5 ft) 

2m (6.5 ft) 

15m (49.2 ft) 

30 cm (11.8 in) 



ATTENTION 


Do not connect a MicroLogix 1100 controller to 

another MicroLogix family controller such as 

MicroLogix 1000, MicroLogix 1200, MicroLogix 1500, 

or to the 1747-DPS1 Network port using a 

1761-CBL-AM00 (8-pin mini-DIN to 8-pin mini-DIN) 

cable or equivalent. 

This type of connection will cause damage to the 

RS-232/485 communication port (Channel 0) of the 

MicroLogix 1100 and/or the controller itself. 

Communication pins used for RS-485 

communications are alternately used for 24V power 

on the other MicroLogix controllers and the Network 

port of the 1747-DPS1. 

Making a DF1 Point-to-Point Connection 

You can connect the MicroLogix 1100 programmable controller to 

your personal computer using a serial cable (1761-CBL-PM02) from 

your personal computer’s serial port to the controller’s Channel 0. The 

recommended protocol for this configuration is DF1 Full-Duplex. 

You can connect a MicroLogix 1100 controller to your personal 

computer directly without using an external optical isolator, such as 

Advanced Interface Converter (AIC+), catalog number 1761-NET-AIC, 

as shown in the illustration below, because Channel 0 is isolated 

within the controller. 

Personal Computer 

MicroLogix 1100 Channel 0 

1761-CBL-AP00 or 

1761-CBL-PM02 1) 

(1) Series C or higher cables are required for Class I Div 2 applications. 



Using a Modem 

You can use modems to connect a personal computer to one 

MicroLogix 1100 controller (using DF1 Full-Duplex protocol), to 

multiple controllers (using DF1 Half-Duplex protocol), or Modbus 

RTU Slave protocol via Channel 0, as shown in the following 

illustration. (See Appendix E for information on types of modems you 

can use with the micro controllers.) 

IMPORTANT 

Do not attempt to use DH-485 protocol through 

modems under any circumstance. The 

communication timing using DH-485 protocol is not 

supported by modem communications. 


Modem Cable 

(straight-through) 

Modem 


Channel 0 

Protocol Options 

• DF1 Full-Duplex protocol (to 1 controller) 

• DF1 Half-Duplex protocol (to multiple controllers) 

• Modbus RTU Slave protocol 

Modem 


1761-CBL-PM02 (1) 

(straight-through) 


You can connect a MicroLogix 1100 controller to your modem directly 

without using an external optical isolator, such as AIC+, catalog 

number 1761-NET-AIC, as shown in the illustration below, because 

Channel 0 is isolated within the controller. 

ATTENTION 

Do not connect pin 1,8, and 5. This connection will 

cause damage to the RS-232/485 communication port 

(channel 0) of the MicroLogix 1100 and/or the 

controller itself. 



MicroLogix 1100 Channel 0 to Modem Cable Pinout 

When connecting MicroLogix 1100 Channel 0 to a modem using an 

RS-232 cable, the maximum that the cable length may be extended is 

15.24 m (50 ft). Refer to the following typical pinout: 

DTE Device 

(MicroLogix 

1100 

Channel 0) 

DCE Device 

(Modem, 

PanelView, 

etc.) 

8-Pin 25-Pin 9-Pin 

7 TXD TXD 2 3 

4 RXD RXD 3 2 

8 GND GND 7 5 

? DCD DCD 8 1 

? DTR DTR 20 4 

? DSR DSR 6 6 

6 CTS CTS 5 8 

3 RTS RTS 4 7 



Connecting to a DF1 Half-Duplex Network 

When a communication port is configured for DF1 Half-Duplex Slave, 

available parameters include: 

Table 4.3 DF1 Half-Duplex Configuration Parameters 

Parameter 

Options 

Baud Rate 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19.2K, 38.4K 

Parity 

none, even 

Source ID (Node Address) 0 to 254 decimal 

Control Line 

no handshaking, handshaking 

Error Detection 

CRC, BCC 

EOT Suppression 

enabled, disabled 

When EOT Suppression is enabled, the slave does not respond when polled if no message is queued. This 

saves modem transmission power and time when there is no message to transmit. 

Duplicate Packet (Message) 

Detect 

Poll Timeout (x20 ms) 

RTS Off Delay (x20 ms) 

RTS Send Delay (x20 ms) 

enabled, disabled 

Detects and eliminates duplicate responses to a message. Duplicate packets may be sent under noisy 

communication conditions if the sender’s Message Retries are not set to 0. 

0 to 65535 (can be set in 20 ms increments) 

Poll Timeout only applies when a slave device initiates a MSG instruction. It is the amount of time that the 

slave device waits for a poll from the master device. If the slave device does not receive a poll within the 

Poll Timeout, a MSG instruction error is generated, and the ladder program needs to requeue the MSG 

instruction. If you are using a MSG instruction, it is recommended that a Poll Timeout value of zero not be 

used. Poll Timeout is disabled when set to zero. 


Specifies the delay time between when the last serial character is sent to the modem and when RTS is 

deactivated. Gives the modem extra time to transmit the last character of a packet. 


Specifies the time delay between setting RTS until checking for the CTS response. For use with modems 

that are not ready to respond with CTS immediately upon receipt of RTS. 

Message Retries 0 to 255 

Specifies the number of times a slave device attempts to resend a message packet when it does not 

receive an ACK from the master device. For use in noisy environments where message packets may 

become corrupted in transmission. 

Pre Transmit Delay 

(x1 ms) 


• When the Control Line is set to no handshaking, this is the delay time before transmission. 

Required for 1761-NET-AIC physical Half-Duplex networks. The 1761-NET-AIC needs delay time to 

change from transmit to receive mode. 

• When the Control Line is set to DF1 Half-Duplex Modem, this is the minimum time delay between 

receiving the last character of a packet and the RTS assertion. 



DF1 Half-Duplex Master-Slave Network 

Use the following diagram for DF1 Half-Duplex Master-Slave protocol 

without hardware handshaking. 

SLC 5/03 

processor 

DF1 

Master 


CH0 

1761-CBL-AM00 or 1761-CBL-HM02 (4) 

1761-CBL-AP00 or 1761-CBL-PM02 (4) DF1 Slave 

(3) 

(2) radio modem 

(3) 

(2) 

(1) 

or lease line 

straight 9-25 pin cable 

(1) 

AIC+ 

straight 9-25 

pin cable 

24V dc power (User Supplied) 

radio 

modem or 

1761-CBL-AM00, 1761-CBL-HM02, 

lease line 

1761-CBL-AP00 or 1761-CBL-PM02 to controller (4) 

CH0 

1763-NC01 (daisy chain) to AIC+ (4) 

CH0 


CH0 


DF1 Slave 

DF1 Slave 

RS-485 DF1 Half-Duplex 

RS-485 DF1 Half-Duplex 

(1) DB-9 RS-232 port 

(2) mini-DIN 8 RS-232 port 

(3) RS-485 port 



TERM 

A 

B 

COM 

SHLD 

CHS GND 

TX TX 

TX 

PWR 

DC SOURCE 

CABLE 

EXTERNAL 

TERM 

A 

B 

COM 

SHLD 

CHS GND 

TX TX 

TX 

PWR 

DC SOURCE 

CABLE 

EXTERNAL 

TERM 

A 

B 

COM 

SHLD 

CHS GND 

TX TX 

TX 

PWR 

DC SOURCE 

CABLE 

EXTERNAL 


DF1 Half-Duplex Network (Using PC and Modems) 

Rockwell Software RSLinx 2.0 (or 

higher), SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, 

SLC 5/05, PLC-5, or MicroLogix 

1000, 1200, and 1500 processors 

configured for DF1Half-Duplex 

Master. Rockwell Software RSLinx 

2.5 required for MicroLogix 1100. 

DF1 Half-Duplex Protocol 

Modem 

MicroLogix 

1000 (Slave) 

MicroLogix 

1100 (Slave) 

MicroLogix 

1200 (Slave) 

MicroLogix 1500 with 

1764-LSP or 1764-LRP 

Processor (Slave) 

MicroLogix 1500 with 

1764-LRP Processor (Slave) 

SLC 5/03 (Slave) 



Connecting to a DH-485 

Network 

The network diagrams on the next pages provide examples of how to 

connect MicroLogix 1100 controllers to the DH-485 network. 

You can connect a MicroLogix 1100 controller to your DH-485 

network directly without using an external optical isolator, such as 


as shown in the illustrations below, because Channel 0 is isolated 

within the controller. 

TIP 

Use a 1763-NC01 Series A or later (8-pin mini-DIN to 

6-pin DH-485 connector) cable or equivalent to 

connect a MicroLogix 1100 controller to a DH-485 

network. 

We recommend that you use an AIC+ to connect your PC to a DH-485 

network. For more information on the AIC+, see the Advanced 

Interface Converter and DeviceNet Interface Installation Instructions, 

Publication 1761-5.11. 

DH-485 Configuration Parameters 

When MicroLogix communications are configured for DH-485, the 

following parameters can be changed: 

Table 4.4 DF1 Full-Duplex Configuration Parameters 

Parameter 

Options 

Baud Rate 9600, 19.2K 

Node Address 

1 to 31 decimal 

Token Hold Factor 1 to 4 

See Software Considerations on page E-10 for tips on setting the 

parameters listed above. 


TERM 

A 

B 

COM 

SHLD 

CHS GND 

TX TX 

TX 

PWR 

DC SOURCE 

CABLE 

EXTERNAL 

ESC 

OK 

TERM 

A 

B 

COM 

SHLD 

CHS GND 

TX TX 

TX 

PWR 

DC SOURCE 

CABLE 

EXTERNAL 

TERM 

A 

B 

COM 

SHLD 

CHS GND 

TX TX 

TX 

PWR 

DC SOURCE 

CABLE 

EXTERNAL 

TERM 

A 

B 

COM 

SHLD 

CHS GND 

TX TX 

TX 

PWR 

DC SOURCE 

CABLE 

EXTERNAL 

TERM 

A 

B 

COM 

SHLD 

CHS GND 

TX TX 

TX 

PWR 

DC SOURCE 

CABLE 

EXTERNAL 

TERM 

A 

B 

COM 

SHLD 

CHS GND 

TX TX 

TX 

PWR 

DC SOURCE 

CABLE 

EXTERNAL 

TERM 

A 

B 

COM 

SHLD 

CHS GND 

TX TX 

TX 

PWR 

DC SOURCE 

CABLE 

EXTERNAL 


DH-485 Network with a MicroLogix 1100 Controller 

AIC+ 

AIC+ 

A-B 

PanelView 

DH-485 Network 

SLC 5/04 

PanelView 550 

AIC+ AIC+ AIC+ 

AIC+ 



Personal 

Computer 




Belden, shielded, twisted-pair cable 

Belden, shielded, twisted-pair cable 

1763-NC01 (4) 

ESC 

OK 

(3) 

(1) 

AIC+ 

(2) 


1761-CBL-PM02 

(1) DB-9 RS-232 port 


(3) RS-485 port 

(4) Series A or later cables are required. 

24V dc (user supplied) 

port 1 or port 2 

1747-CP3 

to PC 

or 1761-CBL-AC00 


TERM 

A 

B 

COM 

SHLD 

CHS GND 

TX TX 

TX 

PWR 

DC SOURCE 

CABLE 

EXTERNAL 


Typical 3-Node Network (Channel 0 Connection) 

PanelView 550 

A-B 

PanelView 

RJ45 port 

1761-CBL-AS09 

or 1761-CBL-AS03 

1747-CP3 or 

1761-CBL-AC00 

CH0 

1761-CBL-AM00 

or 1761-CBL-HM02 


Recommended Tools 

To connect a DH-485 network to additional devices, you need tools to 

strip the shielded cable and to attach the cable to the AIC+ Advanced 

Interface Converter. We recommend the following equipment (or 

equivalent): 

Table 4.5 Working with Cable for DH-485 Network 

Description Part Number Manufacturer 

Shielded Twisted Pair Cable #3106A or #9842 Belden 

Stripping Tool Not Applicable Not Applicable 

1/8” Slotted Screwdriver Not Applicable Not Applicable 

DH-485 Communication Cable 

The suggested DH-485 communication cable is either Belden #3106A 

or #9842. The cable is jacketed and shielded with one or two 

twisted-wire pairs and a drain wire. 

One pair provides a balanced signal line and one additional wire is 

used for a common reference line between all nodes on the network. 

The shield reduces the effect of electrostatic noise from the industrial 

environment on network communication. 

The communication cable consists of a number of cable segments 

daisy-chained together. The total length of the cable segments cannot 



exceed 1219 m (4000 ft). However, two segments can be used to 

extend the DH-485 network to 2438 m (8000 ft). For additional 

information on connections using the AIC+, refer to the Advanced 

Interface Converter (AIC+) User Manual, publication 1761-6.4. 

When cutting cable segments, make them long enough to route them 

from one AIC+ to the next, with sufficient slack to prevent strain on 

the connector. Allow enough extra cable to prevent chafing and 

kinking in the cable. 

Use these instructions for wiring the Belden #3106A or #9842 cable. 

(See Cable Selection Guide on page 4-20 if you are using standard 

Allen-Bradley cables.) 

Connecting the Communication Cable to the DH-485 Connector 

TIP 

A daisy-chained network is recommended. Do not 

make the incorrect connection shown below: 

Belden #3106A 

or #9842 

Belden #3106A or 

#9842 

Belden #3106A or 

#9842 

Connector 

Connector 

Incorrect 

Connector 

Single Cable Connection 

When connecting a single cable to the DH-485 connector, use the 

following diagram. 

Shrink Tubing Recommended 

Orange with White Stripes 

White with Orange Stripes 

Blue (#3106A) or 

Blue with White Drain Wire 

Stripes (#9842) 

6 Termination 

5 A 

4 B 

3 Common 

2 Shield 

1 Chassis Ground 



Multiple Cable Connection 

When connecting multiple cables to the DH-485 connector, use the 

following diagram. 

to Previous Device 

to Next Device 

Table 4.6 Connections using Belden #3106A Cable 

For this Wire/Pair Connect this Wire To this Terminal 

Shield/Drain Non-jacketed Terminal 2 - Shield 

Blue Blue Terminal 3 - (Common) 

White/Orange White with Orange Stripe Terminal 4 - (Data B) 

Orange with White Stripe Terminal 5 - (Data A) 

Table 4.7 Connections using Belden #9842 Cable 

For this Wire/Pair Connect this Wire To this Terminal 

Shield/Drain Non-jacketed Terminal 2 - Shield 

Blue/White White with Blue Stripe Cut back - no connection (1) 

Blue with White Stripe Terminal 3 - (Common) 

White/Orange White with Orange Stripe Terminal 4 - (Data B) 

Orange with White Stripe Terminal 5 - (Data A) 

(1) To prevent confusion when installing the communication cable, cut back the white with blue stripe wire 

immediately after the insulation jacket is removed. This wire is not used by DH-485. 

Grounding and Terminating the DH-485 Network 

Only one connector at the end of the link must have Terminals 1 and 

2 jumpered together. This provides an earth ground connection for 

the shield of the communication cable. 

Both ends of the network must have Terminals 5 and 6 jumpered 

together, as shown below. This connects the termination impedance 

(of 120 ohm) that is built into each AIC+ or the 1763-NC01 as required 

by the DH-485 specification. 



End-of-Line Termination 

Jumper 

Jumper 

Belden #3106A or #9842 Cable 

1219 m (4000ft) Maximum 

Jumper 

Connecting the AIC+ 

You can connect a MicroLogix 1100 controller to a DH-485 network 

via Channel 0 directly without using an optical isolator, such as AIC+, 

catalog number 1761-NET-AIC, because Channel 0 is isolated. 

However, you need to use an AIC+ to connect your PC or other 

MicroLogix Family products, such as MicroLogix 1200, to a DH-485 

network. 

The following figure shows the external wiring connections and 

specifications of the AIC+. 

3 

2 

AIC+ Advanced Interface Converter 

(1761-NET-AIC) 

1 

4 

5 

Item Description 

1 Port 1 - DB-9 RS-232, DTE 

2 Port 2 - mini-DIN 8 RS-232 DTE 

3 Port 3 - RS-485 Phoenix plug 

4 DC Power Source selector switch 

(cable = port 2 power source, 

external = external power source connected to item 5) 

5 Terminals for external 24V dc power supply and chassis ground 

For additional information on connecting the AIC+, refer to the 

Advanced Interface Converter (AIC+) User Manual, publication 

1761-6.4. 



Cable Selection Guide 

1761-CBL-AP00 (2) 

1761-CBL-PM02 (2) 

Cable Length Connections from to AIC+ External 

Power Supply 

Required (1) 

1761-CBL-AP00 (2) 

1761-CBL-PM02 (2) 

45 cm (17.7 in) 

2m (6.5 ft) 

Power 

Selection 

Switch 

Setting (1) 

SLC 5/03 or SLC 5/04 processors, ch 0 port 2 yes external 

MicroLogix 1000, 1200, or 1500 ch 0 port 1 yes external 

MicroLogix 1100 ch 0 port 1 yes external 

PanelView 550 through NULL modem 

adapter 

port 2 yes external 

DTAM Plus / DTAM Micro port 2 yes external 

PC COM port port 2 yes external 

(1) External power supply required unless the AIC+ is powered by the device connected to port 2, then the selection switch should be set to cable. 

(2) Series C or higher cables are required. 

1761-CBL-AM00 (2) 

1761-CBL-HM02 (2) 


Power Supply 

Required (1) 

1761-CBL-AM00 (2) 

1761-CBL-HM02 (2) 

45 cm (17.7 in) 

2m (6.5 ft) 

Power 

Selection 

Switch Setting 

MicroLogix 1000, 1200, or 1500 ch 0 port 2 no cable 

MicroLogix 1100 ch 0 port 2 Yes external 

to port 2 on another AIC+ port 2 yes external 

(1) 

External power supply required unless the AIC+ is powered by the device connected to port 2, then the selection switch should be set to cable. 

(2) Series C or higher cables are required. 



1761-CBL-AC00 

1747-CP3 


Power Supply 

Required (1) 

Power 

Selection 

Switch 

Setting (1) 

1747-CP3 

3m (9.8 ft) SLC 5/03 or SLC 5/04 processor, channel 0 port 1 yes external 

1761-CBL-AC00 (1) 45 cm (17.7 in) 

PC COM port port 1 yes external 

PanelView 550 through NULL modem 

adapter 


DTAM Plus / DTAM Micro port 1 yes external 

Port 1 on another AIC+ port 1 yes external 


user-supplied cable 


Power Supply 

Required (1) 

Power 

Selection 

Switch 

Setting (1) 

straight 9-25 pin — modem or other communication device port 1 yes external 

(1) 

External power supply required unless the AIC+ is powered by the device connected to port 2, then the selection switch should be set to cable. 

1761-CBL-AS03 

1761-CBL-AS09 


Power Supply 

Required (1) 

1761-CBL-AS03 

3m (9.8 ft) 

SLC 500 Fixed, 

Power 

Selection 

Switch 

Setting (1) 


1761-CBL-AS09 

9.5m (31.17 ft) 

SLC 5/01, SLC 5/02, and SLC 5/03 

processors 

PanelView 550 RJ45 port port 3 yes external 


1761-CBL-PM02 Series C (or equivalent) Cable Wiring Diagram 



9 

8 

7 

6 

5 

2 34 

1 

6 78 

3 5 

4 

1 2 

Programming 

Device 

Controller 

9-Pin D-Shell 

8-Pin Mini Din 

9 RI 24V 1 

8 CTS GND 2 

7 RTS RTS 3 

6 DSR RXD 4 

5 GND DCD 5 

4 DTR CTS 6 

3 TXD TXD 7 

2 RXD GND 8 

1 DCD 

Recommended User-Supplied Components 

These components can be purchased from your local electronics 

supplier. 

Table 4.8 User Supplied Components 

Component 

external power supply and chassis ground 

NULL modem adapter 

straight 9-25 pin RS-232 cable 

Recommended Model 

power supply rated for 20.4 to 28.8V dc 

standard AT 

see table below for port information if 

making own cables 



1761-CBL-AP00 or 1761-CBL-PM02 

6 

7 

8 

9 

Port 1 

DB-9 RS-232 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 4 

Port 2 

cable straight D connector 

3 

6 

7 

1 2 

8 

5 

5 

4 

3 

6 

2 

1 

Port 3 

RS-485 connector 

Table 4.9 AIC+ Terminals 

Pin Port 1: DB-9 RS-232 

1 received line signal detector 

(DCD) 

Port 2 (2) : (1761-CBL-PM02 

cable) 

24V dc 

Port 3: RS-485 

Connector 

chassis ground 

2 received data (RxD) ground (GND) cable shield 

3 transmitted data (TxD) request to send (RTS) signal ground 

4 DTE ready (DTR) (1) received data (RxD) (3) DH-485 data B 

5 signal common (GND) received line signal detector DH-485 data A 

(DCD) 

6 DCE ready (DSR) (1) clear to send (CTS) (3) termination 

7 request to send (RTS) transmitted data (TxD) not applicable 

8 clear to send (CTS) ground (GND) not applicable 

9 not applicable not applicable not applicable 

(1) On port 1, pin 4 is electronically jumpered to pin 6. Whenever the AIC+ is powered on, pin 4 will match the 

state of pin 6. 

(2) An 8-pin mini DIN connector is used for making connections to port 2. This connector is not commercially 

available. If you are making a cable to connect to port 2, you must configure your cable to connect to the 

Allen-Bradley cable shown above. 

(3) 

In the 1761-CBL-PM02 cable, pins 4 and 6 are jumpered together within the DB-9 connector. 



Safety Considerations 

This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, 

C, D or non-hazardous locations only. 

WARNING 


AIC+ must be operated from an external power 

source. 

This product must be installed in an enclosure. All 

cables connected to the product must remain in the 

enclosure or be protected by conduit or other 

means. 

See Safety Considerations on page 2-3 for additional information. 

Installing and Attaching the AIC+ 

1. Take care when installing the AIC+ in an enclosure so that the 

cable connecting the MicroLogix controller to the AIC+ does not 

interfere with the enclosure door. 

2. Carefully plug the terminal block into the RS-485 port on the 

AIC+ you are putting on the network. Allow enough cable slack 

to prevent stress on the plug. 

3. Provide strain relief for the Belden cable after it is wired to the 

terminal block. This guards against breakage of the Belden cable 

wires. 



Powering the AIC+ 

MicroLogix 100, 1200, and 1500 programmable controllers support 

24V dc communication power on Channel 0. When connected to the 

8 pin mini-DIN connector on the 1761-NET-AIC, 1761-NET-ENI, and 

the 1761-NET-ENIW, these controllers provide the power for the 

interface converter modules. The MicroLogix 1100 does not provide 

24V dc communication power. Instead these pins are used to provide 

RS-485 communications directly. Any AIC+, ENI, or ENIW not 

connected to a MicroLogix 1000, 1200, or 1500 controller requires a 

24V dc power supply. 

If both the controller and external power are connected to the AIC+, 

the power selection switch determines what device powers the AIC+. 

ATTENTION 

If you use an external power supply, it must be 

24V dc (-15%/+20%). Permanent damage results if a 

higher voltage supply is used. 

Set the DC Power Source selector switch to EXTERNAL before 

connecting the power supply to the AIC+. The following illustration 

shows where to connect external power for the AIC+. 

Bottom View 

24VDC 

DC 

NEUT 

CHS 

GND 

ATTENTION 

Always connect the CHS GND (chassis ground) 

terminal to the nearest earth ground. This connection 

must be made whether or not an external 24V dc 

supply is used. 

Power Options 

Below are two options for powering the AIC+: 



• Use the 24V dc user power supply built into the MicroLogix 

1000, 1200, or 1500 controller. The AIC+ is powered through a 

hard-wired connection using a communication cable 

(1761-CBL-HM02, or equivalent) connected to port 2. 

• Use an external DC power supply with the following 

specifications: 

– operating voltage: 24V dc (-15%/+20%) 

– output current: 150 mA minimum 

– rated NEC Class 2 

Make a hard-wired connection from the external supply to the 

screw terminals on the bottom of the AIC+. 

ATTENTION 

If you use an external power supply, it must be 24V 

dc (-15%/+20%). Permanent damage results if 

miswired with the wrong power source. 



Connecting to DeviceNet 

You can connect a MicroLogix 1100 as a slave to a DeviceNet network 

using the DeviceNet Interface (DNI), catalog number 1761-NET-DNI. 

For additional information on using the DNI, refer to the DeviceNet 

Interface User Manual, publication 1761-6.5. The following figure 

shows the external wiring connections of the DNI. 

DeviceNet Node (Port 1) 

(Replacement connector 

part no. 1761-RPL-RT00) 

Use this write-on 

area to mark the 

DeviceNet node 

address. 

V– 

CAN_L 

NET 

SHIELD 

CAN_H 

V+ 

MOD 

NODE 

DANGER 

TX/RX 

GND 

RS-232 (Port 2) 

Cable Selection Guide (1) 

1761-CBL-AM00 

1761-CBL-HM02 

Cable Length Connections from to DNI 

1761-CBL-AM00 

1761-CBL-HM02 

45 cm (17.7 in) 

2m (6.5 ft) 

MicroLogix 1000 port 2 




1761-CBL-AP00 

1761-CBL-PM02 

Cable Length Connections from to DNI 

1761-CBL-AP00 

1761-CBL-PM02 

45 cm (17.7 in) 

2m (6.5 ft) 

SLC 5/03 or SLC 5/04 processors, 

channel 0 

port 2 

PC COM port port 2 

1764-LRP processor, channel 1 port 2 

(1) Series C (or higher) cables are required. 



Connecting to Ethernet 

You can connect directly a MicroLogix 1100 to an Ethernet network 

via the Ethernet port (Channel 1). You do not need to use an Ethernet 

interface card, such as the Ethernet Interface (ENI) and (ENIW), 

catalog number 1761-NET-ENI and 1761-NET-ENIW, to connect your 

MicroLogix 1100 controller to an Ethernet network. For additional 

information on connecting to an Ethernet network, see Appendix F. 

Ethernet Port (Channel 1) 

RS-232/485 Port (Channel 0) 

Ethernet Connections 

The Ethernet connector, Channel 1, is an RJ45, 10/100Base-T 

connector. The pin-out for the connector is shown below: 

Pin Pin Name 

1 Tx+ 

2 Tx- 

3 Rx+ 

4 not used by 10/100Base-T 


6 Rx- 



End view of RJ 45 Plug Looking into a RJ45 Jack 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 



When to use straight-through and cross-over cable: 

• MicroLogix 1100 Ethernet port to 10/100Base-T Ethernet switch 

cables utilize a straight-through pin-out (1-1, 2-2, 3-3, 6-6). 

• Direct point-to-point 10/100 Base-T cables connecting the 

MicroLogix 1100 Ethernet port directly to another Ethernet port 

(or a computer 10/100Base-T port) require a cross-over pin-out 

(1-3, 2-6, 3-1, 6-2). 




Chapter 5 

Using the LCD 

This chapter describes how to use the LCD and keypad on the 

MicroLogix 1100 controller. Topics include: 

• operating principles 

• I/O status display 

• monitoring bit file 

• monitoring integer file 

• using the mode switch 

• using a user defined LCD screen 

• changing key in mode 


• viewing Ethernet port configuration 

• using trim pots 

• viewing system information 

• viewing fault code 

The LCD and keypad are: 

Top View 

1 

2 

ESC 

OK 

Table 5.1 LCD and Keypad 

Feature 

Description 

1 LCD 

2 LCD Screen Keypad 

(ESC, OK, Up, Down, Left, and Right Buttons) 


5-2 Using the LCD 

Operating Principles 

Menu Structure 

Figure 5.1 MicroLogix 1100 LCD Menu Structure Tree 

Startup Screen 

yes 

User Defined? 

no 

Main Menu 

I/O Status 

Monitoring 

Mode Switch 

Bit 

Integer 

User Displ 

Advance Set 

KeyIn Mode 

DCOMM Cfg 

ENET Cfg 

TrimPot Set 

System Info 

Fault Code 

User Defined Menu 

LCD Instruction Interface 

The ESC key is hold down more than 3 sec. 


Using the LCD 5-3 

Startup Screen 

The Startup screen is displayed whenever the controller is powered 

up. 

The default Startup screen is: 

Figure 5.2 LCD Default Startup Screen 

You can customize this Startup screen in your application program by 

defining a string data file that contains the string to display on the 

Startup screen and specifying the CBS element of the LCD Function 

File to the address of this string file. 

The screen shown below is an example of a customized Startup 

screen. 

For more information on how to create and use a customized Startup 

screen, refer to the LCD Function File described in the MicroLogix 

1100 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual, 

publication 1763-RM001. 

After the default Startup screen or your customized Startup screen is 

displayed for 3 seconds, either the default screen, i.e., the I/O Status 

screen is displayed by default, or a user defined screen is displayed if 

your application uses a custom default screen. 



Main Menu and Default Screen 

The Main menu consists of five menu items: I/O Status, Monitoring, 

Mode Switch, User Displ, and Advance Set. 

Figure 5.3 LCD Main Menu 



Table 5.2 Main Menu Items 

: 

Menu Item Description For details, refer to 

I/O Status Displays the I/O Status screen, which shows the I/O status I/O Status on page 5-9 

of the embedded digital I/O. 

Monitoring Allows you to view and change the data value of a bit and an 

integer file. 

Monitoring Bit File on page 5-11 

Monitoring Integer File on page 5-17 

Mode Switch Allows you to change the mode switch selection. Using the Mode Switch on page 5-25 

User Displ Displays the user defined LCD screen Using a User Defined LCD Screen on page 5-28 

Advance Set Allows you to configure or view the following: 

• Change the key in mode for value entry for a trim pot. 

• Use the communications toggle functionality. 

• View the Ethernet port configuration. 

• Change the data value of trim pots. 

• View system information, such as OS series and 

firmware version. 

Figure 5.4 LCD Default Screen - I/O Status Screen 

. 

COMM0 

COMM1 

DCOMM 

BAT. LO 

U-MSG 

• Changing Key In Mode on page 5-31 

• Using Communications Toggle Functionality 

on page 5-34 

• Viewing Ethernet Port Configuration on 

page 5-34 

• Using Trim Pots on page 5-36 

• I/O Status on page 5-9 

This is the default screen of the display, allowing you to monitor 

controller and I/O Status. For more information on the I/O Status 

screen, see I/O Status on page 5-9. 



Operating Buttons 

Button 

Function 

ESC 

OK 

Cursor 

Buttons 

Move cursor 

Select menu item 

Choose file numbers, values, etc. 

OK 

Next menu level, store your entry, apply the 

changes 

ESC 

Previous menu level, cancel your entry 

Using Menus to Choose Values 

Press 

To 

• Go to next menu level. 

OK 

• Store your entry. 

• Apply the changes. 

• Go to previous menu level. 

ESC 

• Cancel your entry since the last Ok. 

• Press repeatedly to go to the main menu. 

• Change menu item. 

• Change value. 

• Change position. 



Selecting Between Menu Items 

Cursor up or down 

OK 

Apply or Enter 

The symbol " 

" is used as the cursor. 

Cursor Display 

There are two different cursor types: 

Selection cursor (the symbol “ 

to the selected item. 

”) is displayed left 

• Move cursor with the up/down arrows 

Full block navigation is shown as a flashing block: 

• Change position with left/right arrows 

• Change values with up/down arrows 

Flashing value is presented as an empty rectangle for explanation purpose. 



Setting Values 

Change value = up/down arrows 

Move cursor between digits = left/right arrows 

OK 

Stores Entries 

ESC 

Retain previous value 

Left/right arrow moves the cursor between the digits of the 

value (+02714). 

Up/down arrow changes the value. 

Up arrow = increment 

Down arrow = decrement 



I/O Status 

The MicroLogix 1100 provides I/O status indicators on the LCD 

screen. You can view the status of inputs and outputs on the I/O 

Status screen on the LCD, as shown below. The I/O status indicators 

on this screen are updated every 100 ms to reflect the current I/O 

status in real time, regardless of controller scan time. 

. 

COMM0 

COMM1 

DCOMM 

BAT. LO 

U-MSG 

Input status indicators (10) 

Output status indicators (6) 

A solid rectangle is displayed when the input or output is energized. 

An empty rectangle is displayed when the input or output is not 

energized. 

IMPORTANT 

If no user defined LCD screen is used, the I/O Status 

screen is displayed, 

• 5 seconds after the controller has powered-up. 

• When the user enters the I/O Status screen from 

other screen using the LCD menu. If you are at 

other screen and want to view I/O status, you 

have to enter the I/O Status screen manually 

using the menu. Otherwise, the current screen 

will be displayed continuously. 



IMPORTANT 

If a user defined LCD screen is used, the I/O S 

sctatus sreen is displayed, 

• When the user holds down the ESC key for more 

than 3 seconds. 

• When time out is enabled, i.e., the time out 

period is set to a positive value, and the time out 

period is passed. You can enable and disable 

time out and set the time out period using the TO 

element in the LCD Function File. For more 

information, refer to the LCD Function File 

described in the MicroLogix 1100 Programmable 

Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual, 

publication 1763-RM001. 

• If time out is disabled, i.e., the time out period is 

set to zero (0), and a custom LCD screen is 

displayed, it will be displayed continuously until 

the user gives an input to change to other screen. 

For more information, see Using a User Defined 

LCD Screen on page 5-28. 

Viewing I/O Status 

Follow these steps to view the status of inputs and outputs on the 

LCD. 

1. On the Main Menu screen, select I/O Status by using the Up and 

Down keys on the LCD keypad, as shown below. 



2. Then, press the OK key on the LCD keypad. The I/O Status 

screen is displayed, as shown below. 

3. If you have finished viewing I/O status, press the ESC key to 

return to the Main Menu screen, as shown in step 1. 

Monitoring Bit File 

The LCD allows you to view and change the data values of 48 bits in a 

user defined file. You can access to this functionality via the 

Monitoring screen of the LCD. 

To monitor the bit file on the LCD, you have to specify its file number 

in the Target Bit File Number (TBF) element of the LCD Function File 

and download your application program to the controller. The TBF 

element can only be changed by a program download. 

Target Bit File Number (TBF) 

Feature Address Data Format Type User Program 

Access 

Target Bit File Number LCD:0.TBF Word (int) Control Read Only 

The value stored in the TBF element identifies the bit file with which 

the LCD will interface. Valid bit files are B3, and B10 through B255. 

When the LCD reads a valid bit file number, it can access up to the 

first 48 bits (0 to 47) of the specified file on the LCD screen. The next 

48 bits in the target bit file (48 to 95) are used to define the read-only 

or read/write privileges for the first 48 bits. 

The only bit file that the LCD interfaces with is the file specified in the 

TBF element. 

IMPORTANT 

Use your programming software to ensure that the 

bit file you specify in the TBF element, as well as the 

appropriate number of elements, exist in the 

MicroLogix 1100 user program. 



The example table below shows how the LCD uses the configuration 

information with bit file number 3 (LCD:0.TBF=3). 

Bit Number Data Address Protection Bit Bit Number Data Address Protection Bit Bit Number Data Address Protection Bit 

0 B3:0/0 B3:3/0 16 B3:1/0 B3:4/0 32 B3:2/0 B3:5/0 

1 B3:0/1 B3:3/1 17 B3:1/1 B3:4/1 33 B3:2/1 B3:5/1 

2 B3:0/2 B3:3/2 18 B3:1/2 B3:4/2 34 B3:2/2 B3:5/2 

3 B3:0/3 B3:3/3 19 B3:1/3 B3:4/3 35 B3:2/3 B3:5/3 

4 B3:0/4 B3:3/4 20 B3:1/4 B3:4/4 36 B3:2/4 B3:5/4 

5 B3:0/5 B3:3/5 21 B3:1/5 B3:4/5 37 B3:2/5 B3:5/5 

6 B3:0/6 B3:3/6 22 B3:1/6 B3:4/6 38 B3:2/6 B3:5/6 

7 B3:0/7 B3:3/7 23 B3:1/7 B3:4/7 39 B3:2/7 B3:5/7 

8 B3:0/8 B3:3/8 24 B3:1/8 B3:4/8 40 B3:2/8 B3:5/8 

9 B3:0/9 B3:3/9 25 B3:1/9 B3:4/9 41 B3:2/9 B3:5/9 

10 B3:0/10 B3:3/10 26 B3:1/10 B3:4/10 42 B3:2/10 B3:5/10 

11 B3:0/11 B3:3/11 27 B3:1/11 B3:4/11 43 B3:2/11 B3:5/11 

12 B3:0/12 B3:3/12 28 B3:1/12 B3:4/12 44 B3:2/12 B3:5/12 

13 B3:0/13 B3:3/13 29 B3:1/13 B3:4/13 45 B3:2/13 B3:5/13 

14 B3:0/14 B3:3/14 30 B3:1/14 B3:4/14 46 B3:2/14 B3:5/14 

15 B3:0/15 B3:3/15 31 B3:1/15 B3:4/15 47 B3:2/15 B3:5/15 

The bit number displayed on the LCD corresponds to the data address 

as illustrated in the table. The protection bit defines whether the data 

is editable or read-only. When the protection bit is set (1), the 

corresponding data address is considered read-only by the LCD. The 

“Protected!” message is displayed whenever a read-only element is 

active on the LCD. When the protection bit is clear (0) or the 

protection bit does not exist, no additional message is displayed and 

the data within the corresponding address is editable from the LCD 

keypad. 

IMPORTANT 

Although the LCD does not allow protected data to 

be changed from its keypad, the control program or 

other communication devices do have access to this 

data. Protection bits only provide LCD write 

protection. They do not provide any overwrite 

protection to data from ladder logic, HMI, or 

programming software. It is the users responsibility 

to ensure that data is not inadvertently overwritten. 

TIP 

• Remaining addresses within the target file can be 

used without restrictions (addresses B3:6/0 and 

above, in this example). 

• The LCD always starts at bit 0 of a data file. It 

cannot start at any other address within the file. 



Monitoring a Bit File 

For explanations in this section, we assume the followings in the 

application program: 

• A bit file B3, which is 7 elements long (7 words = 112 bits), is 

defined with the preset data, as shown in the screen capture 

below. 

data bits (first 48 bits), which 

are monitored on the LCD 

and maskable by protection bits 

protection bits (second 48 bits) 

data bits (after the first 96 bits), which 

are not monitored on the LCD and not 

maskable by protection bits 

• The TBF element of the LCD Function File is set to 3 to specify 

the bit file B3 as the target bit file to monitor on the LCD, as 

shown in the screen capture below. 

• The controller mode is set to REMOTE RUN. 



Follow these steps to view and change the data values of the bit file 

B3. 

1. On the Main Menu screen, select Monitoring by using the Up 

and Down keys on the LCD keypad. 

2. Then, press the OK key on the LCD keypad. The Bit/Integer File 

Select screen is displayed, as shown below. 

3. If Bit is selected, as shown in step 2, press the OK key. 

If not selected, press the Up or Down key to select it and then 

press the OK key. 

4. The current data value (ON) of the B3:0/0 bit is displayed, as 

shown below. Note that “0/0” is flashing, which means the 

cursor is at the target bit position. 



5. We will change the data value of the B3:0/0 bit to OFF (0). 

First, press OK to select the displayed address and move the 

cursor to the data value position. Then, “ON” will be flashing, 

which means the cursor is at the data value position. 

6. Press the Down key. Then, the data value will be represented as 

“OFF”. Note that “OFF” is still flashing, which means the cursor 

is still at the data value position. 

7. Press OK to apply the changes. Then, the new value OFF (0) is 

applied. Note that the target bit, “0/0” in this example, is 

flashing. The cursor is moved automatically to the target bit 

position. 

You can identify this change of data value is reflected to your 

RSLogix 500 programming software. 



TIP 

When the cursor is at the data value position, press 

the Down key to change the data value of a bit from 

ON (1) to OFF (0). Press the Up key to change from 

OFF (0) to ON (1). 

After changing the data value of a target bit, press 

the OK key to apply the changes or press the ESC 

key to discard the changes. 

8. Now, we will view an example of the data value of a protected 

bit, B3:0/2. Press the Up key twice. Then, the target bit will 

change to “0/2” and its data value is displayed with the 

“Protected!” message, as shown below. Because the B3:3/2 is set 

(1), the B3:0/2 bit is a protected bit. 

9. Try to move the cursor to the data value position by pressing the 

OK key. Because the B3:0/2 bit is a protected bit, you will find 

that the cursor does not move to the data value position. 

10. Press the Up key once to view the data value of the B3:0/3 bit. 

Because the B3:0/3 bit is not a protected bit, only its data value, 

OFF (0) in this example, is displayed without the “Protected!” 

message. 

11. Press the Up key once to view the data value of the B3:0/4 bit. 

You will find that the B3:0/3 bit is a protected bit and its data 

value is ON (1). 



12. Hold down the Up key until the target bit becomes “2/15”, as 

shown below. 

Press the Up key again, and you will find the target bit does not 

change to “3/0”. It is because the maximum range of bits you 

can monitor with the LCD is the first 48 bits (3 words) of the 

specified target bit file. 

IMPORTANT 

The maximum range of bits you can monitor with 

the Bit File Monitoring functionality on the LCD is 

the first 48 bits (3 words). 

13. Try to press the Up and Down keys to change the target bit to 

another bit. Try to change its data value using the OK, Up and 

Down keys. 

14. If you have finished monitoring the bit file, B3, press the ESC 

key to return to the Bit/Integer File Select screen, as shown in 

step 2. 

Monitoring Integer File 

The LCD allows you to view and change the data value of an integer 

file. You can access to this functionality via the Monitoring screen of 

the LCD. 

To monitor an integer file on the LCD, you have to specify its file 

number in the Target Integer File Number (TIF) element of the LCD 

Function File and download your application program to the 

controller. The TIF element can only be changed by a program 

download. 

Target Integer File Number (TIF) 

Feature Address Data Format Type User Program 

Access 

Target Integer File Number LCD:0.TIF Word (int) Control Read Only 



The value stored in the TIF element identifies the integer file with 

which the LCD will interface. The LCD can read or write to any valid 

integer file within the controller. Valid integer files are N3 through 

N255. When the LCD reads a valid integer file number, it can access 

up to the first 48 elements (words 0 to 47) of the specified file on the 

LCD screen. The next 48 bits (words 48 to 50) are used to define the 

read-only or read/write privileges for the first 48 elements. 

The only integer file that the LCD interfaces with is the file specified in 

the TIF element. 

IMPORTANT 

Use your programming software to ensure that the 

integer file you specify in the TIF element, as well as 

the appropriate number of elements, exist in the 

MicroLogix 1100 user program. 

The example table below shows how the LCD uses the configuration 

information with integer file number 7 (LCD:0.TIF=7). 

Element Data Address Protection Bit Element Data Address Protection Bit Element Data Address Protection Bit 

Number 

Number 

Number 

0 N7:0 N7:48/0 16 N7:16 N7:49/0 32 N7:32 N7:50/0 

1 N7:1 N7:48/1 17 N7:17 N7:49/1 33 N7:33 N7:50/1 

2 N7:2 N7:48/2 18 N7:18 N7:49/2 34 N7:34 N7:50/2 

3 N7:3 N7:48/3 19 N7:19 N7:49/3 35 N7:35 N7:50/3 

4 N7:4 N7:48/4 20 N7:20 N7:49/4 36 N7:36 N7:50/4 

5 N7:5 N7:48/5 21 N7:21 N7:49/5 37 N7:37 N7:50/5 

6 N7:6 N7:48/6 22 N7:22 N7:49/6 38 N7:38 N7:50/6 

7 N7:7 N7:48/7 23 N7:23 N7:49/7 39 N7:39 N7:50/7 

8 N7:8 N7:48/8 24 N7:24 N7:49/8 40 N7:40 N7:50/8 

9 N7:9 N7:48/9 25 N7:25 N7:49/9 41 N7:41 N7:50/9 

10 N7:10 N7:48/10 26 N7:26 N7:49/10 42 N7:42 N7:50/10 

11 N7:11 N7:48/11 27 N7:27 N7:49/11 43 N7:43 N7:50/11 

12 N7:12 N7:48/12 28 N7:28 N7:49/12 44 N7:44 N7:50/12 

13 N7:13 N7:48/13 29 N7:29 N7:49/13 45 N7:45 N7:50/13 

14 N7:14 N7:48/14 30 N7:30 N7:49/14 46 N7:46 N7:50/14 

15 N7:15 N7:48/15 31 N7:31 N7:49/15 47 N7:47 N7:50/15 

The element number displayed on the LCD corresponds to the data 

address as illustrated in the table. The protection bit defines whether 

the data is editable or read-only. When the protection bit is set (1), the 

corresponding data address is considered read-only by the LCD. The 

“Protected!” message is displayed whenever a read-only element is 

active on the LCD. When the protection bit is clear (0) or the 

protection bit does not exist, no additional message is displayed and 

the data within the corresponding address is editable from the LCD 

keypad. 



IMPORTANT 

Although the LCD does not allow protected data to 

be changed from its keypad, the control program or 

other communication devices do have access to this 

data. Protection bits do not provide any overwrite 

protection to data within the target integer file. It is 

entirely the user’s responsibility to ensure that data is 

not inadvertently overwritten. 

TIP 

• Remaining addresses within the target file can be 

used without restrictions (addresses N7:51 and 

above, in this example). 

• The LCD always starts at word 0 of a data file. It 

cannot start at any other address within the file. 

Monitoring an Integer File 

For explanations in this section, we assume the followings in the 

application program: 

• An integer file N7, which is 53 elements long (53 words), is 

defined with the preset data, as shown in the screen capture 

below. 

data words (first 48 words), which 

are monitored on the LCD 

and maskable by protection bits 

protection bits (second 48 bits = 3 words) 

data words (after the first 51 words), which 

are not monitored on the LCD and not 

maskable by protection bits 

• The TIF element of the LCD Function File is set to 7 to specify 

the integer file N7 as the target integer file to monitor on the 

LCD, as shown in the screen capture below. 



• The controller mode is set to REMOTE RUN. 

Follow these steps to view and change the data values of the integer 

file N7. 

1. On the Main Menu screen, select Monitoring by using the Up 


2. Then, press the OK key on the LCD keypad. The Bit/Integer File 

Select screen is displayed, as shown below. 



3. If Integer is selected, as shown in step 2, press the OK key. 

If not selected, press the Down key to select it and then press 

the OK key. 

4. The current data value (ON) of the N7:0 word is displayed, as 

shown below. Note that the target word “0”, which is right to 

“N7:”, is flashing, which means the cursor is at the target word 

position. 

5. We will change the data value of the N7:0 word to the negative 

decimal value -1300. First, press OK to move the cursor to the 

data value position. Then, the last digit of “+00000” will be 

flashing, which means the cursor is at the data value position. 

6. Press the Left key twice. Then, the cursor will position at the 

third digit. Press the Up key three times to change the third digit 

to 3. 



7. Press the Left key once. Then, press the Up key once. The 

second digit will change to “1”. Note that “1” is still flashing, 

which means the cursor is still at the data value position. 

8. Press the Left key once. Then, press the Down key once. The 

sign digit will change to “-”, as shown below. Note that “-” is still 

flashing, which means the cursor is still at the data value 

position. 

9. Press OK to apply the changes. Then, the new value -1300 is 

applied. Note that the target word “0”, which is right to “N7:”, is 

flashing. The cursor is moved automatically to the target word 

position. 



You can identify this change of data value is reflected to your 

RSLogix 500 programming software, as shown below. 

TIP 

After changing the data value of a target word, press 

the OK key to apply the changes or press the ESC 

key to discard the changes. 

10. Now, we will view the data value of a protected word N7:1. 

Press the Up key once. Then, the target word will change to “1” 

and its data value is displayed with the “Protected!” message, as 

shown below. Because the N7:48/1 bit is set (1), the N7:1 word 

is a protected word. 

11. Try to move the cursor to the data value position by pressing the 

OK key. Because the N7:1 word is protected, you will find that 

the cursor even does not move to the data value position. 

12. Press the Up key once to view the data value of the N7:2 word. 

Because the N7:2 word is not protected, only its data value, 0 in 

this example, is displayed without the “Protected!” message. 



13. Hold down the Up key until the target word becomes “47”, as 

shown below. 

Press the Up key again, and you will find the target word does 

not change to “48”. It is because the maximum range of words 

you can monitor with the LCD is the first 48 words of the 

specified target integer file. 

IMPORTANT 

The maximum range of words you can monitor with 

the Integer File Monitoring functionality on the LCD 

is the first 48 words (0 through 47) of the target 

integer file. 

14. Try to press the Up and Down keys to change the target word to 

another word. Try to change its data value using the OK, Up, 

Down, Right and Left keys. 

15. If you have finished monitoring the integer file N7, press the 

ESC key to return to the Main Menu screen, as shown in step 2. 



Using the Mode Switch 

The MicroLogix 1100 provides the controller mode switch on the LCD. 

The possible positions of the mode switch are PROGRAM, REMOTE, 

and RUN. You can change mode switch position using the Mode 

Switch screen on the LCD, as shown below. In this example, the 

mode switch position is set to REMOTE. 

All the built-in LCD screens except the Boot Message screen display 

the current mode switch position, at their top right portion, as shown 

below. In this example, the mode switch position is set to RUN. 

Current Mode Switch Position 

Controller Modes 

The table below shows the possible controller modes when the mode 

switch positions at PROGRAM, REMOTE, or RUN. For example, if the 

Mode Switch is at RUN and you want to test a control program with 

running it for a single scan, you have to first change mode switch 

position to REMOTE before you run the control program in the 

remote test single scan mode with your RSLogix 500 programming 

software. 



Table 5.3 Possible Controller Modes by Mode Switch Position 

When the Mode Switch 

Positions at 

PROGRAM 

REMOTE 

RUN 

Possible Controller Modes are 

download in progress 

program mode 

suspend mode 

(operation halted by execution of the SUS instruction) 

remote download in progress 

remote program mode 

remote suspend mode 

(operation halted by execution of the SUS instruction) 

remote run mode 

remote test continuous mode 

remote test single scan mode 

run mode 

Changing Mode Switch Position 

Mode Switch position can be changed at two different times using 

LCD keypad. One is when the controller is powered up, and the other 

is while the controller is powered on. 

Mode Switch position can be set to either PROG or RUN when the 

controller is powered up. This allows the controller operation which 

is different from the previous mode, that is, any program under RUN 

before can be stopped or any new program can be run when the 

controller is powered up. 

• How to forcibly set Mode Switch to RUN when the controller is 

powered up 

Press OK key for 5 seconds when the controller is powered up. 

The following LCD screen appears if it’s successfully done. 



• How to forcibly set Mode Switch to PROG when the controller is 

powered up 

Press ESC key for 5 seconds when the controller is powered up. 

The following LCD screen appears if it’s successfully done. 

Note that I/O output status may be changed for some programs. 



While the controller is powered on, follow these steps to change the 

position of the Mode Switch. 

1. On the Main Menu screen, select Mode Switch by using the Up 


2. Then, press the OK key on the LCD keypad. The Mode Switch 


The arrow indicates current Mode Switch position. 

3. When the Up or Down key is pressed, the mode indicated by 

the arrow starts to blink if the mode is different from the current 

mode of controller. Press OK key to set the controller to the 

mode indicated by the arrow. 

4. If you have finished changing mode switch position, press the 

ESC key to return to the Main Menu screen, as shown in step 1. 

Using a User Defined LCD 

Screen 

The MicroLogix 1100 controller allows you to use user defined LCD 

screens instead of the default built-in screens. 

To use a user defined screen, you need to create a group of 

appropriate instructions using the LCD instruction in your application 

program. For more information on how to create a user defined LCD 



screen, refer to the MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers 

Instruction Set Reference Manual, publication 1763-RM001. 

By using the User Displ menu item, you can change from the default 

built-in screens to a user defined screen and back on the LCD. 

User Defined LCD Screen 

Follow these steps to display the user defined screen implemented in 

your application program. 

1. On the Main Menu screen, select User Displ by using the Up and 

Down keys on the LCD keypad, as shown below. If the menu 

items shown in the figure below are not displayed on the Main 

Menu screen, you need to scroll down the screen by pressing 

the Down key. 

2. Then, press the OK key on the LCD keypad. 

If no user defined screen is used in your application program, 

the screen is displayed, as shown below. 

COMM0 

COMM1 

DCOMM 

BAT. LO 

U-MSG 



Note that the U-MSG indicator on the top of the LCD is 

displayed in solid rectangle. It means the LCD is in User Defined 

LCD mode. 

If a user defined screen is used in your application program, the 

LCD screen is displayed, as shown below, according to the 

specific instructions used in your program. 

COMM0 

COMM1 

DCOMM 

BAT. LO 

U-MSG 

3. Hold down the ESC key more than 3 seconds to return to the 

Main Menu screen, as shown below. 



Configuring Advanced 

Settings 

With the Advanced Settings menu, which is a sub-menu under the 

main menu of the LCD, you can use the following features. 

• changing Key In mode 


• viewing Ethernet port configuration 

• using trim pots 

• viewing system information 

• viewing fault code 

You can access to the Advanced Settings Menu screen, as shown 

below, by selecting Advance Set on the Main Menu screen. 

Changing Key In Mode 

Key In Modes 

There are two Key In modes, Continuous and Discrete. 

TIP 

The Key In mode has effect only when you change 

the data value of a trim pot on a Trim Pot screen, 

either Trim Pot 0 or Trim Pot 1 screen. For more 

information on how to change the data value of a 

trim pot, see Changing Data Value of a Trim Pot on 

page 5-36. 

The current Key In mode determines how the value changes are 

applied when you press the Up and Down keys to change the data 

value for a trim pot. When set to Continuous, the changes are applied 

immediately whenever you press the Up and Down keys. When set to 

Discrete, the changes are applied only when you press the OK key 

after you have changed the value using the Up and Down keys. 



By using the Key In Mode screen, as shown below, you can change 

the Key In mode to use. 

Changing Key In Mode 

Follow these steps to change the current Key In mode. 










3. Select KeyIn Mode using the Up and Down keys, and then press 

the OK key. 

4. The Key In Mode screen is displayed, as shown below. The 

current mode, Continuous in this example, is selected marked 

up with the symbol “ ”. 

5. Press the Up or Down key to select the different mode, Discrete 

in this example, as shown below. Then, press the OK key. 

6. The Key In Mode Change Notification screen is displayed, as 

shown below. 





Using Communications 

Toggle Functionality 

The MicroLogix 1100 provides the Communications Toggle 

Functionality, which allows you to change from the user-defined 

communication configuration to the default communications mode 

and back to the user defined communication configuration on 

Channel 0. 

See Using the Communications Toggle Functionality on page 4-2 for 

information about how to use the Communications Toggle 

Functionality. 

Viewing Ethernet Port 

Configuration 

The Ethernet Pot Configuration screen of the LCD displays the MAC 

and IP addresses assigned to the controller. 

Follow these steps to view the Ethernet port configuration for your 

controller. 










3. If ENET Cfg is selected, press the OK key. 

If not, select ENET Cfg using the Up and Down keys, and then 


4. The Ethernet Port Configuration screen is displayed. 

When an IP address is not yet assigned to your controller, only 

the MAC address assigned to your controller, which is 

represented as XXXXXXXXXXXX below, is displayed. 

A MAC address is a 12-digit hexadecimal number. Your 

controller ships with a unique MAC address assigned in factory. 

You can identify the MAC address of your controller by opening 

the expansion module cover on your controller. 

When an IP address is assigned to your controller, both of MAC 

address and IP address of your controller are displayed, as 

shown below. In this example, the MAC address is represented 

as XXXXXXXXXXXX, which is a 12-digit hexadecimal number. 

The IP address is represented as xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where each 

xxx is a deimal number between 0-255. 





Using Trim Pots 

Trim Pot Operation 

The MicroLogix 1100 controller provides two trimming potentiometers 

(trim pots, POT0 and POT1) which allow modification of integer data 

within the controller. The data value of each trim pot can be used 

throughout the control program for timers, counters, analog presets, 

etc. depending upon the requirements of the application. 

You can change the data value of each trim pot using the trim pot 

screens provided by the LCD. To access to the Trim Pot Set screen, 

which is the top screen for the trim pot functionality, select TrimPot 

Set on the LCD default menu screen, as shown below, and press the 

OK key on the LCD keypad. 

Trim pot data is updated continuously whenever the controller is 

powered-up. 

Changing Data Value of a Trim Pot 

Follow these steps to change the data value of a trim pot, either POT0 

or POT1. 

1. On the Main Menu screen, select TrimPot Set by using the Up 




2. Then, press the OK key on the LCD keypad. The Trim Pot Select 


The last trim pot whose data value you changed is selected by 

default. If you are accessing to this screen for the first time, 

POT0 is selected by default. 

3. Select a trim pot, either POT0 or POT1, whose data value you 

want to change using the Up and Down keys on the LCD 

keypad. In this example, we will select POT0. 

4. Then, press the OK key on the LCD keypad. The Trim Pot 0 


TMIN and TMAX indicate the range of data value for the trim 

pots, both POT0 and POT1. The factory default for TMIN, 

TMAX, and POT0 values are 0, 250, and 0 in decimal, 

respectively. TMIN and TMAX on this screen are read only, but 

you can change them using the LCD Function File in your 

application program. The TMIN and TMAX elements can only be 

changed by a program download. 

For more information on how to change Trim Pot configuration 

including TMIN and TMAX, refer to the LCD Function File 

described in the MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers 

Instruction Set Reference Manual, publication 1763-RM001. 



IMPORTANT 

The same TMIN and TMAX values are used for both 

trim pots, POT0 and POT1. This behavior is intended 

by design for simplicity in Trim Pot configuration. 

When you enter this screen, the last digit of the POT0 value is 

flashing. It indicates the current digit. Press the Up and Down 

keys on the LCD keypad to change the value of the current digit. 

Press the Left and Right keys to select a different digit as the 

current digit. 

If the Key In mode is set to Continuous, the changes are applied 

immediately after you press the Up and Down keys. While, if it 

is set to Discrete, you have to press the OK key to apply the 

changes after you change the data value. For more information 

on how to set the Key In mode, see Changing Key In Mode on 

page 5-31. 

TIP 

The Key In mode has effect only when you change 

the data value of a trim pot on a Trim Pot screen, 

either the Trim Pot 0 or Trim Pot 1 screen. 

5. If you have finished changing the data value of the selected trim 

pot, POT0 in this example, press the ESC key to return to the 

Trim Pot Select screen, as shown in step 2. 

Trim Pot Configuration in LCD Function File 

The configuration for Trim Pots in the LCD Function File, including 

trim pot low and high values for data value range, is described in the 

MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference 

Manual, publication 1763-RM001. 

Error Conditions 

Error conditions regarding the Trim Pot functionality are described in 


Reference Manual, publication 1763-RM001. 



Viewing System 

Information 

The System Information screen of the LCD allows you to identify the 

system information for your controller. 

Follow these steps to view the system information for your controller. 








3. If System Info is selected, press the OK key. 

If not, select System Info using the Up and Down keys, and then 




4. The System Information screen is displayed. 

You can identify the catalog number, operating system firmware 

revision number, and boot firmware revision number of your 

controller. 



Viewing Fault Code 

The Fault Code screen of the LCD displays the fault code when a fault 

occurs. 

When a fault occurs, the Fault Code screen is not displayed 

automatically. Only the FAULT LED on the controller flashes in red 

light. Therefore, you need to navigate into the Fault Code screen to 

identify the fault code on the LCD. 

Follow these steps to view the fault code when a fault occurs. 










3. If Fault Code is selected, press the OK key. 

If not, select Fault Code using the Up and Down keys, and then 


4. The Fault Code screen is displayed. 

If no fault occurred, “0000h” is displayed, as shown below. 

If a fault is occurred, its fault code is displayed, as shown below. 

TIP 

For more information on a specific fault code, refer 

to the Online Help of your RSLogix 500 programming 

software. 






Chapter 6 

Using Real-Time Clock and Memory Modules 

The MicroLogix 1100 controller has a built-in real-time clock (RTC). 

You can order a memory module as an accessory. 

TIP 

For more information on “Real-Time Clock Function 

File” and “Memory Module Information File”, refer to 

the MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers 

Instruction Set Reference Manual, publication 

1763-RM001. 

One type of memory module is available for use with the MicroLogix 

1100 controller. 

Catalog Number Function Memory Size 

1763-MM1 Memory Module 128K Bytes 

Real-Time Clock Operation 

Operation at Power-up and Entering a Run or Test Mode 

At power-up and when the controller enters a run or test mode, the 

values (date, time and status) of the RTC are written to the RTC 

Function File in the controller. 

The following table indicates the accuracy of the RTC for various 

temperatures. 

Table 6.1 RTC Accuracy 

Ambient Temperature Accuracy (1) 

0°C (+32°F) -13 to -121 seconds/month 

+25°C (+77°F) 

+54 to -5 seconds/month 

+40°C (+104°F) 

+29 to -78 seconds/month 

+55°C (+131°F) 

-43 to -150 seconds/month 

(1) These numbers are maximum worst case values over a 31-day month. 


6-2 Using Real-Time Clock and Memory Modules 

Writing Data to the Real-Time Clock 

When valid data is sent to the real-time clock from the programming 

device or another controller, the new values take effect immediately. 

The real-time clock does not allow you to load or store invalid date or 

time data. 

RTC Battery Operation 

The real-time clock uses the same replaceable battery that the 

controller uses. The RTC Function File features a battery low indicator 

bit (RTC:0/BL), which shows the status of the replacement battery. 

When the battery is low, the indicator bit is set (1). This means that 

the battery wire connector could be disconnected or if the battery is 

connected, the battery may be ready to fail in the next two weeks. In 

the latter case, the replacement battery needs to be replaced with a 

new one. When the battery low indicator bit is clear (0), the battery 

level is acceptable. 

The Battery Low (BAT.LO) indicator on the LCD display of the 

controller also shows the status of the replaceable battery. When the 

battery is low, the indicator is displayed as solid rectangle ( ). When 

the battery level is acceptable, the indicator is displayed as emty 

rectangle ( ), as shown below. 

COMM0 

COMM1 

DCOMM 

BAT.LO 

U-MSG 

If the RTC battery is low and the controller is powered, the RTC 

operates normally. If the controller power is removed and the RTC 

battery is low, RTC data is lost. 


Using Real-Time Clock and Memory Modules 6-3 

ATTENTION 

Operating with a low battery indication for more 

than 2 weeks (8 hours without a battery) may result 

in invalid RTC data unless power is on continuously. 

Memory Module Operation 

The memory module supports the following features: 

• User Program, User Data and Recipe Back-up 

• User Program Compare 

• Data File Download Protection 

• Memory Module Write Protection 

• Removal/Insertion Under Power 

ATTENTION 

Electrostatic discharge can damage the Memory 

Module. Do not touch the connector pins or other 

sensitive areas. 

User Program , User Data and Recipe Back-up 

The memory module provides a simple and flexible program, data 

and recipe transport mechanism, allowing the user to transfer the 

program, data and recipe to the controller without the use of a 

personal computer and programming software. 

The memory module can store one user program at a time. 

During program transfers to or from the memory module, the 

controller’s RUN LED flashes. 

Program Compare 

The memory module can also provide application security, allowing 

you to specify that if the program stored in the memory module does 

not match the program in the controller, the controller will not enter 

an executing (run or test) mode. To enable this feature, set the S:2/9 

bit in the system status file. See “Status System File” in the MicroLogix 

1100 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual, 

Publication 1763-RM001 for more information. 



Data File Download Protection 

The memory module supports data file download protection. This 

allows user data to be saved (not overwritten) during a download. 

TIP 

Data file download protection is only functional if the 

processor does not have a fault, size of all protected 

data files in the memory module exactly match the 

size of protected data files within the controller, and 

all protected data files are of the same type. See 

“Protecting Data Files During Download” in the 

MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers 

Instruction Set Reference Manual, Publication 

1763-RM001. 

Memory Module Write Protection 

The memory module supports write-once, read-many behavior. Write 

protection is enabled using your programming software. 

IMPORTANT 

Once set, write protection cannot be removed. A 

change cannot be made to the control program 

stored in a write protected memory module. If a 

change is required, use a different memory module. 

Removal/Insertion Under Power 

The memory module can be installed or removed at any time without 

risk of damage to either the memory module or the controller. If a 

memory module is installed while the MicroLogix 1100 is executing, 

the memory module is not recognized until either a power cycle 

occurs, or until the controller is placed in a non-executing mode 

(program mode, suspend mode or fault condition). 

Memory Module Information File 

The controller has a Memory Module Information (MMI) File which 

provides status from the attached memory module. At power-up or on 

detection of a memory module being inserted, the catalog number, 

series, revision, and type are identified and written to the MMI file. If a 

memory module is not attached, zeros are written to the MMI file. 


Using Real-Time Clock and Memory Modules 6-5 

Refer to the MicroLogix 1100 Instruction Set Reference Manual, 

publication 1763-RM001, for more information. 

Program /Data Download 

To download the program and data from a memory module to the 

controller’s memory, on the “Comms” menu in your RSLogix 500 

programming software, point “EEPROM” and then click “Load from 

EEPROM”. 

TIP 

For more information on program/data download, 

refere to your RSLogix 500 programming software 

documentation. 

Program /Data Upload 

To upload the program and data from the controller’s memory to a 

memory module, on the “Comms” menu in your RSLogix 500 

programming software, point “EEPROM” and then click “Store to 

EEPROM”. 

TIP 

For more information on program/data upload, refer 

to your RSLogix 500 programming software 

documentation. 




Chapter 7 

Online Editing 

The online editing function lets you monitor and modify your ladder 

program when your programming terminal is connected to a 

MicroLogix 1100 processor. 

Overview of Online Editing 

Online editing of ladder programs is available when using MicroLogix 

1100 processors. Use this function to make changes to a pre-existing 

ladder program. Online editing functions consist of inserting, 

replacing, and deleting rungs in an existing ladder program while 

online with the processor. 

Only one programming device can perform an online edit of a user 

program at a time. When an online editing session begins, an access 

from other programming devices will be rejected by MicroLogix 1100. 

ATTENTION 

Before initiating an online editing session, we recommend 

that you fully understand the possible results of 

the edit to the system under control. Failure to properly 

edit a running program could result in unexpected controller 

operation. Physical injury or equipment damage 

may result. 

While three instructions, MSG, PTO, and PWM, are 

supported by program mode online edit, they are not 

supported by RUNTIME (RUN mode) online edit. Refer 

to the MicroLogix 1100 Instruction Set Reference 

Manual, publication number 1763-RM001 for additional 

details. 


7-2 Online Editing 

The following table summarizes the differences between offline and 

online editing. 

Offline 

No restrictions 

exist. Full editing 

capabilities 

are allowed. 

Online 

Data table file resizing is not permitted. 

Program file creation and deletion are not 

permitted. 

Alteration of file protection is not permitted. 

Alteration of static and constant data file values is 

not 

permitted. 

Indexing across file boundary selections is not 

permitted. 

Force protection selection is not permitted. 

I/O configuration is not permitted. 

IMPORTANT 

It is important to keep in mind that some ladder 

instructions, when programmed online, cause data 

table values to change. These instructions are those 

that require timer, counter, and control addresses to 

be specified. This is dis cussed later in the chapter. 

Online Editing Terms 

The following terms are used throughout this chapter: 

• Assemble Edits — Deletes any rungs marked with Delete or Replace 

edit zone markers during an online editing session. Inserted or 

modified rungs remain. All edit zone markers are removed when 

this function is complete. 

• Cancel Edits — Deletes any inserted or modified rungs added 

during an online editing session. Rungs marked with Delete and 

Replace edit zone markers remain. All edit zone markers are 

removed when this function is complete. 

• Test Edits — Allows you to verify that the changes you entered are 

not going to cause improper machine operation before you make 

the changes a permanent part of your ladder program. 

• Untest Edits — Allows you to disable testing. 

• Edit Zone markers — Appear on the power rail of the ladder 

program display. They indicate the type of edit taking place on 

the rung. 


Online Editing 7-3 

• Accept Rung — Incorporates the edits of a single rung into the 

ladder program. 

• online edit session — begins when a user tries to edit rungs 

while online. Any other programming device that was 

monitoring the user program is removed from the program 

monitor display. 

• modify rung — when an existing rung is modified two edit 

zones are created. The original rung is indicated by replace zone 

markers on the power rail. A copy of the original rung is made 

so you can insert, delete, or modify instructions. This rung is 

indicated by insert zone markers on the power rail. Thus, an IR 

pair is created when you modify a rung. 

• runtime online editing — the user program is executing when an 

edit takes place. Any rungs that are inserted, modified, or deleted 

remain in the ladder program and are indicated by edit zone 

markers on the power rail. Edit zone markers remain after an 

action is completed. 

• program online editing — the user program is not executing when 

an edit session begins. Any action that inserts, deletes, or 

modifies a rung takes place immediately. 

The following figure shows the process involved when performing a 

runtime online edit. 

Begin Edit Session 

Online Edit 

Edits complete 

Cancel Edits 

Remove Edits 

Untest Edits 

Edits do not work 

Test Edits 

End Edit Session 

Assemble Edits 

Edits work 



Effects of Online Editing On 

Your System 

The following section covers the effects of online editing on your 

system. Keep these items in mind while using the online editing 

function. 

System Impacts 

The scan time and interrupt latency can be extended when accepting 

a rung, assembling or canceling edits. 

Memory limitations - Online edit can be performed until there is 

insufficient program memory available in the processor. Note that, 

before assemble edits, all the edited rungs are in the processor 

memory consuming memory, although they are not executed. 

Data Table File Size 

Online editing cannot change the size of existing data tables nor can 

new ones be created. However, some ladder instructions, when 

programmed cause data table values to change. These instructions are 

those that require timer, counter, and control addresses to be 

specified. 

Online Edit Error 

If either electrical interference, communication loss, or a power cycle 

occur during online edit session, program integrity may be impacted. 

In this case, the controller will generate the 1F fault code, clear the 

user program, and load the default program. 



Directions and Cautions for 

MicroLogix 1100 Online 

Edit User 

Change the RSLinx "Configure CIP Option" 

Change the RSLinx "Configure CIP Option" to prevent ownership fault 

when MicroLogix 1100 is connected using RSLinx Ethernet/IP driver. 

Several RSLogix 500 Online operations require obtaining the processor 

Edit Resource/Processor Ownership in order to ensure that one 

programming terminal has exclusive capability of performing any of 

these operations at a time. These operations include downloading, 

online editing, and applying channel configuration changes. 

In addition to reducing the number of RSLinx Messaging Connections 

per PLC to one, it is also recommended that the Messaging 

Connection Retry Interval be increased from the default of 1.25 

seconds to 8 seconds as shown in the following figure. 



A Download Before Starting Online Edit 

At least one download is required before starting online edit. 

If you are using a MicroLogix 1100 from out-of-box state or after clear 

processor memory, at least one download is required before starting 

online edits. If not, the following error occurs and programming 

software will go offline due to default image mismatch between 

programming software (RSLogix500) and the MicroLogix 1100. You 

can also see the fault code 1Fh which is a user defined fault code. 

In order to prevent this error, a user needs to download the program 

to the MicroLogix 1100, although the program is empty. 

This problem happens only in out-of-box state or after clear processor 

memory. 



ATTENTION 

PTO and PWM instructions may not be deleted during 

runtime online edit. This is because if the PTO or PWM 

instructions were deleted during runtime online edit, 

outputs could stop in an unpredictable state, causing 

unexpected equipment operation. 

If you attempt to insert or modify a rung with MSG, PTO, and 

PWM instruction, the following error message will be generated 

by programming software "Error: Online editing of PTO, PWM 

and MSG are not allowed on ML1100 RUN mode." And, the rung 

with MSG, PTO, and PWM instruction will not be accepted. 

In online edit during PROGRAM mode (program online edit), there 

are no restrictions. E.g., an user can insert MSG instruction if related 

MG file or MG/RI file is already defined in data file. 

ATTENTION 

When editing a rung that contains an MCR instruction, 

both the MCR start and MCR end rungs must be edited 

(whether it be test/assemble/cancel) at the same time. 

We recommend that you fully understand the possible 

results of the edit to the system under control. Failure 

to properly edit a running program could result in 

unexpected controller operation. Physical injury or 

equipment damage may result. 

ATTENTION 

If you use EII or STI interrupts and your application 

requires a quick interrupt latency, the online edit feature 

is not recommended. Online editing feature may 

increase the interrupt latency response time. To ensure 

minimum interrupt latency, place the mode switch in 

LCD screen in the RUN mode. This prevents the use of 

the online editing feature. 



Types of Online Editing The type of online editing is dependent on the MicroLogix 1100 

processor’s mode switch position in LCD display and the processor’s 

mode. There are two types of online editing: 

• Program Online Editing — when the processor is in either 

PROG mode or REM Program mode 

• Runtime Online Editing — when the processor is in either REM 

Test or REM Run mode 

The following table summarizes the MicroLogix 1100 processor mode 

switch positions in LCD and modes that enable online editing. 

mode switch Position MicroLogix 1100 

Editing Mode 

Processor Mode 

RUN RUN Not Available 

PROGram Program Program Online Editing 

REMote REMote Program Program Online Editing 

REMote REMote Test Program Online Editing 

REMote REMote Run Program Online Editing 

IMPORTANT 

Online editing is not available when the mode switch 

in LCD screen is in the RUN position. 

ATTENTION 

Use the online editing function while in the RUN mode 

to make minor changes to the ladder program. We 

recommend developing your program offline since 

ladder rung logic changes take effect immediately after 

testing your edits. Improper machine operation may 

occur, causing personnel injury or equipment damage. 

Edit Functions in Runtime Online Editing 

During a runtime online editing session, the processor is executing 

ladder logic. The edit zone markers tell the processor that changes 

exist, but the changes are not executed until you test the edits. 

Deleted and replaced (modified) rungs are not removed from the 

program and inserted rungs are not executed until you assemble the 

edits. 



Edit Functions in Program Online Editing 

During a program online editing session, the processor is not 

executing ladder logic. This mode is like the offline editing mode. 

Note that if a runtime online editing session was performed prior to 

entering the offline editing mode, edit marked rungs (I, IR, and D) 

appear in the program. 

If you perform a program online edit, once you accept or delete the 

rung, the edits take effect immediately and the power rail is displayed 

as a solid line. If you edit a rung with edit zone markers, the markers 

are removed when the rung is accepted. 




Appendix A 


Controller Specifications 

Table A.1 General Specifications 

Description 1763- 

Dimensions 

L16AWA L16BWA L16BBB 

Height: 90 mm (3.5 in.), 104 mm (4.09 in.) (with DIN latch open) 

Width: 110 mm (4.33 in.), Depth: 87 mm (3.43 in.) 

Shipping Weight 

0.9 kg (2.0 lbs) 

Number of I/O 

12 inputs (10 digital and 2 analog) and 6 outputs 

Power Supply Voltage 100 to 240V ac ( -15%, +10%) 

at 47 to 63 Hz 

Heat Dissipation See Appendix G. 

Power Supply Inrush Current 

(max.) 

120V ac: 25A for 8 ms 

240V ac: 40A for 4 ms 

24V dc ( -15%, +10%) 

Class 2 SELV 

24V dc: 15A for 20 ms 

Power Consumption 46 VA 52 VA 35W 

24V dc Sensor Power none 250 mA at 24V dc 

none 

AC Ripple < 500 mV peak-to-peak 

400 µF max. 

Input Circuit Type 

Digital: 120V ac 

Digital: 24V dc 

Digital: 24V dc 

sink/source 

sink/source 

(standard and high-speed) (standard and high-speed) 

Analog: 0 to 10V dc 



Output Circuit Type Relay Relay Relay/FET 

Operating Temperture 

-20°C to +65°C (-4°F to +149°F) ambient 


-40°C to +85°C (-40°F to +185°F) ambient 

Relative Humidity 

5% to 95% non-condensing 

Vibration 

Operating: 10 to 500 Hz, 5 g, 0.015 in. max. peak-to-peak, 2 hours each axis 

Relay Operation: 1.5 g 

Shock, Operating 

30 g; 3 pulses each direction, each axis 

Relay Operation: 10 g 

Shock, Non-Operating 

50 g panel mounted (40 g DIN Rail mounted); 3 pulses each direction, each axis 

Terminal Screw Torque 

0.56 Nm (5.0 in-lb) rated 

Certification 

UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment for use in Class 1, Division 2, Hazardous Locations, 

Groups A, B, C, D 

C-UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment for use in Canada 

CE marked for all applicable directives 

C-Tick marked for all applicable acts 

Electrical/EMC 

The controller has passed testing at the following levels: 

ESD Immunity EN 61000-4-2 

4 kV contact, 8 kV air, 4 kV indirect 


A-2 Specifications 



L16AWA L16BWA L16BBB 

Radiated RF Immunity EN 61000-4-3 

10V/m, 26 to 1000 MHz (alternatively, 80 to 1000 MHz), 

80% amplitude modulation, +900 MHz keyed carrier 

Fast Transient Immunity EN 61000-4-4 

2 kV, 5 kHz 

communications cable such as EtherNet, RS-232, and RS-485: 1 kV, 5 kHz 

Surge Transient Immunity EN 61000-4-5 

Unshielded communications cable: 2 kV CM (common mode), 1 kV DM (differential mode) 

Shielded communications cable: 1 kV galvanic gun 

I/O: 2 kV CM (common mode), 1 kV DM (differential mode) 

AC Power Supply Input: 4 kV CM (common mode), 2 kV DM (differential mode) 

DC Power Supply Input: 500V CM (common mode), 500V DM (differential mode) 

AC/DC Auxiliary Output: 500V CM (common mode), 500V DM (differential mode) 

Conducted RF Immunity EN 61000-4-6 

10V, 150 kHz to 80 MHz 

Conducted Emissions EN 55011 

AC Power Supply Input: 150 kHz to 30 MHz 

Radiated Emissions EN 55011 

30 MHz to 1000 MHz 

Line Related Tests EN 61000-4-11 

AC Power Supply Input: 

voltage drop: -30% for 10 ms, -60% for 100 ms 

voltage interrupt: at voltage greater than -95% for 5 sec. 

voltage fluctuation: +10% for 15 minutes, -10% for 15 minutes 

DC Power Supply Input: 

voltage fluctuation: +20% for 15 minutes, -20% for 15 minutes 

Table A.2 Digital Input Specifications 

Description 1763-L16AWA 1763-L16BWA, -L16BBB 

On-State Voltage Range 79 to 132V ac 14 to 24V dc 

Inputs 0 through 3 

(4 high-speed DC inputs) 

Inputs 4 and higher 

(6 standard DC inputs) 

10 to 24V dc 

Off-State Voltage Range 0 to 20V ac 0 to 5V dc 

(14 to 26.4V dc (+10%) at 

65°C/149°F) 

(14 to 30V dc (+25%) at 

30°C/86°F) 

(10 to 26.4V dc (+10%) at 

65°C/149°F) 

(10 to 30V dc (+25%) at 

30°C/86°F) 

Operating Frequency 47 Hz to 63 Hz 0 Hz to 20 kHz 0 Hz to 1 kHz 

(scan time dependent) 

On-State Current: 

•minimum 

•nominal 

•maximum 

•5.0 mA at 79V ac 

•12 mA at 120V ac 

•16.0 mA at 132V ac 

•2.5 mA at 14V dc 

•7.3 mA at 24V dc 

•12.0 mA at 30V dc 

•2.0 mA at 10V dc 

•8.9 mA at 24V dc 

•12.0 mA at 30V dc 


Specifications A-3 

Table A.2 Digital Input Specifications 

Description 1763-L16AWA 1763-L16BWA, -L16BBB 

Off-State Leakage Current 2.5 mA max. 1.5 mA max. 

Nominal Impedance 

12 kΩ at 50 Hz 




Inrush Current (max.) at 120V ac 250 mA Not Applicable 

3.1 kΩ 3.1 kΩ 



Table A.3 Analog Input Specifications 

Description 

1763-L16AWA, -L16BWA, -L16BBB 

Voltage Input Range 

0 to 10.0V dc - 1 LSB 

Type of Data 

10-bit unsigned integer 

Input Coding (0 to 10.0V dc - 1 LSB) 0 to +1,023 

Voltage Input Impedance 

210 kΩ 

Input Resolution 

10 bit 

Non-linearity 

±1.0% of full scale 

Overall Accurarcy 


-20°C to +65°C (-4°F to +149°F) 

Voltage Input Overvoltage Protection 

Field Wiring to Logic Isolation 

10.5V dc 

Non-isolated with logic 

Table A.4 Output Specifications - General 


L16AWA, L16BWA 

L16BBB 

Relay and FET Outputs 

Maximum Controlled Load 1440 VA 1440 VA 

Maximum Continuous Current: 

Current per Group Common (1) 5A/3A 5A/3A 

Current per Controller at 150V max For UL 508, 30A or total of per-point loads, whichever is less 

For UL 1604, 18A or total of per-point loads, whichever is less 

at 240V max For UL 508, 20A or total of per-point loads, whichever is less 

For UL 1604, 18A or total of per-point loads, whichever is less 

Relay Outputs 

Turn On Time/Turn Off Time 10 msec (minimum) (2) 

Load Current 

10 mA (minimum) 

(1) 5A for UL 508 

3A for UL 1604, Class 1, Division 2, Hazardous Locations, Groups A, B, C, D 

(2) scan time dependent 



Table A.5 BBB FET Output Specifications 

Description General Operation High Speed Operation (1) 

(Output 2 and 3 Only) 

Power Supply Voltage 24V dc ( -15%, +10%) 

On-State Voltage Drop: 

•at maximum load current 

•at maximum surge current 

Current Rating per Point 

•maximum load 

•minimum load 

•maximum leakage 

Maximum Output Current (temperature dependent): 

•1V dc 

•2.5V dc 

•See graphs below. 

•1.0 mA 

•1.0 mA 

•Not Applicable 

•Not Applicable 

•100 mA 

•10 mA 

•1.0 mA 

FET Current per Point 

(1763-L16BBB) 

FET Total Current 

(1763-L16BBB) 

2.0 

8.0 

1.75 

1.5 

1.5A, 30˚C (86˚F) 

7.0 

6.0 


1.25 

1.0 

0.75 

0.5 

0.25 

Valid 

Range 

0.75A, 65˚C (149˚F) 


5.0 

4.0 

3.0 

2.0 

1.0 

Valid 

Range 

3.0A, 30˚C (86˚F) 

1.5A, 65˚C (149˚F) 

10˚C 

(50˚F) 

30˚C 

(86˚F) 

50˚C 

(122˚F) 

Temperature 

70˚C 

(158˚F) 

80˚C 

(176˚F) 

10˚C 

(50˚F) 

30˚C 

(86˚F) 

50˚C 

(122˚F) 

Temperature 

70˚C 

(158˚F) 

80˚C 

(176˚F) 



Table A.5 BBB FET Output Specifications 


Surge Current per Point: 

• peak current 

• maximum surge duration 

• maximum rate of repetition at 30°C (86°F) 

• maximum rate of repetition at 55°C (131°F) 

• 4.0A 

• 10 msec 

• once every second 

• once every 2 seconds 

Turn-On Time (maximum) 0.1 msec 6 µsec 

Turn-Off Time (maximum) 1.0 msec 18 µsec 

Repeatability (maximum) n/a 2 µsec 

(Output 2 and 3 Only) 

• Not Applicable 




Drift (maximum) n/a 1 µsec per 5°C (9°F) 

(1) Output 2 and 3 are designed to provide increased functionality over the other FET outputs. Output 2 and 3 may be used like the other FET transistor outputs, but in addition, 

within a limited current range, they may be operated at a higher speed. Output 2 and 3 also provide a pulse train output (PTO) or pulse width modulation output (PWM) 

function. 

Table A.6 AC Input Filter Settings 

Nominal Filter Setting (ms) ON Delay (ms) OFF Delay (ms) 

Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum 

8 2 20 10 20 

Table A.7 High-Speed DC Input Filter Settings (Inputs 0 to 3) 

Nominal Filter Setting (ms) ON Delay (ms) OFF Delay (ms) Maximum Counter Frequency (Hz) 

50% Duty Cycle 


0.025 0.005 0.025 0.005 0.025 20.0 kHz 

0.075 0.040 0.075 0.045 0.075 6.7 kHz 

0.100 0.050 0.100 0.060 0.100 5.0 kHz 

0.250 0.170 0.250 0.210 0.250 2.0 kHz 

0.500 0.370 0.500 0.330 0.500 1.0 kHz 

1.00 0.700 1.000 0.800 1.000 0.5 kHz 

2.000 1.700 2.000 1.600 2.000 250 Hz 

4.000 3.400 4.000 3.600 4.000 125 Hz 

8.000 (1) 6.700 8.000 7.300 8.000 63 Hz 

16.000 14.000 16.000 14.000 16.000 31 Hz 

(1) This is the default setting. 



Table A.8 Standard DC Input Filter Settings (Inputs 4 and higher) 

Nominal Filter Setting (ms) ON Delay (ms) OFF Delay (ms) Maximum Frequency (Hz) 

50% Duty Cycle 


0.500 0.090 0.500 0.020 0.500 1.0 kHz 

1.000 0.500 1.000 0.400 1.000 0.5 kHz 

2.000 1.100 2.000 1.300 2.000 250 Hz 

4.000 2.800 4.000 2.700 4.000 125 Hz 

8.000 (1) 5.800 8.000 5.300 8.000 63 Hz 

16.000 11.000 16.000 10.000 16.000 31 Hz 

(1) This is the default setting. 

Table A.9 Relay Contact Ratings 

Maximum Volts Amperes Amperes Volt-Amperes 

Make Break Continuous (1) Make Break 

240V ac 15.0A 1.5A 5.0A (2) /3.0A 3600 VA 360 VA 

120V ac 30.0A 3.0A 5.0A (2) /3.0A 3600 VA 360 VA 

125V dc 0.22A (3) 1.0A 28 VA 

24V dc 1.2A (3) 2.0A 

(1) 5.0A for UL 508 

3.0A for UL 1604, Class 1, Division 2, Hazardous Locations, Groups A, B, C, D 

(2) 3.0A above 40°C. 

(3) For dc voltage applications, the make/break ampere rating for relay contacts can be determined by dividing 28 VA by 

the applied dc voltage. For example, 28 VA/48V dc = 0.58A. For dc voltage applications less than 14V, the make/break 

ratings for relay contacts cannot exceed 2A. 

Table A.10 Working Voltage (1763-L16AWA) 

Description 

1763-L16AWA 

Power Supply Input to Backplane Isolation Verified by one of the following dielectric tests: 1836V ac for 1 second or 2596V dc for 1 second 

265V ac Working Voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation) 

Input Group to Backplane Isolation Verified by one of the following dielectric tests:1517V ac for 1 second or 2145V dc for 1 second 


Input Group to Input Group Isolation Verified by one of the following dielectric tests:1517V ac for 1 second or 2145V dc for 1 second 

132V ac Working Voltage (basic insulation) 

Output Group to Backplane Isolation Verified by one of the following dielectric tests: 1836V ac for 1 second or 2596V dc for 1 second 


Output Group to Output Group Isolation Verified by one of the following dielectric tests: 1836V ac for 1 second or 2596V dc for 1second 

265V ac Working Voltage (basic insulation) 150V ac Working Voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced 

insulation). 



Table A.11 Working Voltage (1763-L16BWA) 

Description 

1763-L16BWA 

Power Supply Input to Backplane Isolation Verified by one of the following dielectric tests:1836V ac for 1 second or 2596V dc for 1 second 

Input Group to Backplane Isolation and 

Input Group to Input Group Isolation 

Output Group to Backplane Isolation 

Output Group to Output Group Isolation 


Verified by one of the following dielectric tests: 1200V ac for 1 second or 1697V dc for 1 second 

75V dc Working Voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation) 


265V ac Working Voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation). 


265V ac Working Voltage (basic insulation) 150V Working Voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced 

insulation) 

Table A.12 Working Voltage (1762-L16BBB) 

Description 

Input Group to Backplane Isolation and 

Input Group to Input Group Isolation 

FET Output Group to Backplane 

Isolation 

Relay Output Group to Backplane 

Isolation 

Relay Output Group to Relay Output 

Group and FET Output Group Isolation 

1762-L16BBB 






265V ac Working Voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation). 


265V ac Working Voltage (basic insulation) 150V Working Voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced 

insulation) 



Expansion I/O 


Digital I/O Modules 


Specification 

Dimensions 


Operating Temperature 

Operating Humidity 

Operating Altitude 

Vibration 

Shock 

Value 

90 mm (height) x 87 mm (depth) x 40.4 mm (width) 

height including mounting tabs is 110 mm 

3.54 in. (height) x 3.43 in. (depth) x 1.59 in. (width) 

height including mounting tabs is 4.33 in. 

-40°C to +85°C (-40°F to +185°F) 

0°C to +55°C (+32°F to +131°F) 


2000 meters (6561 feet) 

Operating: 10 to 500 Hz, 5 g, 0.030 in. max. peak-to-peak, 

2 hours per axis 

Relay Operation: 1.5 g 

Operating: 30G panel mounted, 3 pulses per axis 

Relay Operation: 7 g 

Non-Operating: 50 g panel mounted, 3 pulses per axis 

(40G DIN Rail mounted) 

Agency Certification C-UL certified (under CSA C22.2 No. 142) 

UL 508 listed 

CE compliant for all applicable directives 

Hazardous Environment Class Class I, Division 2, Hazardous Location, Groups A, B, C, D (UL 1604, C-UL under CSA C22.2 No. 213) 

Radiated and Conducted Emissions EN50081-2 Class A 

Electrical /EMC: 

The module has passed testing at the following levels: 

ESD Immunity (IEC1000-4-2) 4 kV contact, 8 kV air, 4 kV indirect 

Radiated Immunity (IEC1000-4-3) 10 V/m, 80 to 1000 MHz, 80% amplitude modulation, +900 MHz keyed carrier 

Fast Transient Burst (IEC1000-4-4) 2 kV, 5 kHz 

Surge Immunity (IEC1000-4-5) 2 kV common mode, 1 kV differential mode 

Conducted Immunity (IEC1000-4-6) 10V, 0.15 to 80 MHz (1) 

(1) Conducted Immunity frequency range may be 150 kHz to 30 MHz if the Radiated Immunity frequency range is 30 MHz to 1000 MHz. 



Table A.14 Input Specifications 

Specification 1762-IA8 1762-IQ8 1762-IQ16 

Approximate Shipping 

Weight 

(With Carton) 

209g (0.46 lbs.) 200g (0.44 lbs.) 230 g (0.51 lbs.) 

Voltage Category 100/120V ac 24V dc (sink/source) (1) 24V dc (sink/source)(1) 

Operating Voltage Range 79V ac to 132V ac at 47 Hz to 63 Hz 10 to 30V dc at 30°C (86°F) 

10 to 26.4V dc at 55°C (131°F) 

Number of Inputs 8 8 16 

10 to 30V dc at 30°C (86°F) 

10 to 26.4V dc at 55°C (131°F) 

Bus Current Draw (max.) 50 mA at 5V dc (0.25W) 50 mA at 5V dc (0.25W) 60 mA at 5V dc (0.3W) 

Heat Dissipation (max.) 2.0 Watts 3.7 Watts 4.2 Watts at 26.4V 

5.3 Watts at 30V 

Signal Delay (max.) 

On Delay: 20.0 ms 



Off Delay: 20.0 ms 



Off-State Voltage (max.) 20V ac 5V dc 5V dc 

Off-State Current (max.) 2.5 mA 1.5 mA 1.5 mA 

On-State Voltage (min.) 79V ac (min.) 132V ac (max.) 10V dc 10V dc 

On-State Current 

5.0 mA (min.) at 79V ac 47 Hz 2.0 mA min. at 10V dc 

2.0 mA min. at 10V dc 

12.0 mA (nominal) at 120V ac 60 Hz 8.0 mA nominal at 24V dc 8.0 mA nominal at 24V dc 

16.0 mA (max.) at 132V ac 63 Hz 12.0 mA max. at 30V dc 

12.0 mA max. at 30V dc 

Inrush Current (max.) 250 mA Not Applicable Not Applicable 

Nominal Impedance 

Power Supply Distance 

Rating 

12K Ω at 50 Hz 

10K Ω at 60 Hz 

3K Ω 

3K Ω 

6 (The module may not be located more than 6 modules away from the power supply.) 

IEC Input Compatibility Type 1+ Type 1+ Type 1+ 

Isolated Groups 

Input Group to Backplane 

Isolation 

Group 1: inputs 0 to 7 (internally 

connected commons) 

Verified by one of the following 

dielectric tests: 1517V ac for 1 sec. 

or 2145V dc for 1 sec. 

Group 1: inputs 0 to 7 (internally 

connected commons) 

132V ac working voltage (IEC Class 

2 reinforced insulation) 

Vendor I.D. Code 1 

Product Type Code 7 

Product Code 114 96 97 

Group 1: inputs 0 to 7; Group 2: 

inputs 8 to 15 

Verified by one of the following dielectric tests: 1200V ac for 1 sec. 

or 1697V dc for 1 sec. 

75V dc working voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation) 

(1) Sinking/Sourcing Inputs - Sourcing/sinking describes the current flow between the I/O module and the field device. Sourcing I/O circuits supply (source) current to sinking 

field devices. Sinking I/O circuits are driven by a current sourcing field device. Field devices connected to the negative side (DC Common) of the field power supply are 

sinking field devices. Field devices connected to the positive side (+V) of the field supply are sourcing field devices. 



Table A.15 Output Specifications 

Spec. 1762-OA8 1762-OB8 1762-OB16 1762-OW8 1762-OW16 1762-OX6I 

Approximate 

Shipping 

Weight 

(With Carton) 

215g (0.48 lbs.) 210g (0.46 lbs.) 235g (0.52 lbs.) 228g (0.50 lbs.) 285g (0.63 lbs.) 220g (0.485 lbs) 

Voltage 

Category 

Operating 

Voltage 

Range 

Number of 

Outputs 

Bus Current 

Draw (max.) 

100 to 240V ac 24V dc 24V dc AC/DC normally 

open relay 

85V ac to 265V ac at 

47 to 63 Hz 

20.4V dc to 26.4V dc 20.4V dc to 26.4V dc 5 to 265V ac 

5 to 125V dc 

AC/DC normally 

open relay 

5 to 265V ac 

5 to 125V dc 

8 8 16 8 16 6 

115 mA at 5V dc 

(0.575W) 


(0.575W) 


(0.88W) 


(0.40W) 


(0.60W) 

AC/DC Type C 

Relay 

5 to 265V ac 

5 to 125V dc 


(0.55W) 

Heat 

Dissipation 

(max.) 

Signal Delay 

(max.) – 

resistive load 

Off-State 

Leakage 

(max.) 

On-State 

Current (min.) 

On-State 

Voltage Drop 

(maximum) 

Continuous 

Current per 

Point (max.) 

Continuous 

Current per 

Common 

(max.) 

2.9 Watts 1.61 Watts 2.9 Watts at 30°C 

(86°F) 

2.1 Watts at 55°C 

(131°F) 

On Delay: 1/2 cycle On Delay: 0.1 ms On Delay: 0.1 ms 

Off Delay: 1/2 cycle 

2 mA at 132V, 

2.5 mA at 265V 

Off Delay: 1.0ms 



(2.16W) 

140 mA at 24V 

dc (3.36W) 

110 mA at 24V 

dc (2.64W) 

2.9 Watts 5.6 Watts 2.8 Watts 

On Delay: 10 ms 

Off Delay: 10 

ms 


Off Delay: 10 

ms 

1.0 mA 1.0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 

10 mA 1.0 mA 1.0 mA 10 mA 10 mA 100 mA 


(max) 6 ms 

(typical) 

Off Delay: 20 ms 

(max) 

12 ms (typical) 

1.5V at 0.5 A 1.0V dc 1.0V dc Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable 

0.25A at 55°C 

(131°F) 

0.5A at 30°C (86°F) 

1.0 A at 55°C (131°F) 

2.0 A at 30°C (86°F) 

0.5A at 55°C (131°F) 

1.0A at 30°C (86°F) 

4.0A at 55°C (131°F) 

8.0A at 30°C (86°F) 

0.5A at 55°C (131°F) 

1.0A at 30°C (86°F) 

4.0A at 55°C (131°F) 

8.0A at 30°C (86°F) 

2.5A (Also see “Relay Contact 

Ratings” on page A-6.) 

7A (Also see 

“Relay Contact 

Ratings” on 

page A-6.) 

8 A 8A 7A (Also see 

“Relay Contact 

Ratings” on 

page A-6.) 




Spec. 1762-OA8 1762-OB8 1762-OB16 1762-OW8 1762-OW16 1762-OX6I 

Continuous 

Current per 

Module 

(max.) 

Surge Current 

(maximum) 

Power Supply 

Distance 

Rating 

Isolated 

Groups 

Output Group 

to Backplane 

Isolation 

Output Group 

to Output 

Group 

Isolation 

Vendor I.D. 

Code 

Product Type 

Code 

2.0 A at 55°C (131°F) 

4.0 A at 30°C (86°F) 

5.0 A (Repeatability 

is once every 2 

seconds for a 

duration of 25 msec. 

4.0 A at 55°C; 

8.0 A at 30°C 

2.0A (Repeatability 


seconds at 55°C 

(131°F), once every 

second at 30°C 

(86°F) for a duration 

of 10 msec.) 

4.0A at 55°C (131°F) 

8.0A at 30°C (86°F) 

2.0A (Repeatability 


seconds at 55°C 

(131°F), once every 

second at 30°C 

(86°F) for a duration 

of 10 msec.) 

6 (The module may not be more than 6 modules away from the power supply.) 

Group 1: Outputs 0 to 

3 

Group 2: Outputs 4 to 

7 

Verified by one of the 

following dielectric 

tests: 1836V ac for 1 

sec. or 2596V dc for 1 

sec. 

265V ac working 

voltage (IEC Class 2 

reinforced insulation) 

Verified by one of the 

following dielectric 

tests: 1836V ac for 1 

sec. or 2596V dc for 1 

sec. 

265V ac working 

voltage (IEC Class 2 


Group 1: Outputs 0 

to 7 

Group 1: Outputs 0 

to 15 

Verified by one of the following dielectric 

tests: 1200V ac for 1 sec. or 1697V dc for 1 

sec. 

75V dc working voltage (IEC Class 2 


Not Applicable 

16 A 16A 30A (Also see 

Module Load 

Ratings 

1762-OX6I on 

page A-13 

See Relay Contact Ratings on 

page A-6 

Group 1: 

Outputs 0 to 3 

Group 2: 


Group 1: 


Group 2: 


See Relay 

Contact Ratings 

on page A-6 

All 6 Outputs 

Individually 

Isolated. 

Verified by one of the following dielectric tests: 

1836V ac for 1 sec. or 2596V dc for 1 sec. 

265V ac working voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced 

insulation) 

Verified by one of the following dielectric tests: 

1836V ac for 1 sec. or 2596V dc for 1 sec. 

265V ac working voltage (basic insulation) 

150V ac working voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced 

insulation) 

1 1 1 1 1 1 

7 7 7 7 7 7 

Product Code 119 101 103 120 121 124 



Table A.16 Relay Contact Ratings (1762-OW8 and 1762-OW16) 

Maximum Volts Amperes Amperes Continuous Volt-Amperes 

Make Break Make Break 

240V ac 7.5A 0.75A 2.5A (2) 1800 VA 180 VA 

120V ac 15A 1.5A 2.5A (2) 1800 VA 180 VA 

125V dc 0.22A (1) 1.0A 

24V dc 1.2A (3) 2.0A 

28 VA 

(1) For dc voltage applications, the make/break ampere rating for relay contacts can be determined by dividing 28 VA by the applied dc voltage. For example, 28 VA/48V dc = 

0.58A. For dc voltage applications less than 14V, the make/break ratings for relay contacts cannot exceed 2A. 

(2) 1.5A above 40°C. 

Table A.17 Relay Contact Ratings 1762-OX6I 

Volts 

(max.) 

Continuous 

Amps per 

Point 

(max.) (1) 

Amperes (3) 

Voltamperes 

Make Break Make Break 

240V ac 5.0 A 15 A 1.5 A 3600 VA 360 VA 

120V ac 7.0 A (2) 30 A 3.0 A 

125V dc 2.5 A 0.4 A 50 VA (4) 

24V dc 7.0 A (2) 7.0 A 168 VA (4) 

(1) The continuous current per module must be limited so the module power does not exceed 1440VA. 

(2) 6 A in ambient temperatures above 40°C. 

(3) Surge Suppression – Connecting surge suppressors across your external inductive load will extend the 

life of the relay contacts. For additional details, refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding 

Guidelines, publication 1770-4.1. 

(4) DC Make/Break Voltamperes must be limited to 50 VA for DC voltages between 28V dc and 125V dc. DC 

Make/Break Voltamperes below 28V dc are limited by the 7 A Make/Break current limit. 



Table A.18 Module Load Ratings 1762-OX6I 

Volts (max.) 

240V ac 

Controlled Load (Current) per Module 

(max.) 

6 A 

120V ac 12 A (1) 

125V dc 

11.5 A 

24V dc 30 A (2) 

(1) Current per relay limited to 6 A at ambient temperatures above 40°C. 

(2) 24 A in ambient temperatures above 40°C. Limited by ambient temperature 

and the number of relays controlling loads. See below. 

Relays Used vs. Maximum Current per Relay (24V dc) 1762-OX6I 

Ambient Temperature 

below 40°C 

Ambient Temperature 

above 40°C 

1 2 3 

4 5 6 

Number of Relays Controlling Loads 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

Maximum Current per Relay (Amps) 



Analog Modules 

Table A.19 Common Specifications 

Specification 

Dimensions 

1762-IF2OF2, 1762-IF4, 1762-IR4, 1762-IT4 and 1762-OF4 

90 mm (height) x 87 mm (depth) x 40 mm (width) 

height including mounting tabs is 110 mm 


Operating Temperature 

Operating Humidity 

Operating Altitude 

Vibration 

Shock 

Module Power LED 

Recommended Cable 

3.54 in. (height) x 3.43 in. (depth) x 1.58 in. (width) 

height including mounting tabs is 4.33 in. 

-40°C to +85°C (-40°F to +185°F) 

0°C to +55°C (-32°F to +131°F) 


2000 meters (6561 feet) 

Operating: 10 to 500 Hz, 5 g, 0.030 in. max. peak-to-peak 

Operating: 30 g 

On: indicates power is applied. 

Belden 8761 (shielded) 

(For 1762-IT4, Shielded thermocouple extension wire for the specific type of thermocouple you are 

using. Follow thermocouple manufacturer’s recommendations.) 

Agency Certification C-UL certified (under CSA C22.2 No. 142) 

UL 508 listed 

CE compliant for all applicable directives 

C-Tick markred for all applicable acts (1762-IR4 and 1762-IT4) 

Hazardous Environment Class Class I, Division 2, Hazardous Location, Groups A, B, C, D (UL 1604, C-UL under CSA C22.2 No. 213) 

Noise Immunity NEMA standard ICS 2-230 

Radiated and Conducted Emissions EN50081-2 Class A 

Electrical /EMC: 

The module has passed testing at the following levels: 

ESD Immunity (IEC1000-4-2) 4 kV contact, 8 kV air, 4 kV indirect 

Radiated Immunity (IEC1000-4-3) 10 V/m, 80 to 1000 MHz, 80% amplitude modulation, +900 MHz keyed carrier 

Fast Transient Burst (IEC1000-4-4) 2 kV, 5 kHz 

Surge Immunity (IEC1000-4-5) 1 kV galvanic gun 

Conducted Immunity (IEC1000-4-6) (1) (2) 

10V, 0.15 to 80 MHz 

(1) Conducted Immunity frequency range may be 150 kHz to 30 MHz if the Radiated Immunity frequency range is 30 MHz to 1000 MHz. 

(2) For grounded thermocouples, the 10V level is reduced to 3V. 




Specification 1762-IF2OF2 1762-IF4 1762-OF4 1762-IR4 1762-IT4 

Approximate 

Shipping Weight 

(with carton) 

Bus Current Draw 

(max.) 

Analog Normal 

Operating Range 

Full Scale (1) Analog 

Ranges 

240g (0.53 lbs.) 235g (0.517 lbs.) 260g (0.57 lbs.) 220g (0.53 lbs.) 



Voltage: 0 to 10V dc 

Current: 4 to 20 mA 

Voltage: 0 to 10.5V 

dc 




Voltage: -10 to +10V 

dc 


Voltage: -10.5 to 

+10.5V dc 

Current: -21 to +21 

mA 



Voltage 0 to 10V dc 


Voltage:0 to 10.5V 

dc 




Resolution 12 bits (unipolar) 15 bits 12 bits (unipolar) Input filter and 

configuration 

dependent 

Repeatability (2) ±0.1% ±0.1% ±0.1% ±0.1°C (±0.18°F) for 

Ni and NiFe 

±0.2°C (±0.36°F) to 

±0.2°C (±0.36°F) for 

other RTD inputs 

±0.04 ohm for 150 

ohm resistances 

±0.2 ohm for other 

resistances 

Input and Output 

Group to System 

Isolation 

30V ac/30V dc rated working voltage (3) 

(N.E.C. Class 2 required) 

(IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation) 

type test: 500V ac or 707V dc for 1 minute 

30V ac/30V dc rated 

working voltage 

(IEC Class 2 

reinforced 

insulation) 

type test: 500V ac or 

707V dc for 1 minute 

NA 

NA 

30V ac/30V dc 


type test: 500V ac or 


Vendor I.D. Code 1 1 1 1 1 

Product Type Code 10 10 10 10 10 

Product Code 75 67 66 65 64 



NA 

NA 

15 bits plus sign 

See Table A.24 on 

page A-19 

30V ac/30V dc 


qualification test: 


(1) The over- or under-range flag comes on when the normal operating range (over/under) is exceeded. The module continues to convert the analog input up to the maximum 

full scale range. 

(2) Repeatability is the ability of the module to register the same reading in successive measurements for the same signal. 

(3) Rated working voltage is the maximum continuous voltage that can be applied at the terminals with respect to earth ground. 



Table A.21 Input Specifications 

Specification 1762-IF2OF2 1762-IF4 1762-IR4 1762-IT4 

Number of Inputs 2 differential (unipolar) 4 differential (bipolar) 4 4 input channels plus 1 

CJC sensor 

Update Time (typical) 2.5 ms 130, 250, 290, 450, 530 

ms (selectable) 

A/D Converter Type 

Successive 

approximation 

Successive 

approximation 

Input filter and 

cofiguration dependent 

Delta-Sigma 

Common Mode Voltage ±27V ±27V NA ±10V 

Range (1) 

Common Mode 

> 55 dB at 50 and 60 Hz > 55 dB at 50 and 60 Hz >110 dB at 50 Hz (with 10 

Rejection (2) or 50 Hz filter) 

>110 dB at 60 Hz (with 10 

or 60 Hz filter) 

Non-linearity (in percent 

full scale) 

Typical Overall 

Accuracy (3) 

Input Impedance 

±0.1% ±0.1% ±0.05% NA 

±0.5% full scale at 0 to 

55°C 

±0.3% full scale at 25°C 

Voltage Terminal: 200KΩ 

Current Terminal: 250Ω 

±0.3% full scale at 0 to 

55°C 


Voltage Terminal: 200KΩ 

Current Terminal: 275Ω 

±0.5°C (F°) for Pt 385 

NA 

Delta-Sigma 

>110 dB at 50 Hz (with 10 


>110 dB at 60 Hz (with 10 


NA 

>10 ΜΩ >10 ΜΩ 

Current Input Protection ±32 mA ±32 mA NA NA 

Voltage Input Protection ±30V ±30V NA NA 

Channel Diagnostics 

Over or under range or 

open circuit condition by 

bit reporting for analog 

inputs. 




inputs. 




inputs. 

(1) For proper operation, both the plus and minus input terminals must be within ±27V (±10V for 1762-IT4) of analog common. 

(2) V cm = 1 V pk-pk AC 

(3) V cm = 0 (includes offset, gain, non-linearity and repeatability error terms) 




inputs. 



Table A.22 Input Specifications 1762-IR4 

Specification 

1762-IR4 

Input Types • 100Ω Platinum 385 

• 200Ω Platinum 385 







• 10Ω Copper 426 

• 120Ω Nickel 672 

• 120Ω Nickel 618 

• 604Ω Nickel-Iron 518 

• 0 to 150Ω 

• 0 to 500Ω 

• 0 to 1000Ω 

• 0 to 3000Ω 

Heat Dissipation 

Normal Mode Rejection Ratio 

Typical Accuracy [Autocalibration ±0.5°C (°F) for Pt 385 

Enabled] at 25° C (77°F) Ambient with ±0.4°C (°F) for Pt 3916 

Module Operating Temperature at 25° C ±0.2°C (°F) for Ni 

(77°F) (1) ±0.3°C (°F) for NiFe 

±0.6°C (°F) for Cu 

Typical Accuracy [Autocalibration 

Enabled] at 0 to 55° C (+32 to +131°F)(1) 

Accuracy Drift at 0 to 55° C (+32 to 

+131°F) 

Excitation Current Source 

Open-Circuit Detection Time (2) 

Input Channel Configuration 

Calibration 

Maximum Overload at Input Terminals 

Cable Impedance Max. 

Power Supply Distance Rating 

Channel to Channel Isolation 

1.5 Total Watts (The Watts per point, plus the minimum Watts, with all points enabled.) 

70 dB minimum at 50 Hz with the 10 or 50 Hz filter selected 

70 dB minimum at 60 Hz with the 10 or 60 Hz filter selected 

±0.9°C (°F) for Pt 385 

±0.8°C (°F) for Pt 3916 

±0.4°C (°F) for Ni 

±0.5°C (°F) for NiFe 

±1.1°C (°F) for Cu 

±0.026°C/°C (0.026°F/°F) for Pt 385 

±0.023°C/°C (0.023°F/°F) for Pt 3916 

±0.012°C/°C (0.012°F/°F) for Ni 

±0.015°C/°C (0.015°F/°F) for NiFe 

±0.032°C/°C (0.032°F/°F) for Cu 

0.5 mA and 1.0 mA selectable per channel 

6 to 1212 ms 

±0.15Ω for 150Ω range 








±0.007Ω/°C (0.012Ω/°F) for 150Ω range 




Via configuration software screen or the user program (by writing a unique bit pattern into the 

module’s configuration file). Refer to your controller’s user manual to determine if user 

program configuration is supported. 

The module performs autocalibration on channel enable and on a configuration change 

between channels. You can also program the module to calibrate every five minutes. 

±35V dc continuous 

25Ω (Operating with >25Ω will reduce accuracy.) 

6 (The module may not be more than 6 modules away from the system power supply.) 

±10V dc 

(1) Accuracy is dependent upon the Analog/Digital converter filter rate selection, excitation current selection, data format, and input noise. 

(2) Open-circuit detection time is equal to channel update time. 



Table A.23 Input Specifications 1762-IT4 

Specification 


Response Speed per Channel 

Rated Working Voltage (1) 

Normal Mode Rejection Ratio 

Value 

1.5 Total Watts (The Watts per point, plus the 

minimum Watts, with all points energized.) 

Input filter and configuration dependent. 

30V ac/30V dc 

Maximum Cable Impedance 

Open-circuit Detection Time 7 ms to 1.515 seconds (2) 

85 dB (minimum) at 50 Hz (with 10 Hz or 50 Hz filter) 

85 dB (minimum) at 60 Hz (with 10 Hz or 60 Hz filter) 

25 Ω (for specified accuracy) 

Calibration 

CJC Accuracy 

Maximum Overload at Input 

Terminals 

Input Channel Configuration 

The module performs autocalibration upon power-up 

and whenever a channel is enabled. You can also 

program the module to calibrate every five minutes. 

±1.3°C (±2.34°F) 

±35V dc continuous (3) 

via configuration software screen or the user program 

(by writing a unique bit pattern into the module’s 

configuration file). 

(1) Rated working voltage is the maximum continuous voltage that can be applied at the input terminal, including 

the input signal and the value that floats above ground potential (for example, 30V dc input signal and 20V dc 

potential above ground). 

(2) Open-circuit detection time is equal to the module scan time, which is based on the number of enabled 

channels, the filter frequency of each channel, and whether cyclic calibration is enabled.. 

(3) Maximum current input is limited due to input impedance. 



(1) (2) 

Table A.24 1762-IT4 Repeatability at 25°C (77°F) 

Input Type 

Thermocouple J 

Thermocouple N (-110°C to +1300°C [-166°F to +2372°F]) 

Thermocouple N (-210°C to -110°C [-346°F to -166°F]) 

Thermocouple T (-170°C to +400°C [-274°F to +752°F]) 

Thermocouple T (-270°C to -170°C [-454°F to -274°F]) 

Repeatability for 

10 Hz Filter 

±0.1°C [±0.18°F] 

±0.1°C [±0.18°F] 

±0.25°C [±0.45°F] 

±0 .1°C [±0.18°F] 

±1.5°C [±2.7°F] 

Thermocouple K (-270°C to +1370°C [-454°F to +2498°F]) 

±0.1°C [±0.18°F] 

Thermocouple K (-270°C to -170°C [-454°F to -274°F]) 

±2.0°C [±3.6°F] 

Thermocouple E (-220°C to +1000°C [-364°F to +1832°F]) 

±0.1°C [±0.18°F] 

Thermocouple E (-270°C to -220°C [-454°F to -364°F]) 

±1.0°C [±1.8°F] 

Thermocouples S and R 

±0.4°C [±0.72°F] 

Thermocouple C 

±0.2°C [±0.36°F] 

Thermocouple B 

±0.7°C [±1.26°F] 

±50 mV ±6 µV 

±100 mV ±6 µV 

(1) Repeatability is the ability of the input module to register the same reading in successive measurements for the 

same input signal. 

(2) Repeatability at any other temperature in the 0 to 60°C (32 to 140°F) range is the same as long as the 

temperature is stable. 

Table A.25 1762-IT4 Accuracy 

Input Type (1) With Autocalibration Enabled 

Accuracy (2) (3) for 10 Hz, 50 Hz and 60 

Without Autocalibration 

(2) (4) 

Maximum Temperature Drift 

at 25°C [77°F] 

Ambient 

at 0 to 60°C 

[32 to 140°F] 

Ambient 

at 0 to 60°C [32 to 140°F] 

Ambient 

Thermocouple J (-210°C to 1200°C [-346°F to 2192°F]) ±0.6°C [± 1.1°F] ±0.9°C [± 1.7°F] ±0.0218°C/°C [±0.0218°F/°F] 

Thermocouple N (-200°C to +1300°C [-328°F to 2372°F]) ±1°C [± 1.8°F] ±1.5°C [±2.7°F] ±0.0367°C/°C [±0.0367°F/°F] 

Thermocouple N (-210°C to -200°C [-346°F to -328°F]) ±1.2°C [±2.2°F] ±1.8°C [±3.3°F] ±0.0424°C/°C [±0.0424°F/°F] 

Thermocouple T (-230°C to +400°C [-382°F to +752°F]) ±1°C [± 1.8°F] ±1.5°C [±2.7°F] ±0.0349°C/°C [±0.0349°F/°F] 

Thermocouple T (-270°C to -230°C [-454°F to -382°F]) ±5.4°C [± 9.8°F] ±7.0°C [±12.6°F] ±0.3500°C/°C [±0.3500°F/°F] 

Thermocouple K (-230°C to +1370°C [-382°F to 

+2498°F]) 

±1°C [± 1.8°F] ±1.5°C [±2.7°F] ±0.4995°C/°C [±0.4995°F/°F] 

Thermocouple K (-270°C to -225°C [-454°F to -373°F]) ±7.5°C [± 13.5°F] ±10°C [± 18°F] ±0.0378°C/°C [±0.0378°F/°F] 



Table A.25 1762-IT4 Accuracy 

Input Type (1) With Autocalibration Enabled 

Accuracy (2) (3) for 10 Hz, 50 Hz and 60 

Without Autocalibration 

(2) (4) 

Maximum Temperature Drift 

at 25°C [77°F] 

Ambient 

at 0 to 60°C 

[32 to 140°F] 

Ambient 

at 0 to 60°C [32 to 140°F] 

Ambient 

Thermocouple E (-210°C to +1000°C [-346°F to 

+1832°F]) 

±0.5°C [± 0.9°F] ±0.8°C [±1.5°F] ±0.0199°C/°C [±0.0199°F/°F] 

Thermocouple E (-270°C to -210°C [-454°F to -346°F]) ±4.2°C [± 7.6°F] ±6.3°C [±11.4°F] ±0.2698°C/°C [±0.2698°F/°F] 

Thermocouple R ±1.7°C [± 3.1°F] ±2.6°C [± 4.7°F] ±0.0613°C/°C [±0.0613°F/°F] 

Thermocouple S ±1.7°C [± 3.1°F] ±2.6°C [± 4.7°F] ±0.0600°C/°C [±0.0600°F/°F] 

Thermocouple C ±1.8°C [±3.3°F] ±3.5°C [±6.3°F] ±0.0899°C/°C [±0.0899°F/°F] 

Thermocouple B ±3.0°C [±5.4°F] ±4.5°C [±8.1°F] ±0.1009°C/°C [±0.1009°F/°F] 

±50 mV ±15 µV ±25 µV ±0.44µV/°C [±0.80µV/°F] 

±100 mV ±20 µV ±30 µV ±0.69µV/°C [±01.25µV/°F] 

(1) The module uses the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) ITS-90 standard for thermocouple linearization. 

(2) Accuracy and temperature drift information does not include the affects of errors or drift in the cold junction compensation circuit. 

(3) Accuracy is dependent upon the analog/digital converter output rate selection, data format, and input noise. 

(4) Temperature drift with autocalibration is slightly better than without autocalibration. 

TIP 

For more detailed 1762-IT4 accuracy information, see 

publication 1762-UM002. 


Specification 1762-IF2OF2 1762-OF4 

Number of Outputs 2 single-ended (unipolar) 4 single-ended (bipolar) 

Update Time (typical) 

4.5 ms 

D/A Converter Type Resistor string R-2R Ladder Voltage Switching 

Resistive Load on Current Output 0 to 500 Ω (includes wire resistance) 0 to 500 Ω (includes wire resistance) 

Load Range on Voltage Output > 1KΩ > 1KΩ 

Reactive Load, Current Output < 0.1 mH < 0.1 mH 

Reactive Load, Voltage Output < 1 µF < 1 µF 

Typical Overall Accuracy (1) ±1% full scale at 0 to 55°C 


Output Ripple 

range 0 to 500 Hz 

(referred to output range) 

< ±0.1% < ±0.1% 

±1% full scale at 0 to 55°C 





Specification 1762-IF2OF2 1762-OF4 

Non-linearity (in percent full scale) < ±0.5% < ±0.5% 

Open and Short-Circuit Protection Continuous Continuous 

Output Protection ±32 mA ±32 mA 

(1) Includes offset, gain, non-linearity and repeatability error terms. 

Table A.27 Valid Input/Output Data Word Formats/Ranges for 1762-IF2OF2 

Normal Operating Range Full Scale Range RAW/Proportional Data Scaled-for-PID 

0V to 10V dc 10.5V dc 32760 16380 

0.0V dc 0 0 

4mA to 20mA 21.0mA 32760 16380 

20.0mA 31200 15600 

4.0mA 6240 3120 

0.0mA 0 0 




Appendix B 

Replacement Parts 

This chapter contains the following information: 

• a table of MicroLogix 1100 replacement parts 

• procedure for replacing the lithium battery 

• 1762 expansion I/O replacement parts 


Replacement Kits 

The table below provides a list of replacement parts and their catalog 

number. 

Description 

Lithium Battery (See page B-2.) 

Catalog 

Number 

1763-BA 


B-2 Replacement Parts 

Lithium Battery (1763-BA) 

IMPORTANT 

When the controller’s Battery Low indicator is lit, check 

whether the battery wire connector is connected correctly 

or replace the replaceable battery with a new one 

immediately. When the indicator turns on, it means that 

either the battery is disconnected, or that the battery 

requires replacement. The controller is designed to 

operate for up to 2 weeks, from the time that the indicator 

first turns on. We recommend that you replace the 

battery immediately when the indicator turns on. 

Installing 

Follow the procedure below to ensure proper replaceable battery 

installation. 

1. Insert a battery into the battery pocket with wires facing up. 

2. Insert the battery wire connector into the battery connector. 

3. Secure the battery connector wires along the wire guide, as 

shown below. 

Replaceable Battery Pocket 

Replaceable Battery 

Battery Wires 

ESC 

OK 

Battery Wire Connector 

Wire Guide 

Battery Connector 


Replacement Parts B-3 

Battery Handling 

Follow the procedure below to ensure proper battery operation and 

reduce personnel hazards. 

• Use only for the intended operation. 

• Do not ship or dispose of cells except according to 

recommended procedures. 

• Do not ship on passenger aircraft. 

ATTENTION 

• Do not charge the batteries. An explosion could 

result or the cells could overheat causing burns. 

• Do not open, puncture, crush, or otherwise 

mutilate the batteries. A possibility of an 

explosion exists and/or toxic, corrosive, and 

flammable liquids would be exposed. 

• Do not incinerate or expose the batteries to high 

temperatures. Do not attempt to solder batteries. 

An explosion could result. 

• Do not short positive and negative terminals 

together. Excessive heat can build up and cause 

severe burns. 

Storing 

Store lithium batteries in a cool, dry environment, typically +20°C to 

+25°C (+68°F to 77°F) and 40% to 60% humidity. Store the batteries 

and a copy of the battery instruction sheet in the original container, 

away from flammable materials. 

Transporting 

One or Two Batteries 

Each battery contains 0.23 grams of lithium. Therefore, up to two 

batteries can be shipped together within the United States without 

restriction. Regulations governing shipment to or within other 

countries may differ. 



Three or More Batteries 

Procedures for the transportation of three or more batteries shipped 

together within the United States are specified by the Department of 

Transportation (DOT) in the Code of Federal Regulations, CFR49, 

“Transportation.” An exemption to these regulations, DOT - E7052, 

covers the transport of certain hazardous materials classified as 

flammable solids. This exemption authorizes transport of lithium 

batteries by motor vehicle, rail freight, cargo vessel, and cargo-only 

aircraft, providing certain conditions are met. Transport by passenger 

aircraft is not permitted. 

A special provision of DOT-E7052 (11th Rev., October 21, 1982, par. 

8-a) provides that: 

“Persons that receive cell and batteries covered by this 

exemption may reship them pursuant to the provisions of 49 

CFR 173.22a in any of these packages authorized in this 

exemption including those in which they were received.” 

The Code of Federal Regulations, 49 CFR 173.22a, relates to the use of 

packaging authorized under exemptions. In part, it requires that you 

must maintain a copy of the exemption at each facility where the 

packaging is being used in connection with shipment under the 

exemption. 

Shipment of depleted batteries for disposal may be subject to specific 

regulation of the countries involved or to regulations endorsed by 

those countries, such as the IATA Articles Regulations of the 

International Air Transport Association, Geneva, Switzerland. 

IMPORTANT 

Regulations for transportation of lithium batteries are 

periodically revised. 


Replacement Parts B-5 

Disposing 

ATTENTION 

Do not incinerate or dispose of lithium batteries in 

general trash collection. Explosion or violent rupture 

is possible. Batteries should be collected for disposal 

in a manner to prevent against short-circuiting, 

compacting, or destruction of case integrity and 

hermetic seal. 

For disposal, batteries must be packaged and shipped in accordance 

with transportation regulations, to a proper disposal site. The U.S. 

Department of Transportation authorizes shipment of “Lithium 

batteries for disposal” by motor vehicle only in regulation 173.1015 of 

CFR 49 (effective January 5, 1983). For additional information contact: 

U.S. Department of Transportation 

Research and Special Programs Administration 

400 Seventh Street, S.W. 

Washington, D.C. 20590 

Although the Environmental Protection Agency at this time has no 

regulations specific to lithium batteries, the material contained may be 

considered toxic, reactive, or corrosive. The person disposing of the 

material is responsible for any hazard created in doing so. State and 

local regulations may exist regarding the disposal of these materials. 

For a lithium battery product safety data sheet, contact the 

manufacturer: 

Sanyo Energy Corporation Tadarand Electronic Industries 

2001 Sanyo Avenue 2 Seaview Blvd. 

San Diego, CA 92173 Port Washington, NY 11050 

(619) 661-4801 (516) 621-4980 



1762 Expansion I/O Expansion I/O Replacement Doors 

Catalog Number 1762-RPLDR2 

The expansion I/O door kit consists of: 

• Two expansion I/O terminal doors 

• Two expansion I/O (bus doors) 

Expansion I/O Replacement DIN Latches 

Catalog Number 1762-RPLDIN2 

The expansion I/O DIN latch kit consists of: 

• Five DIN latches for expansion I/O 

Expansion I/O Replacement Door Labels 

Catalog Number 1762-RPLTLBL2 

The expansion I/O terminal door label kit consists of: 

• Four labels each for all available modules 


Appendix C 

Troubleshooting Your System 

This chapter describes how to troubleshoot your controller. Topics 

include: 

• understanding the controller status indicators 

• controller error recovery model 

• analog expansion I/O diagnostics and troubleshooting 

• calling Rockwell Automation for assistance 

Understanding the 

Controller Indicator Status 

The MicroLogix 1100 provides three groups of status indicators: 

• the status LEDs on the top of the controller, 

• the status indicators on the LCD 

• the I/O status indicators on the LCD. 

Together they provide a mechanism to determine the current status 

of the controller if a programming device is not present or available. 

Controller Status LEDs 

Figure C.1 Controller LED Location 

Table C.1 Controller LED Indicators 

LED Color Indicates 

POWER off No input power, or power error condition 

green 

Power on 

RUN off Not executing the user program 

green 

Executing the user program in run mode 

green flashing Memory module transfer occurring 


C-2 Troubleshooting Your System 

Table C.1 Controller LED Indicators 

LED Color Indicates 

FAULT off No fault detected 

red flashing Application fault detected 

red 

Controller hardware faulted 

FORCE off No forces installed 

amber 

Forces installed 

Status Indicators on the LCD 

Figure C.2 Status Indicators on the LCD 

COMM0 

COMM1 

DCOMM 

BAT. LO 

U-MSG 

Table C.2 Status Indicators on the LCD 

Indicator Color Indicates 

COMM 0 off 

Not transmitting via RS-232/485 port (Channel 0) 

(empty rectangle) 

on 

Transmitting via RS-232/485 port (Channel 0) 

(solid rectangle) 

COMM 1 off 

Not transmitting via Ethernet port (Channel 1) 


on 

Transmitting via Ethernet port (Channel 1) 


DCOMM (1) off 

Configured communications 


on 

Default communications 


BAT. LO off 

Batterty level is acceptable 


on 

Battery low 


U-MSG off 

Default display mode 


on 

Customized display mode 


(1) When using a MicroLogix 1100 controller, the DCOMM LED applies only to Channel 0. 


Troubleshooting Your System C-3 

I/O Status Indicators on the LCD 

Figure C.3 I/O Status Indicators on the LCD 

I/O LED screen on the LCD 

Input status indicators (10) 

Output status indicators (6) 

Table C.3 I/O Status Indicators on the LCD 

Indicator Color Indicates 

INPUTS (1) off 

Input is not energized 


on 

Input is energized (terminal status) 


OUTPUTS off 

Output is not energized 


on 

Output is engerized (logic status) 


(1) To view the status of inputs and outputs on the LCD, you need to enter the I/O LED mode screen using the LCD 

menu. See I/O Status on page 5-9 for more information. 

Normal Operation 

The POWER and RUN LEDs are on. If a force condition is active, the 

FORCE LED turns on and remains on until all forces are removed. 

Error Conditions 

If an error exists within the controller, the controller LEDs operate as 

described in the following table. 



If the LEDS 

indicate: 

The Following Error 

Exists 

Probable Cause 

Recommended Action 

All LEDs off 

No input power or 

power supply error 

No line Power 

Power Supply 

Overloaded 

Verify proper line voltage and connections to the controller. 

This problem can occur intermittently if power supply is overloaded 

when output loading and temperature varies. 

Power and 

FAULT LEDs on 

solid 

Hardware faulted 

Processor Hardware 

Error 

Loose Wiring 

Cycle power. Contact your local Allen-Bradley representative if the 

error persists. 

Verify connections to the controller. 

Power LED on 

and FAULT LED 

flashing 

Application fault 

Hardware/Software 

Major Fault Detected 

For error codes and Status File information, see MicroLogix 1100 


Publication 1763-RM001. 

RUN 

FORCE 

Operating system 

fault 

Missing or Corrupt 

Operating System 

See Missing/Corrupt OS LED Pattern on page D-3. 

FAULT LEDs all 

flashing 



Controller Error Recovery 

Model 

Use the following error recovery model to help you diagnose software 

and hardware problems in the micro controller. The model provides 

common questions you might ask to help troubleshoot your system. 

Refer to the recommended pages within the model for further help. 

Identify the error code and 

description. 

No 

Is the error 

hardware related? 

Start 

Yes 

Refer to page C-3 for 

probable cause and 

recommended action. 

Are the wire 

connections tight? 

No 

Tighten wire connections. 

Yes 

Clear Fault. 

Is the Power 

LED on? 

No 

Does the 

controller have 

power supplied? 

No 

Check power. 

Yes 

Yes 

Correct the condition 

causing the fault. 

Is the RUN 

LED on? 

No 




Return controller to RUN or 

any of the REM test modes. 

Test and verify system 


Yes 

Is the Fault 

LED on? 

Yes 




No 

Is an input LED 

accurately showing 

status? 

Yes 

No 


probably cause and 


End 



Analog Expansion I/O 

Diagnostics and 


Module Operation and Channel Operation 

The module performs operations at two levels: 

• module level 

• channel level 

Module-level operations include functions such as power-up, 

configuration, and communication with the controller. 

Internal diagnostics are performed at both levels of operation. Both 

module hardware and channel configuration error conditions are 

reported to the controller. Channel over-range or under-range 

conditions are reported in the module’s input data table. Module 

hardware errors are reported in the controller’s I/O status file. Refer to 


Reference Manual, publication 1763-RM001 for more information. 

When a fault condition is detected, the analog outputs are reset to 

zero. 

Power-up Diagnostics 

At module power-up, a series of internal diagnostic tests are 

performed. 

Table C.4 Module Status LED State Table 

If module 

status LED is: 

Indicated 

condition: 

Corrective action: 

On Proper Operation No action required. 

Off Module Fault Cycle power. If condition persists, replace the 

module. Call your local distributor or 

Allen-Bradley for assistance. 



Critical and Non-Critical Errors 

Non-critical module errors are recoverable. Channel errors (over-range 

or under-range errors) are non-critical. Non-critical error conditions 

are indicated in the module input data table. Non-critical configuration 

errors are indicated by the extended error code. See Table C.7 on 

page C-9. 

Critical module errors are conditions that prevent normal or 

recoverable operation of the system. When these types of errors 

occur, the system leaves the run mode of operation. Critical module 

errors are indicated in Table C.7 on page C-9. 

Module Error Definition Table 

Analog module errors are expressed in two fields as four-digit Hex 

format with the most significant digit as “don’t care” and irrelevant. 

The two fields are “Module Error” and “Extended Error Information”. 

The structure of the module error data is shown below. 

Table C.5 Module Error Table 

“Don’t Care” Bits Module Error Extended Error Information 

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 

Hex Digit 4 Hex Digit 3 Hex Digit 2 Hex Digit 1 



Module Error Field 

The purpose of the module error field is to classify module errors into 

three distinct groups, as described in the table below. The type of 

error determines what kind of information exists in the extended error 

information field. These types of module errors are typically reported 

in the controller’s I/O status file. Refer to the MicroLogix 1100 


publication 1763-RM001 for more information. 

Table C.6 Module Error Types 

. 

Error Type 

Module Error Field Value Description 

Bits 11 through 09 

(Binary) 

No Errors 000 No error is present. The extended error field holds no additional information. 

Hardware Errors 001 General and specific hardware error codes are specified in the extended error 

information field. 

Configuration Errors 010 Module-specific error codes are indicated in the extended error field. These error 

codes correspond to options that you can change directly. For example, the input 

range or input filter selection. 

Extended Error Information Field 

Check the extended error information field when a non-zero value is 

present in the module error field. See Table C.7 on page C-9. 

TIP 

If no errors are present in the module error field, the 

extended error information field is set to zero. 

Hardware Errors 

General or module-specific hardware errors are indicated by module 

error code 2. See Table C.7. 

Configuration Errors 

If you set the fields in the configuration file to invalid or unsupported 

values, the module ignores the invalid configuration, generates a 

non-critical error, and keeps operating with the previous 

configuration. 

The table below lists the configuration error codes defined for the 

module. 



Error Codes 

Table C.7 Extended Error Codes for 1762-IF2OF2 

Error Type 

Hex 

Equivalent (1) 

Module 

Error Code 

Binary 

Extended Error 

Information Code 

Binary 

Error Description 

No Error X000 000 0 0000 0000 No error 

General Common X200 001 0 0000 0000 General hardware error; no additional information 

Hardware Error X201 001 0 0000 0001 Power-up reset state 

Hardware-Specific X210 001 0 0001 0000 Reserved 

Error 

Configuration Error X400 010 0 0000 0000 General configuration error; no additional information 

X401 010 0 0000 0001 Invalid input data format selected (channel 0) 

X402 010 0 0000 0010 Invalid input data format selected (channel 1) 

X403 010 0 0000 0011 Invalid output data format selected (channel 0) 

X404 010 0 0000 0100 Invalid output data format selected (channel 1) 

(1) X represents “Don’t Care”. 

Table C.8 Extended Error Codes for 1762-IF4 and 1762-OF4 

Error Type 

Hex 

Equivalent (1) 

Module 

Error Code 

Binary 

Extended Error 

Information Code 

Binary 

Error Description 

No Error X000 000 0 0000 0000 No error 

General Common X200 001 0 0000 0000 General hardware error; no additional information 

Hardware Error 

X201 001 0 0000 0001 Power-up reset state 

Hardware- X300 001 1 0000 0000 Reserved 

Specific Error 

Configuration Error X400 010 0 0000 0000 General configuration error; no additional information 

X401 010 0 0000 0001 Invalid range select (Channel 0) 




X405 010 0 0000 0101 Invalid filter select (Channel 0) – 1762-IF4 only 




X409 010 0 0000 1001 Invalid format select (Channel 0) 

X40A 010 0 0000 1010 Invalid format select (Channel 1) 

X40B 010 0 0000 1011 Invalid format select (Channel 2) 

X40C 010 0 0000 1100 Invalid format select (Channel 3) 

(1) X represents “Don’t Care”. 



Calling Rockwell 

Automation for Assistance 

If you need to contact Rockwell Automation or local distributor for 

assistance, it is helpful to obtain the following (prior to calling): 

• controller type, series letter, revision letter, and firmware (FRN) 

number of the controller 

• controller indicator status 

• controller error codes (Refer to MicroLogix 1100 Programmable 

Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual, Publication 

1763-RM001 for error code information.) 


Appendix D 

Using Control Flash to Upgrade Your 

Operating System 

The operating system (OS) can be upgraded through the 

communication port on the controller. In order to download a new 

operating system, you must have the following: 

• ControlFlash Upgrade Kit containing the new OS 

Go to http://www.ab.com/micrologix to download the upgrade 

kit. 

• a Windows 95 ® , Windows 98 ® , Windows 2000 ® , 

Windows NT ® or Windows XP ® based computer to run the 

download software. 

The ControlFlash Upgrade Kit includes: 

• the operating system upgrade to be downloaded 

• the ControlFlash programming tool, along with its support 

drivers and on-line help 

• a readme first file explaining how to upgrade the operating 

system 

Preparing for Upgrade 

Before upgrading the controller’s operating system, you must: 

• install ControlFlash software on your personal computer 

• prepare the controller for updating 

IMPORTANT 

Installing a new operating system deletes the user 

program. After the operating system upgrade is 

successful, you must transfer your control program 

back to the controller. The communication 

parameters are described on Table 4.1 on page 4-2. 

Install ControlFlash Software 

Double click the 1763-LEC-FRNxx.exe file to install the operating 

system upgrade (where xx is the firmware revision number). 


D-2 Using Control Flash to Upgrade Your Operating System 

Prepare the Controller for Updating 

Controller Configuration 

The controller must be configured for default communications (use 

the Communications Toggle Functionality which is available on the 

LCD; DCOMM indicator on) and be in the Program mode (use the 

Mode Switch which is available on the LCD.) to allow the download 

of a new operating system. 

See Using the Communications Toggle Functionality on page 4-2 for 

information about how to use the Communications Toggle 

Functionality. 

See Using the Mode Switch on page 5-25 for information about 

controller modes and how to use the Mode Switch. 

Sequence of Operation 

The following steps detail the key events in the upgrade process. 

1. Controller mode and communications parameters are checked. 

The screen as shown below is displayed on the LCD as well. 

2. Download begins. 


Using Control Flash to Upgrade Your Operating System D-3 

3. During the download, the Run, Force, and Fault LEDs perform a 

walking bit pattern. The screen as shown below is displayed on 

the LCD as well. 

4. When the download is complete, the integrity of the new OS is 

checked. If the new OS is corrupt, the controller sends an error 

message to the download tool and flashes the Missing or 

Corrupt OS LED pattern. See Missing/Corrupt OS LED Pattern 

below. 

5. Following a successful transfer, the Run, Force, and Fault LEDs 

flash on and remain on for five seconds. Then the controller 

resets. 

Missing/Corrupt OS LED 

Pattern 

When an operating system download is not successful or if the 

controller does not contain a valid operating system, the controller 

flashes the Run, Force, and Fault LEDs on and off. 


D-4 Using Control Flash to Upgrade Your Operating System 


Appendix E 

Connecting to Networks via RS-232/RS-485 

Interface 

The following protocols are supported from the RS-232/485 

communication channel (Channel 0): 

• DF1 Full Duplex 

• DF1 Half Duplex Master/Slave 

• DF1 Radio Modem 

• DH-485 

• Modbus 

• ASCII 

RS-232 Communication 

Interface 

The communications port on the MicroLogix 1100 utilizes a combined 

RS-232/485 interface. RS-232 and RS-485 are Electronics Industries 

Association (EIA) standards that specify the electrical and mechanical 

characteristics for serial binary communication. They provide a variety 

of system configuration possibilities. (RS-232 and RS-485 define 

electrical connection characteristics, not protocols.) 

One of the biggest benefits of an RS-232 interface is that it lets you 

integrate telephone and radio modems into your control system (using 

the appropriate DF1 protocol only, not DH-485 protocol), but it is for 

point-to-point connections only between two devices. 

The RS-485 interface supports connection of up to 32 devices in a 

multidrop hard-wired configuration using D4-485 or Modbus 

protocols. 

DF1 Full-Duplex Protocol 

DF1 Full-Duplex protocol provides a point-to-point connection 

between two devices. DF1 Full-Duplex protocol combines data 

transparency (American National Standards Institute ANSI - X3.28-1976 

specification subcategory D1) and 2-way simultaneous transmission 

with embedded responses (subcategory F1). 

The MicroLogix 1100 controllers support the DF1 Full-Duplex protocol 

via RS-232 connection to external devices, such as computers, or other 

controllers that support DF1 Full-Duplex. 


E-2 Connecting to Networks via RS-232/RS-485 Interface 

DF1 is an open protocol. Refer to DF1 Protocol and Command Set 

Reference Manual, publication 1770-6.5.16, for more information. 

DF1 Full-Duplex protocol (also referred to as DF1 point-to-point 

protocol) is useful where RS-232 point-to-point communication is 

required. DF1 protocol controls message flow, detects and signals 

errors, and retries if errors are detected. 

Example DF1 Full-Duplex Connections 

For information about required network connecting equipment, see 

Chapter 4, Communication Connections. 


CH0 



Modem cable 

Modem 

1761-CBL-PM02 

Modem 


Null modem 

adapter 

CH0 

1761-CBL-PM02 

DF1 Half-Duplex Protocol 

DF1 Half-Duplex protocol is a multi-drop single master/multiple slave 

network. DF1 Half-Duplex protocol supports data transparency 

(American National Standards Institute ANSI - X3.28-1976 specification 

subcategory D1). In contrast to DF1 Full-Duplex, communication 

takes place in one direction at a time. You can use the RS-232/485 

port on the MicroLogix 1100 as both a Half-Duplex programming port 

and a Half-Duplex peer-to-peer messaging port. 

DF1 Half-Duplex Operation 

A DF1 Half-Duplex master device initiates all communication by 

“polling” each slave device. The slave device may only transmit when 

it is polled by the master. It is the master’s responsibility to poll each 


Connecting to Networks via RS-232/RS-485 Interface E-3 

slave on a regular and sequential basis to allow slave devices an 

opportunity to communicate. 

An additional feature of the DF1 Half-Duplex protocol is that it is 

possible for a slave device to enable a MSG write or read to/from 

another slave. When the initiating slave is polled, the MSG is sent to 

the master. The master recognizes that the message is not intended for 

it, but for another slave, so the master immediately forwards the 

message to the intended slave. The master does this automatically; 

you do not need to program the master to move data between slave 

nodes. This slave-to-slave transfer can also be used by programming 

software to allow slave-to-slave upload and download of programs to 

processors (including the master) on the DF1 Half-Duplex link. 

MicroLogix 1100 can act as the master or as a slave on a Half-Duplex 

network. When the MicroLogix 1100 is a slave device, a master device 

is required to “run” the network. Several other Allen-Bradley products 

support DF1 Half-Duplex master protocol. They include the SLC 

5/03 and higher processors, enhanced PLC-5 ® processors, 

MicroLogix 1200/1500 and Rockwell Software RSLinx (version 2.x and 

higher). 

DF1 Half-Duplex supports up to 255 devices (address 0 to 254) with 

address 255 reserved for master broadcasts. As a DF1 Half-Duplex 

slave device, the MicroLogix 1100 supports broadcast reception. As a 

DF1 Half-Duplex master, the MicroLogix 1100 supports both the 

reception and initiation of broadcast write commands (via the MSG 

instruction). The MicroLogix 1100 also supports Half-Duplex modems 

using RTS/CTS hardware handshaking. 


TERM 

A 

B 

COM 

SHLD 

CHS GND 

TX TX 

TX 

PWR 

DC SOURCE 

CABLE 

EXTERNAL 

TERM 

A 

B 

COM 

SHLD 

CHS GND 

TX TX 

TX 

PWR 

DC SOURCE 

CABLE 

EXTERNAL 

TERM 

A 

B 

COM 

SHLD 

CHS GND 

TX TX 

TX 

PWR 

DC SOURCE 

CABLE 

EXTERNAL 


Example DF1 Half-Duplex Connections 

Rockwell Software RSLinx 2.0 (or 

higher), SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and 

SLC 5/05, PLC-5, MicroLogix 1100, 

or MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 

processors configured for DF1 

Half-Duplex Master. 

RS-232 

(DF1 Half-Duplex Protocol) 

Modem 

MicroLogix 

1000 (Slave) 

MicroLogix 

1100 (Slave) 

MicroLogix 

1200 (Slave) 

MicroLogix 

1500 (Slave) 

SLC 5/04 

(Slave) 

SLC 5/03 with 

1747-KE Interface 

Module (Slave) 

Considerations When Communicating as a DF1 Slave 

on a Multi-drop Link 

When communication is between either your programming software 

and a MicroLogix Programmable Controller or between two 

MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers via slave-to-slave 

communication on a larger multi-drop link, the devices depend on a 

DF1 Half-Duplex Master to give each of them access in a timely 

manner. As the number of slave devices increase, the time between 

when slave devices are polled also increases. This increase in time 

may also be large if you are using low baud rates. As these time 

periods grow, you may need to increase the poll timeout and reply 

timeout values for slave devices. 



IMPORTANT 

If a program download is started when using DF1 

Half-Duplex, but then is interrupted due to 

electromagnetic interference or other events, 

discontinue communications to the controller for the 

ownership timeout period and then restart the 

program download. The ownership timeout period is 

60 seconds. After the timeout, you can re-establish 

communications with the processor and try the 

program download again. The only other way to 

remove program ownership is to cycle power on the 

processor. 

Using Modems with MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers 

The types of modems you can use with MicroLogix 1100 controllers 

include the following: 

• dial-up phone modems 

A MicroLogix 1100 controller, on the receiving end of the dial-up 

connection, can be configured for DF1 Full-Duplex protocol 

with or without handshaking. The modem connected to the 

MicroLogix controller should support auto-answer. The 

MicroLogix 1100 supports ASCII out communications. Therefore, 

it can cause a modem to initiate or disconnect a phone call. 

• leased-line modems 

Leased-line modems are used with dedicated phone lines that 

are typically leased from the local phone company. The 

dedicated lines may be in a point-to-point topology supporting 

Full-Duplex communications between two modems or in a 

multi-drop topology supporting Half-Duplex communications 

between three or more modems. 

• radio modems 

Radio modems may be implemented in a point-to-point 

topology supporting either Half-Duplex or Full-Duplex 

communications, or in a multi-drop topology supporting 

Half-Duplex communications between three or more modems. 

MicroLogix 1100 also supports DF1 Radio Modem protocol. 



• line drivers 

Line drivers, also called short-haul modems, do not actually 

modulate the serial data, but rather condition the electrical 

signals to operate reliably over long transmission distances (up 

to several miles). Line drivers are available in Full-Duplex and 

Half-Duplex models. Allen-Bradley’s AIC+ Advanced Interface 

Converter is a Half-Duplex line driver that converts an RS-232 

electrical signal into an RS-485 electrical signal, increasing the 

signal transmission distance from 50 to 4000 feet (8000 feet 

when bridged). 

For point-to-point Full-Duplex modem connections that do not 

require any modem handshaking signals to operate, use DF1 

Full-Duplex protocol with no handshaking. For point-to-point 

Full-Duplex modem connections that require RTS/CTS handshaking, 

use DF1 Full-Duplex protocol with handshaking. 

For radio modem connections, use DF1 Radio Modem protocol, 

especially if store and forward capability is required. 

For general multi-drop modem connections, or for point-to-point 

modem connections that require RTS/CTS handshaking, use DF1 

Half-Duplex slave protocol. In this case, one (and only one) of the 

other devices must be configured for DF1 Half-Duplex master 

protocol. 

IMPORTANT 

Never attempt to use DH-485 protocol through 

modems under any circumstance. 

TIP 

All MicroLogix controllers support RTS/CTS modem 

handshaking when configured for DF1 Full-Duplex 

protocol with the control line parameter set to 

Full-Duplex Modem Handshaking or DF1 

Half-Duplex slave protocol with the control line 

parameter set to “Half-Duplex Modem”. No other 

modem handshaking lines (i.e. Data Set Ready and 

Data Terminal Ready) are supported by any 

MicroLogix 1100 controllers. MicroLogix controllers 

also do not support DCD (Data Carrier Detect). 



DH-485 Communication 

Protocol 

The DH-485 protocol defines the communication between multiple 

devices that coexist on a single pair of wires. DH-485 protocol uses 

RS-485 Half-Duplex as its physical interface. (RS-485 is a definition of 

electrical characteristics; it is not a protocol.) RS-485 uses devices that 

are capable of co-existing on a common data circuit, thus allowing 

data to be easily shared between devices. 

The DH-485 network offers: 

• interconnection of 32 devices 

• multi-master (peer-to-peer) capability 

• token passing access control 

• the ability to add or remove nodes without disrupting the 

network 

• maximum network segment of 1219 m (4000 ft.) 

The DH-485 protocol supports two classes of devices: initiators and 

responders. All initiators on the network get a chance to initiate 

message transfers. To determine which initiator has the right to 

transmit, a token passing algorithm is used. 

Control of message transfers on the DH-485 network is performed by 

rotating the token along the nodes on the network. A node holding 

the token can send a message onto the network. Each node is allowed 

a fixed number of transmissions (based on the Token Hold Factor) 

each time it receives the token. After a node sends a message, it 

passes the token to the next device. 

The allowable range of node addresses is 1 to 31. There must be at 

least one initiator on the network (such as a MicroLogix controller, or 

an SLC 5/02 or higher processor). 

DH-485 Configuration Parameters 

When MicroLogix communications are configured for DH-485, the 

following parameters can be changed: 

Table E.1 DF1 Full-Duplex Configuration Parameters 

Parameter 

Options 

Baud Rate 9600, 19.2K 

Node Address 

1 to 31 decimal 

Token Hold Factor 1 to 4 



See Software Considerations on page E-10 for tips on setting the 

parameters listed above. 

Devices that use the DH-485 Network 

In addition to the MicroLogix 1100 controllers, the devices shown in 

the following table also support the DH-485 network. 

Table E.2 Allen-Bradley Devices that Support DH-485 Communication 

Catalog 

Number 

Bulletin 1761 

Controllers 

Description Installation Function Publication 


Series C or 

higher 

Bulletin 1762 MicroLogix 1200 Series A or 

higher 

Bulletin 1764 MicroLogix 1500 Series A or 

higher 

Bulletin 1747 

Processors 

SLC 500 

Processors 

SLC Chassis 

These controllers support DH-485 communications. 1761-6.3 

These controllers support DH-485 communications. 

These controllers support DH-485 communications. 

These processors support a variety of I/O requirements and 

functionality. 

1746-BAS BASIC Module SLC Chassis Provides an interface for SLC 500 devices to foreign devices. 

Program in BASIC to interface the 3 channels (2 RS232 and 1 

DH-485) to printers, modems, or the DH-485 network for data 

collection. 

1785-KA5 

2760-RB 

1784-KTX, 

-KTXD 

DH+ TM /DH-485 

Gateway 

Flexible Interface 

Module 

PC DH-485 IM 

(1771) PLC 

Chassis 

(1771) PLC 

Chassis 

ISA 

Computer 

Bus 

1784-PCMK PCMCIA IM PCMCIA slot 

in computer 

2711-K5A2, 

-B5A2, -K5A5, 

-B5A5, -K5A1, 

-B5A1, -K9A2, 

-T9A2, -K9A5, 

-T9A5, -K9A1, 

and -T9A1 

PanelView 550 and 

PanelView 900 

Operator Terminals 

Provides communication between stations on the PLC-5 ® (DH+) 

and SLC 500 (DH-485) networks. Enables communication and 

data transfer from PLC ® to SLC 500 on DH-485 network. Also 

enables programming software programming or data acquisition 

across DH+ to DH-485. 

Provides an interface for SLC 500 (using protocol cartridge 

2760-SFC3) to other A-B PLCs and devices. Three configurable 

channels are available to interface with Bar Code, Vision, RF, 

Dataliner, and PLC systems. 

1762-UM001 

1764-UM001 

1747-UM011 

1746-UM004 

1746-PM001 

1746-RM001 

1785-6.5.5 

1785-1.21 

1747-6.12 

2760-ND001 

Provides DH-485 using RSLinx. 1784-6.5.22 

Provides DH-485 using RSLinx. 1784-6.5.19 

Panel Mount Provides electronic operator interface for SLC 500 processors. 2711-UM014 

NA = Not Applicable 



Important DH-485 Network Planning Considerations 

Carefully plan your network configuration before installing any 

hardware. Listed below are some of the factors that can affect system 

performance: 

• amount of electrical noise, temperature, and humidity in the 

network environment 

• number of devices on the network 

• connection and grounding quality in installation 

• amount of communication traffic on the network 

• type of process being controlled 

• network configuration 

The major hardware and software issues you need to resolve before 

installing a network are discussed in the following sections. 

Hardware Considerations 

You need to decide the length of the communication cable, where 

you route it, and how to protect it from the environment where it will 

be installed. 

When the communication cable is installed, you need to know how 

many devices are to be connected during installation and how many 

devices will be added in the future. The following sections help you 

understand and plan the network. 

Number of Devices and Length of Communication Cable 

The maximum length of the communication cable is 1219m (4000 ft.). 

This is the total cable distance from the first node to the last node in a 

segment. However, two segments can be used to extend the DH-485 

network to 2438m (8000 ft.). For additional information on 

connections using the AIC+, refer to the Advanced Interface Converter 

(AIC+) User Manual, publication 1761-6.4. 

Planning Cable Routes 

Follow these guidelines to help protect the communication cable from 

electrical interference: 

• Keep the communication cable at least 1.52m (5 ft.) from any 

electric motors, transformers, rectifiers, generators, arc welders, 

induction furnaces, or sources of microwave radiation. 



• If you must run the cable across power feed lines, run the cable 

at right angles to the lines. 

• If you do not run the cable through a contiguous metallic 

wireway or conduit, keep the communication cable at least 

0.15m (6 in.) from ac power lines of less than 20A, 0.30m (1 ft.) 

from lines greater than 20A, but only up to 100K VA, and 0.60m 

(2 ft.) from lines of 100K VA or more. 

• If you run the cable through a contiguous metallic wireway or 

conduit, keep the communication cable at least 0.08m (3 in.) 

from ac power lines of less than 20A, 0.15m (6 in.) from lines 

greater than 20A, but only up to 100K VA, and 0.30m (1 ft.) from 

lines of 100K VA or more. 

Running the communication cable through conduit provides 

extra protection from physical damage and electrical 

interference. If you route the cable through conduit, follow 

these additional recommendations: 

– Use ferromagnetic conduit near critical sources of electrical 

interference. You can use aluminum conduit in non-critical 

areas. 

– Use plastic connectors to couple between aluminum and 

ferromagnetic conduit. Make an electrical connection around 

the plastic connector (use pipe clamps and the heavy gauge 

wire or wire braid) to hold both sections at the same 

potential. 

– Ground the entire length of conduit by attaching it to the 

building earth ground. 

– Do not let the conduit touch the plug on the cable. 

– Arrange the cables loosely within the conduit. The conduit 

should contain only serial communication cables. 

– Install the conduit so that it meets all applicable codes and 

environmental specifications. 

For more information on planning cable routes, see Industrial 

Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines, publication Number 

1770-4.1. 

Software Considerations 

Software considerations include the configuration of the network and 

the parameters that can be set to the specific requirements of the 

network. The following are major configuration factors that have a 

significant effect on network performance: 

• number of nodes on the network 



• addresses of those nodes 

• baud rate 

The following sections explain network considerations and describe 

ways to select parameters for optimum network performance (speed). 

See your programming software’s user manual for more information. 

Number of Nodes 

The number of nodes on the network directly affects the data transfer 

time between nodes. Unnecessary nodes (such as a second 

programming terminal that is not being used) slow the data transfer 

rate. The maximum number of nodes on the network is 32. 

Setting Node Addresses 

The best network performance occurs when node addresses are 

assigned in sequential order. Initiators, such as personal computers, 

should be assigned the lowest numbered addresses to minimize the 

time required to initialize the network. The valid range for the 

MicroLogix 1100 controllers is 1-31 (controllers cannot be node 0). 

The default setting is 1. The node address is stored in the controller 

Communications Status file (CS0:5/0 to CS0:5/7). 

Setting Controller Baud Rate 

The best network performance occurs at the highest baud rate, which 

is 19200. This is the default baud rate for a MicroLogix 1100 device on 

the DH-485 network. All devices must be at the same baud rate. This 

rate is stored in the controller Communications Status file (CS0:5/8 to 

CS0:5/15). 

Setting Maximum Node Address 

Once you have an established network set up and are confident that 

you will not be adding more devices, you may enhance performance 

by adjusting the maximum node address of your controllers. It should 

be set to the highest node address being used. 

IMPORTANT 

All devices should be set to the same maximum node 

address. 

MicroLogix Remote Packet Support 

MicroLogix 1100 controllers can respond and initiate with 

communications (or commands) that do not originate on the local 



DH-485 network. This is useful in installations where communication 

is needed between DH-485 and DH+ networks. 

The example below shows how to send messages from a device on 

the DH+ network to a MicroLogix controller on the DH-485 network. 

This method uses an SLC 5/04 processor as the bridge connection. 

When using this method (as shown in the illustration below): 

• PLC-5 devices can send read and write commands to MicroLogix 

1100 controllers. 

• MicroLogix 1100 controllers can respond to MSG instructions 

received. 

• The MicroLogix 1100 controllers can initiate MSG instructions to 

devices on the DH+ network. 

• PC can send read and write commands to MicroLogix 1100 

controllers. 

• PC can do remote programming of MicroLogix 1100 controllers. 

TIP 

Use a 1763-NC01 Series A or later cable to connect 

a MicroLogix 1100 controller to a DH-485 network. 

You can connect a MicroLogix 1100 controller to 

your DH-485 network directly without using a 

RS-232 to RS-485 converter and optical isolator, such 

as the AIC+, catalog number 1761-NET-AIC, as 

shown in the illustration below, because Channel 0 

has isolation and RS-485 built-in. 


TERM 

A 

B 

COM 

SHLD 

CHS GND 

TX TX 

TX 

PWR 

DC SOURCE 

CABLE 

EXTERNAL 

TERM 

A 

B 

COM 

SHLD 

CHS GND 

TX TX 

TX 

PWR 

DC SOURCE 

CABLE 

EXTERNAL 

TERM 

A 

B 

COM 

SHLD 

CHS GND 

TX TX 

TX 

PWR 

DC SOURCE 

CABLE 

EXTERNAL 

TERM 

A 

B 

COM 

SHLD 

CHS GND 

TX TX 

TX 

PWR 

DC SOURCE 

CABLE 

EXTERNAL 

TERM 

A 

B 

COM 

SHLD 

CHS GND 

TX TX 

TX 

PWR 

DC SOURCE 

CABLE 

EXTERNAL 

TERM 

A 

B 

COM 

SHLD 

CHS GND 

TX TX 

TX 

PWR 

DC SOURCE 

CABLE 

EXTERNAL 


AIC+ 

AIC+ 

A-B 

PanelView 


SLC 5/04 

PanelView 550 


AIC+ 

MicroLogix 1000 MicroLogix 1100 MicroLogix 1200 MicroLogix 1500 

SLC 5/04 

DH+ Network 


SLC 5/04 

PLC-5 

Example DH-485 Connections 

The following network diagrams provide examples of how to connect 

MicroLogix 1100 controllers to the DH-485 network. You can connect 

a MicroLogix 1100 controller to your DH-485 network directly without 

using a RS-232 to RS-485 converter and optical isolator, such as the 


as shown in the illustrations below, because Channel 0 has isolation 

and RS-485 built-in. 

However, you may need to use an AIC+ to connect other controllers 

to a DH-485 network. For more information on the AIC+, see the 

Advanced Interface Converter and DeviceNet Interface Installation 

Instructions, Publication 1761-5.11. 


TERM 

A 

B 

COM 

SHLD 

CHS GND 

TX TX 

TX 

PWR 

DC SOURCE 

CABLE 

EXTERNAL 

ESC 

OK 

TERM 

A 

B 

COM 

SHLD 

CHS GND 

TX TX 

TX 

PWR 

DC SOURCE 

CABLE 

EXTERNAL 

TERM 

A 

B 

COM 

SHLD 

CHS GND 

TX TX 

TX 

PWR 

DC SOURCE 

CABLE 

EXTERNAL 

TERM 

A 

B 

COM 

SHLD 

CHS GND 

TX TX 

TX 

PWR 

DC SOURCE 

CABLE 

EXTERNAL 

TERM 

A 

B 

COM 

SHLD 

CHS GND 

TX TX 

TX 

PWR 

DC SOURCE 

CABLE 

EXTERNAL 

TERM 

A 

B 

COM 

SHLD 

CHS GND 

TX TX 

TX 

PWR 

DC SOURCE 

CABLE 

EXTERNAL 

TERM 

A 

B 

COM 

SHLD 

CHS GND 

TX TX 

TX 

PWR 

DC SOURCE 

CABLE 

EXTERNAL 


DH-485 Network with a MicroLogix 1100 Controller 

AIC+ 

AIC+ 

A-B 

PanelView 


SLC 5/04 

PanelView 550 


AIC+ 



Personal 

Computer 




Belden, shielded, twisted-pair cable (see table below) 

Belden, shielded, twisted-pair cable (see table below) 

1763-NC01 (4) 

ESC 

OK 

(3) 

(1) 

AIC+ 

(2) 

1761-CBL-AP00 

or 1761-CBL-PM02 

24V dc (user supplied) 

(1) DB-9 RS-232 port 


(3) RS-485 port 

(4) Series A or later cables are required. 

1747-CP3 

or 1761-CBL-AC00 

port 1 or port 2 

to PC 


TERM 

A 

B 

COM 

SHLD 

CHS GND 

TX TX 

TX 

PWR 

DC SOURCE 

CABLE 

EXTERNAL 


Typical 3-Node Network 

PanelView 550 A-B 

PanelView 


RJ45 port 

1761-CBL-AS09 

or 1761-CBL-AS03 

AIC+ 

1761-CBL-AM00 

or 1761-CBL-HM02 

1747-CP3 or 1761-CBL-AC00 

TIP 

This 3-node network is not expandable. 

Modbus Communication 

Protocol 

Modbus is a Half-Duplex, master-slave communications protocol. The 

Modbus network master reads and writes coils and registers. Modbus 

protocol allows a single master to communicate with a maximum of 

247 slave devices. MicroLogix 1100 controllers support Modbus RTU 

Master and Modbus RTU Slave protocol. 

For more information on configuring your MicroLogix 1100 controller 

for Modbus protocol, refer to the MicroLogix 1100 Programmable 

Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual, publication 1763-RM001. 

For more information about the Modbus protocol, see the Modbus 

Protocol Specifications (available from http://www.modbus.org). 

ASCII 

ASCII provides connection to other ASCII devices, such as bar code 

readers, weigh scales, serial printers, and other intelligent devices. 

You can use ASCII by configuring the RS-232/485 port, channel 0 for 

ASCII driver. Refer to the MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers 

Instruction Set Reference Manual, publication 1763-RM001 for detailed 

configuration information. 




Appendix F 

Connecting to Networks via Ethernet 

Interface 

This appendix: 

• describes MicroLogix 1100 controllers and Ethernet 

communication 

• describes MicroLogix 1100 performance considerations 

• describes Ethernet network connections and media 

• explains how the MicroLogix 1100 establishes node connections 

• lists Ethernet configuration parameters and procedures 

• describes configuration for subnet masks and gateways 


Controllers and Ethernet 

Communication 

Ethernet is a local area network that provides communication 

between various devices at 10 to 100 Mbps. The physical 

communication media options for the MicroLogix 1100 are: 

• built-in 

– twisted-pair (10/100Base-T) 

• with media converters or hubs 

– fiber optic 

– broadband 

– thick-wire coaxial cable (10Base-5) 

– thin-wire coaxial cable (10Base-2) 

See the following page for more information on Ethernet physical 

media. 


F-2 Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface 

The MicroLogix 1100 supports Ethernet communication via the 

Ethernet communication channel 1 shown in the drawing below. 

Side View 

Channel 1 

Ethernet 

(10/100Base-T) 

Channel 0 

RS-232/485 

(DH485, DF1, or ASCII) 


Performance 

Considerations 

Actual performance of an MicroLogix 1100 controller varies according 

to: 

• size of Ethernet messages 

• frequency of Ethernet messages 

• network loading 

• the implementation of and performance of your processor 

application program 

Optimal Performance: RSLinx to MicroLogix 1100 controller (2-node Ethernet 

network) 

Operation Words MSG per Second Words per Second 

Single Typed Read 1 20 20 

Single Typed Reads 20 20 400 


Optimal Performance: MicroLogix 1100 to MicroLogix 1100 controller (2-node 

Ethernet network) 

Operation Words MSG per Second Words per Second 

Single Typed Read 1 11 11 




Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface F-3 

MicroLogix 1100 and PC 

Connections to the Ethernet 

Network 

The MicroLogix 1100 Ethernet connector conforms to ISO/IEC 8802-3 

STD 802.3 and utilizes 10/100Base-T media. Connections are made 

directly from the MicroLogix 1100 to an Ethernet hub or switch. The 

network setup is simple and cost effective. Typical network topology 

is pictured below. 

Ethernet Network Topology 

Ethernet Hub or 

Switch 

RJ45 connectors on both ends 

of cable (10/100Base-T) 

to PC Ethernet Card 

to MicroLogix 1100 

Channel 1 

IMPORTANT 

The MicroLogix 1100 controller contains a 

10/100Base-T, RJ45 Ethernet connector which 

connects to standard Ethernet hubs or switchs via 

8-wire twisted-pair straight-through cable. To access 

other Ethernet mediums, use 10/100Base-T media 

converters or Ethernet hubs or switchs that can be 

connected together via fiber, thin-wire, or thick-wire 

coaxial cables, or any other physical media 

commercially available with Ethernet hubs or switchs. 

Cables 

Shielded and non-shielded twisted-pair 10/100Base-T cables with RJ45 

connectors are supported. The maximum cable length between an 

MicroLogix 1100 Ethernet port and a 10/100Base-T port on an 

Ethernet hub or switch (without repeaters or fiber) is 100 meters (323 

feet). However, in an industrial application, cable length should be 

kept to a minimum. 

Ethernet Connections 

TCP/IP is the mechanism used to transport Ethernet messages. On top 

of TCP, Ethernet/IP protocol is required to establish sessions and to 

send the MSG commands. Connections can be initiated by either a 

client program (RSLinx application) or a processor. 

The client program or processor must first establish a connection to 

the MicroLogix 1100 to enable the MicroLogix 1100 to receive solicited 

messages from a client program or another processor. 



In order to send an outgoing message, the MicroLogix 1100 must first 

establish a connection with the destination node at a specified IP 

address on the Ethernet network. A connection is established when a 

MSG instruction executes and no previous connection exists. 

When a MSG instruction executes, the MicroLogix 1100 checks to see 

whether a connection has been established with the destination node. 

If a connection has not been established, the MicroLogix 1100 

attempts to establish a connection of the peer type. 

In order to receive messages from another device on Ethernet, an 

“incoming” connection must be established. This incoming connection 

is made by the sending processor and uses one incoming connection 

in the receiving processor. 

The MicroLogix 1100 supports a maximum of 32 connections, 

allowing a maximum of 16 outgoing and a maximum of 16 incoming 

simultaneous connections with up to 32 other devices or applications. 

The connections are dedicated as follows: 

Number of Connections (1) 

Dedicated to: 

16 outgoing connections 

16 incoming connections 

(1) 

Connections established by an INTERCHANGE client, RSLinx client, and peers are all included when 

counting the number of connections. 

IMPORTANT 

For outgoing connections, no more that one 

connection per destination node is established. If 

multiple MSG instructions use the same destination 

node, they share the same connection. 

Configuring the Ethernet 

Channel on the MicroLogix 

1100 

There are two ways to configure the MicroLogix 1100 Ethernet 

channel 1. 

• via a BOOTP or DHCP request at controller powerup 

• manually setting the configuration parameters using RSLogix 500 

Programming Software 

The configuration parameters are shown on the following page, and 

the configuration procedures follow. 



Parameter Description Default Status 

MSG 

Connection 

Timeout 

MSG Reply 

Timeout 

IP Address 

Subnet Mask 

Gateway 

Address 

BOOTP Enable 

DHCP Enable 

Hardware 

Address 

The amount of time (in ms) allowed for a MSG instruction to establish a connection with the 

destination node. The MSG Connection Timeout has 250 ms resolution and a range from 250 

to 65,500. 

The amount of time (in ms) that the MicroLogix 1100 will wait for a reply to a command that 

it has initiated via a MSG instruction. The MSG Reply Timeout has 250 ms resolution and a 

range from 250 to 65,500. 

The MicroLogix 1100 internet address (in network byte order). The internet address must be 

specified to connect to the TCP/IP network. 

The MicroLogix 1100 subnet mask (in network byte order). The Subnet Mask is used to 

interpret IP addresses when the internet is divided into subnets. A Subnet Mask of all zeros 

indicates that no subnet mask has been configured. 

The address of a gateway (in network byte order) that provides connection to another IP 

network. A Gateway Address of all zeros indicates that no gateway has been configured. 

The BOOTP enable switch. When BOOTP is enabled, the MicroLogix 1100 attempts to learn 

its network related parameters at powerup via a BOOTP request. There must be a BOOTP 

server on the network capable of responding to this BOOTP request. When both BOOTP and 

DHCP are disabled, the MicroLogix 1100 uses the locally configured network related 

parameters (IP Address, Subnet Mask, Broadcast Address, etc.). 

The DHCP auto configuration enable switch. When DHCP is enabled, a DHCP server 

automatically assigns network related parameters to the MicroLogix 1100 when it logs into 

a TCP/IP network. There must be a DHCP server on the network capable of allocating 

network addresses and configuring parameters to newly attached device. When both 

BOOTP and DHCP are disabled, the MicroLogix 1100 uses the locally configured network 

related parameters (IP Address, Subnet Mask, Broadcast Address, etc.). 

The MicroLogix 1100 Ethernet hardware address. 

15,000 ms read/write 

3,000 ms read/write 

0 

(undefined) 

0 

(undefined) 

0 

(undefined) 

read/write 

read/write 

read/write 

1 (enabled) read/write 

0 (disabled) read/write 

Ethernet 

hardware 

address 

read only 

Configuration Using 

RSLogix 500 Programming 

Software 

Refer to the online documentation provided with your programming 

software. 

Configuration Via BOOTP 

BOOTP (bootstrap protocol) is a low-level protocol that TCP/IP nodes 

use to obtain start-up information. By default, the MicroLogix 1100 

broadcasts BOOTP requests at powerup. The BOOTP Valid parameter 

remains clear until a BOOTP reply has been received. BOOTP lets 

you dynamically assign IP Addresses to processors on the Ethernet 

Link. 

To use BOOTP, a BOOTP Server must exist on the local Ethernet 

subnet. The server is a computer that has BOOTP Server software 



installed and reads a text file containing network information for 

individual nodes on the network. 

The host system’s BOOTP configuration file must be updated to 

service requests from MicroLogix 1100 controllers. The following 

parameters must be configured: 

Parameter 

IP Address 

Subnet Mask 

Gateway 

Description 

A unique IP Address for the MicroLogix 1100 controller. 

Specifies the net and local subnet mask as per the standard on subnetting 

RFC 950, Internet Standard Subnetting Procedure. 

Specifies the IP address of a gateway on the same subnet as the 

MicroLogix 1100 that provides connections to another IP network. 

TIP 

You can use any commercially available BOOTP 

server. If you do not have BOOTP Server capabilities 

on your network, and you want to dynamically 

configure Channel 1, you can download the free 

Rockwell Automation BOOTP server from the 

Rockwell Automation website. Go to 

www.ab.com/networks/bootp/index.html 

When BOOTP is enabled, the following events occur at power-up: 

• The processor broadcasts a BOOTP-request message containing 

its hardware address over the local network or subnet. 

• The BOOTP server compares the hardware address with the 

addresses in its look-up table. 

• The BOOTP server sends a message back to the processor with 

the IP address and other network information that corresponds 

to the hardware address it received. 

With all hardware and IP addresses in one location, you can easily 

change IP addresses in the BOOTP configuration file if your network 

needs to be changed. 

The BOOTP request can be disabled by clearing the BOOTP Enable 

parameter in the channel configuration file. When both BOOTP 

Enable and DHCP are cleared (disabled), the MicroLogix 1100 uses 

the existing channel configuration data. 

IMPORTANT 

If BOOTP is disabled, or no BOOTP server exists on 

the network, you must use RSLogix 500 programming 

software to enter/change the IP address for each 

processor or you must use DHCP instead of it. 



Using the Rockwell BOOTP/DHCP Utility 

The Rockwell BOOTP/DHCP server utility is a standalone program 

that incorporates the functionality of standard BOOTP software with a 

user-friendly graphical interface. It is located in the Utils directory on 

the 

RSLogix 500 installation CD. 

The newest version of the utility can be downloaded from 

www.ab.com/networks/bootp/index.html web page. The device 

must have BOOTP enabled (factory default) or DHCP enabled to use 

the utility. 

To configure your device using the BOOTP utility, perform the 

following steps: 

1. Run the BOOTP/DHCP server utility software. It will ask you to 

configure your network settings before using the BOOTP/DHCP 

server tool. Enter your Ethernet settings for Subnet Mask and 

Gateway. If you are not sure about it, get a help from your 

system administrator. Just leave Primary DNS, Secondary DNS, 

and Domain Name (If corresponding information is allocated to 

the PC where BOOTP/DHCP server utility is installed, enter the 

same information.) 



2. In the Request History panel you will see the hardware 

addresses of devices issuing BOOTP or DHCP requests. 

3. Double-click on the hardware address of the device you want to 

configure. You will see the New Entry pop-up window with the 

device's Ethernet Address (MAC). 

4. Enter the IP Address and Description you want to assign to 

the device, and click OK. Leave Hostname blank. 



The device will be added to the Relation List, displaying the 

Ethernet Address (MAC) and corresponding IP Address, Subnet 

Mask, and Gateway (if applicable). 

Using a DHCP Server To 

Configure Your Processor 

A DHCP server automatically assigns IP addresses to client stations 

logging onto a TCP/IP network. DHCP is based on BOOTP and 

maintains some backward compatibility. The main difference is that 

BOOTP was designed for manual configuration, while DHCP allows 

for dynamic allocation of network addresses and configurations to 

newly attached devices. 

ATTENTION 

The processor must be assigned a fixed network 

address. The IP address of the processor must not be 

dynamically provided. Failure to observe this 

precaution may result in unintended machine 

motion or loss of process control. 

Using Subnet Masks and 

Gateways 

Configure subnet masks and gateways using the Ethernet channel 1 

configuration screen. 

IMPORTANT 

If BOOTP is enabled, you can’t change any of the 

advanced Ethernet communications characteristics. 



If your network is divided into subnetworks that use gateways or 

routers, you must indicate the following information when configuring 

channel 1: 

• subnet mask 

• gateway address 

A subnet mask is a filter that a node applies to IP addresses to 

determine if an address is on the local subnet or on another subnet. If 

an address is located on another subnetwork, messages are routed 

through a local gateway to be transferred to the destination 

subnetwork. 

If your network is not divided into subnets, then leave the subnet 

mask field at the default. 

If you are 

manually configuring channel 1 

and have a network with subnets 

using BOOTP to configure channel 

1 and have a network with 

subnets 

Then 

• be sure the BOOTP enable field is disabled 

• use your programming software to enter the 

subnet mask and gateway address. 

• be sure BOOTP is enabled 

• include the subnet mask(s) and gateway 

address(es) 



Manually Configuring Channel 1 for Controllers on Subnets 

If you are manually configuring channel 1 for a MicroLogix 1100 

controller located on a subnet, deselect both of the “BOOTP Enable” 

and “DHCP Enable” options by clicking on the checked box, as 

shown in the figure below. 

See the table below to configure the subnet mask and gateway 

address fields for each controller via your programming software. 

This field: Specifies: Configure by doing the following: 

Subnet Mask The controller’s subnet mask. 

Enter an address of the following form: 

Gateway Address 

The subnet mask is used to interpret IP 

addresses when the internet is divided 

into subnets. 

The IP address of the gateway that 

provides a connection to another IP 

network. 

This field is required when you 

communicate with other devices not on a 

local subnet. 

a.b.c.d Where: a, b, c, d are between 0 to 255 (decimal) 

If your network is not divided into subnets, then leave the subnet mask 

field at the default. If you change the default and need to reset it, type 

0.0.0.0. 

Enter an address of the following form: 

a.b.c.d Where: a, b, c, d are between 0 to 255 (decimal) 

The default address is No Gateway. 



MicroLogix 1100 Embedded 

Web Server Capability 

MicroLogix 1100 controllers include not only the embedded web 

server which allows viewing of module information, TCP/IP 

configuration, and diagnostic information, but the capabilities that also 

allow viewing of the data file via Ethernet using a standard web 

browser. 

For more information on MicroLogix 1100 embedded web server 

capability, refer to the MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers 

Embedded Web Server User Manual, publication number 1763-UM002. 


Appendix G 

System Loading and Heat Dissipation 

at 

TIP 

A maximum of four 1762 I/O modules, in any 

combination, can be connected to a MicroLogix 1100 

controller. You can use this appendix to determine the 

power supply load and heat dissipation for your 

system. 

System Loading 

Calculations 

The MicroLogix 1100 controller is designed to support up to any four 

1762 expansion I/O modules. 

When you connect MicroLogix accessories and expansion I/O, an 

electrical load is placed on the controller power supply. This section 

shows how to calculate the load of your control system. 

The following example is provided to illustrate system loading 

calculation. The system calculation procedure accounts for the amount 

of 5V dc and 24V dc current consumed by controller, expansion I/O, 

and user-supplied equipment. Use the System Loading Worksheet on 

page G-4 to calculate your controller configuration. 


G-2 System Loading and Heat Dissipation 

System Loading Example Calculations 

Current Loading 

Table G.1 Calculating the Current for Expansion I/O 

Catalog Number (1) n A B n x A n x B 

Number of 

Modules 

Device Current Requirements 

(max) 

Calculated Current 

at 5V dc (mA) at 24V dc (mA) at 5V dc (mA) at 24V dc (mA) 

1762-IA8 2 50 0 100 0 

1762-IF4 40 50 

1762-IF2OF2 40 105 

1762-IQ8 50 0 

1762-IQ16 60 0 

1762-IR4 40 50 

1762-IT4 40 50 

1762-OA8 115 0 

1762-OB8 115 0 

1762-OB16 175 0 

1762-OF4 40 165 

1762-OW8 2 80 90 160 180 

1762-OW16 120 140 

1762-OX6I 110 110 

Total Modules (4 maximum): 4 Subtotal: 260 180 

(1) Refer to your expansion I/O Installation Instructions for Current Requirements not listed in this table. 


System Loading and Heat Dissipation G-3 

Validating the System 

The example systems shown in the tables below are verified to be 

acceptable configurations. The systems are valid because: 

• Calculated Current Values < Maximum Allowable Current 

Values 

• Calculated System Loading < Maximum Allowable System 

Loading 

Table G.2 Validating Systems using 1763-L16AWA or 1763-L16BBB 

Maximum Allowable Values 

Calculated Values 

Current: 

Current (Subtotal from Table G.1on page G-2.): 

800 mA at 5V dc 700 mA at 24V dc 0 mA + 260 mA = 260 mA at 5V dc 120 mA + 180 mA = 300 mA at 24V dc 

System Loading: 


= (260 mA x 5V) + (300 mA x 24V) 

= (1300 mW) + (7200 mW) 

= 8500 mW 

20.8 Watts 

= 8.50 Watts 

Table G.3 Validating Systems using 1763-L16BWA 



Current for Devices Connected to the +24V dc 

Sensor Supply: 

Sum of all sensor currents 

200 mA at 24V dc 140 mA at 24V dc (example sensor value) 

Current for MicroLogix Accessories and 

Expansion I/O: 

Current Values (Subtotal from Table G.1): 

800 mA at 5V dc 700 mA at 24V dc 0 mA + 260 mA = 260 mA at 5V dc 120 mA + 180 mA = 300 mA at 24V dc 



= (140 mA x 24V) + (260 mA x 5V) + (300 mA x 24V) 

= (3360 mW) + (1300 mW) + (7200 mW) 

= 11,860 mW 

16.4 Watts 

= 11.9 Watts 



System Loading Worksheet 

The tables below are provided for system loading validation. See 

System Loading Example Calculations on page G-2. 

Current Loading 

Table G.4 Calculating the Current for Expansion I/O 

Catalog Number (1) n A B n x A n x B 

Number of Device Current Requirements Calculated Current 

Modules 

at 5V dc (mA) at 24V dc (mA) at 5V dc (mA) at 24V dc (mA) 

1762-IA8 50 0 

1762-IF4 40 50 

1762-IF2OF2 40 105 

1762-IQ8 50 0 

1762-IQ16 60 0 

1762-IR4 40 50 

1762-IT4 40 50 

1762-OA8 115 0 

1762-OB8 115 0 

1762-OB16 175 0 

1762-OF4 40 165 

1762-OW8 80 90 

1762-OW16 120 140 

1762-OX6I 110 110 

Total Modules (4 maximum): 

Subtotal: 

(1) Refer to your expansion I/O Installation Instructions for Current Requirements not listed in this table. 


System Loading and Heat Dissipation G-5 

Table G.5 Validating Systems using 1763-L16AWA or 1763-L16BBB 



Current: 

Current (Subtotal from Table G.4.): 

800 mA at 5V dc 700 mA at 24V dc mA at 5V dc mA at 24V dc 



= (________ mA x 5V) + (________ mA x 24V) 

= __________ mW + __________ mW 

= __________ mW 

20.8 Watts 

= __________ W 

Table G.6 Validating Systems using 1763-L16BWA 


Current for Devices Connected to the +24V dc Sensor 

Supply: 


Sum of all sensor currents 

200 mA at 24V dc mA at 24V dc 

Current for MicroLogix Accessories and Expansion I/O: 

Current (Subtotal from Table G.4.) 

800 mA at 5V dc 700 mA at 24V dc mA at 5 V dc mA at 24V dc 



= (________ mA x 24V) + (________ mA x 5V) + (________ mA x 24V) 

= __________ mW + __________ mW + __________ mW 

= __________ mW 

16.4 Watts 

= __________ W 



Calculating Heat 

Dissipation 

Use the following table when you need to determine the heat 

dissipation of your system for installation in an enclosure. For System 

Loading, take the value from the appropriate system loading 

worksheets on pages G-4 or G-5. 

Table G.7 Heat Dissipation 



Equation or Constant Calculation Sub-Total 

1763-L16AWA 15.2W + (0.4 x System Loading) 15.2W + (0.4 x ______ W) W 

1763-L16BWA 15.7W + (0.4 x System Loading) 15.7W + (0.4 x ______ W) W 

1763-L16BBB 17.0W + (0.3 x System Loading) 17.0W + (0.3 x ______ W) W 

1762-IA8 2.0W x number of modules 2.0W x _________ W 

1762-IF4 2.0W x number of modules 2.0W x _________ W 

1762-IF2OF2 2.6W x number of modules 2.6W x _________ W 

1762-IQ8 3.7W x number of modules 3.7W x _________ W 

1762-IQ16 5.3W x number of modules 5.3W x _________ W 

1762-IR4 1.5W x number of modules 1.5W x _________ W 

1762-IT4 1.5W x number of modules 1.5W x _________ W 

1762-OA8 2.9W x number of modules 2.9W x _________ W 

1762-OB8 1.6W x number of modules 1.6W x _________ W 

1762-OB16 2.9W x number of modules 2.9W x _________ W 

1762-OF4 3.8W x number of modules 3.8W x _________ W 

1762-OW8 2.9W x number of modules 2.9W x _________ W 

1762-OW16 5.6W x number of modules 5.6W x _________ W 

1762-OX6I 2.8W x number of modules 2.8W x _________ W 

Add Sub-Totals to determine Heat Dissipation 

W 


Glossary 

The following terms are used throughout this manual. Refer to the 

Allen-Bradley Industrial Automation Glossary, Publication Number 

AG-7.1, for a complete guide to Allen-Bradley technical terms. 

address 

A character string that uniquely identifies a memory location. For 

example, I:1/0 is the memory address for the data located in the Input 

file location word1, bit 0. 

AIC+ Advanced Interface Converter 

A device that provides a communication link between various 

networked devices. (Catalog Number 1761-NET-AIC.) 

application 

1) A machine or process monitored and controlled by a controller. 

2) The use of computer- or processor-based routines for specific 

purposes. 

baud rate 

The speed of communication between devices. All devices must 

communicate at the same baud rate on a network. 

bit 

The smallest storage location in memory that contains either a 1 (ON) 

or a 0 (OFF). 

block diagrams 

A schematic drawing. 

Boolean operators 

Logical operators such as AND, OR, NAND, NOR, NOT, and 

Exclusive-OR that can be used singularly or in combination to form 

logic statements or circuits. Can have an output response of T or F. 

branch 

A parallel logic path within a rung of a ladder program. 

communication scan 

A part of the controller’s operating cycle. Communication with other 

devices, such as software running on a personal computer, takes 

place. 


Glossary 2 

controller 

A device, such as a programmable controller, used to monitor input 

devices and control output devices. 

controller overhead 

An internal portion of the operating cycle used for housekeeping and 

set-up purposes. 

control profile 

The means by which a controller determines which outputs turn on 

under what conditions. 

counter 

1) An electro-mechanical relay-type device that counts the occurrence 

of some event. May be pulses developed from operations such as 

switch closures or interruptions of light beams. 

2) In controllers, a software counter eliminates the need for hardware 

counters. The software counter can be given a preset count value to 

count up or down whenever the counted event occurs. 

CPU (Central Processing Unit) 

The decision-making and data storage section of a programmable 

controller. 

data table 

The part of processor memory that contains I/O values and files 

where data is monitored, manipulated, and changed for control 

purposes. 

DIN rail 

Manufactured according to Deutsche Industrie Normenausshus (DIN) 

standards, a metal railing designed to ease installation and mounting 

of your controller. 

download 

Data is transferred from a programming or storage device to another 

device. 

DTE (Data Terminal Equipment) 

Equipment that is attached to a network to send or receive data, or 

both. 


Glossary 3 

embedded I/O 

Embedded I/O is the controller’s on-board I/O. 

EMI 

Electromagnetic interference. 

encoder 

1) A rotary device that transmits position information. 

2) A device that transmits a fixed number of pulses for each 

revolution. 

executing mode 

Any run or test mode. 

expansion I/O 

Expansion I/O is I/O that is connected to the controller via a bus or 

cable. MicroLogix 1200 controllers use Bulletin 1762 expansion I/O. 

false 

The status of an instruction that does not provide a continuous logical 

path on a ladder rung. 

FIFO (First-In-First-Out) 

The order that data is entered into and retrieved from a file. 

file 

A collection of information organized into one group. 

full-duplex 

A bidirectional mode of communication where data may be 

transmitted and received simultaneously (contrast with half-duplex). 

half-duplex 

A communication link in which data transmission is limited to one 

direction at a time. 

hard disk 

A storage area in a personal computer that may be used to save 

processor files and reports for future use. 


Glossary 4 

high byte 

Bits 8 to 15 of a word. 

input device 

A device, such as a push button or a switch, that supplies signals to 

the input circuits of the controller. 

inrush current 

The temporary surge current produced when a device or circuit is 

initially energized. 

instruction 

A mnemonic and data address defining an operation to be performed 

by the processor. A rung in a program consists of a set of input and 

output instructions. The input instructions are evaluated by the 

controller as being true or false. In turn, the controller sets the output 

instructions to true or false. 

instruction set 

The set of general purpose instructions available with a given 

controller. 

I/O (Inputs and Outputs) 

Consists of input and output devices that provide and/or receive data 

from the controller. 

jump 

Change in normal sequence of program execution, by executing an 

instruction that alters the program counter (sometimes called a 

branch). In ladder programs a JUMP (JMP) instruction causes 

execution to jump to a labeled rung. 

ladder logic 

A program written in a format resembling a ladder-like diagram. The 

program is used by a programmable controller to control devices. 

least significant bit (LSB) 

The digit (or bit) in a binary word (code) that carries the smallest 

value of weight. 


Glossary 5 

LED (Light Emitting Diode) 

Used as status indicator for processor functions and inputs and 

outputs. 

LIFO (Last-In-First-Out) 

The order that data is entered into and retrieved from a file. 

low byte 

Bits 0 to 7 of a word. 

logic 

A process of solving complex problems through the repeated use of 

simple functions that can be either true or false. General term for 

digital circuits and programmed instructions to perform required 

decision making and computational functions. 


A mandatory hard-wired relay that can be de-energized by any 

series-connected emergency stop switch. Whenever the MCR is 

de-energized, its contacts open to de-energize all application I/O 

devices. 

mnemonic 

A simple and easy to remember term that is used to represent a 

complex or lengthy set of information. 

modem 

Modulator/demodulator. Equipment that connects data terminal 

equipment to a communication line. 

modes 

Selected methods of operation. Example: run, test, or program. 

negative logic 

The use of binary logic in such a way that “0” represents the voltage 

level normally associated with logic 1 (for example, 0 = +5V, 1 = 0V). 

Positive is more conventional (for example, 1 = +5V, 0 = 0V). 


Glossary 6 

network 

A series of stations (nodes) connected by some type of 

communication medium. A network may be made up of a single link 

or multiple links. 

nominal input current 

The current at nominal input voltage. 

normally closed 

Contacts on a relay or switch that are closed when the relay is 

de-energized or the switch is deactivated; they are open when the 

relay is energized or the switch is activated. In ladder programming, a 

symbol that allows logic continuity (flow) if the referenced input is 

logic “0” when evaluated. 

normally open 

Contacts on a relay or switch that are open when the relay is 

de-energized or the switch is deactivated. (They are closed when the 

relay is energized or the switch is activated.) In ladder programming, a 

symbol that allows logic continuity (flow) if the referenced input is 

logic “1” when evaluated. 

off-delay time 

The OFF delay time is a measure of the time required for the 

controller logic to recognize that a signal has been removed from the 

input terminal of the controller. The time is determined by circuit 

component delays and by any filter adjustment applied. 

offline 

Describes devices not under direct communication. 

offset 

The steady-state deviation of a controlled variable from a fixed point. 

off-state leakage current 

When an ideal mechanical switch is opened (off-state) no current 

flows through the switch. Practical semiconductor switches, and the 

transient suppression components which are sometimes used to 

protect switches, allow a small current to flow when the switch is in 

the off state. This current is referred to as the off-state leakage current. 

To ensure reliable operation, the off-state leakage current rating of a 


Glossary 7 

switch should be less than the minimum operating current rating of 

the load that is connected to the switch. 

on-delay time 

The ON delay time is a measure of the time required for the controller 

logic to recognize that a signal has been presented at the input 

terminal of the controller. 

one-shot 

A programming technique that sets a bit for only one program scan. 

online 

Describes devices under direct communication. For example, when 

RSLogix 500 is monitoring the program file in a controller. 

operating voltage 

For inputs, the voltage range needed for the input to be in the On 

state. For outputs, the allowable range of user-supplied voltage. 

output device 

A device, such as a pilot light or a motor starter coil, that is controlled 

by the controller. 

processor 

A Central Processing Unit. (See CPU.) 

processor file 

The set of program and data files used by the controller to control 

output devices. Only one processor file may be stored in the 

controller at a time. 

program file 

The area within a processor file that contains the ladder logic 

program. 

program mode 

When the controller is not executing the processor file and all outputs 

are de-energized. 


Glossary 8 

program scan 

A part of the controller’s operating cycle. During the scan the ladder 

program is executed and the output data file is updated based on the 

program and the input data file. 

programming device 

Executable programming package used to develop ladder diagrams. 

protocol 

The packaging of information that is transmitted across a network. 

read 

To acquire data from a storage place. For example, the processor 

READs information from the input data file to solve the ladder 

program. 

relay 

An electrically operated device that mechanically switches electrical 

circuits. 

relay logic 

A representation of the program or other logic in a form normally 

used for relays. 

restore 

To download (transfer) a program from a personal computer to a 

controller. 

reserved bit 

A status file location that the user should not read or write to. 

retentive data 

Information associated with data files (timers, counters, inputs, and 

outputs) in a program that is preserved through power cycles. 

RS-232 

An EIA standard that specifies electrical, mechanical, and functional 

characteristics for serial binary communication circuits. A single-ended 

serial communication interface. 


Glossary 9 

run mode 

This is an executing mode during which the controller scans or 

executes the ladder program, monitors input devices, energizes output 

devices, and acts on enabled I/O forces. 

rung 

Ladder logic is comprised of a set of rungs. A rung contains input and 

output instructions. During Run mode, the inputs on a rung are 

evaluated to be true or false. If a path of true logic exists, the outputs 

are made true. If all paths are false, the outputs are made false. 

save 

To upload (transfer) a program stored in memory from a controller to 

a personal computer; OR to save a program to a computer hard disk. 

scan time 

The time required for the controller to execute the instructions in the 

program. The scan time may vary depending on the instructions and 

each instruction’s status during the scan. 

sinking 

A term used to describe current flow between an I/O device and 

controller I/O circuit — typically, a sinking device or circuit provides a 

path to ground, low, or negative side of power supply. 

sourcing 

A term used to describe current flow between an I/O device and 

controller I/O circuit — typically, a sourcing device or circuit provides 

a path to the source, high, or positive side of power supply. 

status 

The condition of a circuit or system, represented as logic 0 (OFF) or 1 

(ON). 

terminal 

A point on an I/O module that external I/O devices, such as a push 

button or pilot light, are wired to. 

throughput 

The time between when an input turns on and the corresponding 

output turns on. 


Glossary 10 

true 

The status of an instruction that provides a continuous logical path on 

a ladder rung. 

upload 

Data is transferred to a programming or storage device from another 

device. 

watchdog timer 

A timer that monitors a cyclical process and is cleared at the 

conclusion of each cycle. If the watchdog runs past its programmed 

time period, it causes a fault. 

workspace 

The main storage available for programs and data and allocated for 

working storage. 

write 

To copy data to a storage device. For example, the processor WRITEs 

the information from the output data file to the output modules. 


Index 

Numerics 

1762-24AWA wiring diagram 3-10 

1762-IA8 wiring diagram 3-15 

1762-IF2OF2 

input type selection 3-20 

output type selection 3-20 

terminal block layout 3-21 

wiring 3-21 

1762-IF4 

input type selection 3-22 

terminal block layout 3-23 

1762-IQ16 wiring diagram 3-16 


1762-OA8 wiring diagram 3-16 

1762-OB16 wiring diagram 3-17 


1762-OW16 wiring diagram 3-18 


1762-OX6I wiring diagram 3-19 

5/05 processors 

Ethernet communications F-1 

A 

address G-1 

Advanced Interface Converter. See AIC+ 

agency certifications 2-1 

AIC+ 

applying power to 4-25 

attaching to the network 4-24 

connecting 4-19 

definition G-1 

installing 4-24 

recommended user supplied components 

4-22 

safety consideration 4-24 

selecting cable 4-21 

analog channel wiring guidelines 3-12 

analog expansion I/O C-6 

diagnostics C-6 

module operation vs. channel operation 

C-6 

power-up diagnostics C-6 

system wiring guidelines 3-19 

troubleshooting C-6 

analog inputs 

analog channel wiring guidelines 3-12 

application G-1 

B 

battery 6-2 

processor battery life expectancy B-2 

processor replacement battery B-2 

baud rate G-1 

bit G-1 

block diagrams G-1 

Boolean operators G-1 

BOOTP 

configuring SLC 5/05 F-5–F-9 

using the Rockwell Utility F-7 

branch G-1 

Buttons 5-6 

C 

cable pinout 

MicroLogix 1100 Channel 0 to modem 

cable 4-10 

cables 

planning routes for DH485 connections 

E-9 

selection guide for the AIC+ 4-21 

selection guide for the DeviceNet 

network 4-27 

calling for assistance C-10 

CE mark 2-1, 2-2 

common mode rejection ratio 

specification A-18 

common techniques used in this manual 

P-2 

communication 

DeviceNet 4-27, 4-28 

Ethernet 4-28 

communication connections 4-1 

communication options 1-6 

communication protocols 

DF1 Full-Duplex E-1 

DF1 Half-Duplex E-2 

DH485 E-7 

Ethernet F-1 

Modbus E-15 

communication scan G-1 

communications toggle push button 

using 4-2 

component descriptions 1-2 

1762 expansion I/O 1-3 

communication cables 1-4 

memory module 1-2 

real-time clock 1-2 

configuration errors C-8 

connecting expansion I/O 2-22 

connecting the system 

AIC+ 4-19, 4-24 


2 Index 

DeviceNet network 4-27, 4-28 

DF1 Full-Duplex protocol 4-7 

DF1 isolated point-to-point connection 

4-8 

DH485 network 4-14 

connecting to DF1 Half-Duplex network 

4-11 

contactors (bulletin 100), surge 

suppressors for 3-5 

control profile G-2 

ControlFlash 

missing/corrupt OS LED pattern D-3 

sequence of operation D-2 

using D-1 

controller G-2 

grounding 3-6 

I/O wiring 3-12 

installation 2-1 

LED status error conditions C-3 

LED status normal operation C-3 

minimizing electrical noise 3-12 

mounting 2-17 

mounting dimensions 2-16 

mounting on DIN rail 2-18 

mounting on panel 2-19 

preventing excessive heat 2-8 

status indicators C-1 

controller overhead G-2 

controller spacing 2-16 

counter G-2 

CPU (Central Processing Unit) G-2 

Cursor display 5-7 

D 

data table G-2 

default communication configuration 

4-2 

DeviceNet Communications 4-27, 4-28 

DeviceNet network 

connecting 4-27, 4-28 

selecting cable 4-27 

DF1 Full-Duplex protocol 

connecting 4-7, 4-8 

description E-1 

example system configuration E-2 

using a modem 4-9, E-5 

DF1 Half-Duplex protocol 

description E-2 

DH485 communication protocol 

configuration parameters 4-14, E-7 

DH485 network 

configuration parameters E-10 

connecting 4-14 

devices that use the network E-8 

example system configuration E-13 

installation 4-16 

planning considerations E-9 

DIN rail G-2 

disconnecting main power 2-4 

download G-2 

DTE (Data Terminal Equipment) G-2 

E 

Electronics Industries Association (EIA) 

E-1 

EMC Directive 2-2 

EMI G-3 

encoder G-3 

error recovery model C-5 

errors 

configuration C-8 

critical C-7 

extended error information field C-8 

hardware C-8 

module error field C-8 

non-critical C-7 

Ethernet 

advanced functions F-9 

messaging F-2 

processor performance F-2 

using the SLC 5/05 processors F-1 

European Union Directive compliance 

2-1 

EMC Directive 2-2 

low voltage directive 2-2 

executing mode G-3 

expansion I/O 

1762-IF2OF2 input type selection 3-20 

1762-IF2OF2 output type selection 3-20 

expansion I/O mounting 2-20, 2-21 

mounting on DIN rail 2-20 

expansion I/O wiring 3-15 

1762-IA8 wiring diagram 3-15 

1762-IF2OF2 wiring 3-21 

1762-IF4 terminal block layout 3-23 



1762-OA8 wiring diagram 3-16 






Index 3 

1762-OX6I wiring diagram 3-19 

analog wiring guidelines 3-19 

extended error information field C-8 

F 

false G-3 

FIFO (First-In-First-Out) G-3 

file G-3 

Full-Duplex 4-8 

full-duplex G-3 

G 

general considerations 2-2 

grounding the controller 3-6 

H 

Half-Duplex 4-12, G-3 

hard disk G-3 

hardware errors C-8 

hardware features 1-1 

heat dissipation 

calculating G-6 

heat protection 2-8 

high byte G-4 

I 

I/O (Inputs and Outputs) G-4 

input device G-4 

input states on power down 2-7 

inrush current G-4 

installing 

ControlFlash software D-1 

memory module 2-13 

your controller 2-1 

instruction G-4 

instruction set G-4 

isolated link coupler 

installing 4-16 

isolation transformers 

power considerations 2-6 

J 

jump G-4 

L 

ladder logic G-4 

least significant bit (LSB) G-4 

LED (Light Emitting Diode) G-5 

LIFO (Last-In-First-Out) G-5 

lithium battery (1747-BA) 

disposing B-5 

handling B-3 

installing B-2 

manufacturer B-5 

storing B-3 

transporting B-3 

logic G-5 

low byte G-5 

M 

manuals 

related P-2 

master control relay 2-9 

emergency-stop switches 2-10 

using ANSI/CSA symbols schematic 

2-12 

using IEC symbols schematic 2-11 

Master Control Relay (MCR) G-5 

master control relay circuit 

periodic tests 2-5 

memory module 

data file protection 6-4 

operation 6-3 

program compare 6-3 

program/data/recipe backup 6-3 

removal/installation under power 6-4 

write protection 6-4 

Menu structure 5-2 

minimizing electrical noise 3-12 

mnemonic G-5 

Modbus communication protocol E-15 

modem G-5 

modems 

using with MicroLogix controllers E-5 

modes G-5 

module error field C-8 

motor starters (bulletin 509) 

surge suppressors 3-5 

motor starters (bulletin 709) 

surge suppressors 3-5 

N 

negative logic G-5 

network G-6 

nominal input current G-6 

normally closed G-6 


4 Index 

normally open G-6 

O 

offline G-6 

Offline Editing 7-2 

offset G-6 

off-state leakage current G-6 

one-shot G-7 

online G-7 


Terms 7-2 

Operating buttons 5-6 

operating voltage G-7 

output device G-7 

P 

performance 

Ethernet processor F-2 

planning considerations for a network 

E-9 

power considerations 

input states on power down 2-7 

isolation transformers 2-6 

loss of power source 2-6 

other line conditions 2-7 

overview 2-6 

power supply inrush 2-6 

power distribution 2-5 

power source 

loss of 2-6 

power supply inrush 

power considerations 2-6 

preparing for upgrade D-1 

preventing excessive heat 2-8 

processor G-7 

processor file G-7 

program file G-7 

program mode G-7 

program scan G-8 

programming 1-5 

programming device G-8 

protocol G-8 

publications 

related P-2 

purpose of this manual P-1 

R 

read G-8 

real-time clock 

battery operation 6-2 

operation 6-1 

removal/installation under power 6-1 

writing data 6-2 

related documentation P-2 

related publications P-2 

relay G-8 

relay logic G-8 

relays 

surge suppressors for 3-5 

remote packet support E-11 

replacement battery B-2 

disposing B-5 

handling B-3 

installing B-2 

storing B-3 

transporting B-3 

replacement kits B-1 

replacement parts B-1 

reserved bit G-8 

restore G-8 

retentive data G-8 

RS-232 G-8 

RS-232 communication interface E-1 

run mode G-9 

rung G-9 

S 

safety circuits 2-5 

safety considerations 2-3 

disconnecting main power 2-4 

hazardous location 2-3 

master control relay circuit 

periodic tests 2-5 

periodic tests of master control relay 

circuit 2-5 

power distribution 2-5 

safety circuits 2-5 

save G-9 

scan time G-9 

sinking G-9 

sinking and sourcing wiring diagrams 

3-9 

sinking wiring diagram 

1762-24BWA 3-10 

sourcing G-9 

sourcing wiring diagram 

1762-24BWA 3-10, 3-11 

specifications A-1 


Index 5 

status G-9 

surge suppressors 

for contactor 3-5 

for motor starters 3-5 

for relays 3-5 

recommended 3-5 

using 3-3 

system configuration 

DF1 Full-Duplex examples E-2 

DH485 connection examples E-13 

system loading 

example calculations G-2 

limitations G-1 

worksheet G-4 

system loading and heat dissipation G-1 

T 

terminal G-9 

terminal block layouts 

1762-IF2OF2 3-21 

1762-IF4 3-23 

controllers 3-7 

terminal groupings 3-8 

terminal groupings 3-8 

throughput G-9 

Trim Pot Information Function File 5-36 

trim pot operation 5-36 

trim pots 5-36 

changing values 5-36 

error conditions 5-38 

location 5-36 

troubleshooting C-1 

true G-10 

U 

upload G-10 

using communications toggle 

functionality 4-2 

using communications toggle push 

button 4-2 

using emergency-stop switches 2-10 

using memory modules 6-1 

using real-time clock 6-1 

using trim pots 5-36 

W 

wiring diagram 

1762-IA8 3-15 

1762-IF2OF2 differential sensor 3-21 

1762-IF2OF2 single-ended sensor 3-22 

1762-IQ16 3-16 

1762-IQ8 3-15 

1762-L24BXB output 3-11 

1762-OA8 3-16 

1762-OB16 3-17 

1762-OB8 3-17 

1762-OW16 3-18 

1762-OW8 3-18 

1762-OX6I 3-19 

1763-L16AWAE input 3-10 

1763-L16AWAE output 3-11 

1763-L16BBBE sinking 3-11 

1763-L16BBBE sourcing 3-11 

1763-L16BWAE output 3-11 

1763-L16BWAE sinking 3-10 

1763-L16BWAE sourcing 3-10 

terminal block layouts 3-7, 3-21, 3-23 

wiring diagrams 3-7 

wiring recommendation 3-1 

wiring your controller 3-1 

workspace G-10 

write G-10 


6 Index 


Rockwell Automation 

Support 

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the web to assist you 

in using our products. At http://support.rockwellautomation.com, you can 

find technical manuals, a knowledge base of FAQs, technical and application 

notes, sample code and links to software service packs, and a MySupport 

feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools. 

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation, 

configuration and troubleshooting, we offer TechConnect Support programs. 

For more information, contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation 

representative, or visit http://support.rockwellautomation.com. 

Installation Assistance 

If you experience a problem with a hardware module within the first 24 

hours of installation, please review the information that's contained in this 

manual. You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial 

help in getting your module up and running: 

United States 1.440.646.3223 

Monday – Friday, 8am – 5pm EST 

Outside United 

States 

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any 

technical support issues. 

New Product Satisfaction Return 

Rockwell tests all of our products to ensure that they are fully operational 

when shipped from the manufacturing facility. However, if your product is 

not functioning and needs to be returned: 

United States 

Outside United 

States 

Contact your distributor. You must provide a Customer Support case 

number (see phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in 

order to complete the return process. 

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for 

return procedure. 

PLC-5 is a registered trademark; and MicroLogix, SLC 500, RSLogix, and RSLinx are trademarks of Rockwell 

Automation. 

Modbus is a trademark of SChneider Electric Incorporated. 

DeviceNet is a trademark of Open DeviceNet Vendor Association (ODVA). 

Belden is a trademark of Belden Incorporated. 

Publication 1763-UM001A-EN-P - August 2005 9 PN 40072-125-01(1) 

Copyright © 2005 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in the U.S.A.

Installation Instructions 


Catalog Number(s) 1766-L32BWA, 1766-L32AWA, 

1766-L32BXB, 1766-L32BWAA, 1766-L32AWAA, 

1766-L32BXBA 

http://literature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/in/1 

766-in001_-mu-p.pdf 

FR 

IT 

DE 

ES 

PT 

Cette publication est disponible en français sous forme électronique (fichier PDF). Pour la 

télécharger, rendez-vous sur la page Internet indiquée ci-dessus. 

Questa pubblicazione è disponibile in Italiano in formato PDF. Per scaricarla collegarsi al sito 

Web indicato sopra. 

Diese Publikation ist als PDF auf Deutsch verfügbar. Gehen Sie auf die oben genannte 

Web-Adresse, um nach der Publikation zu suchen und sie herunterzuladen. 

Esta publicación está disponible en español como PDF. Diríjase a la dirección web indicada 

arriba para buscar y descarga esta publicación. 

Esta publicação está disponível em portugués como PDF. Vá ao endereço web que aparece 

acima para encontrar e fazer download da publicação.

Installation Instructions 


Catalog Number(s) 1766-L32AWA, 1766-L32AWAA, 

1766-L32BWA, 1766-L32BWAA, 1766-L32BXB, 

1766-L32BXBA 

Topic 

Page 

Important User Information 4 

Additional Resources 7 

Overview 8 

Controller Description 9 

Hazardous Location Considerations 11 

Mount the Controller 13 

Connect 1762 I/O Expansion Modules 18 

Wire the Controller 20 

Specifications 27

4 MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers 

Important User Information 

Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment. 

Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls (Publication 

SGI-1.1 available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at 

http://literature.rockwellautomation.com) describes some important differences between solid state 

equipment and hard-wired electromechanical devices. Because of this difference, and also because of the 

wide variety of uses for solid state equipment, all persons responsible for applying this equipment must 

satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable. 

In no event will Rockwell Automation, Inc. be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages 

resulting from the use or application of this equipment. 

The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes. Because of the many 

variables and requirements associated with any particular installation, Rockwell Automation, Inc. cannot 

assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams. 

No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation, Inc. with respect to use of information, circuits, 

equipment, or software described in this manual. 

Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without written permission of Rockwell 

Automation, Inc., is prohibited. 

Throughout this manual, when necessary, we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations. 

WARNING 

Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in 

a hazardous environment, which may lead to personal injury or death, property 

damage, or economic loss. 

IMPORTANT 

ATTENTION 

Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of 

the product. 

Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury 

or death, property damage, or economic loss. Attentions help you identify a hazard, 

avoid a hazard and recognize the consequences. 

SHOCK HAZARD 

Labels may be on or inside the equipment (for example, drive or motor) to alert people 

that dangerous voltage may be present. 

BURN HAZARD 

Labels may be on or inside the equipment (for example, drive or motor) to alert people 

that surfaces may reach dangerous temperatures. 

Publication 1766-IN001A-EN-P - July 2008

MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers 5 

Environment and Enclosure 

ATTENTION 

This equipment is intended for use in a Pollution Degree 2 industrial 

environment, in overvoltage Category II applications (as defined in IEC 

publication 60664-1), at altitudes up to 2000 meters (6562 ft) without derating. 

This equipment is considered Group 1, Class A industrial equipment according to 

IEC/CISPR Publication 11. Without appropriate precautions, there may be 

potential difficulties ensuring electromagnetic compatibility in other 

environments due to conducted as well as radiated disturbance. 

This equipment is supplied as open-type equipment. It must be mounted within 

an enclosure that is suitably designed for those specific environmental 

conditions that will be present and appropriately designed to prevent personal 

injury resulting from accessibility to live parts. The enclosure must have suitable 

flame-retardant properties to prevent or minimize the spread of flame, 

complying with a flame spread rating of 5VA, V2, V1, V0 (or equivalent) if 

non-metallic. The interior of the enclosure must be accessible only by the use of 

a tool. Subsequent sections of this publication may contain additional 

information regarding specific enclosure type ratings that are required to comply 

with certain product safety certifications. 

Preventing Electrostatic Discharge 

ATTENTION 

This equipment is sensitive to electrostatic discharge, which can cause internal 

damage and affect normal operation. Follow these guidelines when you handle 

this equipment: 

• Touch a grounded object to discharge potential static. 

• Wear an approved grounding wriststrap. 

• Do not touch connectors or pins on component boards. 

• Do not touch circuit components inside the equipment. 

• Use a static-safe workstation, if available. 

• Store the equipment in appropriate static-safe packaging when not in use. 



North American Hazardous Location Approval 

The following modules are North American Hazardous Location approved: 1766-L32AWA, 

1766-L32AWAA, 1766-L32BWA, 1766-L32BWAA, 1766-L32BXB, 1766-L32BXBA 

The following information applies when 

operating this equipment in hazardous 

locations: 

Products marked "CL I, DIV 2, GP A, B, C, D" are 

suitable for use in Class I Division 2 Groups A, B, C, 

D, Hazardous Locations and nonhazardous locations 

only. Each product is supplied with markings on the 

rating nameplate indicating the hazardous location 

temperature code. When combining products within 

a system, the most adverse temperature code 

(lowest "T" number) may be used to help determine 

the overall temperature code of the system. 

Combinations of equipment in your system are 

subject to investigation by the local Authority Having 

Jurisdiction at the time of installation. 

WARNING 


•Do not disconnect while the 

circuit is live or unless the area 

is known to be free of ignitible 

concentations. 

•Do not disconnect connections 

to this equipment unless power 

has been removed or the area is 

known to be nonhazardous. 

Secure any external connections 

that mate to this equipment by 

using screws, sliding latches, 

threaded connectors, or other 

means provided with this 

product. 

•Substitution of components may 

impair suitability for Class I, 

Division 2. 

•Do not remove or replace lamps, 

fuses or plug-in modules (as 

applicable) unless power has 

been disconnected or the area is 

known to be free of ignitible 

concentrations of flammable 

gases or vapors. 

Informations sur l’utilisation de cet 

équipement en environnements 

dangereux: 

Les produits marqués "CL I, DIV 2, GP A, B, C, D" ne 

conviennent qu’à une utilisation en environnements 

de Classe I Division 2 Groupes A, B, C, D dangereux et 

non dangereux. Chaque produit est livré avec des 

marquages sur sa plaque d’identification qui 

indiquent le code de température pour les 

environnements dangereux. Lorsque plusieurs 

produits sont combinés dans un système, le code de 

température le plus défavorable (code de température 

le plus faible) peut être utilisé pour déterminer le code 

de température global du système. Les combinaisons 

d’équipements dans le système sont sujettes à 

inspection par les autorités locales qualifiées au 

moment de l’installation. 

AVERTISSEMENT 

RISQUE D’EXPLOSION 

• Couper le courant ou s’assurer 

que l’environnement est classé 

non dangereux avant de 

débrancher l'équipement. 

• Couper le courant ou s'assurer 

que l’environnement est classé 

non dangereux avant de 

débrancher les connecteurs. Fixer 

tous les connecteurs externes 

reliés à cet équipement à l'aide 

de vis, loquets coulissants, 

connecteurs filetés ou autres 

moyens fournis avec ce produit. 

• La substitution de composants 

peut rendre cet équipement 

inadapté à une utilisation en 

environnement de Classe I, 

Division 2. 

• S’assurer que l’environnement 

est classé non dangereux avant 

de changer les piles. 



Additional Resources 

Resource 

MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers User 

Manual 1766-UM001 

MicroLogix 1400 Instruction Set Reference 

Manual1766-RM001 

Installation Instructions 1762-INxxx 

Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding 

Guidelines 1770-4.1 

Description 

A more detailed description of how to install and use 

your MicroLogix 1400 programmable controller and 

expansion I/O system. 

A reference manual that contains data and function 

files, instruction set, and troubleshooting information 

for MicroLogix 1400. 

Information on installing and using 1762 expansion I/O 

modules. 

More information on proper wiring and grounding 

techniques. 

If you would like a manual, you can: 

• download a free electronic version from the internet: 

http://literature.rockwellautomation.com 

• purchase a printed manual by contacting your local Allen-Bradley distributor or 

Rockwell Automation representative 



Overview 

MicroLogix 1400 controllers are suitable for use in an industrial environment when installed 

in accordance with these instructions. Specifically, this equipment is intended for use in clean, 

dry environments (Pollution degree 2 (1) ) and with circuits not exceeding Over Voltage 

Category II (2) (IEC 60664-1) (3) . 

Install your controller using these installation instructions. 

Debris strip 

44513 

ATTENTION 

Do not remove the protective debris strip until after the controller and all other 

equipment in the panel near the controller are mounted and wiring is complete. 

Once wiring is complete, remove protective debris strip. Failure to remove strip 

before operating can cause overheating. 

ATTENTION 

Electrostatic discharge can damage semiconductor devices inside the controller. 

Do not touch the connector pins or other sensitive areas. 

(1) Pollution Degree 2 is an environment where, normally, only non-conductive pollution occurs except that occasionally a 

temporary conductivity caused by condensation shall be expected. 

(2) Over Voltage Category II is the load level section of the electrical distribution system. At this level transient voltages are 

controlled and do not exceed the impule voltage capability of the product's insulation. 

(3) Pollution Degree 2 and Over Voltage Category II are International Electrotechnical commissions (IEC) designations. 



Controller Description 

1 

2 3 4 

5 6 7 

1 

ESC 

OK 

44514 

13 12 

11 

10 

9 

8 

44515 

Left side view 

Top view 

Description 

1 Comm port 2 - 9-pin D-Shell RS-232C connector 

2 Memory module (refer to MicroLogix 1400 Memory Module Installation Instructions, publication 

1766-IN010A for instructions on installing the memory module). 

3 User 24V (for 1766-L32BWA and 1766-L32BWAA only) 

4 Input terminal block 

5 LCD Display Keypad (ESC, OK, Up, Down, Left, Right) 

6 Battery compartment 

7 1762 expansion bus connector 

8 Battery connector 

9 Output terminal block 

10 LCD Display 

11 Indicator LED panel 

12 Comm port 1 - RJ45 connector 

13 Comm port 0 - 8-pin mini DIN RS-232C/RS-485 connector 



Controller Input and Output Description 

Catalog 

Number 

Description 

Input 

Power 

User 

Power 

Embedded 

Discrete I/O 

Embedded 

Analog I/O 

Comm. 

Ports 

1766-L32BWA 

1766-L32AWA 

1766-L32BXB 

1766-L32BWA 

A 

1766-L32AWA 

A 

1766-L32BXBA 

100/240V AC 

24 V DC 

100/240V AC 

24V DC 

24V DC 

None 

24V DC 

None 

12 Fast 24V DC Inputs 

8 Normal 24V DC Inputs 

12 Relay Outputs 

20 120V AC Inputs 





3 Fast DC Outputs 

3 Normal DC Outputs 




20 120V AC Inputs 





3 Fast DC Outputs 

3 Normal DC Outputs 

None 

4 Voltage Inputs 

2 Voltage 

Outputs 

1 RS232/RS485 (1) 

1 Ethernet/IP 

1 RS232 (2) 

(1) 

Isolated RS-232/RS-485 combo port. Same as ML1100 Comm 0 

(2) Non-isolated RS-232. Standard D-sub connector 



Hazardous Location Considerations 

This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D or non-hazardous 

locations only. The following WARNING statement applies to use in hazardous locations. 

WARNING 


• Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I, Division 2. 

• Do not replace components or disconnect equipment unless power has been switched 

off. 

• Do not connect or disconnect components unless power has been switched off. 

• This product must be installed in an enclosure. All cables connected to the product 

must remain in the enclosure or be protected by conduit or other means. 

• All wiring must comply with N.E.C. article 501-10(b) and/or in accordance with 

Section 18-1J2 of the Canadian Electrical Code, and in accordance with the authority 

having jurisdiction. 

Use only the following communication cables in Class I, Division 2 hazardous locations. 

Environment Classification 

Class I, Division 2 Hazardous Environment 


1761-CBL-AC00 Series C or later 

1761-CBL-AM00 Series C or later 

1761-CBL-AP00 Series C or later 

1761-CBL-PM02 Series C or later 

1761-CBL-HM02 Series C or later 

2707-NC9 Series C or later 


1747-CP3 Series 



Environnements dangereux 

Cet équipement est conçu pour une utilisation en environnements dangereux de Classe I, 

Division 2, Groupes A, B, C, D ou non dangereux. La mise en garde suivante s’applique à 

utilisation en environnements dangereux. 

WARNING 

DANGER D’EXPLOSION 

• La substitution de composants peut rendre cet équipement impropre à une utilisation 

en environnement de Classe I, Division 2. 

• Ne pas remplacer de composants ou déconnecter l’équipement sans s’être assuré que 

l’alimentation est coupée. 

• Ne pas connecter ou déconnecter des composants sans s’être assuré que 

l’alimentation est coupée. 

• Ce produit doit être installé dans une armoire. Tous les câbles connectés à l’appareil 

doivent rester dans l’armoire ou être protégés par une goulotte ou tout autre moyen. 

• L’ensemble du câblage doit être conforme à la réglementation en vigueur dans les 

pays où l’appareil est installé. 

Utilisez uniquement les câbles de communication suivants dans les environnements 

dangereux de Classe I, Division 2. 

Classification des environnements 

Environnement dangereux de Classe I, Division 2 

Câbles de communication 

1761-CBL-AC00 série C ou ultérieure 

1761-CBL-AM00 série C ou ultérieure 

1761-CBL-AP00 série C ou ultérieure 

1761-CBL-PM02 série C ou ultérieure 

1761-CBL-HM02 série C ou ultérieure 

2707-NC9 série C ou ultérieure 

1763-NC01 série A ou ultérieure 

série 1747-CP3 

ATTENTION 


Do not connect the Comm0 port on the MicroLogix 1400 controller to another MicroLogix 

family controller such as MicroLogix 1000, MicroLogix 1200, or MicroLogix 1500 using a 

1761-CBL-AM00 (8-pin mini-DIN to 8-pin mini-DIN) cable or equivalent. 

This type of connection will cause damage to the RS-232/485 communication port 

(Channel 0) of the MicroLogix 1400 and/or the controller itself. Communication pins used 

for RS-485 communications are alternately used for 24V power on the other MicroLogix 

controllers. 



Mount the Controller 

General Considerations 

Most applications require installation in an industrial enclosure to reduce the effects of 

electrical interference and environmental exposure. Locate your controller as far as possible 

from power lines, load lines, and other sources of electrical noise such as hard-contact 

switches, relays, and ac motor drives. For more information on proper grounding guidelines, 

see the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines, publication 1770-4.1. 

ATTENTION 

Mount the controller horizontally only. Vertical mounting is not supported due to 

thermal considerations. 

ATTENTION 

Be careful of metal chips when drilling mounting holes for your controller or 

other equipment within the enclosure or panel. Drilled fragments that fall into 

the controller could cause damage. Do not drill holes above a mounted controller 

if the protective debris strips have been removed. 

WARNING 

Do not place the MLX1400 Programmable Controller in direct sunlight. 

Prolonged exposure to direct sunlight could degrade the LCD display. 

WARNING 

The local programming terminal port is intended for temporary use only and 

must not be connected or disconnected unless the area is assured to be 

nonhazardous. 



Mounting Dimensions 

C 

A 

B 

44516 

1766-L32BWA, 1766-L32AWA, 1766-L32BXB, 

1766-L32BWAA, 1766-L32AWAA, 1766-L32BXBA 

Dimension 

A 

B 

C 

Height 

90 mm (3.5 in.) 

180 mm (7.087 in.) 

87 mm (3.43 in.) 

Controller Spacing 

The controller mounts horizontally, with the expansion I/O extending to the right of the 

controller. Allow 50 mm (2 in.) of space on all but the right side for adequate ventilation, as 

shown below. 

Top 

ESC 

Side 

OK 

Bottom 

44517 




The maximum extension of the latch is 14 mm (0.55 in.) in the open position. A flat-blade 

screwdriver is required for removal of the controller. The controller can be mounted to 

EN50022-35x7.5 or EN50022-35x15 DIN rails. DIN rail mounting dimensions are shown 

below.. 

B 

A 

C 

44518 

Dimension 

A 

B 

C 

Height 

90 mm (3.5 in.) 

27.5 mm (1.08 in.) 

27.5 mm (1.08 in.) 

Follow these steps to install your controller on the DIN rail. 

1. Mount your DIN rail. Make sure that the placement of the controller on the DIN rail 

meets the recommended spacing requirements (see Controller Spacing on page 14 

for more information). Refer to the mounting template inside the back cover of this 

document. 

2. If it is open, close the DIN latch. 

3. Hook the top slot over the DIN rail. 

4. While pressing the controller down against the top of the rail, snap the bottom of the 

controller into position. 

5. Leave the protective debris strip attached until you are finished wiring the controller 

and any other devices. 

Follow these steps to remove your controller from the DIN rail. 

1. Place a flat-blade screwdriver in the DIN rail latch at the bottom of the controller. 


ESC 

OK 


2. Holding the controller, pry downward on the latch until the latch locks in the open 

position. 

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the second DIN rail latch. 

4. Unhook the top of the DIN rail slot from the rail. 

Open 

Closed 

44519 

44520 


Mount to panel using #8 or M4 screws. Follow these steps to install your controller using 

mounting screws. 

1. Remove the mounting template from inside the back cover of this document. 

2. Secure the template to the mounting surface. Make sure your controller is spaced 

properly (see Controller Spacing on page 14 for more information). 

3. Drill holes through the template. 

4. Remove the mounting template. 

Mounting Template 

5. Mount the controller. 

6. Leave the protective debris strip 

in place until you are finished 

wiring the controller and any 

other devices 

ESC 

OK 

44521 



Using the Battery 

The MicroLogix 1400 controller is equipped with a replaceable battery (catalog number 

1747-BA). The Battery Low indicator on the LCD display of the controller shows the status 

of the replaceable battery. When the battery is low, the indicator is set (displayed as a solid 

rectangle). This means that either the battery wire connector is disconnected, or the battery 

may fail within 2 days if it is connected. 

IMPORTANT 

The MicroLogix 1400 controller ships with the battery wire connector connected. 

Ensure that the battery wire connector is inserted into the connector port if your 

application needs battery power. For example, when using a real-time clock 

(RTC). 

Replacing the battery when the controller is powered down will lose all user 

application memory. Replace the battery when the controller is powered on. 

Refer to the SLC 500 Lithium Battery Installation Instructions, publication 

1747-IN515, for more information on installation, handling, usage, storage, and 

disposal of the battery. 

WARNING 

When you connect or disconnect the battery an electrical arc can occur. This 

could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations. Be sure that the 

area is nonhazardous before proceeding. 

For Safety information on the handling of lithium batteries, including handling 

and disposal of leaking batteries, see Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries, 

publication AG 5-4. 

Follow these steps to connect the replaceable battery. 

1. Insert the replaceable battery wire connector into the controller’s battery connector. 



2. Secure the battery connector wires so that it does not block the 1762 expansion bus 

connector as shown below. 

Battery compartment 

1762 I/O 

expansion bus 

connector 

Battery wire 

connector 

Battery connector 

Battery wires 

twisted pair 

44522 

Connect 1762 I/O Expansion Modules 

ATTENTION 

Remove power from the system before installing or removing expansion I/O or damage to 

the controller may result. 

Connect 1762 I/O after mounting the controller. 

1. Remove the expansion port cover to install expansion I/O modules. 

2. Plug the ribbon cable connector into the bus connector. 



3. Replace the cover as shown below. 

44523 

The MicroLogix 1400 controller is designed to support up to any seven 1762 expansion I/O 

modules. 

For detailed information on using expansion I/O, refer to the installation instructions for 

your expansion module. 



Wire the Controller 

Terminal Block Layouts 

WARNING 

When you connect or disconnect the Removable Terminal Block (RTB) with field 

side power applied, an electrical arc can occur. This could cause an explosion in 

hazardous location installations. Be sure that power is removed or the area is 

nonhazardous before proceeding. 

WARNING 

When used in a Class I, Division 2, hazardous location, this equipment must be 

mounted in a suitable enclosure. All wiring must be in accordance with Class I, 

Division 2 wiring methods of Article 501 of the National Electrical Code and/or 

in accordance with Section 18-1J2 of the Canadian Electrical Code, and in 

accordance with the authority having jurisdiction. 

TIP 

The shading in the following terminal block illustrations indicates which 

terminals are tied to which commons. 

1766-L32BWA/L32BWAA 


+24 V COM +24 V DC 

IN0 

IN2 

COM 1 

IN5 

IN7 

IN8 

IN10 

COM 3 IN13 IN15 IN17 IN19 

IV0(+) 

IV2(+) 

COM 0 

IN1 

IN3 

IN4 IN6 COM 2 

IN9 

IN11 

IN12 IN14 IN16 IN18 COM 

ANA 

IV1(+) 

IV3(+) 

VAC 

L1 

VAC 

L2/N 

OUT0 OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 

VAC 

DC5 

OUT7 OUT8 OUT10 

COM 

ANA 

OV1 

DC0 

VAC 

DC1 

VAC 

DC2 

VAC 

DC3 

VAC 

DC4 

VAC 

OUT5 

OUT6 DC6 OUT9 OUT11 OV0 

VAC 


44524 



1766-L32AWA/L32AWAA 


IN0 

IN2 

COM 1 

IN5 

IN7 

IN8 

IN10 


IV0(+) 

IV2(+) 

COM 0 

IN1 

IN3 

IN4 IN6 COM 2 

IN9 

IN11 


ANA 

IV1(+) 

IV3(+) 

VAC 

L1 

VAC 

L2/N 


VAC 

DC5 


COM 

ANA 

OV1 

DC0 

VAC 

DC1 

VAC 

DC2 

VAC 

DC3 

VAC 

DC4 

VAC 

OUT5 

OUT6 DC6 OUT9 OUT11 OV0 

VAC 

Output Terminal Block 44525 

1766-L32BXB/L32BXBA 


IN0 

IN2 

COM 1 

IN5 

IN7 

IN8 

IN10 


IV0(+) 

IV2(+) 

COM 0 

IN1 

IN3 

IN4 IN6 COM 2 

IN9 

IN11 


ANA 

IV1(+) 

IV3(+) 

VDC 

+24 

VDC 

NEUT 


COM 2 


COM 

ANA 

OV1 

DC0 

VAC 

DC1 

VAC 

DC1 

VDC2 

OUT3 

OUT5 

OUT7 

DC3 

VAC 

DC4 

VAC 

DC5 

VAC 

OUT11 

OV0 

Output Terminal Block 44526 

Wire Type 

Wire Size 

Solid wire Cu-90°C (194°F) 14...22 AWG 

Stranded wire Cu-90°C (194°F) 16...22 AWG 

Wiring torque = 0.791Nm (7 in-lb) rated. 



WARNING 

If you connect or disconnect wiring while the field-side power is on, an electrical 

arc can occur. This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations. 

Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding 

WARNING 

The local programming terminal port is intended for temporary use only and 

must not be connected or disconnected unless the area is assured to be 

nonhazardous. 

Wiring Recommendation 

When wiring without spade lugs, keep the finger-safe covers in place. Loosen the terminal 

screw and route the wires through the opening in the finger-safe cover. Tighten the terminal 

screw, making sure the pressure plate secures the wire. 

Finger-safe cover 

44527 

ATTENTION 

Be careful when stripping wires. Wire fragments that fall into the controller 

could cause damage. Once wiring is complete, be sure the controller is free of 

all metal fragments before removing the protective debris strip. Failure to 

remove the strip before operating can cause overheating. 



Spade Lug Recommendation 

The diameter of the terminal screw head is 5.5 mm (0.220 in.). The input and output 

terminals of the MicroLogix 1400 controller are designed for the following spade lugs. The 

terminals will accept a 6.35mm (0.25 in.) wide spade (standard for #6 screw for up to 14 

AWG) or a 4 mm (metric #4) fork terminal. 

When using spade lugs, use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to pry the finger-safe cover from 

the terminal blocks, then loosen the terminal screw. 

Finger-safe cover 

44528 

TIP 

If you wire the terminal block with the finger-safe cover removed, you may not 

be able to put it back on the terminal block if the wires are in the way. 

Surge Suppression 

ATTENTION 

Inductive load devices such as motor starters and solenoids require the use of 

some type of surge suppression to protect the controller output. Switching 

inductive loads without surge suppression can significantly reduce the life of 

relay contacts or damage transistor outputs. By using suppression, you also 

reduce the effects of voltage transients caused by interrupting the current to 

that inductive device, and prevent electrical noise from radiating into system 

wiring. Refer to the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controller User Manual, 

publication 1766-UM001, for more information on surge suppression. 



Grounding the Controller 

In solid-state control systems, grounding and wire routing helps limit the effects of noise due 

to electromagnetic interference (EMI). Run the ground connection from the ground screw of 

the controller to the ground bus prior to connecting any devices. Use AWG #14 wire. For 

AC-powered controllers, this connection must be made for safety purposes. 

You must also provide an acceptable grounding path for each device in your application. For 

more information on proper grounding guidelines, refer to the Industrial Automation Wiring 

and Grounding Guidelines, publication 1770-4.1. 

Wiring Your Analog Channels 

Analog input circuits can monitor voltage signals and convert them to serial digital data as 

shown in the following illustration. 

Analog Input 

Sensor 2 

(V) Voltage 

Sensor 0 

(V) Voltage 


/7 

I/8 I/10 

COM 3 I/13 I/15 I/17 I/19 

IV0(+) 

IV2(+) 

COM 2 

I/9 I/11 

I/12 I/14 I/16 I/18 COM 

ANA 

IV1(+) 

IV3(+) 

Sensor 1 

(V) Voltage 

Sensor 3 

(V) Voltage 

44529 



The controller does not provide loop power for analog inputs. Use a power supply that 

matches the transmitter specifications as shown. 

The analog output can support a voltage function as shown in the following illustration. 

Analog Output 

Voltage Load 

O/3 O/4 

VAC 

DC5 

O/7 O/8 O/10 

COM 

ANA 

OV1 

3 

C 

DC4 

VAC 

O/5 

O/6 DC6 O/9 O/11 OV0 

VAC 


Voltage Load 

44680 

Analog Input Transmitter Specifications 


+ 

- 

Transmitter 

+ - 

Controller 

IV0(+), IV1(+), IV2(+) or IV3(+) 

COM ANA 


Power 

Supply 

Transmitter 

Supply Signal 

GND 

Controller 

+ 

IV0(+), IV1(+), IV2(+) or IV3(+) 

- COM ANA 


Power + 

Supply - 

Supply 

+ 

- 

Transmitter 

Signal 

+ 

- 

Controller 

IV0(+), IV1(+), IV2(+) or IV3(+) 

COM ANA 

44530 



Minimizing Electrical Noise on Analog Channels 

Inputs on analog channels employ digital high-frequency filters that significantly reduce the 

effects of electrical noise on input signals. However, because of the variety of applications and 

environments where analog controllers are installed and operated, it is impossible to ensure 

that all environmental noise will be removed by the input filters. 

Several specific steps can be taken to help reduce the effects of environmental noise on 

analog signals: 

• Install the MicroLogix 1400 system in a properly rated (NEMA) enclosure. Make sure 

that the MicroLogix 1400 system is properly grounded. 

• Use Belden cable #8761 for wiring the analog channels, making sure that the drain 

wire and foil shield are properly earth grounded, (see Grounding Your Analog Cable 

on page 26 for more information). 

• Route the Belden cable separately from any AC wiring. Additional noise immunity can 

be obtained by routing the cables in grounded conduit. 

Grounding Your Analog Cable 

Use shielded communication cable 

(Belden #8761). The Belden cable 

has two signal wires (black and 

clear), one drain wire, and a foil 

shield. The drain wire and foil 

shield must be grounded at one 

end of the cable. 

Insulation 

Foil Shield 

Black Wire 

Drain Wire 

Clear Wire 

44531 

IMPORTANT 

Do not ground the drain wire and foil shield at both ends of the cable. 




General Specifications 

Description 1766-L32AWAA 1766-L32BWAA 1766-L32BXBA 

Dimensions 

HxWxD 

90 x 180 x 87 mm 

3.5 x 7.087 x 3.43 in. 

Shipping weight 0.9 kg (2.0 lbs) 

Number of I/O 

24 inputs (20 digital and 4 analog) and 14 outputs (12 digital and 2 analog) 

Power supply voltage 100...240V AC (-15%, +10%) at 47...63 Hz 24V DC (-15%, +10%) 

Class 2 SELV 

Heat dissipation Refer to the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers User Manual, 

Publication 1766-UM001. 

Power supply inrush 

current 

120V AC: 25 A for 8 ms 

240V AC: 40A for 4 ms 

Power consumption 100 VA 120 VA 50W 

24V DC sensor power none 24V DC at 250 mA 

400 µF max. 

Input circuit type 

Digital: 120V AC 

Analog: 0...10V DC 

Digital: 24V DC 

sink/source 

(standard and high-speed) 


24V DC: 

15 A for 20 ms 

none 

Output circuit type Relay Relay/FET 

Digital: 24V DC 

sink/source 

(standard and high-speed) 


Enclosure type rating None (open-style) 

Wire size 0.25... 2.5 mm 2 (22...14 AWG) solid or stranded copper wire rated at 90 °C 

(194 °F ) or greater. 

Wiring category (1) 2 - on signal ports 

2 - on power ports 

3 - on communications ports 

Terminal screw torque 0.79 Nm (7.0 in-lb) rated 

Pilot duty rating 

R300, C300 

Expansion bus Supports up to seven 1762 modules, up to a maximum of 5V, 1500 mA and 24 V, 

1500 mA. 

North American temp T3C 

code 

(1) 

Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing. Refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and 

Grounding Guidelines, publication 1770-4.1. 



Specifications for Inputs 

Digital Inputs 

Description 1766-L32AWA/A 1766-L32BWA/A, 1766-L32BXB/A 

On-state voltage 

range 

Off-state voltage 

range 

Operating 

frequency 

On-state current 

Mininum 

Nominal 

Maximum 

Off-State 

Leakage Current 

Nominal 

Impedance 

Inrush Current 

(max.) at 120V AC 



79 ...132 V AC 4.5...24V DC, Class 2 

(4.5...26.4V DC @ 65°C/149°F) 

(4.5...30V DC @ 30°C/86°F) 

0...20 V AC 0...1.5V DC 0...5V DC 



10...24V DC, Class 2 

(10...26.4V DC @ 65°C/149°F) 

(10...30V DC @ 30°C/86°F) 

47...63 Hz 0 Hz...100 kHz 0 Hz...1 kHz 

(scan time dependent) 

5.0 mA @ 79 V AC 

12 mA @ 120 V AC 

16.0 mA @ 132 V AC 

7.1 mA @ 4.5V DC 

9.9 mA @ 24V DC 

10.5 mA @ 30V DC 

3.2 mA @ 10V DC 

5.3 mA @ 24V DC 

5.5 mA @ 30V DC 

2.5 mA max. 0.2 mA max. 1.5 mA max. 



250mA 

2.4 kΩ 4.5 kΩ 

Analog Inputs 

Description 

Voltage Input Range 

Type of Data 

Input Coding (0 to 10.0V DC - 1 LSB) 0 ...4,095 

Voltage Input Impedance 

Input Resolution 

Non-linearity 

Overall accurarcy 

-20...+65 °C (-4...+149 °F) 

Voltage input overvoltage protection 

Field wiring to logic isolation 

1766-L32AWAA, -L32BWAA, -L32BXBA 

0 ...10.0V DC - 1 LSB 

12-bit unsigned integer 

>199 kΩ 

12 bit 



10.5 V DC 

Non-isolated with internal logic 



Analog Outputs 

Description 

Number of inputs 

Voltage output range 

Type of data 

1766-L32AWAA, -L32BWAA, -L32BXBA 

2 single-ended 

0...10 V DC - 1 LSB 

12 bit unsigned integer 

Step response 2.5 ms @ 95% 

Load range 

Voltage output 

Output resolution 

Analog output setting time 

1 KΩ 

12 bit 

3 ms (max.) 

Overall Accurarcy 

-20...65 °C (-4...149 °F) ±1.0% of full scale 

Electrical isolation 

Cable length 

Non-isolated with internal logic 

30 m (98 ft) shielded cable 



Specifications for Outputs in Hazardous Locations 

(Class 1, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D) 

Relay and FET Outputs 

Description 

1766-L32AWA/A, 

1766-L32BWA/A 

Maximum Controlled Load 1440 VA 1080 VA 

Maximum Continuous Current: 

Current per Channel and Group Common 

2.5 A per channel 

8A max channel 8...11 common 

Current per Controller at 150V max 28 A or total of per-point loads, 

whichever is less 

at 240V max 20 A or total of per-point loads, 

whichever is less 

Relay Outputs 

1766-L32BXB/A 

2.5 A per channel 

Description 

1766-L32AWA/A, 1766-L32BWA/A, 1766-L32BXB/A 

Turn On Time/Turn Off Time 10 msec (maximum) (1) 

Load Current 

10 mA (minimum) 

(1) 

Scan time dependent 

Maximum Volts Amperes Amperes Volt-Amperes 

Make Break 

Continuous 

Make Break 

240V AC 7.5 A 0.75 A 3.0 A 1800 VA 180 VA 

120V AC 15.0 A 1.5 A 3.0 A 1800 VA 180 VA 

250V DC 0.11 A 1.0 A 28 VA 

125V DC 0.22 A 1.0 A 28 VA 



Specifications for Outputs in (Non-Hazardous) Locations only 

1766-L32BXB, 1766-L32BXBA FET Output 

Maximum Output Current (temperature dependent): 

FET Current per Point 

FET Total Current 

2.0 

8.0 

1.75 

1.5 

1.5A, 30°C (86°F) 

7.0 

6.0 

6.0A , 30°C (86°F) 

1.25 

5.0 


1.0 

0.75 

0.5 

0.25 

Valid 

Range 

0.75A, 60°C (140°F) 


4.0 

3.0 

2.0 

1.0 

Valid 

Range 

3.0A , 60°C (140°F) 

10°C 

(50°F) 

30°C 50°C 

(86°F) (122°F) 

Temperature 

70°C 

(158°F) 

80°C 

(176°F) 

10°C 

(50°F) 

30°C 

(86°F) 

50°C 

(122°F) 

70°C 

(158°F) 

80°C 

(176°F) 

Temperature 

44532 44533 


Power Supply Voltage 24V DC (-15%, 10%) Class 2 

On-State Voltage Drop: 

at maximum load current 

at maximum surge current 

Current Rating per Point 

maximum load 

minimum load 

maximum leakage 

Surge Current per Point: 

peak current 

maximum surge duration 

maximum rate of repetition at 30 °C (86 °F) 

maximum rate of repetition at 65 °C (149 °F) 

1V DC 

2.5V DC 

See graphs below 

1.0 mA 

1.0 mA 

4.0 A 

10 ms 

once every second 

once every 2 seconds 

(Output 2, 3 and 4 Only) 



100 mA 

20 mA 

1.0 mA 

Turn-On Time (maximum) 11 μs 28 ns 

Turn-Off Time (maximum) 89 μs 2.3 μs 





(1) Output 2, 3 and 4 are designed to provide increased functionality over the other FET outputs. Output 2, 3 and 4 may be used 

like the other FET transistor outputs, but in addition, within a limited current range, they may be operated at a higher speed. 

Output 2, 3 and 4 also provide a pulse train output (PTO) or pulse width modulation output (PWM) function. 



Working Voltage 

Working Voltage for 1766-L32AWA/A 

Description 

Power Supply Input to 

Backplane Isolation 


Isolation 

Input Group to Input Group 

Isolation 

Output Group to Backplane 

Isolation 

Output Group to Output 

Group Isolation 


Verified by one of the following dielectric tests: 1836V AC for 1 second or 

2596V DC for 1 second 

265V AC Working Voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation) 

Verified by one of the following dielectric tests:1517V AC for 1 second or 





132V AC Working Voltage (basic insulation) 





2596V DC for 1second 

265V AC Working Voltage (basic insulation), 150V AC Working Voltage (IEC 

Class 2 reinforced insulation) 

Working Voltage for 1766-L32BWA/A 

Description 

Power Supply Input to 



Isolation and Input Group to 

Input Group Isolation 

Output Group to Backplane 

Isolation 

Output Group to Output 

Group Isolation 







75V DC Working Voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation) 



265V AC Working Voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation). 



265V AC Working Voltage (basic insulation) 150V Working Voltage (IEC Class 2 




Working Voltage for 1766-L16BXB/A 

Description 


Isolation and Input Group to 

Input Group Isolation 

FET Output Group to 


Relay Output Group to 


Relay Output Group to Relay 

Output Group and FET 

Output Group Isolation 













265V AC Working Voltage (basic insulation), 150V Working Voltage 

(IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation) 

Environmental Specifications 

Description 1766-L32AWA/A 1766-L32BWA/A 1766-L32BXB/A 

Temperature, operating IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad, Operating Cold), 

IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd, Operating Dry Heat), 

IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb, Operating Thermal Shock): 

-20... 60 °C (-4 ...140 °F) 

Temperature, storage 

Relative humidity 

Vibration 

Shock, operating 

Shock, nonoperating 

IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab, Unpackaged Non-operating Cold), 

IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb, Unpackaged Non-operating Dry Heat), 

IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na, Unpackaged Non-operating Thermal Shock): 

-40…85 °C (-40…185 °F)-40...85 °C (-40... 185 °F) 

IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db, Unpackaged Damp Heat): 

5...95% non-condensing 

IEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc, Operating): 

5g @ 10... 500 Hz 

Emissions CISPR 11 

Group 1, Class A 

IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea, Unpackaged Shock): 

30 g 

IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea, Unpackaged Shock): 

Panel mount - 50 g 

DIN mount - 40 g 



Description 1766-L32AWA/A 1766-L32BWA/A 1766-L32BXB/A 

ESD immunity IEC 61000-4-2: 

4 kV contact discharges 

8 kV air discharges 

Radiated RF immunity IEC 61000-4-3: 

10V/m with 1 kHz sine-wave 80% AM from 80…1000 MHz 

3 V/m with 1 kHz sine-wave 80% AM from 1.4...2.0 GHz 

1 V/m with 1 kHz sine-wave 80% AM from 2.0...2.7 GHz 

EFT/B immunity IEC 61000-4-4: 

±2 kV at 5 kHz on power ports 

±2 kV at 5 kHz on signal ports 

±1 kV at 5 kHz on communications ports 

Surge transient 

immunity 

IEC 61000-4-5: 

±1 kV line-line(DM) and ±2 kV line-earth(CM) on AC power ports 

±1 kV line-line(DM) and ±2 kV line-earth(CM) on signal ports 

±1 kV line-earth(CM) on communications ports 

Conducted RF immunity IEC 61000-4-6: 

10V rms with 1 kHz sine-wave 80% AM from 150 kHz...80 MHz 

Voltage Variation IEC 6100-4-11: 

60% dip for 10 periods on AC supply ports 

30% dips for 25 periods at 0° and 180° on AC supply ports 

100% dip for 250 periods at 0° and 180° on AC supply ports 

100% dip for 0.5 periods, arbitrary angle, on AC supply ports 



Certifications for 1766-32AWA/A, 1766-L32BWA/A, 

1766-L32BXB/A 

Certification (when 

product is marked) (1) 

UL 

CE 

C-Tick 

Value 

UL Listed for Class I, Division 2 Group A,B,C,D Hazardous Locations. 

See UL File E10314. 

European Union 2004/108/EC EMC Directive, compliant with: 

EN 61000-6-2; Industrial Immunity 

EN 61000-6-4; Industrial Emissions 

EN 61131-2; Programmable Controllers (Clause 8, Zone A & B) 

EN 61131-2; Programmable Controllers (Clause 11) 

Australian Radiocommunications Act, compliant with: 

AS/NZS CISPR 11; Industrial Emissions 

(1) 

See the Product Certification link at http://www.ab.com for Declaration of Conformity, Certificates, and other certification 

details. 




180.0 mm 

(7.087 in.) 

165.8 mm 

(6.528 in.) 

25.81 mm 

(1.016 in.) 

0.164 

DIN rail center line. 

Ligne médiane du rail DIN. 

Mittellinie der DIN-Schiene. 

Línea central del riel DIN. 

Linea centrale della guida DIN. 

linha de centro do trilho DIN. 

Expansion I/O 

Extension d'E/S 

E/A - 

Erweiterungsmodule 

Espansione dei 

moduli I/O 

100.06 mm 

(3.939 in.) 

Expansión de E/S 

Expansão de E/S 

1766-L32AWA, 1766-L32AWAA 

1766-L32BWA, 1766-L32BWAA 

1766-L32BXB, 1766-L32BXBA

INPUTS 

INPUTS 

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 

OUTPUTS 

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 

OUTPUTS 

L32AWA 

L32AWAA

VAC 

L1 

1766-L32AWA 

1766-L32AWA 

COM 

0 

VAC 

L1 

1766-L32AWAA 

1766-L32AWAA 

COM 

0 

VAC 

L2/N 

OUT 

0 

OUT 

1 

OUT 

2 

OUT 

3 

OUT 

4 

VAC 

DC5 

OUT 

7 

OUT 

8 

OUT 

10 

NC 

NC 

VAC 

DC0 

VAC 

DC1 

VAC 

DC2 

VAC 

DC3 

VAC 

DC4 

OUT 

5 

OUT 

6 

VAC 

DC6 

OUT 

9 

OUT 

11 

NC 

COM 

IN0 IN2 IN5 IN7 IN8 

1 

COM 

IN10 IN13 IN15 IN17 IN19 NC NC 

3 

COM 

IN1 IN3 IN4 IN6 IN9 IN11 IN12 IN14 IN16 IN18 NC NC NC 

2 

VAC 

L2/N 

VAC 

DC0 

OUT 

0 

VAC 

DC1 

OUT 

1 

VAC 

DC2 

OUT 

2 

VAC 

DC3 

OUT 

3 

VAC 

DC4 

OUT 

4 

OUT 

5 

VAC 

DC5 

OUT 

6 

OUT 

7 

OUT 

8 

OUT 

10 

COM 

ANA 

VAC OUT OUT 

DC6 9 11 

OV0 

OV1 

COM 


1 

COM 

IN10 IN13 IN15 IN17 IN19 IV0 IV2 

3 

COM 

2 

COM 

ANA 

IN1 IN3 IN4 IN6 IN9 IN11 IN12 IN14 IN16 IN18 IV1 IV3 

L32AWAA 

L32AWA 

953203-16

INPUTS 

INPUTS 

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 

OUTPUTS 

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 

OUTPUTS 

L32BWA 

L32BWAA

VAC 

L1 

1766-L32BWA 

1766-L32BWA 

COM 

0 

VAC 

L1 

1766-L32BWAA 

1766-L32BWAA 

COM 

0 

VAC 

L2/N 

OUT 

0 

OUT 

1 

OUT 

2 

OUT 

3 

OUT 

4 

VAC 

DC5 

OUT 

7 

OUT 

8 

OUT 

10 

NC 

NC 

VAC 

DC0 

VAC 

DC1 

VAC 

DC2 

VAC 

DC3 

VAC 

DC4 

OUT 

5 

OUT 

6 

VAC 

DC6 

OUT 

9 

OUT 

11 

NC 

COM 


1 

COM 


3 

COM 


2 

VAC 

L2/N 

VAC 

DC0 

OUT 

0 

VAC 

DC1 

OUT 

1 

VAC 

DC2 

OUT 

2 

VAC 

DC3 

OUT 

3 

VAC 

DC4 

OUT 

4 

OUT 

5 

VAC 

DC5 

OUT 

6 

OUT 

7 

OUT 

8 

OUT 

10 

COM 

ANA 

VAC OUT OUT 

DC6 9 11 

OV0 

OV1 

COM 


1 

COM 


3 

COM 

2 

COM 

ANA 


L32BWAA 

L32BWA 

953203-16

INPUTS 

INPUTS 

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 

OUTPUTS 

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 

OUTPUTS 

L32BXBA 

L32BXB

1766-L32BXBA 

+24 

VDC 

VDC 

NUET 

VAC 

DC0 

OUT 

0 

VAC 

DC1 

OUT 

1 

VDC 

2 

OUT 

2 

OUT 

3 

OUT 

4 

OUT 

5 

OUT 

6 

OUT 

7 

COM 

2 

VAC 

DC3 

OUT 

8 

OUT 

9 

OUT 

10 

COM 

ANA 

VAC VAC OUT 

DC4 DC5 11 

OV0 

OV1 

1766-L32BXBA 

COM 


1 

COM 


3 

COM 

0 

COM 

2 

COM 

ANA 


1766-L32BXB 

+24 

VDC 

VDC 

NEUT 

VAC 

DC0 

OUT 

0 

VAC 

DC1 

OUT 

1 

VDC 

2 

OUT 

2 

OUT 

3 

OUT 

4 

OUT 

5 

OUT 

6 

OUT 

7 

COM 

2 

VAC 

DC3 

OUT 

8 

OUT 

9 

OUT 

10 

NC 

VAC VAC OUT 

DC4 DC5 11 

NC 

NC 

1766-L32BXB 

COM 


1 

COM 


3 

COM 

0 

COM 


2 

L32BXB 

L32BXBA 

953203-16

Publication 1766-IN001A-EN-P - June 2008

Rockwell Automation Support 

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products. At 

http://support.rockwellautomation.com, you can find technical manuals, a knowledge base of FAQs, 

technical and application notes, sample code and links to software service packs, and a MySupport feature 

that you can customize to make the best use of these tools. 

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation, configuration and troubleshooting, we 

offer TechConnect support programs. For more information, contact your local distributor or Rockwell 

Automation representative, or visit http://support.rockwellautomation.com. 

Installation Assistance 

If you experience a problem with a hardware module within the first 24 hours of installation, please 

review the information that's contained in this manual. You can also contact a special Customer Support 

number for initial help in getting your module up and running: 

United States 

Outside United States 

1.440.646.3434 Monday – Friday, 8am – 5pm EST 

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any technical 

support issues. 

New Product Satisfaction Return 

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from 

the manufacturing facility. However, if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned, follow 

these procedures. 

United States 

Outside United States 

Contact your distributor. You must provide a Customer Support case number (see 

phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in order to complete the return 

process. 

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for return procedure. 

Allen-Bradley, Rockwell Automation, MicroLogix, and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation, Inc. 

Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies. 

Publication 1766-IN001A-EN-P - June 2008 PN 953203-13 

Copyright © 2008 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in Singapore.

Section 5 

Misc. System 

Components

GRUNDFOS INSTRUCTIONS 

SQ, SQE 

Installation and operating instructions

LIMITED WARRANTY 

Products manufactured by GRUNDFOS PUMPS CORPORATION (Grundfos) are warranted 

to the original user only to be free of defects in material and workmanship for a period 

of 24 months from date of installation, but not more than 30 months from date of manufacture. 

Grundfos’ liability under this warranty shall be limited to repairing or replacing 

at Grundfos’ option, without charge, F.O.B. Grundfos’ factory or authorized service 

station, any product of Grundfos’ manufacture. Grundfos will not be liable for any costs 

of removal, installation, transportation, or any other charges which may arise in connection 

with a warranty claim. Products which are sold but not manufactured by Grundfos 

are subject to the warranty provided by the manufacturer of said products and not by 

Grundfos’ warranty. Grundfos will not be liable for damage or wear to products caused 

by abnormal operating conditions, accident, abuse, misuse, unauthorized alteration or 

repair, or if the product was not installed in accordance with Grundfos’ printed installation 

and operating instructions. 

To obtain service under this warranty, the defective product must be returned to the 

distributor or dealer of Grundfos’ products from which it was purchased together with 

proof of purchase and installation date, failure date, and supporting installation data. 

Unless otherwise provided, the distributor or dealer will contact Grundfos or an authorized 

service station for instructions. Any defective product to be returned to Grundfos 

or a service station must be sent freight prepaid; documentation supporting the 

warranty claim and/or a Return Material Authorization must be included if so instructed. 

GRUNDFOS WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, 

LOSSES, OR EXPENSES ARISING FROM INSTALLATION, USE, OR ANY OTHER CAUSES. 

THERE ARE NO EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING MERCHANTABILITY OR 

FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, WHICH EXTEND BEYOND THOSE WARRANTIES 

DESCRIBED OR REFERRED TO ABOVE. 

Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential 

damages and some jurisdictions do not allow limit actions on how long implied warranties 

may last. Therefore, the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you. 

This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights which 

vary from jurisdiction to jurisdiction.

SQ, SQE 

Installation and 

operating instructions 

Page 4 

3

CONTENTS 

Page 

1. General description 4 

1.1 Applications 4 

2. Preinstallation 4 

2.1 Well preparation 4 

2.2 Make sure you have the right pump 4 

2.3 Pumped liquid requirements 4 

2.4 Motor cooling requirements 5 

2.5 Liquid temperatures/cooling 5 

2.6 Motor preparation 5 

2.7 Refilling of motor liquid 5 

3. Installation positions 6 

3.1 Positional requirements 6 

4. Electrical connection 6 

4.1 General 6 

4.2 Motor protection 6 

4.3 Connection of motor 6 

5. Cable sizing 7 

6. Splicing the cable 7 

7. Fitting the cable plug to the motor 7 

8. Fitting the cable guard 8 

9. Piping 8 

10. Installing the pump 9 

10.1 Installation depth 9 

11. Generator operation 9 

12. Starting the pump for the first time 10 

12.1 Motor cooling and other considerations 10 

12.2 Impurities in the water 10 

12.3 Minimum flow rate 10 

12.4 Built-in protection 10 

12.5 Resetting the pump 10 

12.6 MS 3 motors 10 

12.7 MSE 3 motors 10 

12.8 Maintenance and service 10 

13. Assembly of pump and motor 11 

14. Troubleshooting 12 

14.1 Instruments not allowed 13 

15. Checking of motor and cable 13 

16. Environment 13 

17. Disposal 13 

18. Technical data 14 

Before beginning installation procedures, 

these installation and operating instructions 

should be studied carefully. The installation 

and operation should also be in 

accordance with local regulations and accepted 

codes of good practice. 

1. General description 

The SQ/SQE is a 3 inch diameter submersible pump 

mainly designed for the pumping of raw water in domestic 

water supply. This manual is designed to assist 

in the proper set-up, installation and operation of 

these pumps. 

1.1 Applications 

Typical applications are: 

• residential housing 

• small waterworks 

• pressure boosting 

• irrigation systems 

• liquid transfer in tanks. 

2. Preinstallation 

2.1 Well preparation 

If the pump is to be installed in a new well, the well 

should be fully developed and bailed or blown free of 

cuttings and sand. 

The construction of the Grundfos SQ/SQE submersibles 

makes them resistant to abrasion; however, no 

pump made of any material can forever withstand the 

destructive wear that occurs when constantly pumping 

sandy water. 

If this pump is used to replace an oil-filled submersible 

or oil-lubricated line-shaft turbine in an existing 

well, the well must be blown or bailed clear of oil. 

2.2 Make sure you have the right pump 

Determine the maximum depth of the well and the 

drawdown level at the maximum pump capacity. 

Pump selection and setting depth should be made 

based on this data. 

2.3 Pumped liquid requirements 

Submersible well pumps are designed for pumping 

clear, cold water; free of air or gases. Decreased pump 

performance and life expectancy can occur if the water 

is not clear, cold or contains air or gases. 

The water temperature should not exceed 104°F. 

A check should be made to ensure that the installation 

depth of the pump will always be at least three 

feet below the maximum drawdown level of the well. 

The bottom of the motor should never be installed 

lower than the top of the well screen or within five 

feet of the well bottom. 

4

2.4 Motor cooling requirements 

To ensure proper motor cooling, refer to the table below 

for minimum flow requirements: 

Flow velocity 

past the motor 

0.0 f/s 

(free convection) 

Min. 0.5 f/s 

Maximum 

liquid temperature 

86°F (30°C) 

104°F (40°C) 

If the pump is to be installed horizontally, e.g. in a 

tank, and there is a risk that the pump might be covered 

by mud, it must be installed in a flow sleeve. 

2.5 Liquid temperatures/cooling 

Figure 1 shows an SQ/SQE pump installed in a well. 

With the pump operating, figure 1 illustrates the following: 

• Well diameter 

• Pump diameter 

• Temperature of pumped liquid 

• Flow past the motor to the pump suction strainer. 

Note: The well diameter must be at least 3 inches. 

If there is a risk that the motor will be covered with 

sediment, it is recommended the pump be placed in a 

flow sleeve. The motor should always be installed 

above the well screen. 

2.6 Motor preparation 

Grundfos MS 3 and MSE 3 submersible motors have 

water-lubricated slide bearings. No additional lubrication 

is required. 

The submersible motors are factory-filled with a special 

Grundfos motor liquid, type SML 2, which will protect 

the motor liquid down to 4°F (–20°C) and prevent 

the growth of bacteria. The level of motor liquid is important 

for the operating life of the bearings and consequently 

the life of the motor. 

2.7 Refilling of motor liquid 

If for any reason the motor liquid has been drained or 

lost, the motor must be refilled with Grundfos motor 

liquid SML 2. 

To refill the motor, proceed as follows: 

1. Remove the cable guard and separate the pump 

end from the motor. 

2. Place the motor in vertical position with an inclination 

of approximately 10°. 

3. Remove the filling plug using a screwdriver or a 

similar tool. 

4. Inject motor liquid into the motor with a filling syringe 

or similar tool, see fig. 2. 

5. To allow possible air to escape, move the motor 

from side to side and turn the shaft. 

6. Replace the filling plug and make sure it is tight. 

7. Assemble pump end and motor. 

8. Fit the cable guard. 

The pump is now ready for installation. 

Well 

diameter 

Pump 

diameter 

10 

Liquid 

temperature 

TM02 9606 3504 

TM01 0518 1297 

Fig. 2 

Injecting motor liquid 

Fig. 1 

Pump installed in well 

5

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• • 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• • 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• • 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• • 

• 

• • 

• 

• • 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• • 

• • 

• • 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• • 

• 

• • 

• 

• • 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• • 

• 

• • 

• 

• • 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• • 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• • 

• 

• 

• 

• • 

• 

• • 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• • 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• • 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• • 

• 

• 

• • 

• 

• 

• • 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• • 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• • 

• 

• 

• 

• • 

• 

• • 

• 

• 

• • 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• • 

• • 

• • 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• • 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• • 

• 

• 

• 

• • 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• • 

• 

• 

• • 

• 

• 

• • 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

3. Installation positions 

3.1 Positional requirements 

The pump is suitable for vertical as well as horizontal 

installation, however, the pump shaft must never fall 

below the horizontal plane, see fig. 3. 

If the pump is to be installed horizontally, e.g. in a 

tank, and there is a risk that the pump might be covered 

by mud, it must be installed in a flow sleeve. 

Supply voltage: 

1 x 90-120 V or 1 x 200-240 V –10%/+6%, 50/60 Hz. 

The current consumption can only be measured accurately 

by means of a true RMS instrument. If other instruments 

are used, the value measured will differ 

from the actual value. 

The SQE pumps can be connected to a CU 300 or 

CU 301 control box. 

4.2 Motor protection 

The motor has built-in automatic thermal overload 

protection and requires no additional motor protection. 

Allowed 

Not allowed 

Fig. 3 Pump position 

4. Electrical connection 

TM01 1375 4397 

4.3 Connection of motor 

The motor can be connected directly to the main circuit 

breaker. 

Start/stop of the pump will typically be done via a 

pressure switch, see fig. 4. 

Note: The pressure switch must be rated for the maximum 

amps of the specific pump. 

Reduced risk of electric shock during operation 

of this pump requires the provision of 

acceptable grounding. If the means of connection 

to the supply connected box is 

other than grounded metal conduit, ground 

the pump back to the service by connecting 

a copper conductor, at least the size of the 

circuit supplying the pump. 

4.1 General 

The electrical connection should be carried out by an 

authorized electrician in accordance with local regulations. 

Before starting work on the pump, make 

sure that the electricity supply has been 

switched off and that it cannot be accidentally 

switched on. 

The pump must be grounded. 

The pump must be connected to an external 

mains switch. 

The supply voltage, rated maximum current and 

power factor (PF) appear on the motor nameplate. 

The required voltage for Grundfos submersible 

MS 3/MSE 3 motors, measured at the motor terminals, 

is –10%/+6% of the nominal voltage during continuous 

operation (including variation in the supply 

voltage and losses in cables). 

If the pump is connected to an installation where a 

Ground Fault circuit breaker (GFI) is used as additional 

protection, this circuit breaker must trip out when 

ground fault currents with DC content (pulsating DC) 

occur. 

Note: The pump must never be connected to a capacitor 

or to another type of control box than CU 300 or 

CU 301. 

Note: The pump must never be connected to an external 

frequency converter. 

Single-phase 2-wire wiring diagram 

for Grundfos motors 

Pressure 

switch 

Quick disconnection 

Black 

Black 

Green 

Pump and motor 

Fig. 4 Wiring diagram 



CU 301. 

TM02 8736 0804 

6

5. Cable sizing 

Single-phase 60 Hz maximum cable length motor service to entrance: 

Motor rating 

Copper wire size 

Volts hp 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 0 00 

115 0.5 65 100 160 260 410 660 1050 1680 

230 0.5 300 480 760 1210 1930 3060 4870 

230 0.75 190 300 470 750 1190 1890 3010 4800 

230 1.0 140 220 350 560 890 1420 2260 3600 4540 

230 1.5 130 210 330 520 830 1320 2110 3360 4230 

6. Splicing the cable 

Splice the drop cable with the motor cable. If the 

splice is carefully made, it will be as efficient as any 

other portion of the cable and will be completely 

watertight. 

There are a number of cable splicing kits available today 

- epoxy-filled, rubber-sealed, etc. Many perform 

well if the manufacturer’s directions are followed 

carefully. If one of these kits is not used, we recommend 

the following method for splicing the motor 

cable to the drop cable: 

1. Examine the motor cable and the drop cable carefully 

for damage. 

2. Cut the motor leads off in a staggered manner. 

3. Cut the ends of the drop cable so that the ends 

match up with the motor leads. 

Be sure to match the colors. 

4. Strip back and strip off one inch of insulation from 

each lead, making sure to scrape the wire bare to 

obtain a good connection. 

Be careful not to damage the copper conductor 

when stripping off the insulation. 

5. Insert a properly sized Sta-Kon-type connector 

on each pair of leads, again making sure that colors 

are matched. 

Using Sta-Kon crimping pliers, indent the lugs. 

Be sure to squeeze down hard on the pliers, particularly 

when using large cable. 

6. Form a piece of electrical putty tightly around 

each Sta-Kon. The putty should overlap on the 

insulation of the wire. 

7. Use a good quality tape such as #33 Scotch Waterproof 

or Plymouth Rubber Company Slipknot Grey. 

Wrap each wire and joint tightly for a distance of 

about 2½ inches on each side of the joint. 

Make a minimum of four passes over each joint 

and overlap each pass approximately one inch to 

ensure a completely watertight seal. 

Note: Do not lower or lift the pump using the motor 

cable. 

7. Fitting the cable plug to the motor 

The cable plug supplied with the motor is factorygreased. 

Check that the plug is greased correctly, 

see fig. 5. 

Fig. 5 

Greasing of plug 

To fit the cable plug, proceed as follows: 

1. Check that the cable is of the correct type, crosssection 

and length. 

2. Check that the mains on the location has correct 

connection to ground. 

3. Check that the motor socket is clean and dry. 

4. Press the cable plug onto the motor socket. 

The plug will only fit one way, see fig. 6. 

5. Fit and tighten the four screws, see fig. 6. 

When the plug has been fitted, there must not be 

a clearance between the motor and the cable plug. 

TM02 9604 3504 

TM02 9605 3504 

Fig. 6 Fitting the cable plug 

7

8. Fitting the cable guard 

To fit the cable guard, proceed as follows: 

1. Make sure that the motor lead lies flat in the cable 

guard. 

2. Place the cable guard in the groove in the cable 

plug. The two flaps must engage with the upper 

edge of the pump sleeve, see fig. 7. 

9. Piping 

• The pump should only be gripped by the two flats 

at the top of the pump, see fig. 9. 

• The pump can be installed vertically or horizontally. 

During operation, the pump must always be completely 

submerged in water. 

• When plastic pipe is used, a stainless steel safety 

wire is recommended for lowering and lifting the 

pump. Fasten the wire to the eyelet on the pump, 

see fig. 10. 

• The threaded joints must be well cut and fit together 

tightly to ensure that they do not work 

loose. 

Fig. 7 

Placing the cable guard 

3. Fasten the cable guard to the pump suction 

strainer with the two self-tapping screws supplied, 

see fig. 8. 

TM02 9613 3504 

Fig. 9 Gripping the pump 

TM01 4427 0299 

TM02 8739 0804 

Fig. 8 Fitting the cable guard to the pump suction 

strainer 

8

10. Installing the pump 

10.1 Installation depth 

The dynamic water level should always be above the 

pump, see fig. 10. 

A = Dynamic water level 

B = Static water level 

C = Minimum 3 inch well diameter 

D= Drawdown 

E = Installation depth below static water level. 

Maximum 500 feet. 

A 

B 

Fig. 10 Installation depth 

Procedure: 

To install the pump, proceed as follows: 

1. Attach the enclosed data plate sticker at the well 

head. 

2. Check the well for proper clearance. The well must 

be at least 3 inches in diameter. It is a good idea to 

check the well for clearance using a plumb ring 

(2.95 ø x 10 in.). 

3. Attach the first section of riser pipe to the pump. 

4. Lower the pump into the well. Make sure the motor 

cable is not damaged when the pump is lifted 

or lowered into the well, especially in 3 inch wells. 


cable. 

C 

E 

D 

TM02 8740 0804 

5. When the pump has been installed to the required 

depth, the installation should be finished by 

means of a well seal. 

Note that the dynamic water level should always 

be above the pump. 

6. Loosen the safety wire so that it becomes unloaded 

and lock it to the well seal using a cable 

clamp. 

7. Complete the electrical connections. 



CU 301. 

Installation depths: 

Maximum installation depth: 

500 feet below the static water level. 

Minimum installation depth: 

1.75 feet below the dynamic water level. 

Vertical installation: 

During start-up and operation, the pump must always 

be completely submerged in water. 

Horizontal installation: 

The pump must be installed at least 1.75 feet below 

the dynamic water level. 

If there is a risk that the pump might be covered by 

mud, the pump must always be placed in a flow 

sleeve. 


cable. 

11. Generator operation 

It is safe to operate the SQ/SQE with a generator. 

The generator must be sized 50% above the P1 (input 

power) values of the pump. See the following table. 

Motor 

[hp] 

Min. 

generator size 

[W] 

Recommended 

generator output 

[W] 

0.5 1200 1500 

0.75 1900 2500 

1.0 2600 3200 

1.5 2800 3500 

9

12. Starting the pump for the first time 

When the pump has been connected correctly, the 

pump should be started with the discharge valve 

closed approximately one third. 

Due to the soft start feature, the pump takes approximately 

2 seconds to develop full pressure. 

12.1 Motor cooling and other considerations 

• Make sure the well is capable of yielding a minimum 

quantity of water corresponding to the pump 

capacity. 

• Do not start the pump until it is completely submerged 

in the liquid. 

• As the valve is being opened, the drawdown should 

be checked to ensure that the pump always remains 

submerged. 

• To ensure the necessary cooling of the motor, the 

pump should never be set so low that it gives no 

water. 

If the flow rate suddenly falls, the reason might be 

that the pump is pumping more water than the 

well can yield. The pump must immediately be 

stopped and the fault corrected. 

12.2 Impurities in the water 

If there are impurities in the water, the valve should 

be opened gradually as the water becomes clearer. 

The pump should not be stopped until the water is 

clean, otherwise the pump parts and the check valve 

may become clogged. 

When the water is clean, the valve should be fully 

opened. 

12.3 Minimum flow rate 

To ensure the necessary cooling of the motor, the 

pump flow rate should never be set to a value lower 

than 0.2 gpm. 

If the flow rate suddenly falls, the reason might be 

that the pump is pumping more water than the well 

can yield. The pump must immediately be stopped 

and the fault corrected. 

Note: The pump’s dry-running protection is effective 

only within the recommended duty range of the 

pump. 

Note: Do not let the pump run against a closed discharge 

valve for more than 5 minutes. When the discharge 

valve is closed, there is no cooling flow and 

there is a risk of overheating in motor and pump. 

12.5 Resetting the pump 

Switch off the electricity supply for 1 minute. 

The motor is protected against the following conditions: 

• dry running 

• voltage surges (up to 6000 V) 

In areas with high lightning intensity, external 

lightning protection is required. 

• overvoltage 

• undervoltage 

• overload 

• overtemperature. 

12.6 MS 3 motors 

Note: All MS 3 motors are factory-set to detect dryrunning 

conditions. 

Check that the combination of pump and motor corresponds 

to the data on page 39. 

12.7 MSE 3 motors 

Note: All MSE 3 motors are factory-set to detect dryrunning 

conditions. However, if the maximum pump 

speed setting is changed, the dry running stop value 

must also be changed. Please refer to either the 

CU 301 or CU 300 I&O for instructions on this procedure. 

12.8 Maintenance and service 

The pumps are normally maintenance-free. 

Deposits and wear may occur. For that purpose, service 

kits and service tools are available from 

Grundfos. 

The Grundfos Service Manual is available on request. 

The pumps can be serviced at a Grundfos service center. 

12.4 Built-in protection 

The motor incorporates an electronic unit which protects 

the motor in various situations. 

• In case of overload, the built-in overload protection 

will stop the pump for 5 minutes. After that period, 

the pump will attempt to restart. 

• If the pump has been stopped as a result of dry running, 

it will start automatically after 5 minutes. 

• If the pump is restarted and the well has not recovered, 

the pump will stop after 30 seconds. 

10

13. Assembly of pump and motor 

To assemble pump end and motor, proceed as follows: 

1. Place the motor horizontally in a vice and tighten 

it, see fig. 12. 

2. Pull the pump shaft out to the position shown in 

fig. 11. 

TM02 8425 5203 

Fig. 11 Pump shaft position 

3. Grease the motor shaft end with the grease supplied 

with the motor. 

4. Screw the pump end on the motor (55 Nm). 

Note: The pump shaft must engage with the motor 

shaft. 

A spanner may be used on the clamping faces of 

the pump end, see fig. 12. 

5. Fit the cable guard as described in section 8. 

Use pump vice here 

6.14" 

L 

TM01 2854 3804 

Fig. 12 Pump in vice 

0.5 hp: L = 4.7". 

0.75 hp: L = 4.0". 

1.0 hp: L = 2.6". 

1.5 hp: L = 2.6". 

When pump end and motor have been assembled correctly, 

there must be no clearance between pump end 

and motor. 

To disassemble, reverse procedure. 

11

14. Troubleshooting 

Fault Cause Remedy 

1. The pump does 

not run. 

2. The pump runs but 

gives no water. 

3. The pump runs at 

reduced capacity. 

4. Frequent starts 

and stops. 

a) The fuses are blown. Replace the blown fuses. If the new fuses 

blow too, check the electrical installation 

and the drop cable. 

b) The GFI circuit breaker has tripped. Reset the circuit breaker. 

c) No electricity supply. Contact the electricity provider. 

d) The motor protection has cut off the Check for motor/pump blockage. 

electricity supply due to overload. 

e) The drop cable is defective. Repair or replace the pump/cable. 

f) Overvoltage has occurred. Check the electricity supply. 

a) The discharge valve is closed. Open the valve. 

b) No water or too low water level in 

well. 

c) The check valve is stuck in its closed 

position. 

Increase the installation depth of the pump, 

throttle the pump or replace it with a 

smaller capacity model. 

Pull the pump and clean or replace the 

valve. 

d) The suction strainer is closed. Pull the pump and clean the strainer. 

e) The pump is defective. Repair or replace the pump. 

a) The drawdown is larger than 

anticipated. 

b) The valves in the discharge pipe are 

partly closed/blocked. 

c) The discharge pipe is partly choked 

by impurities (iron bacteria). 

d) The check valve of the pump is 

blocked. 

e) The pump and the riser pipe are 

partly choked by impurities 

(iron bacteria). 

Increase the installation depth of the pump, 

throttle the pump or replace it with a 

smaller capacity model. 

Check and clean or replace the valves as 

necessary. 

Clean or replace the discharge pipe. 


valve. 

Pull the pump. Check and clean or replace 

the pump, if necessary. Clean the pipes. 

f) The pump is defective. Repair or replace the pump. 

g) Hole in discharge pipe. Check and repair the piping. 

h) The riser pipe is defective. Replace the riser pipe. 

i) Undervoltage has occurred. Check the electricity supply. 

a) The differential of the pressure 

switch between the start and stop 

pressures is too small. 

b) The water level electrodes or level 

switches in the reservoir have not 

been installed correctly. 

c) The check valve is leaking or stuck 

half-open. 

Increase the differential. However, the stop 

pressure must not exceed the operating 

pressure of the pressure tank and the start 

pressure should be high enough to ensure 

sufficient water supply. 

Adjust the intervals of the electrodes/level 

switches to ensure suitable time between 

the cutting-in and cutting-out of the pump. 

See installation and operating instructions 

for the automatic devices used. If the 

intervals between start/stop cannot be 

changed via the automatics, the pump 

capacity may be reduced by throttling the 

discharge valve. 


check valve. 

d) The supply voltage is unstable. Check the electricity supply. 

e) The motor temperature is too high. Check the water temperature. 

12

14.1 Instruments not allowed 

Note: The use of the following instruments is not allowed 

during troubleshooting. 

Insulation 

test 

M 

Resistance 

test 

High-voltage 

test 

V 

TM01 2072 1098 

Fig. 13 Instruments not allowed 

Note: When measuring, use RMS instruments. 

15. Checking of motor and cable 

1. Supply voltage 

Measure the voltage L1 (RMS) 

between phase and L2. 

Connect the voltmeter to the 

terminals at the connections. 

The voltage should, when the motor is 

loaded, be within the range specified in section 

4. Electrical connection. 

Large variations in supply voltage indicate 

poor electricity supply, and the pump should 

be stopped until the problem has been corrected. 

L 

N 

PE 

TM00 1371 5092 

2. Current consumption 

TM00 1372 5082 

Measure the current (RMS) 

while the pump is operating at 

a constant discharge head 

(if possible, at the capacity 

where the motor is most 

heavily loaded). 

For maximum current, see motor 

nameplate. 

If the current exceeds the full-load current, 

there are the following possible faults: 

• Poor connection in the leads, possibly in 

the cable joint. 

• Too low supply voltage, see item 1. 

16. Environment 

During handling, operation, storage and transport, all 

environment regulations dealing with the handling of 

hazardous materials must be observed. 

When the pump is taken out of operation, 

it must be ensured that no hazardous material 

is left in the pump and in the riser 

pipe, which can be injurious to persons and 

the environment. 

17. Disposal 

Disposal of this product or parts of it must be carried 

out according to the following guidelines: 

1. Use the local public or private waste collection service. 

2. If such waste collection service does not exist or 

cannot handle the materials used in the product, 

please deliver the product or any hazardous materials 

from it to your nearest Grundfos company or 

service center. 

13

18. Technical data 


1 x 90-120 V –10%/+6%, 50/60 Hz, PE. 

1 x 200-240 V –10%/+6%, 50/60 Hz, PE. 

Operation via generator 

Recommended generator output must be equal to 

P1 [kW] + 50% and minimum P1 + 10%. 

Starting current 

The motor starting current is equal to the highest 

value stated on the motor nameplate. 

Starting 

Soft starting. 

Run-up time 

Maximum 2 seconds. 

Motor protection 

The motor is protected against dry running, overvoltage, 

undervoltage, overload and overtemperature. 

Power factor 

PF = 1. 

Service factor 

0.5 hp: 1.85 at 115 V/230 V. 

0.75 hp: 2.05 at 230 V. 

1.0 hp: 2.25 at 230 V. 

1.5 hp: 1.65 at 230 V. 

Motor cable 

3 Wire, 14 AWG XLPE. 

Length: 5 feet. 

Motor liquid 

Type SML 2. 

pH values 

5 to 9. 

Liquid temperature 

The temperature of the pumped liquid must not exceed 

104°F. 

Note: If liquids with a viscosity higher than that of 

water are to be pumped, please contact Grundfos. 

Discharge port 

5 SQ/SQE: 1" NPT. 

10-15 SQ/SQE: 1¼" NPT. 

22-30 SQ/SQE: 1½" NPT. 

Storage conditions 

Minimum ambient temperature: 4°F. 

Maximum ambient temperature: 140°F. 

Freeze protection 

Note: The motor must not be stored without being 

filled with motor liquid. 

If the pump has to be stored after use, it must be 

stored on a frost-free location or it must be ensured 

that the motor liquid is frost-proof. 

Operating conditions 

Minimum ambient liquid temperature: 32°F. 

Maximum ambient liquid temperature: 104°F. 

Motor dimensions (MS 3 and MSE 3) 

0.5 hp: 20.9" length x 2.68" diameter. 




Motor weights (MS 3 and MSE 3) 

0.5 hp: 6.0 lbs. 

0.75 hp: 7.1 lbs. 

1.0 hp: 8.2 lbs. 

1.5 hp: 8.2 lbs. 

Pump end dimensions 

Pump diameter: 2.68". 

Pump diameter, incl. cable guard: 2.91". 

Pump end dimensions (min. and max.) 

5 SQ/SQE: 10.6" to 18.0". 

10 SQ/SQE: 10.6" to 14.8". 

15 SQ/SQE: 10.6" to 16.9". 

22 SQ/SQE: 10.6" to 16.9". 

30 SQ/SQE: 10.6" to 13.7". 

Pump end weights (min. and max.) 

All SQ/SQE models: 2.2 lbs to 3.5 lbs. 

Well diameter 

Minimum 3". 

Installation depth 

Maximum 500 feet below static water level. 

Subject to alterations. 

14

Pump models 

Pump type 

Accessories 

Power P 2 

[hp] 

Voltage 

[V] 

Flow range 

[gpm] 

Min. well dia. 

Disch. 

5SQ/SQE-90 0.5 230/115 1.5-7.5 3" 1" NPT 

5SQ/SQE-140 0.5 230/115 1.5-7.5 3" 1" NPT 

5SQ/SQE-180 0.5 230/115 1.5-7.5 3" 1" NPT 

5SQ/SQE-230 0.75 230 1.5-7.5 3" 1" NPT 

5SQ/SQE-270 0.75 230 1.5-7.5 3" 1" NPT 

5SQ/SQE-320 0.75 230 1.5-7.5 3" 1" NPT 

5SQ/SQE-360 1.0 230 1.5-7.5 3" 1" NPT 

5SQ/SQE-410 1.0 230 1.5-7.5 3" 1" NPT 

5SQ/SQE-450 1.5 230 1.5-7.5 3" 1" NPT 

10SQ/SQE-110 0.5 230/115 3-15 3" 1¼" NPT 

10SQ/SQE-160 0.5 230/115 3-15 3" 1¼" NPT 

10SQ/SQE-200 0.75 230 3-15 3" 1¼" NPT 

10SQ/SQE-240 0.75 230 3-15 3" 1¼" NPT 

10SQ/SQE-290 1.0 230 3-15 3" 1¼" NPT 

10SQ/SQE-330 1.5 230 3-15 3" 1¼" NPT 

15SQ/SQE-70 0.5 230/115 4-20 3" 1¼" NPT 

15SQ/SQE-110 0.5 230/115 4-20 3" 1¼" NPT 

15SQ/SQE-150 0.75 230 4-20 3" 1¼" NPT 

15SQ/SQE-180 0.75 230 4-20 3" 1¼" NPT 

15SQ/SQE-220 1.0 230 4-20 3" 1¼" NPT 

15SQ/SQE-250 1.0 230 4-20 3" 1¼" NPT 

15SQ/SQE-290 1.5 230 4-20 3" 1¼" NPT 

22SQ/SQE-40 0.5 230/115 7-33 3" 1½" NPT 

22SQ/SQE-80 0.5 230/115 7-33 3" 1½" NPT 

22SQ/SQE-120 0.75 230 7-33 3" 1½" NPT 

22SQ/SQE-160 1.0 230 7-33 3" 1½" NPT 

22SQ/SQE-190 1.0 230 7-33 3" 1½" NPT 

22SQ/SQE-220 1.5 230 7-33 3" 1½" NPT 

30SQ/SQE-40 0.5 230/115 8-42 3" 1½" NPT 

30SQ/SQE-90 0.75 230 8-42 3" 1½" NPT 

30SQ/SQE-130 1.0 230 8-42 3" 1½" NPT 

Product 

Part number 

CU 300 96422776 

CU 301 96436754 

Flow sleeve 96037505 

Grease 96037562 

Flow switch 96022967 

Pressure transmitter 96026030 

39

U.S.A. 

GRUNDFOS Pumps Corporation 

17100 West 118th Terrace 

Olathe, Kansas 66061 

Phone: +1-913-227-3400 

Telefax: +1-913-227-3500 

Canada 

GRUNDFOS Canada Inc. 

2941 Brighton Road 

Oakville, Ontario 

L6H 6C9 

Phone: +1-905 829 9533 

Telefax: +1-905 829 9512 

Mexico 

Bombas GRUNDFOS de Mexico 

S.A. de C.V. 

Boulevard TLC No. 15 

Parque Industrial Stiva 

Aeropuerto 

Apodaca, N.L. 66600 

Mexico 

Phone: +52-81-8144 4000 

Telefax: +52-81-8144 4010 

Addresses revised 18.04.2002

Being responsible is our foundation 

Thinking ahead makes it possible 

Innovation is the essence 

L-SP-TL-017 R 5/06 

R PRINTED IN USA 

US 

www.grundfos.com

Pressure 

Series 

626 

& 

628 

Industrial Pressure Transmitter 

Complete Offering of Ranges, Connections and Outputs 

Liquid Tight Fitting 

Cord Diameter Range 

.200 to .350 (5.08 to 8.89) 

1-9/32 

(32.54) 

Conduit Housing (-CH) 

1-3/32 

(27.76) 

1/4 NPT 

2-15/16 (74.61) 

Optional 1/4 NPT 

Female Fitting 

3-1/2 (88.90) 

1/4 NPT 

Male Fitting 

1/4 NPT 

5-1/2 (139.70) 

3/4 

(19.05) 

Ø55/64 [21.83] 

General Purpose Housing (-GH) 

7/8 [22.23] 

HEX 

2-27/64 [61.52] 

The Series 626 Pressure Transmitters possess a highly precise 

0.25% piezo-resistive sensor contained in a compact, rugged, NEMA 4X 

stainless steel general purpose housing or cast aluminum conduit housing. 

The Series 628 Pressure Transmitters are ideal for OEMs with 1% 

full scale accuracy sensors. The transmitter is also available in the general 

purpose stainless steel housing and the cast aluminum conduit 

housing. 

The highly corrosive resistant 316L stainless steel wetted parts allow 

the Series 626 and 628 transmitters to measure the pressure in a multitude 

of processes from hydraulic oils to chemicals. The Series 626 

and 628 are available in ranges of vacuum, compound to 5000 psi with 

a variety of optional outputs, process connections and electrical terminations 

to allow you to select the right transmitter for your application. 

APPLICATIONS 

• Compressors 

• Pumping Systems 

• Irrigation Equipment 

• Hydraulic 

• Industrial Process Monitoring 

3-13/64 [81.36] 


Service: Compatible gases and liquids. 

Wetted Materials: Type 316 SS, 316L SS. 

Accuracy: 626: 0.25% full scale. 628: 1% full scale (includes linearity, 

hysteresis, and repeatability). 

Temperature Limit: 0 to 200°F (-18 to 93°C). 

Compensated Temperature Range: 0 to 175°F (-18 to 79°C). 

Thermal Effect: 626: ±0.02% FS/°F. 628: ±0.04% FS/°F (includes 

zero and span). 

Pressure Limits: See table. 

Power Requirements: 13 to 30 VDC. 

Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA. Optional 0-5, 1-5, 0-10, 1-6 or 2-10. 

Response Time: 50 msec. 

Loop Resistance: 0 - 1300 ohms maximum for current. For voltage 

outputs, minimum load resistance: 2000 ohms. 

Current Consumption: 38 mA (maximum). 

Electrical Connections: Conduit Housing (-CH): terminal block, 

1/2˝ female NPT conduit. General Purpose Housing (-GH): cable, DIN 

connector or 4 pin M-12. 

Process Connection: 1/4˝ male or female NPT and BSPT. 

Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X (IP66). 

Mounting Orientation: Mount in any position. 

Weight: 10 oz (283 g). 

Agency Approvals: CE. 

PRESSURE LIMITS 

Range Pressure 

Number Range (psig) 

00 30˝ Hg-0 

01 30-0-15 

02 30-0-30 

03 30-0-45 

04 30-0-60 

05 30-0-100 

06 0-5 

07 0-15 

08 0-30 

09 0-50 

10 0-100 

Maximum 

Pressure (psig) 

30 

30 

60 

100 

200 

200 

10 

30 

60 

100 

200 

Over 


150 

150 

300 

300 

500 

500 

50 

150 

300 

300 

500 

Range 

Number 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

26 

Pressure 

Range (psig) 

0-150 

0-200 

0-300 

0-500 

0-1000 

0-1500 

0-2000 

0-3000 

0-5000 

0-8000 

Maximum 


300 

400 

600 

1000 

2000 

3000 

4000 

6000 

7500 

10000 

Over 


750 

1000 

1500 

2500 

5000 

5000 

5000 

7500 

10000 

12000 

125 

VISIT OUR WEBSITES: www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au

MODEL ORDERING CHART 

Accuracy 

Range 

Housing 

Process Connection 

Electrical 

Connection 

Signal Output 

Options 

626 

628 

-00 

-01 

-02 

-03 

-04 

-05 

-06 

-07 

-08 

-09 

-10 

-11 

-12 

-13 

-14 

-15 

-16 

-17 

-18 

-19 

-26 

-CH 

-GH 

-P1 

-P2 

-P3 

-P4 

-P5 

-E1 

-E2 

-E3 

-E4 

-E5 

-E6 

-S1 

-S2 

-S3 

-S4 

-S5 

-S6 

-AT 

-NIST 

-LED 

0.25% Full Scale Accuracy 

1.0% Full Scale Accuracy 

0-30˝ Hg Vacuum 

30-0-15 psi 

30-0-30 psi 

30-0-45 psi 

30-0-60 psi 

30-0-100 psi 

0-5 psi 

0-15 psi 

0-30 psi 

0-50 psi 

0-100 psi 

0-150 psi 

0-200 psi 

0-300 psi 

0-500 psi 

0-1000 psi 

0-1500 psi 

0-2000 psi 

0-3000 psi 

0-5000 psi 

0-8000 psi 

Conduit Housing 

General Purpose Housing 

1/4˝ male NPT 

1/4˝ female NPT 

1/4˝ male BSPT 

1/4˝ female BSPT 

Refrigerant Valve Depressor 

Cable Gland with 3’ of Prewired Cable 



DIN Connector 

Available with -GH Housing Only 

1/2˝ female NPT Conduit 

Available with -CH Housing Only 

M-12 4 Pin Connector 

4-20 mA 

1-5 Volt 

2-10 Volt 

0-5 Volt 

0-10 Volt 

1-6 Volt 

Aluminum Tag 

NIST Traceable Certificate 

Bright Red LED display. 

Available with -CH housing only 

Pressure 

626 with LED Display (CH housing only) 

Note: LED option is not NEMA 4X rated. 

Optional -E4 DIN Connector 

(GH housing only) 

CALL TO ORDER: U.S. Phone 219 879-8000 • U.K. Phone (+44) (0)1494-461707 • Asia Pacific Phone 61 2 4272-2055 126

Bulletin E-111 

Series 626 & 628 Pressure Transmitters 

Specifications - Installation and Operating Instructions 

Liquid Tight Fitting 

Cord Diameter Range 

.200 to .350 (5.08 to 8.89) 

1-9/32 

(32.54) 

-CH Conduit Housing 

1-3/32 

(27.76) 

1/4 NPT 

2-15/16 (74.61) 

Optional 1/4 NPT 

Female Fitting 

3-1/2 (88.90) 

1/4 NPT 

Male Fitting 

5-1/2 (139.70) 

3/4 

(19.05) 

1/4 NPT 

055/64 [21.83] 

-GH General Purpose Housing 

7/8 [22.23] 

HEX 

2-27/64 [61.52] 

3-13/64 [81.36] 

The Dwyer Series 626 and 628 Pressure Transmitters converts 

a single positive pressure into a standard 4-20 mA output 

signal. The Series 626 and 628 can be used to accurately measure 

compatible gases and liquids; Series 626 full scale accuracy 

is 0.25%; Series 628 full scale accuracy is 1.0% (see specifications). 

Designed for industrial environments with a NEMA 4X (IP66) 

housing, this transmitter resists most effects of shock and vibration. 

Pressure 

Range (psig) 

30˝ Hg-0 

30-0-15 

30-0-30 

30-0-45 

30-0-60 

30-0-100 

0-5 

0-15 

0-30 

0-50 

0-100 

0-150 

0-200 

0-300 

0-500 

0-1000 

0-1500 

0-2000 

0-3000 

0-5000 

CAUTION: Do not exceed specified supply voltage 

ratings. Permanent damage not covered by warranty 

will result. This device is not designed for 120 or 240 

volt AC operation. Use only on 13 to 30 VDC. 

Pressure Ranges 

Maximum 


30 

30 

60 

100 

200 

200 

10 

30 

60 

100 

200 

300 

400 

600 

1000 

2000 

3000 

4000 

6000 

7500 

Over 


150 

150 

300 

300 

500 

500 

50 

150 

300 

300 

500 

750 

1000 

1500 

2500 

5000 

5000 

5000 

7500 

10000 


Service: Compatible gases and liquids. 

Wetted Materials: Type 316, 316L SS. 

Accuracy: 626: 0.25% full scale. 628: 1% full scale (includes linearity, 

hysteresis, and repeatability). 

Temperature Limit: 0 to 200°F (-18 to 93°C). 

Compensated Temperature Range: 0 to 175°F (-18 to 79°C). 

Thermal Effect: 626: ±0.02% FS/°F. 628: ±0.04% FS/°F 

(includes zero and span). 

Pressure Limits: See table. 

Power Requirements: 13 to 30 VDC. 

Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA. Optional 0-5, 1-5, 0-10, 1-6 or 2-10. 

Response Time: 50 msec. 

Loop Resistance: 0 - 1300 ohms maximum for current. For voltage 

outputs, minimum load resistance: 2000 ohms. 

Current Consumption: 38 mA (maximum). 

Electrical Connections: Conduit Housing (-CH): terminal block, 

1/2˝ female NPT conduit. General Purpose Housing (-GH): cable, 

DIN connector or 4-pin. 

Process Connection: 1/4˝ male/female NPT and BSPT. 

Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X (IP66). 

Mounting Orientation: Mount in any position. 

Weight: 10 oz (283 g). 

Agency Approvals: CE: EN 61000-4-2 

EN 61000-4-3 

EN 61000-4-4 

EN 61000-4-5 

EN 61000-4-6 

INSTALLATION 

1. Location: Select a location where the temperature of the transmitter 

will be between 0 and 175°F (-18 to 79°C). Distance from 

the receiver is limited only by total loop resistance. The tubing or 

piping supplying pressure to the unit can be practically any length 

required but long lengths will increase response time slightly. 

2. Position: The transmitter is not position sensitive. However all 

standard models are originally calibrated with the unit in a position 

with the pressure connection downward. Although they can be 

used at other angles, for best accuracy it is recommended that 

units be installed in the position calibrated at the factory. 

3. Pressure Connection: Use a small amount of plumber’s tape 

or other suitable sealants to prevent leaks. Be sure the pressure 

passage inside the port is not blocked. 

DWYER INSTRUMENTS, INC. Phone: 219/879-8000 www.dwyer-inst.com 

P.O. BOX 373 • MICHIGAN CITY, INDIANA 46361, U.S.A. Fax: 219/872-9057 e-mail: info@dwyer-inst.com

4. Electrical Connections 

Wire Length - The maximum length of wire connecting the transmitter 

and receiver is a function of wire size and receiver resistance. 

Wiring should not contribute more than 10% of the receiver 

resistance to total loop resistance. For extremely long runs (over 

1000 feet), choose receivers with higher resistance to minimize the 

size and cost of connecting leads. Where wiring length is under 

100 feet, wire as small as 22 AWG can be used. 

CURRENT (4-20 mA) OUTPUT OPERATION 

An external power supply delivering 13-30 VDC with minimum 

current capability of 40 mA DC (per transmitter) is required to 

power the control loop. See Fig. A for connection of the power 

supply, transmitter and receiver. The range of appropriate receiver 

load resistance (RL) for the DC power supply voltage available is 

expressed by the formula: 

RL Max = Vps – 13 

20 mA DC 

Shielded cable is recommended for control loop wiring. 

PRESSURE 

TRANSMITTER 

1 RED 

2 BLACK 

3 (NC) 

4 (NC) 

Current Output 

RECEIVER 

Fig. A 

POWER 

SUPPLY 

13-30 VDC 

Bulletin E-111 

VOLTAGE (0-5, 1-5, 0-10, 1-6 or 2-10 Volt) OUTPUT 

OPERATION 

(Other outputs contact the factory) See Fig. E for connection of the 

power supply, transmitter and receiver. 

PRESSURE 

TRANSMITTER 

1 RED 

2 BLACK (COMMON) 

3 WHITE (+V OUT) 

4 (NC) 

RECEIVER 

Votage Output 

+V in 

Fig. E 

4c. Conduit Housing (-CH) Electrical connections to the pressure 

transmitters are made to the terminal block located inside the 

housing. Remove the screws and lift off the cover. Wire as shown 

below in Fig. F. Termianl 1 is positive (+), terminal 2 is negative (-), 

terminal 3 is Vout. If ordering optional pre-wired cable, black wire 

is negative (-), red wire is positive (+) and white wire is output. 

TERMINAL 1 (+) 

TERMINAL 2 (-) 

POWER 

SUPPLY 

13-30 VDC 

4a. Conduit Housing (-CH) Electrical connections to the pressure 

transmitters are made to the terminal block located inside the 

housing. Remove the screws and lift off the cover. Wire as shown 

below in Fig. B. Terminal 1 is positive (+), terminal 2 is negative (-). 

Fig. F 

TERMINAL 3 (VOUT) 

If ordering optional pre-wired cable, black wire is negative (-) and 

red wire is positive (+). 

TERMINAL 1 (+) 


4d. General Purpose Housing (-GH) When using cable version 

of -GH General Purpose Housing, black wire is negative (-), red 

wire is positive (+) and white wire is output. When using optional 

Heirschman DIN Plug, remove top-center screw and lift off the terminal 

block assembly. Wire to terminals shown below in Fig. G. For 

optional 4-pin connector, wire to pins as shown in Fig. H. 

A 


TERMINAL 1: (+) 

TERMINAL 3: (OUTPUT) 

A 

SECTION A-A 


TERMINAL 2: (-) 

TERMINAL 3: [OUTPUT] 

Fig. B 

Fig. G 

Fig. H 

4b. General Purpose Housing (-GH) When using cable version 

of -GH General Purpose Housing, black wire is negative (-) and red 

wire is positive (+). When using optional Heirschman DIN Plug, 

remove top-center screw and lift off the terminal block assembly. 

Wire to terminals shown below in Fig. C. For optional 4-pin connector, 

wire to pins as shown in Fig. D. 

A 



MAINTENANCE 

After final installation of the pressure transmitter and its companion 

receiver, no routine maintenance is required. A periodic check 

of system calibration is suggested. The Series 626 and 628 transmitters 

are not field repairable and should be returned if repair is 

needed (field repair should not be attempted and may void warranty). 

Be sure to include a brief description of the problem plus 

any relevant application notes. Contact customer service to 

receive a return goods authorization number before shipping. 

A 

Fig. C 

SECTION A-A 



Fig. D 

©Copyright 2006 Dwyer Instruments, Inc. Printed in U.S.A. 1/06 FR# 01-443271-00 Rev. 6 

DWYER INSTRUMENTS, INC. Phone: 219/879-8000 www.dwyer-inst.com 


Series 616 Differential Pressure Transmitter 

Specifications – Installation and Operating Instructions 

Bulletin E-43 

The Dwyer Series 616 Differential Pressure 

Transmitter senses the pressure of air and compatible 

gases and sends a standard 4-20 mA output signal. A wide 

range of models are available factory calibrated to specific 

ranges as listed in the chart below. The span and zero controls 

are for use when checking calibration. They are not 

intended for re-ranging to a significantly different span. 

Versatile circuit design enables operation in 2, 3 or 4-wire 

current loops. 

For applications requiring direct pressure readings or percent 

of full span output, the optional Model A-701 Digital 

Readout makes an ideal companion device. It provides a 

bright red 0.6˝ high, 3-1/2 digit LED display while supplying 

power to the Series 616 transmitter. For additional information 

on these and other Dwyer Transmitting instruments, 

see the Dwyer Full Line catalog. 

Series 616 Transmitter Models and Ranges* 

Model No. Range Max. Press. Model No. Range Max. Press. 

616-00 0-1 in. w.c. 5 psig 616-8 0-10 psid 58 psig 





616-4 0-20 in. w.c. 11 psig 616-3B 1.5-0-1.5 in. w.c. 5 psig 

616-5 0-40 in. w.c. 11 psig 616-6B 3-0-3 in. w.c. 5 psig 




Service: Air and non-combustible, compatible gases. 

Wetted Materials: Consult Factory. 

Accuracy: 616: ±0.25% F.S.; 616C: ±1.0% F.S. 

Stability: + 1% F.S./yr. 

Temperature Limits: 20 to 120°F (-6.67 to 48.9°C). 

Pressure Limits: See Chart. 

Thermal Effect: 616: ±0.055% F.S./°F (0.099% F.S./°C); 

616C: ±0.070% F.S./°F (0.125% F.S./°C). 

Power Requirements: 10-35 VDC (2, 3 or 4 wire); 16-26 

VAC (4 wire). 

Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA. 

Zero and Span Adjustments: Potentiometers for zero 

and span. 

Loop Resistance: DC: 0-1250 ohms maximum. 

AC: 0-1200 ohms maximum. 

Current Consumption: DC: 38 mA maximum. 

AC: 76mA maximum. 

Electrical Connections: Screw-type terminal block. 

Process Connections: Barbed, dual size to fit 1/8˝ and 

3/16˝ (3.12 mm and 4.76 mm) I.D. rubber or vinyl tubing. 

Mounting Orientation: Vertical, consult factory for other 

position orientations. 

Weight: 1.8 oz. (51 grams). 

*All models available with 0.25% F.S. Accuracy. 

Models available with 1.0% F.S. Accuracy include 616-1 through 616-20B. 

DWYER INSTRUMENTS, INC. Phone: 219/879-8000 

www.dwyer-inst.com 

P.O. BOX 373 • MICHIGAN CITY, INDIANA 46361, U.S.A. Fax: 219/872-9057 e-mail: lit@dwyer-inst.com

Installation 

1.0 Location 

Select a clean, dry mounting location free from excess 

vibration where the temperature will remain between 20 and 

120˚F (-6.7 and 48.9˚C). Distance from the receiver is limited 

only by total loop resistance. See Electrical Connections 

below. The tubing supplying pressure to the instrument can 

be practically any length required, but long lengths will 

increase response time slightly. 

2. Position 

A vertical position, with pressure connections pointing 

down, is recommended. That is the position in which all 

standard models are spanned and zeroed at the factory. 

They can be used at other angles, but final spanning and 

zeroing must be done while transmitter is in that alternate 

position. 

(over 1000 feet), choose receivers with higher resistance to 

minimize size and cost of connecting leads. Where wiring 

length is under 100 feet, hook-up wire as small as 22 AWG 

can be used. 

2-Wire Operation 


current capability of 40 mA DC (per transmitter) must 

be used to power the control loop. See Fig. C for connection 

of the power supply, transmitter and receiver. Note the 

jumper between terminals 3 and 4. The range of appropriate 

receiver load resistance (RL) for the DC power supply 

voltage available is expressed by the formula and graph in 

Fig. F. Shielded two wire cable is recommended for control 

loop wiring. If grounding is required, use the negative side 

of the control loop after the receiver. Otherwise, in 2-wire 

operation it is not necessary to observe polarity of control 

loop connections. 

Pressure Connections 

Two integral barbed tubing connections are provided. They 

are dual-sized to fit both 1/8˝ and 3/16˝ (3.12 and 4.76 mm) 

I.D. tubing. Be sure the pressure rating of the tubing 

exceeds that of the operating ranges. On ranges over 20 

psi, we recommend use of a suitable hose clamp to assure 

the integrity of the connection. 

PRESSURE 

TRANSMITTER 

2-Wire Connections 

Jumper 

Wire 

Receiver 

Figure C 

POWER 

SUPPLY 

10-35 VDC 

Electrical Connections 

CAUTION: Do not exceed specified supply voltage 

ratings. Permanent damage not covered by warranty 

will result. This unit is not designed for 120 or 240 

volts AC line operation. 

Electrical connections are made to the terminal block located 

on the top of the transmitter. Terminals are marked 1, 2, 

3 and 4 (see Fig. B below). Determine which of the following 

circuit drawings applies to your application and wire 

accordingly. 

SPAN AND 

ZERO ADJUST 

1 2 3 4 



current capability of 40 mA DC (per transmitter) is 

required. See Fig. D for connection of power supply, transmitter 

and receiver. The range of appropriate receiver load 

resistance (RL) for the DC power supply available is 

expressed by the formula and graph in Fig. F. Shielded 

cable is recommended for control loop wiring. Do not 

employ a separate ground in 3-wire operation. Unit will not 

function properly and/or damage could result. Control loop 

polarity must be observed in the following respect. 

Although power supply terminals 1 and 2 are not polarized, 

the receiver must be connected between terminal 3 of 

transmitter and negative side of power supply. 


HI 

LO 

PRESSURE 

TRANSMITTER 

Receiver 

mA 

POWER 

SUPPLY 

10-35 VDC 

Figure D 

Figure B 

Wire Length 

The maximum length of wire connecting transmitter and 

receiver is a function of wire size and receiver resistance. 

Wiring should not contribute more than 10% of the receiver 

resistance to total loop resistance. For extremely long runs 


An external power supply delivering 10-35 VDC with a minimum 

current capability of 40 mA DC (per transmitter) or 16- 

26 VAC with a minimum current capability of 80 mA AC (per 

transmitter) is required. See Fig. E for connection of power 

supply, transmitter and receiver. The range of appropriate 

load resistance (RL) for the DC or AC power supply available 

is expressed by the formulas and graphs in Fig’s. F and G.

Shielded cable is recommended for control loop wiring. 

Do not employ a separate ground in 4-wire operation. Unit 

will not function properly and/or damage could result. 

Control loop polarity must be observed; terminal 3 is negative 

and terminal 4 is positive. 

PRESSURE 

TRANSMITTER 


Figure E 

Power Supply Voltage – VDC (2, 3 or 4-wire) 

Total Receiver Resistance (Ω) 

Total Receiver Resistance (Ω) 

1500 

1400 

1300 

1200 

1100 

1000 

900 

800 

700 

600 

500 

400 

300 

200 

100 

50 

Figure F 

Power Supply Voltage – VAC (4-Wire) 

1300 

1200 

1100 

1000 

900 

800 

700 

Receiver 

mA 

Vps–10.0 

R L Max. = 

20mA DC 

R Max. = 65 (Vps)-490 

L 

Operating 

Region 

Maximum Value (1250 Ω) 

Maximum Value (1200 Ω) 

600 

0 5 10 15 16 18 20 25 26 30 

Figure G 

Operating 

Region 

0 5 10 13 15 20 25 30 35 40 

POWER 

SUPPLY 

10-35 VDC 

16-26 VAC 

Calibration Check 

Each Series 616 Transmitter is factory calibrated to the 

range given in the model chart. To check calibration and 

adjust if necessary, the following procedure should be used. 

For purposes of clarification in these instructions, range is 

defined as that pressure which, applied to the transmitter, 

produces 20 milliamps of current in the loop. Zero pressure 

is always assumed to be 4 milliamps. 

1. With the transmitter connected to the companion receiver, 

insert an accurate milliameter in series with the current 

loop. Full scale range should be approximately 30 mA. 

2. Connect a controllable pressure source to one leg of a tee 

with the other two legs connected to the high pressure port 

of the transmitter and the third leg to an accurate test gage 

or manometer, in an appropriate range. The low pressure 

port should be vented to atmosphere. Calibration must be 

performed with the unit in the same position in which it will 

be mounted. 

3. Apply electrical power to the unit and allow it to stabilize 

for 10 minutes. 

4. With no pressure applied to the transmitter, adjust ZERO 

control so that loop current is 4 mA. 

5. Apply full range pressure and adjust loop current to 20 

mA using SPAN control. 

6. Relieve pressure and allow transmitter to stabilize for 2 

minutes. 

7. Zero and span controls are slightly interactive, so repeat 

steps 4 through 6 until zero and full range pressures consistently 

produce currents of 4 and 20 mA respectively. 

8. Remove the milliameter from the current loop and proceed 

with final installation of the transmitter and receiver. 

Voltage Input 

Series 616 Transmitters can be easily adapted for receivers 

requiring 1-5 or 2-10 VDC inputs. Insert a 249 ohm, 1/2 

watt (1-5 VDC) or 499 ohm (2-10 VDC) resistor in series with 

the current loop but in parallel with the receiver input. 

Locate this resistor as close as possible to the input. 

Because resistor accuracy directly influences output signal 

accuracy, we recommend use of a precision ±0.1% tolerance 

resistor to minimize this effect. See Fig. H and J 

below. 

3-Wire Connection (1-5 or 2-10 VDC Output) 

PRESSURE 

TRANSMITTER 

VDC 

Figure H 

POWER 

SUPPLY 

10-35 VDC

4-Wire Connection (1-5 or 2-10 VDC Output) 

PRESSURE 

TRANSMITTER 

VDC 

Figure J 

POWER 

SUPPLY 

10-35 VDC 

16-26 VAC 

Multiple Receiver Installation 

An advantage of the standard 4-20 mA DC output signal 

produced by the Series 616 Transmitter is that any number 

of receivers can be connected in series in the current loop. 

Thus, an A-701 Digital Readout, an analog panel meter, a 

chart recorder, process controlling equipment or any combination 

of these devices can be operated simultaneously. 

The only requirement is that each component be equipped 

for a standard 4-20 mA input and the proper polarity of the 

input connections be observed when inserting the device in 

the current loop. If any of the units display a negative or 

downscale reading, the signal input leads are reversed. 

Maintenance 

Upon final installation of the Series 616 Differential Pressure 

Transmitter and the companion receiver, including the A- 

701 Digital Readout, no routine maintenance is required. A 

periodic check of the system calibration is recommended 

following the procedures explained on page 3 under 

Calibration Check. The Series 616 Transmitter is not field 

serviceable and should be returned, freight prepaid, to the 

factory if repair is required. Please enclose a description of 

the problems encountered plus any available application 

information. The A-701 should be returned directly to its 

manufacturer for service. See the A-701 instructions for 

address. 

©Copyright 2006 Dwyer Instruments, Inc. Printed in U.S.A. 8/06 FR# 01-440886-00 Rev. 3 




Bulletin E-56 

Series 1900 Pressure Switch 

Specifications - Installation and Operating Instructions 

1/8 FEMALE NPT 

HIGH PRESS. 

CONNECTION 

3 

[76.20] 

1-5/16 

Ø3-1/2[33.32] 

[88.90] TYP 

60° TYP 

(2) Ø3/16 [4.76] 

MOUNTING HOLES 

ON A 4-3/16 [106.36] B.C. 

1/8 FEMALE NPT 

LOW PRESSURE 

CONNECTION 

41/64 

[16.27] 

1-19/32 

[40.48] 

2-11/32 

[59.53] 

Ø7/8 [22.23] 

CONDUIT 

CONNECTION 

1-3/4 [44.45] 

CLEARANCE 

FOR COVER 

REMOVAL 

51/64 

[20.24] 

1-7/8 

[47.63] 

2-9/32 

[57.94] 

2-7/16 [61.90] 

Series 1910 pressure switch. All 

pressure and electrical connections 

and set point adjustments are 

on one side for easy installation. 

Series 1910 switch with conduit 

enclosure off. Shows electric 

switch and set point adjustment 

screw. 

The Dwyer-engineered force-motion amplifier increases the leverage 

of diaphragm movement and results in a switch with excellent 

sensitivity and repeatability. 

Advanced design and precision construction permit 

these switches to perform many of the tasks of larger, costlier 

units. Designed for air conditioning service, they also 

serve many fluidics, refrigeration, oven and dryer applications. 

For use with air and non-combustible gases. Series 

1900 switches are available with set points of 0.07 to 20 

inches water column. Set point adjustment can be made 

easily - before or after installation. Range screw is inside 

conduit enclosure to help prevent tampering. For easy 

mounting and access, pressure and electrical connections 

and set point adjustment are located on one side. This permits 

installation in corners or spaces too small for other 

switches. 

SPECIAL MODELS & ACCESSORIES 

Special close coupled street elbow for right angle pressure 

connections. Can be installed on switch anytime. Zinc plated 

aluminum. 


Service: Air and non-combustible, compatible gases. 

Wetted Materials: Consult factory. 

Temperature Limits: -30 to 180°F (-34 to 82.2°C) (32°F for 

non dry air). 

Pressure Limits: 45˝ w.c. (11.2 kPa) continuous, 10 psig 

( 68.95 kPa) surge. 

Switch Type: Single-pole double-throw (SPDT). 

Repeatability: ±3%. 

Electrical Rating: 15 A @ 120-480 VAC, 60 Hz. Resistive 

1/8 HP @125 VAC, 1/4 HP @ 250 VAC, 60 Hz. Derate to 10 

A for operation at high cycle rates. 

Electrical Connections: 3 screw type, common, normally 

open and normally closed. 

Process Connections: 1/8˝ female NPT. 

Mounting Orientation: Diaphragm in vertical position. 

Consult factory for other position orientations. 

Set Point Adjustment: Screw type inside conduit 

enclosure. 

Weight: 1lb. 4.5 oz. (581 g). 

Agency Approvals: CE, UL, CSA, FM. 

Weatherproof Housing 

16 ga. steel enclosure with gasketed 

cover (NEMA 4) for wet or oily conditions. 

Withstands 200 hour salt spray 

test. Wt. 5 Ibs. (2.3 kg). Switch must be 

factory installed. Change 1910 base 

number to 1911 and add -WP suffix. 

Example: 1911-1-WP. 

Explosion-Proof Housing 

Cast iron base with brass cover. Rated 

Class I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups D; Class II, 

Div. 1 & 2, Groups E,F,G; Class III and 

NEMA 7, 9 NEMA 3. (7 lbs). Switch 

must be factory installed. Change 

model to 1911 and add -EXPL suffix. 

Example: 1911-1-EXPL. 

7/8 

[22.23] 

4 [101.6] SQ. 

WEATHERPROOF ELECTRIC 

1-1/8 

CONNECTION HUB 

[28.58] 

1/2 NPT FEMALE 

(4) 5-16 [7.94] DIA. 

MTG. HOLES 

2 [50.8] 

3 [76.2] 

3/4 

[19.05] 3/4 [19.05] 

4-3/4 

1-1/4 [31.75] 3/32 

[120.65] 5-1/2 

3 [76.2] 

[2.38] 

HIGH PRESS. 

[139.7] 

LOW PRESS. 3-1/8 [79.38] 

CONN. 1/8 N.P.T. CONN. 1/8 N.P.T. 2-3/4 

1/8 NPT HIGH PRESSURE CONN. 

[69.85] 

1-1/16 

TAPPED FOR 

4-1/4 

[26.99] 

1/2 ELECTRICAL 

[107.95] 

CONDUIT CONN. 

5-3/4 

[146.05] 

4-1/4 

[107.95] 

5-3/4 

[146.05] 

1/16 

1/8 NPT LOW [1.59] 

PRESSURE CONN. 

4-5/16 [10.54] 

5-13/32 [137.32] 

SERIES 1910 SWITCHES — MODELS OPERATING 

RANGES, DEADBANDS 

Model 

Number 

1910-00 

1910-0 

1910-1 

1910-5 

1910-10 

1910-20 

Operating 

Range, 

Inches W.C. 

0.07 to 0.15 

0.15 to 0.55 

0.40 to 1.6 

1.40 to 5.5 

3.0 to 11.75 

4.0 to 20.0 

At Min. 

Set Point 

0.04 

0.10 

0.15 

0.30 

0.40 

0.40 

Approximate 

Dead Band 

At Max. 

Set Point 

0.04 

0.10 

0.16 

0.30 

0.40 

0.50 



P.O. BOX 373 • MICHIGAN CITY, IN 46361, U.S.A. Fax: 219/872-9057 e-mail: info@dwyer-inst.com

INSTALLATION 

1. Select a location that is free from excessive vibration, corrosive 

atmosphere and where the ambient temperature is 

within the limits for these switches. 

2. Mount standard switches with the diaphragm in a vertical 

plane and with switch lettering and Dwyer nameplate in 

an upright position. Some switches are position sensitive 

and may not reset properly unless they are mounted with 

the diaphragm vertical. (Special units can be furnished for 

other than vertical mounting arrangements if required.) 

3. Connect switch to source of pressure, vacuum or differential 

pressure. Metal tubing with 1/4˝ O.D. is recommended, 

but any tubing which will not restrict the air flow 

can be used. Connect to the two 1/8˝ female NPT pressure 

ports as noted below: 

• Differential pressures - connect pipes or tubes from 

source of greater pressure to high pressure port 

marked HI-PR and from source of lower pressure to 

low pressure port marked LO-PR. 

• Pressure only (above atmospheric) - connect tube from 

source of pressure to high pressure port. The low pressure 

port is left open to atmosphere. 

• Vacuum only (below atmospheric pressure) - connect 

tube from source of vacuum to low pressure port. The 

high pressure port is left open to atmosphere. 

4. Electrical connections to the standard single pole, double 

throw snap switch are provided by means of screw terminals 

marked “common”, “norm open”, and “norm 

closed”. The normally open contacts close and the normally 

closed contacts open when pressure increases 

beyond the set point. 

5. Switch loads should not exceed the maximum specified 

current rating of 15 amps resistive. Switch capabilities 

decrease with high load inductance or rapid cycle rates. 

Whenever an application involves either of these factors, 

the user may find it desirable to limit the switched current 

to 10 amps or less in the interest of prolonging switch life. 

OPERATION 

Pressure acting on the power diaphragm rotates the amplifying 

lever, which in turn extends the range spring and rotates 

the snap switch input lever. When the set point is reached, the 

snap switch is actuated and the electrical contacts make or 

break. 

ADJUSTMENT 

To change the set point, proceed as follows: 

A. Remove the snap-on cover from the conduit enclosure by 

loosening its retaining screw and pulling firmly at its bottom 

end. Turn the slotted adjustment screw at the top of 

range spring housing clockwise to raise the set point 

pressure and counter-clockwise to lower the set point. 

B. The recommended procedure for calibrating or checking 

calibration is to use a “T” assembly with three rubber tubing 

leads, all as short as possible and the entire assembly 

offering minimum flow restriction. Run one lead to the 

pressure switch, another to the manometer of known 

accuracy and appropriate range, and apply pressure 

through the third tube. Make final approach to the set 

point very slowly. Note that manometer and pressure 

switch will have different response times due to different 

internal volumes, lengths of tubing, fluid drainage etc. Be 

certain the switch is checked in the position it will assume 

in use, i.e. with diaphragm in a vertical plane and switch 

lettering and Dwyer nameplate in an upright position. 

C. For highly critical applications it is a good idea to check 

the set point adjustment and reset it as necessary once or 

twice in the first few months of operation. This will compensate 

for any change in initial tension which may occur 

in the spring and diaphragm. For most applications this 

change will not be significant and no resetting will be 

required. 

MAINTENANCE 

Moving parts of these switches are sealed in and are permanently 

tamper proof. The single adjustment is that of the set 

point. Care should be taken to keep the switch reasonably dry 

and free from dust or dirt. No lubrication or unusual precautions 

are required for normal use. 



P.O. BOX 373 • MICHIGAN CITY, IN 46361, U.S.A. Fax: 219/872-9057 e-mail: info@dwyer-inst.com

‡ SIGNET 

8550-1 Flow Transmitter 

3-8550.090-1 

G-4/03 English 

WARNING! 

• Remove power to unit before wiring input and 

output connections. 

• Follow instructions carefully to avoid personal 

injury. 

1. Specifications 

Dimensions 

Contents 

1. Specifications 

2. Installation 


4. Menu Functions 

Flow 

Flow 6.25 GPM 

Total 1234567.8> 

ENTER 

96 mm 

(3.8 in.) 

Optional 

Rear 

Cover 

92 mm 

(3.6 in.) 

8050 

82 mm 

(3.23 in.) 

8051 

96 mm 

(3.8 in.) 

96 mm 

(3.8 in.) 

FRONT VIEW 

Field Mount & 

Panel Mount 

41 mm 

(1.6 in.) 

56 mm 

(2.2 in.) 

97 mm 

(3.8 in.) 

SIDE VIEW 

Panel Mount 

42 mm 

(1.7 in.) 

64 mm 

(2.5 in.) 

106 mm (4.2 in.) 

SIDE VIEW 

Field Mount w/ 

8050 Universal base 

42 mm 

(1.7 in.) 

60 mm 

(2.3 in.) 

102 mm (4.0 in.) 

SIDE VIEW 

Field Mount w/ 

8051 Integral kit 

General 

Compatibility: +GF+ SIGNET Flow Sensors (w/freq out) 

Enclosure: 

• Rating: NEMA 4X/IP65 front 

• Case: PBT 

• Panel case gasket: Neoprene 

• Window: Polyurethane coated polycarbonate 

• Keypad: Sealed 4-key silicone rubber 

• Weight: Approx. 325g (12 oz.) 

Display: 

• Alphanumeric 2 x 16 LCD 

• Update rate: 1 second 

• Contrast: User selected, 5 levels 

• Display accuracy: ±0.5% of reading @ 25ºC 

• Thermal sensitivity shift: ±0.005% of reading per ºC 

Electrical 

• Power: 12 to 24 VDC ±10%, regulated, 61 mA max current 

Sensor Input: 

• Range: 0.5 to 1500 Hz 

• Sensor power: 2-wire: 1.5 mA @ 5 VDC ± 1% 

3 or 4 wire: 20 mA @ 5 VDC ± 1% 

• Optically isolated from current loop 

• Short circuit protected 

Current output: 

• 4 to 20 mA, isolated, fully adjustable and reversible 

• Max loop impedance: 50 Ω max. @ 12 V 

325 Ω max. @ 18 V 

600 Ω max. @ 24V 

• Update rate: 100 ms 

• Accuracy: ±0.03 mA 

Open-collector output, optically isolated: 

• 50 mA max. sink, 30 VDC maximum pull-up voltage. 

• Programmable for: 

• High or Low setpoint with adjustable hysteresis 

• Pulse operation (max rate: 300 pulses/min). 

Environmental 

• Operating temperature: -10 to 70°C (14 to 158°F) 

• Storage temperature: -15 to 80°C (5 to 176°F) 

• Relative humidity: 0 to 95%, non-condensing 

• Maximum altitude: 2000 m (6562 ft) 

• Insulation category: II 

• Pollution degree: 2 

Standards and Approvals 

• CSA, CE, UL listed 

• Immunity: EN50082-2 

• Emissions: EN55011 Class B 

• Manufactured under ISO 9001 and ISO 14001 

2. Installation 

ProcessPro transmitters are available in two styles: panel mount and field mount. The panel mount is supplied with the necessary 

hardware to install the transmitter. This manual includes complete panel mounting instructions. 

Field mounting requires one of two separate mounting kits. The 3-8051 integral kit joins the sensor and instrument together into a single 

package. The 3-8050 Universal kit enables the transmitter to be installed virtually anywhere. 

Detailed instructions for integral mounting or other field installation options are included with the 3-8051 Integral kit or the 3-8050 

Universal kit.

2.1 Panel Installation 

1. The panel mount transmitter is designed for installation using a 1/4 DIN Punch. For 

manual panel cutout, an adhesive template is provided as an installation guide. 

Recommended clearance on all sides between instruments is 1 inch. 

gasket 

panel 

terminals 

mounting 

bracket 

2. Place gasket on instrument, and install in panel. 

3. Slide mounting bracket over back of instrument until quick-clips snap into latches on 

side of instrument. 

latch 

System Pwr 

Loop - 

System Pwr 

Loop + 

2 

1 4 

3 

Output - 

Output + 

7 

6 

5 

Sensr Gnd 

(SHIELD) 

Sensr IN 

(RED) 

Sensr V+ 

(BLACK) 

4. To remove, secure instrument temporarily with tape from front or grip from rear of 

instrument. DO NOT RELEASE. 

Press quick-clips outward and remove. 

Panel Mount 

Installation Detail 

quick-clips 


Caution: Failure to fully open terminal jaws before removing wire may permanently damage instrument. 

Wiring Procedure 

1. Remove 0.5 - 0.625 in. (13-16 mm) of insulation from wire end. 

2. Press the orange terminal lever downward with a small screwdriver to open terminal jaws. 

3. Insert exposed (non-insulated) wire end in terminal hole until it bottoms out. 

4. Release orange terminal lever to secure wire in place. Gently pull on each wire to ensure a good connection. 

2 

1 

Wiring Removal Procedure 

1. Press the orange terminal lever downward with a small screwdriver to open terminal jaws. 

2. When fully open, remove wire from terminal. 

Terminals 3 and 4: Loop Power 

12-24 VDC ±10% system power 

and current loop output. 

Max. loop impedance: 

50 Ω max. @ 12 V 

325 Ω max. @ 18 V 

600 Ω max. @ 24 V 

Terminals 7-9: Flow sensor input 

4 

System Pwr 

Loop - 

3 

System Pwr 

Loop + 

6 

Output - 

9 

Sensr Gnd 

(SHIELD) 

2 

AUX 

Power - 

8 

Sensr IN 

(RED) 

1 

AUX 

Power + 

5 

Output + 

7 

Sensr V+ 

(BLACK) 

Terminals 1 and 2: AUXILIARY power 

Used only if the flow sensor requires more 

than 1.5 mA current. For Signet sensors 

this is limited to the following products: 

• 2000 • 2507 

• 2530 • 2535 

• 2540 if mfg. prior to Jan 1999 

• 7002 Vortex sensor 

Internal open-collector 

output circuit 

S 15Ω 

D 

Isolation 

Output -- 

Output + 

Terminals 5 and 6: Open-collector Output 

A transistor output, programmable (see CALIBRATE menu) as: 

• High or Low setpoint with adjustable hysteresis 

• Volumetric pulse 

• Frequency based on flow rate 

• May be disabled (Off) if not used. 

page 2 of 8 ‡ SIGNET 

8550-1 Flow Transmitter

ENTER 

ENTER 

3.1 System Power/Loop Connections 

Stand-alone application, no current loop used 

Transmitter 

Terminals 

* See AUX POWER Note 

System Pwr Loop – 

System Pwr Loop + 

AUX Power – 

AUX Power + 

4 

3 

2 

1 

– 

+ 

Power 

Supply 

12–24 VDC 

Connection to a PLC/Recorder, separate supply 

Connection to a PLC with built-in power supply 



AUX Power – 

AUX Power + 

Transmitter 

Terminals 

4 

3 

2 

1 

PLC or Recorder 

+ 

– 

– 

+ 

Loop Input 

4-20 mA 

Power 

Supply 

12–24 VDC 



AUX Power – 

AUX Power + 

Transmitter 

Terminals 

* See AUX POWER Note * See AUX POWER Note 

4 

3 

2 

1 

Internal 

PLC Connection 

+ 

– 

– 

+ 

PLC Terminals 

Loop Input 

4-20 mA 

Power 

Supply 

12–24 VDC 

Example: Two transmitters connected to PLC/Recorder with separate power supply 

PLC or Recorder 

+ 

– 

Channel 1 

4-20 mA in 

Transmitter 1 

Terminals 

– 

+ 

Channel 2 

4-20 mA in 

Transmitter 2 

Terminals 



AUX Power – 

AUX Power + 

4 

3 

2 

1 

4 

3 

2 

1 



AUX Power – 

AUX Power + 

– 

+ 

Power 

Supply 

12–24 VDC 

* See AUX POWER Note 

Auxiliary Power note: 

AUXILIARY power is used only if the flow sensor requires more than 1.5 mA current. 

For Signet sensors this is limited to the following products: 

• 2000, 2507, 2530, 2535, 2540 if mfg. prior to Jan 1999, 7002 Vortex sensor 

3.2 Sensor Input Connections 

Wiring Tips: 

• Do not route sensor cable in conduit containing AC power wiring. 

Electrical noise may interfere with sensor signal. 

• Routing sensor cable in grounded metal conduit will help prevent 

electrical noise and mechanical damage. 

• Seal cable entry points to prevent moisture damage. 

• Only one wire should be inserted into a terminal. Splice double wires 

outside the terminal. 

Transmitter 

Flow 

Flow 6.25 GPM 

Total 1234567.8> 

≤ 200 ft. (61 m) 

Maximum cable length is 200 ft. for 515/8510-XX, 

525 , 2517 and any sinusoidal flow signal. 

Transmitter 

Sensr Gnd 

(SHIELD) 

Sensr IN 

(RED) 

Sensr V+ 

(BLACK) 

Terminals 

9 

8 

7 

No Aux Power 

515/3-8510-XX 

525 

2100 

2517 

2536/3-8512-XX 

2540/2541 

7000 Vortex 

Aux Power 

2000 

2507 

2530 

2535 

2540 (mfg prior to Jan 1999) 

7002 Vortex 

Flow 

Flow 6.25 GPM 

Total 1234567.8> 

≤ 1000 ft. (300 m) 

Maximum cable length is 1000 ft. for 2536/ 

8512-XX, 2540/2541, vortex, and any open 

collector flow signal. 

8550-1 Flow Transmitter ‡ SIGNET 

page 3 of 8

3.3 Open Collector Output 

The Open collector output can be used as a switch that responds 

when the flow rate moves above or below a setpoint, or it can be 

used to generate a pulse that is relative to the flow volume or to 

the flow rate. 

Hysteresis 

Process 

• Low 

Output triggers when the flow rate is less than the setpoint. 

The output will relax when the flow rate moves above the setpoint 

plus the hysteresis value. 

Low Setpoint 

Time 

• High 

Output triggers when the flow rate is greater than the setpoint. 

The output will relax when the flow rate drops below the setpoint 

plus the hysteresis value. 

• Frequency 

Output is a pulse stream that is based on the input flow sensor 

signal. Set for 1 (input frequency = output frequency). Set for 

even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8 . . . . 254 maximum) to scale output 

frequency. 

High Setpoint 

Hysteresis 

Process 

Relay energized 

Relay relaxed 

• Pulse 

Output is a pulse based on the volume of fluid that passes the 

sensor. Set any value from 0.0001 to 99999. 

Time 

The output may be disabled (Off) if not used. 

VIEW menu 

• During normal operation, the ProcessPro displays the VIEW menu. 

• When using the CALIBRATE or OPTIONS menus, the ProcessPro will return to the VIEW menu if no activity 

occurs for 10 minutes. 

• To select the item you want displayed, press the UP or DOWN arrow keys. The items will scroll in a 

continuous loop. Changing the display selection does not interrupt system operations. 

• No key code is necessary to change display selection. 

• Output settings cannot be edited from the VIEW menu. 

Flow 

Flow 6.25 GPM 

Total 1234567.8> 

ENTER 

View Menu 

Display 

Description 

0.0 GPM 

Total: 12345678 > 

Monitor the flow rate and the resettable totalizer. Press the RIGHT ARROW 

key to reset the totalizer. If the Reset is locked, you will need to enter the Key 

Code first. Lock or Unlock the totalizer in the OPTIONS menu. This is the 

permanent View display. 

All of the displays below are temporary. After ten minutes the display will return to the permanent display. 

Perm: 12345678 Monitor the Permanent Totalizer value. 

Gallons 

Loop Output: 

Monitor the 4-20 mA Loop output. 

12.00 mA 

Last CAL: 

06-30-01 

Monitor date for scheduled maintenance or date of last calibration. (See 

description in Calibrate Menu.) 



ProcessPro Editing Procedure: 

Step 1. Press and hold ENTER key: 

• 2 seconds to select the CALIBRATE menu 

• 5 seconds to select the OPTIONS menu. 

Step 2. The Key Code is UP-UP-UP-DOWN keys in sequence. 

• After entering the Key Code, the display will show the first item in the selected menu. 

Step 3. Scroll menu with UP or DOWN arrow keys. 

Step 4. Press RIGHT ARROW key to select menu item to be edited. 

• The first display element will begin flashing. 

Step 5. Press UP or DOWN keys to edit the flashing element. 

• RIGHT ARROW key advances the flashing element. 

Step 6. Press ENTER key to save the new setting and return to Step 3. 

Notes on Step 1: 

• The View Menu is normally displayed. 

• The CALIBRATE and OPTIONS menus require a KEY CODE. 

Notes on Step 2: 

If no key is pressed for 5 minutes while display is showing "Enter 

Key Code", the display will return to the VIEW menu. 

Press & 

hold for 

access: 

ENTER 

CALIBRATE: ---- 

Enter Key Code 

CALIBRATE: *--- 


VIEW 

CALIBRATE 

2s 

5s 

CALIBRATE: **-- 


CALIBRATE: ***- 


OPTIONS 

Flow Units: 

GPM > 

First item in 

CALIBRATE menu 

Notes on Steps 3 and 4: 

• Refer to pages 6 and 7 for complete listing of menu items and their use. 

• From the Step 3 display, pressing the UP and DOWN keys simultaneously will 

return the display to the VIEW menu. 

• If no key is pressed for 10 minutes, display will also return to the VIEW menu. 

Flow Units: 

GPM > 

Step 3 

Step 3: Finished Editing? 

Press the UP and DOWN keys simultaneously after 

saving the last setting to return to normal operation. 

Output Setpnt: 

20.0 GPM > 

Step 4 

Notes on Steps 5 and 6: 

• All output functions remain active during editing. 

• Only the flashing element can be edited. 

• RIGHT ARROW key advances the flashing element in a continuous loop. 

• Edited value is effective immediately after pressing ENTER key. 

• If no key is pressed for 10 minutes unit will restore the last saved value and return to step 3. 

• Step 6 (pressing ENTER key) always returns you to Step 3. 

• Repeat steps 3-6 until all editing is completed. 


20.00 GPM 


10.00 GPM 


10.00 GPM 

Step 5 

Step 5: Made an Error? 

Press the UP and DOWN keys simultaneously 

while any element is flashing. This will recall the 

last saved value of the item being edited and 

return you to Step 3. 


Step 6 


19.00 GPM 


19.00 GPM > 

ENTER 


Saving 

page 5 of 8

Calibrate Menu 

Display 

(Factory settings shown) 

Flow Units: 

GPM > 

Flow K-Factor: 

60 > 

Total Units: 

Gallons > 

Total K-Factor 

Loop Range: GPM 

60 > 

000.00 → 100.00 > 

Output Mode: 


Output Hys: 

Low > 

10.0 GPM > 

5.0 GPM > 

Output Volume: 

100.00 Gallons > 

Output PlsWdth: 

0.1 Seconds > 

Output Freq.: 

Divide by 1 > 

Last CAL: 

6-30-01 

Description 

The first three characters set the Flow Rate units of measure. They have no effect on 

calculations. They may be any alpha or numeric character, upper or lower case. 

The last character sets the Flow rate Timebase. Select S (seconds), M (minutes), H (hours) 

or D (days). 

This setting tells the transmitter how to convert the input frequency from the flow sensor into 

a flow rate. The K-factor is unique to the sensor model and to the pipe size and schedule. 

Refer to data in the sensor manual for the correct value. Limits: 0.0001 to 99999. (The 

K-factor cannot be set to 0) 

This setting identifies the Totalizer units. It has no effect on any calculation. It serves as a 

label only. Each character can be any alpha or numeric selection, upper or lower case. 

This setting tells the transmitter how to convert the input frequency from the flow sensor into 

a volumetric total. It also is used as the basis for the Open Collector pulse mode. 

The setting is usually the same as the Flow K-factor, or different by x10 or x100. Limits: 

0.0001 to 99999. (The K-factor cannot be set to 0) 

Select the minimum and maximum values for the 4-20 mA Current loop output. The 8550 

will allow any values from 0.0000 to 99999. 

Select the desired mode of operation for the Open Collector output. Options available are 

High, Low, volumetric Pulse, or Frequency. The signal may be disabled (Off) if not used. 

In Low or High Mode, the Open Collector output will be activated when the Flow rate 

reaches this value. Be sure to modify this setting if you change the Flow Units. 

The Open Collector output will be deactivated at Setpoint ± Hysteresis, depending on High 

or Low Setpoint selection. (See details on page 4.) 

In Pulse mode, the Open collector output will generate one pulse when this volume of flow 

passes the sensor. The measurement is based on the Total K-factor. The 8550 will allow 

any value from 0.0001 to 99999. 

In Pulse mode, this setting defines the duration of the Open Collector output pulse. The 

8550 allows any value from 0.1 seconds to 999.9 seconds. 

In Frequency mode, the Open Collector output will simulate the sensor frequency, divided 

by this setting. Set for 1 (input frequency = output frequency). Set for even numbers 

(2, 4, 6, 8 . . . 254 maximum) to scale output frequency. 

Use this “note pad” to record important dates, such as annual recertification or scheduled 

maintenance. 



Options Menu 

Display 

(Factory settings shown) 

Contrast: 

3 > 

Flow Decimal 

*****. > 

Description 

Adjust the LCD contrast for best viewing. A setting of 1 is lower contrast, 5 is higher. 

Select lower contrast if the display is in warmer ambient surroundings. 

Set the decimal to the best resolution for your application. The display will automatically 

scale up to this restriction. 

Select *****., ****.*, ***.**, **.*** or *.**** 

Total Decimal 

******.** > 

Set the totalizer decimal to the best resolution for your application. 

Select ********., *******.*, or ******.** 

Averaging: 

Off > 

OFF provides the quickest output response to changes in flow. 

LOW averaging = 4 seconds, HIGH averaging = 8 seconds of input signal. 

Longer averaging produces more stable display and output response. 

Total Reset: 

Lock Off > 

Lock Off : No key code required to reset the resettable totalizer. 

Lock On : The Key Code must be entered to reset the resettable totalizer. 

Loop Adjust: 

4.00 mA > 

Loop Adjust: 

20.00 mA > 

Adjust the minimum and maximum current output. The display value represents the 

precise current output. 

Adjustment limits: 

• 3.80 mA < 4.00 mA > 5.00 mA 

• 19.00 mA < 20.00 mA > 21.00 mA 

Use this setting to match the system output to any external device. 

Output Active: 

Low > 

Active HIGH: This setting is used to turn a device (pump, valve) ON at the setpoint. 

Active LOW: This setting is used to turn a device OFF at the setpoint. 

Test Loop: 

> 

Press UP or DOWN keys to manually order any output current value from 3.6 mA to 

21.00 mA to test current loop output. 

Test Output: 

> 

Press UP or DOWN keys to manually toggle the state of open collector output. 


page 7 of 8


Display Condition 

Possible Causes 

Suggested Solutions 

“- - - - -” 

Flow rate exceeds display capability 

• Increase Flow units time base 

• Move flow decimal one place to the right 

“Pulse Overrun” 

• Open Collector pulse rate exceeds 

maximum of 300 pulses per minute. 

• Pulse width set too wide. 

• Increase Pulse volume setting 

• Decrease pulse width setting. 

• Reduce system flow rate 

“Value must be more than 0” 

K-factors cannot be set to 0. 

Enter K-factor from 0.0001 to 99999 

Open Collector is always 

activated 

• Hysteresis value too large 

• Defective transmitter 

• Change the hysteresis value 

• Replace transmitter 

Ordering Information 

Mfr. Part No. Code Description 

3-8550-1 159 000 047 Flow transmitter, Field mount 

3-8550-1P 159 000 048 Flow transmitter, Panel mount 

3-8550-2 159 000 049 Flow transmitter, Field mount with relays 

3-8550-2P 159 000 050 Flow transmitter, Panel mount with relays 

3-8550-3 159 000 051 Flow transmitter, Field mount with dual input/output 

3-8550-3P 159 000 052 Flow transmitter, Panel mount with dual input/output 

Accessories 

Mfr. Part No. Code Description 

3-8050 159 000 184 Universal mounting kit 

3-8051 159 000 187 Flow Integral Mnt NPT 

3-8050.395 159 000 186 Splashproof rear cover 

3-8050.396 159 000 617 RC Filter kit (for relay use) 

3-0000.596 159 000 641 Heavy duty wall mount bracket 

3-5000.598 198 840 225 Surface Mount Bracket 

3-5000.399 198 840 224 5 x 5 inch adapter plate for +GF+ SIGNET retrofit 

3-9000.392 159 000 368 Liquid tight connector kit for rear cover (includes 3 connectors) 

3-9000.392-1 159 000 839 Liquid tight connector kit, NPT (1 piece) 

3-9000.392-2 159 000 841 Liquid tight connector kit, PG13.5 (1 piece) 

7300-7524 159 000 687 24 VDC Power Supply 7.5 W, 300mA 

7300-1524 159 000 688 24 VDC Power Supply 15 W, 600mA 

7300-3024 159 000 689 24 VDC Power Supply 30 W, 1.3 A 



‡ SIGNET 

Signet Scientific Company, 3401 Aerojet Avenue, El Monte, CA 91731-2882 U.S.A. • Tel. (626) 571-2770 • Fax (626) 573-2057 

For Worldwide Sales and Service, visit our website: www.gfsignet.com • Or call (in the U.S.): (800) 854-4090 

GEORGE FISCHER ‡ Piping Systems 

3-8550.090-1 (G-4/03) English © Signet Scientific Company 2002 Printed in U.S.A. on Recycled Paper

ERDCO Engineering Corp.- Armor-Flo 3600 meter with Signal Output 

http://www.erdco.com/3600.htm 

Page 1 of 1 

12/26/2006 

3600 Armor-Flo 

tm meter with 

Signal Output 

Here is a combination of signal transmission with 

independent mechanical local flow rate indication. 

Should your 24vdc loop go down, you will still be 

able to take flow rate readings at the meter. 

The output signal is linear within the middle 80% of 

the range and well suited for tracking utility 

applications. A response curve is furnished with each flowmeter. Transmitter signal 

options include: 

 

 

 

4-20 mA two wire loop powered 

4-20 mA with concurrent 0-1000Hz frequency output 

4-20 mA with two adjustable set points 

Applications include valve modulation, remote metering, sub-metering, blending and 

totalizing. Use with ERDCO accessory displays for remote indication or totalizing. 

Series Description Applications Functions Features 

3600 Flow rate 

meter with 

transmitter 

Liquids or 

gases 

Direct 

reading 

flow rate 

4-20mA 

output 

Frequency 

output 

General 

purpose 

meter 

Opaque 

fluids OK 

Calibrated 

for 

application 

conditions 

Materials 

Aluminum, 

brass, 316 

sst or 

(Haste 

alloy 1/2- 

1") 

Pressure 

Limits 

200 

psig 1/2 - 

12" 

400 

psig 1/2 - 

6" 

1000 

psig 1/2 - 

1" 

Temperature 

Limits 

400ºF 

400ºF rating 

requires epm or 

viton o-ring 

Pipe 

Sizes 

1/2"- 

12"

: 

ERDCO Engineering Corporation 

,v 

: - , .r-.. 

ifm,Of 

;,, ,l 

i 

l"-l 

"' "| ' i'""l 

rt.ti 

I 

1l 

i 

,|, 

.,| 

N,,, 

tl 

,,i 

i 

1" "',1 

Rugged vane flowmeters that measure 

process liquids, gases or steam in 

vertical or,horizontal pipelines.


Armor- Flo" meters are variable arealdifferential pressu re 

flow rate meters for general purpose industrial application. 

The tempered vane is displaced through the variable 

area of the meter housing in direct proportion to changes 

in flow rate/differential pressure. The indicator is 

magnetically coupled to the vane. 

Mechanical properties - 

3400/3500/3600 Series 

Accuracy: +2% full scale 

Repeatability: +17o full scale 

Scales: Direct reading 

Resolution: Maximum - 30 division 

Minimum - 15 divisions 

Rangeability: 10 to 1 turndown 

Materials of 

construction: 

Housing: 

Shunt: 

Window: 

Vane: 

"O" rings: 

Piping 

connections: 

Pressure limits: 

Temperature 

limits: 

(wetted pads) 

Aluminum, brass, 70130 copper/ 

nickel, 316 stainles steel, 

Hastelloy@ c-22 

As housing or carbon steel 

Tempered glass or polycarbonate 

CobalVchromium/nickel allov or 

Hastellov@ C-22 with Tef lontb 

encapsu-lated magnet 

Buna-n, ethylene proplyene, 

Viton@, Kalrez@ or Teflon@ 

/2" lo 1" NPT Female 

1%" to 4" NPT Male 

/z" lo 3" Tri-clamp 

11A" to 6" Grooved 

1Yq" lo 6" Beveled 

/2" lo 6" 150#/300# RF/FF ANSI 

Flanges (carbon stl) 

%" to 6" 150# RF"ANsl Flanqed 

(stainless stl) 

/2" lo 6" 150# RF ANSI Flanoes 

(aluminum) 

/2" lo 6" 150# FF ANSI Flanoes 

(brass) 

15 to 25 mm DIN 299918,5211 

ISO R7 Female threaded 

15 to 150 mm DIN PN 10 Flanoes 

(316 stainles stl &-carbon 

stl) 

- 1 Housino (Aluminum) 

O, l- or 5 Shunt - 20b psig (13.8 bar) 

2 Housing (Brass) 

0 Shunt - 400 psig (27.6 bar) 

2 or 5 Shunt - 200 psig (13.8 ba| 

6 Housing (316 sst) 


5 or 6 Shunt - 200 psig (13.8 bar) 

7 or 8 Shunt - 400 psig (27.6 bar) 

- 8 Housinq (Hioh Pressure 316 sst) 

Q Shuni - 10"00 psig (69 bar) 

9 Housing (Hastelloy@ C-22) 


0 to 85'C (32 to 185'F) 

with transmitters FM-1 5425, 

FM-14792 and FM-14352 

-23 to 85"C (-10 to 185"F) 

with Teflon@ o-ring at 

constant temperature conditions 

-23lo 121"C (-10 to 250"F) 

with buna-n o-rino 

-23 to 204'C (-10 to 4005F) 

with Viton@, Kalrez@ or ethvlene 

propylene o-ring 

EFIDCO reserves the right to alter design and/or specifications without notice. Viton@, 

Teflon@ and Kalrez@ are registered trademarks of E.l. duPont de Nemours and Co. 

Hastelloy@ is a registered trademark of Haynes International, Inc. 

4 

3400 Series 

T2". Tq" & 1" conngctions 

3400 Series 

lTq" lo 6" connections 

"v 

Yz

Switches & signal output 

g 

Armor-Flo'" meters provid even more effective 

process control input with these options. Simple 

electro-mechanical switches define process limits. 

The flow proportionate signal output options offer 

maximum versatility. 

3500 Armor-Flo" meter with 

limit switches 

Adjustable flow switches provide positive indication 

of flow/no flow conditions or may be positioned to 

establish process limits. In either application the 

switch captures the indicator preventing movement 

until the flow rate is within the acceptable range. 

The glass encapsulated reed switches aie SpDT 

rated at 0.25 amperes at 120 vac (1.5 amperes at 

24 vdcl. This switch is appropriate for use in 

Class l, Division 2 areas. 

3600 Armor-Flo'u meter with 

signal output 

Integraltransmitter circuitry provides a signal in 

proportion to flow rate in addition to the analog meter. 

The output signal is linear within the middte BO% of the 

range. A response curve is furnished with each 

f lowmeter. Transmitter options include: 

t 4-20 mA two wire loop powered 

o 4-20 mA with concurrent 0-1000 Hz frequency 

output 

o 4-20 mA with two adjustable setpoints 

Applications include valve modulation, remote meters, 

data logging, blending and totalizing. Use with 

accessory counters for remote digital display of flow 

rate and total. Appropriate for totalization of liouids or 

gases.

Limit switches - 3500 Series 

Accuracy: 

Repeatability: 

Type: 

Contact rating: 

Adjustment limits: 

Temperature limits: 

* 2% full scale 

_F 1% full scale 

Hermetically sealed 

reed switch 

0.254 @ 120 vac 

1.5A @ 24vdc 

20-50% fullscale - low limit 

50-90% full scale - high limit 

30% differential between low 

and high 

-23 to 85'C (-10 to 185"F) with 

Teflon@ o-ring at constant 

temoerature conditions 

-23 to 121"C (-10 to 250"F) 

with buna-n o-ring 

-23 lo 204"C (-10 to 400"F) 

with Viton@, Kalrez@ or ethvlene 

propylene o-ring 

Signal Outputs - 3600 Series 

Type option: 

Type option: 

Type option: 

Accuracy: 

Repeatability: 

Permissible load: 

Temperature limits: 

Environmental: 

Analog meter 

accuracy: 

Analog meter 

repeatability: 

4-20 mA two wire looo 

oowered. FM-15425 

4-20 mA (requires 0.24,24 vdc 

supply) with concurrent 0-1000 

Hz frequency output (requires 

24 vdc or 12 vdc supply). 

FM-14792 

4-20 mA with two adjustable 

setooints. Contacts rated 1A @ 

120 vacl2A o 28 vdc (requires 

0.24,24 vdc supply). 

FM-14352 


+0.5% full scale 

Rmax:750 n 

0-85'C (32-185"F) 

NEMA 4/NEMA 4X 



3500/3600 Series 

Tr" r t/0" & 1" connections 

/2"CONtl] 

/.v^..r, 

.o"ii' 

iil 

.\ \ 

t' 

lAP 

: 

_ 

.' 

.il 

/r 

\\ "ra 

li 

t' l'' 

3500/3600 Series 

lYq" lo 6" connections 

[: +"; 

t- 

I,i 

, i.* 

l 

a;1 

iltl i,,l 

(.tf I 

li' ' j- 

ERDCO reseryes the right to alier design and/or specifications without notice. 

6

Meter rangeability 

v 

Liquid applications 

pipe 

size 

Yzu-15mm 

Vau 

1u 

'''?0,,.mm 

25 mm 

;l1h\t:1',:: ; 

1Y2' 

'21r',.' 

2Y2' 

311 ,',: 

4', 

Sili lr l 

6" 

Gas applications 

lowest range 

gpm water pressure drop 

@ 60.F (psi/gpm rate) 

0.4-4 

:r'1'1 ,.' r.,...r8.$;$r 

. , 

0.8-B 

,.:..,.. ..:, :.. Z;Ae:. .,:, 

3-30 

'i:'i r,, .. ..i ,.4:A0rr:r 

t: ,. 

- specify 10:1 range at or between - 

.414 

lt.ii,.r.'. . :'', 1f5: ll i 

1.5/B 

.',, ,.2/2Q, 

2t30 

',. ,,, 2/4A 

,. 

:, 

4-40 

2t40 

,r , , l 5-00, ,'al-o 

' 

10-100 

2t100 

,, ,, r,.' r.;19-:1159 ' i, , i'rl,. 21190, 

, 

25-250 2t250 

gpm water 

@ 60"F 

1 .5-15 

,,,,.1 3t30,: l'':,,: 

highest range 

.t':',r:, 

100-1000 

r1$g11$691r, ..,,, 

200-2000 

pressure drop 

(psi/gpm rate) 

3115 

.rr,: ii.: j5/30ri r:r:.:l:: l:rri::. 

5-50 

6/50 

'.[,5;150, 

' 

]':,:,.i' r I ' 81150,:,:,'.'',' 

20-200 

81200 

I ,25;259,'l,,,,,,,:',' 81e50' 

: r i, ': 

35-350 

8/350 

50$0[t,.,1.;' ,, :, ,81$00.i.,, ,,, 

8/1000 

I ,l;, 8/160CIi : ,, 

8/2000 

\r/ 

pipe 

size 

- specify10:1 range at or between - 

lowest range 

scfm air pressure drop 

@ 60"F (tnches Hro/sctm rare) 

(lnches Hro/sctm rate) 

/2" -'15 mm 1-10 

2/10 

2-20 

3/20 

v' 

1" - 25 mm 1-10 

1Y2' 1 .5-15 

2Y2' 3-30 

.3.t.rt, r. :i,tr .li 

4' 5-50 

Srnr 

. . -' ,,.r,.1 r,,, .. .' : ,,.1, r.., 

.,.g-69:; :. 

6" 8-80 

Notes: I 

I 

I 

I 

T 

2/10 

20-200 

2120 25-250 

2t30 

35-350 

2t4A 

,5g.5gg, 

2150 

100-1000 

2t60 

1,50.1500 

2180 

200-2000 

5-50 6/50 

'1 

5-150 I ,.l ; E/ir r'lrii l,r 

,r i: 

8/200 

81450''', l 

8/350 

$/$gi$,]]: r ' 

8/1000 

811500,', ' ' 

8/2000 

Units of measure other than gpm and scfm can be specified. 

When specifying a calibration range consider that the nominal flow value should be approximately at mid-scale. 

Pressure drop data are typical for maximum flow reading of the range indicated. A flow that causes a midrange reading will 

have a pressure drop that is a square root function of the pressure drop at full range. Example: An instrument for a 6,, piping 

sys-te_m-lhat has a range of 200 to 2,000 gpm will have a pressure drop of I psi at 2,000 gbm flow and a pressure Oiob oi16 

or 2.828 psi at 1,000 gpm on the same scale. 

Typical pressure drop declines 

value in a linearelationship between the maximum of the highest range and maximum of the 

lowest range. Example: An instrument tor a 4'piping system that requires a calibrated range o-f 40 to 50b gpm will have a 

typical pressure drop at 500 gpm of 5 psi. 

Sizes designated mm (millimeters) are available with metric thread in accordance with DIN 2999/8521 /lSO R7. 

T

BNPE 

ITT 

Commercial Water 

Goulds Pumps 

G&L Series NPE 

316L SS 

NPE Series End Suction Centrifugal Pumps 

Bombas Centrífugas de Succión Final Serie NPE 

Goulds Pumps is a brand of ITT Corporation. 

Goulds Pumps es una marca de fábrica de ITT Corporation. 

www.goulds.com 

Engineered for life

A Full Range of Product Features 

Una Gama Total de Características del Producto 

NPE Product Line Numbering System 

Línea de Producto NPE Sistema de Numeración 

Superior Materials of 

Construction: Complete AISI 

316L stainless steel liquid handling 

components and mounting bracket 

for corrosion resistance, quality 

appearance, and improved strength 

and ductility. 

High Efficiency Impeller: 

Enclosed impeller with unique 

floating seal ring design maintains 

maximum efficiencies over the life 

of the pump without adjustment. 

Casing and Adapter Features: 

Stainless steel construction with 

NPT threaded, centerline connections, 

easily accessible vent, prime 

and drain connections with stainless 

steel plugs. Optional seal face 

vent/flush available. 

Mechanical Seal: Standard 

John Crane Type 21 with carbon 

versus silicon-carbide faces, Viton 

elastomers, and 316 stainless metal 

parts. Optional high temperature 

and chemical duty seals available. 

Motors: NEMA standard open 

drip-proof, totally enclosed fan 

cooled or explosion proof enclosures. 

Rugged ball bearing design 

for continuous duty under all 

operating conditions. 

The various versions of the NPE are 

identified by a product code number 

on the pump label. This number 

is also the catalog number for the 

pump. The meaning of each digit in 

the product code number is shown 

at left. 

Materiales Superiores de 

Construcción: Componentes 

completos para manejo de líquidos 

en acero inoxidable AISI 316L 

y consola para el montaje para 

resistencia a la corrosión, 

apariencia de calidad, y fuerza y 

ductilidad mejoradas. 

Impulsor de Eficiencia Superior: 

El impulsor encerrado con 

un diseño único de anillo del sello 

flotante, mantiene sin ajustes, la 

eficiencia máxima sobre la vida 

de la bomba. 

Características de la 

Carcasa y del Adaptador: 

Construcción en acero inoxidable 

con NPT roscado, conexiones 

centrales, válvulas de fácil acceso, 

conexiones de cebado y drenaje 

con enchufes de acero inoxidable. 

Cara del sello válvula/chorro 

opcional disponible. 

Sello Mecánico: Estándar John 

Crane Tipo 21 con carbón en contraste 

con caras de silicón-carbide, 

elastómeros de Viton, y partes 

metálicas de acero inoxidable 

316. Sellos de alta temperatura 

y productos químicos están disponibles. 

Motores: Estándar NEMA a 

prueba de goteo, ventilador 

totalmente encerrado o recintos 

a prueba de explosión. Diseño 

robusto de balineras de bolas 

para trabajo continuo en todas las 

condiciones de funcionamiento. 

Las diferentes versiones de la NPE 

se identifican con un número de 

código del producto en la etiqueta 

de la bomba. Este número es 

también el número del catálogo 

para la bomba. El significado 

de cada dígito en el número de 

código del producto se muestra a 

la izquierda. 

Example Product Code, 

Ejemplo Código del Producto 

1 ST 2 C 1 A 4 F 

Seal Vent/Flush Option, 

Opción de Sello Válvula/ChorroSeal Ven 

Mechanical Seal and O-ring 

4 = Pre-engineered standard 

For optional mechanical seal modify catalog order no. 

with seal code listed below. 

Sello Mecánico y Anillo ‘O’ 

4 = Estándar aprobado 

Para sello mecánico opcional modificar el número de orden 

del catálogo con el código del sello anotado abajo. 

Seal 

Code, 

Código 

del 

Sello 

2 

Impeller Option . . . No Adder Required 

For optional impeller diameters modify catalog order no. 

with impeller code listed. Select optional impeller diameter from 

pump performance curve. 

Código del Impulsor Opcional 

Para impulsores con diámetros opcionales modificar el número de 

orden del catálogo con el código del impulsor anotado. Escoger el impul 

con diámetro opcional de la curva de funcionamiento de la bomba. 

Impeller Code, 

Código del 

Impulsor 

John Crane Type 21 Mechanical Seal ( 5 ⁄8” seal), 

Sello Mecánico John Crane Tipo 21 (sello de 5 ⁄8”) 

Metal Part 

Rotary, Stationary, Elastomers, Parts, No., 

Rotativo Estacionario Elastómeros Partes Pieza 

Metálicas Número 

EPR 

10K18 

Carbon 

4 Silicon Viton 

10K55 

316 SS 

5 Silicon Carbide EPR 10K81 

6 Carbide 

Viton 10K62 

Pump Size, Tamaño de la Bomba 

1 x 1¼ – 6 1¼ x 1½ – 6 1½ x 2 – 6 

Diameter Diameter Diameter 

K – 6 1 ⁄8 – 

G – 5 15 ⁄16 5 3 ⁄8 

H – 5½ 5 

A 6 1 ⁄8 5¼ 4¾ 

B 5¾ 5 1 ⁄16 4 5 ⁄8 

C 5 3 ⁄16 4 7 ⁄8 4 3 ⁄8 

D 4¾ 4 5 ⁄8 4 1 ⁄16 

E 4 7 ⁄16 4¼ 3 5 ⁄8 

F 4 1 ⁄16 3 7 ⁄8 – 

Driver, Conductor 

1 = 1 PH, ODP 7 = 3 PH, XP 

2 = 3 PH, ODP 8 = 575 V, XP 

3 = 575 V, ODP 9 = 3 PH, TEFC 

4 = 1 PH, TEFC Premium Eff. 

5 = 3 PH, TEFC 0 = 1 PH, XP 

6 = 575 V, TEFC 

HP Rating, HP Potencia 

C = ½ HP E = 1 HP G = 2 HP J = 5 HP 

D = ¾ HP F = 1½ HP H = 3 HP 

Driver: Hertz/Pole/RPM, 

Conductor: Hercios/Polo/RPM 

1 = 60 Hz, 2 pole, 3500 RPM 

2 = 60 Hz, 4 pole, 1750 RPM 

3 = 60 Hz, 6 pole, 1150 RPM 

4 = 50 Hz, 2 pole, 2900 RPM 

5 = 50 Hz, 4 pole, 1450 RPM 

Material 

ST = Stainless steel, Acero inoxidable 

Pump Size, Tamaño de la Bomba 

1 = 1 x 1¼ – 6 2 = 1¼ x 1½ – 6 3 = 1½ x 2 – 6 

For frame 

mounted 

version, 

substitute the 

letters “FRM” in 

these positions. 

Para la versión 

con el armazón 

montado, 

sustituya las 

letras “FRM” 

en estas 

posiciones. 

GOULDS PUMPS 


2

Performance Coverage (60 Hz) 

Alcance de Funcionamiento (60 Hz) 

METERS 

METROS 

50 

FEET 

PIES 

160 

TOTAL DYNAMIC HEAD (CARGA DINAMICA TOTAL) H 

40 

30 

20 

10 

140 

120 

100 

80 

60 

40 

20 

1ST 

1750 RPM 

1ST 

1" x 1 1 ⁄4" – 6 

1 

⁄2–3 HP 

3500 RPM 

2ST 1750 RPM 

2ST 

1 1 ⁄4" x 1 1 ⁄2" – 6 

3 

⁄4–5 HP 

3500 RPM 

3ST 1750 RPM 

3ST 

1 1 ⁄2" x 2" – 6 

1–5 HP 

3500 RPM 

0 

0 

0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 U.S. GPM 

0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 m 3 /hr 

CAPACITY (CAPACIDAD) Q 

Notes: 

Not recommended for operation 

beyond printed H-Q curve. 

For critical application conditions 

consult factory. 

Not all combinations of motor, 

impeller and seal options are 

available for every pump model. 

Please check with G&L on noncataloged 

numbers. 

All standard 3500 RPM ODP and 

TEFC motors supplied by Goulds 

Pumps, have minimum of 1.15 

service factor. Standard catalog 

units may utilize available service 

factor. Any motors supplied other 

than Goulds Pumps check available 

service factor. 

NOTAS: 

No se recomienda para funcionamiento 

superior al impreso en la 

curva H-Q. 

Para condiciones de aplicaciones 

críticas consultar con la fábrica. 

No todas las combinaciones de 

las opciones de motor, impulsor y 

sello están disponibles para cada 

modelo de bombas. Por favor 

verifique con G&L en los números 

no catalogados. 

Todos los motores estándar 

de 3500 RPM, ODP (abiertos 

resguardados) y TEFC (totalmente 

encerrados con enfriamiento 

forzado) provistos por Goulds 

Pumps tienen un factor mínimo 

de servicio de 1,15. Las unidades 

estándar de catálogo pueden 

utilizar el factor de servicio 

disponible. Verificar el factor de 

servicio disponible de todo motor 

no provisto por Goulds Pumps. 

GOULDS PUMPS 


3

NPE Close Coupled Pump Major Components: Materials of Construction 

Bomba Cerrada Acoplada NPE Componentes Principales: Materiales de Construcción 

100 101 347 370 513 184 108 383 123 

184A 

108A 

349 

412B 408 371 

1½, 2 and 3 HP 

1½, 2 y 3 HP 

Seal Face Vent/Flush Option, 

Opción Cara del Sello Válvula/Chorro 

Item No., Description, 

Parte No. Descripción 

100 Casing; Carcasa 

Materials, 

Materiales 

101 Impeller; Impulsor AISI 316L SS; 

108 Motor adapter; Adaptador del motor AISI 316L 

108A 

Acero inoxidable 

Motor adapter seal vent/flush; 

Sello válvula/chorro del adaptador del motor 

123 Deflector; Deflector BUNA-N 

184 Seal housing; Alojamiento del sello 

184 A 

AISI 316L SS; 

Seal housing seal vent/flush; 

AISI 316L 

Sello válvula/chorro del alojamiento del sello 


347 Guidevane; Difusor 

349 Seal ring, guidevane; Anillo del sello, difusor Viton 

370 

Socket head screws, casing; 

AISI 410 SS; 

Encajes cabezas de tornillos, carcasa AISI 410 Acero inoxidable 

371 

Bolts, motor; 

Plated steel; 

Tornillos, motor 

Acero chapeado 

383 Mechanical seal; Sello mecánico **see chart, ver tabla 

408 

412B 

Drain and vent plug, casing; 

AISI 316L SS; 

Enchufes de drenaje y válvula, carcasa AISI 316L Acero inoxidable 

O-ring, drain and vent plug; 

Anillo ‘O’, enchufe de drenaje y válvula 

513 O-ring, casing; Anillo ‘O’, carcasa 

Motor NEMA standard, 56J flange; 

Motor NEMA estándar, brida 56J 

Viton (Standard, estándar) 

EPR (Optional, Opcional) 

½, ¾ and 1 HP 

½, ¾ y 1 HP 

Footed motor for 5 HP ODP and TEFC, all explosion 

proof motors, see page 13. 

Motor con pie para 5 HP ODP y TEFC, a prueba de 

explosiones motores, en la página 13. 

GOULDS PUMPS 


4

NPE Frame Mounted Pump Major Components: Materials of Construction 

Bomba NPE de Armazón Montado Componentes Principales: Materiales de Construcción 

347 370 513 184 108 168 122 112 370C 

184A 

100 

108A 

101 

349 

361 

109 

139 

383 

304 

412B 

408 

138 

371 

228 

Seal Face Vent/Flush Option, 

Opción Cara del Sello Válvula/Chorro 



100 Casing; Carcasa 

Materials, 

Materiales 

101 Impeller; Impulsor AISI 316L SS; 

108 Adapter; Adaptador AISI 316L 

108A 


Motor adapter seal vent/flush; 

Sello válvula/chorro del adaptador del motor 

109 Bearing cover; Cubierta de balineras Cast iron; Hierro fundido 

112 

122 Shaft; Eje 

Ball bearing (outboard); 

Balineras de bolas (exterior) 

Steel; 

Acero 

AISI 316 SS; 

AISI 316 Acero inoxidable 

138 Lip-seal (inboard); Sello cubierto (interior) BUNA/steel; Buna/acero 

139 Lip-seal (outboard); Sello cubierto (exterior) BUNA/steel; Buna/acero 

168 

Ball bearing (inboard); 

Balineras de bolas (interior) 

184 Seal housing; Alojamiento del sello 

184 A 

Seal housing seal vent/flush; 

Sello válvula/chorro del alojamiento del sello 

Steel; 

Acero 

AISI 316L SS; 

AISI 316L Acero inoxidable 

228 Bearing frame; Armazón de balineras Cast iron, Hierro fundido 



Materials, 

Materiales 

304 Impeller locknut; Contratuerca del impulsor AISI 316 SS; 

347 Guidevane; Difusor AISI 316 Acero inoxidable 

349 Seal ring, guidevane; Anillo del sello, difusor Viton 

361 Retaining ring; Anillo de retención Steel; Acero 

370 

370C 

Socket head screws, casing; 

Encaje cabeza del tornillo, carcasa 

Hex head screw, bearing cover; 

Tornillo de cabeza hexagonal, 

cubierta de balineras 

Hex head screw, bearing frame; 

371 Tornillo de cabeza hexagonal, 

armazón de balineras 

AISI 410 SS; 


Plated steel; 


Plated steel; 


383 Mechanical seal; Sello mecánico **see chart; ver tabla 

400 Shaft key; Llave del eje Steel; Acero 

408 

412B 

Drain and vent plug, casing; 

Enchufes de drenaje y válvula, carcasa 

O-ring, drain and vent plug; 

Anillo ‘O’, enchufe de drenaje y válvula 

513 O-ring, casing; Anillo ‘O’, carcasa 

AISI 316 SS; 


Viton (Standard, estándar) 

EPR (Optional, Opcional) 

GOULDS PUMPS 


5

Performance Curves – 60 Hz, 3500 RPM 

Curvas de Funcionamiento – 60 Hz, 3500 RPM 

METERS 

METROS 


50 

40 

30 

20 

10 

FEET 

PIES 

160 

Model NPE / 1ST Size (Tamaño) 1 x 1 1 ⁄4-6 

RPM 3500 Curve (Curva) CN0231R01 

A 6 1 ⁄8" DIA. 

140 

120 

80 

60 

40 

B 5 3 ⁄4" 

C 5 3 ⁄16" 

100 

D 4 3 ⁄4" 

E 4 7 ⁄16" 

NPSH R – FEET (PIES) 

5' 

45 48 

50 

1⁄2 HP 

6' 

51 

53 

Impeller Selections for ODP & TEFC Motors 

Selecciones del Impulsor para 

Motores ODP & TEFC 

NOTE: Not recommended for operation beyond 

printed H-Q curve. 

NOTA: No se recomienda para funcionamiento 

superior al impreso en la curva H-Q. 

52 

8' 

51 

10' 

50 

1 HP 

12' 

48 

2 HP 

1 1 ⁄2 HP 

EFF % 

3 HP 

Ordering Standard 

Code, HP Rating, Imp. 

Código Estándar HP Dia. 

de Pedido Potencia 

E ½ 4 7 ⁄ 16” 

D ¾ 4¾ 

C 1 5 3 ⁄ 16 

B 1½ 5¾ 

A 2 6 1 ⁄ 8 

NOTE: Although not 

recommended, the pump 

may pass a 1 ⁄ 16” sphere. 

NOTA: Si bien no se 

recomienda, la bomba puede 

pasar una esfera de 1 ⁄ 16”. 

20 

3⁄4 HP 

0 

0 

0 

10 

20 

30 

40 

50 

60 U.S. GPM 

0 

5 


10 

m 3 ⁄ hr 

METERS 

METROS 


50 

40 

30 

20 

10 

FEET 

PIES 

160 

A 6 1 ⁄8" DIA. 

140 

B 5 3 ⁄4" 

120 

C 5 3 ⁄16" 

100 

80 

60 

40 

20 



D 4 3 ⁄4" 

E 4 7 ⁄16" 

F 4 1 ⁄16" 

Spec. 


8' 

10' 

5' 

45 48 

50 

12' 

Impeller Selections for Exp. Proof Motors 

Selecciones del Impulsor para Motores Exp. Proof 

NOTE: Not recommended for operation beyond printed H-Q curve. 

NOTA: No se recomienda para funcionamiento superior al 

impreso en la curva H-Q. 

1⁄2 HP 

6' 

51 

52 

53 

8’ 

10' 

12' 

51 

50 

48 

3⁄4 HP 

1 HP 

2 HP 

1 1 ⁄2 HP 

EFF % 

3 HP 





F 

½ 

E ¾ 4 7 ⁄ 16 

D 1 4¾ 

C 1½ 5 3 ⁄ 16 

B 2 5¾ 

A 3 6 1 ⁄ 8 




4 1 ⁄ 16” 

spec. 

NOTA: Si bien no se recomienda, 

la bomba puede pasar 

una esfera de 1 ⁄ 16”. 

0 

0 

0 

10 

20 

30 

40 

50 

60 U.S. GPM 

0 

5 


10 

m 3 ⁄ hr 

GOULDS PUMPS 


6



METERS 

METROS 


40 

35 

30 

25 

20 

15 

10 

5 

Model NPE / 2ST Size (Tamaño) 1 1 ⁄4 x 1 1 ⁄2-6 Impeller Selections for ODP & TEFC Motors 



FEET 

PIES 


NPSH R – FEET (PIES) 5' 7' 

NOTE: Not recommended for operation beyond printed H- 

130 

G 5 15 ⁄16" DIA. 

50 

Q curve. 

55 

58 10' NOTA: No se recomienda para funcionamiento superior al 


120 

H 5 1 15' 

⁄2" 

20' 

110 

60 

A 5 1 ⁄4" 

62 58 

100 

B 5 1 ⁄16" 

55 EFF % 

90 

64 

C 4 7 ⁄8" 

66 

80 

D 4 5 ⁄8" 

70 

60 

50 

40 

30 

20 

10 

0 

E 4 1 ⁄4" 

F 3 7 ⁄8" 

20 

40 

3 ⁄4 HP 

60 

1 HP 

80 

100 

1 1 ⁄2 HP 

2 HP 

120 

3 HP 

140 

5 HP 

160 

U.S. GPM 





F ¾ 3 7 ⁄ 8” 

E 1 4¼ 

D 1½ 4 5 ⁄ 8 

C 2 4 7 ⁄ 8 

B 3 5 1 ⁄ 16 

A 3 5¼ 

H 5 5½ 

G 5 5 15 ⁄ 16 







0 

5 

10 

15 

20 25 30 35 


m 3 ⁄ hr 

METERS 

METROS 


30 

25 

20 

15 

10 

FEET 

PIES 

110 

100 

90 

80 

70 

6 

50 

40 

30 

Model NPE / 2ST Size (Tamaño) 1 1 ⁄4 x 1 1 ⁄2-6 


B 5 1 ⁄16" DIA. 

D 4 5 ⁄8" 

E 4 1 ⁄4" 

F 3 7 ⁄8" 


50 

55 

3 ⁄4 HP 

5' 

7' 

58 60 62 

64 

66 



10' 





64 

15' 

62 

60 

2 HP 

20' 

58 

55 EFF % 

3 HP 





F 1 3 7 ⁄ 8” 

E 1½ 4¼ 

D 2 4 5 ⁄ 8 

B 3 5 1 ⁄ 16 







5 

20 

10 

0 

20 

40 

60 

1 HP 

80 

100 

1 1 ⁄2 HP 

120 

140 

160 

U.S. GPM 

0 

5 

10 

15 

20 25 30 


m 3 ⁄ hr 

GOULDS PUMPS 


7



METERS 

METROS 


35 

30 

25 

20 

15 

10 

5 

FEET 

PIES 

120 

100 

80 

60 

40 

20 

Model NPE / 3ST Size (Tamaño) 1 1 ⁄2 x 2-6 

RPM 3500 Curve (Curva) No. CN0239RO2 

NPSH R – FEET (PIES) NOTE: Not recommended for operation beyond printed H- 

50 5' 

Q curve. 

55 


60 64 impreso en la curva H-Q. 

6' 

G 5 3 ⁄8" DIA. 

7' 10' 

66 

17' 

H 5" 

A 4 3 ⁄4" 

B 4 5 ⁄8" 

C 4 3 ⁄8" 

D 4 1 ⁄16" 

E 3 5 ⁄8" 

1 HP 

Impeller Selections for ODP & TEFC Motors 



1 1 ⁄2 HP 

5 HP 

2 HP 

66EFF % 

3 HP 

64 

60 

55 





E 1 3 5 ⁄ 8” 

D 1½ 4 1 ⁄ 16 

C 2 4 3 ⁄ 8 

B 3 4 5 ⁄ 8 

A 3 4¾ 

H 5 5 

G 5 5 3 ⁄ 8 







0 

0 

0 

20 

40 

60 

80 

100 

120 

140 

160 

U.S. GPM 

0 

5 

10 

15 

20 25 30 35 


m 3 ⁄ hr 

METERS 

METROS 


30 

25 

20 

15 

10 

FEET 

PIES 

100 

80 

60 

40 

Model NPE / 3ST Size (Tamaño) 1 1 /2 x 2-6 


B 4 5 ⁄8" DIA. 

D 4 1 ⁄16" 

E 3 5 ⁄8" 


50 55 

5' 

60 

1 HP 



64 

6' 

66 

NOTE: Not recommended for operation beyond printed H-Q 

curve. 



66 

7' 

64 

10' 

60 

55 EFF % 

3 HP 





E 1½ 3 5 ⁄ 8” 

D 2 4 1 ⁄ 16 

B 3 4 5 ⁄ 8 







5 

20 

1 1 ⁄2 HP 

2 HP 

0 

0 

0 

20 

40 

60 

80 

100 

120 

140 

160 

U.S. GPM 

0 

5 

10 

15 

20 25 30 35 


m 3 ⁄ hr 

GOULDS PUMPS 


8



METERS 

METROS 


12 

10 

8 

6 

4 

2 

FEET 

PIES 

40 

10 

5 



A 6 1 ⁄8" DIA. 

35 

B 5 3 ⁄4" 

30 

C 5 3 ⁄16" 

25 

D 4 3 ⁄4" 

20 

E 4 7 ⁄16" 

15 

F 4 1 ⁄16" 


8' 

9' 

45 

12' 

5' 

48 50 

6' 

51 

52 

53 

NoTE: Not recommended for operation beyond 




8' 

10' 

12' 

51 

50 48 EFF % 

1⁄3 HP 

Optional Impeller, 

Impulsor Opcional 

Ordering Code, 

Código de Pedido 

A 6 1 ⁄ 8” 

B 

5¾ 

C 5 3 ⁄ 16 

D 

Dia. 

4¾ 

E 4 7 ⁄ 16 

F 4 1 ⁄ 16 







0 

0 

0 

5 

10 

15 

20 

25 

30 

U.S. GPM 

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 m 3 ⁄ hr 


METERS 

METROS 


10 

9 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

FEET 

PIES 

35 

32.5 

30 

27.5 

25 

22.5 

20 

17.5 

15 

12.5 

10 

7.5 

5 

0 

0 


RPM 1750 60 Hz 

K 6 1 ⁄8" DIA. 

G 5 15 ⁄16" 

H 5 1 ⁄2" 

A 5 1 ⁄4" 

B 5 1 ⁄16" 

C 4 7 ⁄8" 

D 4 5 ⁄8" 

E 4 1 ⁄4" 

F 3 7 ⁄8" 

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 

2 


4 

50 

5' 7' 

55 

58 

6 

8 

66 

62 

64 

60 

10' 

10 12 14 






15' 20' 

58 

55 EFF % 

1 /3 HP 

16 

1/2 HP 

80 

U.S. GPM 

m 3 ⁄ hr 





K 6 1 ⁄ 8” 

G 5 15 ⁄ 16” 

H 

A 

5½ 

5¼ 

B 5 1 ⁄ 16 

C 4 7 ⁄ 8 

D 4 5 ⁄ 8 

E 

Dia. 

4¼ 

F 3 7 ⁄ 8 







GOULDS PUMPS 


9

1/2 HP 



METERS 

METROS 


8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

FEET 

PIES 

30 

25 

20 

15 

10 

5 


RPM 1750 60 Hz 

G 5 3 ⁄8" DIA. 

H 5" 

A 4 3 ⁄4" 

B 4 5 ⁄8" 

C 4 3 ⁄8" 

D 4 1 ⁄16" 

E 3 5 ⁄8" 


5' 

50 55 

60 6' 64 7' 

66 





10' 

17' 

66 

64 

1 /3 HP 

60 

55 EFF % 

1/2 HP 





G 5 3 ⁄ 8” 

H 5 

A 

Dia. 

4¾ 

B 4 5 ⁄ 8 

C 4 3 ⁄ 8 

D 4 1 ⁄ 16 

E 3 5 ⁄ 8 







0 

0 

0 

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 

80 

U.S. GPM 

0 

2 

4 

6 

8 10 12 14 16 18 


m 3 ⁄ hr 



METERS 

METROS 

FEET 

PIES 


RPM 2900 50 Hz 









Dia. 

40 

120 


A 6 1 ⁄ 8” 

B 

5¾ 


30 

20 

10 

100 

80 

60 

40 

20 

A 6 1 ⁄8" DIA. 

B 5 3 ⁄4" 

C 5 3 ⁄16" 

D 4 3 ⁄4" 

E 4 7 ⁄16" 

F 4 1 ⁄16" 

8' 

EFF % 

45 

9' 

12' 

5' 

48 

50 

6' 

51 

52 

53 

8' 

51 

10' 

50 

12' 

48 

1 HP 

3/4 HP 

1 1 /2 HP 

C 5 3 ⁄ 16 

D 

4¾ 

E 4 7 ⁄ 16 

F 4 1 ⁄ 16 







0 

0 

0 

10 

20 

30 

40 

50 

U.S. GPM 60 

0 

5 


10 

m 3 ⁄ hr 

GOULDS PUMPS 


10



METERS 

METROS 


30 

25 

20 

15 

10 

FEET 

PIES 

100 

90 

80 

70 

60 

50 

40 

30 


RPM 2900 50 Hz 

K 6 1 ⁄8" DIA. 

G 5 15 ⁄16" 

H 5 1 ⁄2" 

A 5 1 ⁄4" 

B 5 1 ⁄16" 

C 4 7 ⁄8" 

D 4 5 ⁄8" 

E 4 1 ⁄4" 

F 3 7 ⁄8" 

50 EFF % 

5' 

55 

7' 

58 

60 

62 

66 

64 

10' 

NOTE: Not recommended for operation beyond printed 

H-Q curve. 

NOTA: No se recomienda para funcionamiento superior 

al impreso en la curva H-Q. 


15' 

58 

20' 

55 

2 HP 

3 HP 





K 6 1 ⁄ 8” 

G 5 15 ⁄ 16” 

H 

A 

5½ 

5¼ 

B 5 1 ⁄ 16 

C 4 7 ⁄ 8 

D 4 5 ⁄ 8 

E 

Dia. 

4¼ 

F 3 7 ⁄ 8 

5 

20 

10 

7 

0 

0 

20 

5 

40 

10 

3 /4 HP 

1 HP 

1 1 /2 HP 

60 

80 

100 120 

15 20 25 


30 

U.S. GPM 

m 3 ⁄ hr 







METERS 

METROS 

25 


20 

15 

10 

5 

FEET 

PIES 

G 5 3 ⁄8" DIA. 

70 

H 5" 

60 

A 4 3 ⁄4" 

B 4 5 ⁄8" 

50 

C 4 3 ⁄8" 

40 

D 4 1 ⁄16" 

E 3 5 ⁄8" 

30 

20 

10 


RPM 2900 50 Hz 


EFF % 50 5' 6' 

55 

60 6 

66 7' 





10' 

3⁄4 HP 

1 HP 

1 1 ⁄2 HP 

66 

2 HP 

64 

3 HP 

60 

55 





G 5 3 ⁄ 8” 

H 5 

A 

4¾ 

B 4 5 ⁄ 8 

C 4 3 ⁄ 8 

D 4 1 ⁄ 16 

E 3 5 ⁄ 8 




Dia. 




0 

0 

0 

20 

40 

60 

80 

100 

120 

U.S. GPM 

0 

5 

10 

15 

20 


25 

30 

m 3 ⁄ hr 

GOULDS PUMPS 


11

NPE Close Coupled – Dimensions, Weights and Specifications 

NPE Acople Cerrado – Dimensiones, Pesos y Especificaciones 

Clockwise Rotation Viewed from Drive End 

Rotación en Dirección de las Agujas del Reloj Visto desde el Extremo del Motor 

DISCHARGE 

DESCARGA 

FILL AND VENT 

CARGA Y VÁLVULA 

4 1 ⁄4 

Y W C MAX. 

1 PHASE UNITS ONLY 

UNIDADES MONOFÁSICAS 

SOLAMENTE 

2 3 ⁄4 

SUCTION 

SUCCIÓN 

X 

6 5 ⁄16 MAX. 

30° 

TYP. 

4 1 ⁄4 

4 

3 11 /16 

MAX. 

DRAIN PLUG 1 ⁄4 

ENCHUFE DE DRENAJE 1 ⁄4 

2 15 ⁄16 

6 7 ⁄8 

2 15 ⁄16 

3 

⁄16 

L 5 

ODP and TEFC ½, ¾ and 1 HP (standard), ODP y TEFC ½, ¾ y 1 HP (estándar) 

6 1 ⁄2 

(4) 13 ⁄32 DIA. MOUNTING HOLES 

(4) 13 ⁄32 DIA. AGUJEROS DE MONTAJE 

3 ⁄4 

DISCHARGE 

DESCARGA 

4 1 ⁄4 

Y 

W 

C MAX. 

FILL AND VENT 

CARGA Y VALVULA 

X 

1 PHASE ONLY 

MONOFÁSICA 

SOLAMENTE 

2 3 ⁄4 

SUCTION 

SUCCIÓN 

6 1 ⁄2 MAX. 

MOTOR CRADLE 

HORQUILLA DEL MOTOR 

30º 

TYP 

4 1 ⁄4 

3 11 ⁄16 

4 MAX. 

DRAIN 

DRENAJE 

2 15 ⁄16 

8 1 ⁄8 

2 15 ⁄16 

L 5 1 31 ⁄32 

8 1 ⁄4 

ODP and TEFC 1½, 2 and 3 HP (standard), ODP y TEFC 1½, 2 y 3 HP (estándar) 

13 

⁄32 DIA. HOLE 

4-MOUNTING HOLES 

13 

⁄32 DIA. 4-AGUJEROS 

DE MONTAJE 


Especificaciones 

Capacities to: 

85 GPM (322L/min) at 1750 RPM 

170 GPM (643L/min) at 3500 RPM 

Heads to: 

39 feet (12 m) at 1750 RPM 

150 feet (46 m) at 3500 RPM 

Working pressures to: 

125 PSIG (9 bars) 

Maximum temperatures to: 

250° F (121° C) 

Direction of rotation: 

Clockwise when viewed from 

motor end. 

Motor specifications: 

NEMA 56J frame, 1750 RPM, 

½ HP. 3500 RPM ½ through 

5 HP. Open drip-proof, totally 

enclosed fan-cooled or explosion 

proof enclosures. Stainless steel 

shaft with ball bearings. 

Single phase: Voltage 115/230 

ODP and TEFC. (3 and 5 HP model 

– 230 V only) Built-in overload 

with auto-reset provided. 

Three phase: Voltage 208- 

230/460 ODP, TEFC and EX 

PROOF. 

NOTE: For three phase motors, 

overload protection must be 

provided in starter unit. Starter 

and heaters must be ordered 

separately. 

Capacidades: 

85 GPM (322L/min) a 1750 RPM 

170 GPM (643L/min) a 3500 RPM 

Cargas: 

39 pies (12 m) a 1750 RPM 

150 pies (46 m) a 3500 RPM 

Presión de trabajo: 

125 PSIG (9 baras) 

Temperatura máxima: 

250° F (121° C) 

Dirección de rotación: 

En dirección de las agujas del reloj 

visto desde el extremo final del 

motor. 

Motores: 

Armazón 56J NEMA, 1750 RPM 

½ HP. 3500 RPM ½ a 5 HP. 

Cubiertas abiertas resguardadas, 

totalmente encerradas enfriadas 

por ventilador o a prueba de explosiones. 

Eje de acero inoxidable 

con balineras de bolas. 

Monofásicos: Voltaje 115/230 

ODP y TEFC. (modelo 3 y 5 HP 

– 230 voltios solamente) Se 

proporciona protección térmica 

contra sobrecarga construida con 

reseteo automático. 

Trifásicos: Voltaje 208-230/460 

ODP, TEFC y EX PROOF. 

NOTA: Para motores trifásicos se 

debe de proporcionar la protección 

térmica contra sobrecarga en la unidad 

de arranque. El arrancador y los calentadores 

se deben pedir por separado. 

GOULDS PUMPS 


12

NPE Close Coupled with Footed Motor, Explosion-proof and 5 HP Motors 

NPE Acople Cerrado con Motor con Patas, Motores a Prueba de Explosión Y 5 HP 

FILL AND VENT 


SUCTION 

SUCCIÓN 

DISCHARGE 

DESCARGA 

All Explosion Proof Motors and 5 HP ODP and TEFC 

Todos los motores son a prueba de explosiones, 5 HP, ODP 

(abiertos resguardados) y TEFC (totalmente encerrados con 

enfriamiento forzado) 

8 1 /2 

4 1 /4 Y W 

C. MAX. 

X 

6 1 /2 DIA. 

4 1 /4 

3 1 /2 

1/3 

7/8 

DRAIN PLUG 1 /4 

ENCHUFE DE DRENAJE 1 /4 

M 

3 

3 3 /4 

4 7 /8 

6 1 /2 

Dimensions – Determined by Pump, 

Dimensiones – Determinadas por la Bomba 

Pump, Suction, Discharge, 

Bomba Succión Descarga 

HP W X Y L M 

1ST 1¼ 1 ½ – 3 3 5 ⁄ 16 4 3 ⁄ 8 2 4 9 ⁄ 16 7 5 ⁄ 16 

2ST 1½ 1¼ ¾ – 5 3¾ 4½ 2 1 ⁄ 8 5 1 ⁄ 8 7 7 ⁄ 8 

3ST 2 1½ 1 – 5 3¾ 4 5 ⁄ 8 2 1 ⁄ 8 5 1 ⁄ 8 7 7 ⁄ 8 

Available Motor Weights and Dimensions, 

Pesos y Dimensiones Disponibles del Motor 

HP 

Motor Weights, Pesos del Motor 

1 Phase, Monofásicos 3 Phase, Trifásicos 

ODP TEFC EXP ODP TEFC EXP 

C Max. 

Length, 

(Longitud) 

½ 16 21 47 19 18 27 9 15 ⁄ 16 

¾ 19 24 41 21 21 30 10¼ 

1 22 26 49 23 21 30 11 

1½ 28 35 56 27 27 37 11 5 ⁄ 16 

2 33 39 60 32 33 44 12 1 ⁄ 16 

3 40 43 — 41 37 — 12 7 ⁄ 16 

5 42 — — 42 45 — 14¼ 

Dimensions in inches, weights in pounds. 

Dimensiones en pulgadas, pesos en libras. 

Notes: 

1. Pump will be shipped with top 

vertical discharge position as 

standard. For other orientations, 

remove casing bolts, rotate 

discharge to desired position, 

replace and tighten 6mm bolts 

to 5 – 6 lbs.-ft. 

2. Motor dimensions may vary with 

motor manufacturers. 

3. Dimensions in inches, weights 

in pounds. 

4. For explosion proof motor 

dimensions consult factory for 

information. 

5. Not to be used for construction 

purposes unless certified. 

NOTAS: 

1. Las bombas se transportarán 

con la descarga vertical superior 

como estándar. Para otras orientaciones, 

retirar los tornillos de 

la carcasa, rotar la descarga a la 

posición deseada, y reemplazar y 

apretar los tornillos de 6mm a 5 

– 6 libras-pies. 

2. Las dimensiones del motor 

puede que varíen con los 

fabricantes. 

3. Dimensiones en pulgadas, pesos 

en libras. 

4. Para las dimensiones de los 

motores a prueba de explosión 

consultar con la fábrica para 

información. 

5. No usar para propósitos de 

construcción sin certificar. 

GOULDS PUMPS 


13

NPE Frame Mounted – Dimensions, Weights and Specifications 

NPE Armazón Montado – Dimensiones, Pesos y Especificaciones 

FILL AND VENT 


4 1 /4 

DISCHARGE 

DESCARGA 

X 

SUCTION 

SUCCIÓN 

Y 

W 

CP 

2 

3 1 /2 C. MAX. 

SPACER COUPLING (ACOPLE DEL ESPACIADOR) 

COUPLING GUARD 

GUARDA ACOPLE 

LOCATION FOR 

SINGLE PHASE ONLY 

UBICACIÓN PARA 

MONOFÁSICOS SOLAMENTE 

3 1 /8 MAX. 

7 7 /8 MAX. 

DRAIN 

DRENAJE 

HG 

HD 

4 311 /16 

MAX. 

7/8 

KEYWAY 3 /32 X 3 /16 

CHAVETERO 3 /32 X 3 /16 

4 HOLES 3 ⁄8 DIA. 

4 AGUJEROS 3 ⁄8 DIA. 

HE 

HA 

HE 

HL 

HF 

HB 

HP 


Especificaciones 

Capacities to: 

85 GPM (322L/min) at 1750 RPM 

170 GPM (643L/min) at 3500 RPM 

Heads to: 

39 feet (12 m) at 1750 RPM 

150 feet (47 m) at 3500 RPM 

Working pressures to: 

125 PSIG (9 bars) 

Maximum temperatures to: 

250°F (121°C) 

Direction of rotation: 

Clockwise when viewed from 

motor end. 

Motor specifications: 

T-frame single and three phase. 

Open drip-proof, TEFC or explosion 

proof enclosures are available 

for 60 Hz, 3500 and 1750 RPM 


For three phase motors, overload 

protection must be provided in 

starter unit. Starter and heaters 

must be ordered separately. 

Capacidades: 

85 GPM (322L/min) a 1750 RPM 

170 GPM (643L/min) a 3500 RPM 

Cargas: 

39 pies (12 m) a 1750 RPM 

150 pies (47 m) a 3500 RPM 

Presión de trabajo: 

125 PSIG (9 baras) 

Temperatura máxima: 

250°F (121°C) 

Dirección de rotación: 

En dirección de las agujas del reloj 

visto desde el extremo final del 

motor. 

Motores: 

Armazón T- monofásico y 

trifásico. A prueba de goteo, TEFC 

o recintos a prueba de explosión 

están disponibles para funcionamiento 

de 60 Hz, 3500 y 1750 

RPM. 

Para motores trifásicos se debe de 

proporcionar la protección térmica 

contra sobrecarga en la unidad 

de arranque. El arrancador y los 

calentadores se deben pedir por 

separado. 

NPE-F 

FILL AND VENT 


4 1 ⁄4 

DISCHARGE 

DESCARGA 

Y 

W 

CP MAX. 

X 

SUCTION 

SUCCIÓN 

2 

KEYWAY 3 ⁄32 x 3 ⁄16 

CHAVETERO 3 ⁄32 x 3 ⁄16 

7/8 

DRAIN 

DRENAJE 

2 

2 

4 1 ⁄2 

3 11 ⁄16 

MAX. 

4 

L 

3 1 ⁄4 

1⁄2 

9⁄16 

4 HOLES 3 ⁄8 DIA. 

4 AGUJEROS 3 ⁄8 DIA. 

5 1 ⁄4 

4 13 ⁄16 

GOULDS PUMPS 


14

Dimensions and Weights 

Dimensiones y Pesos 

Dimensions and Weights – Determined by Pump, 

Dimensiones y Pesos – Determinados por la Bomba 

Dim. “HL” Determined 

by Pump and Motor, 

Dim. “HL” 

Determinadas por la 

Bomba y el Motor 

Suct. NPT, Disch. NPT, 

Pump, 

Wt., Frame, Armazón 

Bomba 

Succión Descarga CP L W X Y 

Peso 

NPT NPT 

56 140 180 

1ST 1 1 ⁄4 1 12 15 ⁄16 6 7 ⁄ 16 3 5 /16 4 3 ⁄8 2 22 1 ⁄2 4 9 ⁄16 6 7 ⁄16 

2ST 1 1 ⁄2 1 1 ⁄4 

13 1 ⁄2 7 3 3 ⁄4 

4 1 ⁄2 

2 1 /8 23 5 1 ⁄8 7 

3ST 2 1 1 ⁄2 4 5 ⁄8 

Available Motor and Bedplate Dimensions and Weights, 

Pesos y Dimensiones Disponibles de la Fundación y del Motor 

Motor Frame, 

Armazón 

del Motor 

56 

143T 8 26 6 7 ⁄8 3 1 ⁄8 22 3 ⁄8 2 3 ⁄8 1 30 1” 

145T 

182T 

184T 

Notes: 

1. Pump will be shipped with top 

vertical discharge position as 

standard. For other orientations, 

remove casing bolts, rotate 

discharge to desired position, 

replace and tighten 6mm bolts to 

5 – 6 lbs.-ft. 

2. Motor dimensions may vary with 

motor manufacturers. 

3. Dimensions in inches, weights 

in pounds. 

4. For explosion proof motor 

dimensions consult factory for 

information. 

HA HB HD HE HF HG HP 

5. Not to be used for construction 

purposes unless certified. 

10 26 7 1 ⁄4 3 3 ⁄4 24 2 3 ⁄4 

Wt. 

Max., 

Peso 

Máx 

Shims, 

Deflector 

7 

⁄8 43 — 

NOTAS: 

1. Las bombas se transportarán 

con la descarga vertical superior 

como estándar. Para otras orientaciones, 

retirar los tornillos de 

la carcasa, rotar la descarga a la 

posición deseada, y reemplazar y 

apretar los tornillos de 6mm a 5 

– 6 libras-pies. 

2. Las dimensiones del motor 

puede que varíen con los 

fabricantes. 

3. Dimensiones en pulgadas, pesos 

en libras. 

4. Para las dimensiones de los 

motores a prueba de explosión 

consultar con la fábrica para 

información. 

5. No usar para propósitos de 

construcción sin certificar. 

Frame 

Size, 

Tamaño 

del 

Armazón 

Single Phase, 

Monofásicos 

Horsepower, Fuerza 

3500 RPM 

Three Phase, 

Trifásicos 

ODP TEFC ODP TEFC 

C Max. 

Wt. 

Max., 

Peso 

Máx. 

56 1 

⁄2 – 1 1 ⁄2 1 

⁄2 – 1 1 ⁄2 1 

⁄2 – 1 1 

⁄2 – 1 13 45 

143T — — 1 1 ⁄2 1 1 ⁄2 13 3 ⁄8 45 

145T 2 2 1 1 ⁄2 – 3 1 1 ⁄2 – 2 14 1 ⁄4 52 

182T 3 3 5 3 16 5 ⁄8 63 

184T 5 5 — 5 18 1 ⁄8 112 

GOULDS PUMPS 


15

ITT 


Typical Applications, Aplicaciones Típicas 

Specifically designed for a broad 

range of general applications 

traditionally requiring various 

materials such as all iron, bronze 

fitted or all bronze construction. 

• Water circulation 

• Booster service 

• Liquid transfer 

• Spray system 

• Chillers 

• Washing/cleaning systems 

• Injection molding cooling 

• Reverse osmosis 

• Air scrubbers 

• Heat exchangers 

• Filtration systems 

• Jockey pumps 

• OEM applications 

• General water services 

Diseñadas específicamente para una amplia 

variedad de aplicaciones generales, requiriendo 

tradicionalmente varios materiales, 

tales como hierro, bronce empotrado o todas 

las construcciones de bronce. 

• Circulación de agua 

• Aumento de presión 

• Transferencia de líquidos 

• Sistemas de aspersión 

• Enfriadores 

• Sistemas de lavado/limpieza 

• Enfriamiento con molde por inyección 

• Osmosis reversa 

• Depuradores de aire 

• Termopermutadores 

• Sistemas de filtración 

• Bombas auxiliares 

• Aplicaciones OEM 

• Servicios generales de agua 

Brewery, Fábrica de Cerveza 

Car Wash, 

Lavadero 

de Autos 

Pure 

Water/ 

OEM, 

Agua 

Pura/ 

OEM 

Pressure 

Booster 

System, 

Sistema de 

Aumento 

de Presión 

Chiller, 

Enfriador 

Goulds Pumps, G&L and the ITT Engineered Blocks 

Symbol are registered trademarks and tradenames of 

ITT Corporation. 

SPECIFICATIONS ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE. 

BNPE June, 2008 

© 2008 ITT Corporation 

Engineered for life 

Goulds Pumps, G&L y el símbolo ITT Engineered Blocks 

son marcas registradas y marcas comerciales de ITT 

Corporation. 

LAS ESPECIFICACIONES ESTÁN SUJETAS A CAMBIO SIN PREVIO AVISO. 

Junio, 2008

Section 6 

SAFETY

USFilter 

Material Safety Data Sheet 

SECTION 1 – CHEMICAL PRODUCT AND COMPANY INFORMATION 

************************************************************************ 

Product Name: ACTIVATED CARBON, AquaCarb Series, VOCarb Series, 

AC Series, VC Series, BevCarb Series, and UltraCarb Series 

Part Number:100 

Chemical Family: activated carbon 

Manufacturer’s Name: U.S. FILTER WESTATES CARBON 

Address: 5375 South Boyle Avenue, Los Angeles, CA 90058 

Product/Technical Information Phone Number: (323) 277-1500 

Medical/Handling Emergency Phone Number: CHEMTREC 1-800-424-9300 

Transportation Emergency Phone Number: CHEMTREC 1-800-424-9300 

Revision Date/Revision Number: February 13, 2002 

SECTION 2 – COMPOSITION INFORMATION 

************************************************************************ 

Chemical Name Percent by Weight CAS# 

Activated Carbon 100 7440-44-0 

SECTION 3 – HAZARDS IDENTIFICATION 

************************************************************************ 

Appearance & Odor: black granules without taste or odor 

Emergency Overview: Dust that contacts eyes may be irritating or cause mechanical 

injury. Dust may cause slight skin irritation. Dust may be irritating to the respiratory 

tract and cause coughing or sneezing. Ingestion of powder may be irritating to the 

gastrointestinal tract. Warning: Wet activated carbon depletes oxygen from the air and 

therefore dangerously low levels of oxygen may be encountered. Whenever workers 

enter a vessel containing activated carbon, the vessel's oxygen content should be 

determined and work procedures for potentially low oxygen areas should be followed. 

Fire &Explosion Hazards: When burned, hazardous products of combustion including 

carbon oxides can occur. Irritating and/or toxic gases due to decomposition of the 

product may be generated during a fire. Fight fire from a safe distance from a protected 

location. Contact with strong oxidizers such as ozone or liquid oxygen may cause rapid 

combustion. 

Primary Route(s) of Exposure: Eye contact, skin contact, ingestion, or inhalation are 

all possible routes of entry. 

Inhalation- Acute Effects: Dust may be irritating to the respiratory tract and cause 

coughing or sneezing. 

Skin Contact-Acute Effects: Dust may cause slight skin irritation.

ACTIVATED CARBON, AquaCarb Series, VOCarb Series, 

AC Series, VC Series, BevCarb Series, and UltraCarb Series, Page 2 of 6 

SECTION 3 – HAZARDS IDENTIFICATION (continued) 

************************************************************************ 

Eye Contact- Acute Effects: Dust that contacts eyes may be irritating or cause 

mechanical injury. 

Ingestion- Acute Effects: Ingestion of powder may be irritating to the gastrointestinal 

tract. 

SECTION 4 – FIRST AID MEASURES 

************************************************************************ 

Inhalation First Aid: Remove affected person from area to fresh air and provide oxygen 

if breathing is difficult. Give artificial respiration ONLY if breathing has stopped and 

give CPR ONLY if there is no breathing and no pulse. Obtain medical attention. 

Skin Contact First Aid: Wash skin for 5 minutes with flowing water and soap. Clothing 

should be discarded or washed before reuse. Obtain medical assistance if irritation 

develops. DO NOT instruct person to neutralize affected skin area. 

Eye Contact First Aid: Immediately irrigate eyes with flowing water continuously for 

15 minutes while holding eyes open. Contacts should be removed before or during 

flushing. Seek medical assistance if irritation develops. DO NOT instruct person to 

neutralize. 

Ingestion First Aid: Vomiting may need to be induced if directed by a physician or 

poison control center. DO NOT have unqualified personnel induce vomiting. Obtain 

medical attention immediately. 

Medical Conditions Aggravated: Respiratory ailments may be aggravated by exposure 

to this product. 

Note to Physician: No specific antidote, treat patient symptomatically. 

SECTION 5 – FIRE FIGHTING MEASURES 

************************************************************************ 

Flash Point/Method: Nonflammable 

Auto Ignition Temperature: 840°C (1,710°F) 

Upper/Lower Explosion Limits: not applicable 

Extinguishing Media: Water spray, carbon dioxide, foam or dry chemical 

Fire Fighting Procedures: In the event of a fire, wear full protective clothing and 

NIOSH approved self-contained breathing apparatus with full face piece, operated in the 

positive pressure mode. 

Fire & Explosion Hazards: When burned, hazardous products of combustion including 

carbon oxides can occur. Irritating and/or toxic gases due to decomposition of the 

product may be generated during a fire. Fight fire from a safe distance from a protected 

location. Contact with strong oxidizers such as ozone or liquid oxygen may cause rapid 

combustion. 

Hazardous Products of Decomposition and /or Combustion: Carbon oxides. 

NFPA Ratings: 

HEALTH-1 FLAMMABILITY- 0 REACTIVITY-0 OTHER- none



SECTION 6 – ACCIDENTAL RELEASE MEASURES 

************************************************************************ 

Clean up spills in a manner that does not disperse dust into the air. Handle in accordance 

with good industrial hygiene and safety practices. These practices include avoiding 

unnecessary exposure, and removal of material from eyes, skin, and clothing. Dispose of 

virgin (unused) carbon (waste or spillage) in a facility permitted for non-hazardous 

wastes. Spent (used) carbon should be disposed of in accordance with applicable laws. 

Do not reuse empty bags. Dispose of in facility permitted for non-hazardous wastes. 

DO NOT DUMP INTO ANY SEWERS, ON THE GROUND OR INTO ANY BODY 

OF WATER. All disposal methods must be in compliance with all Federal, State, Local 

and Provincial laws and regulations. Regulations may vary in different locations. Waste 

characterizations and compliance with applicable laws are the responsibility solely of the 

waste generator. 

SECTION 7 – HANDLING AND STORAGE 

************************************************************************ 

Handling: Avoid dispersion into air. Keep containers dry and closed. Follow good 

handling and housekeeping practices to minimize spills, generation of airborne dusts, and 

accumulation of dusts on exposed surfaces. Use with adequate exhaust ventilation to 

draw dust away from workers’ breathing zones. Prevent or minimize exposures to dusts 

by using appropriate respirators, gloves, and eye protection. Wash exposed skin areas 

thoroughly with soap and water. Use caution when pouring, using pneumatic transport, 

swirling, etc. as this material can become electrostatically charged. 

Storage: Avoid breaking bags or spilling media so as to avoid possibly creating residual 

dust. Store in ambient atmospheric conditions. Product should be stored in a closed dry 

container. Maintain good housekeeping procedures. Store away from strong oxidizers 

such as ozone, liquid oxygen, chlorine, permanganate, etc. 

General Comments: Containers of this material may be hazardous when empty since 

they retain product residues (dust, solids); observe all warnings and precautions listed for 

the product. 

SECTION 8 –PERSONAL PROTECTION/ EXPOSURE CONTROL 

************************************************************************ 

Respiratory Protection: Use NIOSH/MSHA approved respiratory protection equipment 

appropriate to the material and/or its concentration where airborne exposure is likely. If 

exposures cannot be kept to a minimum with engineering controls, consult manufacturer 

to determine appropriate type equipment for a given application. Observe respirator use 

limitations specified by NIOSH/MSHA or the manufacturer. 

Skin Protection: Wear appropriate dust resistant clothing and gloves. 

Eye Protection: Safety glasses with side shields are recommended for any type of 

handling. Where eye contact or dusty conditions may be likely, dust tight goggles are 

recommended.



SECTION 8 –PERSONAL PROTECTION/ EXPOSURE CONTROL (continued) 

************************************************************************ 

Ventilation Protection: Provide ventilation if necessary to minimize exposure. Dilute 

ventilation acceptable, but local mechanical exhaust ventilation preferred, if practical, at 

sources of air contamination such as open process equipment. The following publication 

offers ventilation guidelines and techniques: "INDUSTRIAL VENTILATION, A 

MANUAL OF RECOMMENDED PRACTICE" available from the ACGIH. 

Other Protection: Safety showers, with quick opening valves which stay open, and eye 

wash fountains, or other means of washing the eyes with a gentle flow of cool to tepid tap 

water, should be readily available in all areas where this material is handled or stored. 

Water should be supplied through insulated and heat-traced lines to prevent freeze-ups in 

cold weather. 

Exposure Limits: 

OSHA PEL-TWA: 15 mg/m 3 (total), 5 mg/ m 3 (resp) 

OSHA PEL-STEL: 10 mg/m 3 

SECTION 9 – PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL PROPERTIES 

************************************************************************ 

Appearance & Odor: black granules without taste or odor 

Vapor Pressure: zero 

Vapor Density (Air=1): not applicable 

Boiling Point: not applicable 

Melting Point: not applicable 

Specific Gravity: 0.25 - 0.60 g/cc Solubility in Water: Insoluble 

Volatile Percentage: 0% 

pH: not determined 

Flash Point/method: Nonflammable Auto Ignition Temperature: 840°C 

Upper/Lower Explosion Limits: not applicable Other: none 

SECTION 10 – STABILITY AND REACTIVITY 

************************************************************************ 

Stability: This product is considered stable under the specified conditions of storage, 

shipment and use. 

Incompatibilities: Contact with strong oxidizers such as ozone, liquid oxygen, chlorine, 

permanganate, etc. may result in rapid combustion. Avoid contact with strong acids. 

Polymerization: Hazardous polymerization will not occur. 

Decomposition: Hazardous decomposition will produce carbon oxides. 

Conditions to avoid: Store away from strong oxidizers such as ozone, liquid oxygen, 

chlorine, permanganate, etc. Moist air will reduce the operating life. 

SECTION 11 – TOXICOLOGICAL INFORMATION 

************************************************************************ 

INHALATION – Acute: Inhalation of carbon dust is mildly irritating to the lungs and 

can immediately give rise to an increased mucociliary transport and airway resistance 

mediated by the vagus. The inhalation LC50 (Rat) is > 64.4 mg/l. 

INHALATION – Chronic: There are no known chronic inhalation effects. 

SKIN CONTACT – Acute: Skin contact is expected to be slightly irritating. The 

primary skin irritation index (rabbit) is 0.



SECTION 11 – TOXICOLOGICAL INFORMATION (continued) 

************************************************************************ 

SKIN CONTACT – Chronic: There are no known chronic dermal effects. 

EYE CONTACT – Acute: Eye contact can cause conjunctivitis, epithelial hyperplasia of 

the cornea, as well as eczematous inflammation of the eyelids. 

INGESTION – Acute: Carbon is practically nontoxic. The probable oral lethal dose 

(human) is greater than 15 g/kg; more than one quart (2.2 lbs) for a 70 kg (150 lb) person. 

INGESTION – Chronic: There are no known chronic ingestion effects. 

CARCINOGENICITY/MUTAGENICITY: There are no known 

carcinogenic/mutagenic effects. 

REPRODUCTIVE EFFECTS: There are no known reproductive effects. 

NEUROTOXICITY: There are no known neurotoxic effects. 

OTHER EFFECTS: No other toxic effects of carbon are known. 

TARGET ORGANS: Target organs include the respiratory system and the 

cardiovascular system. 

SECTION 12 – ECOLOGICAL INFORMATION 

************************************************************************ 

This material, in its original state, is not harmful to the environment. 

SECTION 13 – DISPOSAL CONSIDERATIONS 

************************************************************************ 

Clean spills in a manner that does not disperse dust into the air, preferably a wet-down 

procedure or vacuum. If material is not contaminated, spilled media can be rebagged. 

Material that cannot be used or chemically reprocessed and empty containers should be 

disposed of in accordance with all applicable regulations. Product containers should be 

thoroughly emptied before disposal. Generators of waste material are required to 

evaluate all waste for compliance with RCRA and any local disposal procedures and 

regulations. NOTE: State and local regulations may be more stringent than federal 

regulations. 

Warning: Wet activated carbon depletes oxygen from the air and therefore dangerously 

low levels of oxygen may be encountered. Whenever workers enter a vessel containing 

activated carbon, the vessel's oxygen content should be determined and work procedures 

for potentially low oxygen areas should be followed. 

SECTION 14 – TRANSPORTATION INFORMATION 

************************************************************************ 

DOT Shipping Description: Not DOT Regulated



SECTION 15 – REGULATORY INFORMATION 

************************************************************************ 

CERCLA SECTION 103 (40CFR302.4): no RQ: none 

SARA SECTION 302 (40CFR355.30): no 



SARA HAZARD CATEGORIES, SARA SECTIONS 311/312 (40CFR370.21): 

ACUTE: yes CHRONIC: no FIRE: no REACTIVE: no SUDDEN RELEASE: no 

OSHA PROCESS SAFETY (29CFR1910.119): no 

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65: no 

SECTION 16 – OTHER INFORMATION 

************************************************************************ 

Disclaimer: The information contained herein is based on data considered accurate. 

However, no warranty is expressed or implied regarding the accuracy of these data or the 

results to be obtained from the user thereof. It is the buyer’s responsibility to ensure that 

its activities comply with federal, state, provincial and local laws. 

Created by: James R. Graham

Section 7 

WARRANTY

1. Prices and Specifications are subject to change without notice. 

2. Shipping dates are approximate. They are dependent upon credit approval 

and subject to delays beyond our control. 

3. Terms: Net 30 days to companies with established credit rating. In the event 

Buyer fails to fulfill previous terms of payment, or in case Seller shall have any 

doubt at any time as to Buyer's financial responsibility, Seller may decline to 

make further deliveries except upon receipt of cash in advance or other special 

arrangements. 

4. Liability Point and Title: All material is sold F.O.B. Factory (Domestic)/FCA 

Free Carrier (International). Title to all material sold shall pass to buyer upon 

delivery by Seller to carrier at shipping point. 

5. State and Local Taxes: Any taxes which the Seller may be required to pay or 

collect upon or with respect to the sale, purchase, delivery, use or consumption 

of any of the material covered hereby shall be for the account of the Buyer and 

shall be added to the purchase price. 

6. Special tooling, dies, silk screens and molds acquired specially to produce 

goods for Buyer remain the property of Dwyer Instruments, Inc., and may not be 

removed. They will be maintained in good condition for a minimum period of 

three years from the date of the original purchase order. 

7. Export Orders: Terms, discounts and conditions of sale for purchase orders 

originating or for shipment to final destinations outside the U.S.A. will be 

furnished upon request. 

8. Limited Warranty: The Seller warrants all Dwyer instruments and equipment 

to be free from defects in workmanship or material under normal use and service 

for a period of one year from date of shipment. Liability under this warranty is 

limited to repair or replacement F.O.B. Factory (Domestic)/FCA Free Carrier 

(International) of any parts which prove to be defective within that time or 

repayment of the purchase price at the Seller's option provided the instruments 

have been returned, transportation prepaid, within one year from date of 

purchase. All technical advice, recommendations and services are based on 

technical data and information which the Seller believes to be reliable and are 

intended for use by persons having skill and knowledge of the business, at their 

own discretion. In no case is Seller liable beyond replacement of equipment 

F.O.B. Factory (Domestic)/FCA Free Carrier (International) or the full purchase 

price. This warranty does not apply if the maximum ratings label is removed or if

the instrument or equipment is abused, altered, used at ratings above the 

maximum specified, or otherwise misused in any way. 

THIS EXPRESS LIMITED WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF AND EXCLUDES ALL 

OTHER REPRESENTATIONS MADE BY ADVERTISEMENTS OR BY AGENTS 

AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, BOTH EXPRESS AND IMPLIED. THERE 

ARE NO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR OF FITNESS 

FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE FOR GOODS COVERED HEREUNDER. 

9. Buyer's Remedies: THE BUYER'S EXCLUSIVE AND SOLE REMEDY ON 

ACCOUNT OF OR IN RESPECT TO THE FURNISHING OF NON- 

CONFORMING OR DEFECTIVE MATERIAL SHALL BE TO SECURE 

REPLACEMENT THEREOF AS AFORESAID. THE SELLER SHALL NOT IN 

ANY EVENT BE LIABLE FOR THE COST OF ANY LABOR EXPENDED ON 

ANY SUCH MATERIAL OR FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, 

CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES TO ANYONE BY REASON OF 

THE FACT THAT IT SHALL HAVE BEEN NON-CONFORMING OR 

DEFECTIVE. 

10. Acceptance: All orders shall be subject to the terms and conditions 

contained or referred o in the Seller's quotation, acknowledgement, and to those 

listed here and to no others whatsoever. No waiver, alteration or modification of 

these terms and conditions shall be binding unless in writing and signed by an 

executive officer of the Seller. All orders are subject to written acceptance by 

Dwyer Instruments, Inc., Michigan City, Indiana, U.S.A. 

Prices are exclusive of any taxes and should be considered as an estimate. 

Contact Dwyer Instruments, Inc. for a written quotation. Cancelled orders are 

subject to cancellation charges. Our standard Terms and Conditions of sale 

apply as stated in our catalog. 

©Copyright 2005, Dwyer Instruments, Inc.

RYAN HERCO PRODUCTS STANDARD TERMS & CONDITIONS 

OF SALE 

1. ACCEPTANCE. Unless otherwise stated in a writing signed by Seller’s duly authorized agent all quotations covering 

Seller’s products are made and all contracts or orders for said products are accepted and all shipments are made on the 

condition that the Standard Terms and Conditions of Sale set forth herein shall be applicable. Any term in Buyer’s purchase 

order or acceptance in addition to or not identical with these Terms and Conditions of Sale is objected to and these Terms 

and Conditions of Sale shall not be varied, qualified, modified, amended or interpreted by any prior course of dealing 

between the parties or by any usage or trade or in any manner other than by subsequent writing signed by Seller’s duly 

authorized agent. All orders or contracts must be approved and accepted by a duly authorized agent of Seller. These Terms 

and Conditions of Sale shall be applicable whether or not they are attached to or enclosed with the products to be sold 

hereunder. 

2. PRICES. Prices are subject to change without notice, and Seller’s price in effect at the time of shipment will apply. 

3. CANCELLATION. An order once placed with and accepted by Seller can be cancelled only with Seller’s consent and 

upon payment to Seller of reasonable cancellation charges which shall take into account expenses already incurred, 

commitments made, and Seller’s anticipated profit. 

4. TAXES. The amount of any present or future sales, revenue, excise or other tax applicable to the products covered by this 

order, or the manufacture or sale thereof, shall be added to the purchase price and shall be paid by the Buyer or, in lieu 

thereof, Buyer shall provide Seller with an appropriate tax exemption certificate. 

5. DELIVERY. Shipping dates are approximate and are based upon prompt receipt from Buyer of all necessary information. 

In no event will Seller be liable for damages of any kind arising out of delay or non-delivery, due to causes beyond its 

reasonable control including, but not limited to, acts of God, acts of civil or military authority, war, riots, fire, explosion, flood, 

strike, lockout, injunction, accident, breakage of machinery or apparatus, or inability to obtain fuel, power, raw materials, 

labor, containers or transportation facilities. In the event of any such delay, the date of delivery shall, at the request of Seller, 

be deferred for a period equal to the time lost by reason of the delay. 

6. PAYMENT. 

(a) Unless otherwise specified on the invoice, all accounts are due and payable thirty (30) days from the date of invoice. 

Accounts extending beyond the terms will be subject to a service charge of 1-1/2% per month (18% per annum) or such 

greater amount as may be authorized by law and specified in the invoice. Discounts for prompt payment do not apply to 

labor and shipping charges, and no discounts other than those noted on the invoice are authorized. Shipments, deliveries 

and performance of work shall at all times be subject to the approval of Seller’s credit department, and the Seller may at any 

time decline to make any shipments or deliveries or perform any work, except upon receipt of payment or upon terms and 

conditions of security satisfactory to such department. All lien rights are reserved until full payment of the invoice has been 

made. 

(b) If, in Seller’s judgment, the financial condition of the Buyer at any time does not justify continuation of production or 

shipment on the terms of payment originally specified, the Seller may require full or partial payments in advance and in the 

event of the bankruptcy or insolvency to the Buyer or in the event any proceeding is brought by or against Buyer under the 

bankruptcy or insolvency laws, the Seller shall be entitled to cancel any order then outstanding and shall receive 

reimbursement for its cancellation charges.

(c) Should Seller initiate any legal action or proceeding to collect on any unpaid invoice or to enforce any of the terms hereof, 

Seller shall be entitled to recover from Buyer all costs and expenses incurred in connection therewith, including court costs 

and reasonable attorney’s fees. 

7. CLAIMS AND RETURNS. 

(a) Claims for shipping damages shall be made against the carrier on all products shipped F.O.B. shipping point. On 

products shipped F.O.B. destination, Buyer shall notify Seller of shipping damages within ten (10) days from date of receipt 

and afford Seller a reasonable opportunity to inspect the products. No products shall be returned without Seller’s consent. 

(b) Claims for shortage or inaccurate filling of orders shall be submitted to Seller within ten (10) days after Buyer’s receipt, 

accompanied by a copy of the invoice or shipper on which the products were purchased. Buyer will then receive from Seller 

a Returned Goods (RG) authorization number. Products returned without the RG authorization number will be refused. If 

Seller in good faith determines that any error was not Seller's, a minimum 15% restocking charge will be made to Buyer on 

any products returned for credit or exchange. 

(c) Claims or notices asserting a defective product must be given to Seller immediately upon discovery of such defect, but in 

any event no more than one year after date of shipment by Seller, and must include a copy of the invoice or shipper on 

which the products were purchased, evidence that such products were inspected within ten (10) days after Buyer’s receipt, 

and the details of the defect(s) claimed, and afford the Seller a reasonable opportunity to inspect the products. 

LIMITATION ON DAMAGES. In no event shall any liability of Seller exceed the purchase price of the product and Seller shall 

not be liable for incidental, special or consequential damages with respect to the sale or use of the product, including without 

limitation, labor charges, lost profits, expenses of repair, other costs incident to replacement, or transportation costs incurred 

in shipping products to or from Seller’s plant. 

INFORMATION. Seller does not, by any advice or information it may provide regarding the use of any product by Buyer, 

make any warranty beyond the description on the face hereof including of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose 

or assume any liability for such advice or information given, orally or in print, or for the results obtained by Buyer. Buyer 

assumes all risk and liability which may result from the use of any products, whether singly or in combination with other 

products. No suggestion for product use shall be construed as a recommendation for use in infringement on any existing 

patent. 

(d) Seller is under no obligation to take back material for credit or exchange when the reason for the return was anything 

other than the Seller's error. At Seller's sole discretion, should a return of this nature be authorized, the items returned must 

be of current manufacture, in its original packaging with all original manuals and/or documentation, and be in resalable 

condition. A minimum 15% restocking charge will apply as well as any additional charges necessary to restore items to a 

resalable condition. 

8. LIMITED WARRANTY ON PRODUCTS MANUFACTURED BY SELLER. The Seller warrants to the original purchaser 

that products of its own manufacture to be delivered hereunder will be free from defects in materials or workmanship under 

normal use and service for a period of one year from date of shipment. Seller’s obligations under this Warranty are limited to 

replacing or repairing or giving credit for, at its option and at any of its plants, any of said products which shall, within one 

year after shipment, be returned to Seller’s plant of origin, transportation charges prepaid, and which are, after products 

examination, disclosed to the Seller’s satisfaction to be thus defective. This Warranty does not apply to defects caused by 

shipping damages, or to any products manufactured by Seller which have been subject to improper installation, misuse, 

neglect, accident, ordinary wear and tear, or Buyer’s attempts to use any product beyond its mechanical, thermal or electrical 

capacity. The aforementioned provisions do not extend the original Warranty period of any product that has either been 

repaired or replaced by Seller. 

THIS LIMITED WARRANTY OF SELLER, SUBJECT TO THE LIMITATION ON DAMAGES, IS EXPRESSLY IN LIEU OF 

ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED, STATUTORY, OR IMPLIED BEYOND THE DESCRIPTION ON THE FACE 

HEREOF, INCLUDING THE WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, 

AND OF ALL OTHER LIABILITIES OR OBLIGATIONS ON THE SELLER’S PART, AND SELLER NEITHER ASSUMES 

NOR AUTHORIZES ANY OTHER PERSON TO ASSUME FOR IT ANY OTHER LIABILITIES IN CONNECTION WITH THE 

SALE OF THE SAID PRODUCTS. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY MAY NOT BE VERBALLY CHANGED OR MODIFIED BY

ANY REPRESENTATIVE OF SELLER. 

9. DISCLAIMER OF SELLER’S WARRANTY ON PRODUCTS MANUFACTURED BY OTHERS. Products not 

manufactured by Seller are covered, if at all, by the original manufacturer’s warranty, copies of which are available on 

Buyer’s request. Seller makes no warranty or representation whatsoever, expressed or implied, beyond the description on 

the face hereof including the warranty of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, with respect to products not 

manufactured by Seller. 

10. APPLICABLE LAW. The validity, performance and construction of these terms and all sales there under shall be 

governed by the laws of the state in which Buyer’s order is accepted by Seller. 

CHECK FOR DAMAGE & VERIFY CONTENTS UPON RECEIPT 

ANY OBVIOUS DAMAGE TO THE CARTON OR PACKAGES SHOULD BE IMMEDIATELY BROUGHT TO THE 

ATTENTION OF THE CARRIER DELIVERING THE SHIPMENT TO YOU AND NOTED ON THE DELIVERY RECEIPT. IF 

CONCEALED DAMAGE IS DISCOVERED WHEN MERCHANDISE IN UNPACKED, SAVE THE PACKAGES AND 

NOTIFY THE CARRIER FOR INSPECTION. YOUR CLAIM FOR DAMAGED MATERIALS SHOULD BE FILED AT ONCE 

WITH THE TRANSPORTATION COMPANY, AS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF RYAN HERCO PRODUCTS CEASES UPON 

DEIVERY TO THE CARRIER AT THE SHIPPING POINT. SHOULD YOU NEED ASSISTANCE WITH THE CLAIM, WE 

WILL BE GLAD TO HELP. 

CLAIMS FOR SHORTAGES OR INACCURATE FILLING OF ORDERS MUST BE MADE TO RYAN HERCO PRODUCTS 

WITHIN TEN DAYS AFTER RECEIPT OF GOODS. THERE IS A MINIMUM OF 15% RESTOCKING CHARGE ON ANY 

UNUSED ITEMS RETURNED FOR CREDIT OR EXHANGE WHEN RYAN HERCO PRODUCTS CORPORATION IS NOT 

IN ERROR. 

RETURNED GOODS WILL BE ACCEPTED ONLY WITH PRIOR APPROVAL. 

Careers | Site Map | Contact | Legal 

1-800-848-1141 

Locations Nationwide: Service & Distribution Centers in Tempe AZ, Anaheim CA (serving Orange County), Burbank CA (serving Los Angeles County), Sacramento 

CA, San Diego CA, San Jose CA (also serving the San Francisco Bay Area), Colorado Springs CO, Orlando FL, Medley FL (serving Miami), Naperville IL (serving 

Chicago/ Chicagoland and the Midwest states), South Plainfield NJ (serving New Jersey and New York), Albuquerque NM, Charlotte NC, Cleveland OH, Wilsonville 

OR (serving the Portland area), West Norriton PA (serving the Philadelphia area), Austin TX, Grand Prairie TX (serving the Dallas and Fort Worth areas), Houston 

TX, West Jordan UT (serving the Salt Lake area), Richmond VA (serving the District of Columbia area), and Kent WA (serving the Seattle area). 

Copyright © 2004 Ryan Herco Products Corporation. All rights reserved.

AMERICAN FAN COMPANY TERMS OF SALE AND WARRANTY 

1. Authority of agents: No order or contract shall be binding upon us unless signed by an authorized employee 

of the company. Sales representatives and other agents are not authorized to bind us. Unless a statement 

representation or guarantee made by an agent is specifically provided for herein, it shall not constitute a 

warranty or be part of this contract. Typographical errors contained in the quotation or invoice are not binding. 

2. Acceptance, exclusive terms: Our quotations are subject to acceptance within thirty (30) days from the date 

of quotation. Acceptance of our quotation includes acceptance of our terms, including those contained herein, 

which constitute the complete and exclusive contract between the parties. We do not accept any additional or 

different terms proposed by the buyer’s acceptance of this offer. Our failure to specifically object to additional or 

different terms included in the buyer’s acceptance shall not be deemed a waiver of exclusivity of our terms. 

This agreement may not be modified except by prior written agreement signed by an authorized employee. No 

course of performance, usage of trade or course of dealing may be used to supplement or explain the terms of 

this agreement or the obligations and rights of the parties hereunder. 

3. Seller’s performance: We shall not be held responsible for any loss, delay, failure to deliver or damage caused 

by reasons beyond our control, including but not limited to: our inability to obtain labor, materials, fuel or 

supplies; fire, accidents, floods or adverse weather conditions; strikes, lockouts or other labor disputes; 

embargoes, governmental acts or requirements; wars, acts of terrorism, insurrections or riots, or actions of 

subcontractors. 

4. Payment: Net payment is due of the invoiced amount (hereinafter “Contract Price”) and shall be paid in cash or 

check only within thirty (30) days F.O.B. our factory unless otherwise specified in our quotation. 

(a) Inadequate shipping instructions: If we are unable to ship the goods when ready due to your (or your 

representative’s) instructions or lack of instructions, invoicing will be submitted and payment in full 

shall be due within thirty (30) days of notification that we are ready to ship. 

(b) Set-off: No retention, set-offs or counterclaims may be exercised against our invoices without prior 

written authorization. 

(c) Late payment charges: We shall be entitled to charge interest on overdue accounts (in addition to 

storage charges referred to below) at the rate of 2% per annum above the prime rate for any amount 

overdue and unpaid. Overdue accounts will also be charged reasonable costs of collection, including 

attorney fees to the extent permitted by the laws of the State of Ohio. 

5. Price: Our quotation only includes such goods, services, accessories, and work as specified therein, unless 

otherwise specified in our quotation: 

(a) Packaging: Packing in accordance with our current standards is included in our quoted price; 

otherwise, packing charges will be added to the invoice price. 

(b) Samples: Any samples submitted to you and not returned to our factory within sixty (60) days from 

date of receipt shall be paid for by you. 

(c) Taxes: All applicable taxes will be added to the invoice price unless we receive your signed Tax 

Exempt Certificate. 

(d) Shipping: Our quotations do not include shipping. If you request delivery other that F.O.B. our 

factory, you will be charged extra for any shipping, handling, loading and/or insurance. 

(e) Storage: If we do not receive adequate forwarding instructions within thirty (30) days after notice to 

you that the goods are ready for collection or that we are ready to ship, we are entitled, but not 

obligated, to arrange storage at your sole expense (including storage, handling, demurrage and 

insurance). 

(f) Alteration of: This Quotation/Job does not include alterations to buyer's premises, electrical or other 

utilities required to install the equipment provided here under. 

6. Price escalation: We reserve the right to adjust the Contract Price if we incur extra costs due to changes or 

delays caused by you or your agents including, but not limited to, inadequate or improper instructions, designs 

or specifications. We reserve the right to adjust the Contract Price if we incur extra costs due to governmental 

acts, which affect performance of our obligations under contract. 

(a) Our equipment: Prices on equipment of our manufacture are firm for shipments to be made within 

one hundred twenty (120) days from date of order. [After one hundred twenty (120) days, prices will 

be adjusted in accordance with increases in the cost of labor, materials and overheads. The increase 

will be calculated by the FORMULA FOR CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT specified in our 

quotation. Or, after one hundred twenty (120) days, prices will be adjusted to our prices in place at 

the time of shipment.] 

(b) Supplier equipment: Prices on equipment of our manufacture are subject to adjustment by the same 

percentage of price change as may be made effective by our supplier prior to shipment of the 

equipment to you.

7. Shipping: Unless otherwise agreed, equipment shall be delivered F.O.B. our factory. We are authorized, but 

not required, to arrange shipping at the buyer’s sole cost, by common carrier. For goods to be exported outside 

the continental United States, we are authorized, but not required, to arrange shipment, at the buyer's sole cost, 

from our factory alongside a vessel named by you at the port stated on our quotation. This clause does not 

affect the risk of loss or other incidents of the sale. Our obligations are deemed fulfilled and the risk of loss 

shifted to the buyers as soon as conforming goods are delivered to a common carrier or to the customer in the 

event that no common carrier is involved. 

8. Delay in Shipping: Lead times quoted for shipping are estimated and we are not responsible for any losses 

resulting from delays. If we specifically agree in writing to a fixed time for shipment, we are not liable for 

damages caused by delay unless we have also specifically agreed in writing to a liquidated damages clause. In 

that event, our liability is limited to the amount of the agreed upon liquidated damages or the losses directly 

caused by our delay, whichever is less. A fixed time period for shipment does not start until we receive a written 

order with all information necessary to proceed with the job, including, but not limited to, your acceptance and 

approval of our specifications and drawings, licenses and government approvals, and arrangements for 

payment which meet our satisfaction. We are not responsible for delays caused by any reason in paragraph (3) 

above or caused by your instruction or lack thereof. No agreement for a fixed time for shipment is binding on us 

unless accompanied by an agreed upon liquidated damage clause, signed by an authorized employee. 

9. Cancellation: Contracts and purchase orders may not be canceled without our prior written consent. You will 

be subject to cancellation charges. Cancellation charges include the amount necessary to compensate us for 

all materials ordered and work performed prior to the date of termination, lost profits and reasonable overheads 

and any other expenses resulting from the cancellation. Payment of all cancellation charges shall be made 

within thirty (30) days of the date of the invoice itemizing such charges. 

10. Drawings, samples, models and other descriptions: Descriptive materials do not constitute a warranty that 

the goods shall conform to the description, and are not part of this contract. All descriptive materials including, 

but not limited to shipping models, catalogs, price-lists and other advertising materials are for illustrative 

purposes only. Unless drawings have been approved, we reserve the right at any time to change without notice 

the design, construction or specification of any equipment, machinery or system provided the revisions do not 

prejudice the operation of the equipment. 

11. Product Performance: All performance figures given by us are approximate and are based on our laboratory 

experience and you agree that we accept no liability in the event of failure to achieve such performance figures. 

The figures only reflect performance we expect to obtain in our laboratory when tested to the relevant Air 

Movement and Control Association (AMCA) standards with test and tolerances detailed in our current technical 

literature. You assume responsibility for your own system design and for the goods being sufficient for your 

purpose. We will accept neither responsibility nor liability for the performance or suitability of our goods in their 

final operating environment, whether or not details of the final operating environment have been made available 

to us. We are not responsible for any performance curves that have been altered. If we specifically agree in 

writing to guarantee performance, we are only responsible for proven performance deficiencies if, and to the 

extent, we have agreed in writing to a liquidated damage clause which shall not in any event result in our 

incurring liability in excess of the Contract Price. No performance guarantees are binding on us unless in 

writing and signed by an authorized employee. 

12. Inspection and tests: Our products are subjected to standard quality control inspection procedures before 

shipping. Standard inspections proceed without notice to you unless you request otherwise. If you require 

other tests, personal inspection, or that test/inspections be conducted in your presence, you will be charged 

extra. Any special inspections or tests shall be at our factory and will be made within seven (7) days after we 

give you notice that the equipment is ready for shipment. Failure to inspect the equipment at this time shall 

constitute a waiver of your right of inspection. Acceptance of goods occurs when (a) after inspection, you 

signify to us that the goods are conforming or (b) you fail to timely exercise your inspection right in accordance 

with this paragraph. 

13. Subcontracting: We reserve the right to sub-contract the fulfillment of any contract or part thereof. 

14. Governing Law: The parties acknowledge that the transaction that is the subject matter of this agreement 

bears a reasonable relation to the State of Ohio and that this agreement shall be governed by the laws of the 

State of Ohio, including the Uniform Commercial Code as enacted in that State. It is specifically understood 

and agreed that this agreement is for the sale of "goods" as that term is used in the Uniform Commercial Code. 

15. Severability: The invalidity or unenforceability of any one or more phrases, sentences, clauses, paragraphs, or 

sections contained in this agreement shall not affect the validity or enforceability of the remaining portions of 

this agreement.

16. Provisions requiring notice: Any notice provided pursuant to this agreement shall be in writing and shall be 

deemed given (i) if by hand delivery, telecopy or e-mail upon receipt thereof; (ii) if mailed to the most recent 

address, three (3) days after deposit in the U.S. mails with prepaid postage or certified mail return receipt 

requested. 

17. Assignment: You may not transfer your rights or delegate your performance under this agreement whether by 

assignment, subcontract, merger, reorganization, operation of law, or otherwise, without the prior written 

consent of an authorized employee. 

18. No Waiver: The waiver or failure of American Fan to exercise any right provided herein shall not be deemed a 

waiver of any further or other right hereunder. 

19. Limited Warranty: We warrant equipment of our manufacturer to be free from defects in design, materials and 

workmanship (exclusive of abrasion, corrosion or erosion) for twelve (12) months from the date of receipt of 

notice that the goods are ready for shipment or from the date of shipment to the original purchaser, whichever 

comes first. In order to claim the benefit of this warranty you must notify us in writing of the claimed defect 

within ten (10) days after discovering it and return the equipment or parts to our factory with transportation 

prepaid. In the event of on-site repair, our service technician will not be dispatched until we receive your written 

purchase order. This warranty in not applicable if any of the following conditions exist. 

(a) You have operated the equipment outside the scope of the specifications. 

(b) You have permitted other persons not approved or authorized by us to alter, adjust, replace, or repair 

the equipment or any part thereof. 

(c) You have not followed instruction or other directions given in the contract documents or our 

maintenance manual. 

(d) When breakage or other loss or damage is the result of any negligence, misuse or fault on the part of 

any operator or other person not under our supervision or control. 

(e) When breakage or other loss or damage is the result of fire, lightning, or other casualty or of factors 

external to the equipment. 

(f) 

(g) 

(h) 

(i) 

The defect is the result of designs or drawings made, furnished or specified by you. 

The defect is attributable to goods not of our manufacture but supplied by us as part of a contract, in 

which case our liability shall be the lesser of the supplier's liability to us or any liability we would have 

for warranty on our own equipment. 

You have not paid in full any invoices submitted to you, which are due for payment. 

In the event of fair wear and tear of the equipment. 

THIS WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED 

WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE. OUR SOLE AND 

EXCLUSIVE OBLIGATION UNDER THIS WARRANTY IS TO REPAIR OR REPLACE DEFECTIVE EQUIPMENT OR 

PARTS OR, AT OUR OPTION, TO PAY THE REASONABLE COST OF REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT. YOU AGREE 

THAT WE SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL OR SPECIAL DAMAGES FOR 

INJURY OR FOR COMMERCIAL LOSS, PROPERTY DAMAGE OR OTHERWISE. NOTWITHSTANDING THE 

ABOVE, OUR MAXIMUM LIABILITY SHALL NOT UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCES EXCEED THE CONTRACT 

PRICE.

Section 8 

MAINTENANCE

Monthly Maintenance Schedule/Checklist 

Date: _______________ 

Technician(s): ________________________ 

Initials 

Maintenance Activity 

Check Sparge Compressor oil level in the sight glass. 

Inspect Compressor inlet filter. 

Inspect compressor moisture separator. 

Inspect and clean SVE Blower inline particle filter. 

Replace when pressure drop reaches 10 to 15 inches water column. 

Inspect and clean SVE Blower dillution air filter. 

Replace when pressure drop reaches 10 to 15 inches water column. 

Inspect Flow Sensors. 

Inspect magnehelic differential pressure gauges. 

Disconnect pressure lines from compressor inlet magnehelic differential pressure 

gauge to atmosphere and re-zero. 

Comments: _______________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________________

Air Strippers-Monthly Maintenance Schedule/Checklist 

Date: _______________ 

Technician(s): ________________________ 

Initials 


Check operating amps of blower motor. 

Inspect air inlet screen, clean if required. 

Record magnehelic gauge reading for reference. 

Collect influent and effluent samples. 

If magnehelic gauge reading is high or effluent samples are hot, disassemble and clean 

trays or clean/replace packing as applicable. Also check mist eliminator for fouling 

Comments: _______________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________________

Oil/Water Separator-Monthly Maintenance Schedule/Checklist 

Date: _______________ 

Technician(s): ________________________ 

Initials 


Check Sludge level accumulation in the influent and separation chambers. 

Check trough and oil discharge opening for debris accumulation and blockage. 

Inspect and clean coalescing tubes as required. 

Check Hi Hi probe in product tank, clean as required. 

Check level in product tank. 

Comments: _______________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________________

Pumps-Monthly Maintenance Schedule/Checklist 

Date: _______________ 

Technician(s): ________________________ 

Initials 


Electric Submersible 

Check Operating amps of pump motor. 

Inspect probe. Clean if required 

Pneumatic Submersible 

Check effluent from pump for excessive air descharge. If so, adjust timer as required. 

Inspect tubing. 

Check particulate filter. 

Check membrane dryer for debris. 

Transfer Pumps 

Check motor coupling. Tighten if necessary. 

Check operating amps of transfer pump motor. 

Inspect shaft seal for leakage (if applicable). 

Comments: _______________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________________

Quarterly Maintenance Schedule/Checklist 

Date: _______________ 

Technician(s): ________________________ 

Initials 


Remove dirt and grease from sparge compresor exterior. 

Clean air injection flow meters for each sparge point. 

Remove dirt and grease from blower exterior. 

Inspect and clean compressor motor T.E.F.C. air ventilation slots to prevent clogging 

and starving te motor of cooling air. 

Comments: _______________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________________ 

Semi-Annual Maintenance Schedule/Checklist 

Date: _______________ 

Technician(s): ________________________ 

Initials 


Inspect fan blades for tightness. 

Clean SVE compartment vent guards, dampers, motors, and propellor to prevent 

decrease in airflow and overheating motor. Make sure all bolts are tight. 

Lubricate air sparge and soil vapor extraction compartment door hinges and hasp. 

Inspect the entire heat exchanger and motor/fan assembly for loosened connections, 

broken components, rust spots, corrosion, fin/coil clogging, or external leakage. 

Comments: _______________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________________ 

__________________________________________________________________________________________

Appendix C – WSP Engineering SOPs

Standard Operating Procedure – 3b 

Groundwater Sampling Using Low – Flow Submersible Pump 

Materials: 

Sampling notebook/Field log book 

Groundwater monitoring data log forms 

Well key 

Adjustable wrench or manhole wrench 

Photoionization detector (PID) 

Flashlight or mirror 

Electronic water level indicator 

pH, conductivity, temperature meter 

Oxidation potential meter (Eh) 

Dissolved oxygen meter 

Turbidity meter 

Sample bottles, sample tags or labels, indelible markers, and clear tape 

Appropriate power supply 

Redi-Flo 2 submersible pump (or equivalent) and Teflon® tubing 

Flow-through cell for pump or appropriate-sized beakers for meters 

Buckets or drum for water storage 

Pocket knife or scissors 

Level C or Level D Personal Protective Equipment 

Nitrile or latex gloves 

Note: This SOP is only to be used if the applicable state of federal agency approves of purging and 

sampling groundwater using a submersible pump. 

Procedure: 

1. Verify locations of wells, media to be sampled, and parameters to be analyzed as specified in the 

sampling plan. 

2. Prepare field log book with description of site, weather, participants, and other relevant 

observations (Refer to SOP-1) 

3. As the following steps are completed, fill-in both front and back of the groundwater monitoring 

data log (Attachment 1 in SOP-1). 

4. With the field personnel in Level D personal protective equipment, unless historical data, 

information, or suspicious warrants upgrading to Level C protective equipment, survey around 

the base of the well and wellhead with a PID; remove well cap, place probe of PID in wellhead, 

and record PID response in field book. Survey breathing zone to ensure that the level of personal 

protection is appropriate. Note observations on the groundwater monitoring data log. (See Site 

Health and Safety Plan for appropriate measuring techniques and upgrade requirements). 

5. Inspect water surface in the well; use flashlight if necessary. Note any observable floating 

product and record observations in the field book.

6. Measure and record the extent of the top of the well riser above the ground. If well is a flush 

mount, measure and record the top of the well riser below the ground. Measure the casing (riser) 

inside diameter (CID) and record in inches. From the top of the riser, measure the depth (in feet) 

to water (DTW) with an electronic water level indicator and record on the groundwater 

monitoring data log. Static water level measurements must be recorded from the surveyor’s mark 

at the top of the riser, if present. If no mark is present, mark a location with a metal file or 

indelible marker on the north side of the riser for future reference. Measure and record the total 

depth (TD, in feet) to the bottom of the well. 

7. Check for light non-aqueous phase liquids (LNAPLs) and dense non-aqueous phase liquids 

(DNAPLs). Measure thickness with a oil/water interface probe in accordance with the RCRA 

Groundwater Monitoring Technical Enforcement Guidance Document (November 1992). 

8. Monitoring wells should be purged/sampled by starting with the upgradient (or clean wells) and 

proceeding downgradient (in the order from least to most contaminated wells) for the remaining 

monitoring wells. 

9. If LNAPL was observed, carefully lower a bailer attached to an appropriate length of new nylon 

rope into the well and allow the bottom to sink 1 foot below the water surface to capture LNAPL 

only. Remove bailer and dispose of LNAPL appropriately. Record the quantity of LNAPL 

removed in the field book. 

10. Place plastic sheeting around the wellhead. Carefully lower the pump into the well and place the 

pump intake in the center of the saturated screen interval, near the top of the well screen if the 

screen is submerged. 

11. Begin purging the well at 0.2 to 0.5 L/min (0.05 to 0.13 gal/min). The water level should 

optimally be monitored continuously, but at a minimum, every 3 to 5 minutes during purging. 

Ideally, a steady flow rate should be maintained that results in a stabilized water level (less than 

0.3 feet of variation). Pumping rates should, if needed, be reduced to the minimum capabilities of 

the pump to ensure stabilization of the water level. However, care should be taken to maintain 

pump suction and to avoid entrainment of air in the tubing. Record each adjustment made to the 

pumping rate ad the water level measured immediately after each adjustment. 

12. If the recharge rate of the well is very low, care should be taken to avoid loss of pressure in the 

tubing line, cascading through the sand pack, or pumping the well dry. In these cases, purging 

should be interrupted before the water in the well reaches a level below the top of the pump. 

Sampling should commence as soon as the volume in the well has recovered sufficiently to permit 

collection of samples. 

13. During purging of the well, monitor the following geochemical parameters every 3 to 5 minutes: 

turbidity, dissolved oxygen, redox potential (Eh), temperature, specific conductance, and pH. 

In-line analyzers and continuous readout displays are highly recommended. The well is 

considered stabilized and ready for sample collection once turbidity, redox potential, and 

dissolved oxygen in in-line or downhole analyses of groundwater have stabilized within 

approximately 10% over at least two measurements – for example, over two successive 

measurements made three minutes apart. Turbidity should be less than 50 NTUs (decrease 

pumping rate to lower turbidity measurements). Dissolved oxygen and Eh must be obtained in a 

manner in which the sample is not exposed to air prior to the measurement. Other parameters 

may be taken in a clean container, such as a glass beaker.

14. If a well is purged to dryness before removing three well volumes, allow well to recharge and 

proceed to collect sample. If full recovery exceeds 2 hours, the well should be sampled as soon 

as sufficient volume is available or within a maximum of 3 hours from purging dry. 

15. Collect groundwater samples after purging is completed. Collect the samples using the sampling 

pump operated at a maximum rate of 0.25 L/min (0.07 gal/min)(or to the rate of the purging 

activities) to avoid agitating the water. Sample first for VOCs, taking care to remove all air 

bubbles from the vial and minimize agitation. Collect remaining organic samples then inorganic 

samples. 

The recommended order of sample collection is as follows: 

In-field measurements (e.g., temperature, pH, Eh, specific conductance, dissolved 

oxygen, turbidity) 

Volatile organic compounds (VOCs) 

Purgeable organic carbon (POC) 

Purgeable organic halogens (POX) 

Total organic halogens (TOX) 

Total organic carbon (TOC) 

Extractable organics 

Pesticides and herbicides 

Total metals 

Dissolved metals 

Phenols 

Cyanide 

Sulfate and chloride 

Nitrate and ammonia 

Radionuclides 

16. Affix a sample tag or label to each sample container and complete all required information 

(sample no., date, time, sampler’s initials, analysis, preservatives). Place clear tape over the tag 

or label. Record sample designation, date, time, and the sampler’s initials on the sample tracking 

form and in the field book. Complete chain-of-custody forms with appropriate sampling 

information. 

17. Remove the pump and tubing from the well. Inspect the well for soundness of protective casing 

and surface ground seal. Record water color, suspended particulates, discoloration of casing, any 

unusual occurrences during sampling, and any pertinent weather details on the groundwater 

monitoring data log. 

18. Thoroughly decontaminate all equipment used before proceeding to the next well. See SOP No. 

16 for details on decontamination procedures. Discard used towels, tubing, gloves, etc., in a 

plastic bag. Refer to the Investigation Derived Waste Management Plan for the site for 

appropriate storage and disposal methods of these materials.

Standard Operating Procedure – 21 

Field Quality Assurance/Quality Control Samples 

Materials: 

Procedure: 

Field logbook 

Personal protective equipment (PPE) 

Sample containers 

Sample labels 

Clear tape 

Laboratory analyte free water 

Clean or dedicated sampling equipment 

1. Use appropriate PPE as specified in the site-specific health and safety plan. 

2. Select the appropriate glassware for the field Quality Assurance/Quality Control (QA/QC) 

samples. Refer to the WSP Engineering Standard Operating Procedure for Sample Container, 

Preservatives, and Holding Times to determine the appropriate bottles to use. 

3. Field QA/QC samples include the following: 

trip blanks 

duplicate samples 

equipment blanks 

4. Trip blanks should be provided by the analytical laboratory for all projects where samples are 

being collected for analysis of volatile organic compounds (VOCs). Trip blanks should 

accompany the sample bottles from the analytical laboratory to the site, accompany the sample 

containers at all times during the sampling event, and return to the laboratory with the sample 

containers. One trip blank should be submitted to the analytical laboratory with each shipment 

containing samples for VOC analysis. The trip blank should be analyzed only for VOCs. 

5. One duplicate sample should be collected for every 20 samples of each matrix (e.g., soil and 

groundwater) collected during each sampling event. Duplicate samples of soil and other solid 

matrices should be collected by dividing the sample material in half and alternately filling the two 

sample bottle sets. Duplicate samples of groundwater and other aqueous matrices should be 

collected by alternately filling the two sample bottle sets from the same sampling vessel (e.g., 

bailer). The appropriate SOP should be followed for the collection of each sample type (soil, 

groundwater, sediment, sludge). Duplicate samples should be analyzed for all the analytes that 

are being analyzed for during the sampling event. 

6. One equipment blank should be collected in the field at a rate of one per type of equipment per 

decontamination event not to exceed one per day. If dedicated sampling equipment is used, the 

equipment blanks should be prepared in the field before sampling begins. If field 

decontamination of sampling equipment is required, the equipment blanks should be prepared 

after the equipment has been used and field-decontaminated at least once. Equipment blanks 

should be prepared by filling or rinsing the precleaned equipment with analyte-free water and

collecting the rinsate in the appropriate sample containers. The samples should be labeled, 

preserved, and filtered (if required) in the same manner as the environmental samples. 

Equipment blanks should be analyzed for all the analytes for which the environmental samples 

are being analyzed. Decontamination of the equipment following equipment blank procurement 

is not required. 

7. All QA/QC samples should be submitted to the analytical laboratory with unique sample 

numbers. Therefore, the QA/QC samples should be labeled as separate environmental samples 

following the same numbering scheme used during that particular sampling event. However, the 

QA/QC samples should be clearly identified on WSP Engineering’s copy of the chain-of-custody 

form and in the field logbook.

operation, maintenance and monitoring plan ... - Ithaca-SHIP.org!

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

Delete template?

Save as template?